JP2024046680A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To appropriately perform penalty processing. [Solution] It is possible to control to an advantageous state where notification of an advantageous stop operation mode can be executed, and it is possible to execute specific processing that can update parameters related to the advantageous state. Also, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is possible to execute penalty processing that makes the transition to an advantageous state less favorable than when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode different from the specific mode. And, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is configured to be able to invalidate at least some of the parameter updates related to the advantageous state in the current unit game as penalty processing. [Selected diagram] Fig. 506

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a penalty process that does not generate an auxiliary game (AT) when a game is played using irregular button presses (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-117077

There is room for further improvement when it comes to transitioning to such advantageous states for players.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can achieve appropriate state transitions.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
A variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role;
a stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means capable of deriving a stop display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means based on the winning role determined by the role determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
a winning means for generating a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
a game value granting means capable of granting a game value in accordance with a winning;
A decision means capable of making a decision regarding a transition of a state related to a game,
an expected value of a game value to be awarded when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner is greater than an expected value of a game value to be awarded when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner,
As the game-related states, a first state, a second state that is more advantageous than the first state, and a third state that is less advantageous than the first state are provided;
The determining means is
a first decision means capable of making a first decision to permit the transition to the second state;
and second decision means capable of making a second decision to terminate the first state and transition to the third state,
a security counter capable of updating a value in the first state;
In the first state, the second decision is not made before the value of the guarantee counter becomes a specific value, and a specific situation is created in which a transition from the first state to the third state is possible in response to the value of the guarantee counter becoming the specific value,
In a unit game in the specific situation in the first state, when the first decision is made and a stop operation is performed in the predetermined manner, a transition to the second state is possible after the end of the first state based on the first decision, and when a stop operation is performed in the specific manner, a transition to the third state is possible after the end of the first state based on the second decision,
In the first state, before the value of the security counter becomes the specific value, the value of the security counter is updated so as to approach the specific value even if the stop operation is performed in the predetermined manner or the stop operation is performed in the specific manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to achieve appropriate state transitions.

It is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine related to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a pattern code storage area of a first gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing medal reception/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing periodic interrupt processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. A front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are open. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mirror mechanism. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a projector device and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the attached state of the mirror mechanism. FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a projector device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an upper base and a lower base for fixing the projector device. A cross-sectional view of the upper base and the lower base taken along line XXVI-XXVI in Figure 48. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining a method for positioning the upper pedestal. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining a method for adjusting the attitude of the lower base. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which assembled the upper side pedestal and the lower side pedestal. FIG. 55 is a view of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. 55 is a view of the upper base and the lower base shown in FIG. 54 as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a case housing internal components of a projector mechanism. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. 61 is an exploded cross-sectional view of the projector cover taken along the line LL of FIG. 60 and an exploded perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. 13 is a view of the projector cover from an obliquely upward direction with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 taken along the arrow NN, with the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover removed. This is a perspective view showing the state in which a fan for use near the opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in Figure 65 and a case is placed. 67 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66. 68 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a fan for use near the opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67. 71 is a right side view showing the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70 with the fan for use near the opening removed. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a duct cover and a fan for the vicinity of an opening. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening, viewed from the rear and below. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for use near the opening, as viewed from the front and below. FIG. It is a perspective view seen from the left with a blind and a duct cover attached. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the projector cover, the blinds, and the duct cover. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and duct cover. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of an intake fan and an exhaust fan. 13A-13C are diagrams illustrating air flow paths that may be formed inside the projector cover. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view showing the decorative unit and frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a display unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. 89 is a perspective view showing the display unit shown in FIG. 88 with the projector and mirror disassembled. 88 is a perspective view showing light being projected from the projector in a state where the projector and mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen, (b) is a diagram showing how light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen, and (c) is a diagram showing how light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a transparent plate, a screen sheet, a lower pressing member, an upper pressing member, and a lower frame seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member viewed from the front while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. 4 is a perspective view of the upper presser member and the upper frame as viewed from below. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED board, and a light guide member viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, and a light guide member viewed from the front. 2 is a front perspective view showing cross sections of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED board, and a light-guiding member. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member viewed from the side. It is a right side view of the upper door mechanism, a cabinet, a hook part, and the cross section of a front side protrusion member. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from below. 2 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism. FIG. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism seen from the rear. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front with the upper door mechanism and lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 3 is a side perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector device. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as seen from the side. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the rear wall of the cabinet. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. 126 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of the cabinet. 13 is a partially enlarged view of the area around the operation window in the gaming machine with the closing lid attached to the rear wall. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. This is an oblique view from the front showing the state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit have been removed from the upper door mechanism. This is an oblique view from the rear showing the state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit have been removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the center screen. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side uneven portion of the central screen. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136 with the side decoration section removed. This is an oblique view of the right side decorative part from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the rear. A cross-sectional view of the right side decorative part. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the center screen and the right side decoration part. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. It is a perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is an exploded perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a side LED and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a light guide and a side light lens. It is a perspective view of a side light lens seen from the rear. It is a sectional view of a side light lens. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a sidelight lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a rear transparent plate, a light guide, and a side light lens. FIG. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part and a side light lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plates. 155 is a perspective view showing the state in which the side light-shielding plate has been removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. 158 is a perspective view showing the side LED board cover removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the front. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left side portion of the shielding wall member. FIG. It is a perspective view of a shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a state where light is projected from a projector in the present embodiment, as viewed from above, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a state where light is projected from a projector in another embodiment, as viewed from above. FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a shielding wall member and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a shielding wall member seen from the rear. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. This is an oblique view showing the state where the upper front and rear frames and duct seals have been removed from the state shown in Figure 168. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the rear and below. FIG. 173 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from slightly below. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. 1 is a schematic diagram of the planar portion of the central screen and the lower wall of the top frame base. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the center screen as seen from the front and below. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the center screen seen from behind and below. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the rear and above. 1 is a perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the rear and below. FIG. FIG. 186 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185 . FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. It is a sectional view of a center screen and a rear transparent plate. 1A is a schematic diagram showing how light projected from a projector enters a rear light-transmitting plate in the present embodiment, as viewed from above, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing how light projected from a projector enters a rear light-transmitting plate in another embodiment, as viewed from above. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and the rear light-transmitting plate. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the rear light-transmitting plate as seen from the rear. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the center screen and the rear light-transmitting plate as viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the under frame is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the top side panel is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a top side panel and a speaker grill removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201 . 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203. FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a top frame base, a top center LED board, and a center LED board base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top reflector seen from the front. FIG. It is a front view of a top reflector and a top center LED board. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector, a top center LED board, and a top frame base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the front and right side. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a center LED, a top reflector, and a left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a center LED, a top reflector, and a left arrow eye reflector. A cross-sectional view of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a top frame base and a top lens. 220 is a perspective view showing the top lens removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from the rear and above. A perspective view of a top center LED board, a top reflector, a left arrow eye reflector, a right arrow eye reflector, and a top lens. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED board, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED board, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. A partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens. Left arrow: Cross section of eye reflector and top lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the front. FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged front view of the top center panel. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top center panel as seen from the rear and above. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and the top lens. FIG. 2 is a front view of the top center panel and the top lens. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the top frame base and the top center panel as seen from slightly above. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base, viewed from slightly above. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top center panel as seen from behind and slightly below. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly above. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top lens as viewed from below. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a top lens. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a top center LED board, a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. A figure showing a specific example of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1". It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2." A figure showing a specific example of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3". It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4." A figure showing a specific example of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5". It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6." It is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a simulated game. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during pseudo-play performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a post-pseudo game reel presentation process performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play after reel performance performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed in a main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a change in reel control state over time when a pseudo game is being played. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. 13 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a process for starting a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation acceptance process performed in a main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing a swing control process performed in a main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game ending process performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of bonus winning performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing lock performance determination processing at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing lock performance execution processing at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion effect execution processing performed in the sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion performance execution process for type A performed in a sub-control circuit. A flowchart showing the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B performed in the sub-control circuit. A flowchart showing the setting suggestion performance execution processing for type C performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. 1A is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a main display device, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen. FIG. 13 shows a character customization screen for customizing a character. It is a figure showing an example of a game history screen. It is a diagram showing a gaming system. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a middle stop. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lock during intermediate stop. 1A is a diagram showing a transition of game states according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 1B is a table summarizing transition conditions of game states according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a symbol code table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (two-stakes game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (three-coin game). (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between 3BB flags (two-stakes game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 3BB flag state (3-coin game). 1A is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 2BB flag interval state (2-coin game), FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 2BB flag interval state (3-coin game), and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a BB game state. It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the bonus non-winning state and the 2BB flag state (3-card game). It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the 3BB flag state (3-coin game). (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and sub-flag numbers. (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between subflag numbers and subflag names. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in non-favorable zones and favorable zones in one embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play in a non-advantageous zone. It is a diagram showing an initial bonus winning rate lottery table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a flag set lottery table for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period. A figure showing a Chance B continuation rate lottery table. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a character determination lottery table. It is a diagram showing a character high accuracy game number lottery table. A flowchart showing various lottery processes for advantageous zones (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing bonus lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table. 1A is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and payout flag group (normal) numbers for each character. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the correspondence between payout flag group (normal) numbers and payout flag groups (normal). 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus promotion lottery process performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a bonus promotion lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows chance A lottery processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the chance A lottery table by setting. It is a figure showing a chance A lottery table. 12 is a flowchart showing a precursor game number lottery process performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the number lottery table of portent games. 3 is a flowchart showing precursor game number counter management processing performed in the main control circuit. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play in the advantageous zone (Chance A mode). A figure showing a reward lottery table during chance A. A figure showing a reward lottery table during chance A. 1A is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and payout flag group (chance A) numbers for each character. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the correspondence between payout flag group (chance A) numbers and payout flag groups (chance A). It is a figure which shows the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reward lottery non-winning during chance A performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a forced release lottery table during Chance A. It is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table when the specified chance A point is reached. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games during Chance A. It is a diagram showing an example of symbols that are stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. A figure showing a pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pseudo-game stop position determination table. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play for the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode). A figure showing the pseudo bonus A chance B & AT lottery table. A figure showing a lottery table for increasing the continuation rate of chance B at the end of pseudo bonus A. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a pseudo bonus B reward lottery table. A figure showing a lottery table for increasing the continuation rate of chance B for addition during pseudo bonus B. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition route to Chance B mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a chance B transition process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for converting remaining Chance A points when Chance B is entered. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B basic mode) performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the first game of the first set during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the first game during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 13 shows a Chance B one shot win lottery table. A figure showing a Chance B continuation lottery table. A figure showing the lottery table for transition to heaven after the AT confirmed state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process dedicated to the first game during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a damage amount lottery table at the start of a set. It is a figure showing a pursuit number determination lottery table. 3 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the rewritten lottery table during chance B. It is a flowchart which shows the process after the 2nd game in chance B (basic) performed in a main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a final game process during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the final game process when Chance B is not continued, which is performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing the time-backward lottery table at the end of Chance B. 12 is a flowchart showing processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for transferring Chance B points when Chance B ends. It is a flowchart which shows the chance B one-shot win process performed in a main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of executing a lock effect when Chance B wins in one shot, which is performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for Bell Navi during Chance B performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing a pursuit number UP lottery table. A diagram showing the configuration of a sub-control unit etc. provided in an amusement machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining how each process is started when the power is turned on. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between each process and shared memory. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a data transmission/reception method in a shared memory. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow regarding a sound process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of data in a shared memory related to the processing of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a sound thread of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of an interprocess communication thread of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of a sound process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic process flow related to a lamp process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of data in a shared memory related to processing of a lamp process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a lamp thread in a lamp process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of an inter-process communication thread of a lamp process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process flow of a periodic thread of a lamp process. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow relating to a graphic process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of data in a shared memory related to processing of a graphics process. 11 is a flowchart showing a processing flow of a graphics thread of a graphics process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a file cache thread of a graphics process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of an interprocess communication thread of a graphic process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a regular periodic thread of a graphic process. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a feature thread of a graphics process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow relating to a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a master thread of a master process. 13 is a flowchart showing a processing flow of an inter-process communication thread of a master process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process flow of a fixed-period thread of a master process. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a main board thread of a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a peripheral device thread of a master process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing time-series processing of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphic process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a time series of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphics process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an overview of blending processing in a graphic process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of file decompression processing in a graphics thread. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in the sound process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in the sound process. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining an example of preferential control (normal) of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the present embodiment. A figure for explaining an example of preferential control (during ST) of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the example of control of the expectation production of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the example of control of the expectation production of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the example of control of the expectation production of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant example) according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the modification 3 (transmission information control example (part 1)) of the push order bell of the 1st gaming machine (modification) based on this embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the modification 3 (transmission information control example (part 2)) of the push order bell of the 1st gaming machine (modification) based on this embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing a transition of a game state according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 1B is a table summarizing transition conditions of the game state according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a symbol code table. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. A figure showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for BB gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, a display combination, etc. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in non-favorable zones and favorable zones in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing transition transition of the ball release state concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a table summarizing the conditions for transition of the ball output state in one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing numerical values displayed on an instruction monitor in pseudo BIG and pseudo REG. (b) is a diagram showing contents corresponding to numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play in a non-advantageous zone. 1A is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not a game is to be started at a favorable zone; 13 is a flowchart showing the process performed in the main control circuit at the start of a game to prepare for consecutive wins. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1); and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2). It is a diagram showing a lottery table for consecutive game challenge transition. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive-game challenge transition time determination lottery table; FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive-game preparation fall lottery table; 13 is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a normal stage game performed in the main control circuit. 3 is a flowchart showing normal stage start processing performed in the main control circuit. 1A is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. It is a figure showing a point mode lottery table. 3 is a flowchart showing normal stage dedicated processing performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a freeze lottery table during the normal stage. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows normal ball output state common processing performed in a main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal prescribed number of plays counter update process performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a normal prescribed number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table. It is a diagram showing a normal prescribed number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table. A diagram showing a ceiling fake preparation lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a ceiling-related process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached. It is a figure which shows the lottery table by winning type when reaching a ceiling. 3 is a flowchart showing point-related processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing a point acquisition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table when a point is reached. It is a flowchart showing the number of precursor games lottery process performed in the main control circuit when the flag is won during the normal stage. 13 is a flowchart showing a premonition play number lottery process performed in the main control circuit when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage. It is a flowchart showing the number of precursor games lottery process performed in the main control circuit when the chance stage wins during the normal stage. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the point is reached). (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached). (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (basic). (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during a normal stage (when a point is reached). (e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during a normal stage (basic). (f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake is won during a normal stage. 13 is a flowchart showing a premonition game number counter management process for the normal stage performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a probability mode-related process performed in the main control circuit. (a) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). (b) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). (c) is a diagram showing a high certainty 2 transition lottery table (3). (d) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 fall lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a promotion chance pre-processing performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a promotion chance transition lottery table. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a chance stage game performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a chance stage guaranteed game number lottery table at the start of the chance stage. A figure showing the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the number of games during the chance stage. It is a flowchart showing the number of precursor games lottery process at the time of flag winning during the chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of flag winning during the chance stage. 13 is a flowchart showing a chance stage counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a promotion chance game performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. FIG. 13 shows a promotion chance mode lottery table. It is a diagram showing a lottery table during promotion chances. It is a diagram showing the next pseudo game lottery table. A figure showing a pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played. It is a diagram showing a pseudo game lottery table this time. FIG. 481 is a diagram showing the contents of the pseudo game. It is a diagram showing the contents of a pseudo game. It is a diagram showing the flow of a game in a promotion chance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when pseudo BIG is won in the 1st game of a promotion chance. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when all pseudo BIG prizes are not won in the first to fourth promotion chance games. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a pseudo BIG game performed in the main control circuit. 3 is a flowchart showing pseudo BIG start processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a consecutive winning challenge lottery table at the start of pseudo BIG. It is a figure which shows the 1G continuous lottery table in pseudo BIG. 3 is a flowchart showing pseudo BIG counter management processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process (1) at the time of pseudo BIG termination performed in a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a lottery table when the number of successful replies is insufficient. 13 is a flowchart showing pseudo BIG end process (2) performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for consecutive winnings challenge at the end of the final second pseudo BIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game start processing for a pseudo REG performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a consecutive win challenge lottery table at the start of a pseudo REG. It is a figure showing a 1G continuous lottery table in pseudo REG. 3 is a flowchart showing pseudo REG counter management processing performed in the main control circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing carried out in the main control circuit at the start of a consecutive challenge game. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-bonus lottery table at the start of a consecutive game challenge. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of plays at the start of a consecutive challenge. A diagram showing a lottery table during a consecutive win challenge. It is a figure which shows the normal transition lottery table at the end of a consecutive game challenge. 13 is a flowchart showing a consecutive game challenge counter management process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit. 3 is a flowchart showing AT-related processing when the lever is on, which is performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows AT related processing at the time of a full stop performed in a main control circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Structure of a Pachislot Machine]
First, the structure of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the slot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the slot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following explanation of the external structure may include a part of the internal structure, and the explanation of the internal structure may include a part of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a housing 2 in the shape of a rectangular box. The housing 2 also includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and an upper door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that in FIGS. 1 and 2, illustration of the rear wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is omitted. Furthermore, two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

Note that the plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in a game parlor, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, metal or resin materials can be used. Alternatively, it can be formed integrally with the upper wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component may be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space across the intermediate support plate G1, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and contains the main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and contains the reel unit RU, which will be described later, the main control board 71, and the like.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily need to be configured to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device etc. is appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper space and the lower space are not partitioned. Moreover, the cabinet G can be simply called a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as a "body frame", It can also be referred to as a "support body", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are each attached to the cabinet G so as to be freely opened and closed, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that it is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable by the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided in the center thereof, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows visual confirmation of an effect image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes a main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the back side of the effect display window UD1. In addition, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays effects via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided approximately at the center of the upper part thereof, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G on the back side of the main display window 4. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and multiple (e.g., 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, configured as a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (e.g., three) of the patterns on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R can be seen. Additionally, light sources (reel lamps, which are included in the lamps and LEDs described below) are provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at positions where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and at least while each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is spinning, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-performance display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-performance display unit 22 displays performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 described below. The sub-performance display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display, but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) by the player.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in the substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, and settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and the settlement button 9 provided approximately in the center. It has a presentation button 10a and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b are used to perform game operations (bet operations) by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the Pachislot machine 1. This is the operation section that accepts the commands (which can also be referred to as "", etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3 medals) and the number of medals credited is greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals will be bet. Ru. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the player may be able to accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which medals inserted or paid out are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that accepts the player's operation (performance operation) for performance.

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The accepted medal is detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not it is an appropriate medal. If one of the accepted medals is not proper, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Furthermore, if the accepted one medal is a proper one and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current bet number is the maximum bet number and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned base. The information display device 14 is configured to include multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information related to the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

The lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located on the left side below the base, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (start operation) by the player to start a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by the player to stop the respective rotations.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, an administrator of the game parlor (for example, a clerk of the game parlor, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD becomes open. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have not only the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism but also the function of a reset switch. For example, if the manager of the game parlor inserts a door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be It is also possible to provide separate mechanisms so that opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a, 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower back panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name and characters representing a motif are drawn, and a light source (lower back lamp included in the lamps and LEDs described below) for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachinko slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described below and those returned from a selector 31 described below through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are on the rear side of each, and transmit sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (the symbol for speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) attached to the inside of the cabinet G toward the front side of the pachinko slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the interior of the cabinet G being divided into an upper space and a lower space, but as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, they can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. They can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or can be referred to as "opening and closing members," "door members," or "door members" because they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G.

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating when the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (when a stop operation is performed by the player), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are drive-controlled for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. This stops each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 are variable display units (means) that can variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols in multiple rows, or variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols. ) configuring a plurality of possible variable display units (means). Note that the variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)", a "variable display section (means)", etc. Further, the symbols can be referred to as "pictures", "patterns", etc., and can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense, since any information that can be visually identified by the player is sufficient.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured such that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols for each reel are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (3 symbols in total). (The design is displayed in this manner). Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "symbol display area" or a "window section."

In addition, a winning line is defined in the main display window 4. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stopping operation. In this sense, the winning line can also be called a "winning line" or a "determination line". The winning line is also configured as a line connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, a maximum of 27 winning lines can be defined. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as winning lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines that are not winning lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line," and the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the top area of the reel 3C, and the top area of the reel 3R is the "center line." The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line that connects the upper area is called a "cross-up line," and the line that connects the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called a "cross-down line." Since the line connects each region in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as the effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each area of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the active line to be activated, the medals required for the current game (the number of medals available for starting the game) must be bet before the player starts the operation. The number of active lines displayed may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines mentioned above are defined as the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", then in the case of the former, the number of bets is either 1 to 3. ``Centerline'', ``Topline'', and ``Bottomline'' are enabled even if On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" will be activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" will be activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (maximum bet number), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are enabled.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, and thus displays symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of effective lines that can be defined can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable display section displays the symbols in a variable manner by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described later, or it may be configured using other display devices (for example, organic EL or 7-segment LED). . Alternatively, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (eg, a belt, etc.) may be used. Further, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game, controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. In addition, a variable display unit may be provided as a sub-display unit related to the performance not directly related to the game, controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220. In other words, not only the main display unit but also the sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays the symbols in response to the player's start operation (or the establishment of other start conditions) and stops the symbols in response to the player's stop operation (or the establishment of other stop conditions). In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether the variable display unit is directly related to the game or not, an identification display with characters such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, so that the variable display unit can be identified as the main display unit. Such identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and a selector 31 described below have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and such an insertion operation can be rephrased as a betting operation, for example. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required configuration.

In this embodiment, the use of medals as gaming media is described as an example of gaming value that is used in games or awarded according to game results, but the gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Furthermore, gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "game value", etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operating sections as operating sections that can be operated by a player. Note that each operation section shown below is just an example, and the configuration may include a different operation section, or the configuration may not include operation sections that are not necessarily essential. .

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b that accept a bet operation by a player to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Further, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1 bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the start lever 7 that accepts a player's start operation to start the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) that can detect the player's start operation. Note that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's starting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and accept the player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. In addition, such a stop operation is detected by a stop switch 8S described below. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons only need to be capable of detecting the player's stop operation, and their shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a settlement operation (return operation) by the player to return (settle) credited medals. In addition, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S described below. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect the settlement operation of the player. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes performance buttons 10a and 10b that accept performance operations from the player. Note that such presentation operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective presentation buttons. Therefore, the performance buttons 10a, 10b and the detection switch constitute a performance operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the performance operation of the player. Note that the presentation button only needs to be able to detect the player's presentation operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is also possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more presentation buttons are provided.

The main uses of the presentation buttons include changing the presentation mode when executing a specific presentation (for example, operation-linked presentation described below), and performing selection/decision operations in the user menu described below. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so that buttons for effects are provided depending on the purpose. For example, it is assumed that the presentation buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel may be used for the latter purpose. Note that for use in the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations as another presentation button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a winning prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards the medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and can therefore be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal saucer]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) that can store the awarded game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a waist panel 13 that includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. Note that the waist panel 13 basically shows the type of pachislot machine 1 in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, but for example, the waist panel 13 itself can be By configuring it with an image display device or the like, it can be configured as one of the performance execution means that can execute the performance.

[1-1-9. Information display section]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information about the game by its lighting state. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information about the game. .

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp indicates that medals can be inserted by lighting up. The start lamp lights up to indicate that the game can be started in response to the operation of the start lever 7. When lit, the replay lamp indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals depending on the lighting mode. The number of payout lamps display the number of medals (number of payouts) that have been paid out according to game results depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (status display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the player is notified of the information on the stop operation (for example, in an AT state), thereby providing information on the stop operation. Display. Note that "an aspect that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, the press order (in this embodiment, this may be referred to as "batting order"), "1st (the first stop operation When notifying the press order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", display the numerical value "1" on the instruction monitor. The number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)" is notified, the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. It is about. Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information on the stop operation may be displayed using either a credit lamp or a payout number lamp.

In this way, in this embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to a player, not only the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later, but also the instruction monitor as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, not only notifies the information on the stop operation, but also notifies the information on the main side notification means in a manner different from that of the sub-side notification means. In other words, the main side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main performance display unit 21 only needs to directly notify the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, described below, the section lamp lights up at any timing before play in the advantageous section begins, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, the lamp goes out at any timing before play in the non-advantageous section begins. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) described below in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section for the first time, the lamp may light up at any timing before play in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a performance section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that a limit process, which will be described later, has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the light is turned on to notify the player that the advantageous state (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, when the limit process is about to be executed, the light blinks to indicate that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the limit process. In addition, other information related to the limit process can be reported as appropriate by providing other triggers for turning on, blinking, or turning off the light.

[1-1-10. Production display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 are capable of displaying effect images. The display unit (means) is also configured as one of the presentation execution means capable of presenting a presentation to the player from a visual perspective.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through a display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that has an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display and a screen device C that makes an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In this embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful performance display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to perform a performance from a visual perspective for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL, or a display device such as a 7-segment LED, or it can be configured as a variable display device such as a sub reel or a dot display device. In addition, from such a perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be appropriately changed. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is a game that is primarily entertaining based on the results of the winning combination, for example, it can be configured not to have a main performance display unit 21 (the same goes for the sub performance display unit 22).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured to include a sub display device 220. Furthermore, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Note that, like the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or a display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main performance display section 21 is configured with a large screen, it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notification, winning notification, continuous performance, etc., and the sub performance display section 22 is composed of a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately depending on the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not closely related to the current game, such as game history etc. It is possible. In addition, although the present embodiment is configured to provide two effect display sections, the main effect display section 21 and the sub effect display section 22, it is also possible to configure the structure without providing either of these sections. It is also possible to configure so that only one of them is provided. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more effect display sections are provided.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can perform effects by their light-emitting modes (including not only lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also the brightness and light-emitting color when configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means is configured as one of the effect execution means that can perform effects from a visual perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc., of the light-emitting means can be appropriately changed.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include a function to inform the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, so when this function is exercised, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the performance content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means that can produce effects by outputting audio. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from an auditory viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with production devices other than the various production devices (production execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to perform a performance by providing a performance device such as a movable performance device such as a so-called role model, a vibration performance device that performs a performance using vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by jetting air. In other words, a performance device that can execute a performance that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allows the player to recognize that the performance is being performed). If so, you can use any of them. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" means, unless otherwise specified, using any one or more of the above-mentioned various performance devices (direction execution means) to perform a performance. This indicates that it may be executed.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a passage through which medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 may be, for example, a medal sensor (described later). 31S and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate medals. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate medals and the medals are in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to guide the medals to the hopper device 32 side described below. In this case, the bet number or credit number is incremented by 1. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate medals and the medals are not in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the detection of medals by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is proper or not. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is proper, and discharges it to the outside if it is not proper. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage provided on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33 (described below). If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state will be cleared if medals are refilled and a reset operation is performed.

The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and the central shaft is rotated in response to a drive signal to guide medals that fit into the cutouts one by one to the discharge unit. The medals stored in the bucket unit are stirred up as the disk unit rotates. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when dispensing one medal, the disc part starts rotating, and then stops rotating in response to the count sensor counting the dispensing of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game media payout unit (means) that can pay out game media. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is part of a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 includes, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage that is provided near the storage section and detects the capacity of medals stored in the storage section. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released if the medals stored in the storage section are reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game media storage section (means) that can store surplus game media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 includes, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. Note that the power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, similar to household electrical appliances. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) that can supply necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 described below are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described below), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The slot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards necessary for various controls. Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the slot machine 1 may include boards different from these boards, and may not include boards that are not essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the back side of the reel unit RU within the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to games, and is located inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its status can be visually recognized. is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

Note that there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and it is basically configured by DIP mounting various electronic components, but some or all of the various electronic components may be SMT mounted (surface mounting). It may also be configured by implementing (implementation). Further, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. Furthermore, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. Further, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached within the cabinet G to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. Note that the sub-control board case can be constructed as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or it can be constructed of another material that is opaque (or nearly opaque). It can also be configured as a case using . The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (symbol omitted in FIG. 2) is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is connected to various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main controller. This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the main relay board 73 can be controlled as the main control board unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided and is placed on the board 71. Further, from this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to configure the sub-relay board 74 without providing the sub-relay board 74, by giving all the functions of the sub-control board 72, unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower space), and receives signals such as a medal input signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Note that the output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be set as appropriate, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the bonus state or AT state) can be set externally according to the playability. It makes it possible to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, these devices can be used to check not only the status of medal insertion and payout and the occurrence of errors in the pachislot machine 1. , it is possible to recognize such internal state transitions.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (Please note that the pachi-slot machine 1 as a release product for sale is not equipped with these relay boards, so the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 301 for the test machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, test signals for controlling the main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and are also determined by the main control board 71. Test signals and the like related to the pressed order navigation are outputted via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of the pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74, and the sub relay board 74 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected, respectively. The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other via the main relay board 73 and the sub-control board 74 so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. connected.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game. The main control circuit 100 is composed of, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), etc. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for sending various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, etc. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, all game actions are controlled.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as an effect control section that controls effects. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 includes various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, and various presentation data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc.). Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, etc. provided. Note that the random number value for the performance may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100. Alternatively, a sub-ROM may be included in the sub-control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs etc. may be stored in the sub-ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various performance data, and the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor (for example, also referred to as "VDP") dedicated to images, such as a GPU, which allows images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220. It may be configured to generate (edit).

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, the key switch 52 for setting, the reset switch 53, the role ratio monitor device 54, the external central terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and the power supply device 34 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. The door opening/closing monitor switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, and the information display device 14 are also electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73. If the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first test machine interface board 301, and second test machine interface board 302 have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear with a predetermined reduction ratio, and the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R rotates each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a certain angle. Therefore, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the count results. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the slot machine 1 (for example, 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the slot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player in the game, and usually, the lower the setting value (for example, closer to setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher the setting value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator of the gaming establishment inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turned off when it is returned to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. Note that when the power supply of the slot machine 1 is off, the setting can be changed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and then turning the power supply on, and the setting can be checked by turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power supply of the slot machine 1 is on.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by a manager at the game parlor. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. In addition, the reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a setting value determination operation by a manager at the game parlor in a state where settings can be changed. Note that when the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where settings can be changed, the set value increases by 1 each time it is operated (when it reaches setting 6, it returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting a setting value confirmation operation by the administrator of the game parlor. In this way, when changing the settings, turn on the setting key type switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select the setting value, and operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and the configuration may be such that the setting change can be performed by other operations. Further, when changing or confirming settings, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or payout number lamp, for example.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game that is tallied and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used when the manager of the gaming facility checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. In addition, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or for switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information may be displayed. In addition, assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitor device 54. Also, immediately after power is turned on or after a predetermined time has elapsed since power is turned on (for example, about 10 seconds; a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the role ratio monitor device 54 is functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs are lit).

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. There is also information on the ratio of accessories, etc.

Specific section ratio information refers to the stop operation that is advantageous to the player within the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games played (or may simply be the number of games played during an advantageous period) in the game period (for example, AT state) in which the information was reported. In addition, continuous accessory ratio information refers to the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (the consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus) This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the first class special bonus (RB) in a state where the operating device (BB) is operating (including during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB)). In addition, the accessory ratio information indicates that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special bonus (RB), the second type special bonus (CB), and the normal bonus (SB) ) is the information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB), and here, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation, the first-class special bonus (RB) is operated by the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). This concept includes the state in which the first type special accessory (RB) is in operation while the second type special accessory (CB) is in operation. This concept includes the operation of the second type special accessory (CB) in a state where the accessory continuous operation device (MB) according to the above is in operation.

In addition, the game period in which information on stop operations advantageous to the player was being reported (for example, AT state) is considered to be when the accessory is in operation or when the accessory continuous operation device is in operation, and the respective ratio information is It can also be subject to aggregation and calculation. That is, the role ratio monitoring device 54 may be any device that appropriately displays necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. For example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with the first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (correspondence information), when displaying the item, the last two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio). On the 7-segment LED, for example, by displaying an identification display for non-compatible information, such as lighting up two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", it is possible to confirm that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable that the person can recognize it at a glance.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state. When the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

A ROM cartridge board 202, a main display device 210, and a sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub control board 72 is connected via the sub relay board 74 to a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as the performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps/LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. A group of speakers such as the following are electrically connected.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, presentation button group, lamps/LEDs, and speaker group have already been described, so their description will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. Note that it is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing such monitoring to be performed on the sub control circuit 200 side as well, the lower door mechanism DD can be further improved. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. Note that this opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the game being opened after the manager of the game parlor has left after business hours, or if there is a history of the game being opened and closed for a long time during business hours, this may result in fraudulent activity. It is now possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that an act has been committed.

[3. Functional flow of the Pachislot machine]
Next, a functional flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining a functional flow of the slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination determines in advance the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" that give the player benefits such as the payout of medals, the operation of replay, and the operation of bonuses, and those related to other so-called "losing" combinations. The combination related to the payout of medals is called a "small combination", the combination related to the operation of replay is called a "replay combination", and the combination related to the operation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus combination". The combination that can be an internal winning combination (i.e., the combination of symbols that is permitted to be established) is sometimes simply called a "combination". The internal winning combination is sometimes called a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or a "derivation allowable condition". The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "role determining means," "winning role determining means," "pre-determination means," or "derivation allowable condition determining means."

Furthermore, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop button (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reel (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described later) The main CPU 101) that performs the reel stop control process performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed). Note that the operating means for performing the starting operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, but any operating means may be used as long as the player can perform the starting operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, but any operation that allows the player to perform the stop operation may be used. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reels rotate within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of usually 190 msec (four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the winning line. The symbol displayed when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as the "stop display" or the "display result". The display of symbols when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as the "derivation of the stop display" or the "derivation of the display result".

Further, the reel stop control means is configured to automatically stop each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reels have rotated, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. Stop control may also be performed. In this case, the reels will stop without the player's stop operation, so even if any internal winning combination has been determined, any combination of winning symbols will be valid. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when the rotation of all the plurality of reels is stopped, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs winning operation determination processing described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is related to winning. (or some other predetermined value). That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. The displayed symbol combination is determined by the winning determination means to be a winning symbol (or other predetermined symbol combination) (i.e., a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination) ) is established, the player is given benefits such as the payout of medals, or various controls are performed using this as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the above-described series of games is played as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means merely determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line corresponds to any one of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols corresponds to an internal winning combination determined by an internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols is related to a winning combination or not, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately performs the stop control, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the occurrence of erroneous winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control burden related to erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a symbol combination that is permitted to win. can be detected, which makes it possible to improve security.

In addition, in pachislots, during the sequence of game operations described above, various effects are produced using the display devices (e.g., main display device 210, sub display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. The content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is sampled in addition to the random number value for the internal lottery. When the random number value for performance is sampled, the performance content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the performance to be executed this time from among multiple types of performance contents associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, when the performance content is determined by the performance content determining means, the performance execution means executes a corresponding performance in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when determining whether or not there is a prize. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing the performance contents associated with the internal winning combination, the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to aim for, the pressing order to be operated, etc.) is executed. The player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict whether or not he or she can do the same, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of Pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to play a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp which symbol is placed at which position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Note that, as long as such an objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used as an example.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotational direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. Further, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, a symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combinations]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the slot machine 1 can provide various benefits, move from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or move from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such combinations of symbols. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for identifying such combinations of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described below is used as an example.

The symbol combination table specifies data (e.g., "display role" or "win activation flag") indicating the type of combination of multiple predefined symbols among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the winning line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be specified, for example, using the symbol code described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (e.g., "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. The number of types of symbol combinations, or the content of the bonus, can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that which symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) influences the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combinations that can be displayed (or the types of benefits that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance) the player's stop operation. It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that various data configurations can be adopted as long as such an objective is achieved, but in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table includes data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may vary depending on the set value. Further, types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding to) are associated with each internal winning combination. In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described later (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (e.g., 0 to 65535) by a random number circuit is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result has overflowed). Then, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535 for a given internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after this determination has been made for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination for this game will be a "lose". Note that this is merely one example of the internal lottery process, and various methods can be used for the lottery process as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability that an internal winning combination with a larger prescribed lottery value is determined (winning probability) becomes higher. Note that the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed such that the game result is affected by which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning role. That is, the slot machine 1 is capable of performing control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of the combination of symbols finally displayed not only by the type of the determined internal winning role, but also by the timing of the player's stop operation and the order of pressing (also called "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning role according to the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for specifying such a mode of stop control. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as an example.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbols (for example, the "number of sliding pieces") is specified for each symbol position data of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose that a specified stop table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose that a stop operation is performed on the reel 3L during rotation. At this time, suppose that the stop start position (the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". And suppose that the number of sliding pieces specified for the symbol position data "0" in the specified stop table is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at a symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") that has moved by four symbols (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table specifies data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Also, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority order") indicating which symbol combination is to be preferentially displayed (attracted) when there are multiple symbol combinations permitted to be displayed. For example, assume that a specified attraction priority order table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Here, the specified internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the specified attraction priority order table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over symbol combination A. Next, assume that a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, assume that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines whether the symbols constituting symbol combination A and the symbols constituting symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. Search to see if it exists. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to predetermined rules (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, symbol combination B will be displayed preferentially over symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at a position corresponding to the symbols constituting symbol combination B. In addition, the pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions while the target reel is rotating, or when a stop operation is performed on the target reel, according to the selected pull-in priority table. When the symbol is moved, each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position may be stored. Moreover, such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control."

In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to temporarily determine the stopping position, then perform "control control" to search for a more suitable stopping position, and change the stopping position depending on the search results. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes stop control that enables this.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning role (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," then none of the combinations of symbols related to any replay role, combinations of symbols related to minor roles, or combinations of symbols related to bonus roles will ultimately be displayed on the winning line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning roles is won as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or each active line if there are multiple), the combination of symbols may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operated the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning combination in which a combination of multiple symbols is associated may be determined, and in this case, the combinations of symbols are finally displayed on the active line according to the order in which the symbols are pressed. The combination of symbols may change. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a ``push order'', and if it is a replay win, it is sometimes called a ``push order replay'', and if it is a small win, it is called a ``push order small win''. It is sometimes called.

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to provide a desired gaming experience, it is possible to provide various gaming states as a state in which the game is played. An example of the gaming state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus winning combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is displayed on an active line, it is possible to shift to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is also possible to configure a plurality of bonus states. When a bonus combination is won, a state (carryover state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." Further, such a carryover state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)."

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the probability of winning, its contents, and the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) compared to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can also be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first type special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first type special role, a second type special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second type special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). For example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows. The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of winnings (e.g., the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined arbitrary number of games (e.g., the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of payouts (e.g., the upper limit is 285 coins) has been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153) or when a player wins an RB or SB during the MB state. Ru. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition for the bonus state is not limited to only that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory is in operation, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory starts operating, It is also possible to configure the first type special bonus (RB) to be automatically activated at the start of a game when the item is not in operation, or when the first type special bonus is finished being activated. That is, it is also possible to control the RB so that it is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and a specification in which the RB in BB operation is automatically activated in this way is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, while the BB is in operation, control can be performed such that the RB is in operation when a combination of symbols related to the prescribed RB is displayed on the active line. A specification in which the RB operates based on the display of corresponding symbol combinations in this manner is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB) is also the same. In other words, without specifying the combination of symbols related to CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is in operation, or it is possible to control the combination of symbols related to the specified CB while the MB is in operation. It is also possible to perform control such that the CB is activated when the combination is displayed on the valid line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be changed with respect to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is less advantageous than the non-RT state. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability re-play state", and an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability re-play state".

For example, the RT state can be transitioned by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the winning is not in BB or MB (not carried over) and the player is not in RB, BB or MB state. When a predetermined number of games are played after the transition conditions are met.

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an AT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple AT states are provided. The AT state is a game state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

In addition, if multiple AT states are provided, the gaming period of each AT state (including the ease of extension if the said period can be extended (also referred to as "add-on"; the same shall apply hereinafter)), The degree of advantage for the player can be varied by making the types of winning combinations for which stop operation information is reported or the probability of occurrence of stop operation information being reported different. Furthermore, the conditions for transitioning to the AT state and the conditions for ending the AT state can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay (except for ending by executing a limit process, which will be described later). Further, the AT state may be treated in the same way as the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the play period of the AT state may be managed by the number of games (play count) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game count management), or may be managed by the number of sets with a predetermined number of games as one set (set count management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor role is won) (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. In addition, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when predetermined transition conditions are met, it is possible to transition to the ART state (activate the ART state), which is a combination of the above-described high RT state and AT state. In other words, the ART state means an AT state performed in a high RT state, so at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and a transition to a high RT state (or a transition to a low RT state) is performed. The basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being informed of information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player). (or if transition to a low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition conditions for the ART state are met, the transition to the AT state may be made first, and then the transition to the high RT state may be performed to transition to the ART state, or the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously transitioned ( Alternatively, it may be possible to shift to the ART state by shifting to the ART state (substantially simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming status]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous section (see FIGS. 5 and 6), which will be described later, is also a state in which the player plays a game, and the advantage is whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be considered as gaming states. Further, from a similar viewpoint, for example, a gaming state can be provided in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus winning combination is won (carried over), a gaming state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is likely to be displayed due to stop control, and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination are relatively By providing a gaming state that is less likely to be displayed, the player's degree of advantage can be varied. Furthermore, for example, a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) is provided. It is also possible to configure the system so that the degree of advantage for the player can be varied.

In addition, the following methods can be adopted as a method for varying the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of the AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for the special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order of pressing the buttons, or a combination of these) (for example, 8 medals are paid out if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), and 1 medal or no medal is paid out if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect)).

Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to change the advantageous degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game to an advantageous one. No decision is made (which may include a decision as to whether or not to move directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the playing period in the AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific winning combination is won in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins have not been paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game using a specific gaming method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and cases where the advantageous decision is not made (there is a restriction on the occurrence of an advantageous decision). It can also be configured so that there are cases where the Please note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, there is a risk that the (next) player will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not continue from the next game onward. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as states in which the game is performed with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. An example of the game section will be explained below. Note that the gaming section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Unfavorable section)
The non-advantageous period is configured as a gaming period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state is not possible.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in an advantageous section (in other words, a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of advantageous section games counter and the number of advantageous section payout counters described below) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state. Note that by referring to the predetermined value, if the predetermined value is a specific updated value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set based on that. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is met during an advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if a lottery is configured to end the advantageous section and the winner wins), then A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to move to the advantageous section, etc.) can only be performed with reference to the determined internal winning combination, and the derived It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (symbol combination) or the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). In addition, to determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or to check the sub-flag (multiple winning combinations) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to data that indirectly indicates an internal winning combination, such as one data to be determined.
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change to be the non-advantageous section B, and so on.

(Advantageous area)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period during which the player can be notified of advantageous stop operation modes, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it is not possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.
(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.
(4) In the advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous zone, or whether or not to extend a specific game state (mode)) can be performed not only by referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation of any of the reels, or the push order.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that is easy to transition to an AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification can be set. In addition, for example, a CZ premonition state in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to a CZ state can be performed, which is set as a standby state until a transition to a CZ state is actually performed in response to a decision to transition to a CZ state in a normal state, or an AT premonition state in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to an AT state can be performed in response to a decision to transition to an AT state in a normal state or a CZ state, can be set according to gameplay.
(6) The fact that the vehicle is in a favorable zone can be notified by lighting up the zone lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether the zone is a non-favorable zone or a favorable zone (if the zone lamp is off, it can notify that the vehicle is in a non-favorable zone). As described above, the timing at which the zone lamp starts to light can be set to any timing. Basically, the zone lamp may start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone and continue to light up until the vehicle moves to the non-favorable zone, or the zone lamp may not start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (the favorable zone has started) and the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in a normal state, and may start to light up when the vehicle first enters an AT state. If the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in an AT state, the light may start to light up from that point on.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the advantageous zone from continuing too long and becoming excessively gambling-oriented, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period during which the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In this embodiment, the end of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of a limit process or the activation of a limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of plays) in the advantageous zone reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous zone game number counter described later starts counting when the advantageous zone starts, and increments the count by one each time one play is played. Then, based on the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended (for example, even if the play period of the AT state remains) and a transition is made to a non-advantageous zone. Note that the number of games that activates the game number limiter can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500". In addition, when the requirements of such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of games in the advantageous zone.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone reaches "2400". For example, the favorable zone payout number counter described later starts counting when the favorable zone starts, and adds the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). Then, based on the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaching a specified value (e.g., "2400" or more), the favorable zone is forcibly ended (e.g., even if the game period in the AT state remains), and the zone is shifted to a non-favorable zone. Note that the payout number at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any payout number as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". In addition, when the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone.

In addition, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described below takes the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point), and counts the positive amount from the latest lowest point. (In other words, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous period (for example, when the AT state starts). It can also be configured as a limiter. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the number of bets is not subtracted from the payout number) instead of the above-mentioned pure increase number.

Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter, may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of payouts limiter, and may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter and the number of payouts. The advantageous section limit processing may be executed using both number limiters. Note that when using both limiters, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating condition for either limiter is satisfied after the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of navigation times for the push order minor winning combination during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified regarding the winning combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation number limiter may be provided that executes the limit process when the number of times the navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device will also be able to do this. You can perform effects during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the completion of the MB state, and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the completion of the MB state, not only the above-mentioned bonus state effect will be performed on the external data display device, but also the bonus state will be displayed. You can count the number of times by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state is started, and turned off when the AT state is ended, then an AT state performance linked to this can be performed on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, then not only can the external data display perform the above-mentioned AT state performance, but the number of ATs can be counted by type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the first set of AT state, and from the second set onwards, the set is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time the AT state is hit, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted on an external data display. Note that the timing of turning on and turning off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again, such as a predetermined time, one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to transmit a plurality of types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is required that communication be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the status of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200. An example of such a command will be explained below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting values, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning role, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters that specify the contents of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters that specify that the rotation of the reels has started, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where the reel is stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and the displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the content of the bonus to be granted. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is started, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command is configured to include parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state), etc. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is ended, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command is configured to include parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of the end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be sent as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be not sent.

[4-10. Performance]
As mentioned above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various performances are performed using various production devices in order to increase the interest of the game, to provide useful information to the player, or to achieve the intended gameplay. It is now possible. An example of such a performance will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side performance]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side), the following effects can be performed, for example. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify information on a stop operation using the instruction monitor, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). Such a performance is called a "rock performance (or simply "rock")" or a "freeze performance (or simply "freeze")." Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a rock effect is not performed, or to allow a plurality of types of rock effects to be performed.

The gaming operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if a start operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if a stop operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. If multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operation is invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalidated may be set for each lock effect.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, the performance display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only a variable display mode but also a combination with a stop display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. (including). Such a presentation is called a "reel presentation" and also a "symbol presentation." It should be noted that it may be configured so that such reel effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (performing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where a reel effect is not performed.

In short, reel production is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R without the player's gaming operation during a period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated. It is a performance that will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to set a motion pattern for performing such a performance motion without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. Furthermore, by setting a plurality of movement patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effect patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for reel production.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that causes a pseudo game to be played during the above-described lock effect can be performed. Such performances are called "pseudo games." It should be noted that the system can be configured so that such pseudo games are not performed, or it can be configured so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where a pseudo game is not performed.

In short, a pseudo game is a process in which a player's game operation is accepted in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, and thereby the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated or stopped (temporarily stopped). The performance is performed by doing things like this. That is, the reel performance described above is performed by further intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. For this reason, it is inherently undesirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in a simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he or she is playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be explained using an example. For example, the pseudo game is performed in the following manner.
(1) Actual start operation by the player (here the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) Receive a pseudo-stop operation, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during pseudo-gaming)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts rotating (the pseudo game ends and the actual game starts)

The random delay process is a process that randomly generates a delay period for each reel before starting its rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period") to correct the situation where, for example, if certain symbols are displayed in a line in the above situation (3) and the reels start to rotate normally in the above situation (4), the player may be more likely to use the certain symbols as a landmark to stop the reels (this may aid in the so-called "eye-pressing" technique). In addition, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above situations (3) and (4), it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a certain time (e.g., 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately changed between forward and reverse directions, so that they are not mistaken for being completely stopped.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, if any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all reels are temporarily stopped), In the above-mentioned situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay process is started. In addition, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging will not occur when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops. You can also do this.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is installed to notify that a pseudo game is in progress, and after a pseudo game is started in the situation (1) above, ), the pseudo game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. Note that it is desirable that the pseudo game lamp be installed at a position above the operation section that accepts game operations from the player and at a position where it can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo game lamp is covered with a monochrome edge. Further, it is desirable that the display range of the pseudo game lamp including the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp includes a description that allows the user to recognize that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp for notifying that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", or " It is preferable that the reel should have a description such as ``Reel automatic production in progress'', and it is desirable that such a written part should occupy 1/3 or more of the surface area. It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200 that controls the pseudo game lamp.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game display to inform the player that a pseudo-game is being played may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) from the start of the pseudo-game in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the start of the random delay process in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo-game display is preferably displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and at a position that is visible during the game (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, either one may be used). In addition, it is preferable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm when the display screen is less than 7 inches, and the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen when the display screen is 7 inches or more). Additionally, it is desirable for the explanatory portion of the pseudo-play display to be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-play display is intended to inform the player that a pseudo-play is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY," "pseudo-play performance in progress," or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is desirable for the explanatory portion to be large enough for the player to read without being obscured or otherwise hidden.

Also, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the above-mentioned situation (1) to the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure so that information on the stop operation is not notified on the instruction monitor (if it is necessary to display information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from misunderstanding that an actual game is being played during the pseudo game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo game, information on the stop operation may be notified on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during the pseudo game, the sub-side presentation device may perform a presentation according to the game result of the pseudo game (linked to the pseudo game operation).

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output through the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during a pseudo game, a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during a pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a pseudo game is being played. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71 so that the pseudo game progresses on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a switch capable of switching the function on and off may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the content of the simulated game during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of information on the stop operation by the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. This type of performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single-shot performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a normal performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of normal performances can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous reading performance" or a "continuous performance". Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to perform a plurality of types of continuous performance.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect can be performed in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or a "button effect" or the like. Note that it is possible to configure the device so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or to configure the device so that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. In addition, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or as a continuous effect. In addition, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify the set value, internal lottery role, game status, game section, bonus content, and the period until the bonus is granted. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage of these. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can also perform performances other than the various performances described above. For example, various types of notifications to players or game parlors (for example, notifications to prevent addiction, notifications to prevent forgotten items, error status notifications, demo status notifications, etc.) that are used for purposes other than those mentioned above are also included in production in a broad sense. . Note that the addictive prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. In addition, the forgotten item prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a payment operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the time the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification may be such that when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no games have been played or when a payment operation has been performed, it is possible to notify that the machine is empty.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications related to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine". Note that, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and, further, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the other gaming machines in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to the first gaming machine described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flag where "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet state, hereinafter simply referred to as "2BB") described later is carried over, and the period between the 2BB flags described below. Between the 3BB flags where "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a 3-card bet state.Hereinafter may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over, and when no bonus role has been won (carryover). (not flagged) and non-flags. Further, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that transitions in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state that transitions to in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB. Ru.

Furthermore, with the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2-bet state) and with three medals bet (3-bet state). There is. Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to play a game, and that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b. This includes both of multiplying two or three medals from the credits and automatically multiplying two or three medals by winning a replay combination.

[5-1. Game performance of first gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. In addition, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which the player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones, and the advantageous zones are further divided into presentation zones (advantageous zones, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zones, pseudo bonus). The non-advantageous zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. The presentation zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to the non-advantageous zones, but differ from the non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions are performed, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous section is set as an initial state that is controlled when a game in the advantageous section ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the factory shipment is made. The production section is a control state as a normal state in which the expectation level of increasing section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition etc., and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is an advantageous game state for the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described later). The sub-flag is information for grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery-eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability by the main control circuit 100 (various processes related to the advantageous zone) and assigning the same information to the group, making it possible to identify the group. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning role, making it possible to compress the amount of data and avoid straining the capacity of the main ROM 102. In the non-advantageous zone, a lottery is held using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Rip Bell" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "middle cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that the non-advantageous zone can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined, just like the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is used as secondary information (sub-flag) according to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in an advantageous section. is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning time sub-flags and advantageous section winning time sub-flags.

The sub-flag "Bell" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "Weak Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "Watermelon" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "Definite Role" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Definite Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The sub-flag "Middle Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 1" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Right Up Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Right Up Rip"). The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 2" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Parallel Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of "Rip to the right" symbols is not possible between the 3BB flags. A combination of "parallel rep" symbols is displayed between 2BB flags and between non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Tsu Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 3BB flags, and "Tsu Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo bonus transition lottery using the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) and the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f)) is changed.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is played as a winning combination in which the sub-flag changes depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. ) is described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when winning an advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control will be different depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a winning combination, the number of medals paid out does not change (or may be changed), and the combinations of symbols displayed are different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied in accordance with the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

For example, as described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (non-flag) it is between, the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressed position is not appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon Spills" will be displayed, so the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed. When winning a winning combination, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the winning is possible without any missed winnings or when a winning winning occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied in accordance with the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Also, for example, when the internal winning role is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct pressing order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed) between the 3BB flags, a combination of symbols of "parallel replay" is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a combination of symbols of "right-up replay" is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display mode for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and allows different secondary information to be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby applying all the modes that allow the degree of advantage to be changed.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery to move to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing, a destination mode etc. is determined according to the non-gaming section sub-flag. In addition, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when moving to an advantageous section is determined ("advantageous section start" in Figure 5), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a shift to a pseudo bonus is determined. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in a non-advantageous period.

Now, referring to FIG. 6, the various modes in the first gaming machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of a transition (award) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), it is according to this mode that a decision is made as to whether or not a pseudo bonus transition will occur, whether an advantageous zone will be maintained, or whether the advantageous zone will end and a transition will be made to a non-advantageous zone.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is easy to stay in when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation level of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). Although not shown, in the start mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." The ceiling number of games is used to force the transition to the pseudo bonus when the period of not transitioning to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the fewer the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the greater the number of ceiling games, the disadvantageous to the player.

The normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay when playing, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, so the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) described below). In the normal A mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games". In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the game transitions to the end A mode or end B mode described below, and 32 games are played in that mode without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and after transitioning to a non-advantageous zone once, if the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, the apparent ceiling game number is "965 games" + the play period "32 games" in the end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, and this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively easily while playing, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, although the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "466 games", and when transitioning to a pseudo bonus After that, it is certain that the mode will shift to heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games," so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and a transition occurs to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than end A mode, because it is easy to stay if you move to a pseudo bonus and do not move to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends. mode, the expectation level to shift to a pseudo bonus mode is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) described below), and the expectation level to shift to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 7 (discussed below)). 8(f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

The guaranteed mode is the mode in which you stay when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of moving to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see FIG. 8(f) below). In other words, in order to prevent a drop in interest when Heaven C mode ends, the guaranteed mode is positioned as one that aims to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode may include the extension (addition) of pseudo bonuses in a row (if the AT state continues due to a decision to extend (addition) made during the AT state). The same applies hereafter), the expectation level for transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode with a moderate probability that the mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may be set differently. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that the set value is higher, or the lottery value can be simply set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to heaven B mode and heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo-bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to pseudo-bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. ”, and is a relatively advantageous mode with a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). In other words, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is a more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, Heaven B mode, and Heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode".

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than the above modes can be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, the non-advantageous zone has been described as being in a state where the degree of advantage is relatively low compared to the advantageous zone, but the relationship between the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone is not limited to this. For example, the non-advantageous zone may have a higher transition rate to the increasing zone than the advantageous zone when at least one mode is set, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter, or the non-advantageous zone may be the zone that is most likely to become the increasing zone. By doing this, an incentive to play is created even in a state where it is confirmed that the zone is a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, etc., so that it is a motivation to start playing even from the time the store opens. Even if the zone lamp stops lighting when 32 games have passed after the pseudo bonus ends, it is not confirmed that the zone is in the most disadvantageous state, so that it is a motivation to continue playing even in such a case. Up to this point, the performance zone has been described as a game state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, but if it is in a state that is disadvantageous compared to the increasing zone (for example, by lowering the frequency of notification or changing the role that is the subject of notification), it can also be a game state in which information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the performance section (normal play), first, for each play, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referred to, an internal winning role is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the internal winning role, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In FIG. 7(c), "non-winning" means that there is no transition to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the next play.

In the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, game operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, and if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is produced, and then a pseudo bonus is started. In a game in which a "red 7s aligned" effect is produced, if it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and game operations (stop operations) become valid (it may be before that, but not before the timing when the random delay process described above is started).

In the production section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus and the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transfer lottery described below. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) are not performed.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay" In a game in which a player wins in "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus depending on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag rather than "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. The percentage of cases where it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus is higher. However, the manner in which "Tori-Rep 2" is given preferential treatment than "Tori-Rep 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where "Toripu 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability; In this case, it may be determined that the bonus is not transferred to a pseudo bonus.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Further, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), it is determined to transfer to the pseudo bonus, and if the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transfer lottery (at the time of ceiling), which will be described later, will not be performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will be transitioned to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the player from deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (either an addition method or a subtraction method), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the ceiling number of games associated with the current mode (or determined in advance at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that a "win (current game)" is determined, or it is also possible to make sure that a "win (next game)" is determined. Alternatively, any of these may be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode. This mode to transition to may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processes related to the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing content is the same, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. It can be controlled using In addition, the processes related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) are the same except for the type of sub-flag, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. can be controlled.

Also, if "Winning lottery (played this time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone has already been determined, and the ceiling game number can also be updated, so the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and the pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), the mode transition lottery (when winning), and the mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. As mentioned above, if it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus in the production section (normal game) and the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the transition to the increase section (pseudo bonus) will occur. . In addition, as mentioned above, in the performance section (normal game), if the end A mode or end B mode is controlled and 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in Figure 5, "Advantage section end (via Ends A and B)"), then shift to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are satisfied, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated ("end of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Shift to non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends depending on the current mode. In FIG. 8(e), "non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "winning (updated ceiling number of games = 0)" means that the ceiling number of games set will be set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. The ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time the pseudo bonus is played.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to reduce the number of ceiling games, and when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have 1G continuous stock as described below, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the ceiling number of games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game moves to the performance section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is determined to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, when the pseudo bonus ends, "0 games" is set as the ceiling number of games. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of games reaches the ceiling, the above-described mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that the transition mode may also be determined when a sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn other than the above. In this case, in principle, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the transition mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won. In this case, as with the above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the mode to transition to, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn or the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. In FIG. 7(d), "non-win" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "win (1G consecutive + 1)" means that one right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be granted during one pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be granted in one 1G consecutive draw.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or more (i.e., if you have 1G consecutive stock), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right of 1G consecutive stock, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not held. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more (i.e., if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the game moves to the presentation period (normal game).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks, or the 1G consecutive stocks may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over may be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, as an example of the structure of the increase period (pseudo bonus), the structure continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be acquired, but the structure of the pseudo bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" is also installed, which is a pseudo bonus that lasts for "22 games" and can earn up to 110 coins. You can do it like this. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo BB") RB or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, in 50% increments). Note that "pseudo RB" may have a different value from "pseudo BB" (more specifically, it has lower value than "pseudo BB"), so for example, the number of consecutive games may be different from "pseudo BB". BB", but by setting the BellNavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information) to a low value, it is possible to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be acquired and make the value different. In addition, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel performance in which "BAR" symbols are displayed all together on the main display window 4, or a reel performance in which "Red 7-Red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. Just do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to one configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continued games (game period) can be changed.

In addition, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous zone due to limit processing" in FIG. 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous zone.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played with three coins bet. Therefore, when playing with two coins bet, for example, various lotteries using (a)-(d) in FIG. 7 and (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when playing with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is not an increase period because the machine is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is basically configured so that the player is at a disadvantage when playing with two coins bet.

Here, when playing in the two-coin bet state, no lottery (for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) or processing (for example, updating of the ceiling number of games, etc.) is performed for the advantageous zone (AT), but it is desirable to update the advantageous zone game number counter for the game number limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone and the upper limit of the number of coins won. If these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won set by the intervention of play in the two-coin bet state, and as a result, gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable to configure the limiter counter so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, if a bonus state occurs during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state with a 3-card bet). , the period during the pseudo bonus may not be an increasing period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured so that it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, a 3-card bet between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game"). In some cases, other states may be described as "non-recommended gaming states"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and cannot be won in a 3-piece bet state. The configuration is such that it does not. Further, 3BB is a bonus combination that can be won only in a 3-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags is configured such that it can only be won in a 3-piece bet state and not in a 2-piece bet state. Furthermore, there is no case where 3BB is won between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB is won between 3BB flags.

The first gaming machine uses these configurations to, for example, win 2BB (without winning 2BB) in a 2-coin bet state with no flags, making it a 2BB flag state, and then plays in a 3-coin bet state, making it possible to play in the recommended play state described above without worrying about winning a bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, 1 The probability of winning the ceiling reduction lottery is /8 (32/256), while the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than that, This prevents the number of ceiling games from being shortened.

Note that even in a mode where the number of ceiling games is more than "32 games", the probability that the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games" is lower (for example, 1/64) than in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games". may be determined to be shortened.

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is shortened is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by shortening "32 games" to a fewer number of games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won may be determined, or the number of games to be shortened in the ceiling shortening lottery may be determined in advance.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, during the pseudo bonus, a ceiling reduction lottery may be performed for each game. In addition, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. You may also do so. In these cases, the advantageous section winning time sub-flag and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it is shown that 1G continuous stock may be awarded regardless of which mode the current mode is. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling of 32 games or not.

The manner in which the right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode in which the ceiling game number is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode in which the ceiling game number is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted to prevent the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

The trigger for the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery may be performed in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G consecutive stocks accumulated as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustrations are omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the game machine is in an advantageous state. A special bonus performance to suggest something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if a special bonus effect is executed at the start of a pseudo-bonus, it will be suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and there is also the expectation that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a 100% probability even when a 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning. Various possibilities such as winning only can be suggested, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus) will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the end of the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus), , in the case of heaven mode), the period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G continuous stock) may restart the advantageous state, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations and improve the interest in the game.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Determined Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and when the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that the mode transition to Heaven C mode is decided, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Note that, even when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefit as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, so when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, the special lock effect may be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also determines the transition to the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 7(c)), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can recognize that the transition to the pseudo bonus and the transition to the Heaven C mode have occurred, which is very interesting for the player. The special lock effect is configured as an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalid for about 20 seconds at the start of the game, for example. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Also, a special song that is not normally output may be output. Of course, the effects can be performed by a combination of these. Also, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player can decide whether to execute the effect to the end or to cancel it midway and continue the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described below, even if the player is in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process, so it may not be desirable to execute the above-mentioned special lock effect multiple times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the special lock effect for the first time within a series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is executed, but thereafter, even if the same conditions are met within the same series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is controlled not to be executed. As a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and when the information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, the decision on whether or not to execute the special lock effect may not be made in the first place, or the decision may be made, but when the information is stored, even if the decision result indicates execution, it may be rewritten to indicate no execution. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

Note that the manner in which execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above-described manner. For example, the upper limit number of times that the special lock effect can be executed may be set as "twice" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be set as appropriate depending on the expected value of balls to be rolled out per special lock performance.

The conditions for determining whether or not to execute the special lock effect are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by the winning of a "fixed role", and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is caused by factors other than the winning of a "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a determination may be made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect in these cases as well, and it may be determined that the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when the winning of a "fixed role" is the trigger, or may be a different probability).

For example, when a "guaranteed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be initiated in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be adopted as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter described later is less than "1201", , When it is determined whether or not to execute the special lock effect as described above, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter (described later) becomes "750" or more, or When the value of the section payout number counter or the control payout number counter becomes "1201" or more, a decision as to whether or not a special lock performance will be executed is made not to be made in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do that.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16, which will be described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) is set multiple times, special effects (for example, special lock effects) are set each time. controlled so that it does not occur. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "determined combination") will trigger an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. In the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs multiple times, the control is performed so that a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

The first gaming machine is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning role, and is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified, according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can provide a sense of expectation regarding the award of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a combination of symbols is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the award of an advantageous state.

In addition, the first gaming machine manages both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to provision.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), the first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but the second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. In addition, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is selected, a combination of predetermined patterns (e.g., "Right-up replay") is displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is selected, a combination of specific patterns (e.g., "Parallel replay") is displayed (see FIG. 15 described below).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is displayed. In other words, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is in effect. It is possible to further diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of states.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific winning combination is won.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to replay, the same privilege of activating replay is awarded regardless of which one is displayed.

Note that the manner in which the same benefits are provided is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination that is associated with the granting of gaming value. If you win a specific small role, for example, if you are in the first special permission state, you will receive 1 coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any other value below the betted gaming value, or The second special permission In this case, a combination of specific symbols that gives the same number of gaming values as when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols that gives a gaming value equivalent to "parallel reply") is displayed. You can.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of symbols that are "missing" (however, in order to make it possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state, a symbol that is different from the case of pure "missing") A combination of symbols may be configured as a combination of distinguishable symbols. Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place. , it is possible to diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of advantageous states. In addition, in games where a specific combination has been determined, the same benefits are granted regardless of which special permission state the player is in, so even if the gameplay is changed, the player is not directly disadvantaged. You can prevent it from getting covered.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in the second special permission state, and a specific combination of symbols can be displayed. It may be configured such that it is not possible to display a specific combination of symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed. When a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, even if it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different between when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "press position ○", "press position correct", etc.). When a specific combination of symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressed position x", "incorrect pressed position", etc.), the specified symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on (the timing of) the player's stop operation, which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

As mentioned above, the specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressing position is ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded on at least one reel, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. Also, at least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage in terms of granting an advantageous state based on the player's stopping operation (or the timing of that operation), but also makes it possible to vary the direct content of the bonus, allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and further diversifying the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if there is only one type of specific role, the timing for the appropriate timing of the stop operation is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate timings for the stop operation. For example, on one reel, a first specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a third timing different from the first timing and the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

In this case, the special role can be configured so that a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage in terms of the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (when the push order is correct), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded, and when the batting order is not appropriate (when the push order is incorrect), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). The specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. The specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. At least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only changes the degree of advantage regarding the award of an advantageous state due to the player's stopping operation (procedure), but also changes the content of the direct benefit, so that the player can concentrate more on the game, and the gameplay can be further diversified, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific role, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the center or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the center, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the right, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or center, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination has been won, the process of determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone and the process of determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the degree of advantage of the game situation in an advantageous zone) change due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order). However, among such changes, any change that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that any presentation (warning announcement) can be generated to call the player's attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of an advantageous state being granted is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. In other words, assuming that three coins are bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is favored more than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined role (for example, the "push order bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is selected, the combination of symbols to be awarded (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 8 coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while if the second special permission state is selected, if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols to which less game value is awarded than when the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 1 coin) is displayed. In other words, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the award of game value is favored more than the second special permission state.

In other words, even if the player is in a non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays a game with a bet of 3 cards between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving an advantageous state will not be given preferential treatment, but the gaming value will be increased when the advantageous state is not activated. Since the granting probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played with a relatively small difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the gaming value is reduced, can be defined, for example, as a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in the recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase their game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating two states, a stable state and a rough sea state, is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is made higher than in the "rough sea state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is made higher than in the "rough sea state". lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of pseudo bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". enhance In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time in a "stable state" but difficult to win consecutive games, and in a "rough sea state" it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time but it is easy to win consecutive games. This situation can be created. As for the stop control of the predetermined combination, as described above, it may be changed between 2BB flags and 3BB flags, or it may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 2", are arranged in the positions shown in Fig. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Also, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal lottery winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 15. Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Figs. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination of the first gaming machine. That is, the following will explain the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combination (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, the stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won.

First, in the first gaming machine, in an internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor role. It shows.

“F_2BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while when a game is played with a 3-card bet. The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2-bet state, or in a game in which "F_2BB" is a "miss" between the 2BB flags, "BB01" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between two BB flags, "BB01" will not be displayed in a three-bet bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with 3 bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a 2 bet state. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3 bet state, or in a game in which a "lose" occurs between 3BB flags, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed and the game transitions to the 3BB state (bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, in a 2 bet state, even between 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed.

In addition, in the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of coins that can be started is only 3 coins). During the 2BB state and 3BB state, the RB, which is a first class special accessory, is always controlled to be in operation (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two winnings occur or two games are played after activation, the RB state is once terminated and activated again. Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated that more than one medal is paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is defined as that more than 176 medals are paid out in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that the amount has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when transitioning to the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, since no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e. the current mode, is "start mode", the mode to transition to will be "start mode". Also, if the current mode is either "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", or "chance mode", the mode to transition to will be "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the mode to transition to will be "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", or "heaven C mode", the mode to transition to will be "guaranteed mode".

“F_Replay A” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, one of "REP64" to "REP72" is selected regardless of the stop operation mode (these are "replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in a straight line in the middle row). Since they are displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel reps." Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower reps," and "REP72" is a "middle rep." "Reply") is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (this can be called "replay" as it displays the "replay" symbol upward to the right) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

“F_Replay B” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel reply" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state and a replay will be granted.

“F_Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet bet state, if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" will be displayed (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol at the bottom of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "Cherry Rip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Definite Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that, while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle row replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are used to display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and since symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42", are also displayed on other reels), a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the above-mentioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed and a replay is granted. Also, if the button is pressed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", a "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. It can be configured so that it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, but not determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the push position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are collectively referred to as "middle cherry lip" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other lips (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4," any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are configured as combinations of symbols that can, by convention, definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "Reach Eye Lip") is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Also, if the push order is any of "batting order 5" and "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

In a non-bonus state, "F_watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are collectively called "watermelon" because they display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals are paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" and "FRU09" (these are collectively called "watermelon spill" because they do not display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and one medal is paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, it can also be configured so that a spill occurs and zero medals are paid out.

"F_Bell123A1", "F_Bell123A2", "F_Bell132A1", "F_Bell132A2", "F_Bell213A1", "F_Bell213A2", "F_Bell231A1", "F_Bell231A2", "F_Bell Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A."

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor role with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as the internal winning role, and the stopping operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Downward Right Bell" ("FRU03"), "Top Row Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Row Bell" ("FRU04"), "Upward Right Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Bottom Row Bell" ("FRU07"). If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell123B1", "F_Bell123B2", "F_Bell132B1", "F_Bell132B2", "F_Bell213B1", "F_Bell213B2", "F_Bell231B1", "F_Bell231B2", "F_Bell ``Bell 312B1'', ``F_Bell 312B2'', ``F_Bell 321B1'', and ``F_Bell 321B2'' are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B."

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor combination between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet bet state and the 3-bet bet state. If it is decided as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals will be paid out. A number of medals will be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is not pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between non-flags in the 3-bet state, and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is decided as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "one-card combinations" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB 1 coin" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning role, any of the above-mentioned "1 coin roles" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal is paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, display combination, etc. shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when the result is a pure "loss", when "BB01" is missed and becomes a "loss", "BB02" can be displayed. In a 3-bet state, when you miss "BB02" and become a "miss", when you become a "miss" due to a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, when a 2-bet state occurs between 3BB flags A "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when a "miss" occurs due to this, or when a "miss" occurs due to a "small winning combination" being missed. Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations that are displayed as "lost" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combination is By allowing these to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the situation, it is also possible to vary the symbol combinations related to "missing" displayed depending on the state or the like.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Each limit process (number of games) and semi-limit process (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of limit processing that can be executed, and limit processing other than these limit processing can be executed, or some of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

Normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is either 2 or 3 coins. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts in the 2BB and 3BB states.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section to be transferred to In addition, at this time, information regarding advantageous sections (for example, information for controlling the effect section or increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the playing period of pseudo bonuses, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether or not there is a ceiling shortening) is also included. information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary to control the advantageous section) are all cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout counter becomes "2401" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (number of medals difference)") when the favorable zone (including the performance zone) starts, and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The favorable zone payout counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. The favorable zone payout counter also subtracts a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2 medals" or "-3 medals") when a "miss" or "miss" occurs during the favorable zone. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the favorable zone, the value may become negative (or it may be configured to always remain "0" if the value becomes negative). In other words, the favorable zone payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), regardless of whether the player is in the performance period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the favorable zone). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three coins, and does not count when the number of bets is two coins. The control game number counter counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the favorable zone game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be activated without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Further, at this time, all information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Note here that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuation period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined regulation period has been played in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player will feel a sense of distrust or loss, which will reduce the interest in the game. There are cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed on a game that is the continuable period (55 games) per increase period before the game on which normal limit processing (number of games) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus being terminated midway.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per two increase sections (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in the case of a specification in which a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in number of medals)") from the start of the favorable period (including the performance period), and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable period ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control payout number counter also counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. The control payout number counter also counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs in the advantageous section, the control payout number counter is decremented by an appropriate value according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-3 coins", etc.). However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "missing medal" (or a difference) when a "missing medal" occurs during an advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). The number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet 3 medals and win "Push Order Bell A", if the batting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference number is " On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be ``1'' (the difference in number of medals is ``-2''), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. If a medal is missed, the number of medals paid out becomes "0" (the difference number is "-3"), but the control payout number counter shows the difference number "-3" in any case in the game. +5 pieces” are counted.

In addition, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter becomes It is corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be released without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the player does not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the player has transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information regarding the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", whereas special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins acquired in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) is "275 coins". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of gaming value that can be awarded in the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value equivalent to a predetermined regulated game value amount is awarded in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-like. However, for example, if this normal limit process (payout number) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, and their interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increased zone (275 coins) is awarded, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending midway and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase sections (275 pieces x 2 sets = 550 pieces). Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per one increase section (275 pieces) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 pieces). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

For semi-limit processing (number of games), add "1" to the value of the control game counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it becomes "with ceiling shortening"), add "1" to the value of the 1G continuous counter. ) is multiplied by "55" (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". ”, the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated).

For semi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout number counter and the value of the 1G continuous counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it is "with ceiling shortening"), add "1". ) is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given as a pseudo bonus), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and it is "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout number counter is "1301". ”, the semi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (activated). Note that semi-limit processing (number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) both have the same restrictions, so after one operating condition is established and activated, the other operating condition will be applied. Even if this holds true, there is no need for it to operate redundantly.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. It will no longer be done. That is, the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is suppressed. Note that the method for suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning the 1G consecutive lottery may be set to be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be set to be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed, it may be made so that it is difficult to win these lots. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that becomes a winning prize in the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which a mode transition advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for pseudo bonuses to be won consecutively.

In addition, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, the "determined hand" (( A special process is performed when a) is won. Hereinafter, this special processing will be explained using as an example a case where the "confirmed combination" is "F_confirmed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "confirmed cherry").

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "certain cherry" is won during the performance period (may be during the increase period), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery occurs. ``Winning (next game)'' is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a highly anticipated symbol for the player, so in games where information about stop operations is not reported, the player The general procedure is to perform the stop operation by making one stop and aiming at the "Cherry" symbol (as a guideline, aim at the "BAR" symbol). Therefore, when a game is played according to the general procedure, when a "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2" ”) may be made. Further, "winning (next game)" is not limited to a pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may also mean a pseudo bonus starting from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player also aims at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R and stops, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "certain cherry". Perform operations. As a result, the "BAR" symbols line up in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "confirmed cherry" has been won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, may not or may not be able to perform the stop operation while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the stop display may appear to be a "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "determined cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is operating, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is not displayed, but the symbol combination of a "cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100% or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, you will be notified that a pseudo bonus will begin when the next game starts with a "Red 7s lined up" effect, and the pseudo bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "guaranteed cherry" is won during the production period (or may be during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus will be transferred. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "win (the current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the current game, it is announced that a "red 7" effect will be performed and a pseudo bonus will be started, and the pseudo bonus will be started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation is performed to display the "Middle Rip" symbol combination without displaying the "Confirmed Cherry Rip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Rip" symbol combination). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game was changed from displaying "confirmed cherry reply" to starting a pseudo bonus from the next game. After either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus starts from the current game → a stop operation is performed according to the special notification, and a game called "middle rep" is displayed. The flow will be changed to Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and from the viewpoint that the player will not be disadvantaged even though it will shift to a pseudo bonus as a result. The control may be performed only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, if a "Definite Cherry" is won after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, and the "Definite Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed despite a special notification, the special winning sound will not be output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure for the stop operation is not notified. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is announced and the "Middle Reply" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a situation occurs, one of the The player will clearly recognize that the semi-limit process has been activated, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any semi-limit process is activated (or it may be after the activation of any quasi-limit process), "F_Replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won. In addition, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if it is configured such that "Win (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the favorable zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the favorable zone game number counter, the value of the favorable zone payout counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout counter, as well as the value of the 1G consecutive counter and the presence or absence of ceiling shortening (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process), etc., when each limit process is executed, can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you use the "Navi count" to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, you can use normal limit processing (Navi count), special limit processing (Navi count), or semi-limit processing (Navi count) in the same way as above. (number of times) can also be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, and the value at which limit processing is normally performed for the adopted element. By defining a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which quasi-limit processing is executed, each limit process can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is controlled for a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the number of advantageous section games counter is "1500" or more), or the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the number of advantageous section payout counters is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445") or above), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If the vehicle is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections are terminated when the vehicle transitions to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous section). When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more) When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more) , or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), an advantageous state If not, the system shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections ends.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. Moreover, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if the condition is not advantageous, it is changed to an advantageous condition and then terminated. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the period during which the advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), so that it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value awarded to the player from being excessively restricted while still taking into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period. When the special period is shorter and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or, when the amount of gaming value awarded in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control payout counter is at the semi-limit) When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value that is executed, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the player may be granted more rights than he or she can consume, and in such a situation, a series of advantageous sections will be forcibly terminated, causing the player to feel a sense of distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," it is important to note that, for example, when the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount" are Even if there is a difference between the amount of gaming value that was originally awarded and the amount of gaming value that was actually awarded, the calculation is based on the amount of gaming value that was originally supposed to be awarded, without taking this difference into consideration. It is about to take place. As a result, the series of advantageous sections may be extended unnecessarily due to the actions of such players, and unfairness may arise between players who have committed such actions and players who have not. Since it is possible to prevent players from putting the game away, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., a state after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is made to prevent the display of a special pattern combination (e.g., "fixed cherry replay") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger that started the advantageous state in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any presentation execution means may be used to make the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is given, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to start from the next game starts from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stop operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is possible to issue a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound), but when the granting of rights is suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to issue a special notification. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that started the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any performance execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the decision as to whether or not to issue a special notification is made depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of betted game value, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state, This allows normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) to be executed.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the three-coin bet state, but do not perform counting in the two-coin bet state. Therefore, in the three-coin bet state, it is possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed, but in the two-coin bet state, it is not possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-coin bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous periods even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning the minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), so playing in the two-coin bet state is more disadvantageous to the player than playing in the three-coin bet state. However, the method of making playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player is not limited to this. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus is played, the stopping operation procedure may be notified, so that the player is at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount of gaming value (for example, "3 coins") being bet, a series of advantageous sections are forced in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that On the other hand, if a second amount of gaming value (for example, "2 coins") is bet and a game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible for the player to realize that he or she did not play the game using the intended gaming method, thereby encouraging the player to play the game using the intended gaming method.

Furthermore, in a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the second amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played than when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played. Therefore, by making it possible to call attention to this, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous situation, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a way that is not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to this.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the 1 byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also shows the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, and its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). It is used to For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the winning line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed on the winning line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable identification of the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured with a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles ("1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover roles stored in the carryover role storage area are retained and not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. Also, while the carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning role (minor role/replay role) determined by the internal lottery process.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that in the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later. You can also. Further, the same applies to the game sections of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. It is possible to provide an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game status flag in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It is possible to provide an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game state flag in this gaming state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Further, for example, if the current mode is Heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Furthermore, bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that has been pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that has been pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Pressing order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but "1" remains stored in bit 1. "0" is now stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 32. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, various processes necessary when the power is turned on are performed. Note that details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception/start check process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random value acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for performance (other random numbers for lottery) used in various kinds of lottery related to gameplay (for example, in the range of 0 to 65,535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and the various extracted random numbers are stored in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the above. The required number of random values can be obtained as appropriate from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range 0 to 65535, the range 0 to 32767, the range 0 to 255, or the range 0 to 127, etc.). .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining an internal winning combination are performed based on an internal lottery table and random numbers for internal lottery depending on the current gaming state and the like. Note that details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this process, for various game states, when a game starts, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the start of the game will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, data of a start command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Furthermore, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the start of play (S8). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the start of play, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the start of play, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification of the pseudo game) is controlled. Also, for example, if the AT state is present and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Also, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this processing, various information required for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of attraction priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). In this processing, it requests that all reels start spinning. Then, when it is requested that all reels start spinning, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control processing described below (see S203 in FIG. 32), and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts spinning. Each reel that has started spinning is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, in this processing, a reel spin start command generation and storage processing is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S11). In this process, data indicating the pull-in priority order is obtained for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case) by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table, and stored in a pull-in priority order data storage area (not shown). Note that, although not shown, a symbol code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control sets set accordingly) and the stop operation state of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. The reel stop control process will be described in detail later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning activation command generation and storage process is performed.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout/replay activation process (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processes necessary to activate a replay in the next game are performed. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. In addition, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main side performance control processing at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the end of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-described processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the configuration may be such that processes other than these processes are performed as necessary, or the configuration may be configured such that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on process performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally based on the results of the test (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (S21: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the settings can be changed.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing settings (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a carryover combination storage area, a gaming state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or other storage area where data needs to be erased when changing settings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation, and then a new setting value is set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value has been set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S26: YES), initialization command generation and storage processing is performed (S27). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various pieces of information backed up when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off (power outage) are normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). In this process, it performs a process to return the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power to the slot machine 1 once, and does not proceed to normal processing (S2 onward in FIG. 23) until a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal reception/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the medal reception/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay winning combination was won in the previous unit game (replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the process in S42, it performs a medal auxiliary storage switch check process (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on. If it is determined that it is in the on state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Further, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the on state, this process is ended.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether the acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the state becomes one in which medals can be accepted (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (acceptance of medals is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is put on hold until the error is resolved.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the detection results of the bet switch 6S. Also, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to give credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". If the main CPU 101 judges that it is not possible to insert medals or to give credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state as one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the game is not ready to accept medals (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that the game is ready to accept medals or receive credits (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of medals inserted is the number that allows play to begin (S49). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of coins inserted is the number of coins that can be used to start the game (S49: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 then ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of coins inserted is not the number that can start the game (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the on state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 performs processing. is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that in this process, if it is determined that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the obtained internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (for example, by addition update) using the lottery value of each internal lottery combination specified in the internal lottery table that has been set, and the updated result becomes the predetermined result. (e.g., overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. In addition, if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all the internal winning combinations, the result of the current unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" will be determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and sequentially updates the random numbers for internal lottery) until all internal winning combinations are determined (or if the internal winning combinations are determined midway through the process). (until it is determined) the process of S64 is repeated.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (that is, it is not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but is a small combination or a replay combination). It is determined whether or not it is a winning combination (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover winning combination (S66: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning role is not a role that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), and after processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning role is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role eligible for carryover (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus roles have not yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover role storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover role storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover role storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning role is not a role eligible for carryover (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (S71 is NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when a bonus role is carried over (or a winning role has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71 is YES), and after the process in S72, it performs a sub-flag etc. setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on a stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, a check is made as to whether or not a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state is satisfied. For example, in the case of transitioning to a flag interval as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus role, this process checks whether or not the predetermined bonus role has been won. In the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is not necessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific transition condition is satisfied and a specific number of games are played, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set game state (S84). In this process, when it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or to set a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the game state, such setting process is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S85), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when starting play, it checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (favorable zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process, for example, involves conducting the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery, and checking whether the lottery result will start the favorable zone.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S87: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of an advantageous section, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections), etc. Perform the setting process as appropriate.

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started favorable zone. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the set mode or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, according to the set destination mode, when the mode is shifted to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the play period, when the mode is shifted to the end mode, "32 games" is set as the play period, and when the mode is shifted to the other mode, the corresponding ceiling number of games is set. In addition, the lottery value (lottery table) in various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) is set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85: NO), it performs processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting play, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) is met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition for the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) in the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the start of play, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and a process is performed to extend the pseudo bonus according to the lottery result.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the information of the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be included in the start command are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur, and in this process, whether or not navigation occurs may be determined according to a predetermined condition (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of navigation occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether a mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is the same as the process of S90 described above, for example. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not met (NO in S105), it ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone.

The state control process at the start of play shown in FIG. 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in FIG. 30, as well as the process at the start of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 28 and the process at the end of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 31, are basically almost the same processing configuration. This means that for processes that may be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that refer to a determined internal lottery role, such as a game state or mode transition, but the processing result only needs to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the time the next game starts)), they may be performed in either one of them, and do not mean that similar processes are performed in both cases in duplicate. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (such as the navigation setting processing described above) may be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (such as processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when game play ends. Also, for example, processing that needs to be performed at a specified time after game play begins and before game play ends, or processing where it is better to perform processing (such as processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation) may be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels rotate at the constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. In addition, the activated stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the process waits until a valid stop button is operated. When automatic stop control is to be performed, this wait time is measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bits in the operation stop button storage area are "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process for determining the number of sliding pieces (S117). In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 refers to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned pull-in priority data storage area, and determines the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (amount of movement of the symbols).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will finally stop based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above is stored as the planned stop position. .

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether there are any reels that are still rotating (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or the pull priority table set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, for example, depending on the stop operation mode performed by the player up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels is set as the set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the attraction priority is obtained by referring to the attraction priority order table, and is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when transitioning to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, a check is performed in this process to see if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not the termination conditions for these gaming states are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, when the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state, if the end condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and even if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". For example, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the end condition.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing in S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the conditions for starting the advantageous section are established (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S86 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the starting conditions for the advantageous section are not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process for starting the advantageous section (S138). Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S88 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S89 described above (game start state control process).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S90 described above (state control process at the start of play).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current play period is not a non-favorable period (i.e., it is a favorable period) (NO in S135), it performs processing at the end of play during the favorable period (S141). Details of the processing at the end of play during the favorable period will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (end conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S143: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied (S143: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during an advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing gaming periods such as various modes (gaming states) during an advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S152). When the main CPU 101 judges that the specific mode is in progress (YES in S152), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of play) (S153). In this processing, for example, when the play ends and the play period of the AT state can be extended (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets), it judges whether or not the conditions for such an extension are met, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the judgment result (if the play period of the AT state can be shortened, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered, and processing for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152) and after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to the process of S140 described above, for example. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), it ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of periodic interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in the periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs register saving processing (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt and the input state at the time of the current interrupt are compared to check whether there has been a change in the input state, and if there is a change in the input state, the input state of the main RAM 103 is The change is stored in port storage area 0 (not shown), and input states that are not related to the change are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing; however, for example, the various command data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication; however, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door opening/closing check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a register restoration process (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the outline of the sub-side control process.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but not so many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can use various configurations depending on the type and number of connected presentation devices, the type of presentation performed by the presentation devices, etc., and the manufacturing costs, etc. This is why it is written "Overview" in Figure 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This process detects whether an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary to perform various production execution control processes described below. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it performs a production execution control process upon command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if settings have been changed, initialization processing is executed on the sub side as appropriate, and the settings must be changed. If so, processing is also executed on the sub side to restore the state to the state before the power cut.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination or game state, etc. is determined (by lottery if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, it refers to the parameter information of the received lock command, determines the content of the performance that is linked to the content of the lock performance, and creates various performances so that the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to and linked with the stop start position and planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) The content of the performance is determined and various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the determined content is executed. For example, when a winning activation command is received, the information on the parameters of the received winning activation command is referred to, and when a bonus is awarded, the content of the performance that is linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and the determined content is The various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation is performed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), and for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the sub-CPU 201 executes production when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when a performance button corresponding to the performance is operated during execution of the operation-linked performance, various performance devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked performance changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, while not playing a game, control is performed to display the user menu. Further, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is displayed, control is performed in accordance with these operations.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other production execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, if the non-operation period in which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed is a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration status notification is determined and determined. The various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of Pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has various functions for controlling the game and the presentation, as well as various configurations for implementing these functions, but it can also have other functions, such as those shown below. In the following, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming facility's side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and the appropriate selection/decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the player can obtain various information. , it is possible to make various settings.

For example, if "Arrangement/Payout Table" is selected/determined, it is possible to confirm the symbol arrangement in the Pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the game information showing the payout (contents of benefits) when winning the prize. The following information screen is displayed on the performance display section.

For example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed on the performance display section. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected/determined, the production mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the production, the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character, etc.) or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of production occurrence (including the type of expectation when the production occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (production execution timing) etc.) A setting screen is displayed on the effect display section where the settings can be made. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

For example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and by logging out when the game is over, the player can confirm or obtain game history information (e.g., information according to various game results, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, and the maximum number of coins won).

In addition, for example, the game history information also includes information regarding associated benefits, such as information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during play and the type of music that can be output depending on the game result (achievement of the unlocking conditions), and information indicating the type of character that can be displayed on the player's mobile terminal and the type of music that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and out of such information provision services. For example, the player may use his/her terminal to read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen to log in and out, or the player may enter a password or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a four- to ten-digit character string may be displayed as a password to be entered next time, which the player may obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it on a mobile device, and the password obtained in this way may be entered when logging in before the start of the next game). These methods can also be combined as appropriate to log in and out.

[8-2. Game store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (this may be a setting change operation or other operation by the game hall administrator) by the game parlor administrator, and the desired menu is selected from the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected/determined, the game parlor manager can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen that allows the date and time, etc. of the slot machine 1 to be set is displayed in the performance display section. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the number of coins inserted and paid out during a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1. For example, when "error information history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the date and time of error occurrences and their contents within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1.

For example, when "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the door opening date and time within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the Pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, when "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set the manner and frequency of various warning notifications on the Pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation section that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation section that accepts effect operations).

Further, for example, when "stop-stop setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the stop-stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the discontinuation function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, disables the game until a cancellation operation (for example, a reset operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the cancellation function is set to the ON state, an automatic payment function, which will be described later, may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

For example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (i.e., all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, either the bonus state, the increase zone, or the advantageous zone (including the effect zone)) ends. When the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, since it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (e.g., a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to gaming machines called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) according to the game actions (operations) of the player. In addition, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area where game balls can roll and fall, a glass door including a protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. (It may be provided outside the gaming area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit that includes various control boards that perform various controls related to games and performances, and these are connected to the frame ( (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame" etc.).

In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, there is a firing handle as one of the player's operating means, an upper tray that can store game balls to be used in the game, and a lower tray that can store the game balls that are put out. etc. are provided. Note that many of them are provided with the above-mentioned presentation buttons and movable presentation devices. In addition, the gaming area includes, for example, a starting area (sometimes referred to as a "starting hole" etc.) through which a game ball can pass, a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning hole" etc.), A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "big winning hole" etc.) that can change between a state in which it is easy for game balls to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and identification information (also referred to as a "design" etc.). In some cases, a variable display device or the like is provided that can variably display ``special symbols'' and ``normal symbols''.

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a launch handle to launch a game ball into a game area to play. For example, when a launched game ball passes through a starting area, a variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to transition the game state (for example, whether or not to transition to a big win game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player) is determined based on a probability according to the current state (for example, whether or not the game state is in a certain probability game state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (that is, whether or not to transition the game state is determined by lottery (or judgment)). After that, when a stop condition for the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is established, the variable display stops in a stop mode according to the above-mentioned determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result is one that transitions the game state (a win), the stop mode that is stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the win, and the game state corresponding to the win is transitioned in response to the display result being displayed. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not change the game state (miss), the display result for the stop mode also corresponds to a miss, and the game state does not change. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

That is, in the Pachislot machine 1, the game is started when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in the Pachinko machine, the game is started when the player operates the handle to fire the necessary game balls. Although they differ in that, for example, the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, they both have the same point that the game is started by the player's game action. Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine have in common that the stop mode in which display is finally permitted (in other words, the content of the privilege to be granted) is determined when the start opportunity is established. .

Furthermore, the Pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display by the player's stop operation, whereas the Pachinko machine stops the variable display when the stop condition is met (without the player's stop operation), which is different, but they are similar in that they both stop the variable display according to a pre-determined result and award a bonus according to the stopped state. The Pachislot machine 1 and the Pachinko machine are also similar in that they are capable of executing effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-mentioned effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the Pachinko machine may also be provided with effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes also referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but since the variable display device is small and the display results are shown as lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by varying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. And, the variable display of such decorative symbols (for presentation purposes, the variable display may start after a certain delay when the start trigger is established, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is established) is basically the same as the variable table device described above, and displays the identification information variably or statically as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a special stop mode (for example, matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a non-special stop mode (for example, scattered symbols)). Therefore, it is possible to apply the invention according to this embodiment to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

That is, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 are those that have characteristics unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced with game balls, etc.) ) can be applied to the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine.

In pachinko machines, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit implemented on a main control board (including some payout-related controls that may be performed by a payout control circuit implemented on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to the presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit implemented on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various items described as the electrical configuration of pachinko machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachinko machine 1 (for example, those related to the stop operation, etc.).

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for the small role is made more advantageous than the non-bonus state, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for the replay role is made more advantageous than the non-RT state, making it possible to continue a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, a favorable stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also provide various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, and thus making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes called an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to create a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a probability-variation game state, special symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to continue a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state of a Pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the Pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones, etc.). The same applies to the various other matters described as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in pachinko machines, it is possible to switch to the time-saving game state when the number of plays in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that can switch to a favorable state (e.g., time-saving game state) as a relief from being stuck if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without switching to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot game state)). Therefore, the various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

In addition, in a pachinko machine, when the stop state of the variable display device during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) corresponds to a specific miss, this can trigger a transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, a transition (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible in a pachinko machine as well, due to the display of a specific display result (specific combination of symbols). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to an RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols in a pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result in a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's bet operation (that is, the operation of inserting the medals in hand into the medal slot 5 and placing a bet, or placing the credited medals on the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) The game is started with one of the starting conditions being that there is an operation (operating 6b to place a bet), and if there is a payout of medals when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven and the medal payout port 11 is activated. Although the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all forms in which a player bets the gaming value required for a game, plays the game based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded (e.g., gaming value is awarded) based on the results of the game. In other words, the invention can be applied not only to forms in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and medals are paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner in which the player cannot directly touch the gaming value), allowing for medal-free play. Here, such a pachislot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medal-less gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

Note that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) that is attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may also be a (connected) gaming value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal number control board"). An example in which this gaming value management device is provided will be explained below.

The gaming value management device is a device that includes at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the pachislot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device will be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") via an external gaming value providing device (such as a "communication-only unit") for bidirectional communication. The gaming value management device performs the necessary communication with an external gaming value providing device to provide the gaming value lending operation (i.e., providing the gaming value necessary for the player to perform the gaming value betting operation). (i.e., the action of providing the player with the gaming value related to the awarding when the winning role is won (the winning combination is established), etc.); The player shall be able to perform actions such as electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by the action. Note that the gaming value providing device is sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming media) handling device," "gaming value (gaming media) lending device," or "sand."

In addition, the external gaming value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server), and the gaming value management device communicates with the external ball output management device through communication devices and external gaming value management devices. It is configured to be able to transmit ball release management information via the providing device. Here, the put-out ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for an external ball-out management device to manage the put-out balls. Note that an example of the ball release management information will be described later. Furthermore, the external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, via an Internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, for example, the term "balls paid out" refers to the difference number (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number paid out. The extent to which benefits are given to players (for example, how much the player has gained (how much has the game store lost), or how much has the player lost (how much has the game store gained)? The concept also includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling expected by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed gaming value number display device (not shown) is provided on the front side of the Pachislot machine 1 to display the number of held gaming values, and the gaming value management device is configured to control the number of game values based on the management result of the number of gaming values held. The number of game values displayed on the held game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may be configured to not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming using an electromagnetic method, but also to be able to control the display of the recorded results. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device, and also allows the player to It has the ability to not reduce the number of recorded game values except when directly operated, and the signal indicating the number of recorded game values can only be transmitted through a communication device. is desirable.

The gaming value management device may have not only a function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also a function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the physical action of the player and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical action of the pachinko slot machine 1. In other words, it may be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachinko slot machine 1. In this way, the pachinko slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the medal-less gaming machine described above, so that the pachinko slot machine 1 can have a common configuration regardless of the specification. In this case, the gaming value management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or a method of indirectly controlling them by controlling them by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a rental operating means and a return (payment) operating means, which can be operated by a player. In addition, the gaming value providing device includes various devices such as an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (for example, an IC card), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for the operation of the medalless gaming machine, such as a loan operating means and a return operating means, which can be operated by a player may be provided (none of which are shown). Note that the insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the gaming parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the gaming parlor. The gaming value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on that day (invalid after the next day), but the gaming value recorded on the member recording medium is valid even after the next day.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be explained. For example, first, the player deposits value into the gaming value providing device using any method. The gaming value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of negotiable values in response to a player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with a gaming value corresponding to the subtracted negotiable value. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operations if more gaming value is required. Thereafter, when the player ends the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values based on the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The gaming value management device transmits the number of gaming values to the gaming value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The gaming value management device clears the number of gaming values stored in itself when transmitting the number of gaming values. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, or the player can take the ejected recording medium to a gaming value providing device compatible with other Pachislot machines 1. By inserting it, you can move the machine and continue playing. Further, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it is valid even after the next day, so the game can be stopped at this point.

Note that in the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. It may be configured such that only the number of game values desired by the player can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. In addition, the gaming value providing device records the transmitted gaming value number on a recording medium and outputs it, but it uses the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna etc. to send the same value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalent may be sent as long as it provides the player with something of equal value.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device is provided with a lock operating means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled depending on the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the Pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

The medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, does not require some external structures such as the medal insertion port 5 and medal payout port 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32, so not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but the power consumption of the gaming machine can also be reduced. Also, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medalless gaming machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in which the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. Note that, below, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (gaming value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (number of gaming values) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication dedicated unit (gaming value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for ball output management managed by an association (an information center) to which gaming machine manufacturers are members, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device. This is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling performance of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

From this perspective, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the slot machine 1, and therefore must be provided inside the slot machine 1 in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a manner.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records that the crimp has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed inside the case. The board shall be stored so that it is easily visible.

Here, the medal number control board case of configuration example 2 may be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or may be configured to undergo at least a part of the sealing process. You can also do that. For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same way as the main control board case, but a sealing sticker may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is mandatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball management device. That is, it shows an example of ball management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball management device via the connection terminal board and the communication unit. Note that this is only an example, and it is possible to configure the device so that some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34.

The timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may also be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device may also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is capable of monitoring the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least for each unit (e.g., each business day of an amusement facility), the information may be transmitted at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's bet operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game), excluding the number bet by the replay operation. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "total number of paid out coins" is the cumulative number of paid out coins per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values granted by the payout process of the gaming machine, excluding those granted by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference in the number of coins that occurred during one unit after the power was turned on for each gaming machine (in short, the number of difference in the number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference in the number of medals, and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours at the game parlor), and the communication-only unit transmits the information. is transmitted to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "total number of coins paid out from game devices" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of coins paid out while the various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the various game devices are in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the various game devices are in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the closing time of the gaming establishment).

The accumulated data "Total number of consecutive paid out coins" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. This is the cumulative number of coins paid out during operation. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of a continuous accessory) of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of a gaming machine during the operation of a continuous accessory. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

The medal count control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous role ratio information, the accumulated data "advantageous zone ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information, the accumulated data "instruction-included role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the AT state, and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the operation of various roles.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPU ID", hereafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the individual identification number that was sent. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code that was sent. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball output management device is capable of accumulating various types of information (ball output management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball output management device can identify the gaming machine that is the sender based on these pieces of individual identification information, and also, for example, from a certain point on, the "main control chip ID number" and "medal number control chip ID number" If the correspondence relationships between the two control boards become different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out).

Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted coins" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can recognize whether the gambling quality of the sending gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the ball output information. For example, if the ``total number of coins paid out'' or ``instruction included accessory ratio'' becomes extremely high after a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out, or there is some flaw in the original specification design. It is possible to recognize the possibility that something has happened.

If the ball output management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the result will be notified to the gaming facility or gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by constructing a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to manage the number of game values owned by a player. Therefore, in order to allow the manager of the gaming facility to grasp such management status or other information, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects and calculates various types of information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball output management information) regarding the number of gaming values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. Incidentally, if all the display contents of the winning ratio monitoring device 54 are displayed by the medal number monitoring device, the winning ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (e.g., a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or for switching its contents may be provided within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

Note that the medal number monitoring device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error with the connection terminal board, a communication error with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In certain cases, a corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order for the game parlor manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed on or near the medal number control board case. What is necessary is to provide an explanatory section (such as pasting a sticker or printing) to show the information.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. In this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also reduces the amount of wiring to the outside, thereby improving security.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least in the cabinet G. Thereby, work efficiency during connection can be improved. Further, since the length of the wiring can be made constant and the wiring locations can be limited, the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit ball-discharge management information to the ball-discharge management device. The ball-discharge management device can appropriately manage the ball-discharge performance of each medalless gaming machine by the transmitted ball-discharge management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball-discharge performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the device may not have a function of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball output performance, and on the premise that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

For example, the medal number control board is configured to include a payout monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). The ball payout monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but monitors the ball payout in such a way that it is not initialized when the advantageous section ends. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantageous section itself will not be forcibly terminated, but the probability of navigation occurrence will be reduced, the probability that the AT state will be extended, etc. Alternatively, the AT state itself may be terminated to reduce the ball dispensing performance. Even in this case, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball dispensing performance. In addition, in this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball release management device as ball release management information. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which both the medal number control board and the ball output management device can manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of main control board of pachislot machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, below, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, in the Pachislot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board management number must be printed on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the management number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed in letters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that a pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Corporation. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" at the bottom are printed. Thereafter, if Model A is removed from the game parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different Pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model B"), then AA Co., Ltd. AA laser-engraved the manufacturer's name and board management number printed on the lower row, and in a different space wrote the manufacturer's manufacturing number and board management number related to the company (for example, the manufacturer's name and board management number on the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22" must be newly printed.

Then, if model B is subsequently removed from the gaming establishment, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to remove the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line by laser engraving, and print a new manufacturing number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints mentioned above.

This is also true in cases where multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers have been printed on the machine from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the machine in advance, the serial numbers and board control numbers for AA Co., Ltd. are erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the machine, AA Co., Ltd. will not be able to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, it is possible to increase the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can be used. In other words, the code may be any code as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Afterwards, when Model A is removed from the game parlor and AA Corporation attempts to manufacture Model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, so that the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of AA Co., Ltd., and thus it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

That is, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a board management number is printed, similarly to configuration example 2 described above. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, multiple codes (for example, four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Corporation and BB Corporation. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the parts corresponding to each code are crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., so that the codes can be fixed in an unreadable state. In addition, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released to make the codes readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, model A was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right is made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even new pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, further reuse is possible, and it is also possible for the machine to be reused by a greater number of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided, and the code is printed in the location corresponding to the crimping hole each time the machine is reused.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, the pachi-slot machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The Pachislot machine 1 is capable of playing games using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, etc., as well as game media such as cards that are given or will be given to players and that store information on game value. In the following explanation, it is assumed that medals are used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachi-slot machine 1 toward the player will be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side will be referred to as the rear side (backward direction, depth direction). The right side and left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, respectively. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is called the front-back direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is called the left-right direction or the width direction. The direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the appearance of the pachi-slot machine 1 is comprised of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Furthermore, two openings G41 are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of these two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 38, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower parts of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening approximately in the center of the upper part. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is attached to the back side of the main display window DD4. Furthermore, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (center reel), and RR (right reel), each of which has multiple types of symbols painted on its outer periphery. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the symbols painted on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be seen through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4, so that players and the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c having substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. A medal slot DD5 for inserting medals is provided in the first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4. The medal slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted through the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

A maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as MAXBET button) is provided on the second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 as an effective line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

The liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third base portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel, in which a touch sensor panel is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel) as a touch-type position input device. The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal, or a type that detects contact with a hard material such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or it may be of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses on its display screen, as well as displaying game information selected by the player. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input may be displayed.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is also possible to display content (performance information) corresponding to the performance related to the game on its display screen, for example, as the game progresses. Moreover, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a production accessory or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be attached. Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by distributing its functions to a display unit A, etc., which will be described later.

On the front side of the max bet button DD8 is a start lever DD6 that is operated by the player to rotate the reels RL, RC, and RR and start the changing display of the symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so that it can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R that the player can press (stop) to stop the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR.

The C/P button DD13 is provided to the left of the max bet button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is used to switch between credit and payout of medals won by the player in the game by pressing the button. When payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are paid out from a medal payout outlet DD14 (cancel chute) provided in the coin guard plate section on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiver DD15.

A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is located below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. The name of the model of the pachislot machine 1 and various patterns are printed on the waist panel DD18.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information regarding the game through sounds such as voices and music. Furthermore, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning and the number of remaining medals that have been credited. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the pachi-slot machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits less than 50 is displayed. Note that in a state where the maximum number of 50 medals has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout opening DD14. Further, the sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may include a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 39, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and includes the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire pachislot machine 1, and the sub-control device SS (see FIG. 46). etc. are accommodated. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the Pachislot machine 1, such as determining internal winning combinations, rotating and stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determining whether or not there is a prize. do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls execution of effects such as video display.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 40, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image onto the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. By projecting images that are generated based on performance information (e.g.) and shapes, it is possible to create sophisticated and powerful performances.

The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in the front. This housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box-rectangular shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the top surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 41, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is placed in front of the projector device B2 and is placed diagonally downward and rearward to emit the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being covered by a case B22, and is disposed at the rear inside the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. Thereby, the lens unit B21 and optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 47) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so that the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) is emitted toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. There is. Details of this projector device B2 will be described later using FIGS. 46 to 52.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 41, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (in the direction in which the irradiated light is emitted). As shown in FIG. 42, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 that fix both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 43, the mirror holder B31 is formed into a plate shape with a rectangular front surface. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed in the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Furthermore, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the vertical angle adjustment holes B311 and B311.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the center and is formed with a size that does not overlap with the angle adjustment hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so that they partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut against both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted into the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, thereby holding the optical mirror B32 in the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 44, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is positioned so as to be exposed to the front when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws passing through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are inserted into the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

When the screws are rotated in a direction in which the screws are loosened from the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction that tightens the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

As mentioned above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is placed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is being held. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner parts of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where each of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from the optical mirror B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

In addition, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end face of the spring abuts against the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end face abuts against the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding part B11, so that the spring is sandwiched between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 passes through the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the spring force causes the head of the screw to abut against the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, so that the screw head does not jump out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding part B11 and the screw is prevented from being lost.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 45, the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. Note that the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has a sloped surface B2a1 at the front thereof that slopes upward from the rear toward the front. As shown in FIG. 43, the projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall part B12, a reflector holding part B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall part B12, and symmetrical arrangement in the left-right direction of the upper wall part B12. side wall portions B13, B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects further forward than the cabinet G (see FIG. 40). A reflector holding part B11 is formed in the center of the front part of the upper wall part B12 so as to protrude forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that its angle can be adjusted. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
The projection unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 40). This makes it possible for the display unit A to handle the projection unit B and the screen device C as a unit.

Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that make images appear by irradiation with irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each constructed by applying screen paint to a base material, and each has a projection surface on which an image can appear.

The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have mutually different shapes in order to diversify image expression. Specifically, while the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are flat, the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape when viewed from the side. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are respectively movable screens. (not shown).

(Electrical and Optical Configuration of Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 46, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The above-mentioned sub-control device SS is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 in accordance with the performance operation of the screen and the props, and displays an image as a visual performance by projecting irradiation light onto the screen and the props via the optical mechanism B24. In addition, in the assembly process of the display unit A, an adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. This adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to perform initial focus setting. In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as an adjustment device for the projector device B2, but the adjustment device for the projector device B2 may be a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone on which an adjustment program (application software) is installed, or a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 includes, as components arranged around the lens unit B21, an LED light source that emits R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color light, a DMD, and a focus mechanism for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on a command from the sub-control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control device SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores the control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to the settings and adjustments of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24 and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in a specific direction by the DMD travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, and enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 and directed to the projection target. As a result, the irradiated light is projected onto the screen or prop that is the projection target, and an image according to the production is formed.

In this embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Furthermore, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by returning the irradiated light using the mirror mechanism B3, and also makes the projection distance of the irradiated light as short as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be less expensive and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(Mechanical configuration of display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 47, the projector device B2 includes a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged to cover the lower surface of the case B22. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate portion of the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1 via an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. In this embodiment, an upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall part B12, and a lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end of the case B22 so as to cover the upper opening of the case B22. Lower pedestal B221 is connected. The installation and adjustment procedure for such a projector device B2 will be described later.

The projector device B2 also includes a lens unit B21, an LED board (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD board (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 with the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 covered by a lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED board, a DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B, and an exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

Such a projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control device SS so as to receive video data related to images such as performances from the sub-control device SS, and to project the video onto a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the performance.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 in response to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the production, and adjusts the focus so that the image is projected clearly onto the projection surface of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are in partial contact with the back surface of the LED board. Heat sink 243D partially contacts the back side of the DMD board. In this embodiment, as for the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in the LED board and DMD board into the air, so that the temperature of the optical elements and board does not increase until the optical characteristics change significantly. Dissipates heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipation members, are made of aluminum material with high heat conductivity to enhance the heat dissipation effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipation fins to increase the contact area with the air.

The intake fan 244A is positioned close to the rear of the front right side of case B22, close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is positioned close to the rear of the left side of case B22, close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is positioned close to the rear of the rear part of case B22, close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided at the front right side of the case B22 where the intake fan 244A is close to, and an exhaust port B22E is provided at the rear right side of the case B22 where the heat sink 243R faces the intake port B22A. It is being An air intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 adjacent to the air intake fan 244B, and an air intake port B22B is provided in the other part of the left side of the case B22 so as to be aligned with the air intake port B22B. An intake port B22C is provided so that air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 adjacent to the exhaust fan 245.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, a flow of air is formed in which air is forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. . In addition, inside the case B22, after the air is forcibly taken in from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the air is forcibly taken in by the exhaust fan 245 from the exhaust port B22D while removing heat from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G. A flow of air is formed that is exhausted to the Furthermore, inside the case B22, a flow of air is formed that is taken in from the intake port B22C and then forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while mainly removing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. .

The projector control board B23 is attached to the underside of the case B22 while being covered by the undercover B223. The projector control board B23 is equipped with a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, etc. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged inside the case B22, and also to the focus mechanism.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Adjustment of position and attitude of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the upper base B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1, and has a rectangular main body 2200, a left end 2201a and a right end 2201b which are formed by bending both the left and right sides of the main body 2200 downward and outward, and which extend to both the left and right sides with a step from the main body 2200, and a rear end 2202 which partially extends rearward from the rear side of the main body 2200. The main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower base B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b are each provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the underside of the upper wall B12 by screw fastening. In this embodiment, three rectangular holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and are equally spaced in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the rectangular holes 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) that is inserted and fastened into the rectangular holes 2201c.

The lower base B221 is a sheet metal member that generally corresponds to the main body 2200 and rear end 2202 of the upper base B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed with the lower base B221 so as to protrude upward in correspondence with the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower base B221. The lower base B221 is connected in a suspended state to the underside of the upper base B220 by fastening a nut 2213 to the end of the connecting screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212 from the upper surface side of the upper base B220 while fitting the coil spring 2211 onto each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiching the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. As shown in FIG. 47, the lower base B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower base B221 is connected to the underside of the upper base B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in Figures 47 to 50, the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 are connected at three connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance between them can be adjusted. Each of the connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 is composed of the connecting hole 2200A of the upper base B220 and the connecting screw part 2210, coil spring 2211, washer 2212, and nut 2213 of the lower base B221.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that its positioning and optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 51 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram in FIG. 51(a) shows the mounting screw T inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper diagram in FIG. 51(a) FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line BB' shown in the lower figure. Note that although FIG. 51 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square holes 2201c in the left end 2201a and right end 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged approximately in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W disposed along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. Thereby, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by similar screws.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by the symbol A in FIG. 51(a) is the gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 51(a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is positioned and fixed at approximately the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

Figure 51(b) shows a state in which the left end 2201a of the upper base B220 has been shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to Figure 51(a). The upper view of Figure 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D' shown in the lower view of Figure 51(b). In the state shown in Figure 51(b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is shifted relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is movable within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by the symbol C.

In this way, the upper base B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square holes 2201c. That is, the attachment position of the projector device B2 relative to the upper wall B12 is adjusted in the left-right and front-back directions by the multiple square holes 2201c provided at the left end 2201a and right end 2201b of the upper base B220. This allows the direction of light emitted from the projector device B2 to be easily adjusted so that it is perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincides with the front-back direction as a reference direction.

Figure 52 shows the connection structure of the lower base B221 to the upper base B220. Figure 52 is a cross-sectional view showing the state in which the lower base B221 is connected to the upper base B220 at the connection part R2 by the connection hole 2200A, the connection screw part 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213. Note that Figure 52 shows one connection part R2, but the remaining connection parts R1 and R3 are similar.

The connecting screw part 2210 of the lower base B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the underside of the main body part 2200 of the upper base B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via a washer 2212 arranged on the upper side of the main body part 2200. A coil spring 2211 is fitted on the connecting screw part 2210, and this coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the underside of the main body part 2200 and the upper surface of the lower base B221 at the periphery of the connecting hole 2200A. Such a coil spring 2211 biases the parts near the connecting part R2 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 in a direction away from each other (up and down direction), thereby preventing loosening at the screwed part between the connecting screw part 2210 and the nut 2213.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 can be changed by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening or loosening direction while being biased by the coil spring 2211. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper base B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12, not shown in FIG. 52. Therefore, the portion of the lower base B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction approaching the upper base B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 in the connecting portion R2 is widened. In other words, the portion of the lower base B221 near the connecting portion R2 can be displaced away from the upper base B220 by loosening the nut 2213 appropriately, and the height position can be adjusted lower.

In the other connecting parts R1 and R3, the height position near the connecting parts R1 and R3 of the lower base B221 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as above. Such connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so that they are not positioned on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, specifically, so that the lines connecting them form a triangle. In other words, the height position of the lower base B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting parts R1, R2, and R3, so that the attitude of the lower base B221 can be adjusted in three-dimensional space in any direction, including the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

Such attitude adjustment of the lower base B221 is performed while projecting light from the projector device B2 supported on the lower base B221 onto a screen or the like. At that time, an image is projected onto the screen or the like by the projected light, and the attitude of the lower base B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light projected from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected in an appropriate display mode on the surface of the screen or the like. In other words, by adjusting the attitude of the lower base B221, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur in the display mode of the image.

Adjustments in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using an adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 46) connected to the projector device B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 has its optical axis direction adjusted and the displayed image on the screen etc. checked during inspections at the factory. , various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying images are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 during adjustment work (see FIG. 46). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, focus adjustment, etc. in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as horizontal and vertical adjustment value data (see FIG. 46). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 will remain unchanged even if power is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory and the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall. can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly depending on the attachment position of the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall B12, and is positioned within the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture at .

In addition, in this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three locations, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is met, four locations may be provided. You may make it provide the connection part above. Further, in this embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A, and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting threaded portion is not limited to being formed integrally with the pedestal as in this embodiment, but may be any type as long as it can be fixed to one of the pedestals. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that is fixed through the lower pedestal.

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image;
a main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on a front surface;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable;
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
a reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects light emitted from the projector (projector device B2);
a screen (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (a projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (a mirror mechanism B3),
The projector (projector device B2), the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized,
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from outside the display unit (display unit A) with the opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the Pachislot machine 1, it is possible to adjust the position of the mirror mechanism B3, so the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. However, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1),
the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A),
The projector (projector device B2) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and is capable of emitting light forward,
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector device B2) so as to be able to reflect the light irradiated from the projector (projector device B2) diagonally downward and rearward, and the reflection direction of the light can be adjusted by changing the degree of engagement of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the main body (cabinet G).

In the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with screws for adjusting the direction of light reflection, and the screws are exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the slot machine 1, the direction (angle) of light reflection can be adjusted by loosening or tightening the screws with the upper door mechanism UD open. This makes it possible to adjust the projection position even if the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate.

(2-1) a projection device (projector device B2) that projects an image by irradiating light;
a plurality of projection surfaces capable of displaying images projected by the projection device;
a driving mechanism (a front screen driving mechanism E2, a reel screen driving mechanism F2) for displacing at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces as a movable projection surface;
an upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device;
The projection surfaces are surface-treated,
the drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device;
An upper base (upper base B220) and a lower base (lower base B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall,
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper base is attached to the upper wall so that its in-plane position can be adjusted, and the lower base is attached to the upper base at three or more points so that the spacing can be adjusted while supporting the projection device.

According to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 at an appropriate position via the upper base B220 by appropriately adjusting the in-plane position of the upper base B220 relative to the upper wall portion B12, and the projector device B2 is attached so that the posture supported via the lower base B221 is appropriate by appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower base B221 relative to the upper base B220 positioned on the upper wall portion B12 at three or more connecting parts R1, R2, R3. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and spatial posture of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted using the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, and high-quality images with high visual effects can be projected onto multiple projection surfaces.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1),
The upper base and the lower base are connected to each other by a plurality of connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) at three or more locations that are not on the same straight line,
Each of the plurality of connecting portions has
A connecting screw portion (connecting screw portion 2210) that protrudes from one of the upper base and the lower base and penetrates the other of the upper base and is screwed;
A coil spring (coil spring 2211) is provided which is fitted onto the connecting screw portion and is disposed between the upper base and the lower base.

In the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 can individually adjust the distance between the three or more connecting parts R1, R2, R3 that are not on the same line by simply adjusting the amount of screw tightening of the connecting screw part 2210, and the adjusted distance is kept constant by the elastic force of the coil spring 2211. This allows fine adjustment of the posture of the projector device B2 in three mutually orthogonal axial directions in space, namely the front-rear, left-right, and up-down directions, and allows the projector device B2 to be held in the correct posture in any of the directions, for example, the up-down, left-right, and front-rear directions.

[Third embodiment]
The second embodiment has been described above. The third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Moreover, the description of the parts that apply to the third embodiment as well as the description of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221 according to this embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221 according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 54 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 55 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 56 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the case housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing the case attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member that is rectangular in plan view. As shown in FIG. 54, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by sides A, B, C, and D.

Square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left parts of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 61) by fastening screws.

In the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper base B220 to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1, thereby directly fixing the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1. In contrast, in this embodiment, a relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper base B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T that is inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c. Note that FIG. 54 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300. In this embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using a fixing plate B321 and a cap bolt. In the second embodiment, the fixing plate B321 is not shown, but when fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220, conventionally known members can be appropriately selected and used.

The upper base B220 is provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting to the lower base B221. The three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the upper base B220.

The lower pedestal B221 includes a rectangular main body B221a with a rectangular opening formed in the center, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a step from the main body B221a, and a main body B221a. This is a sheet metal member including a rear end portion B221d that extends rearward with a step.

As shown in FIG. 55, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 56, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and bending part of the portion bent downward outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d, respectively, so as to protrude upward in correspondence with the three connection holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d.

As in the second embodiment, the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 are connected in such a way that the distance between them can be adjusted at three connecting parts corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw parts 2210. Each of the three connecting parts is composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw part 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 47).

As shown in FIG. 53, the lower base B221 is provided with a number of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. The case B22 may have a similar configuration to that of the second embodiment, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, a case B22 having a rectangular box shape is used.

Similar to the second embodiment, the case B22 houses internal components of the projector device B2, such as a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 47) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 47) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) covered by the lens unit cover B222.

Although not shown, two intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged side by side in front and behind the case B22 at a location to the left of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side part B221c when attached to the lower base B221 (see FIG. 58)). A heat sink is provided to the left of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 57), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIG. 58). This creates a flow of air inside the case B22, where air is forcibly drawn in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 58, the case B22 is attached to the lower base B221 by screw fastening, and its upper end surface (upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 57) abuts against the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower base B221. Furthermore, when the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower base B221 is located higher than the upper base B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also located higher than the upper base B220.

In this regard, in the second embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower base B221, and the upper base B220 is disposed above it. Therefore, it was not possible to dispose the case B22 in the space formed between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221. In contrast, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper base B220, and the case B22 is disposed so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 passes upward through the opening, so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 can be positioned above the upper base B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for disposing the case B22.

In this way, by moving the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) upward with respect to the upper pedestal B220 compared to the second embodiment, the front part provided on the front surface of the case B22 A portion of the upper pedestal B220 is disposed in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 57) (see FIG. 58). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is placed in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the illumination light is not blocked in this way. That is, in this embodiment, the illumination light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the center of the projection lens 210 in the vertical direction) is used to emit the illumination light. The light emission position of this type of projection lens 210 is different from that of conventionally known projectors (see, for example, JP 2008-058875 A).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when emitting the irradiation light, and the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210, but the upper base B220 disposed in front of the projection lens 210 as shown in FIG. 58 exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper base B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper base B220.

Furthermore, by bending the lower base B221 downward to form the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d, the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 can be connected so that the upper base B220 is positioned above the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d. As a result, while the configuration of the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 is changed from the second embodiment, the configuration of the three connecting portions can be the same as that of the second embodiment.

Therefore, adjustments such as the optical axis direction of the light emitted from projector device B2 can be made in the same manner as in the second embodiment. Such adjustments to the optical axis direction etc. require a sophisticated computer program, and developing such a program incurs a large amount of cost. In this embodiment, adjustments such as the optical axis direction can be made using the same program as in the second embodiment, making it possible to reduce the occurrence of additional costs.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case B22 is described as having an upper wall portion B22F, but as in the second embodiment, a case B22 with an open upper side (see FIG. 47) may be used. In addition, the method of attaching the case B22 to the lower base B221 is not particularly limited, and as in the second embodiment, the case B22 may be attached to the lower base B221 by using a stay B223a (see FIG. 47).

As explained above, in this embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward compared to the second embodiment. , a new space can be created in the lower area of case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the second embodiment, and the same configuration as the second embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in this embodiment, considering other effects, a projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the second embodiment is adopted. The projector cover B1 according to this embodiment will be described below.

<Projector cover B1>
Fig. 59 is a perspective view showing a state where the upper wall part of the projector cover is removed. Fig. 60 is a plan view of the projector cover in a state where the upper wall part is removed. Fig. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view along arrow L-L of the projector cover shown in Fig. 60 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. Fig. 62 is a view of the projector cover in a state where the upper wall part is removed, seen from diagonally above. Fig. 63 is a front view of the projector cover in a state where the upper wall part is removed. Fig. 64 is a cross-sectional view along arrow M-M of the projector cover shown in Fig. 63.

As shown in FIG. 59, the projector cover B1 has a generally symmetrical structure, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside thereof. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed to protrude inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate attachment part B301 is formed to have a step, and includes a relay plate attachment surface B301a formed at the front and the rear, a position adjustment surface B301d formed above the relay plate attachment surface B301a, and a front side. and a connecting portion B301e that connects the rear relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjustment surface B301d.

The relay plate mounting surface B301a is formed with mounting holes B301b. The position adjustment surface B301d is formed with position adjustment holes B301c. The mounting holes B301b are screw holes for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screw fastening. The position adjustment holes B301c are formed in a position that faces the square holes 2201c (see FIG. 53) of the upper base B220 when the relay plate B300 is mounted to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 61, the relay plate B300 includes a main body portion B300A, a front side portion B300B that extends forward with a step from the main body portion B300A, and a front side portion B300B that extends rearward with a step from the main body portion B300A. A rear side part B300C is provided. The front side part B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body part B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. In this way, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side part B300B and the rear side part B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when attaching the relay plate B300 to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through-hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate attachment part B301 by screw fastening.

As shown in FIG. 59, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) that are open at the top are provided on both the left and right sides in the front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape that resembles a hexagon formed by sides E to J (see FIG. 60) when viewed from above.

As shown in FIG. 62, with sides E to J as the upper ends, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) are formed that continue downward from each side. Wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) that is formed continuously from side J has a shorter length in the up-down direction compared to the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. Wall surface B401e that is formed continuously from side E continues to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and is part of the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

Figure 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal plane passing through the connection portion B301e (a plane passing above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and below the position adjustment surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 64, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) that open toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 communicate with a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 inside the projector cover B1.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In this embodiment, a blind B500 is used as a member provided under the projector cover B1, instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 45) in the second embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 66 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 taken along the arrow NN, with the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover removed.

As shown in FIG. 65, the blind B500 has a generally symmetrical structure, and includes a first horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally, a first inclined portion B502a formed so as to be continuous with the first horizontal portion B501 and have an incline, a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally and continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, a second inclined portion B502c formed so as to be continuous with the second horizontal portion B502b and have an incline, a third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally and continuous with the second inclined portion B502c, a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the rear end of the third horizontal portion B502d so as to have the same width in the left-right direction as the third horizontal portion B502d, an outer wall portion B504 constituting the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. Note that the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d have a structure in which a certain range near the outer wall portion B504 is raised and is higher than the inner portion of that range.

Moreover, the blind B500 has a small room B507 that is rectangular in plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front wall B507a, an outer wall B507b, a rear wall B507d, and an inner wall B505, which are formed in the vertical direction. The front wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

In this way, the small room B507 is formed to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, so that the left-right width of the second inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d is narrower than the left-right width of the first inclined portion B502a by the length of the left-right width of the front wall portion B507a. Note that a U-shaped notch 507c with an open top is formed in the outer wall portion B507b. Also, the upper ends of the front wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear wall portion B507d are lower than the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 is formed with a first wall portion B501a that is slightly erected upward at its front end, a second wall portion B501b that continues rearward from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a, a third wall portion B501c that continues diagonally rearward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that continues rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a fifth wall portion B501e that continues inward from the fourth wall portion B501d. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

In the area surrounded by the third wall B501c, the fourth wall B501d, and the fifth wall B501e, screw holes B506 are formed for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening.

As shown in FIG. 67, when the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1. , is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Although not shown in FIG. 67, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is disposed on approximately the same plane as the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) that exists in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. There is a certain gap between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As described later, this gap is filled by the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 71). Furthermore, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 form a space P (see FIG. 67). The space P is covered at the top by the projector cover B1 and at the bottom by the blind B500. The sides of the space P are surrounded by the first wall B501a to the fifth wall B501e, inner wall B505, rear wall B503, and outer wall B504 of the blind B500, as well as the walls B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1, the surfaces B402a and B402b in the front and rear of the cavity B402, and the inner surface 403, etc.

The space P has an upper portion that is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 through an opening B400 (see FIG. 59), and is also connected to the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 64) through a cavity B402. When the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled, the cavity B402 becomes part of the space P.

As shown in Figures 66 and 67, opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) is provided with punchings B450 (right punchings B450a and left punchings B450b) having a mesh structure. This makes it possible to prevent foreign matter from entering space P through opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of Air Flow Channel and Liquid Storage Space>
Fig. 68 is a perspective view showing a state where a fan for use near the opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in Fig. 65 and a case is arranged. Fig. 69 is a perspective view showing a state where the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in Fig. 66. Fig. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where a fan for use near the opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in Fig. 67. Fig. 71 is a right side view showing a state where the fan for use near the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in Fig. 70.

As shown in FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is disposed substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat member, and its outer shape when viewed from above resembles a figure including the upper edges of the rear wall B503, outer wall B504, and inner wall B505 of the blind B500, as well as the front wall B507a and outer wall B507b (see FIG. 65) of the small room B507. As a result, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

In addition, a duct cover B650 is disposed approximately horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat plate-like member, and although its external shape in a top view is different from that of the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 75), it covers the blind B500 from above, just like the duct cover B600.

As shown in FIG. 70, the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (see FIG. 67) is a space P1 above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. For clarity, in FIG. 70, the duct cover B600 is shown with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 68, a fan B700 for use near the opening is placed on the upper front side of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for use near the opening is an intake fan, and is designed to move air present in front of the fan B700 for use near the opening backwards by passing it through the air passage B710 (see FIG. 72).

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For clarity, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the fan B700 for use near the opening is shaded.

Although not shown, in this embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G is , is accommodated in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 36). Two openings (not shown) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are respectively positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

As shown in FIG. 70, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) of the case B22 is disposed adjacent to the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58) of the case B22 is also disposed adjacent to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in this embodiment, air is taken in from outside the slot machine 1 into the interior of the upper door mechanism UD through an opening (the right opening of the two openings) formed in the top wall of the upper door mechanism UD. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken in through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 is directed to the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 67) above the duct cover B600. After moving backward through the space P1 (see FIG. 70), it changes its direction to the inside of the projector cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and then opens the air intake port B22A. It enters the inside of case B22 through.

The air that enters the inside of case B22 travels to the left while removing the heat generated inside case B22, and exits case B22 through exhaust port B22E.

After passing through cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), the air changes course and moves forward through space P1 above duct cover B650 in space P (the left space P of the two spaces P). The air then exits the projector cover B1 through opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

The air that leaves the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and is then released to the outside of the slot machine 1 through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the top wall of the upper door mechanism UD.

Among the air flows described above, the air flow paths inside the projector cover B1 are indicated by thick arrows in FIG. Further, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. In this embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD exists directly above the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a portion thereof overlaps.

Therefore, if a foreign object such as a liquid enters the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign object will enter the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign object from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid L is injected from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

The liquid L poured in through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls onto the first horizontal portion B501 (see Figure 65) of the blind B500.

As described with reference to FIG. 67, there is a certain gap between the upper end of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 is approximately equal to the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is disposed so as to abut against both the upper end of the fifth wall B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap equivalent to the height of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal part B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal part B501 toward the first inclined part B502a.

The first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination that descends toward the rear, so the liquid L flows rearward along the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. In this way, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. This flow of the liquid L is indicated by the arrows L in FIG. 70.

The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall B503 and is stored in an area surrounded by the rear wall B503, the outer wall B504, and the outer wall B507b (and the inner wall B505) (FIG. 71 reference). This area is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For clarity, in FIG. 71, the stored liquid L is shown shaded.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 70 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1 are connected via the opening B510 shown in FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the opening B510 has a shape that resembles a rectangle in side view formed by sides K to N.

The side K that constitutes the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper edge B505a (see FIG. 65) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. As shown in FIG. 65, the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 (the lower end of the opening 510) is located above the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d (the path of the liquid L).

Although not clearly shown in the figure, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper edge of the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the left end touches the outer surface of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. The main surface B610 (see FIG. 72) forms substantially the same plane as the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 68). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the liquid L storage space (space P2) are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L flows through the opening B510 to the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22). ) is becoming less likely to occur.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near opening>
FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening seen from the rear and below. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening seen from the front and below.

As shown in FIG. 72, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side part B630, a wiring opening B640 (B640a and B640b), a screw hole B650 (B650a and B650b), It is equipped with

The main surface B610 has a rectangular shape when viewed from above, with the rear left corner cut out. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the fan B700 for use near the opening, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side portion B630 is formed to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole through which a wiring connecting various functional components (sub-control device SS, etc.) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2, etc. is inserted. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engagement part B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, a left rear engagement part B622 and a right rear engagement part B622 erected from the main surface B610 behind the front engagement part B621. The side engaging portion B623 and the lower engaging portion B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower It has a right engaging part B624c).

The lower left engagement portion B624a and the lower middle engagement portion B624b connect the rear surface of the front engagement portion B621 to the front surface of the left rear engagement portion B622. The lower right engagement portion B624c connects the rear surface of the front engagement portion B621 to the front surface of the right rear engagement portion B623.

The upper edge B621a of the front engagement part B621, the upper edge B622a of the left rear engagement part B622, and the upper edge B623a of the right rear engagement part B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The opening vicinity fan B700 has a circular air passage part B710. The upper edges B621a, B622a, and B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) that corresponds to the shape of the air passage part B710. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 72, the upper edges B621a and B622a are shown with diagonal lines, and the air passage part B710 is shown with a shading.

As shown in FIG. 73, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the opening vicinity fan B700 is formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling part inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 has a front engagement part B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400, a rear engagement part B422 formed rearward of the front engagement part B421, and upper engagement parts B423 (upper left engagement part B423a, upper middle engagement part B423b, and upper right engagement part B423c) extending in the front-rear direction.

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. The length of the downward protrusion from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engaging part B421 and the rear engaging part B422 than in the upper engaging part B423.

The lower end edge B421a of the front side engaging part B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear side engaging part B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710 of the fan B700 for use near the opening. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand, in FIG. 73, the lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are shown with diagonal lines.

The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is held between the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front side engagement part B621 and the left rear side engagement part B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front side engagement part B621 and the right rear side engagement part B623, and the front side engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joint portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the left front side of the near-opening fan B700 comes into contact with the back side of the front side engaging part B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left side back side of the near opening fan B700 comes into contact with the back side of the left rear side engaging part B622 of the duct cover B600. In contact with the front surface, the opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the front side engaging part B621 and the left rear side engaging part B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening contacts the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right rear surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening contacts the front surface of the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is held between the front engaging part B621 and the right rear engaging part B623 of the duct cover B600.

The front surface of the near-opening fan B700 abuts against the rear surface of the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the rear surface of the near-opening fan B700 abuts against the front surface of the rear engagement portion B422 of the projector cover B1, so that the near-opening fan B700 is clamped between the front engagement portion B421 and the rear engagement portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 extend upward from the main surface B610. The protrusion lengths of the two are approximately equal to each other. Furthermore, the three upper engaging parts B423 (upper left engaging part B423a, upper middle engaging part B423b, and upper right engaging part B423c) of the projector cover B1 are connected downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. The protrusion lengths of the two are approximately equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging part B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging part B423 of the projector cover B1 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the vertical direction.

As a result, the lower surface of the fan B700 near the opening is connected to the three lower engaging parts B624 (lower left engaging part B624a, lower middle engaging part B624b, and lower right engaging part B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), and the top surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is in contact with the three upper engaging parts B423 (upper left engaging part B423a, upper middle engaging part B423b, and upper right engaging part B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

In this way, the fan B700 for use near the opening is fixed by being clamped between the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-to-back and top-to-bottom directions.

When the opening vicinity fan B700 is fixed, the front edge of the air passage B710 is positioned so as to align with the upper edge B621a of the front engagement part B621 of the duct cover B600 and the lower edge B421a of the front engagement part B421 of the projector cover B1 (see Figures 69 and 74). In addition, although not shown, the rear edge of the air passage B710 is positioned so as to align with the upper edge B622a of the left rear engagement part B622 and the upper edge B623a of the right rear engagement part B623 of the duct cover B600, and the lower edge B422a of the rear engagement part B422 of the projector cover B1.

That is, the air passage B710 does not overlap the front engagement part B621, the left rear engagement part B622, and the right rear engagement part B623 of the duct cover B600, nor the front engagement part B421 and the rear engagement part B422 of the projector cover B1, when viewed from the front. In other words, the air passage B710 is not covered by the front engagement part B621, the left rear engagement part B622, and the right rear engagement part B623 of the duct cover B600, nor the front engagement part B421 and the rear engagement part B422 of the projector cover B1. This ensures that the area of the air passage part is maximized.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage part B710, the upper edge of the engaging part in the duct cover B600 (upper edge B621a, upper edge B622a, and upper edge B623a), and the lower edge of the engaging part in the projector cover B1 (lower edge By matching B421a and the lower edge B422a), the area of the part where the fan B700 for near the opening and the duct cover B600 contact and the area of the part where the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening and the projector cover B1 contact are increased. This allows the fan B700 for use near the opening to be stably fixed.

As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface of the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1 coincides with the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) formed downward from the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a. As a result, the opening vicinity fan B700 is disposed rearward from the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a by the thickness in the front-rear direction of the front engagement portion B421. Therefore, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is located in a position deeper than the right opening B400a, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is unlikely to directly splash on the opening vicinity fan B700. On the other hand, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is disposed close to the right opening B400a, it is easy to take in air from the outside of the projector cover B1 through the right opening B400a. As a result, heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

In addition, while the left rear engagement part B622 and the right rear engagement part B623 of the duct cover B600 are configured separately, the front engagement part B621 has a shape in which the left and right parts are connected without being separated. This makes it difficult for liquid to seep backwards even if it enters through the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the length of the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the left-right length of the front engagement part B621 in the duct cover B600, the length from the left end of the left rear engagement part B622 to the right end of the right rear engagement part B623 in the duct cover B600, the left-right length of the front engagement part B421 in the projector cover B1, the left-right length of the rear engagement part B422 in the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the opening vicinity fan B700 are all approximately equal. As a result, the intermediate space (cross section when the space P1 is cut by a vertical plane in the left-right direction) from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 70) is filled with almost no gaps by the opening vicinity fan B700. In this respect, the area of the air passing part is maximized, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be improved.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 75 is a perspective view from the left with the blind and duct cover attached. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and duct cover.

Note that Figure 78 shows the blind B500 as viewed from the front and above, while the duct cover B600 as viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 is capable of storing liquid that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 71).

As explained using FIG. 65, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal part B501, a first inclined part B502a, a second horizontal part B502b, a second inclined part B502c, a third horizontal part B502d, and a small room B507. is formed. This makes it possible to increase the capacity of the liquid that can be stored, secure space for arranging the screen device C (see Figure 40) below the blind B500, and maintain the strength of the blind B500. There is.

In particular, in this embodiment, the strength of the blind B500 is increased due to the presence of the small room B507, and liquid can also be stored in the small room B507. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small chamber B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small chamber B507 from the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small chamber B507 provided as a rib, the space within the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 has a rectangular shape when viewed from above, with the left front corner cut out. For clarity, in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 is shown with diagonal lines. As described using FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front wall B507a and the outer wall B507b (see FIG. 65) of the small room B507 when viewed from above. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned further forward than the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is closer to the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. is also placed at the rear. Thus, like the duct cover B600, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 from the liquid L storage space (space P2), and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 to the projector cover B1. Intrusion into the internal space Q (inside the case B22) is less likely to occur.

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by passing through the liquid discharge hole S. The liquid discharge hole S will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 76, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the liquid discharge hole S is located at the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the rear of the duct cover B600. and a side portion B630 (see FIG. 72).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch that is open downward in the rear side wall portion B410 that constitutes the rear surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch that is open at the top in the first back side wall part B510 that constitutes the back surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open upper part in the second back side wall part B511 formed in front of the first back side wall part B510 of the blind B500. The second back side wall portion B511 is formed to stand up from the rear end of the horizontal surface B508 that is continuously formed rearward from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503. The first back side wall portion B510 is formed to stand up from the rear end of the horizontal surface B509 that is continuously formed rearward from the lower end of the second back side wall portion B511.

The rear side B630 of the duct cover B600 has a rear surface B631 and downward protrusions B632a and B632b that protrude downward from both left and right end edges of the surface B631. The downward protrusions B632a and B632b face each other at a certain distance and are generally parallel to each other, and a space is formed between the downward protrusions B632a and B632b.

When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the space formed between the downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b of the duct cover B600 overlap in rear view, thereby forming a liquid discharge hole S (the left liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76). Note that since the rear side portion B630 is not formed in the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 75), the right liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76 is formed by the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted through the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts other than the irradiation unit B (sub-control device SS, etc.) are connected to the projector device B2, etc. Wiring for this purpose is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector device B2 and the fan B700 near the opening by passing through the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 72).

The wiring openings B640a, B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the wiring openings B640a, B640b are formed at a position away from the opening B510 (see FIG. 71) that opens toward the internal space Q (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1. This makes it difficult for liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the wiring openings B640a, B640b.

Above, we have explained the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that can perform effects by displaying images projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to express images on the same level as a liquid crystal display device, and it is also possible to reduce the cost when the display screen becomes large compared to a liquid crystal display device or the like. Furthermore, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express images that cannot be achieved with a liquid crystal display device.

However, compared to liquid crystal display devices and the like, projection devices tend to generate heat and reach high temperatures, and there is a problem in that they will not function properly unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can efficiently release heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting images.

In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features:

(3-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member;
A partition member (duct cover B600) that partitions the internal space of the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The partition member partitions a space communicating from the first opening inside the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2),
The first space and the second space communicate through the second opening,
the fan is arranged in the second space,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400a) that opens toward the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500), and a second opening (opening B510) that opens toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500). The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500) is partitioned into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2) by a partition member (duct cover B600). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate with each other via the second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is placed in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan for use near the opening B700) is placed in the second space (space P1). This allows air to move between the external and internal spaces of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P1), and this air flow allows the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) to be efficiently released.

On the other hand, since a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P1), even if a foreign object enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a), the presence of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) makes it difficult for the foreign object to enter the side where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged (the first space (space Q) side). Furthermore, since the third space (space P2) is isolated from the second space (space P1) (the space communicating with the first space (space Q) where the projector (projector device B2) exists) by the partition member (duct cover B600), even if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object can be prevented from entering the second space (space P1) from the third space (space P2). This protects the projector (projector device B2) from foreign objects such as liquids that may enter from outside the gaming machine, eliminating the cause of the projector (projector device B2) breaking down, and also improves security by preventing unauthorized access through the first opening (right opening B400a).

(4-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member;
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space,
The fan is held between an inner side of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400a) that opens toward the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500), and a second opening (opening B510) that opens toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating with the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blinds B500)) are connected via the second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P). This allows air to move between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the second space (space P), and the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through this air flow. In particular, a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is provided in the second space (space P), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is sandwiched between the inner part of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600) in the second space (space P). In this regard, if a structure such as a screw or a nail is separately provided to install the fan (opening vicinity fan B700), a new space (in the left-right direction) is required for the structure. In contrast, the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment allows the fan (the fan for use near the opening B700) to be installed in a space-saving manner, and the space through which air can pass in the second space (space P) can be maximized. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of air movement between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved while maximizing the function of the fan (the fan for use near the opening B700).

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1),
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan,
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fan installation part (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the part through which air can pass (air passage part B710) in the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening). Therefore, it is possible to prevent air passage from being obstructed by the fan installation part (fan installation structure B620). Thereby, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be further improved while making maximum use of the suction power of the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening).

(5-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light to display an image on the screen;
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body in an openable/closable manner and has a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible;
The cover member is formed with a first opening (right opening B400a) that opens toward an external space of the cover member, and a second opening (opening B510) that opens toward a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating with the first opening inside the cover member are communicated with each other through the second opening,
the projector is disposed in the first space,
the second space is capable of storing liquid by being closed at a lower portion;
The cover member is further provided with wiring openings (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and a wiring opening B510a and a wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting wiring connecting a device disposed outside the cover member and the projector,
the second space and an external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening,
The wiring opening is capable of inserting a mechanism (a tube included in a discharge mechanism) for discharging liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are They communicate through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air can Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released.

In addition, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and a projector (projector device). Wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of blind B500) are formed for passing the wiring connecting to B2), and the second space (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are defined by wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of blind B500). communicated through. The second space (space P) can store liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) can be stored in the wiring opening (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1, and the wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. As a result, if liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400a), Even if the liquid is stored in the second space (space P), the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from entering equipment outside the second space (space P). can do. In addition, by appropriately discharging the stored liquid from the wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500), the amount of liquid stored can be kept below a certain limit. It is possible to maintain As a result, due to excessive liquid being stored in the second space (space P), the liquid enters the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). The situation can be avoided. In this way, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Note that since the internal temperature of the pachi-slot machine 1 is relatively high (approximately 60° C.), the stored liquid will naturally evaporate if left undisturbed, even if it is not discharged using the mechanism described above. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the ejection mechanism, and the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) have wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a of blind B500, and wiring The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover A front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
The fan is arranged in the second space so as to come into contact with the opening edge.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) that is open toward the external space, and a second opening that is open toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are They communicate through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released. Particularly, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a part from the periphery (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the first opening (right opening B400a) to the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening edge (front engaging part B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed that continues toward the opening edge (front engaging part B421 of the projector cover B1), and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is connected to the opening edge (the projector cover B1) in the second space (space P). It is arranged so as to come into contact with the front side engaging part B421) of B1. As a result, if foreign matter such as liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) gets into the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a), Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (fan B700 for use near the opening). On the other hand, by placing the fan (fan B700 for near the opening) as close as possible to the first opening (right opening B400a), the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) can be separated. Air can be smoothly moved between the projectors and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In the third embodiment, when the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G is connected to the upper door mechanism UD (Fig. 36)). In this way, when the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hook portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screw fastening. On the other hand, an inner side protruding member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner side of the side wall G2) that protrudes inward is provided on the inner side of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G.

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first place the lower side of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD on the upper surface of the front side protruding member G120, and then hook the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked onto the inner side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed rearward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

Note that in the third embodiment, air flows between the internal space and the external space of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention, Alternatively, air may be allowed to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 36) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, in order to minimize the amount of foreign matter entering the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is It is preferable that the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening should be provided with some kind of measure to prevent foreign matter from entering (for example, installing a mesh structure similar to the punching B450). desirable.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that the intake fans 244A and 244B are disposed in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is disposed outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fans is not particularly limited, and the fans may be disposed only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22) and not outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). Conversely, the fans may be disposed only outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1) and not inside the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

Figure 80 is a diagram for explaining the placement of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modified example, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are slightly different from those in the third embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description is omitted, but in the blind B500 in this modified example, an inclined portion B502 is formed instead of the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, and the small room B507 is not formed. In addition, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned further forward than in the third embodiment, and the front surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b that exists behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1.

The intake fan can be placed at a desired position in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blinds B500.

Figure 80 shows examples of intake fan placement locations, including an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F( _R1 ), an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F( _R2 ), an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F( _R3 ), and an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F( _R4 ).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R1 ) is located near the right opening B510 (see FIG. 71), and when an intake fan is provided in this area, the intake fan is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) provided on the right side surface of the case B22. This allows air taken in from outside the projector cover B1 to be efficiently sent into the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R2 ) is the area to the right of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R1 ), and is the area where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. If an intake fan is provided in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R2 ), the direction of the air moving rearward through the space P can be smoothly changed to an inward direction.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) of the projector cover B1. be. When an intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can smoothly flow backward. .

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R4 ) is the area in front of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R3 ) and is the area below the opening B400. If an intake fan is provided in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _R4 ), air can be smoothly taken in to the inside of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be disposed at a desired position in the space P (the left space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) are shown as examples of positions where exhaust fans may be disposed.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when an exhaust fan is installed in this area, the exhaust fan is located on the left side of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). Thereby, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _L2 ) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. If an exhaust fan is provided in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F( _L2 ), the direction of the air coming out of the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As described above, the intake fan and exhaust fan described using FIG. 80 may be provided in the form of both an intake fan and an exhaust fan, or only an intake fan may be provided, or only an exhaust fan may be provided.

In addition, the intake fan has an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), an area enclosed by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), and , F(R ₄ ) may be arranged only in one of the regions surrounded by dotted lines, or may be arranged in two or more of these regions. Good too. The exhaust fan may be disposed only in one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), It may be arranged in both areas.

Note that the third embodiment has been described on the assumption that an air flow path as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 64 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air within the projector cover B1 does not necessarily need to flow completely along this path.

Air flow paths that can be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 64 will be explained using FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing air flow paths that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by arrow _X1 in FIG. 81, for example, there may be a flow in which air warmed by heat generated by the projector device B2 exits the case B22 via the air intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the intake port B22A in this manner may move toward the rear of the projector cover B1, as shown by arrow _X2 . Furthermore, as shown by arrow _X3 , there may be an air flow in which air exits from the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E and heads toward the rear.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, air that has moved rearward as shown by arrow _X2 or arrow _X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. In order to smoothly exhaust air from the rear of the projector cover B1, an exhaust fan may be provided in the rear region of the projector cover B1.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been explained that the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are provided to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space, but in the present invention, the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are not essential.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the slope part B502 has a slope that descends toward the rear. The distance in the vertical direction from the lower end of the opening 510 is longer than that of the front part, and the liquid L is stored in the rear part of the inclined part B502 (an area away from the lower end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from invading the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the opening B510. can do.

Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the above modified example has the following features:

(7-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector;
A main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body in an openable/closable manner and has a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) is formed with a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400) that open upward,
Within the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, while a second space (the left space P of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the second opening,
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper side (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member, while the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper side (right direction) by a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member,
The first opening (the right opening B400) and the third opening (the right opening B510) are in communication with each other, while the second opening (the left opening B400) and the fourth opening (the left opening B510) are in communication with each other,
The projector is disposed between the third opening (the right opening B510) and the fourth opening (the left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) has a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right-side space P), and the lower end portion has an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) that has a slope that descends as it moves away from the portion directly below the first opening,
At least a part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction different from the upper direction (left and right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) are in communication, thereby forming a second space (left side space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, air flowing from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B400). B510), passes through the projector (projector device B2), passes through the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P), and then enters the second opening (left side space P). is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a tendency to flow upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left-hand space P) and passes through the second opening ( It will be smoothly discharged from the left opening B400). As a result, through such air flow, it becomes possible to efficiently release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In addition, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the above-mentioned modified example, the cover member (blind B500) has a lower end (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right space P), and the lower end (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) has an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) that has a slope that descends as it moves away from the portion directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Therefore, when liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from outside the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400), the liquid will flow through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as it moves away from the portion directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), when the liquid flows down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches a position below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510) is located above the liquid, so the liquid is less likely to pass through the third opening (right opening B510) and is less likely to infiltrate toward where the projector (projector device B2) is located. In this way, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign objects such as liquids that have infiltrated from outside the gaming machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1),
A fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed on the upper surface of the main body (the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G) above the first opening and the second opening, respectively.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the top surface (top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the gaming machine from above the outside of the gaming machine via the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) After this air flows into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400 on the right side, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second side of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the gaming machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). In this way, in the Pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is discharged to the outside and above the gaming machine. If the heat is discharged from the back of the game machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game parlor, which will have an adverse effect on the control of the game machine. Additionally, if air is exhausted from the side of the game machine, warmed air will be drawn into the adjacent game machines, creating a vicious cycle of warm air between adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if air is discharged in front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown onto the player's face. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, it is possible to create an air flow for discharging the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example, the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of the cabinet G) are located above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) formed on the cover member (projector cover B1). Therefore, if a foreign object enters the inside of the gaming machine from the outside through the fifth opening (right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign object is likely to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening (left opening B400). Therefore, there is a concern that the foreign object that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) will reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, if a player pours a drink through the fifth opening (right opening G41), the drink may pass through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510) and enter the inside of the projector (projector device B2), which may cause the projector (projector device B2) to malfunction. In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example, even if liquid enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the first opening (right opening B400), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2),
A space that is closed downward is formed by the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) and wall portions (the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505) that are continuous with the inclined portion,
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the slope part (slope part B502) and the wall part (rear wall part B503, outer wall part B504, and inner wall part B505) continuous with the slope part (slope part B502) are used to lower the Since a closed space is formed, the liquid flowing down the inclined part (inclined part B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the level of the stored liquid is below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510) It is possible to prevent liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector device B2) through the projector.

(8-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400) that open upward. An opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, and a first space is formed in communication with the second opening. 2 spaces (the left space P of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is open in a direction different from the upper direction (to the left) through a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (to the right) through a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) and a second opening (left opening B400) that open upward. In addition, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction different from the upward direction (left-right direction) are formed. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) are connected to each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) are connected to each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). The projector (projector device B2) is disposed between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, air flowing in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) passes through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510), passes through the projector (projector device B2), passes through the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P), and is then discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the second opening (left opening B400). When passing through the projector (projector device B2), the air is heated by absorbing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the air with a higher temperature has the tendency to move upward. Therefore, the air that passes through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and is smoothly discharged from the second opening (left opening B400) formed above the second space (left space P). As a result, this air flow makes it possible to efficiently release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), thereby improving the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2).

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above,
The projector includes a first ventilation port (intake port B22A), a second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E), and a fan (air intake port B22E) disposed between the first ventilation port and the second ventilation port. fans 244A and 244B),
The first ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the third opening (right opening B510) face each other, while the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) face each other. B510) the projector is arranged so as to face the projector;
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E). The projector (projector device B2) is positioned so that the first vent (intake port B22A) faces the third opening (right opening B510) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510). Therefore, the above-mentioned air flow can be smoothly created by forcibly drawing in air with the fans (intake fans 244A and 244B).

(8-3) The gaming machine according to (8-1) or (8-2),
A fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed on the top surface of the main body (the top wall G4 of the cabinet G) above the first opening and the second opening, respectively.
The projector is accommodated in the main body so as to be disposed above the screen.
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example, a fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed on the upper surface (upper wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) of the cover member (projector cover B1). This allows air to be taken in from the upper outside of the gaming machine into the inside of the gaming machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and this air is allowed to flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) of the cover member (projector cover B1). After this, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) can be released to the upper outside of the gaming machine through the second opening (left opening B400) of the cover member (projector cover B1) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is discharged to the upper outside of the gaming machine. If the air were to be discharged from the back of the gaming machine, the heat would be trapped in the equipment installed in the gaming establishment, which could have a negative effect on the control of the gaming machine. If the air were to be discharged from the side of the gaming machine, the heated air would be taken into the adjacent gaming machine, resulting in a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent gaming machines, and it is considered that the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if the air were to be discharged in front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air would be blown onto the player's face. In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the above-mentioned modified example can create an air flow to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such problems.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the main body ( The projector (projector device B2) is placed close to the top surface of the main body (top wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also As a result, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector device B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, when designing a flow path that takes in air from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and exhausts it from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector device B2), it is necessary to There is no need to create a complicated detour to avoid existing members and devices, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

In the above embodiment, the present invention has been described as being applied to a pachislot gaming machine. Below, a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described using Figures 82 to 86.

Figure 82 is a perspective view showing the exterior of a pachinko gaming machine. Figure 83 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. Figure 84 is an exploded perspective view showing the decorative unit and frame member of the pachinko gaming machine from the front.

As shown in Figures 82 and 83, the pachinko game machine 6100 is composed of a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a tray unit 6115, a launcher 6122 that launches game balls, a board unit 6123 that includes various control boards, and a ball payout unit that awards game balls as game value.

The above-mentioned glass door 6111 is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so that it can be opened and closed freely. An opening 6116 is formed in the center of this glass door 6111, and transparent protective glass 6124 is arranged in the opening 6116. The above-mentioned wooden frame 6112 has the base door 6113 pivotally attached to its front.

The above-mentioned dish unit 6115 is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above it and a lower plate 6126 below it. The upper tray 6125 and the lower tray 6126 are formed with payout openings 6131A and 6131B for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), and when predetermined payout conditions are met, the game The balls are ejected, and in particular, game balls to be fired into the game area 6141 are stored in the upper tray 6125.

The above-described firing device 6122 is disposed on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. This firing device 6122 is provided with a firing handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the player can advance the pachinko game by operating the firing handle 6132. When the firing handle 6132 is grasped by the player and rotated clockwise, power is supplied to the firing motor according to the rotation angle, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 6125 are They are fired sequentially onto the game board.

The above-mentioned game board 6114 is disposed in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 on its front side in which the launched game ball can roll. This game area 6141 is surrounded by a guide rail or the like, and is an area in which the game ball can roll. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching device 6122 moves to the upper part of the game board 6114 while being guided by the guide rail provided on the game board, and then flows downward from the top to the bottom of the game board while changing its direction of travel due to collision with multiple obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141.

As shown in FIG. 82, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper area on the front side of the glass door 6111. The decorative unit 6258 is positioned so as to protrude forward of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decorative unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above embodiment is disposed in the cavity. Figure 82 shows the interior of the decorative unit 6258 as seen from above the decorative unit 6258.

As shown in FIG. 83, a screen device C (see FIG. 40) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, similarly to the embodiment described above, the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B is irradiated onto the screen of the screen device C (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1). It is now possible to do so.

Decoration unit 6258 is attached to the top of frame member 6211 (see FIG. 84). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 84, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decoration unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation unit B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decoration unit 6258.

In addition, a speaker 6152 and a speaker holder 6152A are attached integrally to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 has speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right and left sides, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-like openings.

When the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B each cover the front of the speaker 6152, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B. It is possible to release it outside the pachinko game machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as an air vent for taking in air from outside the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 84, an intake fan 6244 is disposed on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. This allows air to be taken into the interior of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the front outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 via the speaker hole 6151A.

Similar to the third embodiment, this air is taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2. It moves inside the projector cover B1 while removing the heat generated by the projector, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

Air that leaves the projector cover B1 moves rearward through the through-hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211 and is released to the outside from the rear side of the pachinko game machine 6100.

The air flow described above is shown by arrows in FIGS. 82 and 84. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which air is taken in from above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 and air is discharged above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In contrast, in this modification, air is taken in from the front of the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100, and air is discharged to the rear of the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged for cooling the projector is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed depending on the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

In addition, pachinko machines are shorter in depth from front to back than pachislot machines, so when one pachinko machine is installed behind another in the same island equipment, there is a relatively large space between the machines. Therefore, even if air heated by a projector is exhausted from the back of the pachinko machines, it is thought that heat will not build up in the island equipment for pachinko machines as much as in the island equipment for pachislot machines.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko game machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko game machine 6100 will be described using FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 85, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side of the decorative unit 6258. This allows air to be taken into the interior of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the exterior right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2, as in the above-mentioned modification. It moves inside the projector cover B1 while removing the heat generated by the projector, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side of the decorative unit 6258, just like on the right side. This allows air that has escaped from the projector cover B1 through opening B400L to be released to the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100 through opening 6300L.

Such air flow is shown by arrows in FIG. In this modification, since the air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, it is thought that there is a possibility that the warmed air will be drawn into the neighboring gaming machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, if the air exhaust direction is set to the side of the game machine, for example, the width of the decoration unit 6258 in the left and right direction may be made shorter. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the gaming machine be configured to be separated by some distance.

Another modification will be described below using FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine.

In the above-mentioned modified example, the irradiation unit B is described as being attached to the frame member 6211. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 86, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. The speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, an air flow path similar to that in the above-mentioned example can be formed.

In FIG. 86, the irradiation unit B is shown attached to the front side of the base door 6113, but the irradiation unit B may also be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or behind the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, a space is formed on the rear side of the game board, and the irradiation unit B can be disposed by utilizing the space.

For example, the irradiation unit may be arranged on the base door, the game board, or other rear member of the pachinko game machine so that an opening is provided in the center of the game board and the front part of the irradiation unit penetrates the opening. In that case, it is possible to directly repurpose the game board of a conventional pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine with an opening in the center of the game board through which a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the game board can be viewed). For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, providing a screen mechanism, and further providing an irradiation unit on a rear member such as the game board, it is possible to create a new game machine equipped with an irradiation unit and a screen mechanism while keeping the shape of the game board as it is. When such a configuration is adopted, a part of the front of the irradiation unit protrudes forward from the game board, so that a larger space can be secured behind the pachinko game machine. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise inside the island equipment when pachinko game machines with irradiation units are installed on the entire island equipment in a game center with a narrow island equipment. Furthermore, by placing decorative elements such as a logo according to the model, or by placing a small LCD display device or an electric lighting board for supplementary decoration, in front of the illumination unit that is visible to the player (for example, near the reflector holding portion B11), the illumination unit can be hidden from the player, further enhancing the presentation effect.

Note that the screen device C may be installed in a state attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state separated from the irradiation unit B.

In the modified examples described above, the air is discharged from the rear or side of the gaming machine, but as in the third embodiment, the air may be discharged from above the gaming machine. If the air is discharged from above, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the top surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, if the irradiation unit B is installed behind the gaming board, an appropriate opening may also be formed in the gaming board to ensure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to form openings as appropriate in the member present on the air flow path depending on the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged, and the path through which the air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Furthermore, in order to smooth the flow of air, an intake fan and/or an exhaust fan can be appropriately provided. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 84) may be disposed between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 85) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1, or It is possible to arrange an exhaust fan between the opening for exhausting (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 85) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B can sufficiently intake and exhaust air, it is not necessary to provide a fan outside the irradiation unit B.

In the above-mentioned modified example, the projector cover B1 described in FIG. 80 is illustrated as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and a projector cover having an opening for taking in cooling air for the projector and an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately adopted. These openings can be formed in any location, such as the front or rear, upper or lower, or side of the projector cover, and the position of the opening can be appropriately determined taking into account the cooling efficiency of the projector, etc. Furthermore, the projector may be disposed inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and it is also possible to configure the projector so that cooling air taken in from outside the gaming machine hits the projector directly (without passing through the projector cover).

[Fourth embodiment]
The second embodiment and the third embodiment have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second and third embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of portions that apply to the fourth embodiment as well as those in the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
Fig. 87 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. Fig. 88 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. Fig. 89 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in Fig. 88. Fig. 90 is a perspective view showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in a state in which the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in Fig. 87.

The display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 87 is replaceably placed on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40) in the cabinet G, similar to the display unit A described in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figures 87 to 89, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet side screen 9040.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. It has a back plate 9014 erected at the section. A right side plate 9012, a left side plate 9013, and a back plate 9014 are connected to the bottom plate 9011 by screws, thereby forming a box-shaped casing with an open front side and an open top side.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing a projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front part of the projector installation member 9015.

The projector 9020 has the same configuration as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 47) described in the second embodiment (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210, etc.), and projects light containing an image. It is possible to do so. The projector 9020 is installed with the lens facing downward, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

A mirror installation portion 9016 for installing a mirror 9030 is formed below the projector installation member 9015. The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016a and 9016b that slope from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

The mirror 9030 has a configuration similar to that of the optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 42) described in the second embodiment, and is capable of reflecting light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed so as to follow the inclined edges 9016a and 9016b of the mirror installation portion 9016. This causes the mirror 9030 to assume an inclined position such that the front is lower than the rear.

As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90). In FIG. 90, the light irradiation range is indicated by diagonal lines. Note that the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 90 is based on their relative position in the state shown in FIG. The positional relationship is the same. That is, FIG. 90 is an exploded view showing the projector 9020 and mirror 9030 while maintaining their relative positional relationship in the state shown in FIG. 88.

A cabinet-side screen 9040 is fitted to the front part of the bottom plate 9011 to stand upright. Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 from the rear (back side).

The cabinet side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet side screen 9040 is a transmissive type that displays a projection image from the rear, and has a uniformly flat entrance surface 9040a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and It has a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projected image is projected when light incident on the surface 9040a is transmitted. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is formed primarily of, for example, a translucent glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entrance surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040, images related to games (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. be done. Note that a moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In this specification, moving image and video have the same meaning.

<Relationship between the light irradiation range and the cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the relationship between the illumination range of the light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen.

In FIG. 91, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shown by hatching. The irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entire surface (shaded area in FIG. 91) of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) and passes through the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 91, the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 among the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by diagonal lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passes through the shaded area in FIG. 91 travels forward of the cabinet side screen 9040. A portion of the light that travels forward of the cabinet side screen 9040 will enter the door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD, as described below (see FIGS. 96(b) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 95 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the second embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 92 is disposed in front of the upper space of the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD according to the second embodiment (see FIG. 39). It is set up so that it is possible.

As shown in Figure 93, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see Figure 38) in the center (a position that overlaps with the cabinet side screen 9040 when viewed from the front), and a transparent panel UD11 is provided in the upper display window UD1. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the image can be viewed by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a curved shape (e.g., a semi-cylindrical shape formed by cutting a cylinder in half) of a flat screen, and have an arc shape when viewed from above (bottom), similar to the shape when viewed from the side of the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 45) described in the second embodiment. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed to have a uniform thickness over their entire surfaces.

Like the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are of a transmission type in which a projection image is displayed by being projected from the rear. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed mainly of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 has an entrance surface 9050a on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface 9050b on the front side where the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface 9050a. , has. The door-side left screen 9060 has an entrance surface 9060a on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface 9060b on the front side where the projected image is projected by the light incident on the entrance surface 9060a passing through. , has.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are each positioned so that the center of curvature is on the rear side. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050, and the entrance surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020.

Figure 92 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged inside the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 92, the side constituting the left end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 95) and the side constituting the right end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other (or approximately abutting), and the side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050 is located slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Also, the side constituting the right end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 95) and the side constituting the left end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other (or approximately abutting), and the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040.

The side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and the sides 9040c and 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are each located approximately on the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally located in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040.

In addition, the side constituting the lower end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 95), the side constituting the lower end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 95), and the side constituting the lower end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040e shown in FIG. 87) are approximately at the same position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on approximately the same plane). In addition, the vertical length of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9050c and side 9060c) is longer than the vertical length of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c and side 9040d). As a result, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at approximately the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are configured to be taller than the cabinet-side screen 9040.

<Displaying images on cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. FIG. 96(c) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. 97 and 98 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet-side screen, the door-side right screen, and the door-side left screen.

In FIG. 96(a), the area indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 91 (the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 within the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020) is conveniently divided into three areas (area I, area II, and area III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Area II is an area located on the left side of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Area III is an area located on the upper side of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Note that in FIG. 96(a), the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shown shaded, as in FIG. 91.

As described above, a portion of the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entrance surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), the light projected from the projector 9020 that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through area I in FIG. 96(a) enters the entrance surface 9050a of the door-side right screen 9050. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96(c), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through area II in FIG. 96(a) is on the door-side left screen. The light is incident on the incident surface 9060a of 9060. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060.

In this manner, images (still images and moving images related to the game) are displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060. In this embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one piece of image data, and an image can be displayed on each of the three screens by using one piece of image data.

97 and 98 show such image data. The shaded area (area A) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040. The shaded area (area B) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the door-side right screen 9050. The shaded area (area C) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. The remaining area (area D) in FIG. 97(a) includes information with a pixel value of 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of a pixel formed on a liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. A pixel value of 0 indicates that the light transmittance is minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the area where the pixel value is 0 is black.

Figure 97(b) shows an example of image data. The image data shown in Figure 97(b) contains information indicating a performance image 9100 in area A, information indicating a fireworks image 9101 in area B, and information indicating a text image 9102 in area C. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the performance image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the text image 9102 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are located at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 are each approximately the same distance from the projector 9020 in the front-to-rear direction, preventing significant focus shifts.

Figure 98 (a) shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in Figure 98 (a) contains information indicating a performance image 9100 in area A, information indicating a decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in area C. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the performance image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

Figure 98 (b) shows yet another example of image data. The image data shown in Figure 98 (b) contains information indicating a decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in area C. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060.

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

Conventionally, gaming machines capable of using a projector to create effects have been known (see JP 6-035066 A and JP 2009-240459 A). With such gaming machines, game images are projected from the projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, and the images are displayed on the screen instead of on a liquid crystal display device.

However, in gaming machines where images are projected onto a screen from such a projector, there is a problem in that the presentation is poor due to the flatness of the screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform a variety of effects.

In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features:

(9-1) Screens (a cabinet side screen 9040, a door side right screen 9050, and a door side left screen 9060),
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light to display an image on the screen;
the screen is disposed so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the rear side thereof, and an image can be displayed on the front side thereof by the light incident on the rear side thereof;
As the screens, a first screen (a cabinet side screen 9040) and a second screen (a door side right screen 9050 and a door side left screen 9060) arranged to the side, above or below the first screen in a front view are provided,
the projector, the first screen, and the second screen are arranged such that a portion of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while at least a portion of the light projected by the projector that is not incident on the first screen is incident on the second screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) is arranged on the side of the first screen (the cabinet-side screen 9040) when viewed from the front. There is. Then, part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made to enter the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), while part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made to enter the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040). At least a portion of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can be made to enter the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), and these images are In this case, they will be displayed in a horizontal positional relationship. This allows the player to be visually informed through the images displayed on these two screens (the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform a variety of production expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1),
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and has an opening on the front surface;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body in an openable/closable manner and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the first screen visible;
The second screen (the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening and closing door,
It is characterized by:

Generally, the opening/closing door of a gaming machine is decorated (shaped) according to the model of the machine, but adding such decoration requires a large amount of cost. And if you have to mold the opening/closing door and change the decoration every time you develop a new model (for each project), the costs will increase accordingly.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD), and the second screen By displaying images (images that are similar in appearance to decorations) on the door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060, it is possible to avoid adding decorations unique to the model to the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD). It is also possible to obtain the same visual effect as with decoration. Therefore, it is possible to employ a simple opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) without decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, there is no need to make extensive changes to the decoration of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD). ) should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screens (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) are adapted to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as changing the decoration. Cost reduction can be achieved.

In the fourth embodiment, among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that passes through region I (the region located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. 96(a) enters the door-side right screen 9050. , the door side so that among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that passes through area II (the area located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. The explanation has been made assuming that the right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively arranged. That is, the description has been made assuming that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) when viewed from the front.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet-side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is located above or below the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front. It may also be arranged. For example, if a door-side upper screen is provided above the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), out of the light projected from the projector 9020, area III (located above the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. The structure may be such that the light passing through the area) is incident on the upper screen on the door side. In addition, while providing a door-side lower screen below the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), an area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet-side screen (for example, FIG. 96(a) It may be configured such that the light passing through the region III in ) and the region opposite to each other with the cabinet-side screen 9040 in between enters the door-side lower screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens of the door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen may be provided, or any one of the four screens may be provided. One, two or three screens may be provided. In addition, a screen placed on the side of such a cabinet side screen (door side right screen or door side left screen) and a screen placed above or below the cabinet side screen (door side upper screen or door side lower screen) (screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the position of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) in the opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) may be provided in an area close to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) in a front view, or may be provided in an area somewhat separated from the first screen (cabinet-side screen). For example, the structure of the arrangement positions of the top panel mechanism HA, upper left panel mechanism HB, upper right panel mechanism HC, left side panel mechanism HD, right side panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 95), etc. may be changed to provide the door-side upper screen, door-side left screen, door-side right screen, etc. at the corresponding positions. In this way, if light projected from a projector is made to enter the rear side of these screens to display an image on the front side, model-specific designs and model information can be displayed in the areas corresponding to the arrangement positions of these panel mechanisms, and such designs and information can be easily changed by appropriately using image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left lateral panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right lateral panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. If a second screen (upper screen on the door side, left screen on the door side, right screen on the door side, etc.) is installed at these locations (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD), , it is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 91). For example, it is possible to widen the irradiation range to the maximum extent and adopt a configuration in which the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that no cabinet-side screen is provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate. So that the light reaches the placement positions of the panel mechanism HD, right side panel mechanism HE, etc. (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that the light irradiates over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD) It is possible to design. In this way, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view is irradiated with the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the light may be irradiated over a wider area around the outer periphery of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD).

In the fourth embodiment, as an example of image data, area A, area B, and area C shown in FIG. 97(a) are respectively separate images (in the example of FIG. 9101 and character image 9102) has been described. The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, information indicating one image (for example, effect image 9100) spanning area A, area B, and area C. It is also possible to use image data. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, and each screen The one image (for example, effect image 9100) is constructed by combining some of the images displayed on the screen. In this way, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screens arranged in its peripheral area (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door lower screen, etc.). may be displayed individually, or the images displayed on each screen may be combined to form a single video representation as a whole.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a door-side right screen 9050 and a door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in an exposed state on the front side of the pachislot machine 1 (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060 (second screen)). The explanation has been made assuming that no other members are provided on the front side of the screen 9060. As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (the door-side right screen and the door-side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, the image displayed on the second screen will not be obstructed from the player's field of view, and it is considered that there will be no problem for the player to visually recognize the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, the rigidity of the gaming machine can be ensured and the second screen can be prevented from being damaged. When providing a transparent panel, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel with unevenness can be used. This makes it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the images displayed on the second screens (door-side right screen and door-side left screen), creating an appearance similar to when three-dimensional decoration is applied to the opening/closing door itself. can be created.

In the fourth embodiment, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are described as having a curved shape (an arc shape in top view) of a flat screen. However, the shape of the second screen (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a screen having any shape can be appropriately adopted. For example, the second screen may be a flat screen like the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen having projections and recesses, a screen having a rounded shape, or a screen having an angular shape.

[Fifth embodiment]
The second to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Also, explanations of portions that apply to the fifth embodiment from the explanations of the second to fourth embodiments will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement>
FIG. 99 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and cabinet.

In Figure 99, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by a dashed line. As in the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see Figure 90).

In the fourth embodiment, a portion of the light that travels forward in this manner is described as being incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 88) from the rear (back side). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the cabinet side screen 9040 is not provided, and all of the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 102 and 103). The light projected from the projector 9020 enters the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from behind (back side), and an image is formed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be explained below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 100 and 101, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decorative unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Each unit will be described below.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member viewed from the front while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the upper holding member and the upper frame viewed from below. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the transparent plate, screen sheet, and lower frame seen from the rear.

Note that FIG. 102 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 103 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD viewed diagonally from the rear. In FIG. 104, the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown assembled, and the lower frame UD100 is shown existing independently. There is. In FIG. 105, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown assembled, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown individually. FIG. 106 shows how the upper holding member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 exist independently. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 are assembled.

As shown in Figures 102 and 103, the screen unit 1040 includes a light-transmitting plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of a transparent resin such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The light transmitting plate 1045 includes a flat part 1045a located at the center, a curved part 1045b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat part 1045a, and a curved part 1045b continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the curved part 1045b. and a side surface portion 1045c continuously formed. The plane portion 1045a and the side surface portion 1045c are formed into a planar shape, and these surfaces are substantially perpendicular to each other. The curved portion 1045b has the shape of a curved flat plate, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 93) in the fourth embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a translucent screen on which a projected image is displayed by projecting it from behind, and like the screens in the fourth embodiment (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060), it has an entrance surface on the rear side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface on the front side where the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The screen sheet 1046 is formed to have a uniform thickness over its entire surface, for example, mainly made of a translucent glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projecting.

The screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a located in the center and curved portions 1046b formed continuously from both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 1046a toward the rear. The flat portion 1046a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portions 1046b have a shape obtained by curving a flat plate. The flat portion 1046a and the curved portions 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have approximately the same size and shape as the flat portion 1045a and the curved portions 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 1045. Specifically, the back surface of the flat portion 1045a of the transparent plate 1045 and the front surface of the flat portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the transparent plate 1045 is in close contact with the front surface of the flat portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046. and the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entrance surface (surface on the rear side) of the screen sheet 1046, images related to the game (still images or moving images) are displayed on the display surface (surface on the front side) of the screen sheet 1046. The light-transmitting plate 1045 is formed to be transparent, and since there is no structure in front of the light-transmitting plate 1045 that blocks the player's view, when an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is visible to the player.

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the positions of the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are different in the depth direction, an image can be displayed on both the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying, a three-dimensional effect can be given to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. Further, in the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b are formed by forming (forming in an open space), respectively, so that, for example, when the curved portion is formed by vacuum processing etc. Image deformation can be suppressed compared to .

The light-transmitting plate 1045 and screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are supported by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 with their lower portions pressed down by the lower pressing member UD101 and their upper portions pressed down by the upper pressing member UD102.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and a bottom plate UD100a that slightly protrudes upward at the front end of the bottom plate UD100a. A right side portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end of the bottom plate UD100a, and a left side portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end of the bottom plate UD100a. The transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a with the transparent plate 1045 in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side UD100c, and the left side UD100d. In this state, the lower front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 contacts the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the transparent plate 1045 can come into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 105, the lower pressing member UD101 is formed into a plate shape, and its front side surface (pressing surface UD101a) has a curved shape with a planar portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. It has a formed part. With the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, so that the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100. It is held between the wall portion UD100b and the transparent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed down by the pressing surface UD101a. Note that the lower holding member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw passed through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 104) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

As shown in FIG. 106, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a generally rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction, and a wall portion UD110b protruding slightly downward from the front portion of the bottom surface UD110a. When the upper frame UD110 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are positioned so that the upper edge of the light-transmitting plate 1045 abuts against the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, and the upper front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 abuts against the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the upper front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can abut over a certain range.

The front side surface (pressing surface UD102a, see FIG. 105) of the upper pressing member UD102 has a planar portion and a curved portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. With the upper surface of the upper holding member UD102 in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, the screw inserted through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 106) is inserted into the screw hole formed on the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing into the UD110c. Thereby, the upper part of the screen sheet 1046 is held between the wall portion UD110b and the transparent plate 1045 of the upper frame UD110 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed down by the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper part is pressed down by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a curved portion corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. This allows the screen sheet 1046 to be brought into close contact with the transparent plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the generation of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image viewed by the player from being distorted.

As shown in FIG. 107, when the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from behind, the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045 are covered by the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046, while the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 is exposed and not covered by the screen sheet 1046.

Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, a gap exists between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), which corresponds to at least the length of the side surface portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the front-rear direction. For clarity, such gaps are shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 107.

An image is displayed on the portions of the transparent plate 1045 that are covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the exposed portions of the transparent plate 1045 that are not covered by the screen sheet 1046. No image is displayed on the side surface portion 1045c (that is, the shaded area in FIG. 107). As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position spaced forward from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), realizing a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decoration unit 1050>
FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet viewed from the rear.

In addition, in FIG. 108, the first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are shown assembled, and the upper frame UD110, the screen sheet 1056 , and screen sheet 1057 are shown as existing independently.

As shown in FIG. 108, the decorative unit 1050 includes a first structure 1051 arranged in the center, a second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, a third structure 1053 adjacent to the second structure 1052, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and screen sheets 1056 and 1057 arranged on the back side of these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is placed on the back side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is placed on the back side of the third structure 1053 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged adjacent to each other and have shapes that allow them to fit into each other at adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage section UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged together with the fourth structure 1054 on the back side of the speaker storage section UD110d.

The first structure 1051 is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (eg, character shape). The second structure 1052 is made of a light-transmitting material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape resembling a flame). The third structure 1053 is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (eg, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is made of a light-transmitting material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape resembling a chain).

Screen sheets 1056 and 1057 are translucent screens on which a projection image is displayed by projecting it from behind, and like screen sheet 1046, they have an entrance surface on the rear side where light projected from projector 9020 enters, and a display surface on the front side where the projection image is projected by the light entering the entrance surface passing through. Screen sheets 1056 and 1057 are formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, for example, mainly made of a translucent glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, and are milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the incident surface (the surface on the back side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, the display surface (the surface on the front side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 is illuminated. , images related to games (still images and moving images) are displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a configuration in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on its front side. The half mirror can be formed by a conventionally known method such as attaching a semi-transparent film sheet to the surface of a substrate or by metal deposition of a metal film, and has the property of reflecting part of the incident light while transmitting part of it.

By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when no light is projected from the projector 9020, objects existing around the third structure 1053 are reflected. It will look like a part that has been decorated with. As the object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 100 can be provided. Note that the structure shaped like a chain may be provided near the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is being projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 will be reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image in which objects existing around the third structure 1053 or objects having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (shape imitating a chain) are flowing and moving is displayed on the screen sheet 1057. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear as if the object, which was stationary, is moving when no light is projected from the projector 9020. In this way, according to the above configuration, an attractive performance can be created using both the shaped object and the video related to the shaped object.

The screen sheet 1056 also has a diffusion layer for diffusing light, and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a shape that is convex on the incident surface side are arranged. This allows the light projected from the projector 9020 to be diffused, and in combination with the shaped object arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive presentation can be created. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the shape of the letters "GOD", an image corresponding to the letters "GOD" can be displayed on the screen sheet 1056 to create an appearance in which the letters "GOD" are sparkling. In addition, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (the irradiation light emitted from the vicinity of the optical axis of the projection lens) enters the screen sheet 1046, but the screen sheet 1056 is located at a position away from the center of the angle of view, but by providing a prism layer with a high light-collecting effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056. As with screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may also be placed on the front side of screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, screen sheet, lower frame, LED board, and light guide member viewed from the rear. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member viewed from the front. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of a cross section of the light transmitting plate, screen sheet, lower frame, LED board, and light guide member viewed from the front.

FIG. 109 shows the state where the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED board 1061, and the light-guiding member 1062 are removed from the assembled state. FIG. 110 shows the state where the position of the lower frame UD100 is slightly shifted from the assembled state of the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light-guiding member 1062, with an enlarged view of the vicinity of the light-guiding member 1062. FIG. 111 shows the state where the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED board 1061, and the light-guiding member 1062 are cut in a horizontal plane with an enlarged view of the vicinity of the light-guiding member 1062.

As shown in FIG. 101, the indirect lighting units 1060 are arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration.

As shown in FIG. 109, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED board 1061 and a light-guiding member 1062.

The LED board 1061 is disposed slightly to the left of the right side UD100c and slightly to the right of the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100 (slightly inside the side 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045) and is disposed approximately parallel to the side 1045c. The LED board 1061 has a plurality of LEDs 1061a disposed at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LEDs 1061a of the LED board 1061 disposed near the right side UD100c are installed so as to emit light to the right, and the LEDs 1061a of the LED board 1061 disposed near the left side UD100d are installed so as to emit light to the left. The LED board 1061 is arranged so that a part of it overlaps with the side surface portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 in a side view, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c, so that the light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. The LED board 1061 is arranged slightly spaced from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side UD100c and left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and has a plurality of openings 1062a that open inwardly formed in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in each of the upper and lower parts, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED board 1061 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1061b formed in the LED board 1061. be done. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

The light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw inserted through a screw hole 1062c formed in the upper part of the light guide member 1062 and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right part UD100c (left part UD100d) of the lower frame UD100.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110, the light guiding member 1062 has a plurality of openings 1062d formed in the vertical direction that open forward. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 109 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. 110 are connected inside the light guiding member 1062. Furthermore, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 has a plurality of openings UD100g formed in the vertical direction that penetrate in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the light guiding member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the openings 1062d of the light guiding member 1062 are connected to the openings UD100g of the lower frame UD100.

As shown in FIG. 111, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062 and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, then changes its direction of travel from sideways to forward and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , is emitted forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). The arrow in FIG. 111 indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in Figure 111, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 abuts against the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045. The rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) and the rear end of the side portion 1045c are located at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear length of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) is shorter than the front-to-rear length of the side portion 1045c. Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is adjacent to (substantially abuts) the rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) are positioned on substantially the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 so as to have the above-mentioned positional relationship with the surrounding components. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045. As described with reference to FIG. 107, the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and no image is displayed in that portion (the hatched portion in FIG. 107), so that the player can be given the impression that the image is floating up. In this embodiment, the light of the LED 1061a is emitted from such a portion where the image is not displayed (along the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045), which emphasizes the boundary between the portion where the image is displayed and the portion where the image is not displayed, and gives the player the impression that the image is floating up more prominently.

<Attachment of upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a side perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 114 is a side perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional right side view of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from below. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism seen from the rear.

In addition, FIG. 112 shows the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 113 shows the hook portion UD120 attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side protruding member G120 removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 114 shows the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 115 shows the upper door mechanism UD, cabinet G, hook portion UD120, and front side protruding member G120 cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed relative to the cabinet G. For ease of understanding, FIG. 115 shows the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 with diagonal lines. FIG. 116 shows the state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. In Figure 117, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are shown viewed from different directions when not assembled, with the lower door mechanism DD being viewed from an angle closer to the side. Figure 118 shows the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD in a state where they are closed relative to the cabinet G.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the hook portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b with an open bottom is formed in the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed in a surface perpendicular to the main surface UD120a of the hook portion UD120, and the hook portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. By fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front side protruding member G120 has a horizontally arranged main surface G120a, a front end central part G120b formed by bending upward the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a, and a front end center part G120b formed by bending the front right side of the main surface G120a upward. The front end of the main surface G120a is bent upward between the formed front end right side G120c, the front left side G120d formed by bending the front left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front center center G120b and the front right side G120c. and a right placing part G120e formed by bending the main surface G120a upward and backward between the front end center part G120b and the front left side part G120d. and a rear side portion G120g formed by bending downward the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a.

The front right side G120c and the front left side G120d are formed further back than the front center part G120b, and the heights of the front center part G120b, the front right side G120c, and the front left side G120d are approximately the same. The right placement part G120e and the left placement part G120f are formed further back than the front right side G120c and the front left side G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right placement part G120e and the left placement part G120f are approximately the same, and these heights are higher than the heights of the front center part G120b, the front right side G120c, and the front left side G120d. The right placement part G120e and the left placement part G120f have a horizontally arranged surface.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front side protruding member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside with a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, by fixing the front side protruding member G120 to the cabinet G, the front part of the main surface UD120a (front end center part G120b, front right side part G120c, front left side part G120d, right (including the placing portion G120e and the left placing portion G120f) protrudes forward from the cabinet G.

On the other hand, an inner surface protruding member G2a (e.g., a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) that protrudes inward is provided on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, and the notch UD120b of the hook portion UD120 is hooked onto the inner surface protruding member G2a. This allows the hook portion UD120 to be engaged with the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing below the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 104). A plurality of downward protrusions UD100i that protrude downward are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward protruding portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and extends forward from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 104) is formed at the rear end of the downward protrusion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 117, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction at its upper part. As shown in FIG. 118, when the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is connected to the lower protrusion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is close to (approximately in contact with) the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first, the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G. While placing the lower surface of the upper wall of the UD110 on the upper surface of the right mounting part G120e and the left mounting part G120f of the front side protrusion member G120, the notch UD120b of the hook part UD120 is hooked on the inner side protrusion member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the downward protrusion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed rearward. It will be done. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G.

In this embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. If a hinge is provided, the range in which images can be displayed on the side portion of the gaming machine is limited, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear ends of both the left and right curved portions 1045b of the transparent plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range in the left and right direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. becomes possible. This makes it possible to perform powerful performances on a large screen.

Also, three screens, screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057, are provided, but as in the fourth embodiment, information indicating the image displayed on each screen is combined into one image data. If included (see FIGS. 97 and 98), images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

Note that when the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 115), but foreign matter cannot enter through the gap. Even if the foreign matter comes into contact with the cabinet G, the presence of the front side protruding member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from penetrating further into the cabinet G.

Sixth Embodiment
The second to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Also, the description of the portions of the second to fifth embodiments that are also applicable to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement>
Fig. 119 is a perspective view of the gaming machine from the front with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed. Fig. 120 is a perspective view of the side of the game machine showing light projected from the projector device.

As shown in FIG. 119, an irradiation unit B is disposed inside the cabinet G. As in the second embodiment (see FIG. 41), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from the second embodiment, and the reflector holding part B11 (see FIG. 45) is formed above the projector device B2 instead of in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 123). . Similar to the second embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding part B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 includes an optical mirror B32 that can reflect the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 42).

In this embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted toward the rear than the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11, and the projector device B2 is placed above. Note that the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that in the second embodiment, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Projector device B2 is fixed to projector cover B1 in a position with an inclination (steeper than optical mirror B32) such that the rear is lower than the front.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 120). In FIG. 120, the light irradiation range is indicated by diagonal lines. Similar to the fifth embodiment, all the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as the fifth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is transmitted through the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 100 to 103). The light enters each of the screen sheets from behind (back side), and images are displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjusting the traveling direction of the irradiated light>
FIG. 121 is a side perspective view of the irradiation unit. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit seen from the rear.

As described in the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 47).

Specifically, the upper base B220 has square holes 2201c on the right and left sides (see FIG. 48). The upper base B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c. FIG. 51 shows the mounting screw T being inserted from below the square hole 2201c, but in this embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (so that the screw head faces the upper rear side). The upper base B220 may be attached to another member fixed inside the cabinet G instead of the projector cover B1.

The lower base B221 is provided with a number of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 47), and the case B22 is attached to the lower base B221 from below by screwing. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, a case B22 having a rectangular box shape (see FIG. 57) is used. The case B22 houses the lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), LED board, DMD board, heat sink, intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector device B2, and the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 47) is fixed to the underside of the case B22.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has vertical and horizontal inner diameters larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. Thereby, the attachment position of the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. The details of the method for adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are the same as described using FIG. 51, so the explanation here will be omitted.

The upper base B220 and the lower base B221 are connected at three connection parts R1, R2, and R3 corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A and the three connection screw parts 2210 (see Figures 47 and 49). This allows the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 to adjust the distance between them at each of the connection parts R1, R2, and R3. The connection parts R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, and by appropriately changing the distance between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 at each of the connection parts R1, R2, and R3, it is possible to adjust the inclination of the lower base B221 relative to the upper base B220 in three-dimensional space. The details of how to adjust the distance between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 at each connecting portion R1, R2, and R3 are as explained using FIG. 52, so explanation will be omitted here.

By using such an upper base B220 and a lower base B221, it is possible to appropriately adjust the in-plane position of the upper base B220 relative to the projector cover B1, and the projector device B2 can be positioned in an appropriate position. In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the inclination of the lower base B221 relative to the upper base B220, and the attitude of the case B22 (such as the lens unit B21, which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower base B221 can be made appropriate. In this way, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to change its position and attitude within the cabinet G and adjust the emission position, traveling direction, and irradiation range of the irradiated light.

As shown in FIG. 121, the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 are disposed at the rear of the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has an open shape at the rear of the upper base B220 and the lower base B221. This leaves the connection parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221 exposed toward the rear. Although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 122, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper and rear sides of the reflector holding part B11 are open.

An angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 44) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 from above (back side). As described in the second embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. This changes the position (attitude) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding part B11, and adjusts the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection). It is possible to do so.

<Operation window G10 and closing cover G100>
Fig. 123 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the blocking lid, and the rear wall of the cabinet. Fig. 125 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the blocking lid removed from the rear wall. Fig. 126 is a partial enlarged view of the periphery of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in Fig. 125. Fig. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the blocking lid and the rear wall of the cabinet. Fig. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the blocking lid and the rear wall of the cabinet. Fig. 129 is a partial enlarged view of the periphery of the operation window in the gaming machine with the blocking lid attached to the rear wall.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged at the rear of the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned to face the closure lid G100. A space in which no other members are present is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, at the rear upper part of the cabinet G, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. A space in which no other members are present is formed above and behind the reflector holding part B11, and this space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. Note that in FIG. 123, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is indicated by diagonal lines.

Note that the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3 by fastening screws. As shown in FIG. 122, screw holes B100a to B100d for inserting screws are formed in the rear part of the projector cover B1. When the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3, the surface B110a in which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b in which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c in which the screw holes B100c and d are formed are , respectively, abut on the inner surface (front surface) of the rear wall G3. These surfaces B110a to B110c are formed separately from each other, so that the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding part B11 are open. ing.

As shown in FIG. 124, an operation window G10 is formed on the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening that allows the interior of the cabinet G to be viewed from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed by a closing cover G100.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the blocking cover G100 is removed from the rear wall G3 and viewed from the front, the connection parts R1, R2, and R3 (especially the nut 2213, see FIG. 52) between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, and the head (not shown) of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. This makes it possible to operate the nut 2213 from outside the cabinet G, and by turning the nut 2213 appropriately, the attitude of the projector device B2 can be adjusted. In addition, by operating the mounting screw T from outside the cabinet G, the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper base B220 can be moved, and the position of the projector device B2 can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, when the occluding lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower side of the back side, the angle of the reflector holding part B11 can be seen through the operation window G10. The head of the screw (not shown) inserted into the adjustment hole B111 can also be visually recognized. This allows the screw to be operated from outside the cabinet G, and by turning the screw appropriately, the attitude of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

The structures of the operation window G10 and the closure lid G100 will be described below. FIG. 127 shows the operating window G10 and the closing lid G100 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 128 shows the operating window G10 and the closing lid G100 as viewed diagonally from the front.

As shown in FIG. 127, the operation window G10 includes an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (back side a peripheral edge G10b formed to have a square-shaped surface at a recessed position with respect to the surface), four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, and an outer edge and a back wall of the peripheral edge G10b. A connecting portion G10d that connects to the outer surface of G3 is provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the peripheral edge G10b is not visible from the front, but since the screw hole G10c passes through the rear wall G3, it can be seen from the front. It is shown that a screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed in the outer surface of the back wall G3, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral edge G10b. Note that the peripheral portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal and vertical directions.

The closure lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and includes a back surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A portion G100c and a peripheral portion G100d formed forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is approximately the same as the outer shape of the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral edge G10b), and is smaller than the opening G10a of the operation window G10. is also getting bigger. As a result, by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 so as to fill the recess), the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed. It has become.

In more detail, when the blocking lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the blocking lid G100 is aligned with the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the four boss portions G100c of the blocking lid G100 overlap each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the blocking lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole G10c from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into a hole formed in the boss portion G100c. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is blocked by the blocking lid G100. Furthermore, the screws for fastening the blocking lid G100 to the rear wall G3 are screwed in from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw heads are positioned inside the cabinet G), ensuring security for the inside of the cabinet G.

In addition, when adjusting the position and orientation of the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3, with the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD open, tighten the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3. The screw fastening can be released by operating from the front side and turning it appropriately. Thereby, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) that has been closed by the closing lid G100 can be exposed. In this state, the attachment inserted from the outside (back side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a into the connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220. By operating the screw T, which is inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding part B11), the position and orientation of the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closure lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge G100d (the forward protrusion length of the peripheral edge G100d based on the front surface G100b), and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b. The length up to (the height of the boss portion G100c) is equal. Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged such that the front end of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 comes into contact with the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 also It comes into contact with the peripheral edge G10b of the window G10.

Figure 129 shows the blocking lid G100 placed in this state. In Figure 129, the shaded portion indicates the blocking lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the diagonal line portion indicates the rear wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded portion (front surface G100b of the blocking lid G100) and the diagonal line portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width (length in the front-to-rear direction) of the space S corresponds to the above-mentioned "forward protrusion length of the peripheral portion G100d" and "height of the boss portion G100c."

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (the front end of the peripheral portion G100d) and the back wall G3 (the operating window G10 It is possible to avoid a gap from being formed between the peripheral edge G10b) and prevent fraudulent acts from being committed through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10 is formed to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length of the connecting part G10d in the front-rear direction, and the peripheral edge G10b of the closing lid G100 is The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the forward protrusion length of the peripheral edge portion G100d based on the back surface G100a) is approximately the same as the length of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10). (It is slightly shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of G10). The length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 are each constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the occluding lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the occluding lid G100 forms approximately the same plane as the outer surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outer surface of the back wall G3). (located at the front), making it difficult to recognize the presence of the closing lid G100 from the outside.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that can perform effects using a projector are known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for gaming is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in gaming machines equipped with such projectors, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it has been difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which adjustments can be made to a projector while the projector is attached inside the gaming machine.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
a projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism) B3 attachment part to reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a housing section (cabinet G) that houses the projector;
The accommodation section is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment section can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) that can close the opening is attached. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating section (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2, etc.). (lens unit B21, etc.))) (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221; An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment part, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) ) is attached to a closing member (closing lid G100). Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) that is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) can be made to appear. It is possible to access the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) from the outside of the housing part (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the housing section (cabinet G), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) etc.)) is installed inside the housing part (cabinet G), and from the outside of the housing part (cabinet G), the adjustment part (the connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper By operating the attachment part of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.), the image is projected by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)). The traveling direction of the light can be adjusted.

(10-2) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
a projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism) B3 attachment part to reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector and has an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area for making images displayed on the screen visible;
Separately from the front surface, the main body section is provided with an opening (opening G10a of operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment section can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid) that can close the opening. G100) is installed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the pachislot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment parts (the connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, the attachment part of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) for adjusting the direction of light projected by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) can be operated from the outside, and a blocking member (blocking lid G100) that can block the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the blocking member (blocking lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is possible to reveal the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) that is blocked by the blocking member (blocking lid G100), and it becomes possible to operate the adjustment part (the connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, the attachment part of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from outside the main body (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the direction of travel of the light projected by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) can be adjusted by operating the adjustment parts (connections R1, R2, R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, the attachment part of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holder B11, etc.) from outside the main body (cabinet G) while the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is still attached inside the main body (cabinet G).

(10-3) The gaming machine according to (10-2) above,
The closing member (closure lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to unscrew it from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Thereby, it is possible to avoid removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while ensuring security for the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from outside the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the blocking member (blocking cover G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the blocking member (blocking cover G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G), or may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). The blocking member (blocking cover G100) may also be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the blocking member (blocking cover G100) to slide (slide) along the wall surface (inner surface or outer surface of the rear wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) may be formed in a rail shape on the inside or outside of the cabinet G (rear wall G3), and the blocking member (blocking cover G100) may be engaged on the guide member. If the blocking member (blocking cover G100) is configured to slide left and right (or front and rear) on the guide member to switch between a blocked state in which the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is blocked and an open state in which the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is open, it is possible to operate the adjustment unit from outside the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, and as in the sixth embodiment, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such effects, the configuration of the blocking member (blocking cover G100) is not essential in the present invention, and the blocking member (blocking cover G100) may be configured not to be attached to the main body (cabinet G) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the main body (cabinet G) may be configured to be always open.

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that an opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, and a blocking lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, it is possible to configure an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a blocking member (blocking lid G100) to be attached to any wall surface (e.g., rear wall G3, side wall G2, top wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G). For example, instead of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided in the side wall G2 or top wall G4, and a blocking member (blocking lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, the adjustment portion (for example, the connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged near the side wall G2 or the top wall G4. In addition, when an opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in the top wall G4 and a blocking member (the blocking cover G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 36) may be adopted as the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the blocking cover G10, respectively, or the opening G41 and the plate member G42 may not be formed, and a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the blocking cover G10 may be adopted separately.

In addition, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided on multiple wall surfaces (e.g., two or three of the rear wall G3, side wall G2, and top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and a blocking member (blocking lid G100) may be attached. For example, an opening G10a of an operation window G10 may be provided on the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and a blocking lid G10 may be attached so that an adjustment part for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (e.g., the connection parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, and the attachment part of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, etc.) can be operated from the outside, while an opening G10a of an operation window G10 may be provided on the top wall G4 of the cabinet G and a blocking lid G10 may be attached so that an adjustment part for adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3 (e.g., the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside.

In addition, a plurality of openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided on one wall surface (e.g., the rear wall G3, the side wall G2, or the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing each opening may be attached. For example, a first opening may be provided near the center of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and a first blocking lid capable of blocking the first opening may be attached so that an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (e.g., the connection parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, or the attachment part of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, etc.) can be operated from the outside, while a second opening may be provided above the first opening and a second blocking lid capable of blocking the second opening may be attached so that an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3 (e.g., the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside. When multiple openings are provided, blocking members capable of blocking each opening individually may be attached in the number of openings, or only one blocking member capable of blocking multiple openings at the same time may be attached.

When performing such adjustments from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), in order to facilitate the adjustment operation, it is desirable that the members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 at the connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper base B220 and the lower base B221, the mounting screws T inserted into the square holes 2201c of the upper base B220, the screws inserted into the angle adjustment holes B111 of the reflector holding part B11, etc.) are arranged so that they can be seen through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the front from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) (see FIG. 125). When multiple members to be adjusted are provided, it is desirable that they are arranged so that all of these multiple members are visible (for example, the entire upper base B220 is visible) when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the front from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). In the case where a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be made to have a diameter larger than the distance between these members (the distance between the farthest members). This makes it easier to adjust these members. However, it is not essential that the members to be adjusted are visible through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the front from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). For example, even if the member to be adjusted (e.g., the screw inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding part B11)) cannot be seen when viewing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), if the member can be seen by changing the angle and looking into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) (see FIG. 126), it is possible to operate the member from the outside if a space is formed between the member and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) that does not contain other members. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (adjustment screw, nut, etc.) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (irradiation It has been explained that the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is accommodated in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD), while the unit B) is accommodated (see FIG. 40). ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be partitioned into an upper space and a lower space, but a space in which the projector (irradiation unit B) is housed and a control board (main control board MS or sub-space). There is no need to distinguish between the space in which the control device SS, etc.) is housed. For example, a control board (main control board MS or sub-control device SS) may be arranged in the space behind the reflector holding part B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 123). This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space within the main body (cabinet G) and to alleviate the phenomenon in which heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub-control device SS) is trapped in the lower space. . Note that the opening/closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD), or may be composed of one door.

[Seventh embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of portions that apply to the seventh embodiment as well as those described in the first to sixth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is similar to the above, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment without departing from the spirit of the seventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the seventh embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

In addition, even if the shape is different from the slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for the configurations having the same functions for convenience. In addition, even if the shape is the same or the process is the same as the slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In this embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). All of the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen 3010 (see FIGS. 132 and 133). The light projected from the projector 9020 enters the central screen 3010 from behind (back side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the central screen 3010. The details will be explained below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
Fig. 130 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. Fig. 131 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. Fig. 132 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the central screen unit and the front top unit removed as viewed from the front. Fig. 133 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the central screen unit and the front top unit removed as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen unit 3000. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the central screen unit 3000 includes a central screen 3010 and a rear transparent plate 3050.

The central screen 3010 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, and is similar to the screens in the fourth embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), it has an entrance surface on the back side into which the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The central screen 3010 is made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is formed to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and has a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting. exhibit color. The central screen 3010 is formed by three-dimensional molding so as to have rigidity (not flexibility).

The central screen 3010, like the screen sheet 1046 (see FIG. 102) in the fourth embodiment, is formed continuously from a flat portion 3011 located at the center and from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 3011 toward the rear. and a curved portion 3012. The plane part 3011 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved part 3012 has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 94) in the fourth embodiment. ing.

The rear translucent plate 3050 is mainly made of transparent polycarbonate and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Like the translucent plate 1045 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 102), the rear translucent plate 3050 has a flat portion 3051 located in the center and curved portions 3052 formed continuously from both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 3051 toward the rear. The flat portion 3051 is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 3052 has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate.

The central screen 3010 is disposed at the front (outermost surface) of the upper door mechanism UD (pachinko slot machine 1). This results in a state in which no other components are present between the central screen 3010 and the player. The rear translucent plate 3050 is disposed on the rear side of the central screen 3010, reinforcing the central screen 3010 from the rear side (cabinet G side). There are no particular limitations on the material of the rear translucent plate 3050, so long as it is capable of reinforcing the central screen 3010, and in addition to polycarbonate, acrylic plate, resin such as ABS, glass plate, etc. can be used as appropriate.

Since the rear transparent plate 3050 has translucency, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear transparent plate 3050 and enters the incident surface (back surface) of the central screen 3010. do. As a result, images (still images and moving images) related to the game are displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the central screen 3010. Since there is no structure in front of the central screen 3010 that obstructs the player's view, when an image is displayed on the central screen 3010, the image is visible to the player.

Further, a left side decorative unit 3100L and a right side decorative unit 3100R are provided on the left side and right side portions of the upper door mechanism UD, respectively, and a front top unit 3200 is provided on the upper portion of the upper door mechanism UD. It is being Each configuration will be described in more detail below.

<Arrangement relationship between center screen 3010 and side decoration portion 3110>
FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the front. FIG. 135 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side uneven portion of the center screen. FIG. 136 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136 with the side decoration section removed. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the front. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is a sectional view of the right side decoration part. FIG. 141 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and right side decoration part.

As shown in FIG. 134, the rear part (right side part) of the curved part 3012 (right curved part 3012R) of the central screen 3010 includes a right side uneven part 3020R (upper right side uneven part 3021R, right middle side uneven part 3022R, A lower right side uneven portion 3023R) is formed. In addition, the rear part (left side part) of the curved part 3012 (left curved part 3012L) of the central screen 3010 has a left side uneven part 3020L (upper left side uneven part 3021L, middle left side uneven part 3022L, and lower left side uneven part). 3023L) is formed.

The central screen 3010 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and the right side uneven portion 3020R and the left side uneven portion 3020L are also bilaterally symmetrical. Therefore, in the following, the right side uneven part 3020R (upper right side uneven part 3021R, middle right side uneven part 3022R, and lower right side uneven part 3023R) and the left side uneven part 3020L (upper left side uneven part 3021L, middle left side uneven part 3023R) portion 3022L and lower left side uneven portion 3023L), and may be referred to as side uneven portion 3020 (upper side uneven portion 3021, middle side uneven portion 3022, and lower side uneven portion 3023).

As shown in FIG. 135, the upper side uneven portion 3021 has a recess 3021a that is recessed with respect to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3021b that projects with respect to the recess 3021a. The protrusion 3021b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3021a. Similarly, the middle side uneven portion 3022 has a recess 3022a that is recessed with respect to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3022b that projects with respect to the recess 3022a. The protrusion 3022b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3022a. The lower side uneven portion 3023 has a recess 3023a that is recessed relative to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3023b that projects relative to the recess 3023a. The protrusion 3023b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3023a. For clarity, in FIG. 135, the recess 3021a, the recess 3022a, and the recess 3023a are shown in black.

The central screen 3010 also has a rear side portion 3013 that is formed continuously from the rear end of the curved portion 3012 toward the rear. The rear side portion 3013 is formed to be approximately flat. For ease of understanding, the rear side portion 3013 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 135.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, on the right side of the right curved portion 3012R of the center screen 3010, a right side decorative portion 3110R is arranged along the right curved portion 3012R. Similarly, on the left side of the left curved portion 3012L of the central screen 3010, a left side decorative portion 3110L is arranged along the left curved portion 3012L. The right side decoration part 3110R and the left side decoration part 3110L are components of the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L (see FIG. 130), respectively. The right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L have a mutually symmetrical structure. In this specification, the right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L are sometimes referred to as a side decorative portion 3110 without distinction.

As shown in Figures 138 and 139, the side decorative part 3110 has an outer part 3111 and an inner part 3112. The outer part 3111 and the inner part 3112 are each formed in a flat plate shape and are arranged approximately parallel to each other. In addition, the side decorative part 3110 has bulging parts 3113 (upper bulging part 3114, middle bulging part 3115, and lower bulging part 3116) that bulge from the front part of the inner part 3112 toward the opposite side to the outer part 3111.

Figure 140 shows the side decorative part 3110 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulge 3115. As shown in Figure 140, the middle bulge 3115 has a front part 3115a disposed on the front side, and a bent part 3115b formed by bending from the side edge of the front part 3115a. This forms a triangular space 3115c surrounded by the inner part 3112, the front part 3115a, and the bent part 3115b (extended part).

Figure 141 shows the central screen 3010 and the side decorative portion 3110 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulge 3115. For ease of understanding, Figure 141 shows the central screen 3010 and the side decorative portion 3110 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. Additionally, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the side decorative portion 3110 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 141, the inner portion 3112 of the side decorative portion 3110 abuts against the rear portion 3013 of the central screen 3010, and the bent portion 3115b of the side decorative portion 3110 abuts against the recess 3022a in the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the protrusion 3022b in the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space 3115c of the side decorative portion 3110.

Similarly, although detailed illustration is omitted, the vicinity of the upper bulging part 3114 of the side decorative part 3110 has a structure corresponding to the upper side uneven part 3021 of the central screen 3010, and the lower bulging part of the side decorative part 3110 The vicinity of the protruding portion 3116 has a structure corresponding to the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the protrusion 3021b on the upper side uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner side portion 3112 and the upper bulge portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110. Further, the protrusion 3023b of the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner side portion 3112 and the lower bulging portion 3116 of the side decorative portion 3110.

As described above, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the side decorative portion 3110 is arranged along the curved portion 3012 and the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the side decorative portions 3110 are in a state of covering the rear portion of the central screen 3010. Here, in this embodiment, a predetermined motif image (an image showing a motif of the pachi-slot machine 1) is displayed on the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. The motif image is an image corresponding to a pillar (pillar image), and the size of the pillar image corresponds to the size of the curved portion 3012. Due to the shape of the curved portion 3012, the pillar image has a three-dimensional appearance. As a result, it can be shown to the player that a pillar having the same size and curvature as the curved part 3012 actually exists, and the side decoration part 3110 can ride on the pillar. You can make it look like you are there. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the decoration of the side decoration part 3110 (the bulging part 3113, etc.) is applied directly to the pillar. Further, since there is no other member between the player and the central screen 3010, the player can directly touch the pillar. Furthermore, the image displayed on the rear side of the central screen 3010 may appear distorted to the player; however, since the side decoration section 3110 covers this area, it is possible to hide the distorted image. This is possible, and it is also possible to prevent the appearance of the image from deteriorating.

<Side decoration unit 3100>
FIG. 142 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along arrow AA. FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the side LED board and light guide. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the side LED board and light guide. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the side LED and light guide. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the light guide and side light lens. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the sidelight lens seen from the rear. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the sidelight lens. FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the sidelight lens. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the rear transparent plate, the light guide, and the side light lens. FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the side decoration part. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of a side decoration part and a side light lens. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plates. FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing the side light shielding plate removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along arrow AA. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 158 is a perspective view showing the side LED board cover removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157.

As shown in FIG. 142, a right side decorative unit 3100R is disposed on the right side of the central screen 3010, and a left side decorative unit 3100L is disposed on the left side of the central screen 3010. The right side decorative unit 3100R and the left side decorative unit 3100L have a symmetrical structure. In this specification, the right side decorative unit 3100R and the left side decorative unit 3100L may be referred to as side decorative unit 3100 without distinction.

As shown in FIG. 143, the side decorative unit 3100 includes a side decorative part 3110, a side LED board 3120, a light guide 3130, and a side light lens 3140. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 143, the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 are shown in cross-hatching, the cut surfaces of the side decorative part 3110 and the side LED board 3120 are shown in black, and the cut surfaces of the light guide 3130 and the side light lens 3140 are shown in diagonal lines.

FIG. 144 shows the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, a plurality of side LEDs 3122 are provided on the front surface 3121 of the side LED board 3120. Specifically, two side LEDs 3122a, two side LEDs 3122b, two side LEDs 3122c, two side LEDs 3122d, two side LEDs 3122e, two side LEDs 3122f, and two side LEDs 3122g are provided. The side LED 3122 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface (approximately to the right). Further, the side LED 3122 is a full-color LED and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green.

The light guide 3130 includes a first light guide section 3131, a second light guide section 3132, a third light guide section 3133, a fourth light guide section 3134, a fifth light guide section 3135, a sixth light guide section 3136, and a third light guide section 3133. 7 light guide portions 3137, and has a structure in which these are sequentially connected. Further, the light guide 3130 is made of a material (eg, transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (eg, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%).

The first light guiding section 3131 has a base section 3131a, and an upper branch section 3131b and a lower branch section 3131c branched from the rear end of the base section 3131a. Similarly, the second light guiding section 3132 has a base section 3132a, and an upper branch section 3132b and a lower branch section 3132c branched from the rear end of the base section 3132a. The third light guiding section 3133 has a base section 3133a, and an upper branch section 3133b and a lower branch section 3133c branched from the rear end of the base section 3133a. The fourth light guiding section 3134 has a base section 3134a, and an upper branch section 3134b and a lower branch section 3134c branched from the base section 3134a. The fifth light guiding section 3135 has a base section 3135a, and an upper branch section 3135b and a lower branch section 3135c branched from the base section 3135a. The sixth light guiding section 3136 has a base section 3136a, and an upper branch section 3136b and a lower branch section 3136c branched from the base section 3136a. The seventh light guiding section 3137 has a base section 3137a, and an upper branch section 3137b and a lower branch section 3137c branched from the base section 3137a.

As shown in FIG. 144, the upper branch 3131b and the lower branch 3131c in the first light guiding section 3131 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122a. Similarly, the upper branch 3132b and the lower branch 3132c in the second light guiding section 3132 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122b. The upper branch 3133b and the lower branch 3133c in the third light guiding section 3133 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122c. The upper branch 3134b and the lower branch 3134c in the fourth light guiding section 3134 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122d. The upper branch 3135b and the lower branch 3135c in the fifth light guiding section 3135 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122e. The upper branch 3136b and the lower branch 3136c of the sixth light guiding section 3136 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122f. The upper branch 3137b and the lower branch 3137c of the seventh light guiding section 3137 are each arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122g.

As a result, the light emitted from the side LED 3122a enters the upper branch 3131b and the lower branch 3131c. As shown in FIG. 146, the upper branch 3131b and the lower branch 3131c are bent with respect to the base 3131a. As a result, the light incident on the upper branch 3131b and the lower branch 3131c changes its traveling direction to the forward direction inside the first light guide 3131 and reaches the front surface 3131d of the base 3131a. Similarly, the light emitted from the side LED 3122b reaches the front surface 3132d of the base 3132a in the second light guide 3132. The light emitted from the side LED 3122c reaches the front surface 3133d of the base 3133a in the third light guide 3133. The light emitted from the side LED 3122d reaches the front surface 3134d of the base portion 3134a in the fourth light guiding section 3134. The light emitted from the side LED 3122e reaches the front surface 3135d of the base portion 3135a in the fifth light guiding section 3135. The light emitted from the side LED 3122f reaches the front surface 3136d of the base portion 3136a in the sixth light guiding section 3136. The light emitted from the side LED 3122g reaches the front surface 3137d of the base portion 3137a in the seventh light guiding section 3137.

For ease of understanding, Figure 146 shows the side LEDs 3122a-3122g and light guide 3130 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationships. In addition, the front faces 3131d-3137d of the base portions 3131a-3137a are shown with diagonal lines. The front faces 3131d-3137d are formed as substantially flat surfaces in the vertical direction, with their normal direction facing forward.

FIG. 147 shows the light guide 3130 and side light lens 3140 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the sidelight lens 3140 includes a first light guide 3141, a second light guide 3142, a third light guide 3143, a fourth light guide 3144, and a fifth light guide 3145. , a sixth light guide section 3146, and a seventh light guide section 3147, and has a structure in which these are connected in sequence. The side light lens 3140 is made of a translucent material.

Figure 149 shows the sidelight lens 3140 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the first light guiding section 3141. Figure 150 shows the sidelight lens 3140 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the second light guiding section 3142.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first light guide section 3141 includes a rear protrusion 3141a that is formed in a plate shape and protrudes rearward, and a front protrusion that is formed to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3141a. 3141b. Similarly, the fourth light guide section 3144 includes a rear protrusion 3144a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a front protrusion 3144b formed so as to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3144a. have. The seventh light guide portion 3147 includes a rear protrusion 3147a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a front protrusion 3147b formed so as to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3147a. ing.

150, the second light guide 3142 has a rear protrusion 3142a formed in a plate shape and protruding backward, and a right front protrusion 3142b and a left front protrusion 3142c protruding forward via a branch structure formed continuously from the rear protrusion 3142a. Similarly, the third light guide 3143 has a rear protrusion 3143a formed in a plate shape and protruding backward, and a right front protrusion 3143b and a left front protrusion 3143c protruding forward via a branch structure formed continuously from the rear protrusion 3143a. The fifth light guide 3145 has a rear protrusion 3145a formed in a plate shape and protruding backward, and a right front protrusion 3145b and a left front protrusion 3145c protruding forward via a branch structure formed continuously from the rear protrusion 3145a. The sixth light guide section 3146 has a rearward protruding section 3146a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right-side forward protruding section 3146b and a left-side forward protruding section 3146c that protrude forward via a branching structure formed continuously from the rearward protruding section 3146a.

In Figure 148, the rear end faces 3141d to 3147d of the rear protrusions 3141a to 3147a in the first light guiding section 3141 to the seventh light guiding section 3147 are indicated by diagonal lines. As shown in Figure 147, the rear end faces 3141d to 3147d in the first light guiding section 3141 to the seventh light guiding section 3147 of the side light lens 3140 are arranged to face the front faces 3131d to 3137d in the first light guiding section 3131 to the seventh light guiding section 3137 of the light guide 3130, respectively.

In FIG. 151, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, the light guide 3130, and the sidelight lens 3140 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown with the other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIG. 151, the rear portion 3053 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is disposed between the light guide 3130 and the sidelight lens 3140 (see FIG. 143). The front faces 3131d to 3137d of the first light-guiding portion 3131 to the seventh light-guiding portion 3137 of the light guide 3130 are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the rear portion 3053 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050. The rear end faces 3141d to 3147d of the first light-guiding portion 3141 to the seventh light-guiding portion 3147 of the sidelight lens 3140 are substantially in contact with the front surface of the rear portion 3053 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050.

Here, the rear light transmitting plate 3050 is made of a material (for example, transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (for example, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%). ing. Therefore, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122 to 3122g and reaching the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the light guide 3130 enters the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the side light lens 3140. Note that the rear side portion 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is a portion formed into a flat plate by bending the rear end of the rear transparent plate 3050.

The light incident on the rear end surface 3141d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the first light guide section 3141 and reaches the front protrusion section 3141b. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3144d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fourth light guide section 3144 and reaches the front protrusion section 3144b. The light incident on the rear end surface 3147d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the seventh light guide section 3147 and reaches the front protrusion section 3147b.

Also, light incident on the rear end face 3142d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the second light guiding section 3142 and reaches the right front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c. Similarly, light incident on the rear end face 3143d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the third light guiding section 3143 and reaches the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c. Light incident on the rear end face 3145d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fifth light guiding section 3145 and reaches the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c. Light incident on the rear end face 3146d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the sixth light guiding section 3146 and reaches the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c.

As shown in FIG. 152, the side decorative portion 3110 has light emission openings 3117 (first light emission opening 3117a, second light emission opening 3117b, third light emission opening 3117c, fourth light emission opening 3117d, fifth light emission opening 3117e, sixth light emission opening 3117f, and seventh light emission opening 3117g) that penetrate in the front-rear direction. The first light emission opening 3117a, the fourth light emission opening 3117d, and the seventh light emission opening 3117g each have one opening, and the second light emission opening 3117b, the third light emission opening 3117c, the fifth light emission opening 3117e, and the sixth light emission opening 3117f each have two openings.

For ease of understanding, the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g are indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 152. The side decorative portion 3110 has a structure that protrudes forward from the periphery of the first light emission opening 3117a, the periphery of the fourth light emission opening 3117d, and the periphery of the seventh light emission opening 3117g, and these protruding structures are formed so as to be continuous with the upper bulge portion 3114, the middle bulge portion 3115, and the lower bulge portion 3116, respectively.

The shapes of the first light output opening 3117a, the fourth light output opening 3117d, and the seventh light output opening 3117g are the same as the front protrusion 3141b, the front protrusion 3144b, and the front protrusion of the side light lens 3140, respectively. This corresponds to the shape of the portion 3147b. Further, the shapes of the two second light exit openings 3117b, the two third light exit openings 3117c, the two fifth light exit openings 3117e, and the two sixth light exit openings 3117f are respectively on the right side. Shapes of the front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c, the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c, and the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c It corresponds to

The side light lens 3140 is disposed between the outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 (see FIG. 139) of the side decorative portion 3110. As shown in FIG. 153, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the forward protrusion 3141b, the right front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c, the forward protrusion 3144b, the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c, the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c, and the forward protrusion 3147b of the side light lens 3140 are fitted into the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g of the side decorative portion 3110, respectively, and the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g are blocked by these protrusions. As a result, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g passes through the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g and is emitted from the side light lens 3140 to the outside of the slot machine 1. The front end faces of these protrusions are embossed, which allows the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g to shine evenly.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, a side light shielding plate 3150 is disposed between the rear side 3013 of the central screen 3010 and the rear side 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050. It is set up. As shown in FIG. 155, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end of the central screen 3010 is positioned forward of the rear end of the rear transparent plate 3050, and the rear transparent plate 3050 The rear portion is not covered by the central screen 3010 and is exposed. For clarity, in FIG. 155, the exposed portion (exposed portion 3054) is shown with diagonal lines. The side light shielding plate 3150 is arranged to cover the exposed portion 3054.

The side light shielding plate 3150 has a light shielding property and is designed to block light from passing through. The side light shielding plate 3150 is made of polycarbonate or the like, and is colored black. For clarity, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side light shielding plate 3150 is shown with diagonal lines. By providing the side light shielding plate 3150, it is possible to prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from passing through the exposed portion 3054 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 and entering the side light lens 3140. It looks like this.

Note that the upper end of the side light shielding plate 3150 is slightly lower than the upper end of the rear light transmitting plate 3050, and the upper part of the exposed portion 3054 is not covered by the side light shielding plate 3150 and is still exposed. However, the upper end of the side light lens 3140 is also lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 (approximately the same height as the side light-shielding plate 3150), and the projection from the projector 9020 is transmitted through the exposed portion. The emitted light will not enter the side light lens 3140.

Further, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side LED board cover 3160 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the shielding wall member 3300 is shown in hatching. A side LED board 3120 is installed on the side LED board cover 3160. As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the side LED board cover 3160 is arranged on the side of the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130, and together with the side decoration part 3110 and the key receiving member 3320, the side LED board cover 3160 It constitutes the outermost surface of the machine 1). The shielding wall member 3300 will be explained in detail later.

<Shielding wall member 3300>
FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the front. FIG. 160 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left side periphery of the shielding wall member. FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram of how light is projected from the projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 165 is a front view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shielding wall member and the light guide.

As shown in Figures 159 to 161, the shielding wall member 3300 has a generally symmetrical structure and has a rectangular ring shape with an opening in the center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 3300 has a lower portion 3302, a left portion 3303, a right portion 3304, and an upper portion 3305 arranged around the light passing opening 3301.

The lower part 3302 has a lower surface 3302a. The lower side surface 3302a constitutes the upper surface (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301) of the lower side portion 3302, and is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Although not shown, the lower surface 3302a is textured to form fine irregularities. Graining is a process in which grains (wrinkle patterns) are formed on the surface, and this process is performed as a light diffusion process. In this specification, the shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by the graining process is not particularly limited, and may include patterns such as satin finish, wood grain, rock grain, sand grain, cloth grain/silk grain, etc., geometric patterns, and parallel patterns. It is possible to appropriately form a pattern in which thin lines are arranged at equal intervals.

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 has a first left side inner wall surface 3303a, a second left side inner wall surface 3303b, a third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and a fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d. The first left side inner wall surface 3303a, the second left side inner wall surface 3303b, the third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and the fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d constitute the right side surface (the surface facing the light passing opening 3301) of the left side portion 3303, and are formed in a substantially vertical direction. For ease of understanding, FIG. 160 shows the left side portion 3303 cut along a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 3303a is formed continuously from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 3303 diagonally rearward. The second left inner wall surface 3303b is formed continuously from the rear end (right end) of the first left inner wall surface 3303a toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 3303a. The third left inner wall surface 3303c is formed continuously from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 3303b toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 3303a and a gentler slope than the second left inner wall surface 3303b. has been done. The fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is formed continuously from the rear end of the third left inner wall surface 3303c toward the rear with a steeper slope than the second left inner wall surface 3303b.

Further, the left side portion 3303 has a left rear end portion 3303e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 3303f of the left rear end portion 3303e is formed continuously from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d toward the right side. The front surface 3303f and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d are substantially perpendicular to each other. Note that the length of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d in the front-rear direction becomes shorter as it goes upward, and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is not formed in the upper part of the left side portion 3303, and the left rear end portion The front surface 3303f of 3303e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 3303c.

Similarly, although a detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 3304 includes a first right inner wall surface 3304a, a second right inner wall surface 3304b, a third right inner wall surface 3304c, a fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and a right rear end portion. 3304e. The first right inner wall surface 3304a, the second right inner wall surface 3304b, the third right inner wall surface 3304c, the fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and the right rear end 3304e are the first left inner wall surface 3303a and the second left inner wall surface 3303a, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 3303b, the third left inner wall surface 3303c, the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d, and the left rear end portion 3303e.

The left rear end portion 3303e and the right rear end portion 3304e are each formed in a substantially vertical direction. For clarity, in FIG. 161, the back surface 3303g of the left rear end portion 3303e and the back surface 3304g of the right rear end portion 3304e are shown with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged above the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331. As a result, the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331 are substantially completely covered by the lower side portion 3302 (lower side surface 3302a). The position of the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 in the front-rear direction substantially matches the position of the rear edge of the lower part 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050 in the front-rear direction. That is, the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 substantially coincides with the rear edge of the lower part 3055 in plan view, and the lower part 3302 and the lower part 3055 are arranged with almost no gap between them. Note that the lower part 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is formed continuously from the lower end of the flat part 3051 and the curved part 3052 toward the rear, and is arranged substantially horizontally.

The right side portion 3304 of the shielding wall member 3300 is disposed to the left of the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R. As a result, the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R are almost completely covered by the right side portion 3304 (the first right inner wall surface 3304a, the second right inner wall surface 3304b, the third right inner wall surface 3304c, and the fourth right inner wall surface 3304d).

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 3303 of the shielding wall member 3300 is disposed to the right of the left side LED board 3120L and the left side key receiving member 3320L. As a result, the left side LED board 3120L and the left side key receiving member 3320L are almost completely covered by the left side portion 3303 (the first left side inner wall surface 3303a, the second left side inner wall surface 3303b, the third left side inner wall surface 3303c, and the fourth left side inner wall surface 3303d).

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 (the light reflected by the mirror 9030) travels toward the front (the side where the central screen 3010 is arranged) (see FIG. 99). In FIG. 164, the irradiation range of such light is indicated by diagonal lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(a), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 3301 of the shielding wall member 3300 and reaches the central screen 3010. Meanwhile, a portion of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the left side portion 3303 (the right side of the left rear end portion 3303e) and the right side portion 3304 (the left side of the right rear end portion 3304e) of the shielding wall member 3300. Since the shielding wall member 3300 does not have translucency, the light cannot pass through the left side portion 3303 and the right side portion 3304, and is reflected by the left side portion 3303 and the right side portion 3304, and does not reach the central screen 3010.

On the other hand, another embodiment shown in FIG. 164(b) has the same configuration as this embodiment except that the shielding wall member 3300 is not provided. In this embodiment, the progress of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is not obstructed by the shielding wall member 3300, so the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164(b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164(a). It has become. Specifically, in FIG. 164(a), region I and region II are not the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 164(b), region I and region II are the irradiation range. Region I and region II are regions located at the periphery of the central screen 3010 when viewed from the front.

In region I, the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L are arranged. Further, in region II, a right side LED board 3120R and a right key receiving member 3320R are arranged. Therefore, in other embodiments, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiver member 3320L, as well as by the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiver member 3320R, and A situation may arise in which reflected light enters the central screen 3010. In contrast, in this embodiment, since Region I and Region II are not included in the irradiation range, a portion of the light projected from the projector 9020 is transmitted to the left side LED board 3120L, the left key receiver member 3320L, and the right It is possible to prevent a situation where the light is reflected by the side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R (the reflected light enters the central screen 3010).

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 has a left front end 3303h formed by bending the front end slightly to the left. Similarly, the right side portion 3304 has a right front end 3304h formed by bending the front end slightly to the right. As shown in FIG. 165, the left front end 3303h and the right front end 3304h are formed with light guide openings 3306 (first light guide opening 3306a, second light guide opening 3306b, third light guide opening 3306c, fourth light guide opening 3306d, fifth light guide opening 3306e, sixth light guide opening 3306f, and seventh light guide opening 3306g) that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The light guide openings 3306a to 3306g are slightly larger in shape in a front view than the base portions 3131a to 3137a of the first light guiding portion 3131 to the seventh light guiding portion 3137 of the light guide 3130. As shown in FIG. 166, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front portions of the base portions 3131a to 3137a of the first light guiding portion 3131 to the seventh light guiding portion 3137 of the light guide 3130 are inserted into the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g, respectively. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the base portions 3131a to 3137a are positioned approximately on the same plane as the front surface 3304i (front surface 3303i) of the right front end portion 3304h (left front end portion 3303h). As a result, the light that has passed through the light guide 3130 travels from the light guide 3130 to the sidelight lens 3140 via the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g.

<Formation of Air Flow Path>
Fig. 167 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the rear. Fig. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism. Fig. 169 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front and rear frames and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in Fig. 168. Fig. 170 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. Fig. 171 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the front. Fig. 172 is a perspective view of the top frame base as viewed from the rear and below. Fig. 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in Fig. 172. Fig. 174 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear. Fig. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. Fig. 176 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 167, a right ventilation opening 3307R and a left ventilation opening 3307L are formed in the upper portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300. The right ventilation opening 3307R and the left ventilation opening 3307L are each formed to allow air to pass in the front-to-rear direction. For ease of understanding, the right ventilation opening 3307R and the left ventilation opening 3307L are shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 167.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168, the top frame base 3210 has an upper wall 3211. The top frame base 3210 is a component of the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130), and is a member constituting the frame of the front top unit 3200. The top wall 3211 is provided with a plurality of right side vents 3212R and a plurality of left side vents 3212L, respectively. The top frame base 3210 is made of polycarbonate or the like and has a symmetrical structure. Note that the top frame base 3210 is colored black by mixing a pigment or dye into a resin material before molding. Thereby, the top frame base 3210 does not transmit light.

An upper front and back frame 3230 is arranged below the top frame base 3210. As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the upper front and back frame 3230 has a structure in which a right side portion 3230R and a left side portion 3230L are connected by a center portion 3230C. The right side portion 3230R is formed with a right side opening 3231R that opens upward and a right side opening 3232R that opens rearward. The left side portion 3230L is formed with a left side opening 3231L that opens upward and a left side opening 3232L that opens rearward.

The right side opening 3231R and the right side opening 3232R communicate with each other via the right side cavity 3233R formed inside the right side part 3230R, and the left side opening 3231L and the left side opening 3232L communicate with each other through the left side cavity 3233R formed inside the left side part 3230L. They communicate via a cavity 3233L. For clarity, in FIG. 170, the openings 3231 (the right opening 3231R and the left opening 3231L) and the openings 3232 (the right opening 3232R and the left opening 3232L) are shown with diagonal lines.

Duct seals 3240 (right duct seal 3240R and left duct seal 3240L) are disposed between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front-rear frame 3230. The right duct seal 3240R and left duct seal 3240L each have a rectangular shape with a large opening in the center, and are disposed along the periphery of the right opening 3231R and left opening 3231L in the upper front-rear frame 3230. As the duct seal 3240, a cushioning material (e.g., rubber packing) capable of sealing the gap between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front-rear frame 3230 can be appropriately used.

Here, the right side ventilation opening 3212R and the left side ventilation opening 3212L of the top frame base 3210 are connected to the right side cavity 3233R and the left side cavity 3233L via the right side opening 3231R and the left side opening 3231L of the upper front-rear frame 3230, respectively. The right side cavity 3233R and the left side cavity 3233L are connected to the right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L of the shielding wall member 3300 via the right side opening 3232R and the left side opening 3232L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, through the left side ventilation port 3212L, the left side cavity 3233L, and the left side ventilation opening 3307L. This air enters the inside of case B22 via intake port B22A (see FIG. 57). The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 moves to the right while taking away the heat generated inside the case B22, and exits the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). The air exiting the case B22 is released to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the right side ventilation opening 3307R, the right side cavity 3233R, and the right side ventilation port 3212R.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, while the intake port B22A was provided on the right side of case B22, it demonstrated that the exhaust port B22E was provided on the left side of case B22. In contrast, in this embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, a frame base engagement groove 3234 (a frame base engagement groove 3234R and a frame base engagement groove 3234L) is formed in the center portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230. The frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed as a concave portion recessed from the surrounding surface so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The frame base engagement groove 3234R and the frame base engagement groove 3234L have substantially the same configuration and are provided so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 171, the frame base engagement groove 3234 is composed of a groove bottom 3234a, and a left side wall surface 3234b and a right side wall surface 3234c that connect the groove bottom 3234a to the surrounding surfaces. The frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed from the front end to the rear of the central portion 3230C, but the rear end of the frame base engagement groove 3234 is positioned forward of the rear end of the central portion 3230C. As a result, the left and right sides of the frame base engagement groove 3234 (groove left side portion 3235 and groove right side portion 3236) are connected by the rear portion of the frame base engagement groove 3234 (groove rear side portion 3237).

A groove rear opening 3234d that opens toward the rear is formed at the rear end of the frame base engagement groove 3234. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 171, the left side wall surface 3234b of the frame base engagement groove 3234L is shown in black, and the groove rear opening 3234d of the frame base engagement groove 3234R is shown with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 172, front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 (front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L) are formed on the lower surface 3211a of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210. The front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 are formed as convex portions that protrude from the surrounding surfaces and extend in the front and rear direction. The front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L have substantially the same configuration and are provided substantially parallel to each other.

The distance between the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L is approximately the same as the distance between the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and 3234L in the upper front and rear frames 3230. Further, the sizes of the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L are slightly smaller than the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and frame base engagement grooves 3234L.

As shown in FIG. 173, the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 have front and rear frame engagement claws 3213a. The front and rear frame engagement claws 3213a are formed at the rear ends of the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 with their lower portions protruding rearward. For clarity, in FIG. 173, the side surfaces of the front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 protrude rearward from the groove rear opening 3234d of the upper front and rear frames 3230. Note that, on the lower surface of the central portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230, a portion of the lower surface where the frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed has a downwardly extending groove corresponding to the recess of the frame base engagement groove 3234. A protruding structure 3238 shaped like a letter is formed.

Figure 175 shows the top frame base 3210 and the upper front and rear frame 3230 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the frame base engagement grooves 3234R) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For ease of understanding, in Figure 175, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the upper front and rear frame 3230 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 175, the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and 3213L of the top frame base 3210 are inserted into the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and 3234L of the upper front and rear frames 3230, respectively. ing. In this state, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 are positioned below the groove rear side portion 3237 of the upper front and rear frame 3230.

The top wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 is formed in a flat plate shape and does not have a support structure, so it does not have sufficient strength. In this regard, if the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 are slid along the frame base engagement grooves 3234, the top frame base 3210 can be easily attached to the upper front and rear frame 3230, and damage to the top frame base 3210 during attachment can be prevented. After attachment, the top frame base 3210 is supported by the upper front and rear frame 3230, preventing the top wall 3211 from bending.

As shown in FIG. 167, the boundary portion (upper right corner 3310R) between the right side portion 3304 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 has a structure that bulges toward the light passing opening 3301. A speaker opening 3311 is formed in the upper right corner 3310R. For ease of understanding, the speaker opening 3311 is indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 167.

Below the speaker opening 3311, there is provided a speaker inclined portion 3312 that has an inclination that descends toward the rear. As a result, a harness arrangement space 3313 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 3312. As shown in FIG. 176, a harness 3314 for connection to the speaker 3410 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 3313. The harness 3314 is connected to the speaker 3410 via the speaker opening 3311. FIG. 176 shows that a portion of the speaker 3410 is exposed through the speaker opening 3311.

A speaker harness protector 3315 is arranged on the back side of the speaker opening 3311. The speaker harness protector 3315 has a structure in which a predetermined level difference is formed between a surface in the front-back direction and a surface in the vertical direction. As a result, the harness placement space 3313 is closed by the speaker harness protector 3315, and the harness 3314 is surrounded by the wall formed by the speaker slope 3312 and the speaker harness protector 3315.

Similarly, a speaker opening 3311 and a speaker inclined portion 3312 are formed at the boundary (upper left corner 3310L) between the left side portion 3303 and the upper portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300. The upper left corner 3310L has a structure that is symmetrical to the upper right corner 3310R, so a detailed description is omitted. Note that in FIG. 176, the speaker harness protector 3315 on the rear side of the upper right corner 3310R has been removed, while the speaker harness protector 3315 on the rear side of the upper left corner 3310L is attached.

<Reflection of image on top frame base 3210>
FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. Figure 178 is a bottom view of the top frame base. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from slightly below. Figure 180 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram of the plane part of the central screen and the lower wall of the top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 177, the top frame base 3210 includes a bottom wall 3214. The lower wall 3214 is formed into a flat plate shape and is substantially parallel to the upper wall 3211. The upper wall 3211 and the lower wall 3214 are arranged substantially horizontally. For clarity, the bottom wall 3214 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 177.

As shown in FIG. 178, the lower surface 3215 of the lower wall 3214 has an image reflecting surface 3216 and a decorative surface 3217. The image reflecting surface 3216 has an arcuate shape (a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a string connecting the ends of the circular arc). The image reflecting surface 3216 is not textured except for a pattern 3216a formed as a concave groove, and is a substantially flat smooth surface as a whole. The decorative surface 3217 is a portion surrounding the image reflecting surface 3216, and is decorated with unevenness as a whole.

The image reflecting surface 3216 is coated with a reflective paint so that it can reflect light. As is conventionally known, reflective paint is composed of transparent paint and glass beads, and has strong reflective performance. As the transparent paint, it is possible to use any paint (for example, the same resin material as the light-shielding paint described below). The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating can be used. The reflective paint contains a black pigment (eg, carbon black), and the image reflective surface 3216 has a black appearance. The color of the image reflecting surface 3216 is not particularly limited, and can be painted in any color.

As shown in FIG. 179, when looking up at the upper door mechanism UD from below (from the player's perspective), the image reflecting surface 3216 comes into view. FIG. 180 shows the central screen 3010 and top frame base 3210 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the image reflecting surface 3216 in the left-right direction) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. ing. For clarity, in FIG. 180, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower wall 3214) is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3214a (the part corresponding to the chord of the arch) of the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is in approximate contact with the front surface (display surface 3011a) of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010. The display surface 3011a of the central screen 3010 and the image reflecting surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 are arranged to be approximately perpendicular to each other. As a result, the image reflecting surface 3216 is a continuous surface extending from the upper portion (slightly below the top end) of the display surface 3011a toward the front.

Figure 181 shows a schematic diagram of the flat surface 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the bottom wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 when looking up at the upper door mechanism UD from below. This schematic diagram also shows a semicircular image (semicircular image 3011b) being displayed on the flat surface 3011 of the central screen 3010. The semicircular image 3011b is an image projected by the projector 9020.

As described above, the image reflecting surface 3216 is capable of reflecting light, and thus the reflected image 3216a is displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216. The reflected image 3216a has a line-symmetrical geometric shape (semicircular shape) with the abutment portion of the central screen 3010 with the image reflecting surface 3216 (the lower end of the rear edge 3214a of the lower wall 3214) as the axis of symmetry. Therefore, by showing the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a to the player, the player can perceive it as if a circle is being displayed. Note that in FIG. 181, the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a are each indicated by diagonal lines.

<Arrangement Relationship Between the Center Screen 3010 and the Top Frame Base 3210>
Fig. 182 is a perspective view of the central screen as seen from the front and below. Fig. 183 is a perspective view of the central screen as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 184 is a perspective view of the central screen as seen from the rear and above. Fig. 185 is a perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in Fig. 185. Figs. 187 to 189 are cross-sectional views of the central screen and the top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 182, the central screen 3010 has a front upper end 3015 formed by protruding forward from the upper end of the front surface 3014. The front surface 3014 is composed of a front surface (display surface 3011a) of the flat portion 3011 and a front surface 3012a of the curved portion 3012. The front upper end 3015 is formed approximately perpendicular to the front surface 3014.

Specifically, the front upper end 3015 has a central portion 3015a, a first left side portion 3015b, a second left side portion 3015c, a first right side portion 3015d, and a second right side portion 3015e. The central portion 3015a is formed substantially horizontally in the center of the central screen 3010. The first left side portion 3015b is formed continuously from the left end of the central portion 3015 toward the lower left. The second left side portion 3015c is formed continuously from the left end of the first left side portion 3015b toward the left. The first right side portion 3015d is formed continuously from the right end of the central portion 3015a toward the lower right. The second right side portion 3015e is formed continuously from the right end of the first right side portion 3015d toward the right. For ease of understanding, the lower surface 3015f of the front upper end 3015 is shown in black in FIG. 182.

A through hole 3016L is formed near the first left side portion 3015b, and a through hole 3016R is formed near the first right side portion 3015d. The through holes 3016 (through holes 3016L and 3016R) are formed to penetrate the central screen 3010 in the front-rear direction. The central screen 3010 also has a front lower end portion 3017 formed to protrude forward from near the lower end of the front surface 3014. The front lower end portion 3017 is formed approximately perpendicular to the front surface 3014, similar to the front upper end portion 3015.

As shown in FIG. 183, the central screen 3010 has a rear upper end portion 3019 formed to protrude rearward from the upper end of the back surface 3018. The back surface 3018 includes a surface on the back side of the flat portion 3011 and a surface on the back side of the curved portion 3012. The rear upper end portion 3019 is formed approximately perpendicular to the back surface 3018. Specifically, the rear upper end portion 3019 has a left side portion 3019a and a right side portion 3019b. For clarity, in FIG. 183, the lower surface 3019c of the rear upper end portion 3019 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper surface 3019d of the left side portion 3019a is continuous with the upper surface of the first left side portion 3015b and the upper surface of the second left side portion 3015c, and these surfaces are integrated. Similarly, the upper surface 3019e of the right side portion 3019b is continuous with the upper surface of the first right side portion 3015d and the upper surface of the second right side portion 3015e, and these surfaces are integrated. In addition, the central screen 3010 has a rear lower end portion 3020 formed by protruding rearward from the lower end of the back surface 3018. The rear lower end portion 3020 is formed approximately perpendicular to the back surface 3018, similar to the rear upper end portion 3019.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the top frame base 3210 is formed with a sound emission opening 3218 (a sound emission opening 3218L and a sound emission opening 3218R). Furthermore, a screen contact portion 3219 is formed on the top frame base 3210. For clarity, in FIG. 185, the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R are shown with diagonal lines. Further, in FIG. 186, the screen contact portion 3219 is shown in black.

Part of the screen abutment portion 3219 is the rear edge 3214a of the lower wall 3214, and the screen abutment portion 3219 is composed of the rear edge 3214a (screen abutment portion 3219C), a portion formed continuously from the left end of the rear edge 3214a toward the left (screen abutment portion 3219L), and a portion formed continuously from the right end of the rear edge 3214a toward the right (screen abutment portion 3219R).

A boss portion 3220L is formed in the lower right portion of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218L so as to protrude rearward from the screen abutment portion 3219L. Similarly, a boss portion 3220R is formed in the lower left portion of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218R so as to protrude rearward from the screen abutment portion 3219R. In addition, screw holes 3221 (screw holes 3221L and screw holes 3221R) that penetrate in the front-rear direction are formed near the boss portion 3220 (boss portions 3220L and 3220R).

In FIG. 187, the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 in the left-right direction). It shows the situation. For clarity, in FIG. 187, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower wall 3214) is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 187, the screen contact portion 3219C (rear edge 3214a) of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219C is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (center portion 3015a) of the center screen 3010.

FIG. 188 shows the central screen 3010 and top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010). For clarity, in FIG. 188, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 (right curved portion 3012R) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 188, the screen contact portion 3219R of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219R is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010. Similarly, although not shown, the screen contact portion 3219L of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219L is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second left side portion 3015c) of the central screen 3010.

In this way, the screen abutment portion 3219 (screen abutment portion 3219L, screen abutment portion 3219C, and screen abutment portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210 is generally in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. Above the screen abutment portion 3219, the front upper end portion 3015 (center portion 3015a, first left side portion 3015b, second left side portion 3015c, first right side portion 3015d, and second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010 is disposed. As a result, if a small gap occurs between the screen abutment portion 3219 of the top frame base 3210 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if a wire-shaped tool is to be inserted through the gap, the front upper end portion 3015 gets in the way and prevents the insertion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of cheating from being performed through the gap.

In FIG. 189, the center screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the through hole 3016L of the center screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it is cut. For clarity, in FIG. 189, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in black, and the rear upper end 3019 (left side 3019a) and front upper end 3015 of the center screen 3010 are shown in black. (The upper surface of the second left side portion 3015c) is shown by hatching.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220L is inserted into the through hole 3016L, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220L protrudes slightly rearward beyond the rear surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016L is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220L.

Similarly, although not shown, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016R of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220R is inserted into the through hole 3016R, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220R protrudes slightly rearward beyond the rear surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016R is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220R.

The through holes 3016 (through holes 3016L and 3016R) and the boss portions 3220 (boss portions 3220L and 3220R) are used when the rear transparent plate 3050 is attached to the top frame base 3210 by screw fastening. It has become something that can be done. This will be detailed later.

<Arrangement relationship between center screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050>
FIG. 190 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and rear transparent plate. FIG. 191(a) is a schematic diagram, viewed from above, of how light projected from a projector enters the rear transparent plate in this embodiment. FIG. 191(b) is a schematic diagram, viewed from above, of how light projected from a projector enters a rear transparent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate. FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the rear transparent plate seen from the rear. FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate seen from the rear.

FIG. 190 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the rear transparent plate 3050 are assembled and are cut along a horizontal plane. FIG. 191 schematically shows cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190. FIG. 192 shows a partially enlarged view of the central screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190.

As shown in FIG. 190, the rear surface of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the flat portion 3051 of the rear translucent plate 3050 are in close contact (or in close proximity (approximately abutting)), but a gap is formed between the rear surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050. For ease of understanding, the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 are shown in black in FIG. 190.

As described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the rear light-transmitting plate 3050. FIG. 191(a) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in a direction along the straight line L is incident on a point X on the rear light-transmitting plate 3050. For the sake of convenience, the following description will be given assuming that a portion of the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is substantially flat (having a curvature of 0).

At this time, the direction of the tangent (L ₁ (X)) to the curved portion 3052 at point X substantially coincides with the formation direction of the curved portion 3052. The straight lines L and L ₁ (X) are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the angle α between the straight lines L and L ₁ (X) is substantially 90°. In other words, the angle of incidence (90°-α) of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L to the curved portion 3052 is substantially 0°.

In contrast, in another embodiment shown in FIG. 191(b), the flat portion 3051 and the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 have approximately the same size and shape as the flat portion 3011 and the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the rear surface of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the flat portion 3051 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 are in close contact with each other, and the rear surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 are in close contact with each other.

The curvature of the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050 according to another embodiment shown in FIG. 191(b) is approximately the same as the curvature of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. FIG. 191(b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear transparent plate 3050. Point Y is a point on the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050 according to another embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L on the downstream side of the point X in the light traveling direction. The angle β between the straight line L and the straight line (L ₂ (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent to the curved part 3052 (L ₁ (Y)) at point Y, that is, the angle β of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L. The angle of incidence on the curved portion 3052 is larger than the angle of incidence (90°-α) in this embodiment.

Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L to the curved part 3052 is as described above, in other embodiments, the light reflected at the point Y is directed toward the flat part 3011 side of the central screen 3010. It's getting easier to progress. In contrast, in the present embodiment, such reflection can be suppressed and a situation in which the reflected light enters the central screen 3010 can be prevented from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 192, near the left end of the rear surface of the curved portion 3052L of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, a predetermined range is textured to form fine irregularities. In FIG. 192, the region where the texture is applied (textured region 3052X) is shown in black. As described above, the texture is a process in which a grain (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface, and this process is applied as a light diffusion treatment.

The rear light-transmitting plate 3050 has a symmetrical structure, and although not shown, a similar embossing is also applied to the right end of the rear surface of the curved portion 3052R of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050. This effectively prevents the light projected from the projector 9020 from being reflected and entering the central screen 3010.

Furthermore, similar texturing may be applied to the surface of the back side (inside of the pachi-slot machine 1) of the curved portion 3012 or the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 (near the texturing area 3052X of the rear transparent plate 3050). You can also use it as Either or both of the texturing on the rear transparent plate 3050 and the texturing on the center screen 3010 may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 193, the upper part of the rear translucent plate 3050 is formed with screw holes 3056L and 3056R. As shown in FIG. 194, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through holes 3016L and 3016R of the central screen 3010 overlap with the screw holes 3056L and 3056R of the rear translucent plate 3050, respectively. For ease of understanding, the front upper end 3015 (first left side portion 3015b, second left side portion 3015c, first right side portion 3015d, and second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010 are shown in black in FIG. 194.

<Fixing the center screen 3010>
FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing the under frame removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism.

In FIG. 195, the upper door mechanism UD is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010, the screw hole 3056L of the rear transparent plate 3050, and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it was done. For clarity, in FIG. 195, the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the screws 3090 are shown in shading, the cut surfaces of the rear transparent plate 3050 are shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the top frame base 3210 are shown in black. It is shown in

As shown in FIG. 195, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3056L of the rear transparent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. Similarly, although not shown, the screw hole 3056R of the rear transparent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. By screwing the screws 3090 inserted through the screw holes 3056 (screw holes 3056L and 3056R) into the holes formed in the boss portion 3220 (boss portions 3220L and 3220R), the rear transparent plate 3050 is attached to the top. Attached to frame base 3210. Further, as described above, the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010 substantially contacts the screen contact portions 3219 (screen contact portion 3219L, screen contact portion 3219C, and screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210. ing. Thereby, the central screen 3010 is held between the rear transparent plate 3050 and the top frame base 3210.

As shown in FIG. 196, an underframe 3070 is disposed under the upper door mechanism UD. Specifically, the underframe 3070 is disposed so as to cover the underside 3020a of the rear lower end 3020 of the central screen 3010 and the underside 3055a of the lower portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050.

FIG. 197 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction). For clarity, in FIG. 197, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the rear transparent plate 3050 is shown with hatching, and the cut surface of the underframe 3070 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 197, the underframe 3070 has an upper part 3071 formed by bending the front end upward. The upper part 3071 has a structure bent toward the rear, and a rear end edge 3071a substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the rear edge 3071a is positioned slightly above the front lower end 3017 of the central screen 3010. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the underframe 3070 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if you try to insert a wire-shaped instrument through the gap, the front lower end 3017 will get in the way. This makes it possible to prevent such intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap.

The front lower end 3017 is formed slightly above the lower end of the front surface 3014. The lower portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050 is configured to have a step, and its front portion is positioned to rest on the rear lower end 3020 of the central screen 3010.

<Speaker unit 3400>
Fig. 198 is a front view showing the state where the top side panel is removed from the upper door mechanism, Fig. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the state where the top side panel and the speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism, and Fig. 200 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the state where the top frame ornament is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a left speaker unit 3400L and a right speaker unit 3400R. Since the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R have a symmetrical structure, only the left speaker unit 3400L will be described below. Furthermore, the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R are not distinguished and are referred to as a speaker unit 3400.

The speaker unit 3400 includes a speaker 3410, a speaker grill 3420, a top side panel 3430, a plurality of speaker unit LEDs 3440, a speaker side lens 3450, and a top frame decoration 3460. Note that in FIG. 198, the top side panel 3430 of the left speaker unit 3400L is removed, while the top side panel 3430 of the right speaker unit 3400R is attached.

The speaker grill 3420 and the top side panel 3430 are disposed in front of the speaker 3410. The speaker grill 3420 has a mesh structure and has multiple holes 3421 formed therein. The top side panel 3430 has a sound emission opening 3431 formed in the center. Sound output from the speaker 3410 is emitted forward through these holes 3421 and sound emission opening 3431.

The speaker unit LED 3440 includes a speaker unit LED 3440a placed on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410, and a speaker unit LED 3440b placed on the outer side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410. It is provided. The speaker unit LED 3440 is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction. Furthermore, the speaker unit LED 3440 is a full-color LED, and is capable of emitting multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green.

The top side panel 3430 is made of a translucent material and is arranged on the front side of the speaker unit LED 3440. The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a passes through the inner part 3432 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440b is transmitted through the outer part 3433 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

A light emission opening 3434 is formed in the inner portion 3432 of the top side panel 3430. The light emission opening 3434 has a shape corresponding to the speaker side lens 3450, and the speaker side lens 3450 fits into the light emission opening 3434, thereby blocking the light emission opening 3434. The speaker side lens 3450 is formed from a material having translucency. Although not shown, a speaker unit LED 3440c is disposed on the back side of the speaker side lens 3450. The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440c passes through the speaker side lens 3450 and is emitted to the outside of the slot machine 1.

Furthermore, a screw hole 3435 is formed in the top side panel 3430. The top frame decoration 3460 is arranged on the front side of the screw hole 3435. As shown in FIG. 200, a boss portion 3462 is formed on the back surface 3461 of the top frame decoration 3460 so as to protrude rearward. In FIG. 200, the top frame decoration 3460 is shown as seen from the rear, while the other components are shown as seen from the front.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3221 (see FIG. 185) of the top frame base 3210, the screw hole 3435 of the top side panel 3430, and the boss portion 3462 of the top frame decoration 3460 overlap. The top frame base 3210 is attached to the top frame decoration 3460 by screwing screws inserted through the screw holes 3221 and 3435 into the holes formed in the boss portion 3462. The screw is arranged on the back side of the top frame decoration 3460 and is not visible to the player, so that a good appearance can be achieved.

<Front top unit 3200>
FIG. 201 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 203 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203 with the top frame base and top inner cover removed. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top center LED board, and the center LED board base.

As described above, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130). As shown in FIGS. 201 to 204, the front top unit 3200 includes a top center LED board 3250, a top reflector 3260, an arrow eye reflector 3270 (a left arrow eye reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R), and a top lens 3280. and a top center panel 3290.

A plurality of center LEDs 3252 are provided on the front surface 3251 of the top center LED board 3250. The center LED 3252 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction (front direction) of the substrate surface. The center LED 3252 is a full-color LED and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green. As the center LED 3252, a center LED 3252a, a center LED 3252b, a center LED 3252c, a center LED 3252d, a center LED 3252e, a center LED 3252f, and a center LED 3252g are provided.

Center LED 3252a is provided at the center of top center LED board 3250. The center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are provided on the left side of the center LED 3252a, and the location of the center LED 3252c is an area surrounded by the location of the center LED 3252b. The center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are provided on the right side of the center LED 3252a, and the location of the center LED 3252e is an area surrounded by the location of the center LED 3252d. Center LED 3252f is provided on the left side of center LED 3252b, and center LED 3252g is provided on the right side of center LED 3252d.

The top frame base 3210 has connection parts 3222 (first connection part 3222a, second connection part 3222b, third connection part 3222c, fourth connection part 3222d, fifth connection part 3222e, and sixth connection part 3222f) that connect the upper wall 3211 and the lower wall 3214. This defines a central region 3223a, a first left region 3223b, a first right region 3223c, a second left region 3223d, and a second right region 3223e.

The central region 3223a is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the second connection portion 3222b when viewed from the front. The first left side region 3223b is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the third connection portion 3222c when viewed from the front. The first right side region 3223c is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the second connection portion 3222b, and the fourth connection portion 3222d when viewed from the front.

The second left side region 3223d is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the third connecting portion 3222c, and the fifth connecting portion 3222e when viewed from the front. The second right side area 3223e is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the fourth connecting portion 3222d, and the sixth connecting portion 3222f when viewed from the front. Note that the fifth connecting portion 3222e and the sixth connecting portion 3222f constitute a part of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R, respectively.

The central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e are each hollow portions that penetrate in the front-rear direction. In a front view, the center LED 3252a is positioned in the central region 3223a, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are positioned in the first left region 3223b, the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are positioned in the first right region 3223c, the center LED 3252f is positioned in the second left region 3223d, and the center LED 3252g is positioned in the second right region 3223e.

A left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the left portion of the top center LED board 3250. The left top inner cover 3255L generally matches the outer shape of the second left region 3223d, and is arranged so as to overlap with the second left region 3223d in a front view. Similarly, a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the right portion of the top center LED board 3250. The right top inner cover 3255R generally matches the outer shape of the second right region 3223e, and is arranged so as to overlap with the second right region 3223e in a front view.

In FIG. 205, the top frame base 3210, top center LED board 3250, and center LED board base 3256 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the second right side area 3223e). It shows how it was done. For clarity, in FIG. 205, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the top center LED board 3250 and the center LED board base 3256 are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 205, a center LED board base 3256 is attached to the top frame base 3210. The center LED board base 3256 has an upper portion approximately in contact with the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, and a lower portion approximately in contact with the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210. The top center LED board 3250 is installed on the center LED board base 3256. As a result, the top center LED board 3250 is arranged vertically between the upper wall 3211 and the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 (with the normal direction of the board surface facing forward). Therefore, the center LED 3252 can emit light in the forward direction.

<Top reflector 3260>
FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the top reflector seen from the front. FIG. 207 is a rear view of the top reflector. FIG. 208 is a front view of the top reflector and the top center LED board. 209 and 210 are partially enlarged perspective views of the top reflector and the top center LED board. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top reflector, top center LED board, and top frame base.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the top reflector 3260 includes an upper wall 3261, a lower wall 3262, a center partition 3263, a first left partition 3264, a first right partition 3265, and a second left partition. It includes a partition part 3266 and a second right partition part 3267.

The central partition portion 3263 is formed to connect the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 at the center of the top reflector 3260 in the left-right direction. The first left side partition 3264 is formed on the left side of the center partition 3263 to connect the rear end of the upper wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower wall 3262. The first right partition 3265 is formed on the right side of the center partition 3263 to connect the rear end of the upper wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower wall 3262. The second left partition 3266 is formed continuously from the left end of the first left partition 3264 toward the left. The second right partition 3267 is formed continuously from the right end of the first right partition 3265 toward the right.

A light exit opening 3268a is formed on the back side of the central partition 3263, and a light exit opening 3268b and a light exit opening 3268c are formed on the back side of the first left partition 3264. The first right side partition 3265 has a light output opening 3268d and a light output opening 3268e formed on the back side, and the second left side partition 3266 has a light output opening 3268f formed on the back side. A light exit opening 3268g is formed on the back side of the second right partition portion 3267.

For ease of understanding, the light emission openings 3268a to 3268g are indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 207. The light emission opening 3268a penetrates the central partition 3263 toward the front side. The light emission openings 3268b and 3268c penetrate the first left partition 3264 toward the front side. The light emission openings 3268d and 3268e penetrate the first right partition 3265 toward the front side. The light emission opening 3268f penetrates the second left partition 3266 toward the front side. The light emission opening 3268g penetrates the second right partition 3267 toward the front side.

As a result, a space (light passage space 3269a-3269g) having a predetermined width is formed corresponding to each of the light emission openings 3268a-3268g. In addition, the peripheral portion of each of the light emission openings 3268a-3268g is in close proximity (approximately in contact) with the surface 3251 of the top center LED board 3250.

As shown in FIG. 208, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g are positioned so as to overlap the light emission openings 3268a to 3268g, respectively. As a result, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g passes through the light passing spaces 3269a to 3269g, respectively. Here, one light passing space 3269 and the other light passing spaces 3269 are separated by a wall portion provided in the top reflector 3260. This will be explained below.

209 and 210, the central partition 3263 has a triangular prism-shaped base 3263a and a protruding portion 3263b protruding forward from the base 3263a, and a cavity 3263c is formed that communicates from the base 3263a to the protruding portion 3263b. The cavity 3263c is a space surrounded by the left inner wall 3263d, the right inner wall 3263e, and the upper inner wall 3263f. For ease of understanding, the front edge of the left inner wall 3263d, the front edge of the right inner wall 3263e, and the front edge of the upper inner wall 3263f are shown in black in FIG. 209. Note that these rear edges form the periphery of the light emission opening 3268a, and the left inner wall 3263d and the right inner wall 3263e are connected at their rear ends.

The light passage space 3269a is configured as a cavity 3263c. Thereby, the light passing space 3269a is separated from the light passing space 3269b by the left side portion of the base portion 3263a, and is separated from the light passing space 3269d by the right side portion of the base portion 3263a.

Further, the light passing space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the first left side partition portion 3264. The range of one light passing space 3269b is defined by the inclined wall portion 3264a, and the one light passing space 3269b is separated from other light passing spaces 3269b. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3264a that defines one light passage space 3269b is shown with diagonal lines. The inclined wall portion 3264a has a slope that widens toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light exit opening 3268b). It is formed as follows.

The light passing space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b of the first left partition portion 3264. The light passing space 3269c is separated from the light passing space 3269b by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b is divided into two by the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c. As a result, one light passing space 3269c is separated from the other light passing space 3269c.

For clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge 3264d of the peripheral wall 3264b for the arrow eye is shown in black, the front surface 3264e continuous from the periphery of the light exit opening 3268c is shown in diagonal lines, and the front edge 3264e of the central wall 3264c for the arrow eye is shown with diagonal lines. The front surface 3264f is shown in shading. The arrow eye central wall portion 3264c is formed to protrude more forward than the front surface 3264e. Further, the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b, and the front surface 3264f of the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has a shorter arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b. It is positioned more rearward than the front edge 3264d of the wall portion 3264b. Note that a screw hole 3264g passing through the first left partition 3264 in the front-rear direction is formed in the arrow eye center wall 3264c.

Further, the light passage space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the second left side partition portion 3266. The range of one light passage space 3269f is defined by the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the one light passage space 3269f is separated from other light passage spaces 3269f. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3266a that defines one light passage space 3269f is shown with diagonal lines. The inclined wall portion 3266a has an inclination that widens toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light exit opening 3268f). It is formed as follows.

The top reflector 3260 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and similarly, the light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall part 3265a of the first right partition part 3265. , one light passing space 3269d is separated from the other light passing spaces 3269d. Further, the light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall part 3265b of the first right side partition part 3265. It is separated from 3269d. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall 3265b is divided into two by the arrow eye central wall 3265c. Thereby, one light passing space 3269e is separated from other light passing spaces 3269e. Further, the light passing space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall part 3267a of the second right side partition part 3267, and the one light passing space 3269g is separated from the other light passing space 3269g by the inclined wall part 3267a. Separated.

As shown in FIG. 211, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the upper surface of the upper wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 substantially contacts the lower surface of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, and The lower surface of the lower wall 3262 substantially contacts the upper surface of the lower wall 3214 on the top frame base 3210.

As a result, the front of the light passing space 3269d and the light passing space 3269e is a space partitioned by the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the right side wall 3263g of the central partition 3263, and the fourth connection part 3222d of the top frame base 3210. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 211, the lower surface of the upper wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 is shown with diagonal lines, the upper surface of the lower wall 3262 is shown in black, and the right side wall 3263g is shown with a crosshatch. Similarly, although not shown, the front of the light passing space 3269b and the light passing space 3269c is a space partitioned by the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the left side wall 3263h of the central partition 3263, and the third connection part 3222c of the top frame base 3210.

<Arrow eye reflector 3270>
FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the front and right side. FIG. 213 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the rear. FIG. 215 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector. 216 and 217 are perspective views of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector.

Since the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R have a bilaterally symmetrical structure, they will be described below as the arrow eye reflector 3270 without distinguishing between them. As shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has a hollow three-dimensional shape with open front and rear sides.

Specifically, the arrow eye reflector 3270 includes a base portion 3271, a front portion 3272, and a rear portion 3273. The base portion 3271 has a structure that occupies most of the arrow eye reflector 3270. The front side portion 3272 is formed to protrude forward from the front end of the base portion 3271. The rear side portion 3273 is formed to protrude rearward from the rear end portion of the base portion 3271.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 212, the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 are shown in black. The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 are formed to have a step at the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271. The outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 is formed to connect the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272.

The figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side part 3272 and the figure defined by the front edge 3271a of the base part 3271 have generally similar shapes, and the figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side part 3272 is smaller than the figure defined by the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271. Further, the front side portion 3272 is formed with a front side opening 3272c that opens toward the front. The peripheral edge of the front opening 3272c matches the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272.

The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear portion 3273 are formed to have a step at the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271. In addition, the rear portion 3273 is formed with a first rear opening 3273b and a second rear opening 3273c that open toward the rear. A cavity is formed inside the arrow eye reflector 3270, and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c are connected to the front opening 3272c.

The rear portion 3273 also has a rear partition 3273d between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c. The rear partition 3273d is formed in a flat plate shape so as to connect the upper and lower parts of the rear portion 3273. A screw hole 3273e is formed in the rear partition 3273d. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 213, the rear end 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c are shown with diagonal lines, and the back surface 3273f of the rear partition 3273d is shown with a cross-hatched pattern.

A first rear opening periphery 3273g is formed on a part of the periphery of the first rear opening 3273b so as to protrude rearward from the back surface 3273f of the rear partition 3273d. A second rear opening periphery 3273h is formed on a part of the periphery of the second rear opening 3273c so as to protrude rearward from the back surface 3273f of the rear partition 3273d. The side surface of the first rear opening periphery 3273g and the side surface of the second rear opening periphery 3273h coincide with the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side portion 3273. For ease of understanding, in FIG. 214, the rear end surface 3273i of the first rear opening periphery 3273g and the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening periphery 3273h are indicated by oblique lines, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 is indicated by black.

Figure 215 shows the arrow-eye reflector 3270 cut in a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a plane passing through the base part 3271). As shown in Figure 215, the inner wall surface 3270a of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. As a result, when the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is cut in a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a vertical plane in which the distance in the front-to-rear direction between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c is X), the area of the opening corresponding to that cross section (cross-sectional opening 3270X) increases with the value of X.

For clarity, in FIG. 215, the cross section of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is shown with diagonal lines. The cross-sectional opening 3270X is a portion surrounded by the diagonal line. As described above, the outer wall surface (outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, outer wall surface 3273a) of the arrow eye reflector 3270 has a gap between the base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 and between the base portion 3271 and the rear side portion 3273. Although a step is formed between them, the inner wall surface 3270a is continuously formed between the base portion 3271, the front side portion 3272, and the rear side portion 3273 without having such a step. . Therefore, the thickness of the front side portion 3272 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3272b and the inner wall surface 3270a) is smaller than the thickness of the base portion 3271 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3271b and the inner wall surface 3270a). In FIG. 215, the thickness of the base portion 3271 is indicated by d. Note that the base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness.

As will be described in more detail later, the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 is close to the rear side of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 224). Here, since the arrow-eye reflector 3270 itself does not transmit light, when the center LED 3252 around the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is illuminated to produce a light-emitting effect in the front top unit 3200, the shadow of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 (particularly the shadow of the front end of the arrow-eye reflector 3270) will be visible to the player through the top lens 3280 and top center panel 3290, which is a concern as it could lead to a decline in the aesthetics of the gaming machine. However, as in this embodiment, by providing a step on the front end side of the arrow eye reflector 3270 and making the front side portion 3272 thinner than the base portion 3271, it is possible to reduce the area of the front end of the arrow eye reflector 3270. As a result, the shadow of the front end of the arrow eye reflector 3270 during the light emission performance can be reduced, which has the effect of improving the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

Further, a boss portion 3270b is formed on the arrow eye reflector 3270 so as to protrude forward from the rear partition portion 3273d of the rear side portion 3273. The boss portion 3270b has a cylindrical shape, and the screw hole 3273e is formed through the rear partition portion 3273d and extends over a part of the boss portion 3270b. For clarity, in FIG. 215, the front surface 3273k of the rear partition portion 3273d is shown in black, and the front surface of the boss portion 3270b is shown in hatching.

As illustrated, the letter "L" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. On the other hand, the letter "R" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This makes it possible to easily distinguish between the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R.

In FIG. 216, the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are disassembled, and the top reflector 3260 is shown as viewed from the front (generally the front), while the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown as viewed from the rear (generally the rear). In FIG. 217, the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are shown assembled as viewed from the front. In FIG. 218, the cross section of the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L assembled as viewed from the left. In addition, in FIG. 216 to FIG. 218, the relative positional relationship between the center LED 3252 and the top reflector 3260 is maintained, while components other than the center LED 3252, the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are removed.

As shown in FIG. 216, a screw hole 3264g is formed in the arrow eye center wall 3264c of the top reflector 3260. As described above, the screw hole 3264g is formed to penetrate the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction. Similarly, although not shown, a screw hole 3265g is formed in the arrow eye center wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260. The screw hole 3265g is formed so as to pass through the first right partition portion 3265 in the front-rear direction.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3264g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap. The left arrow eye reflector 3270L is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole 3264g into the screw hole 3273e. Similarly, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3265g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap. The right arrow eye reflector 3270R is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole 3265g into the screw hole 3273e.

Thereby, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are respectively arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260. At this time, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap with the two light exit openings 3268c of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b and the light output opening 3268c communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light output opening 3268c communicate with each other. Similarly, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap with the two light exit openings 3268e of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b and the light output opening 3268e communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light output opening 3268e communicate with each other.

In FIG. 218, the center LED 3252, top reflector 3260, and left arrow eye reflector 3270L in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L). ) shows how it looks when cut. For clarity, in FIG. 218, the cut surface of the top reflector 3260 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown with shading, and the side surface and front surface 3273k of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L at the rear partition 3273d. are shown with diagonal lines and black, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 218, the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral portion 3273h of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially contacts the front surface 3264e of the peripheral edge of the light exit opening 3268c in the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector The back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially contacts the front surface 3264f of the center wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye in the top reflector 3260, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L contacts the arrow eye center wall portion 3264c in the top reflector 3260. It substantially contacts the front edge 3264d of the eye peripheral wall 3264b. Similarly, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R also substantially contacts the top reflector 3260.

<Light emission from center LED 3252>
As described above, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252a overlaps with the light emission opening 3268a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252a passes through the light passing space 3269a (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front part of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passing space 3269a is a cavity 3263c (a space surrounded by the left inner wall portion 3263d, the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the upper inner wall portion 3263f) in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252b overlaps the light exit opening 3268b of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b passes through the light passage space 3269b (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

In addition, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252c overlaps with the light exit opening 3268c of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L ( (See FIGS. 208 and 217). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252c is transmitted to the light passage space 3269c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front side (a cavity communicating with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252d overlaps with the light emission opening 3268d of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252d passes through the light passing space 3269d of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and proceeds to the front part of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passing space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

In addition, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252e overlaps with the light exit opening 3268e of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R ( (See FIGS. 208 and 217). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is transmitted to the light passing space 3269e of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front side (a cavity communicating with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252f overlaps with the light exit opening 3268f of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f passes through the light passage space 3269f (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252g overlaps the light exit opening 3268g of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g passes through the light passage space 3269g (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

The light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels as described above, but the walls of the top reflector 3260 located in the path of the light (left inner wall 3263d, right inner wall 3263e, upper inner wall 3263f, inclined wall portion 3264a, inclined wall portion 3265a, inclined wall portion 3266a, inclined wall portion 3267a, right side wall surface 3263g, left side wall surface 3263h, etc.), and the wall surface of the arrow eye reflector 3270 (inner wall surface 3270a, outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, etc.) is a reflector that reflects light. Thereby, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels forward while being reflected by these wall surfaces.

Note that a left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the second left partition 3266 in the top reflector 3260, and a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the second right partition 3267 in the top reflector 3260. is provided (see FIG. 203). The left top inner cover 3255L is formed into a flat plate shape, and is arranged so that its back surface substantially contacts the front surface of the second left partition section 3266 (the peripheral edge of the inclined wall section 3266a). The right top inner cover 3255R is formed into a flat plate shape, and is arranged so that its back surface substantially contacts the front surface of the second right partition portion 3267 (the peripheral edge of the inclined wall portion 3267a).

As a result, light emitted from the center LED 3252f is incident on the back surface of the left top inner cover 3255L. The left top inner cover 3255L is made of a material having translucency, and the light passes through the left top inner cover 3255L and travels forward of the left top inner cover 3255L. Similarly, light emitted from the center LED 3252g is incident on the back surface of the right top inner cover 3255R. The right top inner cover 3255R is made of a material having translucency, and the light passes through the right top inner cover 3255R and travels forward of the right top inner cover 3255R.

<Top lens 3280>
FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the top frame base and top lens. FIG. 220 is a perspective view showing the top lens removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from the rear and above. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of the top center LED board, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens. 223 and 224 are cross-sectional views of the top center LED board, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens. FIG. 225 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the top lens 3280 is surrounded by the front edge 3211b of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214, the fifth connecting portion 3222e, and the sixth connecting portion 3222f. It roughly matches the external shape of the figure. The top lens 3280 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection part 3222e, and sixth connection part 3222f.

As a result, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e (see Figure 204) of the top frame base 3210 are covered from the front by the top lens 3280.

Specifically, the top lens 3280 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and includes a central portion 3281, a left side portion 3282, and a right side portion 3283. The central portion 3281 is formed to have a triangular shape. The left side portion 3282 is formed so as to continue from the left end of the central portion 3281 toward the left. The left side portion 3282 has an inclination that becomes more rearward as it moves leftward. The right side portion 3283 is formed so as to continue from the right end of the central portion 3281 toward the right. The right side portion 3283 has an inclination that becomes more rearward as it moves rightward.

A central front convex portion 3281a is formed on the front side of the central portion 3281. The central front convex portion 3281a extends vertically in the center of the left-right direction as a convex portion that bulges slightly forward relative to the surrounding surfaces. In addition, through holes 3281b and through holes 3281c are formed in the central portion 3281. Screw holes 3224a and screw holes 3224b are formed in the first connection portion 3222a and the second connection portion 3222b of the top frame base 3210 at locations that overlap with the through holes 3281b and 3281c, respectively.

The left side part 3282 has an upper left side part 3282a and a lower left side part 3282b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side part 3282a. The upper left side part 3282a and the lower left side part 3282b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three left front protrusions 3284 (first left front protrusion 3284a, second left front protrusion 3284b, and third left front protrusion 3284c) are formed on the front side of the upper left side part 3282a. The first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c are each a convex portion that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3282c). It has the shape of an inverted dogleg.

Similarly, the right side part 3283 has an upper right side part 3283a and a lower right side part 3283b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side part 3283a. The upper right side part 3283a and the lower right side part 3283b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three front right protrusions 3285 (first front right protrusion 3285a, second front right protrusion 3285b, and third front right protrusion 3285c) are formed on the front side of the upper right side portion 3283a. The first right front convex part 3285a, the second right front convex part 3285b, and the third right front convex part 3285c are each a convex part that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3283c). It has a dogleg shape.

The lower left side portion 3282b is formed with a lower left protrusion 3282d that protrudes downward. The lower left protrusion 3282d is formed with a lower left front convexity 3282e that bulges slightly relative to the surrounding surface. The lower right side portion 3283b is formed with a lower right protrusion 3283d that protrudes downward. The lower right protrusion 3283d is formed with a lower right front convexity 3283e that bulges slightly relative to the surrounding surface. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the lower left protrusion 3282d and the lower right protrusion 3283d are respectively fitted into the lower left protrusion 3225a and the lower right protrusion 3225b that protrude downward from the bottom wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210.

As shown in FIG. 221, a central rear recess 3281d is formed on the back side of the central portion 3281. The central rear recess 3281d extends vertically in the center of the left-right direction as a recess that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (peripheral portion 3281e). The location where the central rear recess 3281d is formed overlaps the location where the central front convex portion 3281a is formed. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edge of the central rear recess 3281d approximately coincides with the outer edge of the central front convex portion 3281a. For ease of understanding, the central rear recess 3281d is indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 221.

In addition, three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) are formed on the rear side of the left side portion 3282. The first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c each have a dogleg shape that is slightly recessed relative to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3282f). These left rear recesses 3286 are basically formed in the upper left portion 3282a, but a small portion below the first left rear recess 3286a is formed in the lower left portion 3282b.

The formation locations of the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c overlap with the formation locations of the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c, respectively. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c approximately coincide with the outer edges of the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c, respectively.

Two convex portions (first left rear convex portion 3288a and second left rear convex portion 3288b) are formed between the first left rear concave portion 3286a and the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and two convex portions (third left rear convex portion 3288c and fourth left rear convex portion 3288d) are formed between the second left rear concave portion 3286b and the third left rear concave portion 3286c. The first left rear convex portion 3288a, the second left rear convex portion 3288b, the third left rear convex portion 3288c, and the fourth left rear convex portion 3288d are each formed as a convex portion that slightly bulges out relative to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3282f) so as to connect adjacent left rear concave portions 3286.

Similarly, three right rear recesses 3287 (a first right rear recess 3287a, a second right rear recess 3287b, and a third right rear recess 3287c) are formed on the back side of the right side 3283. There is. The first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c are each recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). It has an inverted shape. These right rear recesses 3287 are basically formed in the upper right side part 3283a, but a small portion below the first right rear recess 3287a is formed in the lower right side part 3283b. .

The first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c are formed at the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and, respectively. It overlaps with the formation location of the third right front convex portion 3285c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c are respectively connected to the first right front convex portion 3285a. , the second right front protrusion 3285b, and the third right front protrusion 3285c.

Moreover, two convex parts (a first right rear convex part 3289a and a second right rear convex part 3289b) are formed between the first right rear concave part 3287a and the second right rear concave part 3287b. Two convex portions (a third right rear convex portion 3289c and a fourth right rear convex portion 3289d) are formed between the second right rear concave portion 3287b and the third right rear concave portion 3287c. There is. The first right rear convex part 3289a, the second right rear convex part 3289b, the third right rear convex part 3289c, and the fourth right rear convex part 3289d each have a surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). ) is formed as a slightly bulging convex portion to connect adjacent right rear concave portions 3287.

In addition, a lower left rear recess 3282g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed on the back side of the lower left protrusion 3282d. In addition, a lower right rear recess 3283g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed on the back side of the lower right protrusion 3283d. The formation locations of the lower left rear recess 3282g and the lower right rear recess 3283g overlap with the formation locations of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the lower left rear recess 3282g and the lower right rear recess 3283g approximately coincide with the outer edges of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively.

As shown in Figures 222 to 224, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is disposed on the front side of the top reflector 3260, the left arrow-eye reflector 3270L, and the right arrow-eye reflector 3270R. At this time, the front edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d, the front edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the front edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f (see Figure 209) of the top reflector 3260 and the peripheral portion 3281e of the central portion 3281 of the top lens 3280 are approximately parallel to each other, and these surfaces are approximately abutting each other.

Further, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the rear main surface 3282f of the left side portion 3282 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially parallel to each other. come into contact with Similarly, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R and the rear main surface 3283f of the right side portion 3283 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are approximately parallel to each other. come into contact with

Figure 223 shows the top center LED board 3250, top reflector 3260, left arrow-eye reflector 3270L, right arrow-eye reflector 3270R, and top lens 3280 cut in a horizontal plane (a plane passing through boss portion 3270b of arrow-eye reflector 3270) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For ease of understanding, Figure 223 shows the cut surface of center partition portion 3263 in top reflector 3260 with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of left arrow-eye reflector 3270L with black lines.

Figure 224 shows the top center LED board 3250, top reflector 3260, left arrow eye reflector 3270L, right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and top lens 3280 cut along a vertical plane in the front-to-rear direction (a plane passing through the first left rear convex portion 3288a and the second left rear convex portion 3288b of the top lens 3280) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For ease of understanding, in Figure 224, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown shaded, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown with diagonal lines.

In FIG. 225, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are disassembled, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown as seen from the front, while the top lens 3280 is shown as seen from the rear. In FIG. 226, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are shown cut in a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a plane passing through the base part 3271 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. In FIG. 226, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown with shading, and the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c of the top lens 3280 are shown with diagonal lines.

As shown in Figures 225 and 226, the outer shape of the front edge 3272a of the front portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is approximately the same as the shape of a virtual figure 3286X defined by the three left rear recesses 3286 of the top lens 3280. The virtual figure 3286X is a figure surrounded by P, Q, R, and S in Figure 225. In Figure 225, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

Specifically, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is composed of an upper front edge 3272p, a lower front edge 3272q, a left front edge 3272r, and a right front edge 3272s. The upper front edge 3272p and the lower front edge 3272q are each formed in a straight line. The left front edge 3272r and the right front edge 3272s are each formed in an inverted V-shape.

On the other hand, the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280 each have an outer edge that is formed by a straight upper edge 3286p and a straight lower edge 3286q, and a dogleg-shaped left edge 3286r and a dogleg-shaped right edge 3286s. The virtual figure 3286X is a figure bounded by a line segment (P) connecting the upper edges 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286, a line segment (Q) connecting the lower edges 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286, the left edge 3286r (R) of the third left rear recess 3286c, and the right edge 3286s (S) of the first left rear recess 3286a.

The upper edge 3286p of the first left rear recess 3286a, the upper edge 3286p of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the upper edge 3286p of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line. In addition, the lower edge 3286q of the first left rear recess 3286a, the lower edge 3286q of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the lower edge 3286q of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper front edge 3272p of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L approximately overlaps with the upper edge 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280, the lower front edge 3272q of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L approximately overlaps with the lower edge 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280, the left front edge 3272r of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L approximately overlaps with the left edge 3286r of the third left rear recess 3286c in the top lens 3280, and the right front edge 3272s of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L approximately overlaps with the right edge 3286s of the first left rear recess 3286a in the top lens 3280. The front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is positioned along the periphery of the virtual figure 3286X of the top lens 3280 and is in approximate contact with the rear main surface 3282f.

As a result of the above, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252c) that passes through the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the cavity that connects the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c with the front opening 3272c) is incident on the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 217).

Similarly, although not shown, the light (emitted from the center LED 3252e) that has passed through the internal space (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front opening 3272c) of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R The light) enters the first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c of the top lens 3280.

Furthermore, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) that has passed through the cavity 3263c (see FIG. 209) of the center partition 3263 in the top reflector 3260 enters the center rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 216). . Moreover, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g is transmitted to the formation area of the center rear recess 3281d, the left rear recess 3286, and the right rear recess in the top lens 3280. The light is incident on a region other than the formation region of 3287.

The passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252a is separated from the passage of light emitted from other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the top reflector 3260. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252a from entering the center rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280.

The path of light emitted from the center LED 3252c is separated from the path of light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the left arrow-eye reflector 3270L. This prevents light emitted from center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252c from entering the left rear recess 3286 of the top lens 3280.

Similarly, the path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is separated from the path of the light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252e from entering the right rear recess 3287 of the top lens 3280.

The top lens 3280 is made of a translucent material, and light incident on the top lens 3280 passes through the top lens 3280. The light that passes through the top lens 3280 then enters the top center panel 3290 that is disposed on the front side of the top lens 3280 (or, as described below, is released to the outside of the slot machine 1 through an opening formed in the top center panel 3290).

<Top center panel 3290>
FIG. 227 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the front. FIG. 228 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel. FIG. 229 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and above. FIG. 230 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 231 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 232 is a front view of the top center panel and top lens.

As shown in Figures 227 and 228, the top center panel 3290 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and its outer shape in a front view corresponds to that of the top lens 3280 (the top center panel 3290 is slightly larger than the top lens 3280). Specifically, the top center panel 3290 has a central portion 3291, a left side portion 3292, and a right side portion 3293.

The central portion 3291 is formed to have a triangular shape. A central opening 3291a is formed in the central portion 3291. The central opening 3291a is formed as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the central opening 3291a corresponds to the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280. For clarity, the central opening 3291a is shown shaded in FIG. 228.

The left side portion 3292 is formed so as to continue from the left end of the central portion 3291 toward the left. The left side portion 3292 has an inclination that becomes more rearward as it goes leftward. The left side portion 3292 has an upper left side portion 3292a, a left bent portion 3292b that is bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side portion 3292a, and a lower left side portion 3292c that is formed continuously downward from the lower end of the left bent portion 3292b. Three left side openings 3294 (first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, and third left side opening 3294c) are formed in the upper left side portion 3292a.

The first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c each have an inverted L-shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c correspond to the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c of the top lens 3280, respectively. For ease of understanding, the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c are indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 228.

The right side portion 3293 is formed so as to continue from the right end of the center portion 3291 toward the right. The right side portion 3293 has an inclination that becomes closer to the rear as it goes to the right. The right side part 3293 includes an upper right side part 3293a, a right bent part 3293b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side part 3293a, and a lower right side formed continuously downward from the lower end of the right bent part 3293b. 3293c. Three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c) are formed in the upper right side portion 3293a.

The first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c each have a dogleg shape that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. The shapes of the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c correspond to the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c of the top lens 3280, respectively.

The top center panel 3290 also includes a lower left protruding part 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower left side part 3292c, and a lower right protruding part 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower right side part 3293c. It has a protrusion 3293d. A lower left opening 3292e is formed in the lower left protrusion 3292d as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower right opening 3293e is formed in the lower right protrusion 3293d as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. There is. For clarity, the lower left opening 3292e is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 228. The shapes of the lower left opening 3292e and the lower right opening 3293e correspond to the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, respectively.

The top center panel 3290 is also formed with a plurality of grooves 3296. Each groove 3296 is recessed from the surrounding surface, similar to the frame base engagement groove 3234 (see FIG. 171) of the upper front and rear frame 3230. The left side portion 3292 and the right side portion 3293 each have three grooves 3296, which are formed to extend a predetermined length on the front surface 3290a (front surface) of the top center panel 3290. For ease of understanding, the grooves 3296 are shown in black in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 229, the top center panel 3290 has an upper end protrusion 3297. The upper end protrusion 3297 is formed at the upper end of the top center panel 3290 so as to protrude rearward. For clarity, in FIG. 229, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 is shown with diagonal lines.

In addition, boss portions 3291b and 3291c are formed on the rear side of the central portion 3291. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, boss portions 3291b and 3291c are inserted into through holes 3281b and 3281c, respectively, of the top lens 3280. As described above, through holes 3281b and 3281c of the top lens 3280 overlap with screw holes 3224a and 3224b, respectively, of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 220).

The top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 are connected by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole 3224a of the top frame base 3210 into a hole formed in the boss portion 3291b of the top center panel 3290, and by screwing a screw inserted through the screw hole 3224b of the top frame base 3210 into a hole formed in the boss portion 3291c of the top center panel 3290.

As shown in Figures 230 to 232, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged so as to be fitted to the rear side of the top center panel 3290. As a result, the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280, the three left front convex portions 3284 (first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284b, and third left front convex portion 3284c), the three right front convex portions 3285 (first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, and third right front convex portion 3285c), the lower left front convex portion 3282e, and the lower right front convex portion 3283e are respectively fitted to the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280, and the three left front convex portions 3284 (first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284b, and third left front convex portion 3284c), the three right front convex portions 3285 (first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, and third right front convex portion 3285c), the lower left front convex portion 3282e, and the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280. The central opening 3291a, the three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c), the three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c), the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e fit together, and the openings in the top center panel 3290 are blocked by those convex portions in the top lens 3280.

The front surface of the top lens 3280 (excluding convex parts such as the central front convex part 3281a, the left front convex part 3284, the right front convex part 3285, the lower left front convex part 3282e, and the lower right front convex part 3283e) is , has a shape corresponding to the rear surface of the top center panel 3290 (portions excluding openings such as the center opening 3291a, left opening 3294, right opening 3295, lower left opening 3292e, lower right opening 3293e), and these The surfaces will substantially abut on the entire surface.

For clarity, in FIG. 230, the outer edge of the top lens 3280 is shown with a thick line. FIG. 231 shows the top lens 3280 and top center panel 3290 cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the plane passing through the first left front convex portion 3284a of the top lens 3280) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. ing. In FIG. 231, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown by hatching, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines. Moreover, in FIG. 232, the central front convex part 3281a of the top lens 3280, the three left front convex parts 3284 (first left front convex part 3284a, second left front convex part 3284b, and third left front convex part 3284c) , three right front protrusions 3285 (first right front protrusion 3285a, second right front protrusion 3285b, and third right front protrusion 3285c), lower left front protrusion 3282e, and lower right front protrusion 3283e. is indicated by diagonal lines.

<Light emission effect in the front top unit 3200>
As a result of the above, light incident on the central rear recess 3281d in the top lens 3280 (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) is emitted from the central front convex portion 3281a in the top lens 3280 to the outside of the pachislot machine 1 via the central opening 3291a in the top center panel 3290.

Also, the light that has entered the three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) in the top lens 3280 (emitted from the center LED 3252c) The light) is transmitted to the three left front convex portions of the top lens 3280 through the three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c) in the top center panel 3290. 3284 (first left front protrusion 3284a, second left front protrusion 3284b, and third left front protrusion 3284c) to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Also, the light that has entered the three right rear recesses 3287 (first right rear recess 3287a, second right rear recess 3287b, and third right rear recess 3287c) in the top lens 3280 (emitted from the center LED 3252e) The light) is transmitted to the three right front convex portions of the top lens 3280 through the three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c) in the top center panel 3290. 3285 (first right front protrusion 3285a, second right front protrusion 3285b, and third right front protrusion 3285c) to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, light incident on the top lens 3280 in an area other than the formation area of the central rear recess 3281d, the formation area of the left rear recess 3286, and the formation area of the right rear recess 3287 (light emitted from the center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f, and center LED 3252g) is incident on the top center panel 3290 in an area other than the formation area of the central opening 3291a, the formation area of the three left openings 3294 (the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c), and the formation area of the three right openings 3295 (the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c).

The top center panel 3290 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and is silver in color when the center LED 3252 is not emitting light. A metal film is vapor-deposited over the entire front surface 3290a (see FIG. 227) of the top center panel 3290, and the metal vapor-deposited is, for example, tin and indium. This results in a light transmittance of about 20%. Note that the vapor-deposited metal film is thinner in the groove portion 3296 (the portion corresponding to the groove bottom portion 3234a shown in FIG. 171) than in other locations on the front surface 3290a. This results in a relatively high light transmittance of the groove portion 3296.

When the center LED 3252 is emitting light, the light incident on the top center panel 3290 (the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f, and center LED 3252g) passes through the top center panel 3290, and the light enters the top center panel 3290. is released from the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. Thereby, the color of the top center panel 3290 changes from silver according to the emission color of the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g.

Here, as described above, the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252a, the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252c, and the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e are the top reflector 3260, The left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R separate it from the passage path of light emitted from other center LEDs 3252. Furthermore, a top reflector 3260 separates the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f from the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

From the above, the front top unit 3200 is divided into the following areas when viewed from the front.
(i) Formation area of the central front side convex part 3281a of the top lens 3280 (ii) Formation area of the three left front side convex parts 3284 of the top lens 3280 (iii) Formation area of the three right front side convex parts 3285 of the top lens 3280 ( iv) Area to the left of (i) above excluding (ii) above (v) Area to the right of (i) above excluding (iii) above

The above area (i) is illuminated by light emitted from center LED 3252a. The above area (ii) is illuminated by light emitted from center LED 3252c. The above area (iii) is illuminated by light emitted from center LED 3252e. The above area (iv) is illuminated by light emitted from center LED 3252b and center LED 3252f. The above area (v) is illuminated by light emitted from center LED 3252d and center LED 3252g.

Therefore, the appearance of colors in the above areas (i) to (v) can be made different depending on the color of light emitted from center LEDs 3252a to 3252g. For example, by changing the light emission color of center LEDs 3252a to 3252g depending on the game situation, the appearance of colors in the above areas (i) to (v) can be changed.

For example, in a first state (e.g., a normal state), the light emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is a first color (e.g., orange), and the light emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g is a second color (e.g., white); in a second state (e.g., a first CZ state), the light emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the light emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are all the first color (e.g., orange); and in a third state (e.g., a second CZ state different from the first CZ state), the light emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the light emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are all the second color (e.g., white).

As a result, in a first state (e.g., normal state), the above-mentioned (iv) region appears to have a color based on a first color (e.g., orange), while the above-mentioned (v) region appears to have a color based on a second color (e.g., white); in a second state (e.g., first CZ state), both the above-mentioned (iv) and (v) regions appear to have a color based on a first color (e.g., orange); and in a third state (e.g., second CZ state), both the above-mentioned (iv) and (v) regions appear to have a color based on a second color (e.g., white).

At this time, the color of the light emitted by the center LED 3252c may be the same as or different from the color of the light emitted by the center LED 3252b and center LED 3252f. For example, depending on the game situation, it may be possible to switch between emitting light of the same color (e.g., orange) as the color of the light emitted by the center LED 3252b and center LED 3252f from the center LED 3252c, and emitting light of a color (e.g., blue) different from the color of the light emitted by the center LED 3252b and center LED 3252f from the center LED 3252c.

Similarly, the emission color of the center LED 3252e may be the same as or different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. For example, depending on the game situation, the center LED 3252e may emit light of the same color (for example, white) as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g, or the light of a color different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g (for example, It is also possible to switch between emitting blue (blue) light from the center LED 3252e and emitting it from the center LED 3252e.

Moreover, the emitted light color of the center LED 3252a may be the same color as the emitted light color of the other center LEDs 3252, or may be a different color. For example, the emitted light color of the center LED 3252a may be configured to always be a different color (for example, green) from the emitted light color of the other center LEDs 3252.

Note that, as described above, the inclined wall portion 3264a, the inclined wall portion 3265a, the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the inclined wall portion 3267a (see FIGS. 209 and 210) of the top reflector 3260, and the inner wall surface of the arrow eye reflector 3270. 3270a (see FIG. 215) is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 advances while being diffused from the light source, making it possible to evenly illuminate the entire top lens 3280 to top center panel 3290.

Also, a part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b is guided to the lower left front convex part 3282e of the top lens 3280, passes through the lower left opening 3292e of the top center panel 3290, and passes from the lower left front convex part 3282e to the pachislot machine 1. released to the outside. Similarly, a portion of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d is guided to the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, and passes through the lower right opening 3293e of the top center panel 3290 to the lower right front convex portion 3283e. The pachislot machine 1 is discharged from the pachislot machine 1. As a result, in conjunction with the semicircular image 3011b displayed on the central screen 3010 to the reflected image 3216a displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 181), the semicircular image 3011b to the reflected image 3216a is the outline of the character's face, and the light emission at the lower left front protrusion 3282e and the lower right front protrusion 3283e can be shown to the player as if they were the character's eyes.

Further, light of the same color (for example, orange) as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a (see FIG. 199) in the left speaker unit 3400L, and the light is the same as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. Colored (for example, white) light may be emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a of the right speaker unit 3400R. Thereby, the light emitting effect in the front top unit 3200 and the light emitting effect in the speaker unit 3400 can be made to cooperate. In order to enhance the sense of unity in these light-emitting effects, a metal film similar to that of the top center panel 3290 may be deposited on the inner side 3432 (see FIG. 199) of the speaker unit 3400.

<Countermeasures against light leakage in the front top unit 3200>
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view showing the top frame base and the top center panel seen from slightly above. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing the top center panel attached to the top frame base seen from slightly above. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly below. FIG. 236 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the top frame base seen from the front. FIG. 237 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 238 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel. FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing the top lens seen from below. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the top lens. FIG. 241 is a schematic view of the top center LED board, the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top lens, and the top center panel.

As shown in Figures 233 and 234, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top center panel 3290 roughly matches the outer shape of the figure surrounded by the front edge 3211b of the upper wall 3211, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214, the fifth connection portion 3222e, and the sixth connection portion 3222f of the top frame base 3210. The top center panel 3290 is positioned so as to follow these front edges 3211b, 3214b, the fifth connection portion 3222e, and the sixth connection portion 3222f.

As a result, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 204) is covered from the front by a top center panel 3290.

The top wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 has a top wall front side 3226. The shape of the upper wall front side surface 3226 substantially matches the shape of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is disposed above the upper wall front side 3226 of the top frame base 3210, and the upper wall front side 3226 is arranged above the upper wall front side 3226. 3297. At this time, the lower surface 3297b (see FIG. 235) of the upper end protrusion 3297 is substantially in contact with the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall.

Additionally, the top frame base 3210 has a lower contact surface 3227 formed to protrude downward from the front portion of the lower wall 3214. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235, the top center panel 3290 has a lower contact surface 3298 near the lower end on the back side. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other.

For ease of understanding, in Fig. 233, the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, in Fig. 234, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is shown with diagonal lines, and in Fig. 235, the lower surface 3297b and the lower abutment surface 3298 of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are shown in black. The positional relationship between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 will be described in more detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the top frame base 3210 has an upper abutment surface 3228 that stands slightly upward from the rear end of the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall. For clarity, upper abutment surface 3228 is shown in black in FIG. 236. The upper end of the upper contact surface 3228 is continuous with the upper wall main surface 3211c. Thereby, the upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 are connected by the upper abutting surface 3228, and the upper abutting surface 3228 has a step.

The upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 constitute the upper surface of the upper wall 3211. A rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210. Further, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is formed to have a thickness comparable (slightly smaller) to the length of the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 in the vertical direction.

As a result, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is in approximate contact with the upper abutment surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 over the entire left-right direction. The upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 and the upper wall main surface 3211c of the top frame base 3210 are positioned so as to form approximately the same plane.

Further, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 has a first lower contact surface 3227a and a second lower contact surface 3227b. The first lower contact surface 3227a is formed as a slightly curved surface extending in the left-right direction on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3225a and on the right side of the lower right protrusion 3225b (see FIG. 220). . The second lower contact surface 3227b is formed from the lower left protrusion 3225a to the lower right protrusion 3225b. In FIG. 236, only the left side portion of the top frame base 3210 is shown, but the right side portion of the top frame base 3210 has a similar structure.

Further, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 in the top frame base 3210 is formed to protrude forward from the upper end of the first lower contact surface 3227a. For clarity, in FIG. 236, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines, and the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 and the second lower contact surface 3227b are shown in black.

The lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210, and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 and the top frame base 3210 It is possible to substantially contact the lower contact surface 3227 over the entire left and right direction.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237, the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a first lower contact surface 3298a and a second lower contact surface 3298b. The first lower contact surface 3298a is formed as a slightly curved surface extending in the left-right direction on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3292d and on the right side of the lower right protrusion 3293d. The second lower contact surface 3298b is formed from the lower left protrusion 3292d to the lower right protrusion 3293d. Although only the left side portion of the top center panel 3290 is shown in FIG. 237, the right side portion of the top center panel 3290 also has a similar structure.

The lower left side portion 3292c and the lower right side portion 3293c (see FIG. 227) have a structure in which the lower end portions on the back side are slightly bulged toward the rear, and the back side of the bulged portion is the first lower portion. This is a side contact surface 3298a. For clarity, in FIG. 237, the first lower contact surface 3298a is shown in diagonal lines, and the second lower contact surface 3298b is shown in black. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 substantially contacts the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210, and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel The second lower contact surface 3298b substantially contacts the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210.

In FIG. 238, the top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in vertical planes in the front-rear direction (first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and A state in which the top center panel 3290 is cut at a plane passing through the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 is shown. For clarity, in FIG. 238, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown in hatching.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower abutment surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower abutment surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 are in approximate abutment. In FIG. 238, the approximate abutment portion (boundary) at the bottom of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is shown as boundary A. The lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is positioned near boundary A. Between the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 and boundary A, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 do not abut, and a gap X is formed between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290.

As shown in FIG. 239, a black light-shielding paint is applied to the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280. As a result, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 has a light-shielding property and can block the passage of light. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating using a masking jig may be employed. In FIG. 239, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 (the portion coated with light-shielding paint) is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 240, the front surface (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) and the rear surface (rear main surface 3282f and rear main surface 3282f) of the top lens 3280 are formed to be approximately parallel to each other. The lower edge 3280a is formed as a portion connecting these surfaces (the portion shown by the thick line in the figure). Note that FIG. 240 shows the top lens 3280 cut in a vertical plane in the front-to-rear direction. For ease of understanding, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 240.

FIG. 241 schematically shows a top center LED board 3250, a top lens 3280, and a top center panel 3290 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For clarity, in FIG. 241, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown with shading, and the illustration of the top reflector 3260 and the arrow eye reflector 3270 is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 241, a portion of the light emitted from the center LED 3252 and incident on the top lens 3280 is guided inside the top lens 3280 and reaches the lower edge 3280a. However, since the lower edge 3280a has a light blocking property, the light cannot pass through the lower edge 3280a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the lower edge 3280a and leaking out of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the very small gap formed in the gap X and the boundary part A.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 238, above the boundary part A, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is provided. As a result, if there is a slight gap in the boundary A, even if a wire-shaped instrument attempts to enter through the gap, the front edge 3214b will become an obstacle and prevent the intrusion. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap.

As described above, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is coated with black light-shielding paint (black paint is applied) to have a light-blocking property, but the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is It is not painted black like that. This point will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 substantially abut, and the top frame base The upper contact surface 3228 of the top center panel 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. In FIG. 238, the approximate contact portion (boundary portion) of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 at the upper portion thereof is shown as a boundary portion B. In FIG. Moreover, between the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 and the boundary part B, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 do not come into contact with each other, and between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290, A gap Y is formed.

Here, boundary portion A is composed only of the portion (vertical portion) where the first lower abutment surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower abutment surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 approximately abut, and the structure of the boundary portion between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is simple (a linear structure when viewed in cross section). In contrast, boundary portion B is made up of a portion (front-to-back portion) where the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 approximately abut, and a portion (up-down portion) where the upper abutment surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 approximately abut, and the structure of the boundary portion between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is complex and intricate (bent structure when viewed in cross section).

Therefore, it is difficult for light to pass through the boundary B compared to the boundary A, and even if the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 does not have a light-blocking property, the light that has passed through the upper edge 3280b will pass through the gap Y and the boundary. It is now less likely that the liquid will leak out of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the very small gap formed in the slot B. On the other hand, the light that has passed through the gap Y enters the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290, thereby making it possible to make the upper end protrusion 3297 shine.

When the structure of the boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is complicated, from the viewpoint of preventing light from leaking out from the boundary, for example, the lower edge of the left lower protrusion 3282d and the lower edge of the right lower protrusion 3283d of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 239) may not be painted black as described above.

Figure 242 shows the top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 cut in a vertical plane in the front-to-rear direction (a plane passing through the lower left front convex portion 3282e of the top lens 3280 and the lower left opening 3292e of the top center panel 3290) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For ease of understanding, in Figure 242, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown with a cross-hatched pattern.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the second lower abutment surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210 and the second lower abutment surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290 are in approximate abutment. A lower rear protrusion 3299 that protrudes rearward from the second lower abutment surface 3298b is formed above the second lower abutment surface 3298b in the top center panel 3290. Meanwhile, a recess 3229 that is recessed relative to the second lower abutment surface 3227b is formed above the second lower abutment surface 3227b in the top frame base 3210. The lower rear protrusion 3299 of the top center panel 3290 is accommodated in the recess 3229 of the top frame base 3210.

In this way, the boundary between the lower left protrusion 3225a of the top frame base 3210 and the lower left protrusion 3292d of the top center panel 3290 has an intricate structure, making it difficult for light to leak from the boundary. It has become. The same applies to the boundary between the lower right protrusion 3225b of the top frame base 3210 and the lower right protrusion 3293d of the top center panel 3290. Therefore, the lower edge of the top lens 3280 (the lower edge of the lower left protrusion 3282d and the lower right edge of the lower right protrusion 3283d) located near these boundaries should not be painted with black as described above. Of course, it is also possible to paint it black. Furthermore, the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 may also be painted black.

The method for imparting light-shielding properties to the lower edge 3280a and upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is not limited to painting, but may involve attaching a sticker (sheet) with light-shielding properties, or arranging a separate member with light-shielding properties (for example, a member such as the side light-shielding plate 3150 shown in FIG. 154) below the lower edge 3280a or above the upper edge 3280b.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, there is known an amusement machine that enhances the decorative effect by making the illuminating decorative part emit strong light using a light-collecting member equipped with a light-reflecting part (see JP 2017-018631 A).

In the process of intensive study on gaming machines equipped with such light emitting means, the present inventors have found that it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance of gaming machines by devising the structure of the light guiding member. I came up with an idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the aesthetic appearance of a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means.

In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features:

(A-1) A light emitting means (center LED 3252) capable of emitting light;
A light guiding member (top lens 3280) capable of guiding light emitted from the light emitting means;
A first member (top center panel 3290) disposed downstream of the light guide member in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
The light guide member includes a light suppression portion (black painted portion) that suppresses the progression of light emitted from the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In developing the gaming machine according to the present invention, the inventor assumed the possibility that when the first member (top center panel 3290) is placed downstream of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) with respect to the light guiding member (top lens 3280) in the traveling direction of the light, the light may leak from an unintended place. The inventor then came up with the idea that the aesthetics of the gaming machine could be improved by taking measures to prevent such light leakage. In this regard, according to the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light guiding member (top lens 3280) is provided with a light suppression section (black painted section) that suppresses the travel of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the light emission around the first member (top center panel 3290) in a desired manner, and as a result, the inventor succeeded in improving the aesthetics of the gaming machine.

A predetermined gap exists downstream of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) in the traveling direction of the light suppressing section (black painted section), and if the light suppressing section (black painted section) was not provided, there is a concern that the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) would leak out of the gaming machine through the gap. According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the presence of the light suppressing section (black painted section) makes it possible to prevent such light leakage. The above-mentioned predetermined gap is not particularly limited as long as it has a space through which light can pass, and examples thereof include a gap formed at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and other members (gaming machine components) and a hole (e.g., a screw hole) provided in the first member (top center panel 3290). Measures that can prevent light leakage are not limited to black painting (application of light-shielding paint), and may include attaching a sticker (sheet) having light-shielding properties or disposing a separate member having light-shielding properties.

(A-2) The gaming machine according to (A-1) above,
a second member (top frame base 3210) arranged to substantially abut the first member;
The light suppression portion is provided at a first position (lower edge 3280a) in the light guide member,
The first position is closer to the boundary between the first member and the second member than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can pass through. close to,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to be in approximate contact with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light suppression portion (black painted portion) is provided at a first position (lower edge 3280a) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280), and the first position (lower edge 3280a) is closer to the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which light emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass. As a result, the light emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252) and reaching the first position (lower edge 3280a) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280) cannot pass through the first position (lower edge 3280a), so even if there is a small gap at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210), it is possible to prevent light from leaking out of the gaming machine through the gap.

In particular, since the second member (top frame base 3210) has a black appearance, light leaks from the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). If this happens, the light leakage will become noticeable due to the contrast with the black second member (top frame base 3210), and there is a concern that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine will be greatly impaired. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine can be appropriately maintained.

The position (first position) where a measure that can prevent light leakage is applied is not particularly limited, but, for example, the measure is appropriately applied to the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). Is possible. At this time, the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is positioned near the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) (border It is possible to arrange the light guide member (top lens 3280) so that the light guide member (top lens 3280) Alternatively, the light guide member (top lens 3280) may be arranged such that the edge (end portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) faces the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). (Top lens 3280) may also be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are approximately in contact with each other at boundary A and boundary B, and boundary B has a more complicated structure than boundary A. Specifically, boundary B is composed of a portion (called the first portion) where the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are approximately in contact with each other, and a portion (called the second portion) where the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are approximately in contact with each other. If the first portion and the second portion are each flat, the angle between the normal to the first portion and the normal to the second portion is about 90°.

The above matters can be expressed more generally as follows. When the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially abut each other at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B). , among the normals at any point on the first boundary (border A), the angle between the closest normal and the farthest normal in a predetermined direction (e.g., vertical direction) (of each normal The maximum value of the angle formed) is θ ₁ , and among the normals at any point on the second boundary (border B), the closest normal and the farthest normal in a predetermined direction (e.g., vertical direction) Let the angle (the maximum value of the angles formed by each normal line) with the line be θ ₂ . For example, when the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is formed by flat surfaces substantially abutting each other, θ ₁ =0. In addition, the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) includes a portion where the flat surfaces extending in the first direction (for example, the front-back direction) substantially contact each other and a portion extending in the second direction (for example, the up-down direction). In the case where the two flat surfaces substantially contact each other, θ ₂ is the angle between the first direction (e.g. front-back direction) and the second direction (e.g. up-down direction) , 90°).

In the present invention, when the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are approximately in contact with each other at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B), it is possible to configure the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) close to the first boundary (boundary A) as a light suppression portion (black painted portion), while the edge (end) close to the second boundary (boundary B) is not a light suppression portion (black painted portion). Such a configuration may be adopted when θ ₂ is a value larger than θ _1. In addition, when θ ₁ is α or less (for example, 30° or less, 15° or less, 5° or less, etc.), the edge (end) close to the first boundary (boundary A) may be a light suppression portion (black painted portion). Furthermore, when _θ2 is β or more (e.g., 45° or more, 60° or more, 75° or more, etc.), the edge (end) close to the second boundary (boundary B) may not be made into a light suppression portion (black painted portion).

In addition, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first member side contact surface 3297b) and a first member side contact surface Z (for example, the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297), and the second member (top frame base 3210) has a second member side contact surface X (for example, , a first lower contact surface 3227a), a second member side contact surface Y (for example, the upper wall front side surface 3226), and a second member side contact surface Z (for example, the upper side contact surface 3228). However, the first member side contact surface X, the first member side contact surface Y, and the first member side contact surface Z are respectively the second member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface Y and the second member side contact surface Z, the approximate contact portion of the first member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface X is defined as the first boundary. (boundary part A), and the approximate contact part (first part) between the first member side contact surface Y and the second member side contact surface Y, and the first member side contact surface Z and the second member side contact surface Y. A portion (second portion) that substantially contacts the two-member side contact surface Z may be configured as a second boundary portion (boundary portion B). When these contact surfaces are all approximately flat, the angle between the normal line on the first member side contact surface Y and the normal line on the first member side contact surface Z (the angle formed by the normal line on the first member side contact surface Y) The angle between the normal line and the normal line on the second member side contact surface Z is the above-mentioned θ ₂ . In addition, the edge (for example, the upper edge 3280b) close to the normal direction of the second member side contact surface Y (the normal direction of the first member side contact surface Y) and the second boundary part (boundary part B) The angle formed with the normal direction (light emission direction at the edge) is less than γ (for example, less than 45 degrees, less than 30 degrees, less than 15 degrees, etc.), or 0 degrees (that is, these normal directions (substantially parallel).

In this specification, "substantially in contact" is a concept that includes not only a state in which two members are in complete contact but also a state in which two members are in close proximity. "Proximity" refers to a state in which the distance (gap) between two members is sufficiently small relative to the sizes of these members. For example, the distance between two members is 1/20 or less (or 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the size (e.g., horizontal length) of one member (e.g., the smaller member). ), it can be said that these members are close to each other. Alternatively, if the distance between two members is 5 mm or less (or 2 mm or less, 1 mm or less, 0.5 mm or less, etc.), these members may be said to be close to each other.

(A-3) The gaming machine according to (A-1) or (A-2),
A second member (top frame base 3210) is disposed so as to be in approximate contact with the first member,
The first member and the second member are vertically overlapped in the vicinity of an edge (upper edge 3280b) in the vertical direction of the light guiding member.
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to be in approximate contact with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped near the edge (upper edge 3280b) in the vertical direction of the light guide member (top lens 3280). Here, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) reaches the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the light emission direction at the edge (upper edge 3280b) is upward or downward. In contrast, if a slight gap occurs in the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are vertically overlapped, the extension direction of the gap is the front-rear or left-right direction (a direction different from the vertical direction). Therefore, even if light emitted from the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280) enters the gap, it is difficult for the light to pass through the gap because the direction in which the light travels is different from the direction in which the gap is formed. This makes it possible to prevent light from leaking out of the gaming machine through the gap.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is positioned near the upper edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280). This makes it possible to prevent light leakage in an upward direction. In this regard, although upward light leakage is difficult for a player sitting in front of the machine to see, it may be visible to other customers. With the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to achieve a good appearance even to such other customers.

However, in the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is the lower edge (lower edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). 3280a) may be located nearby. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is described as being disposed above the second member (top frame base 3210). In the present invention, the second member (top frame base 3210) may be arranged above the first member (top center panel 3290).

In the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically also constitutes the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). good. Further, in the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are located near the edge (left edge or right edge) in the left and right direction of the light guide member (top lens 3280). may be configured so that they overlap on the left and right. In this case, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap on the left and right may constitute the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). . In the second boundary part (boundary part B), compared to the first boundary part (boundary part A), the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are approximately aligned. The area of the contacting portion may be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are arranged at the first boundary (border A) and the second boundary (border B), respectively. It was explained that they were almost in contact with each other. In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are between the first boundary part (boundary part A) and the second boundary part (boundary part B). , it is also possible to substantially abut only at one boundary. At this time, one boundary portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially contact may be the first boundary portion (boundary portion A), It may be the second boundary portion (boundary portion B).

(A-4) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-3) above,
The first member has translucency,
A plurality of colors are provided as the colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
The appearance of the first member when the light of the first color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means and when the light of the second color (white) is emitted from the light emitting means. different colors,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is configured to have a different external color when the light emitting means (center LED 3252) emits a first color (orange) light and when the light emitting means (center LED 3252) emits a second color (white) light. This allows for an attractive light-emitting effect to be realized by switching the color of light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) depending on the game situation.

Although it is desirable to use full-color LEDs as the light-emitting means in the present invention, it is also possible to use monochrome LEDs.

(A-5) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-4) above,
The first member has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b),
A first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member is visible through the first opening,
A second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member is visible through the second opening;
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b), and the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guiding member (top lens 3280) is visible through the first opening (first left opening 3294a), and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guiding member (top lens 3280) is visible through the second opening (second left opening 3294b). This allows the player to see the illumination state in the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guiding member (top lens 3280) through the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b), realizing a novel light-emitting performance. In addition, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) are each configured as part of one light guiding member (top lens 3280), and there is no need to fit a light guiding member (lens) into each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b) (there is no need to prepare a light guiding member (lens) for each opening, and it is sufficient to place one light guiding member (top lens 3280) overall), so the burden on the manufacturing process can be reduced. In addition, if a light guiding member (lens) is fitted into each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b), the number of parts will increase, and the management burden will also increase accordingly, but according to the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, such a burden can also be reduced.

As the first opening and the second opening in the present invention, any two openings out of a plurality of openings (central opening 3291a, first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, third left side opening 3294c, first right side opening 3295a, second right side opening 3295b, third right side opening 3295c, lower left opening 3292e, and lower right opening 3293e) formed in the first member (top center panel 3290) can be adopted. In addition, as the first and second regions in the present invention, it is possible to use two convex portions corresponding to the two openings in the first member (top center panel 3290) from among the multiple convex portions (central front convex portion 3281a, first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284b, third left front convex portion 3284c, first right front convex portion 3285a, second right front convex portion 3285b, third right front convex portion 3285c, lower left front convex portion 3282e, and lower right front convex portion 3283e) formed on the light guiding member (top lens 3280).

(A-6) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The first member has openings (a left opening 3294 and a right opening 3295),
A specific area of the light guide member (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) is visible through the opening,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (a center LED 3252c and a center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to the specific area, and a first light emitting unit capable of emitting light to an area other than the specific area of the light guide member. Possible second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) are provided,
comprising a partition member (left arrow eye reflector 3270L and right arrow eye reflector 3270R) that partitions a passage path of light emitted from the first light emitting means and a passage path of light emitted from the second light emitting means;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has an opening (left side opening 3294 and right side opening 3295), and a specific area (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280) is visible through the opening (left side opening 3294 and right side opening 3295). In addition, as the light-emitting means (center LED 3252), a first light-emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to a specific area (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) and a second light-emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) capable of emitting light to an area other than the specific area (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) in the light-guiding member (top lens 3280) are provided, and the passage path of light emitted from the first light-emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the passage path of light emitted from the second light-emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) are partitioned by a partition member (left arrow eye reflector 3270L and right arrow eye reflector 3270R). This allows the first light-emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light-emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) to be used to individually illuminate specific areas (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) and other areas of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280), and therefore allows a wide variety of light-emitting effects to be realized by switching the light-emitting modes of the first light-emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light-emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) according to the game situation.

In the present invention, the opening may be a central opening 3291a. In this case, the specific area may be a central front convex portion 3281a, the first light emitting means may be a center LED 3252a, the second light emitting means may be center LEDs 3252b and 3252d, and the partition member may be a top reflector 3260.

(A-7) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-6) above,
comprising a partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions a region through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass;
The tip portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member is formed thinner than other portions of the partition member.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the area through which light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is divided by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270). ) is formed thinner than other parts of the partition member. Thereby, shadows due to the presence of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) are less likely to occur, and a good-looking light emission effect can be achieved.

In particular, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the distal end (front part 3272) of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is substantially in contact with the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the partition member ( The arrangement is such that shadows are likely to occur due to the presence of the arrow eye reflector 3270). If the tip portion (front portion 3272) had the same thickness as the other portion (base portion 3271), the possibility of such a shadow occurring would increase. In this regard, in the seventh embodiment, the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270 ) and the light guide member (top lens 3280) are made to have a small area where they substantially come into contact with each other. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of such shadows.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in order to make the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271), a step portion is provided between these portions. In the present invention, it is possible to adopt other shapes as long as the thickness of the tip part (front part 3272) is smaller than the thickness of the other part (base part 3271), for example, a partition member (arrow eye reflector). 3270) may be configured so that the wall surface (outer wall surface or inner wall surface) has a tapered shape.

(A-8) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-7) above,
comprising a partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions a region through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass;
The area partitioned by the partition member (the area surrounded by the peripheral wall of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) emits less light from the light emitting means than the third position (a position closer to the light source). The fourth position on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light (the position farthest from the light source) is larger.
It is characterized by

According to the seventh embodiment of the slot machine 1, the area through which the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is partitioned by a partition member (arrow-eye reflector 3270), and the area partitioned by the partition member (arrow-eye reflector 3270) (area surrounded by the peripheral wall of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) is larger at the fourth position (position farther from the light source) downstream in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) than at the third position (position closer to the light source). This makes it possible to advance the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) while diffusing it, and it is possible to illuminate a wide area of the light guiding member (top lens 3280), and it is also possible to make it difficult for shadows caused by the presence of the partition member (arrow-eye reflector 3270) to occur.

In this way, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has an inclination that widens toward the downstream side (front) in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). When the reflector 3270 and the top reflector 3260 are integrally molded, the inclination is opposite to the inclination of the tapered surface of the mold (the inclination for removing the resin part from the mold). Therefore, the arrow eye reflector 3270 is preferably molded as a separate part from the top reflector 3260.

When an LED is used as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of LED is not particularly limited, and so-called surface mount type LEDs or so-called bullet type LEDs may be used. As a surface mount type LED, a light emitting element may be placed in a concave storage section and filled with resin. As a bullet type LED, a resin that forms the outer surface may be formed into a bullet shape. Since a bullet type LED has a bullet-shaped sealing resin, it generally has directionality and a narrower irradiation range than a surface mount type LED.

As mentioned above, from the viewpoint of diffusing the light emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252) while moving forward, it is desirable to use a surface-mounted LED. This allows a wide range from the light-guiding member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) to be illuminated. In addition, since the amount of light contained per unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make the position of the light source difficult for players to discern. In this regard, there is a concern that the appearance will be poor if the position of the light source (LED particles) is clearly visible to players, but by using a wide-angle type LED, such LED particles are less noticeable and good design can be ensured.

Even if the light guide member (top lens 3280) is not provided, it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as in the seventh embodiment by directly incidenting the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) on the first member (top center panel 3290), but by providing the light guide member (top lens 3280), the LED grains can be made less noticeable. From the viewpoint of making the LED grains less noticeable, the light guide member (top lens 3280) may be colored a predetermined color (e.g., milky white) by mixing a pigment or dye into the resin material before molding the light guide member (top lens 3280). Similarly, the first member (top center panel 3290) may be colored a predetermined color (e.g., milky white) by mixing a pigment or dye into the resin material before molding the first member (top center panel 3290). This allows the entire light guide member (top lens 3280) through to the first member (top center panel 3290) to be illuminated evenly and dimly.

(A-9) Any one of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-8),
The first member has a translucent property and has a metal surface formed on an outer surface thereof.
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is translucent and has a metal surface formed on its outer surface. As a result, even when no light is emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252), the first member (top center panel 3290) has a metallic luster, making it possible to realize an appearance with excellent design. In addition, when light is emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252), it is possible to change the exterior color of the first member (top center panel 3290), allowing the player to see a colorful first member (top center panel 3290) depending on the game situation.

In this way, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a half mirror with a metal surface. The half mirror is not limited to one with a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror with any desired transmittance can be appropriately adopted. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30% (for example, 20%), or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of tin, indium, silver, aluminum, etc. to be evaporated. The thicker the metal surface, the lower the transmittance and the stronger the metallic luster. The method of forming the metal surface is not particularly limited, and in addition to metal evaporation, the metal surface may be coated by, for example, plating. The color of the metal surface is not particularly limited, and any color can be adopted depending on the type of metal used.

The location where the metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290) is not particularly limited, and the metal surface may be formed at any location on the outer surface (surface that is visible from the outside) of the first member (top center panel 3290). It is possible to form For example, in addition to the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290, a metal surface may be formed on the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297. Of course, no metal surface may be formed on the outer surface of the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-10) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The first member is translucent and includes a first region (front surface 3290a) and a second region (groove portion 3296) having a higher light transmittance than the first region.
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is translucent, and the second region (groove 3296) has a higher light transmittance than the first region (front surface 3290a). This makes it easier for the second region (groove 3296) to transmit light emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252) compared to the first region (front surface 3290a), and this region can be made to shine relatively brightly. In this way, by providing a contrast in light intensity between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove 3296), an attractive light-emitting effect can be realized.

In the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove 3296) is formed as a recess, and has a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction of the first member (top center panel 3290) than the first region (front surface 3290a). It has become. Thereby, the second region (groove portion 3296) allows the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) to pass through relatively easily. In addition, in the second region (groove portion 3296), due to its shape (grooved), the amount of metal vapor deposited is small, and the metal film is relatively thin. This further increases the difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296). The second region (groove portion 3296) may be configured such that no metal film is formed at all. The method for creating a difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296) is not particularly limited. It may be configured such that the color of the first region (front surface 3290a) is a color that transmits light more easily than the color of the first region (front surface 3290a).

In the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove 3296) is described as being formed (linearly) so as to extend over a predetermined length. This allows the second region (groove 3296) to be seen as a line formed for design purposes even in a situation where no light is emitted from the light-emitting means (center LED 3252), so that no sense of incongruity is felt. From this perspective, it is desirable that the second region (groove 3296) is formed as a predetermined pattern. The shape of the pattern is not particularly limited, and may be formed as a line (straight or curved), may be a geometric pattern, or may be composed of letters, figures, symbols, or a combination of these.

In this way, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a decorative member (decorative member). Further, the second member (top frame base 3210) can also be configured as a decorative member.

(A-11) Any one of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-10),
The light suppression portion is a portion of the light guide member that is coated with paint.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light suppression part (black painted part) is a painted part of the light guide member (top lens 3280). As a result, even if the part where the progress of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) should be suppressed has a complex or detailed structure, it can be easily and at low cost by painting the part. , measures can be taken to prevent light leakage.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the light suppression section (black painted section) is formed by applying a black light-shielding paint. As the light-shielding paint, it is possible to appropriately adopt a conventionally known paint having light absorbing properties. For example, the light-shielding paint can be configured to include a resin material and a colorant, and any paint (acrylic resin paint, water-based acrylic resin paint, urethane-based paint, etc.) can be used as the resin material. Any pigment (e.g., carbon black) or dye can be used as the colorant. The color of the light suppression section is not limited to black, and may be, for example, gray. By changing the type and ratio of the pigment or dye contained in the light-shielding paint, it is possible to configure the light suppression section to any color. The colorant may include multiple types of pigments or dyes (black, white, red, yellow, blue, etc.).

In order to make light leakage less noticeable, light-shielding paint may also be applied to the edge of the first member (top center panel 3290) (the edge located near the light suppression portion (black painted portion) of the light-guiding member (top lens 3280). However, if a metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290), there is a risk that the metal film will peel off during the painting process, so it is preferable not to paint such a first member (top center panel 3290).

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, gaming machines capable of performing effects using a projector have been known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such gaming machines, a game image is projected from the projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, and the image is displayed on the screen instead of on a liquid crystal display device.

In the course of thorough research into gaming machines equipped with such projectors, the inventor came to the conclusion that it might be possible to enhance the impact of the visual presentation by making ingenious adjustments to the layout structure around the screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the power of video expression.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) A screen (central screen 3010),
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light to display an image on the screen;
A predetermined member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050),
the projector and the screen are disposed so that light projected by the projector is incident on a rear side of the screen;
The predetermined member is disposed on the upstream side of the screen in a traveling direction of the light projected by the projector.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the seventh embodiment of the slot machine 1, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (center screen 3010) are arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the back side of the screen (center screen 3010), and a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) is arranged upstream of the screen (center screen 3010) in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). By configuring in this way, the inventor has found that it is possible to increase the impact of the image expression using the screen (center screen 3010). In this regard, by arranging the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050), it is possible to reinforce the screen (center screen 3010) and protect the screen (center screen 3010) even if an external force is applied by the player, compared to when the screen (center screen 3010) is provided alone. It was also considered that such a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) could be placed downstream in the direction of travel of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). However, in this case, since the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) is present on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the player would see the image through the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050). This would give the player the impression that the image is somewhat far back, and there was concern that the player's sense of immersion in the image would be reduced. In contrast, the pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment makes it possible to dispel such an impression, increasing the impact of the image expression and increasing the player's sense of immersion in the image.

(B-2) The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
The predetermined member protects the screen from the back side of the screen,
The screen constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) protects the screen (center screen 3010) from the back side of the screen (center screen 3010). The screen 3010) constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1). As a result, it is possible to strengthen the screen (center screen 3010), and since there is no member between the player and the screen (center screen 3010), Images can be seen directly in the eyes of the player, further increasing the power and realism of video expression.

For example, in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the light-transmitting plate 1045 is disposed on the front side of the screen sheet 1046. When adopting such a configuration, the light in the game arcade (light present outside the slot machine 1) is reflected by the light-transmitting plate 1045, which may cause the image to look bad. In contrast, in the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the specified member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050) is present on the rear side of the screen (center screen 3010), which makes it possible to prevent such reflection and improve the image's appearance. In addition, in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the presence of the light-transmitting plate 1045 is particularly noticeable when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the side, which may cause the image to look bad (not only in terms of the image but also in terms of the appearance of the slot machine 1 itself). In contrast, in the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, there are no other members outside the screen (center screen 3010), which may result in a sophisticated appearance.

(B-3) The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2) above,
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) in a curved shape near at least one end.
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) with a curved shape near at least one end. By displaying an image on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), it is possible to give the displayed image a three-dimensional feel, and it is possible to realize a highly realistic visual expression.

The seventh embodiment has been described as having curved portions (left curved portion 3012L and right curved portion 3012R) provided near each of the left end and right end of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the position and number of the curved portions (curved portions 3012) are not particularly limited. For example, a curved portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided only near one of the left and right ends of the screen (center screen 3010), and the portion near the other end may be formed flat. . Furthermore, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided at a location near the center in the left-right direction on the screen (center screen 3010). Further, the entire screen (center screen 3010) may be configured as a curved portion (curved portion 3012).

(B-4) Any one of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-3),
A performance execution means (sub-control circuit 200) capable of executing a performance by controlling the projector,
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion in a visual manner in which the curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature exists on the curved surface portion.
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved portion (curved portion 3012) with a predetermined curvature, and it is possible to display an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved portion (curved portion 3012) in a visual manner in which a curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature exists on the curved portion (curved portion 3012). This makes it possible to realize a highly realistic visual expression in which an object having the curved surface actually exists on the curved portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (central screen 3010).

Note that curvature is a quantity representing the degree of curvature of a curved line or curved surface, and the local degree of curvature can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the curvature of a circle with radius r is 1/r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. When the curve is a circular arc, the radius of curvature can be expressed by the radius of the circular arc; on the other hand, in the case of a curve that is different from a circular arc, the radius of curvature can be expressed by a predetermined function that represents the degree of bending of the curve. I can do it.

(B-5) Any one of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-4),
A three-dimensional decorative portion (a side decorative portion 3110) is provided.
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape,
The three-dimensional decorative portion is arranged so that at least a portion of the three-dimensional decorative portion overlaps with the curved surface portion when viewed from the front.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and when viewed from the front, at least a portion of the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). ) A three-dimensional decorative part (side decorative part 3110) is arranged so as to overlap with the three-dimensional decorative part (side decorative part 3110). Thereby, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface part (curved part 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) work together. , it is possible to create a three-dimensional sense of unity between the image and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110).

Here, if a light-transmitting member (such as the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is placed on the front side of the screen (center screen 3010), the screen (center screen 3010) and three-dimensional decoration Since the light-transmitting member is interposed between the curved surface section (side decoration section 3110), the image (column image) displayed on the curved surface section (curved section 3012) and the three-dimensional decoration section (side decoration section 3110) have a sense of unity. There is a concern that the structure may collapse, causing a sense of discomfort. In contrast, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, no other member is interposed between the screen (center screen 3010) and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110), so this feeling of discomfort can be eliminated. This can enhance the sense of unity. Furthermore, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between these and the left speaker unit 3400L and right speaker unit 3400R, and the overall appearance of the Pachislot machine 1 can be made sophisticated.

In the seventh embodiment, the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is arranged so as to cover the rear part of the screen (center screen 3010), and a part of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is disposed when viewed from the front. has been described as overlapping a part of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). In the present invention, the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) can be appropriately arranged near the curved part (curved part 3012), and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) 3012) may not be covered at all. For example, the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is arranged adjacent to the curved part (curved part 3012), and the surface of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) and the surface of the curved part (curved part 3012) It may also constitute a substantially continuous surface.

(B-6) Any one of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-5),
A three-dimensional decorative portion (a side decorative portion 3110) is provided.
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and has an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) that faces the three-dimensional decorative portion in accordance with the shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion,
The three-dimensional decorative portion is disposed along the curved surface portion.
It is characterized by:

According to the seventh embodiment of the slot machine 1, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) with a curved shape, and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is arranged so as to follow the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). This makes it possible to impart a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional effect, combined with the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110), creates a three-dimensional sense of unity between the image and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110). In addition, the screen (center screen 3010) has an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) that faces the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) in response to the shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110), so that the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be arranged so as to fit into the opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020). This allows the relative positional relationship between the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the curved portion (curved portion 3012) to be appropriate, ensuring the sense of unity described above.

In the seventh embodiment, the explanation has been made assuming that the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is formed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the forming position of the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is not particularly limited, and for example, the opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020). Alternatively, an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) may be formed so as to straddle the curved portion (curved portion 3012) and the portion (for example, the rear portion 3013). The three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) may be arranged along the part (for example, the rear side part 3013). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the opposing portion (side unevenness portion 3020) is composed of both concave portions (concave portions 3021a, concave portions 3022a, and concave portions 3023a) and convex portions (protrusions 3021b, protrusions 3022b, and protrusions 3023b). It was explained as follows. The opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) in the present invention may be composed only of concave portions or may be composed only of convex portions. Moreover, the number of opposing parts (side uneven parts 3020) is of course not limited, and it is possible to form an arbitrary number of opposing parts (side uneven parts 3020) as appropriate.

(B-7) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-6) above,
comprising a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) arranged so as to suppress the light projected by the projector from passing through the predetermined member and leaking;
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the provision of a light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) makes it possible to prevent the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) from passing through a specific member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050) and leaking out. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) leaks out from a part other than the screen (central screen 3010), that part will shine unnaturally and look bad, but the presence of the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) can prevent this from happening.

(B-8) Any one of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-7),
Light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) capable of emitting light;
A light guiding member (side light lens 3140) that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means;
and a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) arranged to prevent the light projected by the projector from reaching the light guide member.
It is characterized by:

According to the seventh embodiment of the slot machine 1, the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) is provided, which makes it possible to prevent the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) from reaching the light guide member (side light lens 3140). If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the light guide member (side light lens 3140), the light emitted from the light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a-3122g) and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) will mix, which may result in the intended light emission performance not being achieved. However, the presence of the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) can prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) is arranged to cover the portion (gap) of the specified member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050) that is not covered by the screen (central screen 3010). As long as it is possible to block light from passing through the gap and proceeding further, the position of the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) is not particularly limited. Specifically, the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) may be arranged on the outer side of the slot machine 1 relative to the specified member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050), or may be arranged on the inner side of the slot machine 1 relative to the specified member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050).

(B-9) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-8) above,
a light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) disposed near the screen, the light reflecting section being able to reflect at least a part of the image displayed on the screen;
It is characterized by

According to the seventh embodiment of the slot machine 1, a light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) is disposed near the screen (central screen 3010), and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) is capable of reflecting at least a portion of the image displayed on the screen (central screen 3010). This allows the image displayed on the screen (central screen 3010) to be combined with the image reflected on the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) as a result of the image being reflected by the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216), thereby realizing a novel image expression that the player cannot perceive with the screen (central screen 3010) alone.

If a light-transmitting member (such as the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is placed on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the light-transmitting member will be present between the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216). Therefore, there is a concern that the presence of the light-transmitting member will deteriorate the appearance of the image reflected in the reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) (in particular, the unity of the image will be lost due to streaks appearing at the boundary between the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216)). In contrast, in the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, there are no other components between the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216), making the image reflected on the reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) clearer and allowing the image displayed on the screen (central screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) to appear integrated.

In the seventh embodiment, the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is configured by applying a reflective paint. The light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured as a mirror, may be configured by evaporating a metal film, may be configured by attaching a sheet that reflects light, or may be configured by performing mirror processing (reducing surface roughness by polishing or cutting). In the seventh embodiment, the image reflecting surface 3216 is formed as the light reflecting portion, but in addition to the image reflecting surface 3216, the decorative surface 3217 may also be configured as the light reflecting portion. In addition, as the light reflecting portion, a configuration that bulges forward from the vicinity of the periphery (upper end, lower end, left end, right end, etc.) of the screen (center screen 3010) can be appropriately adopted. If the entire second member (top frame base 3210) has reflective properties, a specific portion of the molded second member (top frame base 3210) (e.g., the lower surface 3215 of the lower wall 3214) may be used as the light reflecting portion without any special processing to form the light reflecting portion.

(B-10) Any one of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-9),
A protrusion (a front upper end 3015 and a front lower end 3017) protruding from the surface of the screen is formed along at least a part of the periphery of the screen.
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the protruding parts (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017) protruding from the surface of the screen (center screen 3010) are formed so as to follow at least a part of the periphery of the screen (center screen 3010). As a result, when a gap occurs between the surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and another member, even if a wire-shaped tool is attempted to be inserted through the gap, the protruding parts (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017) get in the way and can prevent the insertion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating from being performed through the gap. In addition, the presence of the protruding parts (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017) makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the screen (center screen 3010), and even if force is applied during assembly work, etc., it is possible to suppress the screen (center screen 3010) from being distorted.

In the seventh embodiment, a front upper end 3015, a front lower end 3017, a rear upper end 3019, and a rear lower end 3020 are provided as protrusions of the screen (center screen 3010). Among these protrusions, the front It has been explained that the presence of the upper end portion 3015 and the front lower end portion 3017 can prevent trigly movements. Similarly, the rear upper end portion 3019 and the rear lower end portion 3020 may be configured to have a function of preventing a wire-shaped instrument from entering, thereby preventing trifling. .

(B-11) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-10) above,
Through-holes (through-hole 3016L and through-hole 3016R) are formed in the screen,
The predetermined member is fixed by screw fastening using the through hole.
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R) formed therein, and the specified member (rear translucent plate 3050) is fixed by screw fastening using the through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R). This allows the screen (central screen 3010) to be positioned in an appropriate position by fixing the specified member (rear translucent plate 3050).

Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the screen sheet 1046 is held down by the lower holding member UD101 and the upper holding member UD102. In contrast, in the slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) is fixed by screw fastening via a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) or the top frame base 3210 without such holding down. This eliminates the need for parts such as the lower holding member UD101 and the upper holding member UD102, and can reduce costs. Note that the screen sheet 1046 in the fifth embodiment is a flexible thin sheet-like screen, which is prone to expansion and contraction due to changes in humidity. Therefore, if it is fixed in close contact with other members by screw fastening, there is a concern that it may be damaged due to expansion and contraction, and it was desirable to hold it down as described above. In contrast, the screen (center screen 3010) in the seventh embodiment has a certain degree of thickness (for example, 2 mm) and rigidity, and does not expand or contract much even if the humidity changes. Therefore, even if the screen is screwed in, it is unlikely to break, making it possible to adopt the above configuration. The thickness of the screen (central screen 3010) is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 1 mm to 5 mm (or about 1.5 mm to 3 mm, or about 1.8 mm to 2.5 mm). Making the screen (central screen 3010) thinner increases the image resolution, but increases the possibility of breakage when removed from the mold. The thickness of the screen (central screen 3010) can be appropriately determined taking this into consideration.

[Eighth embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Also, explanations of the parts of the first to seventh embodiments that are also applicable to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the eighth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the eighth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eighth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

In addition, even if the shape is different from the slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for the configurations having the same functions for convenience. In addition, even if the shape is the same or the process is the same as the slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Rock performance>
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “1”. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “2”. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "3". FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "4". FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "5". FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “6”.

As explained in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period of time). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is configured so that a reel effect or a pseudo game can be executed while the lock effect is being executed.

As explained in the first embodiment, the reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's game operations during a period in which the player's game operations are invalid. In addition, the pseudo game is produced by accepting the player's game operations in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operations are invalid, thereby spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

In addition, in a lock effect (reel effect or pseudo game), a combination of symbols may be displayed as still symbols, but the player will not be given any special benefits based on the fact that the combination of symbols is displayed as still symbols. For example, even if the combination of symbols displayed as still symbols in a reel effect or pseudo game matches a combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 11 to 14), no medals will be paid out according to that combination of symbols.

In addition, for example, in this embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the reel presentation or simulated game, a transition to the AT state may occur; however, this merely notifies (suggests) that a decision to transition to the AT state has been made via a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) in a state where a transition to the AT state has already been decided, and does not mean that a transition to the AT state is decided in response to a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) being stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as such lock effects, the lock effects shown in FIG. 243 (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6") are provided. The lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6" are each composed of one of the lock effects (i) to (iv) below, or a combination of two of these lock effects.

(i) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the reel performance (ii) "Red 7" symbols are not aligned in the reel performance (iii) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the pseudo game (iv) "Red 7" is aligned in the pseudo game The patterns don't line up

In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "1", the performance (i) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "2", the performance (ii) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "3", the performance (iii) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "4", the performance (iv) above is performed. In the rock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", after the above effect (iv) is performed, the above effect (i) is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "6", after the performance (ii) above is performed, the performance (iii) above is performed.

In this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment is used, and the "red 7" is arranged at symbol position "0." In FIG. 244 to FIG. 249, numbers indicating the symbol positions corresponding to the symbols that are stopped and displayed are also shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244, in the lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "1", after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (see FIG. 244(a)), the player's The rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically) without a stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 244(b)). Next, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 244(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 244(d)). .

As shown in FIG. 245, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating (see FIG. 245(a)), the player's stop operation causes The right reel 3R immediately (automatically) stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 245(b)). Next, the rotation of the middle reel 3C stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 245(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") appears in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 245(d)).

As shown in Figure 246, in the lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "3", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating (see Figure 246(a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. In response, the right reel 3R stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 246(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R is swinging at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 246(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R is also continuing to swing. Then, in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 246(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also continuing to swing.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts to rotate (see FIG. 247(a)), the right reel 3R stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 247(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the center reel 3C stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see FIG. 247(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the left reel 3L stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 247(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C also continue to swing.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts to rotate (see FIG. 248(a)), the right reel 3R stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 248(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the center reel 3C stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see FIG. 248(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the left reel 3L stops rotating in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 248(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C are also continuing to swing. After that, the left reel 3L spins again (see FIG. 248(e)), and the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player performing a stop operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 248(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C are also continuing to swing.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6", after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (see FIG. 249(a)), the player's stop operation causes The right reel 3R immediately (automatically) stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 249(b)). Next, the middle reel 3C stops rotating (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see Figure 249(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") appears in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 249(d)). After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see Fig. 249(e)), and in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 249(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are not swinging. Note that after "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C may be made to swing at a predetermined timing, similarly to the left reel 3L.

<Rock performance determination process>
FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game zone is an advantageous zone (step S1001). As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and advantageous zones include an effect zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, pseudo bonus) (see FIG. 5). The effect zone is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to a non-advantageous zone in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, but differs from the non-advantageous zone in that a mode transition is performed. The increase zone is an AT state (a game state advantageous to the player).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current play zone is not an advantageous zone, it ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the current play zone is an advantageous zone, it determines whether or not it is in a pseudo bonus (step S1002). As explained in the first embodiment, a pseudo bonus is a play state (AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not it is in a pseudo bonus by referring to the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

If it is determined that the pseudo bonus is being played, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game has shifted to the pseudo bonus (step S1003). As explained in the first embodiment, when an internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), an advantageous section winning time is recorded as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination. A sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the performance section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transfer lottery) is performed based on the random value and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. As a result, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined as the result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery. As the "winning", "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided.

If “winning (current game)” is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section (see FIG. 28) in the current game (the game in which the pseudo bonus transfer lottery was performed), The bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when a "win (current game)" is determined, the current game shifts to a pseudo bonus. Similarly, when "winning (next game)" is determined, for example, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section in the next game (the next game of the game in which the pseudo bonus transfer lottery was performed) (FIG. 28 In step S106 (see FIG. 20), the bit corresponding to the "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when a "win (next game)" is determined, the next game is shifted to a pseudo bonus.

If it is determined that it is not the current game that has shifted to the pseudo bonus, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1G consecutive lottery has been won (step S1004). As explained in the first embodiment, in the pseudo bonus, the 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 7(d)) is referred to, and a lottery (1G consecutive lottery) is performed based on the random number value and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. As a result, a "win" or "non-win" is determined as the result of the 1G lottery. As the "winning", "winning (1G series + 1)" is provided.

If "winning (1G series + 1)" is determined, for example, in step S103 of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section (see FIG. 28), one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock) is granted. (1G continuous stock counter is incremented by 1). When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G continuous stock), one 1G continuous stock is used up (the 1G continuous stock counter is (subtracted by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the current game has transitioned to the pseudo bonus, or if it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "1" and "6" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1005). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1006) and ends this subroutine. This results in a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6". The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is an effect equivalent to the "red 7s" effect described in the first embodiment. Note that if the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, a lock effect different from the lock effect ("red 7s" effect) performed when transitioning to the pseudo bonus (for example, the special bonus effect described in the first embodiment) may be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the pseudo bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for generating the special lock effect are met (step S1007). As described in the first embodiment, the special lock effect is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when the sub-flag "Determined role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined when the advantageous zone is won, and the mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8(f)) determines that there will be a transition to Heaven C mode (see FIG. 6). In other words, the conditions for generating the special lock effect are that the sub-flag "Determined role" is determined when the advantageous zone is won, the mode transition lottery determines that there will be a transition to Heaven C mode, and the special lock effect generation lottery, which can be won with a predetermined probability, is won.

When the sub-flag is set as "guaranteed role" when the advantageous zone is won, the pseudo bonus transition lottery result is always set as "winning lottery (next game)" (see FIG. 7(c)), and the transition to the pseudo bonus is confirmed. Heaven C mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to be played consecutively. When the pseudo bonus starts, the ceiling shortening lottery table (see FIG. 8(e)) is referenced, and a lottery based on a random number value (ceiling shortening lottery) is performed, and a "winning lottery" or "non-winning lottery" is determined as the result of the ceiling shortening lottery. If a "winning lottery" is determined, the ceiling game number is set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. Heaven C mode is a mode in which the ceiling shortening lottery can be won (heaven mode), and is a mode in which heaven mode is likely to be maintained (a mode advantageous to the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the conditions for the special lock effect generation have not been met, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect lottery (step S1008). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lottery has been won or not by conducting a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lottery for the lock effect has been won (step S1009). If it is determined that the lottery for the lock effect has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1010). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1011) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect (a so-called false effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" being performed.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect occurrence condition is met, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see FIG. 243) (step S1012). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013) and ends this subroutine. This causes the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" to be performed.

The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is equivalent to the special lock effect described in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the special lock effect can be configured not to be executed if the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous zone (game history) satisfies a predetermined condition. As such a game history, the value of the advantageous zone game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. (values referenced in the limit process) can be used. An upper limit (limiter) is set for the period during which the advantageous zone continues, and the limit process is a process for ending the advantageous zone when the limiter is reached (see FIG. 16).

In addition, in the lock performance determination process shown in FIG. 250, when a pseudo bonus transition lottery or 1G continuous lottery is won, a lock performance corresponding to the lock performance number "1" or "6" is performed (lock performance number "3"). and the rock effect corresponding to "5" is not performed). However, in this embodiment, a lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" may be performed when a pseudo bonus transfer lottery or a 1G consecutive lottery is won. As described in the first embodiment, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the 1G consecutive lottery will not be executed (see FIG. 16). Furthermore, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo bonus transition lottery and the 1G consecutive lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004, and S1007 of FIG. 250 all become "NO", and the lock effect is no longer executed. In the present embodiment, for example, a variable in an advantageous section (the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, or the value of the control payout number counter, or If the value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G continuous stock counter) exceeds a predetermined value, the lock effect (pseudo game as a special lock effect) will not be executed. Is possible.

<Lock effect execution process>
Fig. 251 is a flow chart showing a lock effect execution process carried out in the main control circuit Fig. 252 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a pseudo game.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1021). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes lock command generation and storage processing (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that locking of the reels has started, and can determine the timing to execute various effects.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to various lock performances. As a result, for example, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), "7" shown in FIG. 252 is selected. Aim for the target!'' effect image 1100 is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is performed in the order of "Right reel 3R → Middle reel 3C → Left reel 3L" and a stop operation at the timing when the "Red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. This is an image suggesting that By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible to have the player operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the suggested order, and as a result, the player can participate in the pseudo game. I can do it.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes lock effect acceleration processing (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is started. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and then controlled to maintain the constant speed. The rotation mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R until reaching the constant speed is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation), but may include reel actions such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, and combinations thereof. It may include. Furthermore, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed, without maintaining the rotating state at a constant speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), the main CPU 101 rotates each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R in the manner shown in FIGS. 244 to 249 by switching the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time. The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R are controlled so as to stop. When accelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. When decelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. When maintaining the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in a stopped state, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When swinging the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the swinging excitation pattern. Each excitation pattern is held for a predetermined period of time. The time is managed by a timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). Note that the excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation, etc. can be adopted as appropriate. Further, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R may be PM type stepping motors or HB type stepping motors. The driving method may be a bipolar method or a unipolar method.

After executing the process of step S1024, the main CPU 101 judges whether the pseudo-play flag is set to ON (step S1025). The pseudo-play flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo-game is being executed. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 also performs a process of setting the pseudo-play flag to ON in the process of step S1024. Also, if a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-play flag to ON when starting the control to keep the left reel 3L stopped in the reel effect (see FIG. 249(d)) (when a predetermined time has passed since the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R).

If it is determined that the pseudo game flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game process (step S1026). The pseudo game processing will be explained later using FIG. 253.

If it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-play flag is not set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect end flag is set to ON (step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, when a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "2" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON when starting control to keep the left reel 3L stopped (see Figures 244 (d) and 245 (d)) (when a predetermined time has passed since the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R). In addition, when a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1073 in FIG. 254) when it starts the control to swing the left reel 3L (see FIG. 246(d) and FIG. 247(d)) (when all the stopping operations for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the pseudo game are completed). In addition, when a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1084 in FIG. 255) when it starts the control to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after re-spinning (see FIG. 248(f)) (when a predetermined time has passed since the re-spinning of the left reel 3L began). In addition, if the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1112 in FIG. 256) when it starts control (see FIG. 249(f)) to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after the respin (when the stopping operation for the left reel 3L in the pseudo game after the respin is completed).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect end flag is not set to ON, it returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect end flag is set to ON, it sets the random delay flag to ON (step S1028) and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used to perform random delay processing. As explained in the first embodiment, the random delay processing is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after the lock effect before starting rotation, and is performed to prevent the player from being prone to "eye-pressing" as a result of the lock effect. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using FIG. 258.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game process shown in FIG. 253 is a process performed in step S1026 of FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the pseudo game processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "6" (step S1041).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes a normal pseudo-gaming process (step S1042). The normal pseudo-gaming process will be explained later using FIG. 254. After executing the process in step S1042, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes a post-reel effect pseudo-gaming process (step S1043). The post-reel production pseudo-gaming process will be explained later using FIG. 256. After executing the process in step S1043, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
Figure 254 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the normal pseudo-gaming process, the main CPU 101 first executes the processes from step S1061 to step S1068, but these processes are basically the same as the processes from step S111 to step S120 in FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). It is a similar process.

Here, in the normal pseudo-gaming processing shown in FIG. 254, processing corresponding to step S116 and step S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding pieces (see step S117) is not determined, and in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines the position where the symbol will finally stop, which is predetermined in advance, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). The position is determined and stored as the planned stop position. As a result, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in the manner shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIGS. do. In the pseudo game, predetermined symbols may be stopped and displayed in this way regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, or the reel stop control process (in the main game) shown in FIG. Similarly, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols will not line up. It turns out. In addition, when stopping each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, It may be greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or it may be smaller than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Further, in step S111 of FIG. 29, 80 revolutions/minute was given as an example of the speed (constant rotational speed) when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating at a constant speed. The constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be the same as the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 80 rotations/1 minute), or may be faster than the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 90 to 1 minute). 180 rotations/1 minute, or 120 to 160 rotations/1 minute), or slower than the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 10 to 60 rotations/1 minute, or 30 to 45 rotations/minute). 1 minute) It can also be a thing. In addition, in the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254, in the pseudo-game as well, as in the main game, wait until the rotational speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant rotational speed, and press each stop button 8L. , 8C, and 8R (see step S1062). However, in the pseudo game, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R may be activated before the rotational speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant rotational speed.

After executing the process of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether the controlled reel (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control for decelerating the rotation of the controlled reel has ended. The main CPU 101 determines that when the holding time of the excitation pattern for deceleration has expired (when the time required to stop the rotation of the controlled reel has elapsed), the control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended (control It is possible to recognize that the target reel has stopped).

If it is determined that the controlled reel is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the reel to be controlled (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to a rocking excitation pattern for rocking the controlled reel. As a result, the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the reel to be controlled is driven and controlled, and the reel to be controlled swings in a predetermined manner. Although the excitation pattern for rocking is not particularly limited, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so that excitation pattern I and excitation pattern II are repeated as described below.

Although not shown, four excitation phases (A phase, B phase, C phase, and D phase) are sequentially arranged clockwise in each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and 1-2 phase excitation. Eight excitation patterns (A phase-B phase, B phase, B phase-C phase, C phase, C phase-D phase, D phase, D phase-A phase, and A phase) are provided as patterns. There is. For example, an excitation pattern (for example, B phase-C phase) with an offset value of 2 from the reference excitation pattern as the excitation pattern I is held for a time T ₁ (for example, 3 interrupt times), and the above A configuration is adopted in which an excitation pattern (for example, A phase-B phase) in which the offset value from the reference excitation pattern is 0 is held as excitation pattern II for a time T ₂ (for example, 300 interrupt times). It is possible to do so. It is desirable that T ₂ be less than 500 ms, and it is also desirable that the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ be less than 500 ms. For example, T ₁ may be about 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms). , T ₂ can be set to a time of about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). Further, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for swinging is set to be larger than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for stopping. The current used by the stepping motor 51 may be approximately the same as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. For example, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on an excitation pattern for rocking is the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on an excitation pattern for acceleration or an excitation pattern for deceleration. It may be set to about 60% (for example, about 40 to 80%, or about 50 to 70%).

By driving and controlling the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be vertically swung (see FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIG. 248). (See (b) to (d)). The manner in which the reels 3 swing is not particularly limited as long as the reels 3 move to an extent that is recognizable to the player. However, since "oscillation" is a slight vibration and can also be called a "temporary stop," the width of the vibration is 1 symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol, or 1 symbol). It is desirable that the number of symbols does not exceed 1/8 symbol or 1/16 symbol. Note that "swinging" is a concept that includes not only the case where the reel 3 operates at a constant cycle but also the case where the reel 3 operates aperiodically. In addition, a period in which the reel 3 is almost completely stopped is also included in "oscillation," but the period must be less than 500ms (for example, 100 to 490ms, or 200 to 450ms). is desirable. That is, when the reel 3 performs some movement within a range of less than 500 ms, it can be called "swinging."

After executing the process of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are any active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1071). This process is the same as the process of step S121 in FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R by referring to the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R exist, the main CPU 101 moves the process to step S1063. On the other hand, if it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "5" or not. (Step S1072).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "5", it sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1073) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "5", it executes post-pseudo play reel effect processing (step S1074). The post-pseudo play reel effect processing will be explained later with reference to FIG. 255. After executing the processing of step S1074, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Reel effect processing after pseudo game>
Figure 255 is a flowchart showing the post-pseudo game reel presentation processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The post-pseudo-game reel presentation process shown in FIG. 255 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1074 of FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-game processing).

In the pseudo-game reel production process, first, the main CPU 101 executes a re-acceleration process (step S1081). This process is similar to the process of step S1024 in FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process). In the process of step S1024, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but in the process of step S1081, the main CPU 3031 requests only the start of rotation of the left reel 3L. Other points are as described in step S1024. By executing the process in step S1081, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 248(e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is the same as the process in step S1069 in FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-play process). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 3L began to spin again.

If it is determined that the left reel 3L is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is similar to the process in step S1070 in FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-gaming process). As a result, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 248(f)).

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084) and ends this subroutine.

<Processing during pseudo gameplay after reel performance>
Figure 256 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play after reel presentation carried out in the main control circuit.

The post-reel performance pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256 is a process performed in step S1043 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100. As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see step S1024 in FIG. 251) started. Sometimes, the pseudo game flag is set on. As a result, the determination result in step S1025 in FIG. 251 becomes "YES", and the post-reel production pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256 is started.

In the pseudo-game processing after the reel performance, first, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing after the reel performance (step S1101). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates the pseudo-game start command data after the reel performance, and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data after the reel performance in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo-game start command data after the reel performance stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission processing (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the reel performance (ii) above has ended and the pseudo-game (iii) above has started (see FIG. 243), and can determine the timing of executing various performances. Specifically, in response to the reception of the pseudo-game start command data after the reel performance, the sub-control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the end of the reel performance and the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image with the message "hit the lever" (a "hit the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 judges whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the re-acceleration process (step S1103). This process is the same as the process of step S1081 in FIG. 255 (reel presentation process after pseudo play). This controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, and the left reel 3L starts to rotate (see FIG. 249 (e)). In this way, in the pseudo play process after reel presentation shown in FIG. 256, it is explained that the left reel 3L is re-spinned on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated after the reel presentation ends. However, the left reel 3L may be rotated again automatically after the reel performance ends (when a predetermined time has passed since all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning during the reel performance).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has reached a constant rotational speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be different from the constant rotation speed (80 rotations/1 minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in FIG. 254). If it is determined that the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant rotational speed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1104 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotational speed, the main CPU 101 allows the left reel 3L to stop (step S1105). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21). This enables the left stop button 8L. Note that, as described above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotational speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant rotational speed (see step S1062 in FIG. 254).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes steps S1106 to S1111, which are basically the same processes as steps S1063 to S1070 in FIG. 254. In the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled, but during the pseudo-gaming after reel performance shown in FIG. In the process, the left reel 3L is the reel to be controlled. By executing the process of step S1111, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 249(f)). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112), and ends this subroutine.

<Reel spin start process>
Figure 257 is a flowchart showing the reel spin start processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The reel spin start process shown in Figure 257 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S10 of Figure 23 (main process).

In the reel spin start process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the random delay flag (see step S1028 in FIG. 251) is set to on (step S1121).

When it is determined that the random delay flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the random delay flag was set to ON (since the lock effect ended) (step S1122). When it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1122 again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the random delay process (step S1123). As described above, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect and then starting the rotation. Details of the random delay process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After executing the process of step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to OFF (step S1124) and ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes normal acceleration processing (step S1125). This processing is the same as that described in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main processing). In the processing of step S1125, unlike the random delay processing, the main CPU 101 simultaneously requests the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the start of rotation and acceleration of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are performed simultaneously, and the constant speed is reached simultaneously. After executing the processing of step S1125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In the reel spin start process shown in FIG. 257, it is described that when the lock effect ends, the random delay process is automatically executed without requiring any operation by the player. However, the random delay process may be executed on the condition that the player performs an operation (for example, operation of the start lever 7) after the lock effect ends. In this case, for example, when the result of the determination in step S1122 is "YES", the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210. Thereafter, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure the random delay process (processing in step S1123) to start at the timing when the start lever 7 is operated. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the random delay process may be started at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed.

<Random delay processing>
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay process shown in Figure 258 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1123 of Figure 257 (reel spin start process).

In the random delay process, the main CPU 101 first obtains a left reel random number, a middle reel random number, and a right reel random number (step S1141). The left reel random number, the middle reel random number, and the right reel random number are random numbers for randomly determining the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the process of step S1141, the main CPU 101 obtains a number from 0 to 20 as a random number for the left reel, a number from 0 to 20 as a random number for the middle reel, and obtains a number from 0 to 20 as a random number for the middle reel. A numerical value from 0 to 20 is obtained as a random numerical value.

Next, the main CPU 101 inputs values corresponding to the left reel random value, the middle reel random value, and the right reel random value to the left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer, respectively. An acceleration timer is set (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel acceleration timer to a value obtained by multiplying the left reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32), and multiplies the middle reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32). The value obtained by multiplying the right reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32) is set in the middle reel acceleration timer. For example, if the random number for the left reel is 5, set the left reel acceleration timer to "160", and if the middle reel random number is 10, set the left reel acceleration timer to "320", If the right reel random number is 15, the right reel acceleration timer is set to "480". The left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer each decrease by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has been accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag (see step S1146) is set on. If it is determined that the left reel 3L has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). When determining that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes left reel acceleration processing (step S1145). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1146).

If it is determined in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1146, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether 3C has been accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated when the middle reel accelerated flag (see step S1150) is set on. If it is determined that the middle reel 3C has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the middle reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). When determining that the middle reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes middle reel acceleration processing (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the middle reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the middle reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1150).

If it is determined in step S1147 that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1148 that the middle reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1150, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether 3R has been accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has been accelerated when the right reel accelerated flag (see step S1154) is set on. If it is determined that the right reel 3R has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). When determining that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes right reel acceleration processing (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the right reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1154).

If it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1154, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 recognizes that all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag, middle reel accelerated flag, and right reel accelerated flag are all set to on. can do. If it is determined that at least one reel 3 has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1143. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is randomly determined, and in this respect, the random delay processing (acceleration processing of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R when a lock effect is performed) is normally This is different from the time acceleration process (acceleration process of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when no lock effect is performed). However, the behavior of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after rotation (the time from the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R until it reaches a constant speed) is different when a lock effect is performed and when a lock effect is performed. The situation is the same as if it had not been carried out.

<Reel control state in pseudo game>
259 to 261 are diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played.

259 and 260 show the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 243) is performed. FIG. 261 shows the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" (see FIG. 243) is performed. In the figure, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is an acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state, and "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state. Indicates that the reel control state is a deceleration control state, "stop" indicates that the reel control state is a stop control state, and "oscillation" indicates that the reel control state is a swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for acceleration, the constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for constant speed, and the deceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for constant speed. The state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration, the stop control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stop, and the swing control state is This is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in a reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 recognizes the current reel control state by referring to the reel control state flag storage area, and in the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), performs the current reel control state based on the excitation pattern according to the reel control state. Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled so that the excitation phase is excited.

In the example shown in FIG. 259, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is changed. becomes a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted by the stop operation becomes a deceleration control state, and the first stop reel When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the second stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (third stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the third stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. Then, after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the swing control state, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R accelerates at random timing. After that, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and when a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that is the target of the stop operation (first stopped reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the first stopped reel stops, the reel control state of the first stopped reel becomes a swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that is the target of the stop operation (second stopped reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the second stopped reel stops, the reel control state of the second stopped reel becomes a swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that is the target of the stop operation (third stopped reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel becomes a swing control state. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel control states for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R became a swing control state, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a stop control state. After that, when a random delay process is performed, at random timing, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and then the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state.

As described above, when the random delay process is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 259, the swing control state is directly transferred to the acceleration control state, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 260, the swing control state The system is configured to temporarily shift from the stop control state to the stop control state, and then to shift from the stop control state to the acceleration control state. In this embodiment, the stop control state may or may not be interposed between the swing control state and the acceleration control state. When interposing a stop control state, the timing of transition from the swing control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES", the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be shifted from the swing control state to the stop control state. Also, when transitioning from the pseudo game to the main game (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES"), the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be shifted from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swinging of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R ends simultaneously at the timing of transitioning to the stop control state. The timing may be before the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or may be after the random delay process is started. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the swinging may be ended at different timings for each reel 3 (in the order in which the stop operation was performed). For example, for each reel 3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reel control state shifted to the swing control state (after rotation stopped), the swing control state may be shifted to the stop control state. Good too.

In the example shown in FIG. 261, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state. After that, after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for the first stopped reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the second stopped reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). After that, the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) goes through an acceleration control state and then to a constant speed control state. Then, when the stop button 8 (e.g., the left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stopped reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 that is the target of the stop operation (the third stopped reel) goes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel goes to a swing control state. After that, when a random delay process is performed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R goes to an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R goes to a constant speed control state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 261, the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, and the reel control state of these reels is not set to the swing control state after the reels are stopped. In this manner, in this embodiment, when one reel 3 stops without the player's stop operation, it is possible to configure the reel 3 not to swing. For example, when the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, and the rotation of the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, the reels 3 are not swung when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) are stopped, while the reel 3 is swung when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped. In this case, as shown in the example of FIG. 261, the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be automatically stopped once and then stopped again in response to a stop operation performed after re-spinning, or the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be stopped in response to a stop operation (from the beginning without re-spinning) without automatically stopping the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L). Similarly, after the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is automatically stopped, if the rotation of the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) is stopped in response to a stop operation by the player, the reel 3 may not be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is stopped, while these reels 3 may be swung when the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) are stopped. In the above, it has been explained that the reel 3 that is to be stopped first is stopped automatically, and the reel 3 that is to be stopped later is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, but conversely, it is also possible for the reel 3 that is to be stopped first to be stopped in response to the player's stop operation, and for the reel 3 that is to be stopped later to be stopped automatically.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if one reel 3 is stopped without a stop operation by the player, it is also possible to configure the reel 3 to swing. For example, when the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is automatically stopped in the manner shown in FIG. , right reel 3R) is stopped, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) is oscillated, and when the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is stopped, the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is oscillated. The third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) may be made to swing when the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) stops.

In Figures 259 to 261, the player operates one stop button 8, and after the stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an on state to an off state, i.e., becomes an off edge), the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 becomes a swing control state. In this embodiment, the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be started when the stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (becomes an off edge), or the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be started when the stop button 8 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an off state to an on state, i.e., becomes an on edge). For example, the sequence may be configured as follows: when the first stop operation is on-edge (first stop reel does not swing) → when the first stop operation is off-edge (first stop reel starts swinging) → when the second stop operation is on-edge (second stop reel does not swing) → when the second stop operation is off-edge (second stop reel starts swinging) → when the third stop operation is on-edge (third stop reel does not swing) → when the third stop operation is off-edge (third stop reel starts swinging).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation (see Figures 259 and 260), these reels 3 may not be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) are stopped, and all reels 3 may be swung when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped. For example, when the off edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is detected, all reels 3 may be swung. Alternatively, at this time, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) may not be swung, and only the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) may be swung. For example, the sequence may be configured as follows: on edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → off edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → on edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → off edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → on edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → off edge of the third stop operation (all reels start swinging).

Above, we have explained the pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for presentation (see JP 2010-214050 A). The sub-reel is formed larger than the main reel, and is arranged in a conspicuous position, and the symbols that are easily distinguishable for the player are arranged in an easily distinguishable arrangement. This makes the sub-reel look as if it were the central reel to the player.

In gaming machines equipped with such sub reels, when a player performs a stopping operation, a reel effect may be executed in which the sub reel is rotated and then stopped in a manner that would be difficult to execute with the main reel (for example, reverse rotation or frame-by-frame advancement, etc.).

On the other hand, even in gaming machines that only have main reels, it is desirable to execute effects using such reels (effects in which the reels stop when the player performs a stop operation, but gaming media (medals, etc.) are not awarded according to the display state of the stopped reels). However, when such effects (pseudo games) are executed on the main reels, there is a risk that the player will mistake them for main games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from mistaking a pseudo game being played on the main reel for a main game.

In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features:

(C-1) A plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that are decorated with a plurality of symbols and can be rotated,
A stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
Reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S203 in FIG. 32, etc.) for controlling the reels,
The reel control means is capable of executing post-stop-operation stop control to stop the rotating reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop-operation detection means,
A main game that can provide game media (medals) or game media data according to the pattern patterns of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and When the reels are stopped, it is possible to execute a pseudo game in which no game media or game media data is provided according to the pattern of the plurality of reels,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254, the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255, the process of step S1111 in FIG. 256, etc.) controls the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to perform post-stop motion control (swing control) to operate the game, and execute the post-stop motion control when a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the pseudo game. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to execute a main game in which game media (medals) or game media (medal) data corresponding to the pattern of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are provided when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and a pseudo game in which game media (medals) or game media (medal) data corresponding to the pattern of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are not provided when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. Then, it is possible to execute a post-stop operation control (swing control) that operates the reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and it is configured to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) when a predetermined condition (the total time of _T1 and _T2 has elapsed) is satisfied in the pseudo game. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo game through the post-stop operation control (swing control), and it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game for the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, the pseudo game has been described as being able to be executed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) to the 1G continuous lottery (AT additional lottery) is won. The conditions for generating a pseudo game are not limited to winning the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) or the 1G continuous lottery (AT additional lottery), but also provide the player with benefits (for example, benefits that are advantageous to the player). When it is decided to grant a gaming state (a right that allows the occurrence of an advantageous state), it is possible to cause a pseudo game to occur as appropriate. For example, a pseudo game may be generated when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or a pseudo game may be generated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As the specific winning combination, for example, a winning combination that is sure to transition to an advantageous state or a winning combination (rare winning combination) that can be won with a high probability of transitioning to an advantageous state can be adopted. As the specific symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination that will ensure a transition to an advantageous state or a symbol combination that can lead to a winning transition to an advantageous state with a high probability can be adopted. As the advantageous state, it is possible to appropriately adopt the gaming state as described in the first embodiment, and in addition to the pseudo-bonus (AT state), for example, a bonus state can be mentioned. Furthermore, when it is determined that the advantageous section is adopted as an advantageous state and the non-advantageous section is to be transferred to the advantageous section (if the advantageous section transition lottery is won), a pseudo game may be executed.

In addition, if it is decided to grant the above rights in one unit game (the period from the start to the end of one main process (see Figure 23)) (for example, if you win the AT lottery) The pseudo game may be executed in the unit game (winning game), or may be executed in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the unit game (winning game). For example, if it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the result of an internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 7, the pseudo game may be executed immediately after the decision, or the pseudo game may be executed immediately after the decision is made. A pseudo game may be executed using the operation of the start lever 7 in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the winning unit game (winning game). In addition, when it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed, the start lever 7 operation in the next unit game after the unit game (winning game) in which the decision was made is made. A pseudo game may be executed as a trigger, or a pseudo game may be executed using the start lever 7 operation in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) after the unit game (winning game) in which the decision was made. It may also be done. In these cases, the pseudo game may be executed even if the start lever 7 is not operated. If a pseudo game is not executed in a winning game, but a pseudo game is executed in a unit game after the winning game, a precursor performance that suggests a transition to an advantageous state is performed between the winning game and the execution of the pseudo game. (For example, the AT precursor effect described in the first embodiment) may be executed. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the stop display of a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols), if the pseudo game is immediately performed, It is possible to have variations in the start timing of a pseudo game, such as when a pseudo game is performed after one game, when a pseudo game is performed after two games, when a pseudo game is performed after three games, etc. It is possible to create a feeling of anticipation in the players as to when the game will take place.

In the eighth embodiment, the pseudo game is executed when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed). The timing of executing the pseudo game is not particularly limited, and may be when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed), when the first stop operation is performed (before the second stop operation is performed), when the second stop operation is performed (before the third stop operation is performed), or when the third stop operation is performed (before the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game). In addition, the pseudo game may be transitioned to on the condition that the stop button 8 is operated before the rotation speed of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotation speed after the start lever 7 is operated. That is, if the stop button 8 is operated before the rotation speed of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotation speed, the operation of the stop button 8 may be treated as the first stop operation for the pseudo game, whereas if the stop button 8 is operated after the rotation speed of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotation speed, the operation of the stop button 8 may be treated as the first stop operation for the main game.

In addition, although it has been explained above that a pseudo game is generated when it is decided to grant a right that allows the occurrence of an advantageous state, a lottery (pseudo game) is also used to determine whether or not to generate a pseudo game. A game generation lottery) may be performed, and if the pseudo game generation lottery is won, a pseudo game may be generated and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In this case, for example, instead of the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery), a pseudo game generation lottery may be performed. For example, it is possible to configure so that the result of the pseudo game occurrence lottery (win or non-win) is determined based on the above-mentioned advantageous section winning time sub-flag or advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed when a predetermined condition (the total time of _T1 and _T2 ) is satisfied in the pseudo game. The post-stop operation control (swing control) can be the excitation control based on the above-mentioned excitation pattern I. The post-stop operation control (swing control) is not particularly limited as long as it is a control that causes the reel 3 to perform some operation within a range of less than 500 ms, and any condition can be appropriately adopted as the predetermined condition. That is, whenever the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging, it is desirable to switch to another excitation pattern before the holding time of one excitation pattern reaches 500 ms (the holding time of one excitation pattern is less than 500 ms). The switching of the excitation pattern (change in phase signal) is a control for physically changing the speed of the reel. Even if the excitation pattern is switched, if the switching is not used to physically change the speed of the reel, or if it is recognized that the physical speed change of the reel caused by the switching is artificially hindered, it is preferable to treat the switching as not being performed. Note that when the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging, the reel 3 moves slightly, and in this specification, the state of the reel 3 at this time may be expressed as "temporarily stopped" or "stopped".

When a game is played using physical medals in the pachislot machine 1, the main game is a game in which game media (medals) corresponding to the pattern state of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation, and the pseudo game is a game in which game media (medals) corresponding to the pattern state of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are not awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation. On the other hand, when the pachislot machine 1 is a medal-less game machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is a game in which game media (medals) data corresponding to the pattern state of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation, and the pseudo game is a game in which game media (medals) data corresponding to the pattern state of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are not awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation. Game medium (medal) data is data equivalent to the game value held by the player, and as explained in the first embodiment, is managed electromagnetically (or in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing the game value).

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means is capable of not executing the post-stop motion control in the spinning reel performance, while executing the post-stop motion control in the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel performance in which the reels are stopped without stop control after a stop operation (even if the stop operation by the player is not detected), and the reel performance is configured not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control). In a reel performance, the reels are stopped without the player performing a stop operation, so the possibility that the player will mistake the reel performance for the main game is relatively low. By not executing post-stop operation control (swing control) in such a reel performance, it is possible to highlight the post-stop operation control (swing control) in the pseudo game, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, the reel performance (reel performance) is described as a performance in which the reel is stopped without the player performing a stop operation. In the reel performance (reel performance), a trigger other than the player's stop operation can be appropriately adopted as a trigger for stopping the reel. For example, the reel may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started to rotate, or the reel may be stopped when an operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7 or the bet button) other than the operation unit (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for the stop operation in the main game is operated. A performance in which the reel is stopped in this manner (without the stop button 8) can be called a reel performance (reel performance). In the reel performance (reel performance), it is preferable not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control), but post-stop operation control (swing control) may be executed.

(C-3) The gaming machine according to (C-1) or (C-2),
The reel control means is capable of executing, as the post-stop operation control, a swing control for swinging the reel stopped by the post-stop operation stop control at a predetermined period.
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is configured to be capable of executing post-stop operation control (swing control) that causes the reels stopped by the post-stop operation stop control to swing at a predetermined cycle. Through such swing control, it is possible to realize a novel presentation that draws the player's attention to the swing cycle, and it is also possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

The period of the oscillation is not particularly limited, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which oscillation control is performed such that a predetermined oscillation pattern is repeated, with the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ described above as one period. It is possible. However, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not limited to control in which the reels are operated periodically, but may be control in which the reels are operated non-periodically. For example, when a first period of time has elapsed since the first post-stop motion control (oscillation control) was performed, the second post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is performed, and the second post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is performed. When the third post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is performed when the second time has elapsed after the (oscillation control) was performed, the first time and the second time are different. Good too. For example, excitation pattern I is held for a time T ₁ (e.g., 3 interrupt times), excitation pattern II is held for a time T ₂ (e.g., 300 interrupt times), and then excitation pattern I ( Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the excitation pattern III (different from the excitation pattern I and the excitation pattern II) is held for the time T ₃ (for example, 5 interrupt times). After time T ₃ (e.g., 5 interrupt times) has elapsed, excitation pattern II may be held for time T ₂ (e.g., 300 interrupt times), or excitation pattern II (or excitation pattern I, excitation pattern II, and excitation pattern IV which is different from excitation pattern III) may be maintained for a time T ₄ (for example, 200 interrupt times).

(C-4) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-3) above,
By executing the post-stop operation control, the reel control means can repeatedly cause a state in which the reel that has been stopped by the post-stop operation stop control to operate and a state in which the operation is interrupted. ,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, by executing the post-stop operation control (swing control), the state in which the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation operates and the state in which the operation is interrupted can be changed. It is configured so that it can be generated repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from mistaking a pseudo game as the main game through the operation of the reels, and by providing a period during which the operation is interrupted, the reels can be stopped (temporary stop). It is possible to make the player clearly aware of the fact that the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped), and to avoid confusion for the player because he or she does not know whether the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped) or not.

The state in which the reel operation is interrupted can be caused by holding one excitation pattern for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period can be, for example, about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). However, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not limited to causing a state in which the reel operation is interrupted, and may be a control that allows the reel operation (for example, micro-vibration) to continue.

(C-5) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-4) above,
The reel control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 258, etc.)
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo game, one of the plurality of reels is started to rotate for the main game, and further, the rotation start timing of the one reel is It is possible to start the rotation of the other reels at a late timing,
After the rotation of the one reel is started, it is possible to continue the post-stop operation control for the other reel until the rotation of the other reel is started.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped for the main game. It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and to start the rotation of the other reel at a later timing than the rotation start timing of the one reel. After the rotation of the one reel is started, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for the other reel can be continued until the rotation of the other reel is started. ing. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a pseudo game has been played even after the rotation of the one reel has started, and prevents the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game. It can be effectively prevented.

However, as explained in the eighth embodiment, after the rotation of one reel is started until the rotation of the other reel is started, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) for the other reel is not performed. You can also choose not to do it. For example, among multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R), at the timing when one reel starts rotating due to random delay processing (when the first reel starts rotating), all The post-stop operation control (oscillation control) for the reel may be terminated. In the random delay process, the order in which the rotation of each reel starts is not particularly limited, and may be determined randomly or in a predetermined order (for example, left reel 3L → middle reel 3C → right reel The rotation may be started at 3R). When starting the rotation of each reel in a predetermined order, for example, first set the left reel acceleration timer, and when the left reel acceleration timer reaches 0, start the rotation of the left reel 3L. , then set the middle reel acceleration timer, and when the middle reel acceleration timer reaches 0, start the rotation of the middle reel 3C, then set the right reel acceleration timer, and start the rotation of the middle reel 3C when the middle reel acceleration timer reaches 0. The rotation of the right reel 3R may be started when the number reaches 0.

(C-6) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-5) above,
The reel control means includes:
One of the reels among the plurality of reels can be stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, while the other reel among the plurality of reels can be stopped using the stop control after the stop operation. and
While not executing the post-stop operation control for the one reel, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control for the other reels;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to stop one of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) without using the stop control after the stop operation, while stopping the other reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) by the stop control after the stop operation. Then, it is configured so that the one reel is not subjected to the stop operation control (swing control), while the other reels are subjected to the stop operation control (swing control). When the reel is stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, since the stop operation is not performed when the reel is stopped, the possibility that the player will mistake the stop of the reel for the main game is relatively low. In such a case, by not performing the stop operation control (swing control), it is possible to highlight the stop operation control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

The timing at which the one reel is stopped and the timing at which the other reel is stopped may occur at any time. That is, after one reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, the other reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped. The reel may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, or one reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and then the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) may be stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation. Further, the number of reels that are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation and the number of reels that are stopped not by the stop control after the stop operation are not particularly limited. For example, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 1, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 2, or the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 2. The number of reels may be set to 2, and the number of reels that are stopped without the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 1.

For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (e.g., middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped, the third stop reel (e.g., , right reel 3R), when the first stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) and second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung; When the third stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) stops, the reel 3 may be oscillated. Further, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, the rotation of the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, right reel 3L) is stopped. 3R), when the first stop reel (e.g. left reel 3L) stops, the reel 3 is oscillated, while the second stop reel (e.g. middle reel 3C) and the second stop reel (e.g. middle reel 3C) are rotated. When the three stop reels (for example, the right reel 3R) are stopped, these reels 3 may not be oscillated.

When the reels are stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger other than the player's stop operation as the trigger for stopping the reels. For example, the reels may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reels started rotating, or the operation parts (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for stopping operations in the main game may be used. ) The reels may be stopped when an operation unit other than the start lever 7 (for example, the start lever 7 or the bet button) is operated. When stopping the reels in this manner (without using the stop button 8), it is preferable not to perform post-stop motion control (swing control), but it is preferable to perform post-stop motion control (swing control). You can also do it.

(C-7) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-6) above,
Pseudo game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 250) capable of determining to execute the pseudo game;
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous period) (value of advantageous period game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous period payout number counter, a predetermined period ending means capable of ending the predetermined period when the value of the payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (operating condition of the limiter);
The pseudo game determining means is capable of determining to execute the pseudo game in the predetermined period, and also determines that the predetermined variable is to be executed during a specific period (quasi-limit processing (game count)) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) or the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, predetermined variables (the value of the advantageous period game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, etc.) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous period) It is possible to end a predetermined period (advantageous section) when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter) satisfy a specific condition (limiter operating condition). While it is possible to decide to execute a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), it is also possible to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), and also to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period). , the value of the control payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (a period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), a pseudo game is executed. It is configured so that it does not decide to do so. When a pseudo-gaming is executed, it is thought that it will create a sense of expectation in the player, but during a specific period (the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated). By not executing the pseudo-game, it is possible to suppress the feeling of anticipation from being excessively aroused.

The specific period is not limited to the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, but the pseudo-gaming can be executed in any period before the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section). It is possible to configure the system so that it does not decide to do so. Examples of the specific period include a period in which the value of the advantageous section game number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 1200), a period in which the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 1920), etc. It may also be possible to adopt As a result, if the remaining number of games until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) becomes less than the predetermined number, or if the number of remaining payouts until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) becomes less than the predetermined number. In this case, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from being executed. Alternatively, the pseudo game may not be executed when MY described in the first embodiment becomes a predetermined number or more. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to an advantageous section, but may be a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, when the predetermined period is an advantageous section, the advantageous section may be an effect section (advantageous section/normal game) or an increase section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus). Furthermore, any mode within the performance section (advantageous section/normal game) may be adopted as the predetermined period.

(C-8) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-7) above,
a predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) by the player;
a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (“hit the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation;
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, it is possible to start the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

The pachislot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is capable of displaying an image (a "hit the lever" image) to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation (operating the start lever 7), and is configured to be able to start a simulated game when the predetermined operation (operating the start lever 7) is detected. This allows the player to participate in a simulated game of their own volition, and can increase the player's interest in the simulated game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a pseudo game is performed after a reel performance is performed (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "6"), a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed after the reel performance ends. It has been explained that the game shifts to a pseudo-game (the rotation for the pseudo-game is started) when the game is turned on. In this way, the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) can be employed as an opportunity to shift from reel performance to pseudo game. However, the scene in which the game shifts to a pseudo game by a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is not limited to this example. For example, in the case where a pseudo game is played again after a pseudo game has been performed (the pseudo game is repeated multiple times), the next pseudo game is triggered by a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation). It is also possible to migrate.

An example of a case where a pseudo game is repeated multiple times is a case where a presentation is made regarding the extension (addition) of the AT state. For example, in a situation where it has been decided that the AT state will be added by 200 games, a presentation can be adopted in which the first pseudo game displays an image indicating that the "red 7" symbols are lined up and the AT state is added by 100 games, the second pseudo game displays an image indicating that the "red 7" symbols are lined up and the AT state is added by another 100 games (a total of 200 games), and the third pseudo game displays an image indicating that the "red 7" symbols are not lined up and no further addition of the AT state has occurred (the number of added games has ended at 200 games). In this presentation, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game (for example, the "red 7" symbol is aligned), it is notified (suggested) that the AT state has been added a predetermined number of games (or a predetermined number of 1G consecutive stocks have been granted), and it is possible to move to the next pseudo game. On the other hand, when a specific symbol combination is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game (for example, the "red 7" symbol is not aligned), it is notified (suggested) that the AT state has not been added any more (or no more 1G consecutive stocks have been granted), and it is not possible to move to the next pseudo game (the presentation is ended). This makes it possible to notify (suggest) the number of added games (or the number of 1G consecutive stocks) that has been acquired little by little through the pseudo game. Note that, although it has been described above that the pseudo game is repeated multiple times, a reel presentation (reel presentation) may be performed instead of at least one of the multiple pseudo games.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the normal operation of the start lever 7 (see step S50 in FIG. 25) is A pseudo game is automatically started without requiring a separate predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) (by executing the acceleration process for lock effect (see step S1024 in FIG. 251), reels 3L, 3C, 3R (starts to rotate). However, as will be explained in the ninth embodiment, even in this case, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is adopted as a condition for starting the pseudo game, and A pseudo game may be started upon the execution of the above operation. It is also possible to employ such a scene as the scene in which the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) shifts to the pseudo game.

In addition, if the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) for transitioning to the pseudo game is not performed, the transition to the pseudo game may be triggered by the elapse of a predetermined waiting time, or the pseudo game may be shifted to the pseudo game in the first place. It is also possible to not allow the transition to play. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately employ the operation of any operation section (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.).

(C-9) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-8) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means includes:
A reel control means for a spinning drum performance that is capable of stopping the plurality of reels as the spinning drum performance without using stop control after the stop operation;
As the pseudo game, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the spinning reel control means, the at least one reel is controlled by the stop control after the stop operation. A pseudo game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 256) that can be stopped,
The post-stop operation control is not performed on the plurality of reels stopped by the spinning reel control means, while the at least one reel stopped by the pseudo game reel control means It is possible to perform the post-stop operation control;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to stop the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) as a reel performance (reel performance) without using the stop control after the stop operation (even if the stop operation by the player is not detected), and it is possible to stop at least one of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel performance (reel performance) by the stop control after the stop operation as a pseudo game after starting the rotation of the at least one reel. And, it is configured so that the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed for the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel performance (reel performance), while the post-stop operation control (swing control) can be executed for at least one reel stopped in the pseudo game. In the reel performance (reel performance), the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform the stop operation, so the possibility that the player will mistake the reel performance (reel performance) for the main game is relatively low. By not executing post-stop operation control (swing control) in such reel performances, it is possible to highlight the post-stop operation control (swing control) in pseudo play, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent players from mistaking the pseudo play for the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a pseudo game is performed after a reel performance (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "6"), in the pseudo game, multiple The explanation has been made assuming that among the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), one reel starts rotating, and then the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the pseudo game is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). In this specification, a "pseudo game" is not limited to a lock performance in which all reels can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation, but refers to a lock performance in which there is at least one reel that can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation. is widely referred to as a "pseudo game". In the pseudo game, the number of rotating reels and the number of reels that can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be the same or different. For example, a lock effect in which only one reel rotates and that one reel can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be called a pseudo game, and all reels rotate and at least one reel A lock performance that can be stopped by a stop control after a stop operation can also be called a pseudo game. In addition, in the pseudo game, the rotation of the reels may be less than one rotation (one round), or may be rotation of several symbols (for example, frame feeding). In this way, when a pseudo game is performed after a spinning drum performance (reel performance), it is desirable not to perform post-stop operation control (swing control) in the spinning drum performance (reel performance). Post-stop operation control (swing control) may also be executed. In addition, when a pseudo game is performed after a spinning drum performance is performed, the spinning drum performance may include a reel performance or may not include a reel performance (mere freeze). .

(C-10) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-9) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means includes:
As the pseudo game, a pseudo game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 254) capable of stopping the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation;
As the reel performance, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo game reel control means, the at least one reel is controlled to stop after the stop operation. A reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process in FIG. 255) for the reel performance that can be stopped without depending on the reel,
The post-stop operation control is executed on the plurality of reels that have been stopped by the pseudo game reel control means, and the at least one reel that has been stopped by the spinning reel control means is also stopped. It is possible to perform post-motion control,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, as a pseudo game, it is possible to stop multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) by stop control after a stop operation, and as a reel performance (reel performance), after starting the rotation of at least one of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the pseudo game, it is possible to stop the at least one reel without stop control after a stop operation (even without detection of a stop operation by the player). Then, it is configured so that it is possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) on the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the pseudo game, and to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) on at least one reel stopped in the reel performance (reel performance). In a reel performance, the reels stop without the player performing a stop operation, so it is considered that the possibility of the player mistaking the reel performance for the main game is relatively low. However, if the reel performance is performed following a pseudo game, it can be said that there is a possibility that the player will mistake the reel performance for the main game as being integrated with the pseudo game. By executing post-stop operation control (swing control) in such a reel performance, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the reel performance for the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a reel performance is performed after a pseudo game is performed (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "5"), in a spinning performance (reel performance), multiple The explanation has been made assuming that after the rotation of one reel among the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is started, the one reel is stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the spinning drum production (reel production) is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). Good too. In this specification, a "reel effect" is not limited to a lock effect in which all reels can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation, and at least one reel can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation. There are two types of rock performances that are widely referred to as ``reel performances.'' In the reel production, the number of rotating reels is the same as the number of reels that can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation. That is, a lock effect in which all rotating reels can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation can be called a reel effect. On the other hand, a lock effect in which at least one of the rotating reels can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be called a pseudo game. In addition, in the reel performance, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one round), or may be rotation for several symbols (for example, frame feeding). In this way, when a spinning drum performance (reel performance) is performed after a pseudo game is performed, it is desirable to perform post-stop operation control (swing control) in the spinning drum performance (reel performance). The post-stop operation control (oscillation control) may not be executed.

(C-11) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-10) above,
An image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100 ), a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying
The specific symbol combination is such that the symbol on one of the plurality of reels is a specific symbol (a “red 7” symbol);
The reel control means executes the post-stop operation control so that the specific symbol can be displayed on the one reel when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to display an image ("Aim for 7" presentation image 1100) for urging the player to perform a stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (a "red 7" pattern) can be stopped and displayed as the symbol pattern on the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and the specific symbol combination (a "red 7" pattern) is a specific symbol (a "red 7" pattern) on one of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Then, in a simulated game, when the one reel is stopped by stop control after a stop operation, it is configured to be possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) so that the specific symbol (a "red 7" pattern) can be displayed on the one reel. This prevents the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game through post-stop operation control (swing control), while allowing the player to see the specific symbol (the "red 7" symbol) (the symbol that constitutes the specific symbol combination (the "red 7" symbol line-up)), and creates a sense of anticipation in the player through the specific symbol (the "red 7" symbol).

As described in the eighth embodiment, by executing the post-stop operation control (oscillation control), one reel can be oscillated (vibrated) or stopped almost completely. As a result, when the reel is located at the center of vibration or when the reel is almost completely stopped, the reel can move the symbol at a predetermined position (on the effective line) by the stop control after the stop operation. The same symbol (for example, "Red 7" symbol) as the symbol (for example, see FIG. 246(d)) that exists at a predetermined position (on the active line) when stopped (for example, see step S1069 in FIG. 254) is used. Is possible. During the period when the post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is being executed, the time when the symbol (for example, the "Red 7" symbol) is in a predetermined position (on the active line), other symbols are in the predetermined position (on the active line). (on the line) compared to the time it exists on the line. In the eighth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there is only one effective line, the "center line." It should be noted that as the specific symbol combination, it is possible to adopt any symbol combination as appropriate, and in addition to the "Red 7" symbol arrangement, for example, the "BAR" symbol arrangement described in the ninth embodiment may also be used. good. Further, the specific symbol combination is not limited to a combination of the same symbols, and may include different symbols. Furthermore, as the specific symbol, any symbol such as the "BAR" symbol in addition to the "Red 7" symbol may be appropriately employed.

As described in the first embodiment, the AT state may be, for example, a pseudo BB (big bonus) or a pseudo RB (regular bonus). When a decision is made to transition to the pseudo BB, a first symbol combination (e.g., a "red 7" symbol line-up) may be displayed as a static display in the pseudo game, and when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo RB, a second symbol combination (e.g., a "BAR" symbol line-up) may be displayed as a static display in the pseudo game. In this case, when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo BB, the above-mentioned "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may be displayed, and when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo RB, the "Aim for BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment may be displayed.

Furthermore, when a set of "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, a pseudo BB effect is performed, and when a set of "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, a pseudo RB effect is performed. You can. In the pseudo BB performance, a pseudo BB suggestion image (an image that suggests that it has been decided to shift to pseudo BB) is displayed on the main display device 210, and in the pseudo RB production, a pseudo RB suggestion image (an image that suggests that it has been decided to shift to pseudo RB) is displayed on the main display device 210. An image suggesting that the decision has been made is displayed on the main display device 210. By transmitting information (stop position information) indicating symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo game from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 can perform a pseudo BB performance and a pseudo RB performance. I can do it.

As described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, similar to the main game, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be controlled to stop based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. In this case, for example, even if a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbol will not be aligned. If the "red 7" symbol is not displayed on at least one reel due to the timing of the stop operation being inappropriate, the "red 7" symbol may be displayed on that reel by performing a reel effect (reel effect) thereafter, so that the "red 7" symbol is displayed on multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R).

In addition, the stop control after a stop operation in a pseudo game when the "red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed may be the same as the stop control after a stop operation in a main game, or may be a different stop control after a stop operation from the stop control after a stop operation in a main game. For example, a red 7 role (e.g., red 7 replay) may be provided as an internal winning role, and the symbol combination corresponding to the red 7 role may be "red 7-red 7-red 7." Then, when the red 7 role is determined as the internal winning role, in the main game, a stop control after a stop operation is performed so that the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, while in the main game, when the red 7 role is not determined as the internal winning role, a stop control after a stop operation can be performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. The same stop control after a stop operation as that in the main game may also be performed in the pseudo game. As a result, for example, in an effect ("Aim for Red 7" effect) in which an image ("Aim for 7" effect image 1100) is displayed to prompt the player to perform a stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "Red 7" symbols) can be displayed, when the player performs a stop operation aiming for the "Red 7" symbol in the order of right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L, stop control may be performed after the stop operation so that the "Red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, the "Replay" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "Replay" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L.

As described in the eighth embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game (for example, "4"). For example, in the pseudo game, 20-frame control may be performed (the reel is rotated for a maximum of 20 symbols after the stop operation is performed and then stopped). In this case, the symbol displayed when the "red 7" symbol is not displayed in the pseudo game may be the same symbol as the symbol displayed when a minor role is missed in the main game. For example, as described in the first embodiment, a specific role (for example, watermelon) may be determined as the internal winning role, and the number of medals awarded for the specific role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the stop operation timing, the push order, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), 8 medals are paid out, and if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect), 1 medal or no medal is paid out). When the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct) in the main game, the "watermelon" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "watermelon" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelon" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, while if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect) (the watermelon is missed), the "watermelon" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "watermelon" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "replay" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. If the "red 7" symbol is not displayed in the pseudo game, the same symbol combination as the symbol combination (missed minor symbol) that is displayed in the main game when the minor symbol is missed may be displayed. There are no particular limitations on the number of symbols that can be displayed when a small win is missed, and it is possible to use any combination of symbols that stop and are displayed when a small win is missed, such as a watermelon or a bell.

As described above, in the present invention, a lottery (pseudo game occurrence lottery) is held to determine whether or not a pseudo game will occur (continue), and if the pseudo game occurrence lottery is won, the pseudo game will occur (continue) and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. Furthermore, when a pseudo game is performed again after a pseudo game has been performed (pseudo game is repeated multiple times), a transition to the next pseudo game may be triggered by a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7). An example of a case in which a pseudo game is repeated multiple times is when a performance is performed to extend (add on) the AT state. These configurations can also be combined as follows.

For example, a predetermined operation (operation of start lever 7) triggers a transition to a pseudo game, and when a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in the pseudo game, the AT state is extended (added on) (an image showing the number of added games is displayed), and then an image (a "hit the lever" image) is displayed to encourage the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation of start lever 7), and the predetermined operation (operation of start lever 7) triggers a transition to the pseudo game. It is possible to configure the pseudo game to be performed repeatedly in this manner. Here, if a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, transition to the next pseudo game is possible (the AT state is extended (added on) as a result of that one pseudo game), whereas if a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "red 7" symbols) is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, that pseudo game ends (the AT state is not extended (added on) as a result of that one pseudo game). After one pseudo game is played, a lottery (pseudo game occurrence lottery) is played to determine whether or not a next pseudo game will be played (whether or not a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed), and if the pseudo game occurrence lottery is won, a specific symbol combination (a line-up of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, and transition to the next pseudo game is possible. As a result, as long as the pseudo game occurrence lottery (pseudo game continuation lottery) is won, the pseudo game will be repeated and the AT state will be extended (added on). As mentioned above, the play period of the AT state is managed by game number management, set number management, payout number management, difference in number management, navigation number management, etc., and correspondingly, when the AT state is extended (added on), the number of games, set number, payout number, difference in number management, or navigation number, etc. are added on.

The condition for extending (adding on) the AT state is not limited to a specific symbol combination (a "red 7" symbol line-up) being stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and it is possible to configure the pseudo game so that the AT state is extended (added on) when any condition is met. For example, the pseudo game is played five times as one set, and in each pseudo game, the correct push order is set as the order of the stop operation for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. As with the pseudo game progress stop button described in the ninth embodiment, the correct push order can be determined by lottery in each pseudo game. When one set of pseudo games is started, the player plays five pseudo games, aiming to perform the stop operation in the correct push order. During the five pseudo games, the AT state is extended (added on) each time the stop operation is performed in the correct push order (maximum five times). Then, after five pseudo games, the pseudo game ends and the game moves to the main game. Such a configuration can be adopted.

In addition, if the stop operation is performed at least once in the correct pressing order in the first set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games), the transition to the next set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games) will occur. is possible (as a result of the one set of pseudo games, the AT state is extended (added)), while it is possible to press the correct answer even once in one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games). If the stop operation is not performed, the game ends with the pseudo-game of the set (5 pseudo-games) (as a result of the pseudo-game of the first set, the AT state is not extended (additional). ). Alternatively, while the five pseudo games constituting one set are being played, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order in one of the five pseudo games, the next pseudo game It is possible to move on to the game (as a result of the first pseudo game, the AT state is extended (additional)), but if the stop operation is not performed in the correct pressing order in the first pseudo game, (Even if all 5 pseudo games have not been consumed, at that point) the game will end with the pseudo game in question (the AT state will not be extended (added) as a result of the 1 pseudo game). You may also do so. In addition, if the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct pressing order, basically the predetermined number of games will be added, but if the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct pressing order, If the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the number of games may be increased by more than the predetermined number of games. Further, the number of additional games may be configured to increase in stages as the number of consecutive pseudo games in which stop operations are performed in the correct pressing order (number of successive successes) increases.

When adopting a mode (push order guessing) in which the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct push order as described above, if you try to perform such push order guessing in the main game. Then, it is necessary to create new data for symbol combinations for correct pressing order, symbol combinations for incorrect pressing order, symbol combinations for incorrect pressing, etc., and reel arrangement for these symbol combinations. It is necessary to create new data for reel stop control, reel stop control, etc., and the amount of data increases. In this regard, when performing such push order guessing in a pseudo game, it is not limited to symbol combinations that correspond to internal winning combinations as in the main game, but it is possible to freely stop any symbol combination. Since this is possible, pressing order guessing can be realized without increasing the amount of data. In addition, it is possible to use the saved data capacity to add new gameplay features and increase interest.

The above-described extension (addition) of the AT state can be performed when pseudo play is performed in the AT state. Below, we will explain such an AT state by showing a specific example.

In this example, the states in which the player plays the game are roughly divided into an AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a normal game, which is a normal gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to the AT game. A transition from a normal game to an AT game occurs when the number of games played after the end of the AT game reaches the ceiling number of games (maximum number of ceiling games completed), when a guaranteed role is won (guaranteed role won), or when a specific situation occurs in the main CZ state. This is triggered by the decision of the reel action (CZ success).

The "determined combination" means a combination in which it is determined that an AT game will be started, and here it refers to "Cherry Rip," "Strong Cherry Rip," and "Strong Bell." When shifting from a normal game to an AT game due to winning a confirmed role, first, based on winning the confirmed role, the basic number of continuations of the AT game is given (150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management). . After that, a reel action (special reel action) is determined from among multiple types of reel actions according to the type of confirmed role, and the number of additional continuations of AT games is given according to the determined reel action (AT management difference). 300, 400 or 500 will be added to the number of sheets counter. Note that the reel action is the spinning drum performance (reel performance) described above.

In addition, in normal play, if a "Strong Chance Rep" (rare role) is determined as the internal winning role and either "Special Rep A1-6" or "Special Rep B" is won (Strong Chance Rep is established), the game state transitions from the "Normal Play State" to "Main CZ State 1" under the control of the main CPU 101, and the game state remains in the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the game state is "Main CZ State 1" or the "Main CZ State 2" to which it subsequently transitions, a specific reel action is determined, and when it is executed, the CZ is successful and the game transitions from normal play to AT play.

When transitioning to AT gaming, the player will be notified of the stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player until the value of the AT management differential number counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs has been exhausted), and the game will be stopped according to the notification. By performing operations, the player can increase the number of medals. Specifically, during AT, if the "press order minor combinations" of "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell", and "right middle left bell" are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop operation order that results in the payout of seven medals is notified.

Here, as a state during AT gaming, a pseudo-probability variable state is provided in which the number of ATs (the value of the AT management differential number counter) can be added. Specifically, in the AT game, when one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination and the transition lottery in the pseudo-probability variable state is won, a specific reel action is executed, and the pseudo-probability variation is controlled by the main CPU 101. transition to state. In this pseudo probability variable state, the number of pseudo games when the game start lock is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo games can be played. In addition, when determining the number of pseudo games, it is possible to determine a plurality of times of pseudo games.

The progress of the pseudo game is controlled by operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) that is locked at the start of the game (pseudo insert operation), operating the start lever (start lever 7) (pseudo start operation), determining the pseudo internal winning combination, and operating the stop button (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) (pseudo stop operation), giving the player the impression that the game is progressing in the same way as normal play (main game). Note that the pseudo internal winning combination is determined based on the pseudo start operation, just like the determination of the internal winning combination in normal play.

In the pseudo-variable state, the AT count (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is added based on the determined internal winning role, and the AT count (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is added based on the determined pseudo-internal winning role. The determination of the pseudo-internal winning role is not limited to the mode in which it is performed based on the pseudo start operation, and may be performed based on, for example, a pseudo insertion operation or a pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). Accordingly, the timing at which the AT count is added is not limited to the timing at which the pseudo start operation is performed, and may be the timing at which the pseudo insertion operation or the pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation) is performed. In addition, the AT count may be added at the timing at which all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (pseudo stopped) in the pseudo game (the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the pseudo-internal winning role is stopped and displayed). In this case, an additional lottery for the number of ATs may be performed based on the symbol combination (pseudo symbol combination) displayed by the pseudo stop. When an additional lottery is performed, the lottery result (the number of ATs) is added to the value of the difference number counter for managing the AT.

In addition, the pseudo-probable variable states include "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode) and "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode), in which a relatively larger number of pseudo games is determined than in "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode). Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning a high-probability transition lottery), there is a transition from "pseudo-probability variable state 1" (first mode) to "probability variable state 1" (second mode). The state then shifts to "pseudo-probable variable state 2" (second mode). In this "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of pseudo games is always determined to be two or more times, so the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination is determined. It is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of opportunities for the additional lottery, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery states that are advantageous to the player, such as pseudo-probability variable states.

In addition, the transition from "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode) to "pseudo probability variable state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times pseudo games are actually played (number of high guaranteed obstacle games). Therefore, it is possible to reliably enjoy the opportunity to increase the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode). Note that the transition to the pseudo-probability variable state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, an AT game or a lottery to transition to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and an AT game or lottery to transition to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. may be carried out.

As explained above, the pseudo-probability variable state is a state in which a plurality of pseudo games can be executed in one unit game. A plurality of pseudo games can be performed, for example, in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) in FIG. 23 (main process). Since the AT state is extended (added) based on the result of the pseudo game, the pseudo probability variable state plays the role of a special add-on zone in the AT state. Here, the "pseudo game result" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state may be a pseudo internal winning combination or a pseudo symbol combination, as described above.

When a pseudo-internal winning role is adopted as the "result of pseudo play" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following example can be given. In this example, it is possible to stay in the pseudo-high probability state not only during AT play but also during normal play. In addition, the pseudo play is performed four times as one set, and if the pseudo play continuation lottery (winning probability: 50%) is won, it is possible to move to the next set after one set is performed. There are three types of pseudo-high probability states: pseudo-high probability state A (mode A), pseudo-high probability state B (mode B), and pseudo-high probability state C (mode C). The probability of a specific role (rare role) being determined as the pseudo-internal winning role increases in the order of pseudo-high probability state A (1/4) → pseudo-high probability state B (1/2) → pseudo-high probability state C (1/1). When a specific role is determined as the pseudo-internal winning role, the AT state is extended (added). The pseudo internal winning role may be the same as a normal internal winning role, or an internal winning role dedicated to pseudo play may be provided. In addition, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a pseudo-probability variable state is promoted to a pseudo-probability variable state that is more advantageous than the pseudo-probability variable state. Such promotion of the pseudo-probability variable state may be one step (pseudo-probability variable state A → pseudo-probability variable state B, or pseudo-probability variable state B → pseudo-probability variable state C) or two steps (pseudo-probability variable state A → pseudo-probability variable state C) depending on the type of the specific symbol combination.

When adopting a pseudo symbol combination as a "result of a pseudo game" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, the pseudo game is played five times as one set. Then, if a specific symbol combination (all "Red 7" symbols) is displayed at least once as a pseudo symbol combination in one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games), the next set of pseudo games ( On the other hand, it is possible to transition to one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games) (as a result of the one set of pseudo games, the AT state is extended (additional)). ), if a specific symbol combination (the "red 7" symbol combination) is not displayed even once as a pseudo symbol combination, the pseudo game of the set (5 pseudo games) ends (the set of (As a result of the pseudo game, the AT state is not extended (additional)).

When the reel oscillates due to execution of post-stop operation control (oscillation control), the manner (pattern) of the oscillation may always be constant, or a plurality of oscillation patterns may be provided. You can also use it as The plurality of swing patterns are different reel movement patterns in a state where post-stop operation control (swing control) is being executed. For example, a plurality of rocking patterns having different periods and/or amplitudes of minute vibrations are provided, such as rocking pattern A, rocking pattern B, and rocking pattern C, and step S1070 in FIG. 254 to step S1070 in FIG. In the swing control in step S1083, it is possible to swing the reels in one swing pattern selected from these swing patterns. The timing of selecting a swing pattern is not particularly limited, and for example, one swing pattern may be selected by lottery every time swing control is performed. Alternatively, one swing pattern may be selected in the non-advantageous section, and the reels may be always oscillated in the one swing pattern during the advantageous section transitioned from the non-advantageous section. Then, when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, one swing pattern may be selected again. Alternatively, when rocking control is performed, one rocking pattern may be selected based on a predetermined variable (value), and the value may be updated in a non-advantageous section. For example, each swing pattern is associated with a predetermined numerical range (for example, swing pattern A: 1 to 100, swing pattern B: 101 to 200, swing pattern C: 201 to 300), A swing pattern corresponding to a value (any value from 1 to 300) updated by lottery during the non-advantageous period may be selected. Further, the variable may be the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. Thereby, as the number of unit games played in the advantageous section increases, the swing pattern can be changed such as swing pattern A→swing pattern B→swing pattern C. Information indicating the variable or the selected swing pattern can be stored in RWM (or RAM) for managing the operation of the reels in the pseudo game. The RWM does not affect the instruction function at all.

When a plurality of swing patterns are provided, the reels may be oscillated in a swing pattern depending on the type of benefit given to the player. For example, if the benefit is a transition to an advantageous section (for example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section), the reels are oscillated in swing pattern A, and the benefit is a transition to a pseudo bonus (AT state). If it is a transition (for example, if you win a pseudo-bonus transition lottery), the reels will swing in swing pattern B, and if the benefit is an extension of the pseudo-bonus (extension of the number of games or addition of the number of sets) ( For example, if a 1G lottery is won, the reels can be configured to swing in swing pattern C. Only the third stop reel is made to swing in a swing pattern that corresponds to the type of award, and the first stop reel and the second stop reel are made to swing in a swing pattern that is common to each type of award. It may also be a thing.

The pseudo game described above may be performed using a reel-like physical structure (sub-reel) provided separately from the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), or may be performed by displaying a reel-like image (video reel) on the main performance display unit 21 or a liquid crystal display device. The pseudo game performed in this manner can be adopted as a performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 200. However, it is desirable to clearly indicate the main reel controlled by the main control circuit 100 on the pachislot machine 1 so that the player does not mistake the performance for the main game. For example, it is possible to configure the device so that the word "reel" is always displayed on a panel or liquid crystal display device near the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display may be displayed only when a game is being played, and may not be displayed when a game is not being played (a demo screen is displayed) (waiting to play), an error has occurred, a setting change operation is being performed, etc.

In addition, if a power interruption occurs while a pseudo game is being played, the pseudo game may be resumed when the power is restored. Although not shown, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 is equipped with a power management circuit. The power management circuit manages fluctuations in the power supply voltage of 12 V DC supplied from the power supply board. The power management circuit outputs a reset signal to a microcomputer composed of the main CPU 101, main ROM 102, main RAM 103, etc. when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the start-up voltage value (10 V) from 0 V), and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the microcomputer when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12 V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5 V)). When a power interruption detection signal is output from the power management circuit, the main CPU 101 stores information corresponding to the pseudo game in progress flag (pseudo game in progress information) in a specified area of the main RAM 103 as backup data. The pseudo game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo game is being executed (see step S1025 in FIG. 251), and is set to ON when the pseudo game starts, and is set to OFF when the pseudo game ends (for example, when the lock effect end flag (see step S1073 in FIG. 254 and step S1084 in FIG. 255) is set to ON). When power is restored from a power outage, the main CPU 101 can recognize that a pseudo game was being executed at the time of the power outage based on the backup data, and can resume the pseudo game (see step S29 in FIG. 24). When power is restored from a power outage, the pseudo game may be resumed from the beginning, or from the state of the pseudo game at the time the power outage occurred (from the middle of the pseudo game). For example, if a power outage occurs while all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are spinning, the game may be restarted from the point where all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin (see step S1024 in FIG. 251), or if a power outage occurs while at least one reel is stopped, the game may be restarted from the point where the reel is stopped at the symbol position it had at the time of the power outage and a stop operation is accepted for the reel that was spinning when the power outage occurred (see step S1063 in FIG. 254).

In addition, if a power outage occurs while a pseudo game is being played, and the setting value is changed when the power is restored, the pseudo game may not be resumed in the game after the setting value is changed. In this case, for example, the main CPU 101 may initialize the pseudo game information stored in a specified area of the main RAM 103 when the setting value is changed (see step S23 in FIG. 24). This makes it possible to configure the system so that if a power outage occurs while a pseudo game is being played, and the setting value is not changed when the power is restored, the pseudo game is resumed, but if the setting value is changed, the pseudo game is not resumed. Alternatively, if a power outage occurs while a pseudo game is being played, the pseudo game may not be resumed regardless of whether the setting value is changed when the power is restored.

Furthermore, as explained in the first embodiment, even if the notification target combination is determined as an internal winning combination in one unit game during the AT state, if a pseudo game is performed in the unit game, the corresponding During the pseudo game, it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that information regarding the stop operation is not reported. In this case, in the pseudo game, the symbol combination corresponding to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination unrelated to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when displaying information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the unit game (main game), when the random delay process is started (for example, if the judgment result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES") It is possible to configure the display to start at the timing when the first reel starts rotating by random delay processing or at the timing when the first reel starts rotating. Further, during a pseudo game, a display that uniquely corresponds to the fact that the game is a pseudo game (a display for notifying that the game is a pseudo game) may be performed on the instruction monitor.

(C-12) Any one of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-11),
A start operation detection means (start switch 7S) capable of detecting a start operation by a player;
A role determination means (main CPU 101 executing the process of step S5 in FIG. 23) capable of determining a winning role when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means;
In the main game, a granting means (main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 23) capable of granting game media or game media data corresponding to the pattern state of the plurality of reels;
A notification means (indication monitor) capable of notifying a player of advantageous information;
The applying means is
In the main game, when a predetermined pattern (a combination of patterns related to a minor win) is derived as a pattern pattern of the plurality of reels by stopping the plurality of reels, it is possible to award a game medium or game medium data corresponding to the predetermined pattern pattern,
The reel control means
a reel rotation start control means (main CPU 101 for executing the process shown in FIG. 258) for starting the rotation of one of the reels for the main game after the reels have been stopped in the pseudo game, and for starting the rotation of the other reels at a timing later than the timing of starting the rotation of the one reel;
When a predetermined role (role to be notified) is determined as a winning role by the role determination means, if a predetermined stop operation (correct push order) is detected as the stop operation after the rotation of the reels is started by the post-pseudo-play reel rotation start control means, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation stop control so that the predetermined pattern pattern is derived as the pattern pattern of the multiple reels,
The notification means includes:
When the predetermined role is determined as a winning role by the role determination means, information regarding the predetermined stop operation is not announced as the advantageous information in the pseudo game, and it is possible to announce information regarding the predetermined stop operation after the reel rotation start control means starts rotation of the reel after the pseudo game.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, after the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, one of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be started to rotate for the main game, and the other reels can be started to rotate at a timing later than the timing of starting the rotation of the one reel. In addition, when a predetermined role (role to be notified) is determined as a winning role, after the rotation of the reels is started after the pseudo game, if a predetermined stop operation (correct push order) is detected as a stop operation, it is possible to execute stop control after the stop operation so that a predetermined pattern mode (combination of patterns related to a minor role) is derived, and when a predetermined pattern mode (combination of patterns related to a minor role) is derived in the main game, it is possible to grant a game medium or game medium data corresponding to the predetermined pattern mode (combination of patterns related to a minor role). Then, when a predetermined role (role to be notified) is determined as the winning role, information regarding the predetermined stop operation (correct button press sequence) is not notified during the pseudo game, but information regarding the predetermined stop operation (correct button press sequence) can be notified after the reels start spinning after the pseudo game. This makes it possible to avoid the player mistaking that they should perform the predetermined stop operation (correct button press sequence) during the pseudo game, and in combination with the post-stop operation control (swing control), it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

As with the above-mentioned specific win, the predetermined win (notification target win) is a win in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (press order) (for example, a win in which the stop operation mode is appropriate ( If the answer is correct (correct answer), it is possible to pay out eight sheets, and if it is inappropriate (incorrect answer), it is possible to pay out one sheet or no payout). Notification of information regarding a predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) (display of information about the stop operation on the instruction monitor) is carried out after the reels start rotating after the pseudo game, for example, when the third stop operation in the main game (or It is preferable to continue the process until the first stop operation or the second stop operation is completed.

[Ninth embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of parts that are applicable to the ninth embodiment as well as those described in the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ..." means that it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to eighth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to eighth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

In addition, even if the shape is different from the slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for the configurations having the same functions for convenience. In addition, even if the shape is the same or the process is the same as the slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Rock effect execution process>
FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side presentation control process at the start of play) of FIG. 23 (main processing). In the eighth embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side presentation control process at the start of play) of FIG. 23 (main processing). In this embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 may be performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side presentation control process at the start of play) of FIG. 23 (main processing), or the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 may be performed.

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to on (step S1201). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start process (step S1202). Here, the process for starting the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 263.

In the process for starting the pseudo game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "3", "4", or "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1221). If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is not one of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is one of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", or "5", it sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) to the pseudo-game start lock timer (step S1222). The pseudo-game start lock timer is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the pseudo-game start lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is 0 (step S1223). If it is determined that the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. As a result, the pseudo game start lock is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). The lock at the start of the pseudo game may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects or pseudo games, or may be a lock effect that involves reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.). Good too. While the pseudo game start lock is being performed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the pseudo game start lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start command generation and storage process (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, when the pseudo game start command data is received, the sub-control circuit 200 sets the performance data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image with the content "hit the lever" (a "hit the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-game start command generation and storage process was executed (since the "hit the lever" image was displayed) (step S1226). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1225. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game cancel flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo-game cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the pseudo-game. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1228) and ends this subroutine.

The pseudo-game start process performed in step S1202 of FIG. 262 has been explained above using FIG. 263. Let's return to the explanation of FIG. 262.

After executing the process of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo game cancellation flag is set on (step S1203). If it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the processes from step S1204 to step S1210, but these processes are different from the processes from step S1022 to step S1028 in FIG. Since the processing is similar, the explanation here will be omitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), a lock is performed at the start of the pseudo game. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game is started and the pseudo game is performed (see steps S1206 and S1208 in FIG. 262), and after the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo game (the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game) is not performed, and after the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

Thus, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262, it has been explained that the pseudo game is started on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, as explained in the eighth embodiment, the conditions for starting the pseudo game are not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, but any operation part (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 It is possible to adopt the operation of the bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) as appropriate. Furthermore, the conditions for canceling the pseudo game (the pseudo game cancel flag is set to on) are not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time, but can be applied to any operating part (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) can be used as appropriate.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
Fig. 264 is a flow chart showing normal pseudo game processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 265 is a flow chart showing stop button operation acceptance processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing swing control processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 267 is a flow chart showing pseudo game termination processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 264 is a process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100. In the eighth embodiment, the description has been made assuming that the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is performed as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process). In this embodiment, as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (simulated game process), the normal pseudo game process shown in FIG. 254 may be performed, or the normal pseudo game process shown in FIG. 264 may be performed. It may also be done.

In normal pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes the processes of steps S1241 and S1242. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1061 and S1062 in FIG. 254, a description thereof will be omitted here.

After executing the process of step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes a stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation acceptance process will be explained using FIG. 265.

In the stop button operation reception process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1261). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that is set when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in a pseudo game (see step S1264). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated (step S1262). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 in FIG. 254. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R by referring to the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S has been turned on.

If it is determined that the MAX BET button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that indicates that all remaining stop button operations are to be omitted. After executing the processing of step S1264, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the MAX bet button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since starting the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 (step S1265). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag indicating that the current stop button operation is to be omitted. After executing the process in step S1266, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The stop button operation acceptance process performed in step S1243 in FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. 265. The explanation returns to FIG. 264.

After executing the process in step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (step S1244), and determines the reel to be controlled (step S1245). In these processes, if neither the stop button operation cancellation flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 performs the same processes as those in steps S1064 and S1065 in FIG. 254. On the other hand, when the stop button operation cancellation flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the leftmost stop button 8 among the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has been operated. As a result, the operation stop button storage area is updated, and the reel to be controlled is determined.

For example, when all the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated, Bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when the middle stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 1 of the operation stop button storage area, in the same way as when the middle stop button 8C is operated. Bit 5 is updated to "0" and the middle reel 3C is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when the left stop button 8L and middle stop button 8C are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area, in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when only the right stop button 8R is valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 2 of the operation stop button storage area and sets bit 6 to "1" in the same way as when the right stop button 8R is operated. 0'' and determines the right reel 3R as the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes steps S1246 to S1249, which are basically the same as steps S1066 to S1069 in FIG. 254. In the process of step S1246, similar to the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined position where the symbol will finally stop as the planned stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). and store it. As a result, regardless of whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, FIGS. Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops in the manner shown in 248(b) to 248(d).

Here, if the stop button operation cancellation flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the control The manner in which the target reel rotates until it stops may be varied. For example, if the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (when the MAX bet button 6a is operated), but neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set on. (When the stop button 8 is operated), the time from when the button is operated until the controlled reel stops may be made longer (for example, the controlled reel may be pressed one more time). (It is also possible to rotate it and then stop it.) However, even if there is a difference in the rotation mode, the final symbol that is stopped and displayed will be the same regardless of whether the stop button operation cancellation flag or stop button operation omission flag is set to on. There is.

If it is determined in step S1249 that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes swing control processing (step S1250). Here, the swing control process will be explained using FIG. 266.

In the swing control process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1281). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON (step S1282). If it is determined that the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to OFF (step S1283).

If it is determined in step S1281 that the stop button operation cancellation flag is set on, or after executing the process in step S1283, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the controlled reel (step S1284). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to a stop excitation pattern for stopping the controlled reel. As a result, the controlled reel is maintained in a stopped state as shown in FIGS. 246(b) to 246(d), FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d), and FIGS. 248(b) to 248(d). (Unlike what is shown, no vibration occurs).

If it is determined in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1285). This process is the same as the process in step S1070 in FIG. 254. As a result, the controlled reel swings in the manner shown in FIGS. 246(b)-(d), 247(b)-(d), and 248(b)-(d).

After executing the process of step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The swing control process performed in step S1250 in FIG. 264 has been described above using FIG. 266. The explanation returns to FIG. 264.

After executing the process of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1251). This process is similar to the process in step S1071 in FIG. 254. If it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R, the main CPU 101 executes a process for ending the pseudo game (step S1252). Here, the pseudo game ending process will be explained using FIG. 267.

In the pseudo game ending process, first, the main CPU 101 judges whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "3" (step S1301). If it is judged that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 outputs an AT-equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As explained in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to a data display device and hall computer outside the pachinko slot machine 1, and these devices are also able to recognize the medal insertion status and game state transition status in the pachinko slot machine 1.

The AT equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on when the AT state is started and turned off when the AT state is ended. In the process of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. Similarly, although not shown, after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. As a result, the data display and hall computer recognize that the AT state has started.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" ends (when the "red 7" pattern alignment is stopped and displayed), the AT equivalent signal is turned on. It is configured so that. Further, as described in the first embodiment, a plurality of AT states (a predetermined AT state and a specific AT state) may be provided, and each AT state may have a different degree of advantage for the player. As such an AT state, for example, the pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted. Then, in both cases where it is decided to shift to pseudo BB and when it is decided to shift to pseudo RB, the same symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game. You may also do so. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to a pseudo BB, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, and when it is decided to shift to a pseudo RB. The same AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. As a result, when a specific symbol combination (for example, a set of "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, it is possible to determine which pseudo bonus, pseudo BB or pseudo RB, to be transferred to. It is possible to make the game confusing, and it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player. Note that the timing at which pseudo BB or pseudo RB actually starts is not particularly limited, but may occur after a specific symbol combination (for example, a set of "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game (when the pseudo game is played). (or a unit game played a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, in the main game, a pseudo BB is started when the "Red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed along the active line, and in the main game, the "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed along the active line. The pseudo RB may be started using this as a trigger.

In the above, it has been described that the AT-equivalent signal is turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, a "red 7" pattern) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game (before the random delay process is started). Similarly, the AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, a "red 7" pattern) is stopped and displayed in the reel performance (before the random delay process is started). The AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when the pseudo bonus actually starts (for example, step S106 in FIG. 28). The timing of turning off the AT-equivalent signal is not particularly limited, but it is possible to turn off the AT-equivalent signal when the pseudo bonus actually ends (for example, step S155 in FIG. 31). As described in the first embodiment, the external signal 1 (the above-mentioned AT-equivalent signal) may be turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first set, and the external signal 2 may be turned on each time the second set or later is started. From this perspective, the pseudo game may be performed only when it is decided to transition to the AT state of the first set (for example, it may not be performed if the 1G consecutive lottery is won). Also, when the AT-equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is turned on.

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5" (that is, the lock effect number is "4"), the main CPU 101 controls the external centralized terminal A medal insertion signal is output via the board 55 (step S1304).

As described in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when a medal is inserted (see step S42 and step S46 in FIG. 25). That is, the medal insertion signal is output every time the main game is played, and the number of games played with the pachi-slot machine 1 can be recognized on the data display machine or the hall computer via the medal insertion signal. It has become. In this embodiment, by outputting the medal insertion signal even in the pseudo game, the number of times the game is played is the number including the pseudo game (the total number of the number of main games and the number of pseudo games). This allows the number of games to be counted up even when a pseudo game is played. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs a medal input signal even after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255.

The medal insertion signal can be output at the timing when the pseudo game starts or the timing when the pseudo game ends. The timing at which the pseudo game starts is, for example, when the start lever 7 is operated (for example, when the determination result in step S1225 in FIG. 263 is "YES"), or when the reels 3L, 3C, An example of this is when the rotation of 3R starts (for example, the timing at which the process of step S1206 in FIG. 262 is performed). The timing at which the pseudo game ends is, for example, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game stops (for example, the timing when the process in FIG. 267 is performed), or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the main game stop rotating. For example, when the rotation of 3R starts (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES", or when the first reel starts rotating due to random delay processing). Note that when a medal insertion signal is output in a pseudo game, the unit game in which the pseudo game is performed may be configured such that the medal insertion signal is not output when medals are inserted.

After executing the process of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1305) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes post-pseudo-play reel effect processing (step S1306). The post-pseudo-play reel effect processing has been explained using FIG. 255, so an explanation of this will be omitted here. After executing the process of step S1306, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo game ending process performed in step S1252 in FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. 267. The explanation returns to FIG. 264. After executing the process in step S1252, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo game challenge operation reception process>
FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 is a process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo game processing) in the main control circuit 100. In the above, it has been explained that the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo game processing). In this embodiment, the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 may be performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo game processing).

Specifically, when all stop buttons 8 are valid (when none of the stop buttons 8 have been operated yet), i.e. when the current stop operation is the first stop operation, the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 is performed, and when an invalid stop button 8 exists (when at least one stop button 8 has been operated), i.e. when the current stop operation is the second stop operation or the third stop operation, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo game challenge operation reception process, first, the main CPU 101 determines the stop button for the pseudo game progress (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines one of the left stop button 8L, the center stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R as the stop button for the pseudo game progress by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game start command generation and storage process (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo game start command data, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image with content such as "Pseudo game starts when three correct answers on the stop button" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the stop button 8. I can do it.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated (step S1323). This process is similar to the process in step S1063 in FIG. 254. If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game proceeding stop button determined in step S1321 (step S1324).

If it is determined that the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine and moves the process to step S1244 in FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operated stop button 8 does not match the stop button for proceeding with the pseudo game, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag to ON (step S1325), and ends this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268, and then ends the normal pseudo-game process shown in FIG. 264 without performing the processes of steps S1244 to S1252 in FIG. 264, and further ends the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 without performing the processes of steps S1209 and S1210 in FIG. 262.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1326 to S1329. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1263 to S1266 in FIG. 265, a description thereof will be omitted here. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, when a stop button for pseudo game progress (e.g., the left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (when the three stop button choices are correct), the pseudo game continues, and after a random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate at a constant speed for the main game. On the other hand, when a stop button 8 other than the stop button for pseudo game progress (e.g., the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated as the first stop operation (when the three stop button choices are unsuccessful), the pseudo game ends at that point, and after a normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate at a constant speed for the main game.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game has started, the pseudo game is configured to proceed on the condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated. is possible. On the other hand, such an appropriate operation of the stop button 8 may be adopted as a condition for starting a pseudo game. For example, in FIG. 263, it has been explained that the pseudo game is started on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated, but instead of operating the start lever 7, an appropriate stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) ) may be operated, a pseudo game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for pseudo game) may be started. If an inappropriate stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo game is canceled (in the first place, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game is (also not performed).

<Determining the freeze type>
Figure 269 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

FIG. 269 shows a freeze type determination screen being displayed on the main display device 210. In this embodiment, multiple types of freezes (freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect that does not involve reel effects or pseudo games. Freeze B is a lock effect accompanied by a forward rotating reel effect. Freeze C is a lock effect accompanied by a reverse rotation reel effect. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze among freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C. The determined freeze is executed, for example, as a lock at the start of a pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, FIG. 269 shows a freeze type determination screen in which a freeze A image 1201, a freeze B image 1202, a freeze C image 1203, and an arrow image 1204 are displayed. The arrow image 1204 is an image for indicating which image is selected among the freeze A image 1201, the freeze B image 1202, and the freeze C image 1203. In the example shown in FIG. 269, an arrow image 1204 is displayed adjacent to the freeze A image 1201, indicating that the freeze A image 1201 is selected.

In this way, when freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze A image 1201. Similarly, when freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze B image 1202. When freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze C image 1203.

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched using any of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, one of these methods is set in the hall menu.
(a) Operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (b) Operation of MAX bet button 6a (c) Timer management

When the above (a) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined.

When the above (b) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX bet button 6a while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. By operating the start lever 7, the type of freeze can be determined. Specifically, if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, and if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and the freeze C selection state is determined. If the start lever 7 is operated in , freeze C is determined.

When the above (c) is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state are switched from one state to another state (for example, freeze A selection state → freeze B selection state → freeze C selection state → freeze A selection state, etc.) at predetermined time intervals. At this time, the player can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined. Note that if the MAX BET button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, a type of freeze corresponding to the state when the time has elapsed is determined. Alternatively, the type of freeze selected by lottery may be determined.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited, but it is possible to configure it so that the freeze type determination screen is displayed, for example, when a combination of symbols relating to BB is stopped and displayed along an active line (BB wins). For example, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed when BB wins in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game. Alternatively, when BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed during the time until the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game.

The above describes the case where the type of freeze is determined, but the type of lock effect to be performed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won or the 1G consecutive lottery is won may be determined by a similar method. For example, on a screen similar to that of FIG. 269, the method (a) to (c) may be used to determine one of lock effects A (e.g., a lock effect without reel effects and pseudo play), lock effect B (e.g., a lock effect with reel effects), and lock effect C (e.g., a lock effect with pseudo play). In steps S1005, S1010, and S1012 of FIG. 250, the lock effect determined in this manner may be selected. The same method may also be used to determine the type of rocking pattern (e.g., one of rocking patterns A, B, and C described in the eighth embodiment). The effect determined in this manner is not limited to the effect controlled by the main control circuit 100, but may be the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 200.

<Processing when a bonus is won>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the processing carried out in the main control circuit when a bonus is won.

The bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) is executed. In other words, the bonus winning process is a transition from a non-bonus state (not a bonus state and neither a carryover state) to a carryover state (between flags) due to the bonus winning game (the bonus winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination). This is a process performed before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts in the unit game).

In the bonus winning process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether BB has been determined as an internal winning combination (whether the current unit game is a BB winning game) (step S1341). If it is determined that BB has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BB has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" (see FIG. 243) (step S1342). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" being performed.

In the eighth embodiment, when a lock effect number corresponding to a pseudo game is selected, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 (see FIG. 252) is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 251). This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game. In this embodiment, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may be displayed on the main display device 210 in the same manner, but here, the "Aim for BAR" effect image (not shown) is displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game.

Here, the BB state is started when a line of "red 7" symbols is displayed stopped along the winning line in the main game (the "red 7" symbols are displayed) after BB is determined as the internal winning role, and the MB state is started when a line of "BAR" symbols is displayed stopped along the winning line in the main game (the "BAR" symbols are displayed). In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol when operating each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R.

However, as described above, when the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is displayed in the pseudo game, if the "Aim for the BAR" effect image continues to be displayed even after the pseudo game ends and the main game starts, the player will be forced to aim for a different symbol (the "BAR" symbol) than the symbol (the "red 7" symbol) that they should actually aim for. This increases the chance that the "red 7" symbols will not stop along the winning line (BB will not win).

Particularly, when the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are arranged apart from each other on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, this possibility is very high. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, on at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C), the symbol position ("0") corresponding to the "Red 7" symbol is changed from the symbol position ("9") corresponding to the "BAR" symbol. ), if the number of sliding pieces does not exist within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols), a stop operation is performed for the relevant reel 3 (middle reel 3C) at the timing when the "BAR" symbol is displayed on the active line. If this happens, it will be impossible for BB to win. In this sense, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image becomes a suggestion to prevent the BB from winning.

In any case, it is desirable to end the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image displayed in the simulated game at a predetermined timing so as to prevent the player from misidentifying the symbol to be aimed for (internal winning role). The timing may be before the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or after the random delay process is started. Specifically, the timing may be, for example, the period from when the second stop reel stops in the pseudo game until the third stop reel stops (for example, when the determination result of step S1262 in FIG. 265 is "YES" and the operation of the stop button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the determination result of step S1265 in FIG. 265 is "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), when all remaining stop button operations are omitted (for example, when the determination result of step S1263 in FIG. 265 is "YES"), or the period from when the third stop reel stops until the third stop reel starts to swing (for example, when the determination result of step S1249 in FIG. 264 is "Y ES" and the controlled reel is the third stopped reel), the timing when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped in the pseudo game (for example, after the determination result of step S1251 in FIG. 264 becomes "YES" and before the processing of step S1252 is performed), when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game start to rotate (for example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes "YES" or the timing when the first reel starts to rotate due to random delay processing), the period from when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game start to rotate until the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, etc.

Further, if another pseudo game effect (for example, swing control) is being performed at the timing when the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is ended, that effect may also be ended. Furthermore, at this timing, a production (BB suggestion production) corresponding to the fact that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination is started (an image suggesting that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination (for example, "Aim for 7") is started. ” effect image 1100)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misunderstanding the symbol (internal winning combination) that the player should aim for, and to give a suggestion that the player should aim for the "Red 7" symbol.

As explained in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, it is possible to configure the game so that a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims for the "BAR" symbol when operating each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R (even if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the "red 7" symbol may be aligned. This makes it possible to suggest that BB has been determined as the internal winning role through the "red 7" symbol alignment. If the "red 7" symbol alignment is achieved in the pseudo game, the above-mentioned BB suggestion performance may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that the "BAR" pattern is aligned when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed in response to a stop operation being performed at a timing when the "BAR" pattern can be stopped and displayed (if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing, the "BAR" pattern is not aligned). Also, the pseudo game may be configured so that the "BAR" pattern is aligned regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that the "BAR" pattern is ready but the "BAR" pattern is not aligned (the remaining "BAR" pattern is not stopped and displayed). If the "red 7" pattern is not aligned in the pseudo game, it is desirable to perform the above-mentioned BB suggestion performance in the main game.

In this way, each time the "red 7" symbol or the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, swing control (see step S1285 in FIG. 266) is performed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As explained in the eighth embodiment, the swing control is performed so that the "red 7" symbol or the "BAR" symbol is positioned on the pay line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is located at the center of the vibration or when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is almost completely stopped.

As described above, when the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 may not be performed, or the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 may be performed in conjunction with the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270. Also, although not shown, when BB is not determined as the internal winning role, a lock effect (a so-called false effect) corresponding to lock effect number "2" or "4" may be performed.

<Lock effect determination process at end of game>
FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the game end lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit.

The process of determining the lock effect at the end of play shown in FIG. 271 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 in FIG. 31 (processing at the end of play during the favorable period) is executed.

In the process of determining the lock effect at the end of play, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the current play area is an advantageous area (step S1361). This process is the same as the process of step S1001 in FIG. 250. If it is determined that the current play area is not an advantageous area, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current play area is a favorable area, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won (step S1362). As described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main play stops, the favorable area winning subflag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as secondary information (subflag) corresponding to the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols. Then, in the performance area (favorable area/normal play), the pseudo bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo bonus transition lottery) based on the random number value and the favorable area winning subflag is performed, and a "win" or "no win" is determined as the result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery. Note that, although "win" is provided as "win (current play)" and "win (next play)", these are not distinguished here.

If it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", or "6" (see FIG. 243) (step S1363). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1364), and ends this subroutine. This results in a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6".

Although not shown, even if the 1G consecutive lottery (see FIG. 7(d)) is won, one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed). Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (and the 1G consecutive lottery) is not won, one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" is performed).

<Lock effect execution process at the end of game>
Fig. 272 is a flow chart showing the process for executing the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 273 is a flow chart showing the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit.

The game end lock performance execution process shown in FIG. 272 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S16 (game end main side performance control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lock effect execution process at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 271) is set on (step S1381). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play (step S1382). Here, the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play will be explained using FIG. 273.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the replay has won a prize (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the active line is a symbol combination related to a replay combination (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

When it is determined that a replay has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates replay winning lock effect start command data and stores the generated replay winning lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the replay has been won and the lock effect will begin, and it can determine the timing of executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the command data to start the lock effect when a replay is won, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the replay being won and the lock effect being started. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image (bet request image) with the content "Please place a bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b). When a replay is won, there is no need to operate the bet button, but the bet request image can give the player a sense of surprise.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S has been turned on. If it determines that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the MAX bet button 6a nor the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the replay winning lock production start command generation and storage process for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (after the bet request image is displayed). It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed (step S1405).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1403. If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated in step S1404, or if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1405, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancellation flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1407), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1401 that a replay has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a process for generating and storing a command to start a lock effect when a win other than a replay has been won (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates command data to start a lock effect when a win other than a replay has been won, and stores the generated command data to start a lock effect when a win other than a replay has been won in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The command data to start a lock effect when a win other than a replay has been won stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that a role other than a replay has been won and the lock effect will start, and it can determine the timing of executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, in response to receiving the command data to start a lock performance when winning a prize other than a replay, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the start of a lock performance when a winning role other than a replay is won. Ru. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image ("hit the lever" image) with the content "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to. If a winning combination other than the replay is won, the player should be required to operate the bet button before operating the start lever 7, but the ``hit the lever'' image can make the player feel surprised.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the lock production start command generation and storage process for winnings other than replay for a predetermined period of time (after the "hit the lever" image is displayed). (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S1410). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancellation flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancellation flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1412), and ends this subroutine.

The process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game performed in step S1382 of FIG. 272 has been described above with reference to FIG. 273. The explanation returns to FIG. 272.

After executing the process of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON (step S1383). If it is determined that the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect cancellation flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the processes from step S1384 to step S1390, but these processes are different from the processes from step S1022 to step S1028 in FIG. Since the processing is similar, the explanation here will be omitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay has won, by operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the reel 3L, The rotation of reels 3C and 3R is started and a lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, after random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), reels 3L and 3C are rotated. , 3R rotation is the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, it was determined that a lock effect would be performed in the unit game in which the replay won, but the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) was not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image was displayed. or when the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect) is not performed and the normal acceleration process (as shown in FIG. 257) is performed in the next unit game. After step S1125), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 273, if the start lever 7 is operated without operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the game will proceed to the next unit game. In this case, the operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. In other words, if the judgment result of step S1404 in FIG. 273 is "YES", the judgment result of step S50 in FIG. 25 may be "YES" without waiting for the start lever 7 to be operated in the next unit game. However, unlike the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 273, the game may be configured not to proceed to the next unit game unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. Also, even if the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated, the game may proceed to the next unit game, but it may be configured so that the game proceeds to the next unit game only after the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has not been operated for a considerable length of time (for example, one minute).

Furthermore, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than the replay is won, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started for the lock effect by operating the start lever 7. A lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, after random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed to the main game. It rotates at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning role other than the replay is won, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, If the lock effect (rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for lock effect) is not performed, in the next unit game, the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be performed after normal acceleration processing (see step S1125 in FIG. 257). is the constant speed rotation for the main game. It should be noted that it may be configured so that the next unit game does not proceed unless the start lever 7 is operated, or the next unit game will not proceed until the start lever 7 is not operated for a considerably long time (for example, 1 minute). It may be configured to proceed to a game.

<Stop button illumination control process during pseudo game>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process during the pseudo-game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1243 in FIG. 264, and then executes a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process. This causes, for example, the lighting state of each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to change. This will be described in detail below.

Each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R has the same configuration and is equipped with a stop button cover having a pressing portion that can be touched by the player, and a stop button LED disposed in a position recessed from the stop button cover. The stop button LED is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED passes through the stop button cover and is released to the outside of the pachislot machine 1, making it visible to the player.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo game, the stop button LEDs of the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to emit light. Specifically, in step S1242 of FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LEDs of all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to light up. In addition, in step S1244 in FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 causes the stop button LED of the stop button 8 that was operated this time (or the stop button 8 that was deemed to have been operated because the stop button operation was omitted) to turn off. control. Alternatively, if it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the stop button 8 that was operated this time (or the stop button 8 that was deemed to have been operated because the stop button operation was omitted) The stop button LED may be controlled to turn off.

The main CPU 101 may also control the stop button LED of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to be illuminated in a specific color (e.g., red). The main CPU 101 may also control the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated when the stop button operation is omitted) to be illuminated in a specific color (e.g., red).

At this time, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LED for the stop button may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than when it has not been decided that the special benefit will be given (for example, when the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Also, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LED for the stop button may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than when the LED for the stop button emits a predetermined color (for example, blue).

Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game through the color of the light emitted from the stop button LED. Such control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player will be excited, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player will be excited. It can also be said that the player's expectations are relatively lowered.

The above describes the effect in which the lighting state of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R changes, but the lighting state of the start lever 7 and the bet buttons (MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b) may also be changed. For example, the start lever 7 and the MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b each have a translucent cover and an LED, similar to the stop button 8. The cover of the start lever 7 may be a spherical part that can be held by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be lit when the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image is displayed on the main display device 210, and the LEDs of the MAX bet button 6a to 1 bet button 6b may be lit when the above-mentioned bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210.

At this time, the player may be suggested the degree of expectation of the pseudo game through the light color of the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button. For example, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than when it has not been decided that the special benefit will be given (for example, when the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Also, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than when the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button emits a predetermined color (for example, blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, start lever 7, MAX BET button 6a, and 1 BET button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200. If the LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the main CPU 101 changes the lighting state of the LEDs, it may generate command data corresponding to the change in lighting state and transmit the generated command data to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect may be created in which the lighting state of the LEDs is changed.

<Backlight effect>
As explained in the first embodiment, a light source (reel lamp) is provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R at a position where the symbols can be seen at least from the main display window 4, and at least while each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is spinning, the reels are illuminated from the inside at a constant brightness to ensure visibility of the symbols.

In this embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) using such a reel lamp (reel backlight) is performed. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs (reel illumination LEDs) are provided on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R as a reel backlight. These reel illumination LEDs are installed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R so that each of the nine symbols stopped and displayed within the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated. It is located in

Hereinafter, the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the upper region of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the upper left reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the middle region of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the left middle reel illumination LED. The reel illumination LED that can illuminate the lower area of the left reel 3L is called the lower left reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the upper area of the middle reel 3C is called the upper middle reel illumination LED. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the middle area is called the middle and middle reel lighting LED, the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the lower area of the middle reel 3C is called the middle and lower reel lighting LED, and the upper part of the right reel 3R. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the area is called the upper right reel lighting LED, and the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the middle area of the right reel 3R is called the right middle reel lighting LED, which illuminates the lower area of the right reel 3R. The possible reel illumination LED will be referred to as the lower right reel illumination LED.

LED for upper left reel lighting, LED for left middle reel lighting, LED for lower left reel lighting, LED for upper middle reel lighting, LED for middle middle reel lighting, LED for middle lower reel lighting, LED for upper right reel lighting, LED for right middle reel lighting A plurality of LEDs are provided as the LED for lighting the lower right reel and the LED for illuminating the lower right reel, so that it is possible to realize a backlight effect with a complicated lighting pattern on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. It has become.

The backlight effect is achieved by turning off the reel illumination LEDs that are currently lit as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop in the pseudo game. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the pseudo game (see step S1206 in FIG. 262 and step S1386 in FIG. 272), it controls so that the LED for illuminating the upper left reel, the LED for illuminating the center left reel, the LED for illuminating the lower left reel, the LED for illuminating the upper middle reel, the LED for illuminating the center middle reel, the LED for illuminating the lower middle reel, the LED for illuminating the upper right reel, the LED for illuminating the center right reel, and the LED for illuminating the lower right reel are all lit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S1249 of FIG. 264 that the controlled reel has stopped, it controls the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the upper area of the controlled reel, the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the middle area of the controlled reel, and the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the lower area of the controlled reel to be turned off, which are capable of illuminating areas not located on the pay line. For example, assume that the pay line is the center line and the controlled reel is the left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 controls the reel illumination LEDs for the upper left reel and the lower left reel to be turned off, while the LED for the middle left reel is kept on. When turning off the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas not located on the pay line, it may be possible to turn off all of the multiple LEDs provided as the reel illumination LEDs, or to turn off some of the multiple LEDs.

As a result, the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area not located on the pay line is reduced, but the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area located on the pay line is ensured. For example, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 243), in the state shown in FIG. 246(b), the visibility of "BAR" and "replay" is reduced for the right reel 3R, while the visibility of "red 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246(c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(b), and the visibility of "watermelon" and "yellow blank" is reduced for the center reel 3C, while the visibility of "red 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246(d), the right reel 3R and center reel 3C are the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(c), and the visibility of "white blank 1" and "watermelon" is reduced for the left reel 3L, while the visibility of "red 7" is ensured. Therefore, even if some of the reel illumination LEDs go out, the player can clearly recognize that the "red 7" symbol has been lined up.

In addition, when turning off the reel lighting LED that can illuminate areas that are not located on the active line, the visibility of the symbols in the area located on the active line will not be reduced due to the reel lighting LED being turned off. It is desirable to configure For example, a structure may be adopted in which a partition plate or the like is provided between adjacent areas so that the visibility of the symbols in each area is not interfered with by the lighting mode of the reel illumination LEDs in other areas.

In addition, after turning off the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas not located on the pay line, the LEDs may be turned on and off again. In this case, the degree of expectation of the pseudo game may be suggested to the player through the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when it has not been decided that the special benefit will be given (for example, when the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). In addition, when it has been decided that a special benefit will be given to the player (for example, when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when it has been decided that the LEDs will light up in a predetermined pattern.

The reel lighting LEDs may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or by the sub control circuit 200. When the reel lighting LED is configured to be controlled by the sub control circuit 200, when changing the lighting mode of the reel lighting LED, the main CPU 101 generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode. , the generated command data may be sent to the sub control circuit 200. In addition, in the main game as well, similarly to the pseudo game, an effect may be performed in which the lighting mode of the reel illumination LED is changed.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory map") of the main ROM 102 and main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274A to 274C. 274A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 274B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 274C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 100, as shown in FIG. 274A, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the They are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 274B, from the top address (0000H) of main ROM 102, the program area, data area, non-standard area, trademark recording area, program management area, and security setting area are arranged in this order at their respective designated addresses.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the games played by the player. The data area stores various data (e.g., data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 42, etc.) used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the games played by the player. In other words, the game ROM area (game memory area) consisting of the program area and data area stores various programs and data necessary for control processes (game-related processes) related to the playability of the games actually played by players at the game establishment.

Furthermore, the non-regular area stores control programs and data for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player (processes that do not affect the gameplay). For example, programs and data used in the Pachislot 1 certification test (sight shooting test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing during power outage, sum check processing when power is restored, etc., and anti-fraud programs. and the data necessary for it are stored in the non-regular area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The gaming RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data, such as internal winning combinations, determined by the execution of a control program related to the gameplay of the game played by the player. . Each of the various data is stored in a work area at a predetermined address within the gaming RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area and a non-standard stack, which are work areas for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player. In this embodiment, this non-standard RAM area is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game performed by the player, such as a sum check process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player are stored in the main ROM 102. The data is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at a different address from the original ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game performed by such players are performed using a non-standard RAM area located at a different address from the gaming RAM area in the main RAM 103. .

In this configuration of the main ROM 102, it is possible to place programs and data that are not necessary for the actual game that the player plays in a ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where programs and the like were not allowed to be placed under conventional rules. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid putting pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

<Test firing signal control processing (non-regulation)>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs test firing signal control processing (non-standard) in regular interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). The main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S208 in FIG. 32, and then executes test firing signal control processing (non-standard). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs control processing when outputting various test signals to the test machine via the first test machine interface board 301 and the second test machine interface board 302 (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area of the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves the data of all registers. Then, the main CPU 101 processes the rotation control signal (drive signal) of each reel, the bonus ( Processing is performed to output an ON/OFF signal (test signal) of the special prize), a control signal corresponding to the state of the conditional device signal control flag, etc. Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the data of all the saved registers, and sets the address of the saved stack area in the stack pointer (SP).

Such sight test signal control processing (non-standard) is executed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 274C). Note that the test firing test signal control processing (not specified) is also performed at times other than the test firing test (after the Pachislot machine 1 is installed at the game parlor), but at this time, the main control board 71 is Since it is not connected to the test machine via the first interface board 301 to the second interface board 302 for the test machine, various test signals are not output even if they are generated.

As explained in the first embodiment, it is possible to configure the device so that during pseudo play, a test signal (pseudo play signal) is output to enable the test machine to recognize that pseudo play is in progress. The control process for outputting the pseudo play signal may be performed in the test firing test signal control process (non-regular). In this case, the control process for outputting the pseudo play signal is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 274C).

Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal, it outputs a signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, thereby controlling the main control board 71. The pseudo game may be played on the board 71 side (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with a pseudo game play function). In this case, a pseudo game signal is input from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the test machine, and a pseudo game signal is input from the second interface board 302 for the test machine to the first interface board 301 for the test machine. may be configured. Then, by transmitting a signal for pseudo game progress control (stop signal) from the first interface board 301 for the test machine to the main control board 71, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in the pseudo game (pseudo stop ). This allows the test firing test to proceed smoothly.

In addition, when a replay wins and a pseudo game is played (see FIG. 273), it is possible to configure the test machine to output a test signal (cancellation signal) to enable the test machine to recognize that the replay has won and that the winning has been cancelled. In this case, a cancel signal (a signal urging the operation of the bet button) may be output from the main control board 71 to the test machine via the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine), or a signal indicating that a replay has won and that a pseudo game is played may be input from the main control board 71 to the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine), and then a cancel signal may be output from the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine) to the test machine. After that, a signal (bet signal) corresponding to the bet being played is output to the test machine, so that the next game can be started, and the test firing test can be carried out smoothly. The control process when outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the test firing test signal control process (outside of regulations). In addition, a case where a replay wins and a pseudo game is performed may be when the combination of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R outside the pay line is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", but the winning combination is a replay.

Above, we have explained the pachislot machine 1 according to the 9th embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for presentation (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214050). The sub-reels are larger than the main reels, are placed in conspicuous positions, and have symbols that are easy for players to identify and are arranged in an easy-to-identify arrangement. This allows the sub-reel to appear to the player as if it were the central reel.

In gaming machines equipped with such sub-reels, when the player performs a stop operation, the sub-reels are rotated in a manner that is difficult to perform with the main reels (for example, reverse rotation, frame-by-frame forwarding, etc.) and then stopped. Reel effects may be performed.

On the other hand, even in gaming machines that only have a main reel, it is conceivable to execute effects using such a reel (effects in which the reel stops when the player performs a stop operation, but no gaming medium (medals, etc.) is awarded according to the display state of the stopped reel). However, when such effects (pseudo games) are executed on the main reel, it is desirable to increase the degree of freedom of operation so that the player can decide for himself regarding the operation related to the pseudo game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to decide on the operations related to the simulated game, thereby increasing the degree of freedom of said operations.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are applied and which can be driven to rotate;
A stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
A reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S203 in FIG. 32 and the like) for controlling the reel,
the reel control means is capable of executing a post-stop-operation stop control for stopping the reel during rotation when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means,
A main game in which game media (medals) or game media data corresponding to the pattern appearance of the plurality of reels can be awarded when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and a pseudo game in which game media or game media data corresponding to the pattern appearance of the plurality of reels is not awarded when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation,
The operation for progressing the pseudo game can be omitted.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, a main game in which game media (medals) or game media (medal) data corresponding to the pattern of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation, and a pseudo game in which game media (medals) or game media (medal) data corresponding to the pattern of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are not awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be executed, and the operation for progressing the pseudo game can be omitted. As a result, the operation for progressing the pseudo game can be canceled at the player's will, so the player can decide on the operation himself, and the degree of freedom of the operation can be increased. In addition, it is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to omit the operation, and the operation burden can be reduced.

The operations for progressing the pseudo game include operations for progressing the pseudo game while the pseudo game is being played (e.g., the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation), as well as operations for starting the pseudo game. The operation for starting the pseudo game is a predetermined operation in a case where the pseudo game can be started when a predetermined operation is detected. As explained in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the operation of any operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.).

As explained in the eighth embodiment, when a game is played using physical medals in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main game is played on a plurality of reels (reel 3L) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. , 3C, 3R) is a game in which game media (medals) can be awarded according to the symbol pattern, and a pseudo game is a game in which a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3C, 3R) is a game that does not award game media (medals) according to the pattern. On the other hand, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is to display symbols on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that can give game media (medals) data according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a game in which the pattern mode of multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is changed when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. This is a game that does not provide corresponding game media (medals) data. The gaming media (medals) data is data corresponding to the gaming value held by the player, and as explained in the first embodiment, is transmitted electromagnetically (or in a manner that the player cannot directly contact the gaming value). It is something that is managed.

(D-2) The gaming machine of (D-1) above,
When the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, the reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing in FIG. 264, etc.) controls the plurality of reel control means by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop the plurality of reels so that the pattern pattern is the same as the pattern pattern of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped.
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when an operation for progressing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be stopped so that the symbol pattern of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is the same as that of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by stop control after a stop operation in the pseudo game. As a result, even if an operation for progressing the pseudo game is omitted, the same symbol pattern as that when the operation is not omitted is derived as a result of the pseudo game, so that the player can make the decision to omit the operation with confidence.

However, the pattern appearance of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the operation for progressing the pseudo game is omitted and the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game may be different from the pattern appearance of the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by stop control after a stop operation in the pseudo game. For example, in a pseudo game, when multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by stop control after a stop operation, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined symbol (e.g., a "red 7" symbol) is displayed as a stopped symbol, but if the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate, the predetermined symbol (e.g., a "red 7" symbol) is not displayed as a stopped symbol. On the other hand, in a pseudo game, when an operation for progressing the pseudo game is omitted and multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the predetermined symbol (e.g., a "red 7" symbol) may be configured to always be displayed as a stopped symbol.

(D-3) The gaming machine according to (D-1) or (D-2),
A predetermined operation detection means is provided for detecting a predetermined operation (operation of the MAX BET button 6a) different from the stop operation,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 executing the process of FIG. 264 and the like) is capable of executing a post-predetermined operation stop control for stopping the reel during rotation when the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game.
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a stop control after a predetermined operation that stops the reels during rotation when a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) other than a stop operation is detected in a pseudo game. This allows the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) instead of a stop operation (omitting the stop operation) at his/her own will as an operation to progress the pseudo game, thereby satisfying the needs of players who wish to perform operations other than a stop operation in a pseudo game and further increasing the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that when a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) is performed in a pseudo game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted. The stop button operations omitted when a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) is performed are not limited to this example, and only the current stop button operation may be omitted. In addition, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the operation of any operation unit (e.g., start lever 7, MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.). For example, when one operation unit (e.g., MAX BET button 6a) is operated, all remaining stop button operations are omitted, while when another operation unit (e.g., 1 BET button 6b) is operated, only the current stop button operation may be omitted.

Note that the post-predetermined operation stop control may be the same control as the post-stop operation stop control, or may be different from the post-stop operation stop control. If the stop control after the predetermined operation is the same as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (the excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as stop control after a predetermined operation (excitation data corresponding to an excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). ). On the other hand, if the stop control after the predetermined operation is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (corresponds to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) The drive control of the stepping motor 51 as a stop control after a predetermined operation (the excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) is different from the control (excitation data) data).

(D-4) Any one of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-3),
After the stop operation, a reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without stop control can be executed.
After the reel performance is completed, the pseudo game can be executed.
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is configured so that a pseudo game can be executed after the end of a reel performance, in which the reels are stopped without stop control after a stop operation. This makes it possible to perform the performance in two stages: the reel performance and the pseudo game, and when the reel performance occurs, the player can be made to expect that a pseudo game will occur.

As the reel effect, a lock at the start of a pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263) may be adopted, or a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" (see FIG. 243) may be adopted. Reel presentation may also be adopted.

(D-5) Any one of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-4),
A lock execution means (main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S1223 in FIG. 263) capable of executing a predetermined lock (lock at the start of pseudo game) in which operations by a player are disabled for a predetermined period of time,
After the predetermined lock executed by the lock execution means is completed, the pseudo game can be executed;
The reel control means (main CPU 101 executing the process of FIG. 266) is capable of executing post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the reel stopped by the post-stop operation stop control in the pseudo game, but does not execute the post-stop operation control while the predetermined lock is being executed by the lock execution means.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, after the predetermined lock (pseudo game start lock) in which the operation by the player is disabled for a predetermined time ends, the pseudo game can be executed, and while the pseudo game can execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) that operates the reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed while the predetermined lock (pseudo game start lock) is being executed. This makes it possible to perform the performance in two stages, the predetermined lock (pseudo game start lock) and the pseudo game, and the player can be made to expect that the pseudo game will occur next when the predetermined lock (pseudo game start lock) occurs. In addition, in the pseudo game, the post-stop operation control (swing control) can make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo game, and it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game for the main game. On the other hand, in the case of a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game), player operations are disabled, and the possibility that the player will mistake the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) for the main game is relatively low. By not executing post-stop operation control (swing control) in such a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game), it is possible to highlight the post-stop operation control (swing control) in the pseudo game, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

As explained in the ninth embodiment, even if the player performs any operation while the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) is executed, the operation will be invalidated, and the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) will be invalidated. ) is completed, operations for the pseudo game are accepted (see step S1225 in FIG. 263, and steps S1262 and S1263 in FIG. 265). Further, as described in the ninth embodiment, the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) may be a lock effect without a reel effect, or may be a lock effect with a reel effect. If the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) is accompanied by a reel effect, when the reels stop in the reel effect, post-stop operation control (oscillation control) may be performed, or post-stop operation control may be performed. (oscillation control) may not be performed.

(D-6) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-5) above,
A predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing in FIG. 264, etc.)
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute a post-predetermined-operation stop control that stops the rotating reels;
When the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, and when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected. It is possible to stop the reel at a timing later than the predetermined timing after the detection of the reel.
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is detected in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute a stop control after a predetermined operation to stop the reel during rotation. When the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reel is stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, while when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the reel is stopped at a timing later than the predetermined timing after the predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) is detected. This allows the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (omitting the stop operation) at his/her will as an operation to progress the pseudo game, which meets the needs of players who wish to perform operations other than the stop operation in the pseudo game and further increases the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game. In addition, by delaying the timing of the reels stopping when a specific operation (MAX BET button 6a operation) is performed compared to when a stop operation is performed, it is possible to provide the player with innovative reel action, and even if the stop operation is omitted, the player can enjoy a simulated game.

The reel action when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not particularly limited, and the reels may be stopped after rotating more than when a stop operation is performed, The reels may be stopped after changing (slowing) the rotational speed (for example, by moving frame by frame) compared to when the stop operation was performed, or by changing the rotational direction (reversely rotating). The reels may be stopped at the top. Such reel action is realized by controlling the stepping motor 51 to drive based on a different excitation pattern when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed than when a stop operation is performed. be able to.

Note that such reel actions (extra rotation, change in rotation speed, change in rotation direction, etc.) may be performed even when a stop operation (stop button 8 operation) is performed in a pseudo game. For example, even after a stop operation is performed on at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), the reel is not stopped immediately, but is allowed to rotate once or multiple times (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). The reels may be stopped automatically when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the stop button 8 corresponding to the reel was operated. The one reel may be the first stop reel (the reel that was the target of the first stop operation) or the second stop reel (the reel that was the target of the second stop operation). However, it may be the third stop reel (the reel that is the target of the third stop operation). When the one reel is the first stop reel, the first stop reel may stop after the second to third stop reels stop, and similarly, the first reel may stop. In the case of the second stop reel, the second stop reel may stop after the third stop reel stops. Further, such a reel action may be performed for all reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R). Even if a reel action is performed, the reel will still be stopped due to the stop operation, so if the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the reel will be stopped. It is desirable that post-motion control (swing control) be executed.

(D-7) Any one of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-6),
The reel control means (main CPU 101 executing the process of FIG. 266) is capable of executing post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the stopped reel when the reel is stopped by the post-stop operation stop control in the pseudo game, while not executing the post-stop operation control when the reel is stopped in the pseudo game with the operation for progressing the pseudo game omitted.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the stopped reel can be executed, while when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the reel is stopped in the pseudo game, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed. When the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the reel is stopped, it is highly likely that the player himself has made the decision to omit the operation, so that the possibility that the player will mistake the pseudo game for the main game is relatively low. In such a case, by not executing the post-stop operation control (swing control), it is possible to highlight the post-stop operation control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game.

However, the system may be configured to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) even when the reels are stopped with the operation for progressing the pseudo game omitted in the pseudo game. Also, the system may be configured not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) when all remaining stop button operations are omitted, while it may be configured to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) when only the current stop button operation is omitted. For example, the system may be configured not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) when the reels are stopped by performing a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation), while it may be configured to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) when the reels are stopped because a predetermined time has passed without the stop button 8 being operated.

(D-8) Any one of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-7),
The reel control means (main CPU 101 executing the process of FIG. 264 and the like) is capable of executing automatic stop control to stop the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed without the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detection means in the pseudo game.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses without a stop operation being detected in a pseudo game, automatic stop control can be executed to stop the rotating reels. There is. As a result, it is possible to omit the stopping operation by waiting for a predetermined time at the player's will without performing the stopping operation as an operation for advancing the pseudo game, and it is possible to omit the stopping operation. In addition to being able to meet the needs of players who wish to play games, the degree of freedom of operation in pseudo games can be further increased.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been explained that if a predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated in the pseudo game, only the current stop button operation is omitted. The stop button operations that are omitted when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the stop button 8 being operated are not limited to this example, and all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

The automatic stop control may be the same as the stop control after the stop operation, or may be different from the stop control after the stop operation. When the automatic stop control is the same as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used in the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) and the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used in the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). On the other hand, when the automatic stop control is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used in the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) and the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used in the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are different controls (excitation data).

(D-9) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-8) above,
If a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when the predetermined condition is satisfied when two or more of the plurality of reels are rotating in the pseudo game, It is possible to stop one of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is met in a pseudo game, the operation for progressing the pseudo game can be omitted, and when a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is met while two or more of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are spinning in a pseudo game, one of the two or more reels can be stopped without relying on stop control after a stop operation. This makes it possible to omit the stop operation for one reel by meeting the predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time), which meets the needs of players who wish to omit the stop operation and further increases the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game.

In the ninth embodiment, an example was described in which the passage of a predetermined time was used as the above-mentioned predetermined condition, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and it is possible to appropriately use the operation of any operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.). For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (the MAX BET button 6a operation) is performed in a pseudo game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted, but in this case, only the current stop button operation may be omitted.

(D-10) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-9) above,
If a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when the predetermined condition is satisfied when two or more of the plurality of reels are rotating in the pseudo game, It is possible to stop all of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in a pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted, and in the pseudo game If a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied while two or more reels out of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, all of the two or more reels are stopped. It is configured so that it can be stopped without using post-operation stop control. As a result, it is possible to omit the stop operation for all rotating reels by satisfying a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation), which meets the needs of players who wish to omit the stop operation. In addition to being able to meet these demands, it is also possible to further reduce the operational burden.

In the ninth embodiment, an example was described in which the operation of the MAX BET button 6a was used as the above-mentioned predetermined condition, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and it is possible to appropriately use the operation of any operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.). In addition, the passage of a predetermined time may be used as the predetermined condition. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time has passed in a simulated game without the stop button 8 being operated, only the current stop button operation is omitted, but in this case, all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

(D-11) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-10) above,
Pseudo game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIGS. 250 and 271) capable of determining to execute the pseudo game;
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous period) (value of advantageous period game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous period payout number counter, a predetermined period ending means capable of ending the predetermined period when the value of the payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (operating condition of the limiter);
The pseudo game determining means is capable of determining to execute the pseudo game in the predetermined period, and also determines that the predetermined variable is to be executed during a specific period (quasi-limit processing (game count)) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) or the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when predetermined variables (value of the advantageous zone game number counter, value of the control game number counter, value of the advantageous zone payout counter, value of the control payout counter) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous zone) satisfy a specific condition (limiter operation condition), it is possible to end the predetermined period (advantageous zone). And, while it is possible to decide to execute a pseudo game during the predetermined period (advantageous zone), it is configured not to decide to execute a pseudo game during a specific period (period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated) before the predetermined variables (value of the advantageous zone game number counter, value of the control game number counter, value of the advantageous zone payout counter, value of the control payout counter) satisfy the specific condition. When pseudo games are played, it is thought that they create a sense of expectation among players, but by not playing pseudo games during a specific period (the period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), it is possible to prevent this expectation from being excessively aroused.

As described in the eighth embodiment, it may be configured such that when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not executed. The pseudo bonus transition lottery may be a lottery based on an advantageous section winning sub-flag (internal winning combination) or an advantageous section winning sub-flag (a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed). As explained in the eighth embodiment, the specific period is not limited to the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, but may be a predetermined period (advantageous section). It is possible to configure the system so that the decision to execute the pseudo game is not made in any period before the end of the game.

(D-12) Any one of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-11),
A predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation by a player (operation of the start lever 7 or operation of a bet button);
a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (such as a "hit the lever" image or a bet request image) for encouraging a player to perform the predetermined operation;
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, the pseudo game can be started.
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is capable of displaying images (such as a "hit the lever" image or a bet request image) to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation (such as operating the start lever 7 or the bet button), and is configured to be able to start a simulated game when a predetermined operation (such as operating the start lever 7 or the bet button) is detected. This allows the player to participate in a simulated game of his or her own will, and provides the player with the opportunity to flexibly decide whether or not to play a simulated game depending on the game situation.

In the ninth embodiment, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, after locking is performed at the start of the pseudo game, a predetermined operation (start lever 7 It has been explained that a transition is made to a pseudo game (the rotation for a pseudo game is started) upon the execution of an operation). In addition, when a lock performance corresponding to any of the lock performance numbers "3" to "5" is selected in a unit game in which a replay wins, a predetermined operation (bet button operation) is performed. It has been explained that the game shifts to a pseudo game (the rotation for the pseudo game starts). In addition, when a lock performance corresponding to any of lock performance numbers "3" to "5" is selected in a unit game in which a role other than replay wins, a predetermined operation (start lever 7) is performed. It has been explained that this is an opportunity to shift to a pseudo game (the rotation for the pseudo game is started). In this way, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is adopted as a condition for starting a pseudo game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is performed. This may be used as an opportunity to start a pseudo game.

If a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) for starting the pseudo game is not performed, the pseudo game may be switched to when a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, or the pseudo game may not be switched to when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed (the pseudo game may be canceled). The pseudo game start lock may be a lock that lasts for the predetermined waiting time. In this case, the pseudo game start lock may be configured to accept only a predetermined operation, and to invalidate other game operations even if they are performed. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and any operation of an arbitrary operation unit (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) may be appropriately adopted.

[Tenth embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Also, explanations of portions that apply to the tenth embodiment from the explanations of the first to ninth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to ninth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the tenth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

In addition, even if the shape is different from the slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for configurations that have similar functions for convenience. In addition, even if the shape is the same or the process is the same as the slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Setting suggestion execution processing>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process for executing a setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that can suggest setting values set for the pachi-slot machine 1. As explained in the first embodiment, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game (six levels of setting 1 to setting 6), and the lower the setting value (closer to setting 1), the higher the setting value is. ) The degree of advantage of the player becomes relatively low, and the higher the setting value (closer to setting 6), the degree of advantage of the player becomes relatively higher.

The setting suggestion effects include setting suggestion effect I, setting suggestion effect II, setting suggestion effect III, setting suggestion effect IV, and setting suggestion effect V. Setting suggestion effect I is an effect that can only occur when the setting value is any of settings 2 to 6 (it cannot occur if the setting value is setting 1). Setting suggestion effect II is an effect that can only occur when the setting value is any of settings 3 to 6 (it cannot occur if the setting value is setting 1 or 2).

Setting suggestion performance III is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is any of settings 4 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 3). The setting suggestion performance IV is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is either setting 5 or 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 4). The setting suggestion performance V is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is setting 6 (and cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 5).

In other words, when setting suggestion effect I occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 2 or higher, when setting suggestion effect II occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 3 or higher, when setting suggestion effect III occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 4 or higher, when setting suggestion effect IV occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 5 or higher, and when setting suggestion effect V occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 6. In this way, it is possible to use setting suggestion effects I to V to give suggestions about the setting value.

In each setting suggestion presentation, an image (character image) suggesting the setting value is displayed on the main display device 210. In setting suggestion presentation I, character image I (a specified character image) is displayed on the main display device 210, suggesting that the setting value is setting 2 or higher. In setting suggestion presentation II, character image II (a character image different from character image I) is displayed on the main display device 210, suggesting that the setting value is setting 3 or higher.

Furthermore, in setting suggestion performance III, character image III (a character image different from character image I and character image II) is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is setting 4 or higher. Ru. In setting suggestion performance IV, a character image IV (a character image different from character image I, character image II, and character image III) is displayed on the main display device 210, and thereby the setting value is set to 5 or more. This suggests that.

In the setting suggestion effect V, a character image V (a character image different from character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV) is displayed on the main display device 210, and thereby the setting value is set. It is suggested that it is 6. Image data corresponding to character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V are stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3), respectively.

Further, the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 when the AT state ends. Although not shown, when the AT state termination condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 generates AT state termination command data and transmits the generated AT state termination command data to the sub control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the AT state has ended.

As explained in the first embodiment, the play period in the AT state is managed by game number management, set number management, payout number management, difference in number management, navigation count management, etc. The main CPU 101 updates these variables (counters) in step S151 of FIG. 31. Then, when the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 101 transmits AT state end command data to the sub-control circuit 200.

Even if the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, if the AT state will start again from the next game (for example, if a 1G consecutive stock is held or if a ceiling shortening lottery is won), the main CPU 101 may not send the AT state end command data to the sub-control circuit 200. In other words, when the predetermined AT state play period ends and the AT state is not extended, the AT state end command data may be sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200.

In the setting suggestion performance execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not formal login has been performed (step S1501). As will be described later, formal login is performed by the player registering as a member and entering a password. When an operation for formal login is performed, the sub CPU 201 sets the formal login flag to ON. In the process of step S1501, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the official login flag is set on. If it is determined that an official login has not been performed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that an official login has been performed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect setting is enabled (step S1502). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "valid" is set as the setting suggestion effect setting on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is not valid, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is enabled, the sub-CPU 201 identifies a period for the setting suggestion effect (step S1503). The setting suggestion effect periods include "Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J".

"Period A" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 1 to 1000. "Period B" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 1001 to 2000. "Period C" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 2001 to 3000. "Period D" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 3001 to 4000. "Period E" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 4001 to 5000. "Period F" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 5001 to 6000. "Period G" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 6001 to 7000. "Period H" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 7001 to 8000. "Period I" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is between 8001 and 9000. "Period J" is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 9001 or more.

As described below, the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281) allows the setting suggestion effect type to be set for each of "Period A," "Period B," "Period C," "Period D," "Period E," "Period F," "Period G," "Period H," "Period I," and "Period J." The setting suggestion effect types provided are "Type A," "Type B," and "Type C." In this embodiment, the type of setting suggestion effect that occurs can differ depending on which setting suggestion effect type is set among "Type A," "Type B," and "Type C."

The number of games after power-on is the number of unit games played in the pachi-slot machine 1 since the power was turned on, and is managed in the number-of-games-after-power-on counter. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the number of games after power-on counter by 1 after executing the process of step S14 in FIG. Information indicating the value of the number-of-games-after-power-on counter is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, so that the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize the number of games after the power-on.

In the processing of step S1503, the sub-CPU 201 identifies one of the 10 setting suggestion presentation periods ("Period A," "Period B," "Period C," "Period D," "Period E," "Period F," "Period G," "Period H," "Period I," and "Period J") to which the current number of games played since power-on belongs. For example, if the current number of games played since power-on is 100, the sub-CPU 201 identifies "Period A" as the setting suggestion presentation period, and if the current number of games played since power-on is 7777, the sub-CPU 201 identifies "Period H" as the setting suggestion presentation period.

Next, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not this is the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion presentation period identified in step S1503 (step S1504). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not this is the first time that the AT state end command data has been received from the main control circuit 100 during the setting suggestion presentation period. If it is determined that this is not the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion presentation period, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that this is the first time that the AT state has ended in the setting suggestion presentation period specified in step S1503, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion presentation type set for the setting suggestion presentation period is " Type A" is determined (step S1505). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type A", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type A (step S1506). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type A will be explained later using FIG. 276. After executing the process in step S1506, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1505, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "type A", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect type for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503. It is determined whether the selected setting suggestion effect type is "type B" (step S1507). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type B", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type B (step S1508). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type B will be explained later using FIG. 277. After executing the process in step S1508, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1507, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "type B", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect type for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503. It is determined whether the selected setting suggestion effect type is "type C" (step S1509). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type C", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type C (step S1510). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type C will be explained later using FIG. 278. If it is determined in step S1509 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is not "Type C", or after executing the process in step S1510, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. do.

<Setting suggestion execution processing for type A>
FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the type A setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit.

The type A setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 276 is a process performed in step S1506 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the process of executing the setting suggestion effect for Type A, the sub-CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1521).

If it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 1 (it is any of setting 2 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 selects the setting suggestion effect I. (Step S1522). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210.

If it is determined in step S1521 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), or after executing the processing of step S1522, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Type B setting suggestion performance execution process>
Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B performed in the sub-control circuit.

The type B setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 277 is a process performed in step S1508 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the Type B setting suggestion performance execution process, the sub-CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1541). If it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is not setting 1 (is any of settings 2 to 6) among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 2 among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1542). If it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 2 among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub-CPU 201 executes setting suggestion presentation I (step S1543). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. As a result, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1543, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1542 that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is not setting 2 (is any of settings 3 to 6) among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 3 among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1544). If it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 3 among the six setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub-CPU 201 selects either setting suggestion presentation I or setting suggestion presentation II by lottery (step S1545). The probability that setting suggestion presentation I and the probability that setting suggestion presentation II are selected can each be designed arbitrarily, but here these probabilities are assumed to be the same (1/2 each).

Then, the sub-CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545 (step S1546). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to character image I or image data corresponding to character image II, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545. As a result, either character image I or character image II is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1546, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1544 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 3 (any of settings 4 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of the device 1 is setting 4 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1547). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 4 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, and setting suggestion presentation III. One of them is selected by lottery (step S1548). The probability that setting suggestion performance I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance II is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion performance III is selected can be designed arbitrarily, but here, these probabilities are are the same (1/3 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548 (step S1549). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, or image data corresponding to character image III, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548. Set. As a result, one of the character images I, II, and III is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1549, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1547 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 4 (it is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the machine 1 is setting 5 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1550). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 5 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, setting suggestion presentation III, and setting suggestion presentation III. , one of the setting suggestion effects IV is selected by lottery (step S1551). The probability that setting suggestion performance I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance II is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance III is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion performance IV is selected can be designed arbitrarily. However, here it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (each 1/4).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1551 (step S1552). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, image data corresponding to character image III, or , sets image data corresponding to character image IV. As a result, any one of character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1552, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1550 that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is not setting 5 (it is setting 6) among the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 selects by lottery one of setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, setting suggestion presentation III, setting suggestion presentation IV, and setting suggestion presentation V (step S1553). The probability that setting suggestion presentation I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion presentation II is selected, the probability that setting suggestion presentation III is selected, the probability that setting suggestion presentation IV is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion presentation V is selected can each be designed arbitrarily, but here these probabilities are assumed to be the same (each 1/5).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1553 (step S1554). In this process, the sub CPU 201 selects image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, image data corresponding to character image III, character Image data corresponding to image IV or image data corresponding to character image V is set. As a result, any one of the character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1554, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Setting suggestion execution processing for type C>
FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the type C setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends.

The type C setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 278 is a process performed in step S1510 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub-control circuit 200.

In the type C setting suggestion performance execution process, the sub-CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1561). If it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 1 (any of settings 2 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value 1 is setting 2 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1562). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 2 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance I (step S1563). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1563, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1562 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 2 (any of settings 3 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the set value of the device 1 is set 3 out of the six types of set values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1564). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 3 out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance II (step S1565). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image II. Thereby, character image II is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1565, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1564 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 3 (any of settings 4 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the machine 1 is setting 4 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1566). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 4 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance III (step S1567). In this process, sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to character image III. Thereby, character image III is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1567, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1566 that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is not setting 4 (is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 5 among the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1568). If it is determined that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is setting 5 among the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub-CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion presentation IV (step S1569). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image IV. As a result, the character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process of step S1569, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1568 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 5 (setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect V. (Step S1570). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image V. Thereby, the character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1570, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

Figure 279 shows the AT end screen displayed on the main display device 210. The AT end screen is a screen that is displayed on the main display device 210 when the AT state ends. The AT end screen has an AT end display area 1251 in the approximate center of the screen, an AT state game result display area 1252 at the top of the screen, and a setting suggestion image display area 1253 at the bottom right of the screen. The AT end display area 1251 displays an image indicating that the AT state has ended. The AT state game result display area 1252 displays an image indicating the result of the game played in the AT state (for example, the number of medals paid out). The setting suggestion image display area 1253 displays one of the character images I to V as a setting suggestion image. In the example shown in Figure 279, character image V is displayed, indicating that the setting value has been confirmed to be setting 6.

<Hall menu screen>
Figure 280 shows an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

As described in the first embodiment, when the administrator at the game parlor side performs a setting confirmation operation or a setting change operation, a hall menu (hall menu screen) is displayed. The setting confirmation operation is an operation for confirming the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1. The setting change operation is an operation for changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The setting confirmation operation and the setting change operation are each performed using the setting key switch 52. For example, the setting key switch 52 is turned on when an administrator at the gaming facility inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turns off when the setting key switch 52 is returned to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. When the power to the pachislot machine 1 is off, turning the setting key switch 52 on and then on will result in a state in which the settings can be changed (setting change state), and turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power to the pachislot machine 1 is still on will result in a state in which the settings can be confirmed (setting confirmation state).

When the setting confirmation state is entered in this way, the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 280 is displayed on the main display device 210. A similar hall menu screen is also displayed on the main display device 210 when the settings are changed. When the setting confirmation state is reached, command data indicating this state (setting confirmation start command data) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Furthermore, when a setting change state is entered, command data indicating this (setting change start command data) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 280, the hall menu screen includes a hall menu item display area 1300 on the left side of the screen, a button display area 1310 at the bottom of the screen at approximately the center in the horizontal direction, and a preview display area 1320 on the right side of the screen. .

The hall menu item display area 1300 displays multiple hall menu items. The hall menu items include time setting, total medal information, setting change/check history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, limit setting, automatic settlement setting, and setting suggestion performance setting. The time setting, total medal information, setting change/check history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, limit setting, and automatic settlement setting are as described in the first embodiment. The setting suggestion performance setting will be described later using FIG. 281.

In the button display area 1310, images corresponding to the presentation button group (see FIG. 3) are displayed. The production button group includes a decision button arranged in the center and selection buttons (up selection button, down selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) arranged around the decision button. By operating each selection button, the game parlor manager can select any one of the plural hall menu items. In FIG. 280, currently selected hole menu items are shown surrounded by solid lines, and unselected hole menu items are shown surrounded by dotted lines. By operating the decision button while one hole menu item is selected, the manager at the game parlor side can decide on that hole menu item. Note that the screen in which "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

The preview display area 1320 displays a preview screen for the selected hall menu item among the plurality of hall menu items. FIG. 280 shows the time setting screen being previewed in a state where "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item. When making a new setting (for example, time setting) for one hole menu item, the manager at the gaming parlor operates the enter button while the hole menu item is selected. As a result, when the relevant hall menu item is determined, a screen for making the new settings (for example, a time setting screen) is displayed, and by operating the select button and enter button on the screen, the new settings can be changed. Settings can be made.

Furthermore, in the extremely small area at the bottom right of the hall menu screen, the words "Settings are being confirmed" are displayed in the settings confirmation state, and the words "Settings are being changed" are displayed in the settings change state. This allows the game parlor manager to understand whether the settings are confirmed or changed. The hall menu screen displayed in the settings confirmation state and the hall menu screen displayed in the settings change state differ only in the characters, and the hall menu item display area 1300, button display area 1310, and preview display area 1320 are different. The contents are the same.

It is possible to configure the display of the hall menu screen to end when the setting confirmation state or the setting change state ends. When the setting key switch 52 is turned off in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, command data indicating this is sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state has ended.

Alternatively, if a setting change is made in the setting change state, the hall menu screen may be displayed even after the setting change state ends. In the hall menu screen displayed at this time, "End Hall Menu" may be displayed in addition to the hall menu items shown in FIG. 280. When the setting change state ends, games can be played, and the manager of the gaming facility can select and confirm "End Hall Menu" by operating the selection button and decision button, thereby ending the display of the hall menu screen and transitioning to the game screen. On the other hand, since games cannot be played in the setting confirmation state or setting change state, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be ended by operating the selection button and decision button.

As described in the first embodiment, settings can be changed by operating the reset switch 53 in the settings change state. When a setting change is made, initialization command data (see step S27 in FIG. 24) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, and the initialization command data includes the setting change. Contains information indicating what has been done. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the settings have been changed.

<Setting suggestion effect setting screen>
Figures 281 to 283 are figures showing an example of a setting suggestion performance setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281 is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when "setting suggestion effect setting" is selected and determined as a hall menu item on the hall menu screen. The administrator at the game parlor side can set a setting suggestion performance type for each setting suggestion performance period by operating the selection button and enter button on the setting suggestion performance setting screen.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen has an operation item display area 1330 at the top of the screen, an enable/disable setting area 1340 located below the operation item display area 1330, and a setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350 located below the enable/disable setting area 1340.

In the operation item display area 1330, "return", "determination", "setting history", "password", and "initialization" are displayed as items that can be operated by the administrator of the game parlor. The administrator at the game parlor side selects one of "Back", "Confirm", "Setting history", "Password", and "Initialization" by operating the selection button and the decision button. can be determined. In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, “invalid” and “valid” are displayed as selection items for invalidating or validating the setting suggestion effect setting. The manager of the game parlor can select and decide either "invalid" or "valid" by operating the selection button and the decision button.

The setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350 has 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “ "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J") are displayed, and next to each setting suggestion production period, "None" and "Type A" are displayed as the setting suggestion production type. ”, “Type B”, and “Type C” are displayed. By operating the selection button and the decision button, the administrator of the game parlor selects "none", "type A", "type B", and "type C" for each of the ten types of setting suggestion production periods. You can select/determine one of them.

As explained using FIGS. 275 to 278, "Type A" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling so that character image I among displayable character images (setting suggestion images) always appears. . "Type B" is a setting suggestion production type for controlling displayable character images (setting suggestion images) to appear uniformly. "Type C" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling to appear the best (capable of making the most advantageous suggestion) character image among displayable character images (setting suggestion images). "None" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling so that the character image does not appear. The character images that can be displayed are character image I when the setting value is setting 2, character image I and character image II when the setting value is setting 3, and character images when the setting value is setting 4. In some cases, they are character image I, character image II, and character image III, and when the setting value is setting 5, they are character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV, When the setting value is setting 6, the characters are character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V.

The administrator of the gaming parlor can set the setting suggestion effect type by following the steps (i) to (iv) below.
(i) In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, select and determine "valid" by operating the selection button and the determination button.
(ii) In the setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350, by operating the selection button and the enter button, the setting suggestion effect type for "period A" is set to "none", "type A", "type B", and Select and determine one of "Type C".
(iii) Regarding "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J" , repeat the same operation as (ii) above.
(iv) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button.

As a result, setting suggestion effect types are set for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods, depending on the currently set setting values and the contents selected and determined in (ii) and (iii) above. Then, when the AT state ends, the setting suggestion effect described above will be performed (see FIGS. 275 to 278).

Here, although not shown, when the operation of (iv) above is performed, a message "Do you want to register this setting suggestion effect setting?" is displayed. In response to this, when "YES" is selected and confirmed by operating the selection button and the decision button, the contents selected and confirmed in (ii) and (iii) above are registered. The registered contents are called setting suggestion effect setting presets. The setting suggestion effect setting presets indicate the correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected and confirmed for that setting suggestion effect period. When registering a setting suggestion effect setting preset, it is possible to give the setting suggestion effect setting preset a name (for example, "event day custom", "collection day custom", etc.) by performing a specified operation. The name (setting suggestion effect setting name) is saved together with the setting suggestion effect setting preset. In other words, the sub-CPU 201 stores the setting suggestion effect setting preset and the setting suggestion effect setting name in the sub-RAM 203 in association with each other.

When the operation (iv) above is performed, a password is displayed (issued). This password is referred to as the setting suggestion effect setting password. The setting suggestion effect setting password is an encrypted version of the contents selected and determined in (ii) and (iii) above (the correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected and determined for that setting suggestion effect period). The sub-CPU 201 generates the setting suggestion effect setting password by converting the information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string consisting of multiple symbols (including letters and numbers). The generated setting suggestion effect setting password is displayed on the main display device 210. The slot machine 1 has a configuration such as a table for converting the information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string, and is capable of determining the setting suggestion effect setting password. The technology related to password generation is a conventionally known technology in the field of gaming machines (see, for example, JP 2015-139519 A), so a detailed description is omitted.

If the above setting suggestion effect setting preset is registered, the administrator of the game parlor side can suggest settings by following the steps (v) to (viii) below instead of the steps (i) to (iv) above. You can also set the production type.
(v) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "setting history" by operating the selection button and the decision button.
(vi) The screen changes according to the above (v), and a list of registered setting suggestion effect setting presets (names for setting suggestion effect setting) is displayed.
(vii) By operating the selection button and the determination button, one of the setting suggestion effect setting names displayed in (vi) above is selected and determined.
(viii) Return to the setting suggestion effect setting screen by the above (vii), and select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button in the operation item display area 1330.

On the setting suggestion effect setting screen in (viii) above, the setting suggestion effect setting preset corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting name selected and determined in (vii) above has the same correspondence as the setting suggestion effect setting screen, and each setting suggestion effect period is The setting suggestion effect type is selected and determined. Thereby, it is possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same content as the setting suggestion effect setting preset.

Furthermore, instead of the steps (i) to (iv) above, the manager at the gaming parlor can also set the setting suggestion performance type by following the steps (ix) to (xii) below.
(ix) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "password" by operating the selection button and the decision button.
(x) The screen changes according to (ix) above, and a password input screen (a screen on which a plurality of symbols are arranged) is displayed.
(xi) In the password input screen, by operating the selection button and the decision button, input a symbol string known in advance (password for setting suggestion effect setting).
(xii) Return to the setting suggestion effect setting screen through the above (xi), and select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button in the operation item display area 1330.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen in (xii) above has the same correspondence as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password input in (xi) above (correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and setting suggestion effect type). In relation to this, the setting suggestion presentation type is selected and determined for each setting suggestion presentation period. The sub CPU 201 decodes the information encrypted using the setting suggestion effect setting password input in (xi) above, and reflects the decrypted content on the setting suggestion effect setting screen in (xii) above. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a configuration such as a table for specifying the encrypted information, and is capable of decoding the information. Since the technology related to password deciphering is a conventionally well-known technology in the gaming machine field (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-081521), a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As a result, by recording the setting suggestion effect setting password issued in the past and inputting the setting suggestion effect setting password, the setting suggestion effect will be suggested with the same content as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password. It is possible to set the performance type. Further, even in gaming machines other than the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same content as the pachi-slot machine 1 by inputting the setting suggestion effect setting password.

In addition, when "Initialize" is selected and confirmed by operating the select button and the confirm button in the operation item display area 1330, the currently set setting suggestion performance settings are cancelled. As a result, "none" is set as the setting suggestion performance type for all setting suggestion performance periods. In other words, the setting suggestion performance settings are initialized. This type of initialization is performed only when "Initialize" is selected and confirmed on the setting suggestion performance setting screen, and the setting suggestion performance settings are not initialized even if the setting value is changed. In addition, when "Back" is selected and confirmed by operating the select button and the confirm button in the operation item display area 1330, the screen switches from the setting suggestion performance setting screen to the hall menu screen.

As explained above, the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281 allows the setting suggestion effect type to be set for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods ("Period A," "Period B," "Period C," "Period D," "Period E," "Period F," "Period G," "Period H," "Period I," and "Period J").

On the other hand, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 19 times," "AT ends 20 times," "AT ends 21 to 29 times," "AT ends 30 times," and "AT ends 31 times ~"). This is what we can do. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the AT state ends.

"AT End 1 Time" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when the first AT state ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 2-9 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when any of the 2nd to 9th AT states ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 10 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when the 10th AT state ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 11-19 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when any of the 11th to 19th AT states ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 20 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when the 20th AT state ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 21-29 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when any of the 21st to 29th AT states ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 30 Times" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when the 30th AT state ends after the power is turned on. "AT End 31 Times or later" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when the 31st or subsequent AT state ends after the power is turned on.

A setting suggestion effect type can be set for such an AT end number by a procedure similar to the procedure explained using FIG. 281. As a result, when the AT state ends, one of the setting suggestion effects I to V will be set depending on the currently set setting value and the number of AT states after the power is turned on. It is possible to perform suggestive performances. For example, if setting 6 is set as the setting value and "Type C" is set for "AT end once", the displayable The best character image (namely, character image V) among the character images can be made to appear.

In addition, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. , "16:00 to 18:00," "18:00 to 20:00," "20:00 to 22:00," and "22:00 to 23:00"). It is said that A setting suggestion effect type can be set for such a time range by a procedure similar to the procedure explained using FIG. 281. Thereby, when the AT state ends, any one of the setting suggestion performances I to V can be performed depending on the currently set setting value and the time when the AT state ends. For example, if setting 6 is set as the setting value and "Type C" is set for "10:00 to 11:00", when the AT state ends at 10:50, the displayable The best character image (namely, character image V) among the character images can be made to appear.

<Login>
Fig. 284(A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the main display device. Fig. 284(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen. Fig. 285 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character. Fig. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a game history screen. Fig. 287 is a diagram showing a game system.

When the decision button of the presentation button group is operated when no game is being played, the sub-control circuit 200 calls up the menu screen shown in FIG. 284(A) and displays it on the main display device 210. As described above, the presentation button group includes a cross key (up selection button, down selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) and a decision button; when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor moves in the direction of operation, and when the player operates the decision button, the item pointed to by the selection cursor is selected (decided).

As shown in FIG. 284 (B), the menu screen has main menus such as "Custom Game," "Volume Adjustment," "Game Data," "Payouts/Layout," and "Special Site," with some main menus having more detailed submenus. For example, the main menu "Custom Game" has submenus such as "Character Selection," "Easy Start," "Enter Password," "View Intermediate Record," "Record and Finish," and "Member Registration." The submenu "Character Selection" is a menu for customizing the characters used in the effects performed on the main display device 210.

The submenus ``Easy Start'' to ``Membership Registration'' are menus used for registered games by players. In recent Pachislot machines, by registering a player who plays the game, the player is sometimes given benefits that do not affect the ball output compared to a player who does not register. Specifically, when a player is registered, the sub-control circuit 200 records the game history after registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the probability of winning a small role), as well as the game history after the registration. (including the performance history of the performance), and provides certain benefits based on this history. This game history can include not only information regarding the current game, but also information regarding the previous game. Specifically, the gaming history of each player is managed on the server, and when playing a game, the server notifies the gaming machine via a mobile phone etc., so that the player can easily check the gaming history of the previous game. You can play games while inheriting your history.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu operated when only storing the history of the current game without carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a simplified login. The submenu "Enter Password" is a menu operated when storing the history of the current game while carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a formal login. Here, a simplified login is completed by simply operating the submenu "Easy Start", whereas a formal login is performed by registering as a member and then entering a password into the slot machine 1. Therefore, when comparing a simplified login with a formal login, it can be said that the registration procedure for the simplified login is simpler than that of the formal login, and conversely, it can be said that the formal login is a more complicated registration procedure than that of the simplified login.

The submenu "View Interim Records" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to check the interim records of the game history accumulated up to that point. The submenu "Record and Exit" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to record the game history accumulated up to that point on the server. When the submenus "View Interim Records" and "Record and Exit" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the pachislot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or the server. The submenu "Member Registration" is a menu operated to perform the initial registration of the player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 285 has a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessories" selection field, and each selection field has a plurality of selectable icons. provided. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the determination icon is operated.

The "Character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control circuit 200 determines one character selected in the "Character" selection field from among multiple types of characters. The "Costume" selection field is used to select a costume for the character, the "Pose" selection field is used to select a pose for the character, and the "Accessory" selection field is used to select an accessory for the character. The "Costume" selection field to the "Accessory" selection field are each used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessories) of the character. The sub-control circuit 200 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from multiple display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection field.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by operating buttons using a group of presentation buttons. When the character is customized, the sub control circuit 200 selects the character selected in the "Character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "Costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "Accessories" selection field. The pose selected in the "pose" selection column is displayed on the main display device 210.

In the custom game, a performance is performed using characters according to the content of the customization. A custom game starts when a determination icon is operated (a custom start operation is performed), and ends when an end icon (not shown) is operated (a custom end operation is performed).

FIG. 286(A) is the first page of the game history called from the submenu "Game History 1", and FIG. 286(B) is the second page of the game history called from the submenu "Game History 2". be. As shown in FIG. 286(A), the first page of the game history displays the total number of games, current number of games, bonus number, CZ number, ART number, top-up zone 1 and 2 times, and top-up zone 3 times. be done. In this way, on the first page of the gaming history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times advantageous gaming conditions for the player, such as bonuses and ART, have been played are displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a "Go to next page" icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this "Go to next page" icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called up. Note that while the first page of the game history can be displayed by all players, the second page of the game history can only be displayed by players who have properly logged in; it cannot be displayed by players who are not logged in or players who have simply logged in. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 200 makes the "Go to next page" icon invisible or unselectable when no login has been performed or when only a simple login has been performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the second page of the gaming history displays the number of times that watermelon ("F_watermelon") was determined as the internal winning combination (number of wins), the number of times that chance A ("F_chance combination 1") was won, the number of times that chance B ("F_chance combination 2") was won, the number of times that weak cherry ("F_weak cherry") was won, the number of times that strong cherry ("F_strong cherry") was won, and the number of times that confirmed cherry ("F_confirmed cherry") was won. In other words, the second page of the gaming history displays the number of times that so-called rare combinations have been won.

By displaying the number of times a rare combination has been won only to players who have properly logged in, the pachislot machine 1 can give a special benefit (display of the number of times a rare combination has been won) that does not directly affect the game to players who have taken the trouble to go through the proper procedure to register. This encourages players who wish to see the number of times a rare combination has been won to make the proper registration, which in turn makes players feel more attached to the gaming machine and increases its operation.

In addition, the Pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history, which shows the number of times a rare combination has been won, to players who log in using the simplified login procedure. This prevents players from peeking at the results of other players' games after they have played, by simply logging in using the simplified login procedure.

The formal login will be explained in more detail below with reference to FIG. 287. The gaming system 1500 comprises a pachinko slot machine 1, a management server 1510, and a portable terminal device 1520. The portable terminal device 1520 and the management server 1510 can exchange data with each other by communicating via the Internet.

Prior to starting the game, the player receives a password from the management server 1510 while running a predetermined application on the mobile terminal 1520 that the player owns. The password is an encrypted history of games played up to the last time. The management server 1510 stores game history information indicating the history of games played up to the previous time, and the management server 1510 stores the game history in symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols (including letters and numbers). Convert to column. The password is a symbol string corresponding to such gaming history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 1520 by performing a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, to start the game, the player displays the menu screen (see FIG. 284(A)) on the main display device 210 by operating the effect button group on the Pachislot machine 1, and displays the main menu on the menu screen. Select "Custom Game". As a result, you can select one of the following submenu screens: ``Character selection'', ``Easy start'', ``Enter password'', ``View progress recording'', ``Record and finish'', and ``Membership registration''. A screen for selection (see FIG. 284(B)) is displayed on the main display device 210.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. This causes a screen for entering a password (password entry screen) to be displayed on the main display device 210. The player can officially log in by operating the buttons on the password entry screen using the group of effect buttons and entering the password issued by the management server 1510. This allows the history of the current game to be accumulated while carrying over the history of previous games.

The gaming history (gaming history) includes the total number of games played, the number of times that a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of wins and winning probability for each role, and the number of winnings for each role. In addition to the number of media inserted and paid out, the history of performed performances (performance history) is included. The performance history includes the number of times various performances have occurred, as well as history regarding custom games (character customization). The history regarding custom games includes the number of times various characters have been selected, and the game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). The game history for each type of selected character includes the number of games played with various characters customized (for example, the number of games played with character A selected, and the number of games played with character A selected). The number of times a specific game state (e.g., bonus, ART, etc.) occurred while various characters were customized (e.g., the number of times a specific game state (e.g., bonus, ART, etc.) occurred when character A was selected). (the number of times a specific game state has occurred in a state where character B is selected, the number of times a specific game state has occurred in a state where character B is selected), etc.

In the management server 1510, such gaming history is managed in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 1510 stores the number of games played with character A selected by one player and the number of games played with character B selected, and the number of games played with character B selected by one player. The number of games played with character A selected and the number of games played with character B selected are also stored. This allows the management server 1510 to compare the gaming histories of each player. The password also includes encrypted results of comparison of each player's gaming history (rank determined by a predetermined method).

To end the game, the player selects the submenu "record and end" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210. The two-dimensional code is obtained by encoding the address information of the management server 1510 and the game history information accumulated in the pachi-slot machine 1. The player can take an image of the two-dimensional code using the camera included in the mobile terminal 1520. The mobile terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from image data obtained when the camera captures an image of the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. Further, game history information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510. As a result, the game history is managed by the management server 1510.

To officially log in for the first time, it is necessary to register as a member. To register as a member, the player selects the submenu "Register as Member" on the submenu screen. This causes a two-dimensional code to be displayed on the main display device 210. This two-dimensional code is a coded version of the address information of the management server 1510 and information related to member registration. The player can capture the two-dimensional code with the camera of the mobile terminal device 1520. The mobile terminal device 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. Also, information related to member registration is transmitted from the mobile terminal device 1520 to the management server 1510. This causes an ID for the player to be set in the management server 1510.

Here, in FIG. 275, it has been explained that the setting suggestion effect is performed when formal login is performed (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not performed unless the user registers as a member). Thereby, it is possible to urge the player to perform formal login (membership registration). However, the conditions for performing the setting suggestion performance are not limited to this example. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be performed not only when a formal login is performed but also when a simple login is performed. In addition, even if formal login is not performed or simple login is not performed (regardless of whether login is performed or not), the setting suggestion effect may be performed. . Alternatively, if the setting suggestion effect setting screen is configured so that it is possible to set whether or not to link the setting suggestion effect and login ("enabled" or "invalid"), and "enabled" is set. , a setting suggestion effect will be performed on the condition that the user is logged in (as above, a formal login may be required, or a simple login may be sufficient). If "invalid" is set, the setting suggestion effect may be performed regardless of whether or not there is login.

In the above, it has been explained that the screens shown in Figures 284 to 286 are displayed on the main display device 210, but these screens may also be displayed on a dedicated touch panel LCD provided separately from the main display device 210. This allows the player to perform operations on the menu screen even during play (when a performance is being performed on the main display device 210).

Character customization may also be performed by operating the portable terminal device 1520 owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member may have a character customization screen (similar to that shown in FIG. 285) displayed on the portable terminal device 1520 while a specific application is running on the portable terminal device, and may customize a character by performing touch operations or button operations on the character customization screen on the portable terminal device 1520. In this case, the content of the customization may be configured to be transmittable to the slot machine 1 via the management server 1510, or may be configured to be transmittable directly from the portable terminal device 1520 to the slot machine 1 by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like.

<Variations of setting suggestions>
Figures 288 to 298 are diagrams showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation.

Although the setting suggestion effects have been described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform setting suggestion effects different from the setting suggestion effects described above. The setting suggestion effects described below may be performed in place of the setting suggestion effects described above, or may be performed separately from the setting suggestion effects described above (both the setting suggestion effects described above and the setting suggestion effects described below may be performed in one pachislot machine 1). As the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effects described below, any of the character images I to V described above may be used.

As an example of a setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 288(a), when the number of games remaining until the AT state ends is less than or equal to a predetermined number (100), a character image "Ending" is displayed on the main display device 210. This shows that the ending period of the AT state has started. In FIG. 288(b), after the state shown in FIG. 288(a), the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so the lower cherry wins, and the text image "Congratulations!" appears on the main display device 210. is displayed, indicating that the character image indicates that it has been determined that the value is higher than the relatively high setting value (setting 5). FIG. 288(c) shows a character image "The end" being displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends after the state shown in FIG. 288(b). Then, in FIG. 288(d), after the state shown in FIG. 288(c), the screen switches, and all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210, so that the highest setting value (setting 6) is set. It indicates that something has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 288, when the rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the ending period of the AT state, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 289(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 289(b), after the state shown in FIG. 289(a), the main image is an image showing that the gauge is rising because the rare combination has been determined as an internal winning combination (lower cherry has won). It shows how it is displayed on the display device 210. FIG. 289(c) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 289(b), a character image "Rush End" is displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends. In FIG. 289(d), after the state shown in FIG. 289(c), the screen switches and all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the setting value is the highest (setting 6). This shows that it is suggested that this has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 289, the gauge increases (the meter accumulates) each time a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the AT state (which may be limited to the ending period of the AT state). controlled by. The more the meter is filled, the higher the probability that setting suggestions will be performed.

As another example of a setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 290(a), a text image "First Rush Start" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the first set of AT state has started as a result of the first hit, and a specified character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the value is determined to be equal to or greater than one setting value (setting 2). In FIG. 290(b), after the state shown in FIG. 290(a), a text image "Sixth Rush Continued" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the sixth set of AT state has started as the AT state continues (is extended), while no character image is displayed on the main display device 210. In FIG. 290(c), after the state shown in FIG. 290(b), a text image "Rush continued 8th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, showing that the AT state has been extended (continued) and the 8th set of AT state has started, and the number of character images displayed on the main display device 210 is increased from the state shown in FIG. 290(a), suggesting that the AT state has been confirmed to be equal to or higher than one setting value (setting 3) through the text image. In FIG. 290(d), after the state shown in FIG. 290(c), a text image "Rush continued 10th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, showing that the 10th set of AT state has been started as the AT state has been extended (continued), and all the characters are displayed together on the main display device 210, suggesting that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 290, when the AT state starts, a setting suggestion effect may be performed, but when the 10th set of AT state starts, the possibility of a setting suggestion effect being performed is relatively high.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 291(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 291(b), after the state shown in FIG. 291(a), a predetermined character image is This is displayed on the main display device 210, and indicates that the character image has been determined to be equal to or higher than the first setting value (setting 4). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 291, you can aim at a specific position on the reel 3 (for example, a place where the same type of symbols are arranged in succession) by eye-pressing (although not shown, it is assumed that (a specific effect suggesting the setting will occur), and if the eye press is successful, a setting suggestion effect will be performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 292(a), a character image "BONUS confirmed" (bonus confirmation screen: an image that can be displayed only when the bonus role is determined as an internal winning combination) is displayed on the main display device. 210 to notify that the bonus combination has been determined as an internal winning combination, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 to display the set value (1) through the character image. This shows that it is suggested that setting 4) or above is confirmed. In FIG. 292(b), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), a character image "BONUS END" (bonus end screen) is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the bonus state has ended. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been determined. On the other hand, in FIG. 292(c), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), the text image "BONUS END" (bonus end screen) is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the bonus state ends. However, a predetermined character image is not displayed on the main display device 210. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 292, if a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on both the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, the highest setting value (setting 6) is determined. On the other hand, if the predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 only on either the bonus confirmation screen or the bonus end screen, it is confirmed that the value is greater than or equal to the first setting value (setting 4). It is supposed to be done.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 293(a), a text image of "3 times rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the third set of AT state has ended, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the setting value is equal to or higher than one setting value (setting 4). In FIG. 293(b), after the state shown in FIG. 293(a), a text image of "4 times rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the fourth set of AT state has ended, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the setting value is equal to or higher than one setting value (setting 5). In FIG. 293(c), after the state shown in FIG. 293(b), a text image of "5 times rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the fifth set of AT state has ended, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the setting value is equal to or higher than one setting value (setting 6). Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 293, when a specified character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen displayed when one AT state ends, it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than one setting value (setting 4); when a specified character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen displayed when the AT state of the next set of that AT state ends (when the specified character image is displayed twice in succession), it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than a setting value (setting 5) that is more favorable than that one setting value; and when a specified character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen displayed when the AT state of the next set of that set ends (when the specified character image is displayed three times in succession), it is confirmed that the value is the highest setting value (setting 6).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 294(a), a text image "3 Rush times" is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the third set of the AT state has ended, and a specified character image is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the setting value (setting 4) or higher has been confirmed. In FIG. 294(b), after the state shown in FIG. 294(a), the consecutive wins in the AT state have ended after three sets, and the effect zone (advantageous zone/normal play) has been entered. In FIG. 294(c), after the state shown in FIG. 294(b), a text image "Rush Start" is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the AT state has started again. In FIG. 294(d), after the state shown in FIG. 294(c), a text image of "Rush count 2 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the second set of the AT state has ended, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the setting value (setting 5) or more has been confirmed. In FIG. 294(e), after the state shown in FIG. 294(d), a consecutive win in the AT state has ended with two sets, and the game has moved to the performance area (advantageous area/normal game). In FIG. 294(f), after the state shown in FIG. 294(e), a text image of "Rush count 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the fifth set of the AT state has ended (presumably, the game has moved back to the AT state), and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the game has been confirmed to be the highest setting value (setting 6). After the state shown in FIG. 294(f), the streak in the AT state ends after five sets, and the game moves to the presentation area (advantageous area/normal game). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 294, as in the example shown in FIG. 293, as the number of times a specific character image is displayed consecutively on the AT end screen increases, it is determined that the number is equal to or exceeds a more advantageous setting value, but the AT end screen is only displayed if the AT state is not extended (continued) (if the game falls from the AT state to normal game).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 295(a), a character image "7 times of Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the seventh set of AT state has ended. , shows a predetermined character image being displayed on the main display device 210. In FIG. 295(b), after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the character image "Not yet!" (revival effect) is displayed on the main display device 210, so that it is determined that the AT state will continue. It shows how it was. On the other hand, FIG. 295(c) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the consecutive games in the AT state end with 7 sets, and a transition is made to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). , which indicates that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been determined through the predetermined character image displayed in the state shown in FIG. 295(a). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 295, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen, the predetermined character image may suggest a setting value. However, if the AT state continues after that, it means that the predetermined character image has not played the role of suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image becomes invalid (setting suggestion effect is It was later revealed that it was an unrelated performance (it was not confirmed that it was higher than the relatively high setting value). On the other hand, if the game changes from the AT state to the normal game, the predetermined character image will have played a role in suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image will be valid (it is not a setting suggestion effect). (It was later determined that the value was higher than the relatively high set value).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 296(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 296(b), after the state shown in FIG. 296(a), the predetermined role has been determined as an internal winning combination, and the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows a state in which "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the reels 3. In FIG. 296(c), after the state shown in FIG. 296(b), the "BAR" pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed, and the "PUSH" button image (image prompting the operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display. 210 is shown. In FIG. 296(d), after the state shown in FIG. 296(c), all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210 as a result of the operation of the production button. It is indicated that setting 6) has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 296, if you aim at a specific symbol (for example, the "BAR" symbol) by pressing the eye, and if you succeed in pressing the eye, an instruction to operate the production button will appear, and you will be able to operate the production button. A setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 297(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 297(b), after the state shown in FIG. 297(a), the predetermined role has been determined as an internal winning combination, and the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows how the "BAR" symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. In FIG. 297(c), after the state shown in FIG. 297(b), the "BAR" pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed, and the "PUSH" button image (image prompting operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display. 210 is shown. In FIG. 297(d), after the state shown in FIG. 297(c), the text image "+456 sheets" is displayed on the main display device 210 as the effect button is operated, and the setting value is thereby changed. This shows that it has been confirmed that it is one of 4 to 6. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 297, the set value is determined to be any one of 4 to 6 by displaying an image including the number corresponding to "456". Such images include an image corresponding to the number of additional games in the AT state ("+456 medals"), an image notifying the number of medals acquired in the AT state ("OVER456 medals"), an enemy defeat animation (for example, a revival It is possible to adopt an image (``456 enemies were defeated'') displayed in the performance).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 298(a) shows that a character image "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the main display device 210, and a BB state (pseudo BB) has started. In FIG. 298(b), after the state shown in FIG. 298(a), a screen for selecting one of "one shot notification mode", "final notification mode", and "chance notification mode" is displayed. It shows how it is displayed on the main display device 210. "One shot announcement mode", "final announcement mode", and "chance announcement mode" are each a type of production mode, and for example, a method of announcing whether or not the AT state will continue (return production). content) are different from each other. The player can select one performance mode by operating the performance button. The rate at which each setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effects I to V) appears varies depending on the selected effect mode. For example, when "Chance Announcement Mode" is selected, the setting value may be higher than a relatively low value compared to when "One-shot Announcement Mode" to "Final Announcement Mode" is selected. Setting suggestion performances that are confirmed (for example, setting suggestion performance I) are likely to occur, but setting suggestion performances that are confirmed to be at or above a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion performance IV and setting suggestion performance V) occur. It may be configured so that it is difficult to do so. In addition, when the "one-shot notification mode" is selected, setting suggestion effects that are determined to be higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion effects III and setting suggestion effects IV) are used as setting suggestion effects. , Setting Suggestive Performance V) only occurs (Setting Suggestive Performance I and Setting Suggestive Performance II do not occur), but in the first place, compared to the case where "Final Announcement Mode" or "Chance Announcement Mode" is selected, The configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion effects is low.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect that is performed when an advantageous zone starts (not shown) may be provided. The content of the setting suggestion effect may differ depending on the type of mode in the effect zone (normal play). For example, if the mode when the advantageous zone starts is a specific mode, a setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect III, setting suggestion effect IV, or setting suggestion effect V) that confirms that the relatively high setting value or higher is performed may be performed. Alternatively, the start of a specific mode may be synonymous with the confirmation of a relatively high setting value (for example, setting 4) or higher (the display of a screen dedicated to a specific mode may correspond to a setting suggestion effect). When a specific mode starts, it may be confirmed that the relatively high setting value (for example, setting 4) or higher is set, and it may be confirmed that the pseudo bonus transition lottery will be won within a specified number of games (the pseudo bonus transition lottery will always be won within a specified number of games). Also, a setting suggestion effect dedicated to a non-advantageous zone may be provided.

In addition, when a setting suggestion effect that can occur in a specific situation (e.g., when the AT state ends) is provided, the setting suggestion effect may be generated on the condition that a specific operation (e.g., operation of an effect button or touch panel) is performed, but may not be generated if the specific operation (e.g., operation of an effect button or touch panel) is not performed. In addition, when a first advantageous state (e.g., pseudo BB (big bonus)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., pseudo RB (regular bonus)) that is less advantageous than the first advantageous state are provided as game states (advantageous states) that are advantageous to the player, the setting suggestion effect may be performed during the second advantageous state (the setting suggestion effect may not be performed during the first advantageous state, or the probability of the setting suggestion effect occurring during the first advantageous state may be lower than during the second advantageous state).

In addition, when a specific situation (e.g., when the AT state ends) occurs a specific number of times since the power is turned on (or the setting value is changed) (e.g., the first or tenth specific situation), the probability of the setting suggestion effect occurring may be set to be higher than when the specific number of occurrences is not the specific number. For example, if the setting suggestion effect is set to have a higher probability of occurring in the first specific situation (e.g., when the AT state ends), it may be possible to attract customers in the early hours after the store opens in the morning.

Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect that can make suggestions including past setting values may be provided. For example, setting 6 has been set for at least one day out of the last few days (any one of today's setting value, the previous day's setting value, and the setting value of the day before the previous day is setting 6). It is also possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that confirms the setting. Further, a setting suggestion effect may be provided that confirms that a higher setting value (for example, setting 5 or setting 6) is set today than the previous day. As a result, players who have checked information regarding past setting values on a data display device, data site, etc. can be entertained in guessing settings through the setting suggestion performance.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, for example, a specific winning combination (for example, watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific winning combination is determined based on the player's stopping operation mode (stopping operation timing). (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct) Payout of 8 pieces, if inappropriate (incorrect answer), payout of 1 piece or no payout). Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to move to the AT state in this game (in the AT state, the playing period of the AT state will be extended) It may also include whether or not to change the degree of advantage (the same applies hereinafter) to an advantageous one (whether to directly transition to the AT state or not, or whether to directly extend the playing period of the AT state). It is possible to configure the system so that, while not making a decision (hereinafter described as an "advantageous decision"), if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game.

As described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main game stops, a sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed when the reels stop. Then, in the performance area (advantageous area/normal game), a pseudo bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo bonus transition lottery) is performed based on the random number value and the sub-flag (pseudo bonus transition lottery) when the player enters the advantageous area. The pseudo bonus transition lottery is basically performed in every unit game, but in a unit game in which the player plays using a specific game method (for example, a game method in which eight medals are paid out as described above), the pseudo bonus transition lottery as a favorable determination may not be performed. Alternatively, in a unit game in which a player plays using a specific play method, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus transition lottery as an advantageous decision may be relatively lower than in a unit game in which the player does not play using a specific play method. In such a case, a setting suggestion effect may be provided that can occur when the number of pseudo-bonus transition lotteries has reached a predetermined number. This allows the player to enjoy the setting suggestion effect at an earlier timing than if the player does not play using a specific play method.

As a specific gaming method, for example, in a unit game in which a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation on a predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L) causes symbols belonging to a predetermined range (for example, symbol position " 10" to "18" symbols) is displayed in the middle area, or the order of stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is in a specific order. Here are some gaming methods that: In this way, in a specific game, only if a specific stopping order is unilaterally advantageous compared to other stopping orders, if the game is played in that specific stopping order, it will be more advantageous in that specific game. It is possible to configure so as not to make a decision (or to reduce the probability that a decision will be made to change the degree of advantage to a favorable one in a favorable determination). Note that, as explained in the first embodiment, it is desirable that such a restriction be limited to the unit game concerned.

In addition, instead of not making an advantageous decision (or reducing the probability that it will be decided to change the degree of advantage to an advantageous one in an advantageous decision), the measurement of the number of games up to the ceiling is stopped (or the said It is also possible to extend the number of games up to the ceiling. For example, as explained in the first embodiment, if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) in the performance section (normal game), the number of ceiling games is updated. (Additional or subtraction methods may be used), if the number of ceiling games reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or determined in advance at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), the transition to a pseudo bonus occurs. It is decided that the In this regard, the number of ceiling games may not be updated (or the number of ceiling games may be increased) in a unit game in which a player plays a game using a specific gaming method.

<Rock>
Fig. 299 and Fig. 300 are diagrams showing an example of the first stop time lock, and Fig. 301 and Fig. 302 are diagrams showing an example of the intermediate stop time lock.

As explained in the first embodiment, the lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (invalidates the player's game operation for a predetermined period of time). In this embodiment, it is possible to configure the first stop time lock to be executed when a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute the middle stop time lock when a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role.

The predetermined role may be one in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the manner in which the player performs the stop operation (the timing of the stop operation) (for example, the specific role described above). That is, when a predetermined role (for example, watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined number of medals (for example, eight medals) are paid out. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate, a miss occurs, and fewer medals are paid out than when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (or no medals are paid out at all).

Here, it is believed that among players playing the pachislot machine 1, there are players who perform the stopping operation for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R by sliding their finger from the left stop button 8L to the middle stop button 8C to the right stop button 8R (hereinafter referred to as the sliding hitting method). When a predetermined role (e.g., watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, if a player plays using this sliding hitting method, there is a high possibility that the predetermined role (e.g., watermelon) will be missed.

In this respect, when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the game is played using the sliding stroke method by executing the lock at the first stop or the lock at the middle stop. However, it is possible to prevent such omissions from occurring. Hereinafter, the first stop lock will be explained using FIGS. 299 and 300, and the middle stop lock will be explained using FIGS. 301 and 302.

FIG. 299(a) shows a state in which each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating in one unit game, and all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating. Thereafter, the behavior of the reels 3 will differ depending on whether or not the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination. 299(b) and FIGS. 300(a) to 300(d) show cases where a predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and in FIG. 299(c), the predetermined winning combination is A case is shown in which a different winning combination (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination.

Specifically, FIG. 299(b) shows a state in which, in a case where a predetermined role (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, after the state shown in FIG. 299(a), the left stop button 8L is operated as the first stop operation, causing the left reel 3L to stop spinning and displaying a "watermelon" in the upper area of the left reel 3L. At this time, the first stop operation causes a first stop lock. The first stop lock is a lock that occurs after the first stop operation is performed and before the second stop operation is performed. When the first stop lock occurs, the operation by the player after the first stop operation is performed (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) is invalidated. The first stop lock continues until the center stop button 8C is operated. In other words, the first stop lock is released when the center stop button 8C is operated. The arrow in the figure indicates to what position the player has slid his finger in the sliding shot technique.

FIG. 300(a) shows a state in which the player slides his finger to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding hitting method after the state shown in FIG. 299(b). At this time, the first stop lock ends as the middle stop button 8C is operated. The operation of the middle stop button 8C is effective as an operation for releasing the first stop lock, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C.

FIG. 300(b) shows a state in which the player slides his finger to the right stop button 8R (the right stop button 8R is operated) in the sliding hitting method after the state shown in FIG. 300(a). Since the first stop lock has already been completed, the operation of the right stop button 8R is effective as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R. As a result, in FIG. 300(b), the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the lower area of the right reel 3R, and the "watermelon" is displayed along the effective line (here, the cross down line). shows a reach state (a state in which "watermelon" is displayed in a stopped state on the left reel 3L and right reel 3R, and only the middle reel 3C is rotating). In addition, if the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, "Watermelon" will stop on the left reel 3L and right reel 3R, regardless of the timing of operation of the left stop button 8L to right stop button 8R. It is now displayed.

FIG. 300(c) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 300(b), the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, on the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "Watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (exists within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). . As a result, when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is When the stop button 8C is operated), "Watermelons" are stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "Watermelons" line up along the cross-down line (a prize is won). On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelons" are not stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelons" are not lined up along the cross-down line (missing).

In FIG. 300(d), after the state shown in FIG. 300(c), as the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing, "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and it appears on the cross down line. It shows how watermelons are lined up along the line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. Note that, although the above description has been made assuming that the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (an image that suggests the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, such an image may not be displayed. Furthermore, when all the "watermelons" are available, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the above example, the first stop lock occurs when a specific role (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, whereas the first stop lock does not occur when the specific role (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning role. Figure 299(c) shows a state in which a replay wins after the state shown in Figure 299(a) when a role (replay) different from the specific role is determined as the internal winning role. In this case, the first stop lock does not occur, so the operation of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R using the sliding shot method is valid as the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, respectively.

As a different aspect from the above, FIG. 301(a) shows the state in which the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts in one unit game, and all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are spinning. After that, the behavior of reel 3 differs depending on whether or not a predetermined role (watermelon) has been determined as the internal winning role. FIG. 301(b) and FIG. 302(a)-(b) show the case where a predetermined role (watermelon) has been determined as the internal winning role, and FIG. 301(c) shows the case where a role (replay) different from the predetermined role has been determined as the internal winning role.

Specifically, in FIG. 301(b), when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, after the state shown in FIG. 301(a), the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation. In response to the operation, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L. Here, FIG. 301(b) shows a state in which the finger is slid to the middle stop button 8C in the sliding hitting method (the middle stop button 8C is operated), but the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped. Not yet. In this example, the middle stop lock occurs when the middle stop button 8C is operated. The middle stop lock is a lock that occurs after the middle stop button 8C is operated. When the middle stop lock occurs, the player's operations (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) are disabled until a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the middle stop button 8C was operated.

The operation of the middle stop button 8C in the sliding hitting method is effective as an operation for generating a lock at the time of a middle stop, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C. In addition, in the sliding hitting method, the right stop button 8R is usually operated within a predetermined time (the time when the player's operation is disabled by the lock at the middle stop) after the middle stop button 8C is operated. The operation of the right stop button 8R in the sliding hitting method is also invalid as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R.

Figure 302 (a) shows the state in which the "Aim for BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in Figure 301 (b). Here, as in the above, the symbol position corresponding to "watermelon" on the middle reel 3C is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). As a result, when a predetermined role (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, if the middle stop button 8C is operated at the timing when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area), the "watermelon" is displayed stopped on the middle reel 3C. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelon" is not displayed stopped on the middle reel 3C. As mentioned above, if a specific role (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, the left reel 3L and right reel 3R will stop and display "watermelon" regardless of the timing of the operation of the left stop button 8L or the right stop button 8R.

In FIG. 302(b), after the state shown in FIG. 302(a), when the center stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing (the right stop button 8R is operated at any timing), "watermelons" are displayed stopped on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, and "watermelons" are lined up along the cross-down line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (e.g., 8 medals) are paid out. Note that, although the above description has been given of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (an image suggesting the timing of the stop operation) being displayed on the main display device 210, such an image may not be displayed. Also, when "watermelons" are lined up, the setting suggestion effect described above may be performed.

In the above example, if a specific role (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning role, a middle stop lock occurs, whereas if the specific role (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning role, a middle stop lock does not occur. Figure 301(c) shows a state in which a role (replay) different from the specific role is determined as the internal winning role, and a replay wins after the state shown in Figure 301(a). In this case, a middle stop lock does not occur, so the operation of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R using the sliding shot method are valid as the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, respectively.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value at the end of a BB gaming state (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-245403).

In such conventional gaming machines, the setting suggestion effect, like other effects, occurs in accordance with the appearance rate set by the manufacturer. On the other hand, if the hall (store) side can suggest the setting value (degree of advantage for the player) in the manner intended, it would be useful in formulating a sales strategy for acquiring customers.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can give suggestions regarding the degree of advantage in line with the intentions of the store.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) An advantage setting means for allowing an administrator to set one of a plurality of advantage levels (setting values) for a player;
A suggestion control means (a sub-CPU 201 for executing the processes of FIGS. 275 to 278) capable of executing suggestion control that can be suggested with respect to the advantageous degree set by the advantageous degree setting means;
A suggestion information setting means for allowing the administrator to set suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) for executing the suggestion control;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the administrator can set any one of a plurality of types of advantages (setting values) as advantages for the player, and the set advantage Suggestion control that can be suggested regarding (setting value) can be executed. The system is configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing suggestion control can be set by the administrator. As a result, it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) in accordance with the store's intention, taking into account sales strategies, etc., and to make suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) in accordance with the intention. It can be carried out.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that when the setting suggestion effects I to V occur, it is confirmed that the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. The setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value (confirming that the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value), or an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value. For example, the setting suggestion effect V may be an effect that suggests that the set value is set 6 with a predetermined probability (e.g., 80%) (when this effect appears, there is an 80% probability that the set value is set 6). The setting suggestion effect I may be an effect that suggests that the set value is set 2 or greater with a predetermined probability (e.g., 80%) (when this effect appears, there is an 80% probability that the set value is set 2 or greater). In addition, as the setting suggestion effect, an effect that confirms (or suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is) an odd number (1, 3, or 5) or an effect that confirms (or suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is) an even number (2, 4, or 6) may be adopted.

In the tenth embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a plurality of different setting values (six levels from "1" to "6") are provided for various data related to a pachinko game, and it is possible to configure the machine so that an operation for changing the set setting value (setting change) and an operation for confirming the set setting value (setting confirmation) can be performed. For example, when the power is not turned on, the setting key is turned on, and both the backup clear switch and the power switch are turned on to enter the setting change state. By pressing the setting switch in the setting change state, it is possible to change the setting value. Also, for example, when the power is not turned on, the setting key is turned on, and the power switch is turned on without pressing the backup clear switch to enter the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, for example, information indicating the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor, and the setting value can be confirmed. The setting change state and the setting confirmation state are ended by turning the setting key off.

The suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) can be set when the setting suggestion performance setting screen is displayed. The setting suggestion performance setting screen may be displayed when the setting confirmation operation is being performed, or may be displayed when the setting change operation is being performed. In order to perform the setting confirmation operation or the setting change operation, it is necessary to operate the power switch or the setting key switch (backup clear clear switch), and these switches are provided inside the cabinet G. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) can be set by opening the front door (upper door mechanism UD or lower door mechanism DD). Alternatively, in a pachinko game machine, the setting change switch may be provided on the back side (rear side) of the main body. Basically, since people cannot enter the island, it is necessary to rotate the frame using a key in order to operate the back side of the main body (the setting change switch housed in the board case or the like arranged on the back side). Therefore, the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) may be set when the frame is rotated. In other words, the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) can be configured to be set after the rotating opening and closing part is opened. The pivoting opening/closing section may be the front door of a slot machine, or the main frame of a pachinko machine (the part that can pivot relative to the outer frame). In either case, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) can be set when an operating section that cannot be operated by the player is operated.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the menu screen may be displayed when a game is not being played or when a game is being played. A "game is being played" refers to a state where no game processing is being performed on the main control circuit side (i.e., one game has ended and the machine is not waiting for a BET operation or start lever operation). Game processing is, for example, processing related to a game that is performed after a BET operation (start lever operation) is performed and before a medal is paid out. A "game is being played" may refer to a state where a demo screen is not displayed on the display device. The demo screen is a screen to which the machine is switched when it is determined that a game is not being played (the machine is waiting for a customer). Conventionally known conditions can be appropriately adopted as conditions for switching to the demo screen. For example, in a slot machine, the conditions for transitioning to a demo screen include a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after a medal is paid out without a bet being placed, a predetermined time after an automatic replay without the start lever being operated, the C/P button being operated to pay out all credited medals, and the power being turned on (until a bet is placed). In a pachinko machine, the conditions for transitioning to a demo screen include a predetermined time after the pattern stops changing without the handle being operated, a predetermined time after the pattern stops changing without a winning entry in the start slot, and a predetermined time of no reserved medals and no pattern changing. The setting suggestion setting screen can also be said to be a screen that is displayed when "a game is not being played".

(E-2) The gaming machine according to (E-1),
The suggestion information setting means is capable of setting the suggestion information for each of a plurality of periods (setting suggestion performance periods);
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is configured so that suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) can be set for each of a number of periods (periods for setting suggestion presentation). This makes it possible to vary the type of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (setting value) for each period (period for setting suggestion presentation), meeting the needs of stores that wish to plan sales strategies etc. according to each period (period for setting suggestion presentation).

However, it is not essential to provide multiple periods (periods for setting suggestion presentation), and the system may be configured so that suggestion information (one setting suggestion presentation type) can be set regardless of such periods (one for the entire period).

(E-3) The gaming machine of (E-1) or (E-2) above,
The suggested information setting means sets predetermined periods (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”, The suggestion information can be set for "Period I" or "Period J"),
The suggestion control means performs the suggestion control according to the suggestion information set for the predetermined period by the suggestion information setting means when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in the predetermined period. is executable,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the predetermined periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”) , "Period H", "Period I", or "Period J"), it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for a predetermined period ("Period A", "Period B", "Period ``C'', ``Period D'', ``Period E'', ``Period F'', ``Period G'', ``Period H'', ``Period I'', or ``Period J'') under a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state). ), the specified period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”) , "Period I", or "Period J"). As a result, the predetermined periods ("Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I") , or, if a predetermined condition (termination condition of AT state) is satisfied in the predetermined period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “ It is possible to make suggestions regarding advantageousness (set value) in a manner corresponding to period E, period F, period G, period H, period I, or period J. Yes, the specified period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”, “Period I”) , or “Period J”), it is possible to meet the needs of stores that are trying to formulate sales strategies focusing on the period J.

In the tenth embodiment, an example in which the end condition of the AT state is adopted as the predetermined condition has been described. The predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and any condition can be adopted as appropriate. Examples of such conditions include a condition that a predetermined game state ends, a condition that a predetermined game state starts, a condition that a bonus is given to a player, a condition that a predetermined role is determined as an internal winning role, and a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As the predetermined game state, for example, a game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to a player can be adopted, and examples of the game state that can be adopted include a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.) in a pachinko game machine, an RT state, an AT state (ART state), a jackpot game state, a probability game state, a time-saving game state, and the like in a pachinko game machine. These conditions may be adopted alone, or multiple conditions may be used in combination. When multiple conditions are used in combination, it may be configured so that suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) can be set for each condition.

In addition, when multiple types of predetermined gaming states are provided, a setting suggestion effect is performed when a condition regarding the first predetermined gaming state is met, and a setting suggestion effect is performed when a condition regarding the second predetermined gaming state is met. It may be configured so that the suggestion effect is not performed. If the setting suggestion performance is performed too frequently, the player will easily notice the setting value, but by adopting such a configuration, the frequency can be adjusted. The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player, and such a first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state The pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted as the predetermined gaming states. The first predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the second predetermined gaming state, or conversely, the second predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state. It may also be advantageous.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that when a predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met in one period (period for setting suggestion presentation), the setting suggestion presentation is performed only if it is the first time that the predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met in that period (period for setting suggestion presentation). However, when a predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met in one period (period for setting suggestion presentation), the setting suggestion presentation may be performed even if the predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met for the second or subsequent time in that period (period for setting suggestion presentation). When a predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met multiple times, the probability of each setting suggestion presentation occurring may be different depending on how many times the predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met. In this case, the number of times that the predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is met may be counted for each period (period for setting suggestion presentation), or may be counted regardless of the period (period for setting suggestion presentation).

In addition, when a predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is met, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect generation lottery), and the setting suggestion effect generation lottery is performed. If the player wins, a setting suggestion performance may be performed. In addition, when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met, a lottery (specific image appearance lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to display a specific character image (specific image). If the character has won the appearance lottery, the character image may be displayed. In this case, when the predetermined condition (the condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed. On the other hand, if a specific character image is displayed when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met, the setting will be made the next time the predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met. Suggestive effects may be performed. The setting suggestion performance may be performed based on set suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type), or may be performed as a predetermined setting suggestion performance. Thereby, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine. The display timing of a specific character image is not limited to when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, and the specific character image can be displayed at any timing. For example, the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect explained using FIGS. 288 to 298 may be adopted as a specific character image, and the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may be adopted as the display timing of the specific character image. good. In any case, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to configure the setting suggestion effect to be performed whenever a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied next time.

The setting suggestion effect (display of character images I to V) is performed for only a very short time (for example, within 3 seconds), and when the setting suggestion effect starts in one unit game, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to be completed by the end of that unit game (the state in which character images I to V are displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may end when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game.

(E-4) Any one of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-3),
As the suggestion information, a plurality of types of suggestion information ("Type A", "Type B", and "Type C") are provided,
The suggestion information setting means is capable of setting one piece of suggestion information selected from the plurality of types of suggestion information.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, multiple types of suggestion information ("Type A", "Type B", and "Type C") are provided as suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type), and it is configured to be possible to set one piece of suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) selected from the multiple types of suggestion information ("Type A", "Type B", and "Type C"). This makes it possible to set the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) by selecting one piece of suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) from the multiple types of suggestion information ("Type A", "Type B", and "Type C") provided in advance, simplifying the operation for the administrator to set the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type).

(E-5) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-4) above,
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means includes notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
The information that can be reported by the notification means is a case where the advantage set by the advantage setting means is a first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage more advantageous to the player than the first advantage. First information (character image I) that can be notified only to
When the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is first suggestion information ("type A"), the notification control means is configured to control whether the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first suggestion information. If the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the advantage or the first advantage, control the notification of the first information by the notification means regardless of the advantage set by the advantage setting means. It is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the first information (character image I) is provided as information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210) only when the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set. In addition, when the first suggestion information ("Type A") is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type), if the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the notification of the first information (character image I) is controlled regardless of the set advantage (setting value). This makes it possible to suggest through the first information (character image I) that the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, and in this manner, it is possible to meet the needs of stores that wish to make suggestions regarding the advantage (setting value).

(E-6) Any one of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-5),
A notification means (main display device 210) capable of notifying information is provided,
The suggestion control means includes a notification control means capable of controlling the notification of information by the notification means,
As the multiple types of advantage degrees, at least a first advantage degree (setting 2) and a second advantage degree (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage degree are provided,
The information that can be notified by the notification means includes a first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when the degree of advantage set by the advantage setting means is less favorable to the player than the first degree of advantage, and a second information (character image II) that cannot be notified when the degree of advantage set by the advantage setting means is less favorable to the player than the second degree of advantage,
The notification control means is capable of controlling such that, when the suggestive information set by the suggestive information setting means is second suggestive information ("Type B"), and the advantage level set by the advantage level setting means is the first advantage level or an advantage level that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage level, one piece of information selected from among the multiple types of information according to the advantage level set by the advantage level setting means is notified by the notification means;
It is characterized by:

According to the slot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, as information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210), multiple types of information are provided, including first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when an advantage level (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage level (setting 2) is set, and second information (character image II) that cannot be notified when an advantage level (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage level (setting 3) is set. Then, when the second suggestion information ("Type B") is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type), if the first advantage level (setting 2) or an advantage level (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage level (setting 2) is set, one piece of information selected from the multiple types of information according to the set advantage level (setting value) is configured to be controllably notified by the notification means (main display device 210). This makes it possible, for example, to suggest through the first information (character image I) that a first advantage level (setting 2) or an advantage level (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage level (setting 2) has been set, and to suggest through the second information (character image II) that a second advantage level (setting 3) or an advantage level (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantage level (setting 3) has been set, and in this manner, it is possible to meet the needs of stores that wish to make suggestions regarding advantage levels (setting values).

(E-7) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-6) above,
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means includes notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
The plurality of types of advantages include at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage,
The information that can be reported by the notification means is first information that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (character image I), and second information (character image I) that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage Image II) is provided,
When the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is third suggestion information ("Type C"), the notification control means is configured to control whether the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first one. If the degree of advantage is the advantage, the notification of the first information by the notification means can be controlled, and if the degree of advantage set by the degree of advantage setting means is the second degree of advantage, the notification means can control the notification of the first information. is capable of controlling broadcasting of the second information by
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, the information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210) includes first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, and second information (character image II) that cannot be notified when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) is set. In addition, when the third suggestion information ("Type C") is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type), it is possible to control the notification of the first information (character image I) when the first advantage (setting 2) is set, and it is possible to control the notification of the second information (character image II) when the second advantage (setting 3) is set. This means that, for example, when the second advantage level (setting 3) is set, it is possible to give a suggestion through the second information (character image II) (a suggestion that is more advantageous to the player than a suggestion through the first information (character image I)) rather than a suggestion through the first information (character image I), and in this way it is possible to meet the needs of stores that wish to give suggestions regarding the advantage level (setting value).

In the above description, setting 2 corresponds to the first advantage, but the first advantage may be any of settings 3 to 5. Furthermore, although the above description has been made assuming that setting 3 corresponds to the second advantage, the second advantage may be any one of settings 4 to 6. As long as the second advantage is an advantage (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, the first advantage can be any advantage (setting value) among settings 2 to 5. It is possible to adopt an arbitrary advantage degree (setting value) among settings 3 to 6 as the second advantage degree.

In the tenth embodiment, even when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion is It has been explained that any one of the information ("Type A"), the second suggestion information ("Type B"), and the third suggestion information ("Type C") can be set. However, if an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (``Type A''), the second suggestion information ("Type B") and the third suggestion information ("Type C") may not be set. For example, if an advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (``Type A''), the second suggestion information (`` Type B") and the third suggestion information ("Type C") may not be selected by the selection button.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the first suggestion information ("Type A"), the second suggestion information ("Type B"), and the third suggestion information ("Type C") are provided as the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type). The suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) is not limited to these examples, and for example, suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for generating a setting suggestion presentation with a high probability and suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for generating a setting suggestion presentation with a low probability may be provided. In addition, it is possible to configure the probability of winning the setting suggestion presentation occurrence lottery described above to be different between the case where suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for generating a setting suggestion presentation with a high probability is set and the case where suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for generating a setting suggestion presentation with a low probability is set. Also, when suggestion information (setting suggestion type) for generating a setting suggestion effect with a high probability is set, the setting suggestion effect may be generated with a high probability, while a setting suggestion effect that is determined to be equal to or greater than a relatively low setting value (e.g., setting suggestion effect I) is likely to occur, and a setting suggestion effect that is determined to be equal to or greater than a relatively high setting value (e.g., setting suggestion effect IV or setting suggestion effect V) may be unlikely to occur. Also, when suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating a setting suggestion effect with a low probability is set, the setting suggestion effect may be generated with a low probability, while only setting suggestion effects that are determined to be equal to or greater than a relatively high setting value (e.g., setting suggestion effect III, setting suggestion effect IV, or setting suggestion effect V) occur as setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effect I or setting suggestion effect II does not occur).

The notification by the notification means is not limited to displaying an image, but may be outputting sound, outputting light, or any combination of these. In other words, the notification means may be image display means (display device), sound output means (speaker), or light-emitting means.

(E-8) Any one of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-7),
The suggestion information setting means is capable of setting suggestion information in a state in which a certain degree of advantage is set by the advantage setting means, and then, when an advantage degree different from the certain degree of advantage is set by the advantage setting means, maintaining the suggestion information.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, after setting the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) in a state where one advantage (set value) is set, the one advantage (set value) is set. If a different advantage (setting value) is set, the configuration is such that the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be maintained. As a result, even if the setting of the degree of advantage (setting value) is changed, there is no need to set the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) again, and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-9) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-8) above,
The suggestion information setting means includes:
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
A second device that can set the suggestion information for each of the plurality of setting targets by performing a specific operation (operation of inputting a password for setting suggestion effect setting or operation of selecting from presets for setting suggestion effect setting). Suggestion information setting means;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, each setting is performed by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation for selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods). While it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for the target (setting suggestion production period), certain operations (such as inputting a password for setting suggestion production or selecting from presets for setting suggestion production) are possible. ) is configured so that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) for each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period), and it is possible to create sales strategies, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period). It can meet the needs of the store you are planning. In addition, when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for each of multiple setting targets (setting suggestion production period), specific operations (such as inputting a password for setting suggestion production and setting suggestion production period) are required. By performing the operation of selecting from presets, it is possible to save the trouble of repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type), and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator.

(E-10) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-9) above,
The suggestion information setting means includes:
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
When the first suggestion information setting means sets the suggestion information for each setting target, suggestion information for each setting target indicates a correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information set for the setting target. (Suggestion information setting preset for setting suggestion effect) can be registered for each setting target;
By performing an operation to select the per-setting target suggestion information registered by the per-setting target suggestion information registration means, the setting target-by-setting target suggestion information is configured for each of the plurality of setting targets. a second suggestion information setting means capable of setting the suggestion information;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), each It is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for the setting target (setting suggestion production period), and in this way, suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be set for each setting target (setting suggestion production period). ) is set, a setting target that indicates the correspondence between each setting target (setting suggestion performance period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) set for the setting target (setting suggestion performance period) It is possible to register each suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting). Then, by performing an operation to select the suggestion information for each setting target registered in this way (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), the suggestion information for each setting target is set for each of the plurality of setting targets. It is configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set according to (setting suggestion effect setting preset). As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (setting value) for each setting target, and it is possible to meet the needs of stores that are trying to formulate sales strategies etc. according to each setting target. In addition, once the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is set for each setting target, the setting object shows the correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting target. It is possible to register suggestion information (setting suggestion effect setting preset) for each setting, and when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting target with the same correspondence next time, the registered setting It is only necessary to perform an operation to select the suggestion information for each object (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-11) Any one of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-10),
An input means is provided for inputting encrypted information (a password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which suggestion information for each setting object, which indicates a correspondence between each of a plurality of setting objects (a period for setting suggestion effect) and the suggestion information for each setting object, is encrypted;
When the encrypted information is inputted by the input means, the suggestion information setting means is capable of setting, for each of the plurality of setting targets, the suggestion information corresponding to the suggestion information for each setting target identified from the encrypted information.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the correspondence relationship between each of the plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion presentation period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for each setting object (setting suggestion presentation period) It is possible to input encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which suggestion information for each setting target is encrypted, and if the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) is input, multiple settings Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each target (setting suggestion effect period) according to suggestion information for each setting target specified from the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password). It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) for each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period), and it is possible to create sales strategies, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period). It can meet the needs of the store you are planning. In addition, by simply entering the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password), it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of multiple setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) can be input by operating the selection button and the decision button. The method of inputting encrypted information into a gaming machine is not limited to the method of inputting a password using an operating means such as a button or a touch panel. For example, the gaming machine may be provided with a camera, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal may be read by the camera as the encrypted information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that encrypted information can be transmitted from the management server to the gaming machine, or the encrypted information can be transmitted from the mobile terminal to the gaming machine using non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication), etc. It may be configured as follows.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password) obtained by encrypting the setting target-specific suggestion information (setting suggestion effect setting preset) showing the correspondence between each setting target (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be output. The method of outputting the encrypted information is not limited to the method of displaying the password on the display device. For example, a two-dimensional code may be displayed on the display device as the encrypted information. In this case, as described above, it is desirable to provide a camera on the gaming machine and configure the camera so that the two-dimensional code displayed on the portable terminal device as the encrypted information can be read. As a result, when a two-dimensional code is displayed as the encrypted information on one gaming machine, the two-dimensional code is captured by a camera provided on the portable terminal device, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the portable terminal device, and the two-dimensional code is read by a camera provided on another gaming machine, so that the same suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) as the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set on the one gaming machine can be set on the other gaming machine.

In the above, it has been explained that the setting suggestion effect period corresponds to the above setting target, but the above setting target is not limited to this example, and can be a variable that can change over time (as the game progresses). It is possible to adopt the range to which it belongs as appropriate. The variable may be the number of unit games (for example, the number of games after power-on), or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied (for example, the number of times AT is terminated). , it may be the number of unit games in which a predetermined condition is met, or it may be time. As a result, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is met, a setting suggestion effect can be performed according to the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the range to which the variable belongs at that time. is possible. As mentioned above, the predetermined conditions include, for example, the condition that a predetermined gaming state ends, the condition that a predetermined gaming state starts, the condition that a privilege is given to the player, and the predetermined condition. It is possible to adopt a condition that the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, etc. As the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to adopt, for example, a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player, such as a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state ( ART state), a jackpot game state in a pachinko game machine, a variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, and the like.

When the above-mentioned setting targets are adopted, for example, by setting "Type C" for a setting target corresponding to an early time after opening in the morning (for example, "Period A" shown in FIG. 281, "1 AT End" shown in FIG. 282, "10:00 to 11:00" shown in FIG. 283, etc.), it is possible to attract customers during that time. In the tenth embodiment, the number of unit games or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied as the above-mentioned variable is described as the number of unit games played since the power was turned on or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied since the power was turned on. However, the number of unit games played since the advantage degree (setting value) was changed or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied since the advantage degree (setting value) was changed may also be used as the above-mentioned variable.

<Appendix F>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for providing effects (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214050).

In such conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation by the player. The combination of the symbols may not be stopped and displayed.

In this regard, there are players who perform random stopping operations without giving it much thought, and if such random stopping operations are performed in a unit game in which the relevant role has been determined as the internal winning role, there is a possibility that the player will miss out on the role. Therefore, it is desirable to prevent players from missing out on such roles even when performing random stopping operations.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and even if the player performs an appropriate stop operation, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that may be missed is not displayed in a stopped state. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide an opportunity to play.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, when a winning combination (watermelon) that is likely to be missed is determined as an internal winning combination, the first stop lock or middle stop lock is executed. It is configured to This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing the winning combination (Watermelon) due to an appropriate stop operation, and to ensure that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (Watermelon) is stopped and displayed for the player. It can provide an opportunity to attract attention.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. The eleventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of the parts that apply to the eleventh embodiment as well as those in the first to tenth embodiments will be omitted.

In the above description, even if there is a description that is limited to the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, such as "in the first embodiment," or "in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment," it can also be applied to the slot machine 1 according to the 11th embodiment, so long as it does not deviate from the spirit of the 11th embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, even if there is a description that is limited to the slot machine 1 according to the second to tenth embodiments, it can also be applied to the slot machine 1 according to the 11th embodiment, so long as it does not deviate from the spirit of the 11th embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to tenth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and each of the configurations shown in the extended examples) with the configurations shown in the 11th embodiment.

Further, even if the shape is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Further, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
Fig. 303(a) is a diagram showing a transition of a game state according to one embodiment of the present invention, and Fig. 303(b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of the game state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as the game state in order to vary the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. It has become. In this embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 303(a) is managed by the main control circuit 100. Such gaming states include a bonus non-winning state, a flag-to-flag state, and a bonus state.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated (won). The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated. The bonus state is a state in which a bonus is activated. As described in the first embodiment, the inter-flag state is sometimes referred to as a carryover state, a (bonus) inter-flag state, a (bonus) internal state, and the like. When a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 2BB gaming state and a 3BB gaming state are provided as bonus states. "F_2BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 2BB gaming state, and "F_3BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 3BB gaming state (see FIGS. 306A to 306D). Further, as inter-flag states, there are provided a 2BB inter-flag state and a 3BB inter-flag state.

The state between the 2BB flags is configured as an RT state (RT1 gaming state). As explained in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to the state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state and the 3BB flag state are each configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

To explain this in more detail with reference to Figures 303(a) and 303(b), when "F_3BB" is determined as the internal winning combination (internal winning combination) in the bonus non-winning state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the 3BB flag interval state (see transition condition (1)). In this case, the RT0 gaming state is maintained. On the other hand, when "F_2BB" is determined as the internal winning combination (internal winning combination) in the bonus non-winning state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to the 2BB flag interval state (RT1 gaming state) (see transition condition (2)).

"F_2BB" (2BB) and "F_3BB" (3BB) are carryover roles (see FIG. 18). When 2BB is an internal win, the state of 2BB being internally won is carried over until the symbol combination corresponding to 2BB ("C_2BB" shown in FIG. 306B) is stopped and displayed along the winning line (until 2BB wins). The 2BB flag interval state is a state in which the state of 2BB being internally won is carried over. Similarly, when 3BB is an internal win, the state of 3BB being internally won is carried over until the symbol combination corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in FIG. 306B) is stopped and displayed along the winning line (until 3BB wins). The 3BB flag interval state is a state in which the state of 3BB being internally won is carried over.

In the 3BB flag interval state, when the symbol combination related to "C_3BB" is displayed stopped along the winning line (when 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB flag interval state to the 3BB game state (see transition condition (3)). Also, in the 2BB flag interval state, when the symbol combination related to "C_2BB" is displayed stopped along the winning line (when 2BB wins), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 2BB flag interval state to the 2BB game state (see transition condition (4)).

When more than the specified number (21 medals) are paid out in the 3BB game state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB game state to a bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (5)). Also, when more than the specified number (1 medal) are paid out in the 2BB game state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 2BB game state to a bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (6)).

<Pattern arrangement table>
FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in Figure 304(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table specifies the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols that correspond to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. The types of designs include "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Rip", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and " "Blank B" is included.

<Pattern code table>
FIG. 304(b) is a diagram showing a pattern code table.

As shown in FIG. 304(b), each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is identified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, each symbol is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 304(b) represents symbol codes as data for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 304(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, but in reality The symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM 102 represents an arrangement of symbol codes that specify the symbols arranged on the surfaces of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are, as described above, ten types: "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Lipstick", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and "Blank B". In the symbol code table, "1" to "10" are assigned as symbol codes to each of the symbols "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Lipstick", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and "Blank B".

<Design combination table>
FIGS. 305A and 305B are diagrams showing symbol combination tables.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line and the number of medals that will be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (number of medals paid out). ing. Regarding symbol combinations, symbols on the left reel 3L, symbols on the middle reel 3C, and symbols on the right reel 3R are shown in order from the left. The names given to each combination are also shown.

Regarding the number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out when a 2-card game is played (payout when playing a 2-card game), and the number of medals paid out when a 3-card game is played (payout when a 3-card game is played). are shown respectively. In this specification, a unit game that is played by inserting one medal is called a one-coin game, a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game, and a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game. A unit game played by inserting a number of medals is sometimes called a 3-coin game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each gaming state is set as two or three.

The active line is a pseudo line (middle-middle-top) that connects the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the top area of the right reel 3R. As explained in the first embodiment, the active line is activated when the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals required to start the game) has been bet.

The symbol combination table shown in Figures 305A and 305B associates symbol combinations ("combinations") identified by storage area identification data represented by 13 bytes with the respective numbers of medals paid out when the combination is displayed on a winning line when two or three medals are bet.

In the diagram, some combinations are shown together. For example, "C_TB Lip B_01-02" is made up of two combinations, "C_TB Lip B_01" and "C_TB Lip B_02". The combination called "C_TB Lip B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "Lips - Watermelon - Bell A", and the combination called "C_TB Lip B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "Lips - Blank A - Bell A". When these combinations are displayed along an active line, no medals are paid out, but a replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_CB Lip A_01-08" is made up of eight combinations, "C_CB Lip A_01" through "C_CB Lip B_08". In the diagram, for "C_CB Lip A_01-08", two types of symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are specified as symbols on the left reel 3L, one type of symbol ("Bell B") is specified as symbols on the center reel 3C, and four types of symbols ("White 7", "Purple 7", "Blank B", and "Cherry") are specified as symbols on the right reel 3R. This means that "C_CB Lip A_01-08" contains 2 x 1 x 4 = 8 combinations.

Also, if the combination "Rep-Bell B-Bell B" called "C_CD Bell A" is displayed along the active line, 11 medals will be paid out in a 2-card game, and 3 medals will be paid out. Also in the betting game, 11 medals are paid out. Further, when a combination of "White 7-Blank A-BAR" called "C_2BB" is displayed along the active line, no medals are paid out, but the gaming state shifts to the 2BB gaming state.

In addition, in the figure, "REP" indicates a combination that activates replay (replay) when winning a prize, "FRU" indicates a combination that pays out medals when winning a prize, and "BB" indicates a BB gaming state ( 2BB gaming state or 3BB gaming state) (see FIGS. 11 to 14), and "HZR" indicates other combinations (combinations in which medals are not paid out even if a prize is won).

<Flag Combination Table>
306A to 306D are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag combination table specifies the correspondence between various internal winning roles and the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the winning line. As a result, when an internal winning role is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the winning line (type of winning role) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the flag-specific combination tables shown in FIGS. 306A to 306D show combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the active line in response to internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment include "miss", "F_replay", "F_common B reply", "F_chance A", "F_chance B", "F_special combination A", "F_special combination B". ", "F_Special Role C", "F_Special Role D", "F_Watermelon", "F_Weak Cherry", "F_Strong Cherry", "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A" , "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", " F_312 Bell B2," "F_321 Bell A1," "F_321 Bell A2," "F_321 Bell B1," "F_321 Bell B2," "F_JACA," "F_JACB," "F_3BB," and "F_2BB."

For example, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB", then "C_3BB" is permitted to be displayed on the winning line. Also, if the internal winning combination is "F_2BB", then "C_2BB" is permitted to be displayed on the winning line. In other words, if the internal winning combination is "F_2BB" or "F_3BB", then it indicates that the internal winning combination is BB (2BB or 3BB).

In addition, if the internal winning role is "F_Replay", "C_T Replay", "C_C Replay", "C_CU Replay_01-02", "C_CD Replay_01-12", and "C_B Replay_01-32" are permitted to be displayed on the active line. In addition, if the internal winning role is "F_123 Bell B", "T_Spilling 1", "T_Spilling 4_01-02", "T_Spilling 5_01-02", "C_CD Bell A", "C_Middle Control 2_01-04", "C_Right Control 3_01-02", "C_Right Control 4_01-02", and "C_123 Control 2_01-02" are permitted to be displayed on the active line.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables according to this embodiment include an internal lottery table (see FIG. 307(a)) referenced in a unit game performed by inserting two medals in a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), an internal lottery table (see FIG. 307(b)) referenced in a unit game performed by inserting three medals in a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), an internal lottery table (see FIG. 308(a)) referenced in a unit game performed by inserting two medals in a 3BB flag interval state (RT0 gaming state), and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 308(b)) referenced in a unit game performed by inserting three medals in a 3BB flag interval state (RT0 gaming state). There are provided an internal lottery table (see Figure 308(b)) referenced in a unit game played by inserting one medal, an internal lottery table (see Figure 309(a)) referenced in a unit game played by inserting two medals into the 2BB flag state (RT1 game state), an internal lottery table (see Figure 309(b)) referenced in a unit game played by inserting three medals into the 2BB flag state (RT1 game state), and an internal lottery table (see Figure 309(c)) referenced in the BB game state (2BB game state and 3BB game state).

Figure 307(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (2-coin play). Figure 307(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (3-coin play). Figure 308(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 3BB flag interval state (2-coin play). Figure 308(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 3BB flag interval state (3-coin play). Figure 309(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 2BB flag interval state (2-coin play). Figure 309(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a 2BB flag interval state (3-coin play). Figure 309(c) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a BB play state.

The multiple internal lottery tables shown in Figures 307 to 309 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each game state and each number of coins inserted, and show the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. For example, in Figure 307(a), "F_2BB" is specified as a winning role, but "F_3BB" is not specified, and a lottery value of "12000" is specified for "F_2BB". As a result, the probability of "F_2BB" winning the internal lottery is "12000/65536". In Figure 307(b), "F_3BB" is specified as a winning role, but "F_2BB" is not specified, and a lottery value of "13877" is specified for "F_3BB" for setting 1. As a result, when set to setting 1, the probability of "F_3BB" being an internal winner is 13877/65536.

In FIGS. 308(a) and 308(b), a lottery value is defined for a winning combination that overlaps with "F_3BB" which has already been internally won. The duplicate winning combination is written in the form of "F_3BB+ (duplicate winning combination)" in the table. In the state between the 3BB flags (2-stake game and 3-stake game), the lottery value "0" is specified for "lost" because only "lost" is never won. Instead, "F_3BB" is defined as the winning combination when there are no duplicate wins (actually "lost").

In FIGS. 309(a) and (b), a lottery value is defined for a winning combination that overlaps with the already internally won "F_2BB". The duplicate winning combination is written in the form of "F_2BB+ (duplicate winning combination)" in the table. In the state between two BB flags (two-stakes game), since only a "lost" is never won, a lottery value of "0" is defined for a "lost". Further, a lottery value of "0" is defined for the winning combination ("F_2BB") when the winning is actually a "loss", and the winning combination is configured such that the winning combination is not won. Furthermore, in the state between two BB flags (three-stakes game), since only "lost" is never won, the lottery value "0" is defined for "lost". Instead, "F_2BB" is defined as the winning combination when there are no duplicate wins (actually "lost").

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and number of medals paid out>
310A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning role, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the bonus non-winning state and the 2BB flag state (3-coin game). FIG. 310B is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning role, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the 3BB flag state (3-coin game).

In the first embodiment, when each internal winning combination is won, any combination of symbols (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode. (See Figure 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out is configured as shown in FIGS. 310A and 310B.

FIG. 310A shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the non-bonus winning state or the 2BB flag state. FIG. 310B shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the 3BB flag state.

In the figure, "1 → 2 → 3" means that the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation on the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation on the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation. A case is shown in which this is performed as a 3-stop operation (batting order 1). In "1 → 3 → 2", the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 2).

"2 → 1 → 3" indicates a case where the stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stopping operation (batting order 3). "2 → 3 → 1" indicates a case where the stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stopping operation (batting order 4).

In "3 → 1 → 2", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 5). In "3→2→1", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 6).

For example, in a unit game in which three medals are inserted during a 2BB flag interval, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, then when a stop operation is performed by batting order 1, 11 medals will be paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 2, there is a 1/2 probability that one medal will be paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 3, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal will be paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 4, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal will be paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 5, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal will be paid out, and when a stop operation is performed by batting order 6, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal will be paid out.

In contrast, in a unit game in which three medals are inserted during a 3BB flag interval, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 1, 11 medals are paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 2, 11 medals are paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 3, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal is paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 4, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal is paid out, when a stop operation is performed by batting order 5, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal is paid out, and when a stop operation is performed by batting order 6, there is a 1/4 probability that one medal is paid out.

"F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" are each Depending on the order of stop operations (press order) on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed along the active line are different internal winning combinations (press order bells). When the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, if the push order is correct, 11 medals will be paid out.

In addition, in FIG. 310A, "same" means a 3-coin game in a bonus non-winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags, and the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, and medals. This indicates that the correspondence relationship with the number of coins paid out is the same, and the "change" is a 3-coin game in a non-bonus winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags. , indicates that the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out is at least partially different.

For example, as mentioned above, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a 3-coin game in the bonus non-winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags. The number of medals paid out when the stop operation is performed differs depending on the batting order 2. Therefore, in FIG. 310A, "Change" is displayed for "F_123 Bell B". Further, "Change" is also displayed for the bells in the pressing order other than "F_123 Bell B". In this embodiment, the correct pressing order for the pressing order bell is more in the 3BB flag state than in the bonus non-winning state or the 2BB flag state.

<Sub-flag>
311(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and sub-flag numbers, and FIG 311(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flag numbers and sub-flag names.

As explained in the first embodiment, the sub-flag is information that allows the group to be identified by grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are the target role for the lottery and the probability of winning, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability (various processes related to advantageous zones) by the main control circuit 100 and assigning the same information to the groups.

As shown in FIGS. 311(a) and (b), the sub-flag number "0" ("lose") is set for the internal winning combinations "lose", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB". . For the internal winning combination "F_Replay", a sub-flag number "1" ("Reply") is set. A sub-flag number “2” (“common bell”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_common B reply”. For the internal winning combination "F_Chance A", a sub-flag number "3" ("Chance A") is set. For the internal winning combination "F_Chance B", a sub-flag number "4" ("Chance B") is set.

For the internal winning roles "F_Special Role A", "F_Special Role B", "F_Special Role C", and "F_Special Role D", sub-flag number "5" ("Special Role") is set. For the internal winning role "F_Watermelon", sub-flag number "6" ("Watermelon") is set. For the internal winning role "F_Weak Cherry", sub-flag number "7" ("Weak Cherry") is set. For the internal winning role "F_Strong Cherry", sub-flag number "8" ("Strong Cherry") is set.

Internal winning combination “F_123 Bell A”, “F_123 Bell B”, “F_132 Bell A”, “F_132 Bell B”, “F_213 Bell A”, “F_213 Bell B”, “F_231 Bell A”, “F_231 Bell B” , "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" , a sub-flag number "9" ("Press Order Bell") is set.

As a result, if the internal winning role is any of "Miss", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB", the sub-flag "Miss" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Replay", the sub-flag "Replay" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Common B Replay", the sub-flag "Common Bell" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Chance A", the sub-flag "Chance Eye A" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Chance B", the sub-flag "Chance Eye B" is determined.

If the internal winning role is any of "F_Special Role A", "F_Special Role B", "F_Special Role C", and "F_Special Role D", the sub-flag "Special Role" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon", the sub-flag number "Watermelon" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Weak Cherry", the sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined. If the internal winning role is "F_Strong Cherry", the sub-flag "Strong Cherry" is determined.

If the internal winning combination is any of "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2", the sub-flag "Push Order Bell" is determined.

<Playability>
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of gaming states in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section according to an embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the 11th embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (ball output state) shown in FIG. 312 separately from the game state shown in FIG. 303. As shown in FIG. 312, the ball output state is broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones.

As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a gaming period that can be controlled to a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (see FIG. 5). The advantageous sections include a production section (advantageous section/normal game) and an increase section (advantageous section/AT state). The production section is basically a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is a non-advantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state. This section is similar to the section, but differs from the non-advantageous section in that a mode transition occurs. The increasing section is an AT state (a gaming state advantageous to the player).

In the production section, control is possible to any one of the normal mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, and pseudo bonus C mode. The characteristics of each mode will be explained in detail below.

In this specification, a state in which the advantageous zone and normal mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (normal mode), a state in which the advantageous zone and chance A mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (chance A mode), a state in which the advantageous zone and chance B mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (chance B mode), a state in which the advantageous zone and pseudo bonus A mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode), a state in which the advantageous zone and pseudo bonus B mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (pseudo bonus B mode), and a state in which the advantageous zone and pseudo bonus C mode are both referred to as an advantageous zone (pseudo bonus C mode).

<Processing at the start of play in non-advantageous zone>
Fig. 313 is a flow chart showing a game start process for a non-advantageous zone performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 314 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the initial bonus winning rate. Fig. 315 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of games in an advantageous zone and the set flag. Fig. 316 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the chance B continuation rate.

The game start processing for the non-advantageous zone shown in FIG. 313 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone (see FIG. 312) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of FIG. 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

In the non-advantageous section game start process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the internal winning combination is a predetermined combination ("lost" or "F_replay") (step S2001). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination process (see step S64 in FIG. 26) is either "lose" or "F_replay" (see FIGS. 307 to 309). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the internal winning combination is neither "lost" nor "F_replay", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination is either "lost" or "F_replay", the main CPU 101 executes advantageous section transition processing (step S2002). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets an advantageous section as a game section by updating a game section flag storage area (not shown) (see step S88 in FIG. 27). The main CPU 101 also sets the ceiling number of games to "851 games." Similarly to the first embodiment, when the number of unit games played in the normal mode of the advantageous section (the value of the ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling number of games, pseudo bonuses (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode , and pseudo-bonus C mode).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a first bonus winning rate lottery process (step S2003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a first bonus winning rate lottery table (see FIG. 314) and performs a lottery based on the sub-flag (see FIG. 311) and the random number value to determine whether the bonus winning rate is "low," "medium," or "high."

In the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIGS. ", "Watermelon", "Weak Cherry", "Strong Cherry", and "Press Order Bell"), the lottery value corresponding to the bonus winning rate ("Low", "Medium", and "High") is stipulated. In the diagram, "low bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "low", "medium bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium", and "high bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium". ” indicates that the bonus winning rate is “high”. The probability that each bonus winning rate is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the bonus winning rate / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The initial bonus winning rate lottery table is provided for each of settings 1 to 6. When the set value is setting 1, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(a) is referred to, and when the setting value is setting 2, the first bonus winning rate shown in FIG. 314(b) is referred to. The lottery table is referred to, and if the setting value is setting 3, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(c) is referred to, and if the setting value is setting 4, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. The initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. , the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(f) is referred to.

For example, if the setting value is setting 1 and the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "reply", the bonus winning rate is "low" with a probability of 102/256. ” is determined, “medium” is determined with a probability of 102/256, and “high” is determined with a probability of 52/256.

After executing the process of step S2003, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for setting the flag for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone (step S2004). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for setting the flag for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone (see FIG. 315) and determines whether the lottery is a "winning lottery" or a "non-winning lottery" by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

In the lottery table for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone, shown in FIG. 315, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone ("Non-winning" and "Winning") for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6") is specified. The probability of determining each result of the lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random numbers that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)". For example, when the setting value is setting 1, the lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone is won with a probability of 183/256. When the lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone is won, the main CPU 101 sets the lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone to ON. The lottery for determining the number of games that have passed the advantageous zone is set to OFF when the number of unit games played in the advantageous zone reaches 100.

After executing the process of step S2004, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate lottery process (step S2005). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 316) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to set the chance B continuation rate as "40%", "50%", One of "60%", "70%", "80%", "90%", and "100%" is determined.

In the Chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in Figures 316 (a) to (c), lottery values corresponding to the Chance B continuation rate (40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 100%) are specified for each setting value (Setting 1, Setting 2, Setting 3, Setting 4, Setting 5, and Setting 6). The probability of each Chance B continuation rate being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for the Chance B continuation rate / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

The Chance B continuation rate lottery table is provided for each bonus winning rate ("low", "medium", and "high"). When the bonus winning rate is "low", the Chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(a) is referenced, when the bonus winning rate is "medium", the Chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(b) is referenced, and when the bonus winning rate is "high", the Chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(c) is referenced.

For example, if the bonus winning rate determined by the initial bonus winning rate lottery process (see step S2003) is "low" and the setting value is setting 1, the chance B continuation rate is set at a probability of 80/256. "50%" is determined, "60%" is determined with a probability of 73/256, "70%" is determined with a probability of 70/256, "80%" is determined with a probability of 32/256, "90%" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

After executing the processing of step S2005, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for the advantageous zone (normal mode) (step S2006). The various lottery processes for the advantageous zone (normal mode) will be explained later using FIG. 321. After executing the processing of step S2005, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at start of game for advantageous section (normal mode)>
FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (normal mode) shown in FIG. ) is the process performed in step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 determines that the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and normal mode, respectively, by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103. can be recognized.

In the processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (normal mode), first, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling counter (step S2021). The value of the ceiling counter indicates the number of unit games played in the advantageous section (normal mode) and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the ceiling counter is added only in the advantageous section (normal mode), and is cleared when the advantageous section ends and the mode shifts to the non-advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851) (step S2022). If it is determined that the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 executes the ceiling reaching process (step S2023). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information. The value of the bonus winning information corresponds to the type of pseudo bonus and is stored in the main RAM 103. Specifically, bonus winning information "1" corresponds to pseudo bonus A mode, bonus winning information "2" corresponds to pseudo bonus B mode, and bonus winning information "3" corresponds to pseudo bonus A mode. Compatible with C mode.

The main CPU 101 also sets the bonus book premonition game number counter to "2". The value of the bonus book premonition game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book premonition effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The bonus book premonition effect is an effect that suggests a transition to a pseudo bonus, and is an effect that is performed when a pseudo bonus has been won (when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or greater). When the bonus book premonition effect ends (when the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter becomes "0"), a transition is made to a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) according to the value of the bonus winning information.

Even if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling game number (851), if a premonition effect (bonus main premonition effect, bonus fake premonition effect, or chance A premonition effect) is being executed (if the value of the bonus main premonition game number counter, bonus fake premonition game number counter, or chance A premonition game number counter is greater than 0), the ceiling reaching process may be executed when the premonition effect ends (when the value of the counter becomes 0). Premonition effects will be described in more detail later.

If it is determined in step S2022 that the value of the ceiling counter is not the number of ceiling games (851), or after executing the process in step S2023, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) ( Step S2024). Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) will be explained later using FIG. 321. After executing the process in step S2024, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Character-related lottery processing>
FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a character determination lottery table. FIG. 320 is a diagram showing a character high accuracy game number lottery table.

The character-related lottery process shown in FIG. 318 is a process that is performed after the main control circuit 100 performs the process of step S73 (sub-flag setting process) of FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) when the current play area is a non-advantageous area, or when the current play area is an advantageous area and the mode is normal mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, pseudo bonus A mode, or pseudo bonus B mode (see FIG. 312). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current play area and mode by referring to the play area flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the character-related lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the character high probability game number counter (see step S2049) is greater than 0 (step S2041). The value of the character high probability game number counter indicates the remaining number of times a unit game is played with a character (any of character A, character B, character C, and character D) set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Although not shown, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a decoration unit A, a decoration unit B, a decoration unit C, and a decoration unit D. These decorative units are equipped with a lens member having translucency. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with an LED for illuminating the decoration unit A, an LED for illuminating the decoration unit B, an LED for illuminating the decoration unit C, and an LED for illuminating the decoration unit D. Decoration unit A irradiation LED, decoration unit B irradiation LED, decoration unit C irradiation LED, and decoration unit D irradiation LED are decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D, respectively. It is placed so that it can be irradiated with light. This allows decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D to be lit individually.

Specifically, when character A is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit A illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit A lights up. When character B is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit B illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit B lights up. When the character C is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit C illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit C lights up. When the character D is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit D illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit D lights up.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the character high probability game number counter is greater than 0, it subtracts 1 from the value of the character high probability game number counter (step S2042). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the character high probability game number counter is 0 (step S2043). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the character high probability game number counter is 0, it clears the set character (step S2044).

If it is determined in step S2041 that the value of the character high probability game number counter is 0, if it is determined in step S2043 that the value of the character high probability game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process of step S2044. , the main CPU 101 determines whether a character is set (step S2045). If it is determined that a character has been set, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a character has not been set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is a "special role" (see FIG. 311) (step S2046). If it is determined that the sub-flag is not a "special role," the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub-flag is determined to be a "special role", the main CPU 101 executes a character determination lottery (step S2047). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a character determination lottery table (see FIG. 319) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the character determination lottery as either "No Winner", "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", or "Character D".

In the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319, the character is Lottery values corresponding to the determined lottery results ("non-winning", "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D") are defined. The probability that each result of the character determination lottery will be determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The character selection lottery consists of non-advantageous sections, advantageous sections (normal mode), advantageous sections (chance A mode), advantageous sections (chance B mode), advantageous sections (pseudo-bonus A mode), and advantageous sections (pseudo-bonus B mode). ). If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous period (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) is set to on, the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. If it is not set to , the character selection lottery table shown in FIG. mode), an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode), the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319(c) is referred to.

For example, if the setting value is 1, in an advantageous section (normal mode) in which the advantageous section elapsed games determination flag is not set to on, there is a probability of 169/256 that "non-winning" will occur as a result of the character selection lottery. " is determined, "Character A" is determined with a probability of 36/256, "Character B" is determined with a probability of 32/256, "Character C" is determined with a probability of 18/256, and "Character C" is determined with a probability of 18/256. “Character D” is determined with the probability of .

Although not shown, if a character determination lottery is won in the character-related lottery process executed in one unit play (the result of the character determination lottery is either "Character A," "Character B," "Character C," or "Character D"), the character corresponding to that result will be set in the character-related lottery process executed in the next unit play (before the processing of step S2041 is performed). As a result, one of decorative unit A, decorative unit B, decorative unit C, and decorative unit D will be lit up in that next unit play.

After executing the process of step S2047, the main CPU 101 determines that the character determination lottery has been won (the result of the character determination lottery is "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D"). (step S2048). If it is determined that the character determination lottery has not been won (the result of the character determination lottery is "non-win"), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the character selection lottery has been won (the result of the character selection lottery is any one of "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D"), the main The CPU 101 executes a character high accuracy game number lottery (step S2049). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the character high probability game number lottery table (see FIG. 320) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the number of character high probability games as "3", "5", One of "10", "15", and "20" is determined.

In the character high probability game number lottery table shown in Figure 320, lottery values corresponding to the character high probability game number ("3", "5", "10", "15", and "20") are specified for each game state ("non-advantageous zone, advantageous zone (normal mode), and advantageous zone (chance A mode)" as well as "advantageous zone (chance B mode), advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode), and advantageous zone (pseudo bonus B mode)". The probability of determining each character high probability game number can be expressed as "lottery value specified for the character high probability game number / number of all random number values that can be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, in the advantageous zone (normal mode), the number of character high probability games is determined to be "5" with a probability of 153/256, "10" with a probability of 85/256, "15" with a probability of 16/256, and "20" with a probability of 2/256. The main CPU 101 sets the determined number of character high probability games in the character high probability game number counter. After executing the processing of step S2049, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Various lottery processing for advantageous sections (normal mode)>
FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The various lottery processes for the advantageous zone (normal mode) shown in FIG. 321 are processes performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2006 in FIG. 313 (game start processing for non-advantageous zones) and step S2024 in FIG. 317 (game start processing for advantageous zones (normal mode)).

In the various lottery processes for the advantageous zone (normal mode), the main CPU 101 first executes the bonus lottery process (step S2061). The bonus lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 322.

After executing the processing of step S2061, the main CPU 101 executes the bonus promotion lottery processing (step S2062). The bonus promotion lottery processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 325.

After executing the process of step S2062, the main CPU 101 executes chance A lottery process (step S2063). The chance A lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 327.

After executing the process in step S2063, the main CPU 101 executes a precursor game number lottery process (step S2064). The precursor game number lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 330.

After executing the processing of step S2064, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Bonus lottery processing>
Fig. 322 is a flow chart showing the bonus lottery process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 323 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table. Fig. 324(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the sub-flag and the ball-out flag group (normal) number for each character. Fig. 324(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the ball-out flag group (normal) number and the ball-out flag group (normal).

The bonus lottery process shown in FIG. 322 is a process performed in step S2061 of FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous section (normal mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the bonus lottery process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the ceiling counter (see step S2021 in FIG. 317) is smaller than the ceiling game number (851) (step S2081). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is not smaller than the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the ceiling counter is smaller than the ceiling game number (851), it determines whether or not the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2023 in FIG. 317) is "0" (step S2082). If it determines that the value of the bonus winning information is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus lottery information is "0", the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery (step S2083). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 323) and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value, so that as a result of the bonus lottery, One of "non-winning information", "bonus winning information +1", "bonus winning information +2", "bonus winning information +3", and "bonus fake" is determined.

In the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323, the ball flag groups (normal) ("other than those listed on the right", "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", "rare LV4", "rare LV5"), and For each “Rare LV6”), a lottery corresponding to the bonus lottery result (“Non-winning”, “Bonus winning information +1”, “Bonus winning information +2”, “Bonus winning information +3”, and “Bonus fake”) The value is specified. The probability that each result of the bonus lottery is determined can be expressed by "the lottery value defined for the result/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

The bonus lottery table includes bonus winning rates (“low,” “medium,” and “high”) (see step S2003 in FIG. 313), and a flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). It is provided for each presence/absence. If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous section is set on, the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. When the winning rate is "low", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(a) is referred to, and when the bonus winning rate is "medium", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(b) is referred to. If the bonus lottery rate is "high", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(c) is referred to.

In FIG. 324, a ball output flag group (normal) corresponding to a sub-flag (see FIG. 311) is specified for the presence or absence and type of character ("None", "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D") (see step S2047 in FIG. 318). "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that Character A is set, "Character B" indicates that Character B is set, "Character C" indicates that Character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that Character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flag into a ball output flag group (normal) based on the presence or absence and type of character and the correspondence shown in FIG. 324.

For example, in a state where character A is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "Reply", the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3". ” is determined. At this time, if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "high", a "non-winning" will be determined as a result of the bonus lottery with a probability of 240/256. "Bonus winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 8/256, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 7/256, and "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256. .

For example, in a state where character D is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special combination", the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV5" is determined. At this time, if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "low", the bonus lottery result will be "bonus winning information +1" with a probability of 37/256. is determined, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 36/256, "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "bonus fake" is determined with a probability of 182/256. .

If "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information. If "bonus winning information +3" is determined, "3" is added to the value of bonus winning information. Here, the upper limit value of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", so if the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the value of the bonus winning information. set. When the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that a pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, as described above, a real bonus precursor effect is performed.

In addition, if "bonus fake" is determined as the result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag on. The bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that "bonus fake" has been determined as the result of the bonus lottery (a bonus fake has been won). If a bonus fake is won, a bonus fake premonition effect is performed. The bonus fake premonition effect is an effect that suggests a transition to a pseudo bonus, and is an effect (a so-called false effect) that is performed when a pseudo bonus has not been won. Even if the bonus fake premonition effect ends, there is no transition to a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode).

After executing the process in step S2083, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Bonus promotion lottery process>
FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing bonus promotion lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 326 is a diagram showing a bonus promotion lottery table.

The bonus promotion lottery process shown in FIG. 325 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2062 of FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous zones (normal mode)). Note that if a bonus lottery (see step S2083 of FIG. 322) is performed in one unit game and the value of the bonus winning information becomes 1 or more, the bonus promotion lottery process may not be performed in that unit game, and the bonus promotion lottery process may be performed from the next unit game.

In the bonus promotion lottery process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is greater than "0" (step S2101). When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the bonus winning information is larger than "0" (1 or more), the main CPU 101 executes a bonus promotion lottery (step S2102). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 326) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number, thereby determining the result of the bonus promotion lottery. As a result, one of "non-winning", "bonus winning information +1", and "bonus winning information +2" is determined.

In the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 326, lottery values corresponding to the results of the bonus promotion lottery ("non-winning", "bonus winning lottery information +1", and "bonus winning lottery information +2") are specified for each ball output flag group (normal) ("other than the above", "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", "rare LV4", "rare LV5", and "rare LV6"). The probability of each result of the bonus promotion lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

The bonus promotion lottery table is provided for each case where the current bonus winning information is "1" and when the current bonus winning information is "2" or more. When the current bonus winning information is "1", the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 326(a) is referred to, and when the current bonus winning information is "2" or more, the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. ) is referred to as the bonus promotion lottery table.

For example, if the current bonus winning information is "1" and the payout flag group (normal) is "Rare LV5", the bonus promotion lottery result will be "No Winning" with a probability of 171/256, "Bonus Winning Information +1" with a probability of 84/256, and "Bonus Winning Information +2" with a probability of 1/256.

If "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information. Add "2" to the value of . As mentioned above, the upper limit of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", so if the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the bonus winning information to "3". ”.

After executing the process in step S2102, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Chance A lottery processing>
Fig. 327 is a flow chart showing the Chance A lottery process carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 328 is a diagram showing a Chance A lottery table by setting. Fig. 329 is a diagram showing a Chance A lottery table.

The Chance A lottery process shown in Figure 327 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2063 of Figure 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous zones (normal mode)).

In the chance A lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery by setting (step S2121). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A lottery table by setting (see FIG. 328) and determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

In the setting-based chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , lottery values corresponding to the results of chance A lottery by setting (“non-winning” and “winning”) are defined. The probability that each result of Chance A lottery by setting is determined shall be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The chance A lottery table by setting is provided for each of the presence/absence of the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous section is not set to ON, the chance A lottery table by setting shown in FIG. , the chance A lottery table by setting shown in FIG. 328(b) is referred to. For example, if the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON and the setting value is 1, the probability of winning the chance A lottery by setting is 194/256.

After executing the process of step S2121, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting-specific Chance A lottery has been won (step S2122). If it is determined that the setting-specific Chance A lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance A lottery by setting has been won, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery (step S2123). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A lottery table (see FIG. 329) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the chance A lottery. Then, one of "non-winning", "chance A winning information +1", and "chance A winning information +2" is determined.

In the Chance A lottery table shown in FIG. 329, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance A lottery ("Non-winning", "Chance A winning lottery information +1", and "Chance A winning lottery information +2") are specified for each ball output flag group (normal) ("Other than the above", "Rare LV1", "Rare LV2", "Rare LV3", "Rare LV4", "Rare LV5", and "Rare LV6"). The probability of each outcome of the Chance A lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

The chance A lottery table is provided for each case where the current chance A winning information is "0" and when the current chance A winning information is "1" or more. When the current chance A winning information is "0", the chance A lottery table shown in FIG. 328(a) is referred to, and when the current chance A winning information is "1" or more, The chance A lottery table shown in (b) is referred to.

For example, if the Chance A lottery information is "0" and the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", a "non-winning" will be determined as a result of Chance A lottery with a probability of 89/256. "Chance A winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 163/256, and "Chance A winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 4/256.

When "Chance A winning information +1" is determined as the result of the Chance A lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the Chance A winning information, and when "Chance A winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information. Here, since the upper limit of the value of the Chance A winning information is "2", if the value of the Chance A winning information after the addition exceeds "2", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the Chance A winning information to "2". A value of the Chance A winning information of 1 or more indicates that Chance A has been won, and in this case, a Chance A premonition performance will be performed. The Chance A premonition performance is a performance that suggests a transition to Chance A mode. When the Chance A premonition performance ends, a transition to Chance A mode will occur.

After executing the processing of step S2123, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of omen games>
FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the precursor game number lottery process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 331 is a diagram showing the number of portent games lottery table.

The premonition game number lottery process shown in Figure 330 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2064 of Figure 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous zones (normal mode)).

In the precursor game number lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter (bonus book precursor game counter, bonus fake precursor game counter, and chance A precursor game counter) (see step S2145) is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S2141). If it is determined that at least one of the values of the bonus real precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the chance A precursor game number counter is not 0, that is, the precursor effect (bonus real precursor effect, bonus If a fake omen performance or a chance A omen performance) is being performed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the values of the bonus real precursor games counter, the bonus fake precursor games counter, and the chance A precursor games counter are all 0, If the performance (or the chance A portent performance) is not performed, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is 1 or more (step S2142).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the bonus winning information is less than 1 (0), it determines whether or not the bonus fake flag (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is set on (step S2143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus fake flag is not set on, it determines whether or not the value of the chance A winning information (see step S2123 in FIG. 327) is 1 or greater (step S2144). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance A winning information is less than 1 (0), it ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2142 that the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, if it is determined that the bonus fake flag is set on in step S2143, or if the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more in step S2144. If it is determined that this is the case, that is, if the pseudo bonus, bonus fake, or chance A is won in the current unit game, the main CPU 101 executes a precursor game number lottery (step S2145).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the premonition game number lottery table (see FIG. 331) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the premonition base game number as one of "3," "4," "12," "15," "26," "29," or "32." The main CPU 101 then performs a separate lottery based on a random number value to determine the additional game number as one of the numbers from 0 to 2. The main CPU 101 then determines the sum of the premonition base game number and the additional game number as the premonition game number.

In the premonition game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331, lottery values corresponding to the premonition basic game number ("3", "4", "12", "15", "26", "29", and "32") are specified for each trigger of the premonition game number lottery ("Bonus Fake", "Bonus Winning Lottery Information 1", "Bonus Winning Lottery Information 2", "Bonus Winning Lottery Information 3", and "Chance A Winning"). The probability of determining each premonition basic game number can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that premonition basic game number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

In the figure, "Bonus Fake" indicates that a lottery is held to determine the number of premonition games based on the bonus fake flag being set on (winning the bonus fake), and in this case, the determined number of premonition games is set in the bonus fake premonition game number counter. The value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter indicates the remaining number of times in the unit game for which the bonus fake premonition performance will be executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Further, "Bonus winning information 1" indicates that the number of precursor games lottery is performed based on the value of the bonus winning information being 1, and "Bonus winning information 2" indicates that the value of the bonus winning information is 2. ``Bonus winning information 3'' indicates that the number of portent games is drawn based on the fact that the value of the bonus winning information is 3. In these cases, the determined number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

In addition, "When Chance A is won" indicates that a lottery for the number of premonition games is held based on the fact that Chance A has been won (the value of the Chance A winning information is 1 or greater), and in this case, the determined number of premonition games is set in the Chance A premonition game number counter. The value of the Chance A premonition game number counter indicates the remaining number of times in the unit game for which the Chance A premonition performance will be executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

As the precursor game number lottery table, there are provided a precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(a) and a precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b). The precursor performance is not performed (the values of the bonus real precursor games counter, the bonus fake precursor games counter, and the chance A precursor games counter are all 0), and the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV1", "Rare LV2", "Rare LV3", or "Rare LV6", bonus fake, pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) , or if chance A is won, the number of portent games lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b) is referred to, and in other cases, the number of portent games lottery table shown in FIG. 331(a) is referred to. Ru.

For example, if no premonition effect is performed and the payout flag group (normal) is "Rare LV1", and the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the premonition base game number is determined to be "3" with a probability of 163/256, "4" with a probability of 8/256, "12" with a probability of 69/256, and "15" with a probability of 16/256. The main CPU 101 sets the sum of the determined premonition base game number and the added game number (any of 0 to 2) in the premonition game number counter.

After executing the processing of step S2145, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the number of premonition games is set in the bonus book premonition game number counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates bonus book premonition effect start command data and stores the generated bonus book premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus book premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the bonus book premonition effect, and performs processes to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the bonus book premonition effect. As a result, the bonus book premonition effect is performed over a unit game of the number of premonition games.

Further, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus fake precursor game counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor performance start command data, and transmits the generated bonus fake precursor performance start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The bonus fake precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the bonus fake precursor performance, and control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the bonus fake precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the bonus fake precursor performance is performed over the unit games corresponding to the number of precursor games. The bonus fake precursor performance is basically the same performance as the bonus real precursor performance.

Further, when the number of portent games is set in the chance A portent game number counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates chance A portent performance start command data, and transmits the generated chance A portent performance start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The chance A precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This makes it possible for the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is the timing to start the chance A precursor performance, and to control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the chance A precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the chance A precursor performance is performed over unit games equal to the number of precursor games. The chance A precursor performance may be the same as the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance, or may be a different performance. In addition, if you win a pseudo bonus, bonus fake, or chance A at that time, the bonus real precursor performance will be performed with the highest priority, the bonus fake precursor performance will be performed with the next priority, and the chance A precursor performance will be performed with the highest priority. is performed next with priority.

Also, while the bonus fake premonition performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter is greater than 0), a bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed, and if the bonus lottery (pseudo bonus) is won, the value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter is cleared (the counter is set to "0"). Then, the number of premonition games determined by the premonition game number lottery (see step S2145) is set in the bonus main premonition game number counter. As a result, the bonus fake premonition performance ends and the bonus main premonition performance begins.

Also, while the chance A precursor performance is being performed (the value of the chance A precursor game counter is greater than 0), a bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed, and thereby a pseudo bonus or bonus If the fake wins, the chance A precursor performance is continuously performed until the value of the chance A precursor game counter becomes 0 (bonus main precursor performance or bonus fake precursor performance are stocked). Then, after transitioning from an advantageous section (normal mode) to an advantageous section (chance A mode) with the end of the chance A portent production, when transitioning from an advantageous section (chance A mode) to an advantageous section (normal mode), A lottery for the number of portent games (see step S2145) is performed. The determined number of portent games is set in the bonus book portent game number counter or bonus fake portent game counter, and the bonus book portent performance or bonus fake portent performance is started (the stocked bonus book portent performance or A bonus fake omen effect will be released).

In addition, when a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) is won by the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) with the bonus fake precursor performances being stocked in this way, the pseudo bonus When the A mode ends, or when the chance B mode transferred from the pseudo-bonus B mode ends, information indicating that bonus fake precursor effects are stocked is cleared.

In addition, if the bonus fake is won again in the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) while the bonus fake precursor performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is greater than 0), The original bonus fake precursor performance is continuously performed until the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter becomes 0. On the other hand, information indicating that the bonus fake has been won again is discarded.

In addition, if Chance A is won by the Chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. 327) while the bonus fake premonition performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter is greater than 0), the bonus fake premonition performance will continue to be performed (Chance A premonition performance will be stocked) until the value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter becomes 0. Then, when the bonus fake premonition performance ends, a premonition game number lottery (see step S2145) will be performed, the number of premonition games determined thereby will be set in the Chance A premonition game number counter, and the Chance A premonition performance will start (the stocked Chance A premonition performance will be released).

As described above, bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322), bonus promotion lottery (see step S2102 in FIG. 325), chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and number of portent games lottery (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) ) have been described as being performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), but these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. This may be performed in the current state control process). For example, if the sub-flag set in the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process in step S6 (main process) in FIG. These processes are performed in the start state control process), while if the sub-flag is "push order bell", these processes are performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process). You may also do this.

When performing these processes in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group ( (usually) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the put-out flag group (normal) according to the character (see FIG. 324) is determined; If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the put-out flag group (normal) number regardless of the character. In addition, in the unit game in which the advantageous section transition process (see step S2002 in FIG. 313) is performed, even if the sub-flag is "push order bell", the process in step S6 (at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process) is performed. These processes may be performed in the state control process).

<Precursor game number counter management processing>
FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing precursor game number counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The precursor game number counter management process shown in FIG. 332 is performed in the main control circuit 100 as shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S15 (game end state control process) of the main process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game section and mode by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the premonition game number counter management process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) is greater than 0 (step S2161). If it is determined that the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter (step S2162). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter is 0 (step S2163). If it is determined that the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the bonus precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus precursor performance (step S2164). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus actual precursor performance end command data, and stores the generated bonus actual precursor performance end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus main precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the bonus main precursor performance, and the display of images, output of sound, and light Processing to terminate output, etc. is performed.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo bonus transition flag to ON (step S2165) and ends this subroutine. The pseudo bonus transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) according to the value of the bonus winning information in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo bonus transition flag was set to ON. As a result, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the mode transitions to pseudo bonus A mode, if the value of the bonus winning information is 2, the mode transitions to pseudo bonus B mode, and if the value of the bonus winning information is 3, the mode transitions to pseudo bonus C mode.

If it is determined in step S2161 that the value of the bonus real precursor games counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus fake precursor games counter is greater than 0 (step S2166). If it is determined that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is larger than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter (step S2167). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0 (step S2168). When determining that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus fake precursor performance (step S2169). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor performance end command data, and stores the generated bonus fake precursor performance end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus fake precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the bonus fake precursor performance, and the display of images, output of sound, and light Processing to terminate output, etc. is performed. After executing the process of step S2169, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2166 that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A precursor game counter is greater than 0 (step S2170). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance A precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance A precursor games counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A precursor games counter (step S2171). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A precursor game counter is 0 (step S2172). If it is determined that the value of the chance A precursor game counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the Chance A premonition game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the Chance A premonition effect (step S2173). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates Chance A premonition effect end command data and stores the generated Chance A premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The Chance A premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the Chance A premonition effect, and processes are performed to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc., that are being performed for the Chance A premonition effect.

Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A transition flag to ON (step S2174), and ends this subroutine. The chance A transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start chance A mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance A transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance A mode. Furthermore, when the chance A mode starts, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A game number counter to "3". The value of the chance A game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played in the chance A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

<Processing at the start of a game for the advantageous zone (Chance A mode)>
Fig. 333 is a flow chart showing the game start processing for the advantageous zone (Chance A mode) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 334A and Fig. 334B are diagrams showing a lottery table for rewards during Chance A. Fig. 335(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball output flag group (Chance A) numbers for each character. Fig. 335(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between ball output flag group (Chance A) numbers and ball output flag groups (Chance A). Fig. 336 is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the Chance B continuation rate for addition.

The game start processing for the advantageous zone (Chance A mode) shown in FIG. 333 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and Chance A mode, respectively (see FIG. 312). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and Chance A mode, respectively, by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for the advantageous section (chance A mode), first, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A game number counter (step S2181). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A game counter is 0 (step S2182). If it is determined that the value of the chance A game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to on (step S2183). The normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

If it is determined in step S2182 that the value of the chance A game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process in step S2183, the main CPU 101 executes a reward lottery during chance A (step S2184). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A reward lottery table (see FIGS. 334A and 334B), and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag group (chance A) (see FIG. 335) and random numbers. , As a result of the reward lottery during chance A, "non-winning", "continuation rate UP weak", "continuation rate UP", "continuation rate UP strong", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", "direct hit" One of "pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C" is determined.

In the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIGS. 334A and 334B, the ball flag groups (chance A) ("other than those listed on the right", "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", "rare LV4"), For each "Rare LV5" and "Rare LV6"), the reward lottery results during Chance A ("Non-winning", "Low continuation rate UP", "Continuation rate UP", "Strong continuation rate UP", " Lottery values corresponding to "Damage Stock +1", "Damage Stock +2", "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus A", "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus B", and "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus C" are defined. The probability that each outcome of the reward lottery during chance A is determined should be expressed as "Lottery value specified for that outcome/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The Chance A reward lottery table includes Chance A winning information (“1” and “2”) (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and the remaining number of unit games to be played in Chance A mode (Chance A game number counter). Values: "0", "1", and "2"). When the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "0", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334A(a) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "1", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334A(b) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "1". , when the value of the chance A game number counter is "2", the chance A medium reward lottery table shown in FIG. When the value of the counter is "0", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334B(a) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "2", and the value of the chance A game number counter is " 1", the chance A medium reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334B(b) is referred to, and when the chance A winning information is "2" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "2" In this case, the reward lottery table for chance A shown in FIG. 334B(c) is referred to.

In FIG. 335, sub-flags (see step S2047 in FIG. 311)) is defined. "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that character A is set, "Character B" indicates that character B is set, and "Character A" indicates that character A is set. "Character C" indicates that character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flag into a ball-out flag group (chance A) based on the presence/absence and type of the character and the correspondence shown in FIG. 335.

For example, when character A is set and the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "Push Order Bell", "Rare LV1" is determined as the payout flag group (Chance A). At this time, if the Chance A winning lottery information is "2" and the value of the Chance A game number counter is "2", the result of the Chance A reward lottery is determined to be "Continuation Rate UP" with a probability of 176/256, "Continuation Rate Strong UP" with a probability of 16/256, "Damage Stock +1" with a probability of 62/256, and "Damage Stock +2" with a probability of 2/256.

For example, when character B is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is a "special role", "Rare LV3" is determined as the payout flag group (Chance A). At this time, if the Chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the Chance A game number counter is "0", the result of the Chance A reward lottery is that a "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus B" is determined with a probability of 240/256, and a "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus C" is determined with a probability of 16/256.

After executing the processing of step S2184, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not character D (see step S2047 in FIG. 318) is set (step S2185). If it is determined that character D is not set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "non-winning" (step S2186). If it is determined that the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "non-winning", the main CPU 101 executes processing for when the reward lottery during Chance A is not won (step S2187). The processing for when the reward lottery during Chance A is not won will be described later using FIG. 337. After executing the processing of step S2187, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If the result of the Chance A reward lottery is not "non-winning" in step S2186, the main CPU 101 judges whether the result of the Chance A reward lottery is a continuation rate UP ("weak continuation rate UP", "continuation rate UP", or "strong continuation rate UP") (step S2188). If the result of the Chance A reward lottery is any of "weak continuation rate UP", "continuation rate UP", and "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 executes an addition Chance B continuation rate UP lottery (step S2189). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the addition Chance B continuation rate UP lottery table (see FIG. 336) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the addition Chance B continuation rate UP lottery as "non-winning", "1%, "2%, "3%, "4%, "5%, " and "10%".

In the Chance B Continuation Rate Up Lottery Table shown in FIG. 336, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance B Continuation Rate Up Lottery for Addition (No Win, 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, and 10%) are specified for each degree of continuation rate up determined by the Chance A reward lottery ("Weak Continuation Rate Up", "Medium Continuation Rate Up", and "Strong Continuation Rate Up") (see step S2184). The probability of each result of the Chance B Continuation Rate Up Lottery for Addition being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the result of the Chance A reward lottery is "continuation rate UP", the result of the Chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition is determined to be "2%" with a probability of 128/256, "3%" with a probability of 64/256, and "4%" with a probability of 64/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the Chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition to the value of the Chance B continuation rate information for addition. The value of the Chance B continuation rate information for addition is stored in the main RAM 103. The Chance B continuation rate information for addition will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S2189, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2188 that the result of the chance A reward lottery is none of "low continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", and "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 It is determined whether the result of the medium reward lottery is damage stock (“damage stock +1” or “damage stock +2”) (step S2190). If it is determined that the result of the chance A reward lottery is either "damage stock +1" or "damage stock +2", the main CPU 101 updates the value of the damage stock counter (step S2191).

In this process, if the result of the chance A reward lottery is "damage stock + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the chance A reward lottery is "damage stock + 2", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter and ”, add “2” to the value of the damage stock counter. The value of the damage stock counter is stored in the main RAM 103. The damage stock counter will be detailed later. After executing the process in step S2191, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S2190, the result of the reward lottery during chance A is neither "damage stock +1" nor "damage stock +2" ("direct hit pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C"). ”), the main CPU 101 executes processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus (step S2192). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value corresponding to the result of the chance A reward lottery to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, when the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", If the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "Bonus B", "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "Direct hit pseudo bonus C", "3" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. .

The main CPU 101 also sets the bonus book premonition game number counter to "1". This will start a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). In other words, there is a direct transition from Chance A mode to pseudo bonus without transitioning from Chance A mode to normal mode. The main CPU 101 also sets the Chance A game number counter to "0". Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set to on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the process of step S2192, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2185 that character D is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the chance A reward lottery is "direct hit pseudo bonus C" (step S2193). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chance A reward lottery is the "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to the pseudo bonus C mode (step S2194). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets the bonus precursor game number counter to "1", and sets the chance A game number counter to "0". As a result, the pseudo bonus C mode will be started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode directly shifts to the pseudo bonus C mode without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the process in step S2194, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2193 that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is not "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes a process to transition to pseudo bonus B mode, etc. (step S2195). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets the bonus book premonition game number counter to "1", and sets the chance A game number counter to "0". As a result, the pseudo bonus B mode (if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transition to the chance A mode, the pseudo bonus C mode) will be started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode transitions directly to the pseudo bonus B mode, etc., without transitioning from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set to on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the processing of step S2195, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The above explains that the Chance A reward lottery (see step S2184) is performed in the process of step S6 (start of game state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), but this process may also be performed in the process of step S15 (end of game state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). For example, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), this process may be performed in the process of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main process) (start of game state control process), whereas if the sub-flag is the "push order bell", this process may be performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (end of game state control process).

When this process is performed in step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the ball output flag group (Chance A) to be referenced may be different depending on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell", if 11 medals are paid out, the ball output flag group (Chance A) (see FIG. 335) corresponding to the character is determined, whereas if 11 medals are not paid out, "0" may be determined as the ball output flag group (Chance A) number regardless of the character.

<Processing when reward lottery is not won during Chance A>
FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing processing performed in the main control circuit when reward lottery is not won during chance A. FIG. 338 is a diagram showing a forced cancellation lottery table during chance A. FIG. 339 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table upon reaching the specified chance A point. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games during chance A.

The processing when the reward lottery during Chance A is not won, as shown in FIG. 337, is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2187 of FIG. 333 (processing at the start of play for the advantageous zone (Chance A mode)).

In the reward lottery non-winning process during chance A, the main CPU 101 first executes a forced cancellation lottery during chance A (step S2201). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A forced cancellation lottery table (see FIG. 338) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the chance A forced cancellation lottery, "chance A points + 1 ”, “direct hit pseudo bonus A”, “direct hit pseudo bonus B”, and “direct hit pseudo bonus C”.

In the Chance A forced release lottery table shown in FIG. 338, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance A forced release lottery (Chance A points +1, Direct Pseudo Bonus A, Direct Pseudo Bonus B, and Direct Pseudo Bonus C) are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the Chance A forced release lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random numbers that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". For example, when the setting value is Setting 1, the result of the Chance A forced release lottery is determined as "Chance A points +1" with a probability of 255/256, and "Direct Pseudo Bonus B" with a probability of 1/256.

After executing the process in step S2201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "chance A point + 1" (step S2202). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "chance A point + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of chance A point (step S2203). The value of the chance A point is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of chance A points is 3 or more (step S2204).

If it is determined that the value of the chance A points is 3 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery when the specified chance A points are reached (step S2205). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the prescribed chance A point bonus lottery table (see FIG. 339) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the prescribed chance A point bonus lottery, " One of "bonus fake", "bonus winning information +1", "bonus winning information +2", and "bonus winning information +3" is determined.

In the bonus lottery table for when the specified chance A point is reached shown in Figure 339, lottery values corresponding to the results of the bonus lottery for when the specified chance A point is reached ("bonus fake", "bonus winning lottery information +1", "bonus winning lottery information +2", and "bonus winning lottery information +3") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the bonus lottery for when the specified chance A point is reached can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)". For example, if the setting value is setting 1, the result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached is a 138/256 probability of "bonus fake," a 53/256 probability of "bonus winning information +1," a 64/256 probability of "bonus winning information +2," and a 1/256 probability of "bonus winning information +3."

When "bonus winning information +1" is determined as the result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information. When "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information. When "bonus winning information +3" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information. As described above, since the upper limit of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", if the value of the bonus winning information after the addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the bonus winning information to "3". In addition, a value of the bonus winning information of 1 or more indicates that the pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, a bonus main premonition performance is performed.

In addition, if a "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, and the value of the bonus winning information is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag to on. do. As described above, the bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that a bonus fake has been won, and thereby a bonus fake precursor effect is performed. In addition, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transition to Chance A mode, even if "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, the bonus will not be applied. Fake flags are not set on. In this case, the value of the bonus winning information is referred to in the lottery for the number of precursor games during chance A (see step S2207), and the bonus main precursor effect is performed.

After executing the process in step S2205, the main CPU 101 subtracts "3" from the value of chance A points (step S2206). Then, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of portent games during chance A (step S2207). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of portent games during chance A (see FIG. 340) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the number of portent games as "4", "14", " 15'', ``19'', ``20'', ``21'', and ``22''.

In the chance A portend game number lottery table shown in FIG. 340, the triggers for the portent game number lottery ("bonus fake", "bonus winning information 1", "bonus winning information 2", and "bonus winning information 3") For each, a lottery value corresponding to the number of precursor games (“4,” “14,” “15,” “19,” “20,” “21,” and “22”) is defined. The probability that each number of portent games is determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for the number of portent games/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

In the figure, "Bonus Fake" indicates that a lottery is held for the number of premonition games during Chance A based on the bonus fake flag being set on (winning the bonus fake), and in this case, the determined number of premonition games is set in the bonus fake premonition game number counter. As described above, the value of the bonus fake premonition game number counter indicates the remaining number of times in a unit game in which the bonus fake premonition performance will be executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

"Bonus winning information 1" indicates that a lottery is held for the number of premonition games during Chance A based on the bonus winning information having a value of 1, "Bonus winning information 2" indicates that a lottery is held for the number of premonition games during Chance A based on the bonus winning information having a value of 2, and "Bonus winning information 3" indicates that a lottery is held for the number of premonition games during Chance A based on the bonus winning information having a value of 3. In these cases, the determined number of premonition games is set in the bonus book premonition game number counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book premonition game number counter indicates the remaining number of times in the unit game in which the bonus book premonition performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

For example, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the number of premonition games is determined to be "14" with a probability of 32/256, "15" with a probability of 32/256, "19" with a probability of 60/256, "20" with a probability of 58/256, "21" with a probability of 58/256, and "22" with a probability of 16/256. The main CPU 101 sets the determined number of premonition games in the premonition game number counter.

As with step S2145 in FIG. 330, when the number of premonition games is set in the bonus book premonition game number counter in step S2207 in FIG. 337, the main CPU 101 generates bonus book premonition effect start command data and stores the generated bonus book premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus book premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the bonus book premonition effect, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the bonus book premonition effect. As a result, the bonus book premonition effect is performed over a unit game of the number of premonition games.

Also, when the number of premonition games is set in the bonus fake premonition game number counter in step S2207, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake premonition performance start command data and stores the generated bonus fake premonition performance start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus fake premonition performance start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the bonus fake premonition performance, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the bonus fake premonition performance. As a result, the bonus fake premonition performance is performed over a unit game of the number of premonition games.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the value of chance A points is less than 3, or after executing the process in step S2207, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2208). As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

Note that when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transitioning to Chance A mode, and the bonus lottery upon reaching the specified chance A point (see step S2205) is not performed, changing from Chance A mode to normal mode. If the transition is made, the number of portent games is determined in step S2145 of FIG. 330 instead of step S2207, and the portent effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S2202 that the result of the forced release lottery during Chance A is not "Chance A points +1" (it is one of "Direct Pseudo Bonus A", "Direct Pseudo Bonus B", and "Direct Pseudo Bonus C"), the main CPU 101 executes a process to transition to a pseudo bonus (step S2209). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value according to the result of the forced release lottery during Chance A to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, if the result of the forced release lottery during Chance A is "Direct Pseudo Bonus A," the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information; if the result of the forced release lottery during Chance A is "Direct Pseudo Bonus B," the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information; and if the result of the forced release lottery during Chance A is "Direct Pseudo Bonus C," the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information.

The main CPU 101 also sets the bonus book premonition game number counter to "1". This will cause a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) to start from the next unit play (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). In other words, there is no transition from Chance A mode to normal mode, and a direct transition from Chance A mode to pseudo bonus occurs. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183 in FIG. 333) is set to on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag.

After executing the processing of step S2208 or step S2209, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance A game number counter to "0" (step S2210). The main CPU 101 then ends this subroutine.

<Transition to pseudo bonuses and pseudo games>
Fig. 341 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol to be stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. Fig. 342 is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table. Fig. 343 is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position determination table.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is configured so that pseudo play can be performed while the lock effect is being executed. As explained in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (invalidates the game operation of the player for a predetermined period of time). The pseudo play is an effect that accepts the game operation of the player in a pseudo manner during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalid, thereby spinning and stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

In this embodiment, five types of pseudo games (pseudo games 1 to 5) are provided, and different symbols are displayed in each pseudo game. Figure 341(a) shows the symbols displayed in pseudo game 1, Figure 341(b) shows the symbols displayed in pseudo game 2, Figure 341(c) shows the symbols displayed in pseudo game 3, Figure 341(d) shows the symbols displayed in pseudo game 4, and Figure 341(e) shows the symbols displayed in pseudo game 5.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 341(a), in pseudo game 1, a "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, a "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and a "bell A" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (7-tenpai miss). As shown in FIG. 341(b), in pseudo game 2, a "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, a "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and a "BAR" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (7-7-BAR match).

As shown in FIG. 341(c), in pseudo game 3, "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (normal 7s). As shown in FIG. 341(d), in pseudo game 4, "purple 7" is displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L, "purple 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "purple 7" is displayed in the lower area of the right reel 3R (7s, 7s confirmed). As shown in FIG. 341(e), in pseudo game 5, "white 7" is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "white 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "white 7" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (white 7s).

In this way, in a pseudo game, a combination of symbols is displayed as a static display, but the player is not given any special benefit based on the fact that the combination of symbols is displayed as a static display. For example, even if the combination of symbols displayed as a static display in a pseudo game matches a combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 305A and 305B), medals are not paid out according to the combination of symbols.

The pseudo game is a unit game in which the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance ends (see step S2164 and step S2169 in FIG. This is executed as a side effect control process). The type of pseudo game to be executed is determined based on the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342) and the pseudo game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343).

When the bonus real premonition effect or the bonus fake premonition effect is started (for example, after executing the process of step S2023 in FIG. 317, after executing the process of step S2145 in FIG. 330, after executing the process of step S2192, step S2194, or step S2195 in FIG. 333, or after executing the process of step S2207 or step S2209 in FIG. 337), the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the type of pseudo game from among "pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", and "pseudo game 5".

In the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table shown in FIG. ”) is defined. The probability that each pseudo-game is determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the pseudo-game/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". That is, "pseudo game 3" is determined with a probability of 86/256, "pseudo game 4" is determined with a probability of 42/256, and "pseudo game 5" is determined with a probability of 128/256.

After that, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game stop position determination process when the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance ends (for example, after executing the process of step S2164 or step S2169 in FIG. 332). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343) and determines the types of pseudo games as "pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", " Either "pseudo game 4" or "pseudo game 5" is determined.

In the pseudo game stop position determination table shown in FIG. 343, for each result of the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery ("pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", and "pseudo game 5"), the type of pseudo game ("pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", and "pseudo game 5") is specified for the value of the bonus lottery information ("0", "1", "2", and "3").

As a result, in the pseudo game stop position determination process, if the value of the bonus winning information is "0", "pseudo game 1" is selected regardless of the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. It is determined. Further, when the value of the bonus winning information is "1", "pseudo game 2" is determined regardless of the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. Furthermore, when the value of the bonus winning information is "2", "pseudo game 3" or "pseudo game 4" is determined according to the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. . In addition, if the value of the bonus winning information is "3", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", or "pseudo game 4" depending on the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. "Pseudo game 5" is determined.

Then, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position determination process as the main side performance control process at the end of the game in the unit game in which the pseudo game stop position determination process was executed (see step S16 in FIG. 23). As a result, when the bonus main premonition performance ends, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, pseudo game 2 is performed and the mode transitions to pseudo bonus A mode, if the value of the bonus winning information is 2, pseudo game 3 or pseudo game 4 is performed and the mode transitions to pseudo bonus B mode, and if the value of the bonus winning information is 3, pseudo game 3, pseudo game 4, or pseudo game 5 is performed and the mode transitions to pseudo bonus C mode (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). On the other hand, when the bonus fake premonition performance ends (if the value of the bonus winning information is 0), pseudo game 1 is performed, and in this case, the mode transitions to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode).

<Start of game processing for advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode)>
Fig. 344 is a flow chart showing the game start processing for the advantageous period (pseudo bonus A mode) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 345 is a diagram showing a lottery table for Chance B & AT during pseudo bonus A. Fig. 346 is a diagram showing a lottery table for Chance B continuation rate UP at the end of pseudo bonus A.

The game start processing for the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode) shown in FIG. 344 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and pseudo bonus A mode, respectively (see FIG. 312). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and pseudo bonus A mode, respectively, by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus A mode), first, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for Chance B & AT during pseudo bonus A (step S2221). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for Chance B & AT during pseudo bonus A (see FIG. 345) and performs a lottery based on the ball payout flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value, thereby determining the result of the lottery for Chance B & AT during pseudo bonus A as either "Non-winning", "Chance B", or "AT".

In the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. LV5" and "Rare LV6"), the lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo-bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery ("non-winning", "chance B", and "AT") are defined. "Chance B" indicates that you won at chance B, and "AT" indicates that you won at AT. The probability that each result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed.

The Chance B & AT lottery table during pseudo bonus A is provided for each of the presence or absence of the favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) and the presence or absence of a winning lottery for Chance B. If Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, and the favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, the Chance B & AT lottery table during pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 345(a) is referenced, and if the favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag is set to on, the Chance B & AT lottery table during pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 345(b) is referenced, and if Chance B has already been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the Chance B & AT lottery table during pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 345(c) is referenced.

For example, if Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode and the favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag is set to on, and the ball payout flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the result of the Chance B & AT lottery during pseudo bonus A will determine "not winning" with a probability of 192/256, and "Chance B" with a probability of 64/256. If "Chance B" is determined as the result of the Chance B & AT lottery during pseudo bonus A, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B winning flag. The Chance B winning flag is a flag that indicates that Chance B has already been won in the pseudo bonus A mode.

After executing the process of step S2221, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is "AT" (step S2222). When determining that the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is "AT", the main CPU 101 executes AT transition processing (step S2223). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20), thereby transitioning to the AT state. Note that the main CPU 101 clears the chance B winning flag when the chance B winning flag is set on. After executing the process in step S2223, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2222 that the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is not "AT", the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell". (See FIG. 311) is determined (step S2224). If the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag is not "push order bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag is the "push order bell", it executes a navigation setting process (step S2225). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the information of the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be included in the start command data (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, the correct push order for the push order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor and main performance display unit 21 (see FIG. 1), just like in the first embodiment.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the Bernavi count counter (step S2226). The value of the Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis to be performed in the pseudo bonus A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the Bernavi count counter to "6" when the pseudo bonus A mode starts, that is, in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo bonus transition flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) was set to ON.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the VerNavi number counter is 0 (step S2227). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the VerNavi number counter is not 0, it ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the VerNavi number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to increase the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo bonus A (step S2228). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A (see FIG. 346) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to increase the chance B continuation rate UP at the end of pseudo bonus A. As a result of the lottery, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", "10%", "20%", and "30%" ”.

In the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 61-70%", "71-80%", "81-90%", and "91-100%"), the result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A ("non-winning") , "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", "10%", "20%", and "30%"). has been done. The probability that each result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

The lottery table for increasing the continuation rate of Chance B at the end of pseudo bonus A is provided for each case in which Chance B has been won or not. If Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the lottery table for increasing the continuation rate of Chance B at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 346(a) is referenced, and if Chance B has already been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the lottery table for increasing the continuation rate of Chance B at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 346(b) is referenced.

For example, if Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, and the Chance B continuation rate determined by the Chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) is 60% (51% to 60%), the result of the Chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus A will be "3%" with a probability of 128/256, "5%" with a probability of 95/256, "10%" with a probability of 32/256, and "20%" with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the Chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus A to the value of the Chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

After executing the processing of step S2228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not Chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode (step S2229). The main CPU 101 can recognize that Chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode when the Chance B winning flag (see step S2221) is set to ON.

If it is determined that Chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B transition flag to ON (step S2230) and ends this subroutine. The Chance B transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start Chance B mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance B transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to Chance B mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that Chance B has not been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2231) and ends this subroutine. As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

<Start of game processing for advantageous zone (pseudo bonus B mode)>
Fig. 347 is a flow chart showing a game start process for the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus B mode) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 348 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus B reward lottery table. Fig. 349 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus B addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table.

The game start processing for the advantageous zone (pseudo bonus B mode) shown in FIG. 347 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and pseudo bonus B mode, respectively (see FIG. 312). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and pseudo bonus B mode, respectively, by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode), the main CPU 101 first executes a reward lottery during the pseudo-bonus B (step S2241). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-bonus B medium reward lottery table (see FIG. 348) and performs a drawing based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value to obtain the pseudo-bonus B. As a result of the reward lottery during B, one of "non-winning", "continuation rate UP", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" is determined.

In the pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. ", and "Rare LV6"), the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B ("non-winning", "continuation rate UP", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5") ”) is defined. The probability that each result of the pseudo-bonus B reward lottery is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to.

The pseudo bonus B reward lottery table is provided for each of the cases where the advantageous zone game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) is present or absent. When the advantageous zone game count determination flag is not set on, the pseudo bonus B reward lottery table shown in FIG. 348(a) is referenced, and when the advantageous zone game count determination flag is set on, the pseudo bonus B reward lottery table shown in FIG. 348(b) is referenced. For example, when the advantageous zone game count determination flag is not set on and the payout flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the pseudo bonus B reward lottery result determines "Continuation rate UP" with a probability of 192/256, and determines "Damage stock +1" with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the process of step S2241, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the reward lottery among pseudo bonus B is "continuation rate UP" (step S2242). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is "up the continuation rate", the main CPU 101 executes the lottery to increase the chance B continuation rate for addition during pseudo bonus B (step S2243). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B (see Figure 349), and determines the lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see Figure 324) and the random value. By doing so, as a result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and "10%".

In the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B shown in FIG. LV4'', ``Rare LV5'', and ``Rare LV6''), the results of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B (``non-winning'', ``1%'', ``2%'', ``3'') %," "4%," "5%," and "10%") are defined. The probability that each result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B is decided is calculated as follows: ``Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator) :256)".

For example, if the payout flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the result of the lottery for increasing the continuation rate of Chance B for addition during pseudo bonus B is determined to be "3%" with a probability of 128/256, "4%" with a probability of 92/256, "5%" with a probability of 32/256, and "10%" with a probability of 4/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the lottery for increasing the continuation rate of Chance B for addition during pseudo bonus B to the value of the continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

If it is determined in step S2242 that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is not "continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is damage stock ("damage stock +1", "damage stock +2"). ” or “damage stock +5”) (step S2244). When determining that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is any one of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5", the main CPU 101 sets the damage stock counter (Fig. 333 (see step S2191) is updated (step S2245).

In this process, if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery is "damage stock +1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery is "damage stock +1", Stock + 2", add "2" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is "damage stock + 5", add "5" to the value of the damage stock counter. .

After executing the process of step S2243 or step S2245, or if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery in step S2244 is any of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" If it is determined that there is no bonus (“non-winning”), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo bonus B game counter (step S2246). The value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played in the pseudo bonus B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 controls the state when the pseudo-bonus B mode starts, that is, when the pseudo-bonus transition flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) is set to ON, in the next unit game. In the process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), the pseudo bonus B game number counter is set to "25".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo bonus B game counter is 0 (step S2247). When determining that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B transition flag to ON (step S2248). As described above, the chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B mode.

If it is determined in step S2247 that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S2248, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Transition to chance B mode>
FIG. 350 is a diagram showing a transition route to chance B mode.

As the advantageous zone (Chance B mode) (see FIG. 312), Chance B mode (basic) and Chance B mode (special) are provided. In FIG. 350, route (I), route (II), and route (III) are shown as transition routes to Chance B mode (basic).

Route (I) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when chance B is won in the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery (see step S2221 in FIG. 344) performed during the pseudo bonus A mode, the pseudo bonus A mode is changed to the chance B mode (basic). (See step S2230 in FIG. 344).

Route (II) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when a predetermined number of unit games (25 times) are played in the pseudo bonus B mode, the pseudo bonus B mode shifts to the chance B mode (basic) (see step S2248 in FIG. 347).

Route (III) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (AT state) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, in the AT state, the "press order bell" (see Figure 311) was determined as a sub-flag, but the stop operation was not performed due to the correct pressing order (Figures 310A and 310B) (11 If no medals are paid out), the AT state shifts to chance B mode (basic).

Here, a plurality of modes are provided as the AT state, and an AT danger mode is provided as one of the plurality of modes. In the AT state, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), in modes other than AT danger mode, the instruction monitor and main effect display In the section 21 (see FIG. 1), the correct pressing order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) on the pressing order bell is always notified (bell navigation is always generated).

On the other hand, in the AT danger mode, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "press order bell" (see FIG. 311), it is determined whether or not to generate the bell navigation. A lottery (BelNavi generated lottery) is held to determine the correct answer, and only when the BellNavi generated lottery is won, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. If the bell navigation generation lottery is not won, the correct pressing order is not reported, and only the fact that the pressing order bell has been determined as an internal winning combination is reported on the main effect display section 21.

Therefore, if the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning role in AT Danger Mode, there is a possibility that the correct push order cannot be used to perform the stopping operation, and if the correct push order cannot be used to perform the stopping operation, the AT state will end and the game will transition to Chance B Mode (basic).

The AT state is basically entered from the pseudo bonus C mode. Specifically, when a specified number of unit plays (40 times) have been played in the pseudo bonus C mode, the mode enters the AT state (AT basic mode). The AT basic mode is different from the AT danger mode, and when the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) is determined as a sub-flag, the correct push order in the push order bell (FIG. 310A and FIG. 310B) is always announced. Also, if the AT is won in the pseudo bonus A chance B & AT lottery (see step S2221 in FIG. 344) held during the pseudo bonus A mode, the mode enters the AT basic mode (see step S2223 in FIG. 344).

In Chance B mode, a maximum of five sets are played, with eight unit plays counted as one set. In each set, an effect (battle effect) in which an ally character fights an enemy character is performed, and when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle effect, the game transitions to the AT state. This battle effect is performed only in Chance B mode. In this embodiment, different effects are performed in the non-advantageous zone and advantageous zone, and in each mode in the advantageous zone. In the following, Chance B mode (basic) and Chance B mode (special) are also referred to as Chance B basic mode and Chance B special mode, respectively.

<Processing when transitioning to chance B>
FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the process performed in the main control circuit at the time of transition to chance B. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing a lottery table for converting remaining chance A points when chance B enters.

The Chance B transition process shown in FIG. 351 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process) when the current game zone is a favorable zone. The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game zone by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

In the Chance B transition process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current mode is AT danger mode (step S2261). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current mode is AT danger mode by referring to the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

If it is determined that the current mode is not the AT Danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines whether the Chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344 and step S2248 in FIG. 347) is set to ON (step S2262). If it is determined that the Chance B transition flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B transition flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A point (see step S2203 in FIG. 337) is 1 or more (step S2263). . If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance A point is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for converting the chance A point remaining at the time of entering the chance B (step S2264). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A point conversion lottery table (see FIG. 352) for converting remaining chance A points when entering chance B, and performs a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and "10%" is determined.

In the Chance B Entry Surplus Chance A Point Conversion Lottery Table shown in FIG. 352, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance B Entry Surplus Chance A Point Conversion Lottery ("No Winning", "1%, "2%, "3%, "4%, "5%, "and "10%")) are specified for each Chance A point value ("Suspended Chance A Point 1" and "Suspended Chance A Point 2"). In the figure, "Suspended Chance A Point 1" indicates that the Chance A point value is 1, and "Suspended Chance A Point 2" indicates that the Chance A point value is 2. The probability of each result of the Chance B Entry Surplus Chance A Point Conversion Lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the value of Chance A points is 1, the result of the lottery for converting surplus Chance A points when Chance B is entered is determined to be "1%" with a probability of 219/256, "3%" with a probability of 32/256, "5%" with a probability of 4/256, and "10%" with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the lottery for converting surplus Chance A points when Chance B is entered to the value of the Chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 then clears the value of Chance A points (sets it to "0") (step S2265).

Although the above describes an example in which the value of remaining Chance A points is converted into the value of Chance B continuation rate information for addition, the value of the Chance A points may also be converted into the value of the damage stock counter. For example, if the value of the Chance A points is 1, a "no win" or "damage stock +1" may be determined by lottery, and if the value of the Chance A points is 2, a "damage stock +1" or "damage stock +2" may be determined by lottery (see step S2191 in FIG. 333). Also, if the value of the Chance A points is 2, a fixed "damage stock +1" may be granted without a lottery being held.

If it is determined in step S2263 that the value of chance A points is less than 1 (0), or after executing the process in step S2265, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2266). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the chance B continuation rate determined by the chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) and the chance B continuation rate information for addition (step S2189 in FIG. 333, step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) is determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information (sets it to "0"), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2261 that the current mode is AT Danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is the "Push Order Bell" (see FIG. 311) (step S2267). If it is determined that the sub-flag is not the "Push Order Bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation was performed in the correct push order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) for the push order bell (step S2268). ). The main CPU 101 can recognize the order of stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R by referring to the press order storage area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 22). If it is determined that the stop operation was performed in the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop operation was not performed in the correct push order for the push order bell, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the Chance B continuation rate at the end of the AT Danger (step S2269). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the Chance B continuation rate to be one of "40%, " "50%, " "60%, " "70%, " "80%, " "90%, " or "100%" by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B transition flag to ON (step S2270). As described above, the Chance B transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the Chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance B transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the Chance B mode.

After executing the process of step S2270, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2271). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the chance B continuation rate determined by chance B continuation rate lottery at the end of AT danger (see step S2269) and chance B continuation rate information for addition (step S2189 in FIG. 333, step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) is determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information (sets it to "0"), and ends this subroutine.

<Game start processing for advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode)>
Figure 353 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play for the advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode).

The game start processing for the advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode) shown in FIG. 353 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone and mode are the advantageous zone and Chance B basic mode, respectively (see FIG. 350). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone and mode are the advantageous zone and Chance B basic mode, respectively, by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B basic mode), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current unit game is the first game of the initial set (step S2281). As mentioned above, the chance B mode (chance B basic mode) is entered in units for which the chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344, step S2248 in FIG. 347, and step S2270 in FIG. 351) is set to ON. The process moves to the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the game. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that shifts to the chance B basic mode, after the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to shift to the chance B mode, the advantageous section shown in FIG. (Chance B basic mode) game start processing is performed.

As described above, in the Chance B basic mode, eight unit games are counted as one set, and up to five sets are played. In the process of step S2281, when the current unit game has transitioned to the Chance B basic mode, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the first game (the first unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set) of the initial set (the first set of the maximum five sets). If it is determined that the current unit game is the first game of the initial set, the main CPU 101 executes the first game of the initial set process during Chance B (basic) (step S2282). The first game of the initial set process during Chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. 354. After executing the process of step S2282, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2281 that the current unit game is not the first game of the initial set, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current unit game is the first game (the first of eight unit games that make up a set) of the second set or later (any of the second through fifth sets of a maximum of five sets) (step S2283). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current unit game is the first game of the second set or later if the Chance B Basic Mode Next Set Transition Flag (see step S2409 in FIG. 365 and step S2428 in FIG. 366) is set to ON.

If it is determined that the current unit game is the first game of the second set or later, the main CPU 101 executes the first game process during chance B (basic) (step S2284). The processing for the first game during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 355. After executing the process in step S2284, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2283 that the current unit game is not the first game of the second set or later (it is any one of the second to eighth unit games of the eight unit games that make up the set), The main CPU 101 executes the process from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic) (step S2285). Processing from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 364. After executing the process of step S2285, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<1st game processing of first set during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The process for the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 354 is the process performed in step S2282 of FIG. 353 (game start process for advantageous section (chance B basic mode)) in the main control circuit 100. .

In the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not chance B points have been inherited (step S2301). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the chance B point is being inherited when the chance B handover point (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) is set.

If it is determined that the Chance B points have not been carried over, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the Chance B points to "5" (step S2302). The value of the Chance B points corresponds to the remaining amount of hit points of the enemy character in the battle performance performed during the Chance B mode. When the value of the Chance B points becomes 0, the friendly character defeats the enemy character in the battle performance, and the game transitions to the AT state. The value of the Chance B points is stored in the main RAM 103, and an image (e.g., a meter, etc.) that allows the player to visually recognize the value (remaining amount) is displayed on the main performance display unit 21.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B points are being carried over, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B carryover points (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) as the value of the chance B points (step S2303). The value of the chance B carryover points indicates the value of the chance B points carried over from the previous chance B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In addition, the main performance display unit 21 displays an image (meter, etc.) indicating the value of the carried over chance B points. Even if the chance B points are being carried over, at the time when the processing of step S2303 is performed, an image indicating the initial value "5" may be displayed as the value of the chance B points, and when the value of the chance B points is updated (for example, when the damage amount is subtracted for the first time (see step S2342 in FIG. 359)), the display of the image may be updated based on the value of the carried over chance B points. For example, if the value of the carried over chance B points is "3" and the damage amount to be subtracted for the first time is "1", the image indicating "5" may be changed to an image indicating "2". When the process of step S2303 is executed, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the Chance B takeover points.

After executing the processing of step S2302 or step S2303, the main CPU 101 executes processing for the first game during Chance B (basic) (step S2304). The processing for the first game during Chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. 355. After executing the processing of step S2304, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<1st game processing during Chance B (basic)>
FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the first game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a chance B one-shot win lottery table. FIG. 357 is a diagram showing the chance B continuation lottery table. FIG. 358 is a diagram showing a lottery table for moving to heaven after an AT confirmed state.

The first game processing during Chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 355 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2284 in FIG. 353 (game start processing for advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode)) and in step S2304 in FIG. 354 (first game processing of the initial set during Chance B (basic)).

In the process of the first game during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first sets the chance B (basic) game number counter to "8" (step S2321). The value of the chance B (basic) game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a Chance B one shot win lottery (step S2322). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the Chance B one shot win lottery table (see FIG. 356) and determines whether the lottery is a "winner" or a "non-winner" by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

In the Chance B one shot win lottery table shown in Figure 356, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the Chance B one shot win lottery ('non-winning' and 'winning') is specified for each ball payout mode and the presence or absence of the advantageous zone game number determination flag (see step S2004 in Figure 313) ('ball payout mode 0, 1 and advantageous zone game number determination flag = "0"', and 'ball payout mode 2 or advantageous zone game number determination flag = "1"').

The ball output mode is a parameter set in the AT basic mode, and can take any value between 0 and 2. The AT basic mode can be executed over 16 sets, with 18 unit games counted as one set, and any value between 0 and 2 is set as the ball output mode when each set starts. Specifically, when any of the first, second, and thirteenth to sixteenth sets start, the ball output mode is set to "0", when any of the third, fourth, and twelfth sets start, the ball output mode is set to "1", and when any of the fifth to eleventh sets start, the ball output mode is set to "2". The ball output mode is cleared when moving from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone.

When the mode transition lottery performed during the AT basic mode determines that the mode will be transitioned to the AT danger mode, the AT danger mode is started. As described above, in the AT danger mode, the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) is determined as a sub-flag, but if the stop operation is not performed (11 medals are not paid out) due to the correct push order (FIG. 310A and FIG. 310B), the mode transitions to the Chance B mode (basic). Therefore, if the mode from which the current Chance B mode transitions is the AT danger mode (if the mode transitions to the Chance B mode via the route (III) shown in FIG. 350), the value of the ball output mode is the value at the time of transition from the AT basic mode to the AT danger mode (the value corresponding to the number of sets performed in the AT basic mode until the transition). On the other hand, if the mode from which the current Chance B mode transitions is the pseudo bonus A mode or the pseudo bonus B mode (if the mode transitions to the Chance B mode via the route (I) or (II) shown in FIG. 350), the value of the ball output mode is "0".

In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1 and advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag = "0'''' indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, and "Ball output mode 2 or advantageous period elapsed game number determination flag = '1'" indicates that the value of ball output mode is "2" or the number of games in which advantageous period has elapsed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is set on. The probability that each result of the Chance B one-shot win lottery is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to.

In other words, if the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON, the probability of Chance B being a one-shot win is 2/256. Win the lottery. In addition, if the value of the ball output mode is "2" or if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is set to on, there is a probability of 1/256 that you will win the chance B one-shot win lottery. do.

After executing the processing of step S2322, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the Chance B one shot win lottery has been won (step S2323). If it is determined that the Chance B one shot win lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the Chance B points (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) to "0" (step S2324). In addition, although not shown, the main CPU 101 adds the value of the Chance B points before executing the processing of step S2324 to the value of the damage stock counter (see steps S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one-shot win flag on (step S2325). The chance B one-shot win flag is a flag indicating that the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the AT confirmed state flag to on (step S2326). The AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that transition to the AT state has been confirmed.

If it is determined in step S2323 that the Chance B one shot win lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the damage stock counter (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347) is equal to or greater than "1" (step S2327). If it is determined that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 executes a Chance B continuation lottery (step S2328). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the Chance B continuation lottery table (see FIG. 357) and determines whether the lottery has been won or not by conducting a lottery based on a random number value.

In the Chance B continuation lottery table shown in FIG. 357, the lottery values corresponding to "winning" and "non-winning" are specified as "(2 × integer part of continuation rate) + (quotient of (144 × integer part of continuation rate)/256)" and "256 - {(2 × integer part of continuation rate) + (quotient of (144 × integer part of continuation rate)/256)}", respectively. The "continuation rate" is the Chance B continuation rate (see steps S2266 and S2271) determined by the Chance B transition processing (see FIG. 351). For example, if the Chance B continuation rate is 60%, the lottery value corresponding to "winning" is (2 × 60) + (quotient of (144 × 60)/256) = 120 + 33 = 153. Therefore, in this case, there is a probability of 153/256 ≒ 60% of winning the Chance B continuation lottery. After executing the process of step S2328, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the Chance B continuation lottery has been won (step S2329).

If it is determined in step S2327 that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or greater, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2330). Then, if it is determined in step S2329 that the Chance B continuation lottery has been won, or after executing the processing of step S2330, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2331). The Chance B continuation flag is a flag indicating that it is possible to move on to the next set in the Chance B basic mode. Therefore, if the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or greater, it is possible to move on to the next set in the Chance B basic mode without a Chance B continuation lottery being held.

After executing the process in step S2331, the main CPU 101 executes a process exclusively for the first game during chance B (basic) (step S2332). The processing exclusively for the first game in chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 359. After executing the process in step S2332, the main CPU 101 determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359) is set on (step S2333). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag off (step S2334).

After executing the process of step S2326 or step S2334, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state (step S2335). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the AT confirmation state heaven transition lottery table (see FIG. 358), and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value. As a result of the heaven transition lottery after the confirmed state, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined.

In the lottery table for moving to heaven after the AT confirmed state shown in FIG. LV5" and "Rare LV6"), a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result ("non-winning" and "winning") of the heaven shift after AT confirmed state is defined. The probability that each result of the lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed. For example, when the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", there is a probability of 2/256 that the player will win the lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state. If the AT confirmed state post-heaven transition lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the heaven transition lottery winning flag on. The heaven transfer lottery winning flag is a flag indicating that the heaven transfer lottery after the AT confirmed state has been won.

If it is determined in step S2329 that the Chance B continuation lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S2333 that the AT confirmation state flag has not been set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a common process during Chance B (basic) (step S2336). The common process during Chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. 362.

After executing the process of step S2335 or step S2336, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321) (step S2337). Then, the main CPU 101 executes the VerNavi processing during chance B (step S2338). The BelNavi processing during chance B will be explained later using FIG. 372. After executing the process of step S2338, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing exclusively for the first game in Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing processing exclusively for the first game in chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing a damage amount lottery table at the start of a set. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a pursuit number determination lottery table.

The process dedicated to the first game during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 359 is the process performed in step S2332 of FIG. 355 (processing for the first game during chance B (basic)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the process exclusively for the first game during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first executes a damage amount lottery at the start of a set (step S2341). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage amount lottery table at the start of the set (see FIG. 360) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining "damage amount 1" as the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set. , "damage amount 2," "damage amount 3," "damage amount 4," and "damage amount 5."

In the set start damage amount lottery table shown in FIG. 360, the set start damage amount lottery result (``damage amount 1 ”, “damage amount 2”, “damage amount 3”, “damage amount 4”, and “damage amount 5”). In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1" indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1", and "Ball output mode 2" indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "2". Show that something is true. The ball dispensing mode is as described above (see FIG. 356).

The probability of each outcome of the damage amount lottery at the start of a set being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random numbers that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the value of the payout mode is "0," the results of the damage amount lottery at the start of a set are determined as "damage amount 1" with a probability of 172/256, "damage amount 2" with a probability of 79/256, "damage amount 3" with a probability of 4/256, and "damage amount 5" with a probability of 1/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the amount of damage from the value of the chance B point (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) (step S2342). In this process, if the result of the set start damage amount lottery is "damage amount 1", the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the chance B point, if the result of the set start damage amount lottery is "damage amount 2", the main CPU 101 subtracts "2" from the value of the chance B point, if the result of the set start damage amount lottery is "damage amount 3", the main CPU 101 subtracts "3" from the value of the chance B point, if the result of the set start damage amount lottery is "damage amount 4", the main CPU 101 subtracts "4" from the value of the chance B point, and if the result of the set start damage amount lottery is "damage amount 5", the main CPU 101 subtracts "5" from the value of the chance B point. Since the lower limit of the Chance B point value is "0", if the value of the Chance B point after subtraction becomes negative, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the Chance B point to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0" (step S2343). If it is determined that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes a pursuit number determination lottery (step S2344). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pursuit number determination lottery table (see FIG. 361) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining "non-winning" and "pursuit number 1" as the results of the pursuit number determination lottery. ”, “Pursuit Number 2”, “Pursuit Number 3”, and “Pursuit Number 4”.

In the pursuit number determination lottery table shown in Figure 361, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pursuit number determination lottery ("No Winning", "Promotion Number 1", "Promotion Number 2", "Promotion Number 3", and "Promotion Number 4") are specified for the presence or absence ("No Damage Stock" and "With Damage Stock") of damage stock (see step S2191 in Figure 333 and step S2245 in Figure 347). In the figure, "No Damage Stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "0", and "With Damage Stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or greater.

The probability that each result of the chase number determination lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. For example, when the value of the damage stock counter is "0", as a result of the pursuit number determination lottery, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 219/256, and "pursuit number 1" is determined with a probability of 35/256. is determined, and "pursuit number 2" is determined with a probability of 2/256. If the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, you will definitely win the pursuit number determination lottery, and a larger pursuit number will be determined compared to when the damage stock counter value is "0". It is becoming easier to

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or greater (step S2345). If it determines that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or greater, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2346). If it determines in step S2345 that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), or after executing the processing of step S2346, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is a winning lottery ("pursuit number 1", "pursuit number 2", "pursuit number 3", or "pursuit number 4") (step S2347).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chase number determination lottery is not "chasing number 1," "chasing number 2," "chasing number 3," or "chasing number 4," the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chase number determination lottery is any of "chasing number 1," "chasing number 2," "chasing number 3," or "chasing number 4," the main CPU 101 sets the chase number (step S2348).

In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the pursuit number to "1" if the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 1", and if the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 2" In this case, if the value of the pursuit number is set to "2" and the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 3", the value of the pursuit number is set to "3" and the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is " If the pursuit number is 4, the value of the pursuit number is set to 4. Note that when the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "non-winning", the value of the pursuit number is "0". The value of the pursuit number is stored in the main RAM 103 and is used in the chance B special mode (see FIG. 373).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the Chance B points is equal to or less than the value of the pursuit number (step S2349). If it determines that the value of the Chance B points is greater than the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2343 that the value of the Chance B points after subtraction is "0", or if it is determined in step S2349 that the value of the Chance B points is equal to or less than the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 sets the AT confirmed state flag to ON (step S2350). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that a transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355). After executing the processing of step S2350, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Common processing during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing a chance B rewriting lottery table.

The common processing during Chance B (basic) shown in Figure 362 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2336 of Figure 355 (first game processing during Chance B (basic)).

In the chance B (basic) common process, the main CPU 101 first executes a chance B rewrite lottery (step S2361). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the rewritten lottery table during chance B (see FIG. 363) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and random numbers. As a result of the rewriting lottery, one of "non-winning", "continuation", "continuation & pursuit number +1", "continuation & pursuit number +2", "continuation & pursuit number +3", and "continuation & pursuit number +4" Decide which one.

In the rewritten lottery table during chance B shown in FIG. , and "Rare LV6"), the result of the rewritten lottery during Chance B ("Non-winning", "Continue", "Continuation & pursuit number + 1", "Continuation & pursuit number + 2", "Continuation & pursuit number + 3") ” and “Continuation & pursuit number + 4”) are defined. The probability that each result of the chance B rewrite lottery is determined should be expressed as "Lottery value specified for that result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The Chance B rewrite lottery table is provided for each of the cases where the Chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355) is present or absent. When the Chance B continuation flag is not set on, the Chance B rewrite lottery table shown in FIG. 363(a) is referenced, and when the Chance B continuation flag is set on, the Chance B rewrite lottery table shown in FIG. 363(b) is referenced. For example, when the Chance B continuation flag is not set on and the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the result of the Chance B rewrite lottery is determined to be "No Winning" with a probability of 128/256, "Continuation" with a probability of 116/256, and "Continuation & Chase Number +1" with a probability of 12/256.

After executing the processing of step S2361, the main CPU 101 judges whether the result of the rewrite lottery during Chance B includes a chase number ("Continue & chase number +1", "Continue & chase number +2", "Continue & chase number +3", or "Continue & chase number +4") (step S2362). If it is determined that the result of the rewrite lottery during Chance B is any of "Continue & chase number +1", "Continue & chase number +2", "Continue & chase number +3", and "Continue & chase number +4", the main CPU 101 updates the value of the chase number (see step S2348 in FIG. 359) (step S2363).

In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number when the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "Continuation & pursuit number + 1", and the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number, and if the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "continuation & If the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "Continue & Pursuit Number + 3", add "3" to the value of the Pursuit Number. , if the result of the chance B rewrite lottery is "continuation & pursuit number + 4", "4" is added to the value of the pursuit number.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number (step S2364). In step S2362, the result of the rewriting lottery during Chance B is none of "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 1", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 2", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 3", and "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 4" or if it is determined in step S2364 that the value of chance B points is greater than the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355) to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2365).

If it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B rewrite lottery result includes continuation (“continuation”, “continuation & pursuit number +1”, “continuation & "Pursuit number + 2", "Continuation & pursuit number + 3", or "Continuation & pursuit number + 4") (Step S2366).

The result of the rewrite lottery during Chance B is one of "Continue", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 1", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 2", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 3", or "Continue & Pursuit Number + 4" If it is determined that this is not the case, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, the result of the rewriting lottery during Chance B is "Continue", "Continue & Pursuit Number +1", "Continue & Pursuit Number +2", "Continue & Pursuit Number +3", and "Continue & Pursuit Number +4". If it is determined that either is the case, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2367).

The main CPU 101 then executes the processes from step S2368 to step S2370, but since these processes are similar to the processes from step S2341 to step S2343 in FIG. 359, the description thereof will be omitted here. If it is determined in step S2370 that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2364 that the value of chance B points is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number, or if it is determined in step S2370 that the value of chance B points after subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 The confirmed state flag is set on (step S2371). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355 and step S2350 in FIG. 359). After executing the process in step S2371, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to OFF (step S2372), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, if the AT confirmed state flag is set to ON in step S2326 of FIG. 355 through step S2350 of FIG. 359 in one unit game, a lottery for transition to heaven after the AT confirmed state is held from that unit game (see step S2335 of FIG. 355). In contrast, if the AT confirmed state flag is set to ON in step S2371 of FIG. 362 in one unit game, a lottery for transition to heaven after the AT confirmed state is held from the next unit game (see step S2384 of FIG. 364).

The lottery for moving to heaven after the AT confirmation state and the lottery for rewriting during Chance B (see step S2361 in FIG. 362) are described as being performed in the processing of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (state control processing at the start of play), but these processes may be performed in the processing of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (state control processing at the end of play). For example, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting processing (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), these processes may be performed in the processing of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (state control processing at the start of play), whereas if the sub-flag is the "push order bell", these processes may be performed in the processing of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (state control processing at the end of play).

When these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (processing for controlling the state at the end of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process), the ball output flag group (normal) to be referenced may be different depending on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line. For example, when the sub-flag is a "push order bell," if 11 medals are paid out, the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) corresponding to the character is determined, whereas if 11 medals are not paid out, "0" may be determined as the ball output flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Chance B (Basic) Processing from the second game onwards>
Figure 364 is a flowchart showing the processing from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The processing for the second game and onward during Chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 364 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2285 of FIG. 353 (processing at the start of play for the advantageous period (Chance B basic mode)).

In the second and subsequent games during Chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first executes Chance B one-shot win processing (step S2381). The chance B one-shot win process will be explained later using FIG. 370.

After executing the processing of step S2381, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to on (step S2382). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the heaven transition lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355) is set to on (step S2383). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT confirmed state (step S2384). This processing is the same as the processing of step S2335 in FIG. 355, so the explanation here is omitted.

If it is determined in step S2382 that the AT confirmed state flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes common processing during chance B (basic) (step S2385). The common processing during chance B (basic) is as described using FIG. 362, so the explanation here will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S2383 that the heaven transfer lottery winning flag is set to ON, or after executing the process in step S2384 or step S2385, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the final game in the set of one ( It is determined whether the game is the eighth unit game among the eight unit games forming the set (step S2386). The main CPU 101 can recognize how many unit games the current unit game is by referring to the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

If it is determined that the current unit game is the final game in one set, the main CPU 101 executes the final game process during chance B (basic) (step S2387). The final game process during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 365.

If it is determined in step S2386 that the current unit game is not the final game in one set, or after executing the process in step S2387, the main CPU 101 executes the processes in steps S2388 and S2389, but these The process is similar to the process in step S2337 and step S2338 in FIG. 355, so a description thereof will be omitted here. After executing the process in step S2389, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Final game processing during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the final game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The final game process during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 365 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2387 of FIG.

In the final game processing during Chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set ON (step S2401). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pursuit number is "1" or greater (step S2402). If the result of the follow-up number determination lottery (see step S2344 in FIG. 359) is a winning lottery ("follow-up number 1", "follow-up number 2", "follow-up number 3", or "follow-up number 4"), or if the result of the Chance B rewrite lottery (see step S2361 in FIG. 362) includes a follow-up number ("Continue & follow-up number 1", "Continue & follow-up number 2", "Continue & follow-up number 3", or "Continue & follow-up number 4"), the value of the follow-up number will be "1" or greater.

When determining that the value of the pursuit number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set to on. (Step S2403). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 sets the AT basic mode transition flag on (step S2404). The AT basic mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the AT basic mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the AT basic mode transition flag is set to on. do. This shifts to AT basic mode. After executing the process in step S2404, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2403 that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets the AT heaven mode transition flag to on (step S2405). The AT heaven mode transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the AT heaven mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the AT heaven mode transition flag was set to on. This causes a transition to the AT heaven mode. The AT heaven mode is one of the modes that can be controlled in the AT state, and is a mode that is more advantageous to the player than the AT basic mode. After executing the process of step S2405, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, in AT Danger mode, when the sub-flag is "Push Order Bell" (see FIG. 311), a lottery (Bell Navi generation lottery) is held to determine whether or not to generate a Bell Navi, and if the Bell Navi generation lottery is won, the correct push order is announced (see FIG. 350). Here, in AT Basic mode and AT Heaven mode, a lottery (Avoidance Rate Lottery) is held to increase the probability of winning the Bell Navi generation lottery held during AT Danger mode (Avoidance Rate). And, in AT Heaven mode, compared to AT Basic mode, the evasion rate lottery is held with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the evasion rate lottery) making it easier to increase the evasion rate.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the AT Danger mode, even if the sub-flag is the "Push Order Bell" (see FIG. 311) and the stop operation cannot be performed with the correct push order, if a specific character is stocked (if the stock number is "1" or more), the end of the AT state can be avoided. The specific character can be stocked cumulatively, and this avoidance can be performed a number of times equivalent to the stock number (for example, if the stock number is "3", then three times). Here, in the AT Basic mode and the AT Heaven mode, a lottery (character stock lottery) is held to add to the stock number. In the AT Heaven mode, the character stock lottery is held with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the character stock lottery) compared to the AT Basic mode, making it easier to increase the stock number.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the value of the pursuit number is "1" or greater, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B special mode transition flag to ON (step S2406). The Chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the Chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance B special mode was set to ON. This causes a transition to the Chance B special mode. After executing the process of step S2406, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON in one set in chance B basic mode, the corresponding When the set ends, the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) is entered, or after the set is entered into the Chance B special mode, the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2529 and S2530 in FIG. 373).

If it is determined in step S2401 that the AT confirmed state flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355 and step S2367 in FIG. 362) is set on. is determined (step S2407). If it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more (step S2408).

If it is determined that the value of the pursuit number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to ON (step S2409). The chance B basic mode next set transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the next set in the chance B basic mode. The main CPU 101 controls the next set in the chance B basic mode in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to on. (See step S2284 in FIG. 353). After executing the process in step S2409, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B special mode shift flag to ON (step S2410). The chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B special mode is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B special mode. After executing the process in step S2410, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes the last game process when chance B is not continued (step S2411). The final game process when chance B is not continued will be explained later using FIG. 366. After executing the process in step S2411, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Final game processing when Chance B is not continuing>
Fig. 366 is a flow chart showing the final game time process when Chance B is not continued, which is performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 367 is a diagram showing a time retroactive lottery table when Chance B ends.

The process during the final game when chance B is not continued shown in FIG. 366 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2411 of FIG. 365 (final game process during chance B (basic)).

In the final game process when chance B is not continued, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is a "special combination" (see FIG. 311). A judgment is made (step S2421). If it is determined that the sub-flag is a "special combination", the main CPU 101 executes an ending transition lottery (step S2422). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, the ending transition lottery is won with a probability of 6/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending transition lottery has been won (step S2423). If it is determined that the ending transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the AT ending mode transition flag to ON (step S2424). The AT ending mode transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the AT ending mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the AT ending mode transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the AT ending mode. After executing the process of step S2424, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The AT ending mode is one of the modes that can be controlled in the AT state, and is a mode that continues until a transition to a non-favorable zone (see FIG. 312) occurs. As explained in the first embodiment, when the limit process (see FIG. 16) is executed in the favorable zone (i.e., when a predetermined value that is updated as play progresses in the favorable zone (e.g., the value of the favorable zone game number counter or the favorable zone payout number counter) becomes a prescribed value (e.g., 1,500 games or 2,400 coins)), a transition from the favorable zone to the non-favorable zone occurs. This also ends the AT ending mode.

If it is determined in step S2421 that the sub-flag is not a "special combination", or if it is determined in step S2423 that the ending transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines the value of chance B points (step S2302 in FIG. (see step S2303) is "5" (step S2425). If the chance B continuation flag is set to on in one set in the chance B basic mode, the value of chance B points in that set is always subtracted by 1 or more (step S2342 in FIG. 359 and step S2342 in FIG. 362). (See S2369). Therefore, the value of the chance B point being "5" means that the current set is the first set (the first set out of a maximum of five sets).

If it is determined in step S2425 that the value of Chance B points is "5", the main CPU 101 executes a Chance B end time retroactive lottery (step S2426). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the Chance B end time retroactive lottery table (see FIG. 367) and determines whether the lottery is a "winner" or a "non-winner" by conducting a lottery based on a random number value.

In the Chance B end time retroactive lottery table shown in Figure 367, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance B end time retroactive lottery ('non-winning lottery' and 'winning lottery') are specified for the presence or absence of the ball payout mode and the advantageous zone elapsed game number determination flag (see step S2004 in Figure 313) ('ball payout mode 0, 1 and advantageous zone elapsed game number determination flag = "0"', and 'ball payout mode 2 or advantageous zone elapsed game number determination flag = "1"').

In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1 and advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag = "0'''' indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, and "Ball output mode 2 or advantageous period elapsed game number determination flag = '1'" indicates that the value of ball output mode is "2" or the number of games in which advantageous period has elapsed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is set on. The ball dispensing mode is as described above (see FIG. 356). The probability that each result of the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed.

In other words, if the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON, there is a probability of 32/256 that the time at the end of chance B Win a retrospective lottery. In addition, if the value of the ball dispensing mode is "2" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is set to on, there is a probability of 1/256 that the lottery will be drawn retroactively at the end of chance B. I win.

After executing the process of step S2426, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B ending time retrospective lottery has been won (step S2427). If it is determined that the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to ON (step S2428). The chance B basic mode next set transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the next set in the chance B basic mode (see step S2409 in FIG. 365). The main CPU 101 controls the next set in the chance B basic mode in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to on. (See step S2284 in FIG. 353).

After executing the processing of step S2428, the main CPU 101 sets the bell navigation permission flag when the time retrogression lottery is won to on (step S2429). The bell navigation permission flag when the time retrogression lottery is won is a flag used to perform bell navigation in Chance B mode. If the time retrogression lottery is won at the end of Chance B, the correct push order will be announced if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning role from the first unit play in the next set until the end of Chance B mode (see FIG. 372). After executing the processing of step S2429, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2425 that the value of chance B points is not "5", or if it is determined in step S2427 that the chance B end time retroactive lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 performs the chance B end process. (Step S2430). The process at the end of chance B will be explained later using FIG. 368. After executing the process of step S2430, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of chance B>
FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing a chance B point handover lottery table when chance B ends.

The Chance B end processing shown in FIG. 368 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2430 of FIG. 366 (final game processing when Chance B is not continued).

In the Chance B end processing, first, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is confirmed that the advantageous zone will end (step S2441). As described above, there are three routes for transition to the Chance B mode (see FIG. 350), and if the mode from which the current Chance B mode is transitioned is the AT Danger mode (if the mode is transitioned to the Chance B mode via route (III) shown in FIG. 350), when the current Chance B mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the mode transitions to the non-advantageous zone. Also, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling game number (851) (reaching the ceiling), the mode transitions to the pseudo bonus (see step S2023 in FIG. 317), and even if the mode is transitioned to the Chance B mode via reaching the ceiling, when the current Chance B mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the mode transitions to the non-advantageous zone.

In the process of step S2441, the main CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section ends when the mode from which the current chance B mode is transitioned is AT danger mode, or when the transition to chance B mode occurs via reaching the ceiling. It is determined that this is certain. Information indicating that the mode from which the current chance B mode is transitioned is AT danger mode, and information indicating that the mode has transitioned to chance B mode via reaching the ceiling are stored in the main RAM 103, and are stored in the main CPU 101. is now able to recognize the transition route to chance B mode.

If it is determined in step S2441 that it is not certain that the advantageous section will end, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to take over chance B points at the end of chance B (step S2442). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B point handover lottery table at the end of chance B (see FIG. 369) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is , "Non-winning + advantageous section ends," "Non-winning + advantageous section continues," and "Winning + advantageous section continues."

In the Chance B end time Chance B point transfer lottery table shown in Figure 369, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Chance B end time Chance B point transfer lottery ('Non-winning + end of advantageous zone', 'Non-winning + advantageous zone continues', and 'Winning + advantageous zone continues') are specified for the presence or absence of the favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag (see step S2004 in Figure 313) ('favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag is '0', and 'favorable zone elapsed game number determination flag is '1').

In the figure, "the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is 0" indicates that the advantageous section has passed when the current chance B mode is transferred to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the advantageous section has passed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is not set to ON, and "the advantageous section elapsed game number judgment flag is '1'" means that the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the current chance B mode is transferred ), it indicates that the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is set on. The probability that each result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is determined is: "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" ”.

For example, if the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is not set to ON when the current chance B mode is transferred to the source pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode), chance B As a result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end, it is decided with a probability of 192/256 that "no winning + advantageous section ends", and with a probability of 32/256 it is decided that "no winning + advantageous section continues", 32/256 The probability of ``winning + advantageous section continuation'' is determined.

After executing the process of step S2442, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is an advantageous section continuation ("non-winning + advantageous section continuation" or "winning + advantageous section continuation"). (Step S2443). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chance B point transfer lottery at the end of chance B is either "non-winning + advantageous section continuation" or "winning + advantageous section continuation", the main CPU 101 transfers chance B points at the end of chance B. It is determined whether the result of the point handover lottery is "win + advantageous section continuation" (step S2444).

When it is determined that the result of the Chance B point transfer lottery at the end of Chance B is "Winning + Advantageous Zone Continued", the value of the Chance B points (see step S2342 in FIG. 359, step S2369 in FIG. 362, and step S2526 in FIG. 373) is set as the value of the Chance B transfer points (step S2445). As a result, the value of the Chance B points is carried over to the next Chance B mode (see step S2303 in FIG. 354).

If in step S2444 it is determined that the result of the Chance B point transfer lottery at the end of Chance B is not "Winning lottery + continuation of favorable zone", or after executing the processing of step S2445, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to on (step S2446). As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal transition flag was set to on. This causes a transition to the favorable zone (normal mode).

If it is determined in step S2441 that it is certain that the advantageous section ends, or in step S2443, the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is "non-winning + advantageous section continuation" and "winning + advantageous section". If the main CPU 101 determines that the winning period is not one of ``continuation'' (``non-winning + end of advantageous section''), the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section shift flag to ON (step S2447). The non-advantageous section transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the non-advantageous section. The main CPU 101 stores a game section flag storage area (not shown) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the non-advantageous section transition flag is set to ON. Update. This causes the vehicle to move to a non-advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S2446 or step S2447, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the chance B point (step S2448). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Chance B One Shot Win Processing>
Figure 370 is a flowchart showing the processing for Chance B one shot win performed in the main control circuit.

The Chance B one shot win processing shown in FIG. 370 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2381 of FIG. 364 (processing from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic)).

In the Chance B one shot win processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current unit game is the second game in one set (the second unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set) (step S2461). The main CPU 101 can recognize which unit game the current unit game is by referring to the value of the Chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

If it is determined that the current unit game is not the second game in one set, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current unit game is the second game in one set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the Chance B One Shot Win Flag (see step S2325 in FIG. 355) is set to ON (step S2462). If it is determined that the Chance B One Shot Win Flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the Chance B one shot win flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one shot win music output flag to ON (step S2463). The Chance B one shot win music output flag is a flag indicating that it is time to output music at the time of a Chance B one shot win. The Chance B one shot win process shown in FIG. 370 is performed in the game start process for the advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode) (see FIG. 353), and when the game start process for the advantageous zone (Chance B basic mode) ends, the start command generation and storage process (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed.

In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in communication data transmission processing (see step S204 in FIG. 32). When the chance B one-shot win music output flag is set to on, information indicating the chance B one-shot win music output flag is included in the start command data. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 determines that the chance B one-shot win music output flag is set to on, that is, the chance B one-shot win lottery (see step S2323 in FIG. 355) was won in the previous unit game. be able to recognize what has been done.

Then, upon receiving the start command data, the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the Chance B one shot win music (audio data for the Chance B one shot win music). The audio data for the Chance B one shot win music is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3). By setting this audio data, the Chance B one shot win music is output from the speakers 35a, 35b (see FIG. 2). The Chance B one shot win music is background music that is played only if the Chance B one shot win lottery is won.

If you win the Chance B one-shot win lottery in the first game of a set in the Chance B basic mode (the first unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set), Chance B one-shot win. The time music is played immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed in the second game of the set (the second unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set) (for example, when the start lever 7 is operated). It is continuously output from 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) until the end of the set. Then, when the set is completed, a transition is made to the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365).

After executing the process of step S2463, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one shot win lock effect start flag to ON (step S2464). The Chance B one shot win lock effect start flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to execute the Chance B one shot win lock effect. The Chance B one shot win lock effect will be explained later using FIG. 371. After executing the process of step S2464, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one shot win flag to OFF (step S2465) and ends this subroutine.

<Lock effect execution process when Chance B wins in one shot>
FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing a chance B one-shot win lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit.

The chance B one-shot win lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 371 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the chance B one-hit win lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set to on (step S2481). If the main CPU 101 determines that the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the Chance B one shot win lock effect start flag is set to ON, it sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) to the lock timer (step S2482). The lock timer is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). In other words, the lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes chance B one-shot win lock effect start command generation and storage processing (step S2483). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates Chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data, and stores the generated Chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the chance B one-shot win lock effect has started, and can determine the timing to execute various effects.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock timer is 0 (step S2484). If it is determined that the lock timer is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2484 again. As a result, the chance B one-shot win lock effect is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2000 ms). The chance B one-shot win lock effect may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects or pseudo-games, or reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) or pseudo-games ( For example, it may be a lock effect accompanied by the pseudo-game described in this embodiment and the above-mentioned embodiments. While the chance B one-shot win lock effect is being performed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). is determined (step S2485). When determining that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2486). In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the chance B one-shot win lock performance end command data (see step S2487). etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, as described above, the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). Furthermore, as described below, the main display device 210 will also notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

If it is determined in step S2485 that the sub-flag is not "Push Order Bell", or after executing the process of step S2486, the main CPU 101 executes a Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command generation and storage process (step S2487). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data and stores the generated Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the Chance B one-shot win lock effect has ended, and to determine the timing of executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, when the processing of step S2486 is executed, the Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data contains information (push order information) corresponding to the correct push order for the push order bell determined in the current unit game (Figures 310A and 310B). Upon receiving the Chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data, the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 sets the effect data (push order navigation image data) corresponding to the push order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see Figure 3), and by setting the image data, a push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying (bell navigation) the correct push order for the push order bell.

After executing the process of step S2487, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one-hit win lock effect start flag to OFF (step S2488), and sets the one-shot win BelNavi permission flag to ON (step S2489). The one-shot victory bell navigation permission flag is a flag used to perform bell navigation in chance B mode (see FIG. 372). After executing the process in step S2489, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing for Bell Navi during Chance B>
Figure 372 is a flowchart showing the processing for Bell Navi during Chance B performed in the main control circuit.

The processing for Bell Navi during Chance B shown in FIG. 372 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2338 of FIG. 355 (processing for the first game during Chance B (basic)) and in step S2389 of FIG. 364 (processing for the second game and onward during Chance B (basic)).

In the processing for bell navigation during Chance B, first, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting processing (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) (step S2501). If it is determined that the sub-flag is not the "push order bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is the "push order bell", the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the bell navigation permission flag when the time retroactive lottery is won (see step S2429 in FIG. 366) is set to ON (step S2502).

If it is determined that the bell navigation permission flag at the time of time retroactive lottery winning is set on, it is determined whether the lock effect start flag at chance B one-shot win (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set on or not. (Step S2503). On the other hand, if it is determined that the BellNavi permission flag at the time of a time retrograde lottery win is not set on, it is determined whether the BellNavi permission flag at the time of a one-shot win (see step S2489 in FIG. 371) is set on. (Step S2504).

If it is determined in step S2503 that the Chance B one shot win lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Also, if it is determined in step S2504 that the one shot win bell navigation permission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2503 that the Chance B one-shot win lock performance start flag is not set to on, or if it is determined that the one-shot win one-shot victory bell navigation permission flag is set to on, The main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2505). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command data, etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28).

After executing the process in step S2505, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. By executing the process of step S2505, as described above, the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). . Furthermore, as described below, the main display device 210 will also notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

The process for BellNavi during Chance B shown in FIG. 372 is performed in the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (Chance B basic mode) (see FIG. 353), and the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (Chance B basic mode) ends. Then, start command generation and storage processing (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed. In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in communication data transmission processing (see step S204 in FIG. 32).

When the processing of step S2505 is executed, the start command data contains information (push order information) corresponding to the correct push order for the push order bell determined in this unit game (Figures 310A and 310B). Upon receiving the start command data, the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 sets performance data (push order navigation image data) corresponding to the push order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see Figure 3), and when the image data is set, a push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying (bell navigation) the correct push order for the push order bell.

As explained above, if the Chance B one shot win lottery (see step S2322 in Figure 355) is won in the first game of a set in the Chance B basic mode (the first unit play of the eight unit plays that make up that set), and the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning role in the second game of that set (the second unit play of the eight unit plays that make up that set), the correct push order will be announced (see step S2486 in Figure 371) when the Chance B one shot win lock performance ends (for example, 2000 ms after the start lever 7 is operated). Furthermore, if the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning role in the third game or later of the set (the third to eighth unit games of the eight unit games that make up the set), the correct push order will be announced immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated) (see step S2505 in FIG. 372). In this way, if you win the Chance B one-shot win lottery in one unit game, a bell navi will occur if the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning role from the next unit game until the Chance B mode ends.

In the AT state or pseudo bonus A mode, similar to the bell navigation process during Chance B shown in FIG. 372, if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning role, the navigation setting process (see step S2505) is performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process). As a result, the correct push order is announced immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated).

<Game start processing for advantageous section (chance B special mode)>
FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing the pursuit number UP lottery table.

The game start processing for the advantageous zone (Chance B special mode) shown in FIG. 373 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and Chance B special mode, respectively (see FIG. 350). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone and mode are advantageous zone and Chance B special mode, respectively, by referring to the game zone flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for the advantageous zone (Chance B special mode), first, the main CPU 101 judges whether the AT confirmation state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON (step S2521). If it is judged that the AT confirmation state flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a chase number UP lottery (step S2522). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the chase number UP lottery table (see FIG. 374) and performs a lottery based on the ball payout flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value, and determines one of "non-winning lottery", "chasing number +1", "chasing number +2", and "chasing number +3" as the result of the chase number UP lottery.

In the chase number UP lottery table shown in FIG. 374, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the chase number UP lottery ("No Win", "Chase Number +1", "Chase Number +2", and "Chase Number +3") is specified for each ball output flag group (normal) ("Other than the above", "Rare LV1", "Rare LV2", "Rare LV3", "Rare LV4", "Rare LV5", and "Rare LV6"). The probability of each result of the chase number UP lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be extracted (random number numerator: 256)". For example, if the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the result of the chase number UP lottery is determined with a probability of 128/256 to be "Chase Number +1", and with a probability of 128/256 to be "Chase Number +2".

After executing the process of step S2522, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is a win (“pursuit number +1”, “pursuit number +2”, or “pursuit number +3”). (Step S2523). If it is determined that the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is any one of "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3", the main CPU 101 selects the pursuit number (step S2348 in FIG. 359). and (see step S2363 in FIG. 362) are updated (step S2524). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 1", and when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 2" In this case, "2" is added to the value of the pursuit number, and when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 3", "3" is added to the value of the pursuit number.

If it is determined in step S2521 that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set on. (Step S2525). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT confirmed state (step S2526). This process is similar to the process in step S2335 in FIG. 355, so the explanation here will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S2523 that the result of the chase number up lottery is not "challenge number +1", "challenge number +2", or "challenge number +3", if it is determined in step S2525 that the heaven shift lottery winning flag is set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S2524 or step S2526, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the chase number from the value of the chance B points (step S2527). Note that since the lower limit of the value of the chance B points is "0", if the value of the chance B points after the subtraction is negative, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B points to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0" (step S2528). If it is determined that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S2529 to S2531, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S2403 to S2405 in FIG. 365. Since the process is similar to that, the explanation here will be omitted. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2532, which is similar to the process of step S2409 in FIG. 365. Therefore, the explanation here is omitted.

After executing the processing of step S2530, step S2531, or step S2532, the main CPU 101 executes processing for Bell Navi during Chance B (step S2533). The processing for Bell Navi during Chance B has been explained using FIG. 372, so an explanation of this will be omitted here. After executing the processing of step S2533, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pursuit number UP lottery (see step S2522) has been described as being performed in the process of step S6 (start of game state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), but this process may be performed in the process of step S15 (end of game state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). For example, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), these processes are performed in the process of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main process) (start of game state control process), whereas if the sub-flag is the "push order bell", this process may be performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (end of game state control process).

When performing this process in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group (usually ) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the put-out flag group (normal) according to the character (see FIG. 324) is determined; If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the put-out flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Appendix G>
Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a chance zone in which the transition lottery to the AT is more favorable than in the normal state is known (see JP 2017-77412 A). In the chance zone, the expectation of the balls to be paid out increases compared to the normal state, so that the interest of the player can be increased.

In conventional gaming machines, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous state such as AT, there is room for improvement in the subsequent game and the notification method to that effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming when the right to shift to an advantageous state is granted. do.

In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features:

(G-1) a state control means capable of controlling a state related to a game;
A granting means capable of granting a right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to a player;
A notification means (main CPU 101 which executes the processes of FIG. 371 and FIG. 372) capable of notifying a player of advantageous information;
The granting means is capable of granting a right to transition to the advantageous state when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode),
The notification means is capable of notifying a player of information advantageous to the player when the specific condition is established in the specific state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established. It is possible to grant the right to shift to the AT state), and it is configured so that it is possible to notify information advantageous to the player. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for playing the game through this information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-2) The gaming machine of (G-1) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (outputting a song when chance B wins in one shot) when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state,
The notification means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2486 in FIG. 371) notifies the player of information advantageous to the player after the specific performance is started when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the slot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to execute a specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot), and it is configured to be able to notify the player of information advantageous to the player after the specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) has started. If the information is notified before the specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) starts, the player may realize that the specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) has been established at the time of the notification. In that case, it is not possible to get the player interested in the specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) that starts afterwards, and there is a concern that the significance of carrying out the specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) will be diminished. In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 according to the 11th embodiment makes it possible to avoid such a situation by suppressing the notification of the information before the special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) begins, thereby increasing the value of the special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) and further increasing the interest in playing when the right to move to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-3) The gaming machine of (G-1) or (G-2) above,
The imparting means is
A first granting means (see Fig. a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2326 of 355;
a second granting means capable of granting the right to transition to the advantageous state when a second condition (the value of chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage) in the specific state; A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2350 in FIG. 359,
When the first granting means grants the right to shift to the advantageous state, the state control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing in steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365) controls the second granting means to grant the right to shift to the advantageous state. It is possible to transition to the advantageous state at an earlier timing than when the right to transition to the state is granted,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to grant the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) when a first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), while it is also possible to grant the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) when a second condition (the value of the Chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). And, when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery), it is configured to be possible to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) at an earlier timing than when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the second condition (the value of the Chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage). This makes it possible to provide the player with an early opportunity to play in an advantageous state (AT state) when the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) being met and further increasing the player's interest in playing when the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met.

(G-4) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-3) above,
comprising a variable updating means capable of updating a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable updating means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2324 in FIG. 355) updates the predetermined variable so that the predetermined variable becomes the predetermined value when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to update the variables of
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to update a predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), and when the predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points) becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to transition to an advantageous state (AT state). And, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is configured to be possible to update the predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points) so that the predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points) becomes the predetermined value (0). This makes it possible to unify the control of the predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points) between the case where the specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established and the case where the specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is not established, and the interest in the game can be further increased through the specific state (Chance B basic mode) using such a predetermined variable (the value of the Chance B points).

(G-5) Any one of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-4),
A variable update means is provided for updating a predetermined variable (a value of the chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of controlling the specific state a plurality of times in a predetermined section (set),
the variable update means (the main CPU 101 which executes the processing of step S2342 of FIG. 359 and step S2369 of FIG. 362) is capable of updating the predetermined variable in each of the predetermined sections in the specific state,
The granting means (the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is capable of granting the right to transition to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in one of the predetermined sections in the specific state.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to control a specific section (set) multiple times in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), and it is possible to update a specific variable (Chance B point value) in each specific section (set) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode). And, it is configured so that it is possible to grant the right to move to an advantageous state (AT state) when the specific variable (Chance B point value) becomes a specific value (0) in one specific section (set) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode). This makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in the fact that the specific variable (Chance B point value) is updated in each specific section (set) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), and the interest in the game can be further increased through the specific state (Chance B basic mode) using such a specific variable (Chance B point value).

(G-6) Any one of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-5),
The notification means includes:
In the advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player of information advantageous to the player at a first timing (when the processing of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed),
When the specific condition is established in the specific state, it is possible to notify the player of information advantageous to the player at a second timing (when the processing of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed) that is later than the first timing.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, in the advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player is notified at the first timing (when the process of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed). On the other hand, if a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player may be transmitted at the first timing (as shown in FIG. 23). The configuration is such that the notification can be made at a second timing (when the process of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed) that is later than the time when the process of step S7 is performed. As a result, by delaying the timing of notification of the information when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state) is created. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the case where the right to transfer to the other party is granted.

(G-7) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-6) above,
The notifying means is capable of notifying information advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is satisfied in each unit game in the advantageous state, and in the specific state. If the specific condition is met, it is possible to notify the information in multiple unit games before shifting to the advantageous state;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the 11th embodiment, when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is met in each unit game during the advantageous state (AT state), it is possible to notify the player of information advantageous to the player, and when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to notify the player of the information in multiple unit games before the transition to the advantageous state (AT state). As a result, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to notify the player of information similar to that in the advantageous state (AT state) before the transition to the advantageous state (AT state), which further increases the interest of the game when the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-8) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-7) above,
The imparting means is
A first granting means (for example, , the main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2326 in FIG.
A second granting means (see Fig. 359 and step S2371 of FIG. 362,
The state control means includes:
After controlling to the specific state, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (chance B special mode),
When the right to shift to the advantageous state is granted by the first granting means, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state without controlling to the predetermined state, while the second granting means grants the right to shift to the advantageous state. If the right to shift to the state is granted, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state after controlling to the predetermined state;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, when the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to grant the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state), while it is also possible to grant the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) when the second condition (the value of the pursuit number is equal to or greater than the value of the Chance B point) is established in the specific state (Chance B basic mode). And, when the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery), it is possible to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) without controlling to a predetermined state (Chance B special mode), while when the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the second condition (the value of the pursuit number is equal to or greater than the value of the Chance B point), it is configured to be possible to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) after controlling to a predetermined state (Chance B special mode). In this way, by making the difference between whether or not a predetermined state (Chance B special mode) is inserted in the process of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state) depending on whether the first condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met and the second condition (the value of the pursuit number being equal to or greater than the Chance B point value) is met, it is possible to further increase the excitement of playing when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-9) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-8) above,
comprising variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable management means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2445 in FIG. 368 and step S2303 in FIG. It is possible to inherit the predetermined variable to the specific state that occurs;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) becomes a predetermined value (0) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state ). If one specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends without the predetermined variable (Chance B point value) becoming the predetermined value (0), the specific state (Chance B basic mode) that occurs later is changed to The configuration is such that the predetermined variable (value of chance B point) can be inherited. As a result, continuity can be created between one specific state (Chance B basic mode) and a later specific state (Chance B basic mode) based on a predetermined variable (Chance B point value). This is possible, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in a specific state (Chance B basic mode).

(G-10) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-9) above,
comprising variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
When the state control means is controlled to a first state (non-advantageous section) after one of the specific states ends, the state control means does not allow the predetermined variable to be inherited by the specific state that occurs later; When the specific state is controlled to a second state (advantageous section) after the end of the specific state, it is possible to inherit the predetermined variable to the specific state that occurs later.
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, when the first state (non-favorable zone) is controlled after the end of one specific state (Chance B basic mode), the predetermined variable (Chance B point value) is not carried over to the specific state (Chance B basic mode) that occurs later, whereas when the second state (favorable zone) is controlled after the end of one specific state (Chance B basic mode), the predetermined variable (Chance B point value) can be carried over to the specific state (Chance B basic mode) that occurs later. As a result, when the second state (favorable zone) is controlled after the end of one specific state (Chance B basic mode), it is possible to create continuity between the one specific state (Chance B basic mode) and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) that occurs later, centered on the predetermined variable (Chance B point value), and the interest of playing in the specific state (Chance B basic mode) can be further increased. Furthermore, when control is made to the first state (non-advantageous zone) after one specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends, such continuity cannot be achieved, so the player's interest can be heightened as to whether the state to be controlled to after one specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends will be the first state (non-advantageous zone) or the second state (advantageous zone). This can further increase the interest of the specific state (Chance B basic mode), allowing the player to fully enjoy playing in the specific state (Chance B basic mode).

(G-11) Any one of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-10),
A first output means (speakers 35a, 35b) capable of outputting information related to a game;
A second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210) capable of outputting information related to a game;
A performance execution means is provided for executing a performance,
the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) by output from the first output means when the specific condition is established in the specific state,
the notification means is capable of notifying a player of information advantageous to the player by output from the second output means when the specific condition is established in the specific state;
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), a specific effect (output of music when Chance B one shot wins) can be executed by output from the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b), while information advantageous to the player can be notified by output from the second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210). In this way, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), output related to the effect and notification is performed using two output means, the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b) and the second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210). Therefore, it is possible to stimulate the five senses (sight and hearing) of the player in a complex manner through the output from the two output means, and the interest in the game can be further increased when the right to move to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

In the 11th embodiment, it has been explained that information advantageous to the player (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) is reported when the chance B one-shot win lock effect ends (see FIG. 371). The timing at which the information (the correct pressing order on the pressing order bell) is announced may be approximately at the same time (just before or after) when the chance B one-shot victory lock effect ends, or the timing when the chance B one-shot victory lock effect ends (just before or after) It may also be possible while the victory lock effect is being executed. For example, the navigation setting process is performed before the chance B one-hit win lock effect start command generation and storage process, and information regarding the set stop operation, etc. is included in the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data. If the sub control circuit is configured to set the push order navigation image data when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data, the chance The information (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) can be notified while the B one-shot win lock effect is being executed.

Note that when the information advantageous to the player (the correct push order on the push order bell) is announced after the start of a specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot), it is not essential to perform a Chance B win in one shot lock effect. For example, the specific effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) may be started at approximately the same time as the reels start spinning, and the information (the correct push order on the push order bell) may be announced when a predetermined time (e.g., 1000 ms) has elapsed since then. In addition, if a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met in one unit game and the right to move to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted, a specific effect (output of music when Chance B one shot wins) may be started in that unit game (first game in a set), but even if a specific condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is met, the information (the correct push order of the push order bell) may not be announced, and if the specific condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is met in the next or subsequent unit game (second or subsequent game in a set), the information (the correct push order of the push order bell) may be announced.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific performance (output of music when chance B wins in one shot) is performed through the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b), and information advantageous to the player (pressing the correct answer on the pressing order bell) is performed through the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b). In the above description, it has been explained that the notification of the order) is performed through the second output means (the instruction monitor and the main display device 210). The first output means and the second output means are not particularly limited, and include a display means (display device) capable of displaying an image, a sound output means (speaker) capable of outputting sound, and a display means capable of emitting light. It is possible to appropriately employ any output means such as a light emitting means (LED) that is capable of providing a light emitting means (LED). For example, the specific effect may be the display of an image, the output of sound, the output of light, or any combination thereof. Furthermore, information advantageous to the player may be displayed by displaying an image, outputting sound, outputting light, or any combination thereof. Good too. The specific performance and the notification of information advantageous to the player may be the same type of output (for example, both display images). In this case, the display means for performing the specific performance and the display means for notifying information advantageous to the player may be the same display means or different display means (the first display means and the second display means). means). For example, a main display device and a sub display device may be provided as in the first embodiment, and these may be employed as the first display means and the second display means, respectively.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is established in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), the specific effect (output of music when Chance B one shot wins) is continued until the specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends. The length of the specific effect is not particularly limited, and may continue over multiple unit games, may be completed in one unit game (unit game in which the specific effect is started), or may appear for a short period of time (for example, within 3 seconds). Note that the specific effect (output of music when Chance B one shot wins) may be performed only when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted (when the specific effect occurs, the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is confirmed), or may be performed when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted as well as when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted. In the case of adopting a form in which a special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) can occur even if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted, it is preferable to configure the system so that the probability of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state) is higher when the special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) occurs than when the special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) does not occur. Alternatively, when the special effect (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) occurs, there may be a relatively high probability (e.g., 80% or more) of transition to an advantageous state (AT state) (high expectation of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state)).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, an advantageous state (AT It has been explained that when the right to shift to the AT state is granted, the shift to the advantageous state (AT state) is performed when the predetermined section (set) ends. The timing of shifting to the advantageous state (AT state) when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied is not limited to this example. For example, even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery), even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted, the number of times set in advance (for example, 5 times) It is also possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) after all predetermined sections (sets) of . In addition, if a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is met in one predetermined section (set), how many times is the predetermined section (set) in question? Depending on the situation, do you want to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) when the predetermined section (set) ends, or complete the predetermined section (set) a preset number of times (for example, 5 times)? After that, it may be determined whether to shift to the advantageous state (AT state). For example, in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), the number of remaining predetermined sections (sets) including the predetermined section (set) is greater than (or less than) a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). In this case, the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) may be made only after all predetermined intervals (sets) have been completed a preset number of times (for example, 5 times) (or by lottery). Similarly, even if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the second condition (the value of chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage), the preset It is also possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) after completing a predetermined period (set) of a preset number of times (for example, 5 times), or to move to an advantageous state (AT state) after completing a predetermined period (set) of a preset number of times (for example, 5 times). It may also be determined whether or not to end all sections (sets).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established in the first unit game in one predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). It was explained as making a decision as to whether or not. The timing of determining whether or not to establish a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is not particularly limited, and any unit game in one predetermined section (set) (for example, the last It is possible to configure the system so that the determination is made in unit games).

Between the time a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met and the transition to the advantageous state (AT state), advantageous information for the player (the correct push order on the push order bell) is announced, but the specific state (Chance B basic mode) continues. The screen seen by the player also shows the performance (battle performance) during the specific state (Chance B basic mode), which is distinct from the advantageous state (AT state). When the specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends, the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle performance, and the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) occurs. The performance performed in the advantageous state (AT state) can be different from the performance performed in the specific state (Chance B basic mode).

In addition, during the specific state (Chance B basic mode), basically, information advantageous to the player (the correct push order on the push order bell) is not announced, but when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met, exceptionally, information advantageous to the player (the correct push order on the push order bell) is announced. In the specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player (the correct push order on the push order bell) may be announced only when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met, or the information may be announced when any condition other than the specific condition (winning the Chance B one shot win lottery) is met.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the lower limit of the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) is a predetermined value (0), but the lower limit (upper limit) of the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) may not be set. In this case, it is possible to configure the game to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) when the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) becomes equal to or less than (equal to) a predetermined value (0) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). In addition, in this case, a bonus may be awarded depending on the difference between the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) and the predetermined value (0) (the degree to which it falls below (exceeds) the predetermined value (0)). In this case, it is desirable to configure the game to award a larger bonus the greater the difference between the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) and the predetermined value (0). As such a privilege, for example, it is possible to adopt one that allows the advantageous state (AT state) to proceed advantageously (for example, one that increases the probability (avoidance rate) of winning the bell navigation generation lottery performed during the AT danger mode, or one that allows the end of the AT state to be avoided even if the stop operation cannot be performed by the correct push order in the AT danger mode (playing the same role as a predetermined character)). Such a privilege may be granted according to the value of the damage stock counter. The privilege may be displayed on the display device as a predetermined image (an icon that is advantageous in the AT state). In addition, when the advantageous state (AT state) is managed by the number of games, the difference in number of sheets, the number of navigations, etc., the privilege may be directly granted by the number of games, the difference in number of sheets, the number of navigations, etc., so that the playing period of the advantageous state (AT state) is extended. The method of managing the advantageous state (AT state) is as described in the first embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the predetermined variable (the value of the chance B point) is managed by the subtraction method, but it may of course be managed by the addition method. In addition, the predetermined variable (the value of Chance B points) can be updated based on the internal winning combination determined for each unit game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine. As the advantageous state, a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state (ART state), pseudo bonus, advantageous zone, time-saving game state, probability game state, jackpot game state, etc. in a slot machine can be appropriately adopted. The specific state is not particularly limited as long as it is a state in which the right to transition to the advantageous state can be granted, and may be a chance zone or normal mode in a slot machine, or a time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state, probability game state, or non-probability game state in a pachinko machine. As the specific condition, a condition for granting the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT or BB in a slot machine, winning a lottery for a jackpot, etc. in a pachinko machine) can be appropriately adopted. The advantageous state and the specific state are not limited to states controlled by the main control circuit, but may also be states (performance modes) controlled by the sub-control circuit.

The information advantageous to the player may be information that allows the player to play advantageously, or information that suggests that the right to move to an advantageous state has been granted. Examples of information that allows the player to play advantageously include information that allows the player to perform advantageous operations (for example, information about the stop operation in a pachinko game machine, information about left-handed or right-handed hits in a pachinko game machine, etc.). Information about the stop operation in a pachinko game machine can be appropriately adopted as information for performing the stop operation required to win the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts among the symbol combinations that are allowed to be stopped and displayed along the pay line when a predetermined role is determined as an internal winning role. Examples of such information include information indicating the correct push order in a push order role, information indicating the type of push order role, and information indicating the timing to perform the stop operation (eye push). Examples of information suggesting that the right to move to an advantageous state has been granted include information suggesting that the player has won (output only when the player wins) an AT or BB in a slot machine, or a jackpot in a pachinko machine (for example, a normal jackpot, a guaranteed jackpot, a time-saving jackpot, or a jackpot with many rounds). Therefore, for example, performing a performance to notify (suggest) that the player has won or displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the winning lot (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus or a jackpot) can also be said to notify the player of information advantageous to the player. The number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified from the establishment of a specific condition to the transition to an advantageous state is not particularly limited, and may be once or multiple times. Furthermore, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, a special effect may be a look-ahead effect (a effect that suggests the result of one jackpot determination (extraction of a random number value for jackpot determination), the content of which is determined before the end of the display of the change in the identification information (special pattern change) corresponding to the jackpot determination made prior to that one jackpot determination).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, control can be performed multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), and the predetermined section (set) is composed of a predetermined number of unit games (eight times). I explained that it would be done. The number of unit games that constitute a predetermined section (set) is not particularly limited, and may be multiple times or one time. When the number of unit games forming a predetermined section is one, the predetermined section and the unit game are synonymous. A unit game in a pachi-slot gaming machine can be a period from the start to the end of one main process (see FIG. 23). In addition, a unit game in a pachinko machine is a period in which one special symbol game is played (from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the final display of the result of the special symbol hit determination process). (period until derivation).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a predetermined state (Chance B special mode) is interposed between one predetermined section (set) and the next predetermined section (set) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode). It was explained as follows. However, it is not essential to intervene a predetermined state (chance B special mode), and if the specific state (chance B basic mode) continues when one predetermined section (set) ends, the next It is also possible to shift to a predetermined section (set). The probability of continuing the specific state (chance B basic mode) when one predetermined period (set) ends (the probability of winning the chance B continuation lottery) is between 0 and 100% (or between 50 and 70%). It may be determined by a random lottery, or it may be determined by a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). Alternatively, the chance B continuation rate (see Figure 351) before the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition is added may be determined by lottery from 0 to 100% (or 50 to 70%). Alternatively, it may be a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

In the eleventh embodiment, the specific state (Chance B basic mode) can be controlled multiple times in a predetermined section (set), and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) is terminated when a decision to continue the specific state (Chance B basic mode) is not made in one predetermined section (set). The termination condition of the specific state (Chance B basic mode) is not limited to this example, and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) may be managed by a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games), and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) may be terminated after the predetermined number of games is consumed. In this case, the specific state (Chance B basic mode) may be controlled to a predetermined section (set) according to the result of a lottery performed during the specific state (Chance B basic mode), and a decision (for example, a battle performance) may be made as to whether or not to grant the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) in such a predetermined section (set). Also, during the predetermined section (set), the value of the counter in the game number management may not be updated (subtraction is stopped), and when the predetermined section (set) is ended, updating of the counter value may be started again. This allows the configuration to end the specific state (Chance B basic mode) without transitioning to the advantageous state (AT state) when the right to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is not granted in a specified section (set) and the number of games played excluding the specified section (set) reaches a predetermined number of games. Also, in one specified section (set), it may be determined by lottery whether or not to control to the specified section (set) again after the specified section (set) has ended.

Furthermore, in the medalless gaming machine (gaming machine that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player) described in the first embodiment, the gaming machine is not normally connected to the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit). If there is no such information, if information corresponding to the number of gaming values is transmitted to the communication dedicated unit in response to the operation of any of the return operating means, there is a risk that the information will be lost. Therefore, in order to prevent the game from progressing unless it is properly connected to the communication dedicated unit, an error condition on the main control board is displayed at the start of the game, so that the game cannot be played (for example, the input button (bet button), the settlement button, etc.). It may also be possible to set the device to a state in which the button, start lever, etc. cannot be accepted. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent information corresponding to the number of game values from disappearing.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will now be described. The slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment basically has the same configuration and functions as the slot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments described above, except for the points described below. Furthermore, where the explanations of the first to eleventh embodiments apply to the twelfth embodiment, the explanations will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment to the eleventh embodiment also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the twelfth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Furthermore, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

[11-1. Processor configuration]
FIG. 375 mainly shows the configuration of the sub-control unit of the slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment. The sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375 includes a sub-relay board 2200 and a sub-control board 2300, and the sub-relay board 2200 corresponds to the sub-relay board 74 of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-control board 72 of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The sub-control board 2300 is electrically connected to the main control board 2010, as in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and performs processing such as determining the content of the performance and executing the performance based on commands transmitted from the main control board 2010. The sub-control board 2300 and the sub-relay board 2200 are basically connected to each other by BtoB (Board-to-Board), and are shown separated by a dashed line in FIG. 375. In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 2300 and the sub-relay board 2200 are each stored in a separate board box.

As shown in FIG. 375, the sub-control board 2300 is configured as a multi-chip module that packages a CPU 2390, GPU 2400, VPU 2410, VRAM 2420, SDRAM 2430, etc. into one package. Note that the GPU and VPU are sometimes collectively referred to as the VDP, and the GPU and VPU are sometimes individually referred to as the VDP, so the VDP is used as a generic term that covers the GPU and VPU.

The CPU 2390 determines the presentation content based on commands and the like transmitted from the main control board 2010, and performs various controls to execute the determined presentation content. For example, in order to display a 3D image or 2D image on a display device, the operation of the GPU 2400, VPU 2410, etc. is controlled. Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 2390 is a multi-core CPU having four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, and CPU core #4). Note that the CPU 2390 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be configured from five or more (or three or less) CPU cores, or may be configured as a multi-CPU.

The GPU 2400 includes four GPUs (GPU #1, GPU #2, GPU #3, and GPU #4). Further, in this embodiment, the GPU 2400 may be composed of five or more (or three or less) GPUs, similarly to the CPU 2390. In this embodiment, the SDRAM 2430 is composed of two SDRAMs each having a capacity of 1 GB.

Next, each component of the sub control board 2300 will be explained. The HSS I/F 2320 is a high-speed serial interface (for example, an interface of a standard such as SATA3), and the sub control board 2300 receives data from the sub ROM 2210 of the sub relay board 2200 via the HSS I/F 2320, and transfers data from the FRAM ( (registered trademark) 2220. The sub ROM 2210 stores various control programs executed by the CPU 2390, various data tables, and various production data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 2510, video data related to the sub display device 2520, and data related to lamps/LED groups). Lamp data, sound data related to speaker groups, etc.) are stored. The sub ROM 2210 has the same function as the ROM cartridge board 202 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above.

The UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) I/F 2330 is an interface for serial communication, and the sub-control board 2300 receives data from the main control board 2010, the door monitoring unit 2020, and the selector 2030 via the UART I/F 2330. Here, the main control board 2010 corresponds to the main control board 71 of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and the door monitoring unit 2020 corresponds to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the medal sensor 31S of the selector 31 is connected to the main relay board 73, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is connected to the sub-control board 2300.

Further, the sub control board 2300 exchanges predetermined data with the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 via the UART I/F 2330. Here, the main display device 2510 generally corresponds to the main display device 210 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the sub-display device 2520 corresponds to the sub-display device 220 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. handle.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 2300 transmits and receives data to and from the RTC (Real-Time Clock) 2230 of the sub-relay board 2200 via the I2C I/F 2340. The sub-control board 2300 also transmits and receives setting data for the digital amplifier 2240 and data (commands) for acquiring the status (operating state) of the digital amplifier 2240 to output sound to the speaker group 2040 to the digital amplifier 2240 of the sub-relay board 2200 via the I2C I/F 2340. Here, the speaker group 2040 corresponds to the speaker group (35a, 35b, etc.) of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, for example, it can be composed of four speakers consisting of L and R speakers provided at the top of the gaming machine and L and R speakers provided at the bottom of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the RTC 2230 is connected via the I2C I/F 2340, but depending on the RTC's communication specifications, the RTC 2230 may be connected via the SPI I/F 2360.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 2300 transmits sound source data for outputting sound to the speaker group 2040 to the digital amplifier 2240 of the sub-relay board 2200 via the I2S I/F 2350.

The sub-control board 2300 also transmits data for controlling the emission of the performance LED group 2050 to the LED driver 2250 of the sub-relay board 2200 via the SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) I/F 2360. Here, the performance LED group 2050 corresponds to the lamps/LEDs 23 of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, multiple full-color LEDs can be mounted on the upper part, upper right side, upper left side, lower right side, lower left side, waist panel, inside of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (reel lamp), and each button. The 7-segment LED used for payout display, etc. is controlled by the main control board 2010 and is not included in the performance LED group 2050. In this embodiment, it is connected to the LED driver 2250 via the SPI I/F 2360, but depending on the communication specifications of the LED driver, it may be connected to the LED driver 2250 via the I2C I/F 2340.

GZIP (or GUNZIP) 2370 of the sub control board 2300 is a circuit for decompressing (expanding) files. Generally, GZIP is a function for compressing files, and GUNZIP is a function for decompressing files, but in this embodiment, GZIP 2370 is a circuit for compressing/decompressing files. Further, the sub control board 2300 receives signals from the button group 2060 via a GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) 2380, which is a general purpose I/O port, and also controls the movable accessory 2070 via the GPIO 2380. Send a signal. Here, the button group 2060 corresponds to, for example, the effect button group (10a, 10b, etc.) of the Pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and does not include a stop button or the like. Further, although the movable accessory 2070 is not provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, it can be provided in this embodiment.

As described above, the sub-control board 2300 has four CPUs 2390 and four GPUs 2400, but the number of each does not necessarily have to be four. The sub-control board 2300 further has one VPU 2410. The GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 are microprocessors dedicated to image processing, and generate images to be displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub-display device 2520. In this embodiment, the GPU 2400 mainly processes 3D images (moving images, still images) under the control of the CPU 2390, and the VPU 2410 mainly processes 2D images (moving images, still images) under the control of the CPU 2390.

Two frame buffers (a first frame buffer, a second frame buffer) are set in the VRAM 2420 of the sub-control board 2300 for each display device, and image data of an image to be displayed on the corresponding display device is written to each frame buffer. Furthermore, the image data of one frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the first frame, and the image data of the other frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the next second frame, and these processes are performed. By repeating this alternately, a moving image is displayed on the display device.

In addition to the method of setting two frame buffers for each display device, it is also possible to set a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer with a size that combines the display size (pixels) of multiple display devices and display image data. When transferring image data to a device, there is also a transfer method that specifies a data range in the frame buffer and transfers it to the display device, and it is also possible to use a method that transfers from one frame buffer to multiple display devices. However, the number of display devices is not limited to one frame buffer. In addition, two frame buffers such as the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer are called a double frame buffer, and each frame buffer has "drawing" and "display" functions to perform the above operations. It is possible.

The SDRAM 2430 of the sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-RAM 203 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. The SDRAM 2430 is provided with a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 2010. It will be done.

Image data written to the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the VRAM 2420 is transferred to the main display device 2510 or the sub display device 2520 via the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) I/F 2440 of the sub control board 2300. The transmitted image data is then displayed on the display device. Further, a VSYNC signal is transmitted to each display device by the LVDS I/F 2440, and image data (frames) in the display device are switched based on this VSYNC signal.

Note that the VSYNC signal is a signal that is transmitted (generated) at every 16.5 msec period if the frame rate (FPS) is 60 fps, and is transmitted (generated) at every 33 msec period when the frame rate (FPS) is 30 fps.

Data is transmitted and received between the above-mentioned components of the sub-control board 2300 via the bus 2310 of the sub-control board 2300.

[11-2. Processes and threads]
Next, the processes and threads of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 378.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the power is turned on, the boot loader installed in the sub ROM 2210 of the sub control board 2300 or the sub relay board 2200 runs an OS (Operating System: Kernel) program (corresponding to the management program of the present application). After loading, the OS starts the master process program (corresponding to the control program of the present application), and then the master process starts the program of each process (corresponding to the control program of the present application). do. For example, in Figure 376, the master process is shown launching three processes: a graphics process, a sound process, and a lamp process. Here, a process is a program that is being executed, and can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the OS. Also, one process is given one common memory space.

In the master process, five threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, peripheral device thread, main board thread, and master thread (main thread)) are executed in parallel and receive commands and the like from the main control board 2010. A thread is a part that executes instructions of a program (process), and is the smallest unit that uses a CPU core.

Also, like the master process described above, the graphics process executes four threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, character thread, graphics thread (main thread)), the sound process executes three threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, sound thread (main thread)), and the lamp process executes three threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, lamp thread (main thread)). As such, since one process has multiple threads, the processing form in this embodiment can be said to be "multi-threaded", and since multiple processes are running simultaneously, it can be said to be "multi-process".

In addition, at this time, the OS can be configured to start all processes, not just the master process. Note that "starting" means reading the target process from sub-ROM 2210, loading it onto SDRAM 2430, and executing the loaded process, which is similar to the operation of application software on a personal computer.

As mentioned above, each thread can use a CPU core and give instructions to the CPU core, but which CPU core a thread gives instructions to is basically controlled by the OS. The user can also specify the association between a thread and the CPU core on which it runs. Specifically, the lamp process always occupies one CPU core, and the master process, graphics process, and sound process run threads on the three unoccupied CPU cores, but for the file cache processing of the graphics process (see Figure 392), the lamp process temporarily occupies one of the three CPU cores. Therefore, all threads of one process do not necessarily use the same CPU core. As mentioned above, each process is given a memory space, but threads within the same process can share this memory space.

Figure 377 shows the relationship between the master process, graphic process, sound process, and lamp process described above, and the shared memory. This shared memory is different from the memory space that can be shared by threads within a process, as described above. In this embodiment, a part of the SDRAM 2430 shown in Figure 375 is used as the shared memory, and each thread (inter-process communication thread) accesses this shared memory, making it possible to share data between processes.

As a shared memory configuration, there is a method (centralized shared memory method) in which each CPU core (or each CPU) accesses one shared memory through one shared bus. There is also a method (distributed shared memory method) in which the local memories of each CPU core (or each CPU) are connected via a shared bus so that they can be accessed virtually as one shared memory.

In this embodiment, as described above, the SDRAM 2430 is configured with two SDRAMs, so one of these SDRAMs (part or all of one SDRAM) can be set as a shared memory, or two SDRAMs can be configured as a shared memory. It is also possible to virtually connect at least a portion of each of them and set it as a shared memory.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable character 2070 can also be provided, but the processes and threads related to this are controlled by the character thread in the graphics process described above. Also, the processes and threads related to those processes shown in FIG. 376 are merely examples, and various variations in the number and functions can be considered.

In Figure 377, solid arrows represent the subject and target involved in allocating shared memory space and the writing of data to the shared memory, dotted arrows represent the writing of data to the shared memory, and dashed arrows represent the reading of data from the shared memory. Note that threads in each process that do not access the shared memory are not shown in the illustration.

For example, in FIG. 377, the master thread of the master process reserves multiple shared memories in SDRAM 2430. Here, the name of that one shared memory is "Master → Graphic", and this shared memory "Master → Graphic" means the storage area of data from the master process to the graphic process, and in fact, this shared memory is called "Master → Graphic". In the shared memory "master→graphics", data is written in the master thread of the master process, and data is read in the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process.

Note that in this embodiment, the thread of the sending (writing) process is configured to secure the storage area of the shared memory so that debugging and restarting can be performed on a process-by-process basis, but depending on the OS, Alternatively, the storage area may be secured by a thread of a process on the receiving side (reading side). Further, it is also possible to configure such that all storage areas are secured by any one process (thread thereof).

Similarly, the graphics thread of the graphics process secures the shared memory "Graphics → Master", and this shared memory "Graphics → Master" is used for data writing by the graphics thread of the graphics process, and the inter-process communication of the master process. Data is read in a thread.

In addition, the sound thread of the sound process secures a shared memory "sound → master", and data is written to this shared memory "sound → master" by the sound thread of the sound process, and the interprocess communication thread of the master process The data is loaded. Furthermore, the sound thread of the sound process secures the shared memory "sound → graphics", and this shared memory "sound → graphics" is written by the sound thread of the sound process, and the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process. The data is loaded.

Furthermore, the lamp thread of the lamp process secures the shared memory "Lamp → Master", data is written to this shared memory "Lamp → Master" by the lamp thread of the lamp process, and data is read from this shared memory by the inter-process communication thread of the master process.

As described above, in this embodiment, data reading (reception) from the shared memory in inter-process communication via the shared memory is configured to be performed entirely by the inter-process communication thread of each process (dash-dotted arrows). Data is also configured to be written to the shared memory by the main thread of each process (e.g., master thread, graphics thread, sound thread, lamp thread, etc.) (solid arrows and dotted arrows). Data can also be configured to be read (received) from the shared memory by the main thread of each process, and data can also be written (sent) to the shared memory by the inter-process communication thread of each process.

Furthermore, a shared memory is set up in which data is written by multiple processes regarding the sound process and the lamp process. For example, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→Sound", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→Sound" by the master thread, graphics thread, and lamp thread, and the sound process Data is read in the inter-communication thread. In addition, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→Lamp" by the master thread, graphics thread, and sound thread, and the process of the lamp process Data is read in the inter-communication thread.

Further, the master process secures a shared memory "ANY→Master" for debugging the game machine, and collects debugging data from the inter-process communication threads of all processes including the master process. In addition, in FIG. 377, regarding the shared memory "ANY→Master", the solid line represents the securing of the shared memory "ANY→Master" by the master thread and the writing of data, but data from other threads to the shared memory is The notation of the dotted line arrow representing writing and the notation of the dashed-dotted line arrow representing reading of data from the shared memory are omitted.

The inter-process communication thread of the master process can incorporate, for example, a TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) driver, and this incorporated communication protocol can transfer data (messages) written in the shared memory "ANY → Master" to an external computer for debugging connected to the slot machine 1. The external computer is connected to the sub-control unit 2100 of the slot machine 1 via a specified interface (for example, a LAN line or an IEEE 802.3-compliant GMAC interface), receives data from the shared memory "ANY → Master" via the above protocol, and can perform the necessary analysis on this data.

In addition to the inter-process communication thread of the master process, by incorporating TCP drivers etc. for the graphic process, sound process, lamp process, etc., the inter-process communication thread of each process can handle the communication using the communication protocol. This makes it possible to read and write shared memory.

This allows data to be sent to and received from a specified shared memory at the command of an external computer connected to the sub-control unit 2100, and the processing of each process to be controlled. This configuration enables effective debugging in a semi-real machine state. For example, by implementing the first process in the pachislot machine 1 so that each process executes it, and executing the second process at the command of an external computer, it is possible to easily debug the second process and organize the relationship between the first process and the second process. This configuration eliminates the need for the conventional task of grasping internal data using a dedicated measuring device, and as a result, debugging can be easily performed.

Also, in relation to Figure 376, a configuration has been described in which the OS starts a master process, and then the master process starts each process. However, the master process can then determine that each process has started normally, and then send data (messages) to the shared memory of each process.

For example, the master thread of the master process allocates shared memory (shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → master", etc.) into which data will be written by the processes to be started, and then starts each process. Activate it. Therefore, after securing the necessary shared memory, the main thread of each process sends messages to the master process using the interprocess communication thread (shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp"). → send the specified data to the master, etc.). Next, the master process's interprocess communication thread determines whether messages from each process can be received in the shared memory mentioned above. If the messages can be received, the process corresponding to that shared memory starts normally. It is determined that the process has been executed, and a message is sent to each process (data is sent to the shared memory ``Master→Graphic'', ``ANY→Sound'', ``ANY→Lamp'', etc.).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable part 2070 may also be provided, but the description of the associated processes and threads will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 378, the data transmission/reception method in the shared memory described in FIG. 377 will be described. FIG. 378(A) shows the form of data transmission/reception for the above-mentioned shared memory "ANY → Sound". That is, for the shared memory "ANY → Sound", as described above, data is written in the master thread of the master process, the graphics thread of the graphics process, and the lamp thread of the lamp process, and data is read in the inter-process communication thread of the sound process. If the writing of data in the above-mentioned three threads is considered as sending a message, and the reading of data in the inter-process communication thread of the sound process is considered as receiving a message, then the shared memory "ANY → Sound" functions as a so-called "message queue".

Figure 378(B) shows a situation where messages are sent and received from processes (in FIFO format) in the shared memory "ANY → Sound" with a message queue depth = N (storage area for N messages). As shown in the upper part of Figure 378(B), when messages "0", "1", and "2" are sent by "Send 0", "Send 1", and "Send 2" from different processes (master process, graphic process, lamp process), respectively, these messages are added to the message queue in the order they were sent (there are three messages), with the first (e.g., the message specified by the first address) being message "0" and the last (e.g., the message specified by the last address) being message "2". In the upper part of Figure 378(B), the hatched areas of the message queue indicate that messages are stored.

After that, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 378(B), one process (sound process) receives the first message "0" added, and as a result, the first message becomes message "1" and the message is stored. The hatched areas showing that messages are "1" and "2" are the messages "1" and "2." At this time, the start address is changed, and the message "1" becomes the start and the message "2" becomes the end.

Next, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 378(B), one process (sound process) receives messages "1" and "2" in order, and as a result, the message queue becomes empty and the first address and The terminal address is cleared (the hatched area indicating that the message is stored disappears). In FIG. 378, the transmission/reception method related to the shared memory "ANY→Sound" has been described, but the same applies to other shared memories.

Further, when the same shared memory (message queue) is simultaneously accessed from the inter-process communication threads of multiple processes, exclusive control is performed so that writing or reading of any one of them is given priority. Such exclusive control prevents different messages from being added to the same area of the message queue at the same time.

However, since the inter-thread communication area is allocated as memory for use by the sound process, it cannot be accessed from other processes (master process, graphic process, and lamp process) and is allocated in memory managed by the sound process.

[11-2-1. Sound process]
Next, the basic flow of the sound process will be described with reference to Figures 379 to 383.

Figure 379 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow for each thread of the sound process. Here, single requests and sequence requests containing multiple single requests are executed by event codes and sound codes. Single requests are, for example, requests for a new sound, and requests to mute or silence a sound that is being played.

As shown in FIG. 379, timing information is provided at regular intervals to the inter-process communication thread and sound thread of the sound process from the fixed-period thread. In addition, when event codes, sound codes, etc. are written to the shared memory "ANY->Sound" from other main threads (for example, the main threads of the master process, graphic process, and lamp process), the data is read by the inter-process communication thread and provided to the sound thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the shared memory "ANY->Sound" stores event codes, sound codes, as well as data related to sound requests, such as volume settings, sound mute requests, and sound pause requests.

When the sound thread receives an event code, sound code, etc. from the inter-process communication thread, it provides a request based on that data, etc., and related sound data to the library API. The library API is implemented in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of, for example, firmware or a driver, and the request and sound data control the audio output from the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the sound thread in response to receiving requests and sound data. When the sound thread sends the playback information etc. received from the library API to the shared memory "sound → master" or "sound → graphics", the interprocess communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "sound → master". The inter-process communication thread of the graphics process reads the playback information, etc. by accessing the shared memory "sound→graphics".

The shared memory "sound → master" stores, for example, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), survival information (information indicating that a thread is operating normally) for each thread of the sound process, request information for requested requests, and the like.

The shared memory "sound -> graphics" also stores, for example, as shown in FIG. 380 (C), playback information including the type of sound being played, sequence pattern, and elapsed playback time, as well as markers, sound-linked lamps that are linked to sounds, and sound information (including requests and sound information being played).

[11-2-1a. Sound threads in sound processing]
Fig. 381 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the sound thread shown in Fig. 379. When the sound thread is started, it secures the shared memory "sound → master" and "sound → graphic" (step S3001). Next, in step S3002, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area can take various forms, such as being secured individually as memory between each thread (for example, between the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, or between the sound thread and the fixed cycle thread), or being secured as a common memory between all threads.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via an inter-thread communication area, and does not use the conventional data sharing method of updating a variable (such as a flag) declared as a global variable in one process and then referencing that global variable in another process. The inter-thread communication area is a message queue in the same format as the shared memory described in FIG. 378, and is secured in, for example, SDRAM 2430.

Next, in step S3003, the inter-thread communication area is referenced to obtain a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3004, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3004), the request is analyzed in step S3005.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3006). If the request is a new request (YES in step S3006), the new request is registered in step S3007, and then the process advances to step S3014. If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3006), the request is registered as a request in progress in step S3008.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3004), in step S3009, it is determined whether there is timing information (SID = 1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3009), the process proceeds to step S3014. If there is timing information (YES in step S3009), in step S3010, playback information is obtained from the library API, and then in step S3011, the obtained playback information is set in the shared memory "Sound → Graphics".

Next, in step S3012, thread liveness information for each thread (inter-process communication thread liveness information, periodic thread liveness information) is obtained from the inter-thread communication area of the sound process, and in step S3013, the obtained liveness information and the sound thread liveness information indicating that the thread itself (sound thread) is alive are set in the shared memory "sound → master", and then the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3014), sequence update processing is performed in step S3015. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3014), the process advances to step S3016.

In step S3016, the currently requested request is processed, and in step S3017, the driver (API) is accessed. The currently requested request is processed, for example, for muting, silencing, fade-in/out, ducking, volume change, a currently requested (executing) request related to a marker, obtaining a sound to be played when a new sound is requested, and registering the obtained sound. Note that ducking is an editing method that reduces the volume of a specific sound source in a certain situation to make other sounds easier to hear or stand out. For example, an editing method that reduces the volume of background music the moment a narration is played, or, when playing background music, an editing method that reduces the volume of instruments other than the guitar to make the guitar sound stand out.

Driver access is a process that reflects the processing results of the ongoing request in the driver and actually sends sound data from the driver to the digital amplifier. This controls the audio output, etc., of the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier.

Next, the process waits for the sound thread update timing to arrive (step S3018), and then returns to step S3003 to repeat the subsequent processing. Note that sound control using the sound thread will be explained in detail later.

[11-2-1b. Inter-process communication thread for sound processes]
Fig. 382 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the inter-process communication thread shown in Fig. 379. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY->sound", and if a request exists in the shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and transmits the request to the sound thread by inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains a request from the shared memory "ANY→sound" (step S3031). Next, in step S3032, it is determined whether there is a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.). If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3032), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3033, and the process advances to step S3034. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380, event codes, sound codes, requests, etc. are written to the shared memory "ANY→Sound" from the inter-process communication threads of the master process, graphic process, and lamp process. It will be done. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3032), the process proceeds to step S3034 without doing anything.

In step S3034, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3035, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (SID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3031 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-1c. Periodic thread of sound process]
FIG. 383 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. 379. A periodic thread operates at a constant cycle, generates timing information for the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, and notifies this to the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, respectively, using inter-thread communication. do.

First, in step S3051, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation processing is processing for generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different sound ID (SID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a sound thread, SID=1 is timing information generated every 10 msec. In addition, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, SID=2 is timing information generated every 20 sec.

Next, in step S3052, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3053, periodic thread alive information indicating that the thread itself (the periodic thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3054, the process waits for a certain period (10 msec), and then returns to step S3051 to repeat the subsequent processes.

In this embodiment, the timing information is generated every 10 msec, but this is not limited to this and the timing information may be generated at any cycle between 2 msec and 20 msec.

[11-2-2. lamp process]
Next, the basic flow of the lamp process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 384 to 388.

FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the lamp process. Here, a single request or a sequence request including a plurality of single requests is executed using an event code, pattern request, sequence request, or the like. An independent request is, for example, a request for (lighting up) a new lamp, a request for turning off a lamp that is currently on, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 384, the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process and the lamp thread are provided with timing information from the periodic thread at regular intervals. Also, if sequence request 1, etc. is written to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" from another main thread (for example, each main thread of the master process, graphic process, lamp process), the sequence request 1, etc. will be transferred between processes. Read by the communication thread and provided to the lamp thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385(A), the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" stores data related to lamp requests, such as event codes, pattern requests, sequence requests, table number requests, as well as port designation, group designation, lamp clear, lamp pause, and lamp brightness setting.

When the lamp thread receives an event code or the like from the inter-process communication thread, it provides the library API with a lamp-related request and related lamp data based on the event code or the like. The library API is implemented in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of, for example, firmware or a driver, and the request and lamp data control the lighting of the performance LED group 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the lamp thread in response to the request and reception of the lamp data. When the lamp thread sends the playback information etc. received from the library API to the shared memory "lamp → master", the inter-process communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "lamp → master" and reads the playback information etc. . Note that in this embodiment, the shared memory "lamp → graphics" is not provided because the lamp reproduction information is not required in the graphic process, but if necessary, the shared memory "lamp → graphics" is provided and the lamp thread sends The data may be read by the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385 (B), the shared memory "Lamp → Master" stores alive information (information indicating that a thread is operating normally) for each thread of the lamp process, playback information including the lamp pattern being played and the elapsed playback time, and also stores request information for requested requests.

[11-2-2a. Lamp thread of lamp process]
FIG. 386 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the lamp thread shown in FIG. 384. The lamp thread secures the shared memory "lamp→master" at startup (step S3071). Next, in step S3072, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area may be reserved individually as memory between each thread (for example, between a ramp thread and an inter-process communication thread, between a ramp thread and a periodic thread), or it may be a common memory between all threads. There are various forms such as being reserved as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the lamp process is similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via an inter-thread communication area, and conventional data sharing methods such as updating a variable (such as a flag) declared as a global variable in one process and then referencing that global variable in another process are not used.

Next, in step S3073, the inter-thread communication area is referenced to obtain a request (event code, sequence request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3074, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3074), the request is analyzed in step S3075.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3076). If the request is a new request (YES in step S3076), the new request is registered in step S3077, and then the process advances to step S3083. If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3076), the request is registered as a request in progress in step S3078.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3074), in step S3079, it is determined whether there is timing information (LID = 1) from the fixed-cycle thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3079), proceed to step S3083. If there is timing information (YES in step S3079), in step S3080, playback information etc. is obtained from the library API, and then in step S3081, thread live information of each thread is obtained from the inter-thread communication area of the lamp process, and in step S3082, the playback information etc. obtained in step S3080, the live information obtained in step S3081 (inter-process communication thread live information, fixed-cycle thread live information), and the lamp thread live information indicating that the lamp thread itself (the lamp thread) is alive are set in the shared memory "lamp → master", and then proceed to step S3083.

In step S3083, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3083), sequence update processing is performed in step S3084. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3083), the process advances to step S3085.

In step S3085, the on-demand request is processed, and in step S3086, driver (API) access is performed. On-demand request processing includes, for example, obtaining a lamp to be played when a request such as turning off the light, fading in/out, changing brightness, or a new lamp is made, and registering the obtained lamp. Driver access is a process in which the result of the on-demand request processing is reflected in the driver, and lamp data is actually sent from the driver to the LED driver 2250. This allows the group of performance LEDs 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250 to be controlled, such as for lighting.

Next, the process waits for the timing to update the lamp thread (step S3087), and then returns to step S3073 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-2b. Inter-process communication thread of lamp process]
Fig. 387 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the inter-process communication thread shown in Fig. 384. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY->Lamp", and if a request such as an event code exists in the shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and transmits the request to the lamp thread by inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains a request from the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" (step S3101). Next, in step S3102, it is determined whether there is a request. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3102), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3102, and the process advances to step S3103. Note that in this embodiment, requests are written to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" from each interprocess communication thread of the master process, graphic process, and sound process, as shown in FIG. 377. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3102), the process proceeds to step S3104 without doing anything.

In step S3104, inter-process communication thread alive information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread alive information is set even if there is no request in the shared memory. Then, in step S3105, the process waits for timing information (LID = 2) from the fixed-period thread, and then the process returns to step S3101 and repeats the subsequent processes.

[11-2-2c. Periodic thread of lamp process]
Fig. 388 shows a flowchart illustrating the process flow of the fixed-cycle thread shown in Fig. 384. The fixed-cycle thread operates at a fixed cycle, generates timing information for the lamp thread and the inter-process communication thread, and notifies the lamp thread and the inter-process communication thread of this information using inter-thread communication.

First, in step S3121, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (LID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a lamp thread, LID is 1, and is timing information that is generated every 2 msec period. Further, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, LID=2, and the timing information is generated every 20 seconds.

Next, in step S3122, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3123, the periodic thread survival indicating that the periodic thread itself (periodic thread) is alive. The information is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3124, the process waits for a certain period of time (2 msec), and then returns to step S3051 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3. Graphics Process]
Next, the basic flow of a graphics process will be described with reference to Figures 389 to 395.

Figure 389 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow for each thread of the graphics process. Here, an example is shown in which a request is made. Note that in this embodiment, it can also be configured to have a movable role 2070, and in that case, the role thread implemented and the associated data flow are shown by dotted lines.

As shown in FIG. 389, the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process and the graphics thread are provided with timing information at regular intervals from the regular cycle thread. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the movable accessory 2070, timing information is provided to the accessory thread at a constant period from a fixed periodic thread.

Also, if a request is written to the shared memory "Master → Graphics" or "Sound → Graphics" from another main thread (for example, the main threads of the master process or sound process), the request will be processed by the interprocess communication thread. Loaded and provided to the graphics thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 390(A), the shared memory "master graphic" stores the game status, key input information, error screen display information, various information related to screen display, projector information, etc., each of which can function as a "request" to the graphic process. The game status includes, for example, the game status, RT state, internal lottery winning role, etc. Furthermore, the key input information includes, for example, the pushing of a specific effect button, the operation of a chance button, and information related to the coordinates and operation type of the touch panel. Furthermore, the error screen display information can include an error code for displaying an error screen, and the projector information can include focus information, center coordinate position, etc.

In this embodiment, a projector is used as the main display device 2510, so projector information is stored in the shared memory. However, if a liquid crystal display device similar to the sub-display device 2520 is used as the main display device 2510, main liquid crystal information is stored instead of projector information. The main liquid crystal information is information according to the specs and specifications of the implemented liquid crystal display device.

As described with reference to FIG. 380(C), the shared memory "sound → graphics" stores playback information including the type of sound being played, sequence pattern, and elapsed playback time, as well as markers, sound linkage lamps that link with sounds, sound information (including requests and sound information being played), and the like, each of which can function as a "request" to the graphics process.

When the graphics thread receives a request from the inter-process communication thread, it provides 2D/3D request data to the library API based on the request. The library API is implemented in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and controls the display of images on the main display device 2510 and sub display device 2520 of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment through processing by the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 (under the control of the CPU 2390) based on the 2D/3D request data.

The library API sends various information to the graphics thread in response to receiving 2D/3D request data. When the graphics thread sends various information received from the library API to the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "ANY → Sound", "ANY → Lamp", the inter-process communication thread of the master process sends the various information received from the library API to the shared memory "Graphics → Master". ” and read the various information, the inter-process communication thread of the sound process accesses the shared memory “ANY→Sound” and reads the various information, and the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process reads the various information from the shared memory “ANY →Lamp” and read the various information.

The shared memory "graphics → master" stores, for example, as shown in FIG. 390 (B), survival information (information indicating that a thread is operating normally) for each thread of the graphics process, projector information, prop information, error information, video information, etc.

As explained with reference to FIG. 380(A), the shared memory "ANY→Sound" contains event codes, sound codes, and information related to sound requests such as volume settings, sound mute requests, and sound pause requests. Data etc. are stored in the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", as described with reference to FIG. 385(A), in addition to event codes, pattern requests, sequence requests, table number requests, port designation, Data related to lamp requests such as group designation, lamp clear, lamp pause, and lamp brightness settings are stored.

In addition, when the slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a movable reel 2070, when the reel thread receives a reel request from the master process (via the inter-process communication thread of the graphic process and the graphic thread), it provides request data to the library API based on the reel request. Note that in this embodiment, the reel thread does not use sequence requests because it does not perform complex operations regarding the movable reel 2070, but it is also possible to generate a sequence request within the graphic thread by combining requests to the reels based on the reel request from the master process.

The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and allows the movable accessory connected to the motor driver IC etc. to respond to the request based on request data from the accessory thread. It is controlled so that it is driven. Further, the accessory thread transmits the accessory information received from the library API to the graphics thread, and the graphics thread writes the received accessory information to the shared memory "Graphic→Master".

[11-2-3a. Graphics thread of the graphics process]
Fig. 391 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the graphics thread shown in Fig. 389. When the graphics thread is started, it secures a shared memory "graphic->master" (step S3141). Next, in step S3142, it secures an inter-thread communication area. This inter-thread communication area can take various forms, such as being secured individually as memory between each thread (for example, between the graphics thread and the inter-process communication thread, or between the graphics thread and the periodic thread), or being secured as a common memory between all threads.

The inter-thread communication area of the graphics process is also similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via an inter-thread communication area, and conventional data sharing methods such as updating a variable (such as a flag) declared as a global variable in one process and then referencing that global variable in another process are not used.

Next, in step S3143, the inter-thread communication area is referenced as described above to obtain a request from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3144, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3144), the request is analyzed in step S3145.

The analysis of the request is performed, for example, based on the data sent from the master process (that is, based on the data stored in the shared memory "master → graphics"), and the command from the main control board 2010 is registered in the request. Therefore, depending on the type of command, when executing a new performance (for example, a start command), a new performance is determined based on information such as the gaming state and internal winning combination that are also registered in the request ( The start command triggers a lottery of performances, the display (winning) command triggers switching to another production), prepares to execute the newly determined production, and updates the currently running production depending on the type of command ( For example, preparations are made to update the production trigger in response to the stop command.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3146). If it is a new request (YES in step S3146), a new performance object is generated in step S3147, and then the process proceeds to step S3154. Here, when a new performance is decided, performance data that stores the performance sequence of the decided performance, registration information for the image data to be used (video (2D/3D)/still image (2D/3D)), drawing size of the image data to be used, various effects (effects, etc.), trigger information, etc., is selected, and a performance object is generated from the selected performance data.

If it is not a new request (NO in step S3146), in step S3148, the request is registered to the currently executing performance object.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3144), in step S3149, it is determined whether there is timing information (GID = 1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3149), the process proceeds to step S3154. If there is timing information (YES in step S3149), in step S3150, various information is obtained from the library API, and then in step S3151, the various obtained information is set in the shared memory "graphic → master".

Next, in step S3152, with reference to the inter-thread communication area, thread survival information of each thread (inter-process communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information, accessory thread survival information ) is acquired, and in step S3153, the acquired survival information and the graphics thread survival information indicating that the graphics thread itself (graphics thread) is alive are set in the shared memory "Graphic → Master", and then in step S3154. move on.

In step S3154, an update process is performed for the currently running performance object. This process includes updating for each frame and updating the performance trigger in response to a command from the main control board 2010, and as a result, the currently running performance object is updated on a frame-by-frame basis.

Next, in step S3155, 2D/3D CG processing is performed. This process performs effect instructions, sprite settings, brightness/transparency settings, etc. for 2D images (including movies), and polygon instructions, texture selection, etc. for 3D images (including movies).

Thereafter, in step S3156, file cache processing is performed. File cache processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 392. Next, in step S3157, driver (API) access (drawing processing, data construction processing) is performed. This process reflects the results of the 2D/3D CG process in step S3155 on the driver to generate a 3D image or 2D image related to the effect, and is a process of the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410. Note that although OpenGL is used here as a driver (API) for accessing the GPU (VPU), other drivers may also be used.

Next, it waits for the update timing of the graphics thread to arrive (step S3158), and then returns to step S3143 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3b. File cache processing]
FIG. 392 shows a flowchart showing in more detail the flow of the file cache processing shown in FIG. 391.

Here, the CPU 2390 that controls the graphics thread in FIG. 391 and the file cache process in FIG. 392 corresponds to the arithmetic processing processor, and the GPU 2400 that performs driver (API) access (drawing processing, data construction processing) in step S3157 in FIG. 391. The VPU 2410 corresponds to an image processing processor, and the sub-control unit 2100 corresponds to an effect control section having the above-mentioned arithmetic processing processor and image processing processor. Further, the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520, which are displayed by the production control section, correspond to the display section.

First, in step S3171, for example, the sub ROM 2210 is referenced to determine whether or not a read list exists. If it is determined that a read list exists (YES in step S3171), in step S3172, prefetch information is generated from the read list. The prefetch information stores data identification information (for example, data names and addresses) arranged in the order of the data to be read.

Next, in step S3173, for example, a file cache memory (for example, FIFO format memory) is secured in the SDRAM 2430, and in step S3174, a request is made to generate a file cache thread.

In step S3174, when generation of a file cache thread is requested, the file cache thread is activated as a read-only thread. This file cache thread is executed as a thread of the graphic process by any CPU core that is not operating in the CPU 2390, and after performing file cache processing, the process ends.

In the file cache thread, based on the above prefetch information, data to be used in driver access (drawing processing, etc.) performed by GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 is pre-read. For example, data related to drawing processing stored in sub ROM 2210 is pre-read into the file cache memory of SDRAM 2430 in a predetermined order based on the order of data identification information stored in the prefetch information, and is finally transferred to GPU 2400 or VPU 2410.

The read list may be stored and managed as part of the related data transferred to the GPU 2400, etc., or may be managed as data separate from the related data.

If it is determined that there is no read list (NO in step S3171), it is determined in step S3175 whether there is a cancellation request. If it is determined that there is a cancellation request (YES in step S3175), the prefetch information is discarded in step S3176, and further, the discard of the file cache thread is requested in step S3177, and then the file cache processing is ended. If it is determined that there is no cancellation request (NO in step S3175), the file cache processing is ended without doing anything.

When reserving memory for the file cache, if the system and applications use VRAM 2420, all or part of the unused portion of VRAM 2420 can be used for the file cache memory.

The prefetch information also specifies, for example, the order (processing order) in which data required for the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 to perform drawing processing of one scene is provided by a specific CPU core (a CPU core different from the file cache thread), and the file cache thread reads the data into the file cache memory in the order specified in the prefetch information, resulting in the data being arranged in the file cache memory in the order specified in the prefetch information.

When rendering processing is performed by GPU 2400 or VPU 2410, a specific CPU core sequentially retrieves data read by the file cache thread in the order in which it was read, transfers it to GPU 2400 or VPU 2410, and writes the processing results to VRAM 2420. Also, each time data is read from the file cache memory by a specific CPU core, the data is erased from the file cache memory. Therefore, while a specific CPU core is transferring necessary data for rendering processing by GPU 2400 or VPU 2410, another CPU core (file cache thread) can sequentially read (i.e., read ahead) data to be used for the next scene in parallel (in the background), which effectively eliminates (or significantly reduces) the time required to read the data.

Note that the content and order of use of the data used in scenes used for general production, etc. are known in advance, and if this content is stored in the prefetch information, the file cache thread can effectively use the data. Read ahead is realized. For example, in a 3D image, data used for modeling, coordinate transformation, shading, texture mapping, etc. of a target object (polygon object) and the order in which these data are used are known in advance.

If the prefetch information is unknown, no prefetching is performed in the file cache thread, and normal reading is performed (necessary data is read directly from sub-ROM 2210, etc., without using the file cache memory). Also, if there is no data in the file cache memory, a specific CPU core performs normal reading (reading from sub-ROM 2210, etc.).

It is also possible to cache data related to image processing using the functions of the OS (operating system), but the normal cache is cache memory of the CPU (for example, the L1 cache is 64 KB for each CPU core, All CPU cores use L2 cache (512KB), and the storage capacity is not large, so the memory capacity quickly runs out and normal read processing is often performed, making it difficult to obtain the expected performance. is difficult. In contrast, in the file cache processing of the present application described above, a relatively large capacity of file cache memory is secured, and related data is placed in the file cache memory (by a read-only thread) with consideration to the processing order. By storing data, processing efficiency of data reading is improved, and multiple data can be read at high speed.

[11-2-3c. Inter-process communication thread for graphic processes]
Fig. 393 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the inter-process communication thread shown in Fig. 389. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memories "master → graphics" and "sound → graphics", and if predetermined data (e.g., registered data) exists in the shared memory, it retrieves the data from the shared memory and transmits the data as a request to the graphics thread by inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains registration data from the shared memory "master → graphic" and "sound → graphic" (step S3191). Next, in step S3192, it is determined whether or not there is registration data. If it is determined that there is registration data (YES in step S3192), in step S3193, the registration data is set as a request in the inter-thread communication area, and the process proceeds to step S3194. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 377, 390 (A), and 380 (C), registration data such as game status (for example, stored in the shared memory "master → graphic") is written from each inter-process communication thread of the master process and sound process to the shared memory "master → graphic" and "sound → graphic". If it is determined that there is no registration data (NO in step S3192), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S3194.

In step S3194, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no registered data in the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3195, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (GID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3191 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3d. Periodic thread for graphics process]
Fig. 394 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the fixed-period thread shown in Fig. 389. The fixed-period thread operates at a fixed cycle, generates timing information for the graphic thread, the accessory thread, and the inter-process communication thread, and notifies the graphic thread, the accessory thread, and the inter-process communication thread of this information using inter-thread communication.

First, in step S3211, a timing information generation process is executed. This timing information generation process generates timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information with a different graphic ID (GID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a graphic thread, GID=1 is timing information generated every 16.5 msec (timing synchronized with the VSYNC signal=60 fps). In addition, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, GID=2 is timing information generated every 20 sec. In addition, in the case of timing information corresponding to a role-playing object thread, GID=3 is timing information generated every 1 sec.

Next, in step S3212, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3213, periodic thread alive information indicating that the thread itself (the periodic thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3214, the process waits for a certain period (0.5 msec), and then returns to step S3211 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-3e. Graphic process role thread]
FIG. 395 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the accessory thread for controlling the movable accessory thread 2070 shown in FIG. 389.

First, in step S3231, the reel thread refers to the inter-thread communication area to obtain a request from the graphics thread. Next, in step S3232, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3232), the request is analyzed in step S3233.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3234). If it is a new request (YES in step S3234), the new request is registered in step S3235, and the process then proceeds to step S3237. If it is not a new request (NO in step S3234), the request is registered as an outstanding request in step S3236.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3232), in step S3237, it is determined whether there is timing information (GID = 3) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3237), the process proceeds to step S3241. If there is timing information (YES in step S3237), in step S3238, reel information is acquired from the library API, and then in step S3239, the acquired reel information is sent to the graphics thread via the inter-thread communication area, and the graphics thread sets this reel information in the shared memory "graphics → master".

Next, in step S3240, the reel thread alive information indicating that the reel thread itself (the reel thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This reel thread alive information is set even if there is no request in the shared memory. Then, proceed to step S3241.

In step S3241, the request being requested is processed. This process is performed, for example, to acquire a drive pattern to be driven when a new accessory is requested to be driven, such as stop, forward rotation/reverse rotation, rotation speed change (acceleration/deceleration), vibration, etc., and the acquired drive pattern. Perform registration, etc.

Next, in step S3242, the driver (API) is accessed. This process reflects the results of the processing of the ongoing request (request data) in the driver. In addition, the driver (API) transmits reel drive data based on the request data to a motor driver IC or the like (e.g., a motor or solenoid for driving the reel), and controls the movable reel 2070 to drive.

Next, the process waits for the timing to update the accessory thread (step S3243), and then returns to step S3231 to repeat the subsequent processing.

Note that if the movable accessory 2070 is not provided, it is desirable that the accessory thread be made inactive or deleted from the graphic process.

[11-2-4. Master process]
Next, the basic flow of the master process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 396 to 401.

FIG. 396 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the master process. As shown in FIG. 396, each thread of the master process is provided with timing information at regular intervals from a regular cycle thread. In addition, survival information, etc. is written from other main threads (for example, the main threads of the graphics process, sound process, and lamp process) to the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master". and its survival information etc. are read by the interprocess communication thread and provided to the master thread.

The master thread receives the main board command from the main board thread, and in response to this main board command, sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics", and also receives inter-device commands from the peripheral thread, and sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics". Sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics" in response to an inter-device command. Thereafter, the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process accesses the shared memory "master→graphics" and reads the request.

The data stored in the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp → Master", and "Master → Graphics" have already been explained, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Also, the shared memory "ANY → Master" is reserved for debugging the gaming machine, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

[11-2-4a. Master thread of master process]
Fig. 397 shows a flow chart showing the process flow of the master thread shown in Fig. 396. When the master thread is started, it secures the shared memory "master → graphic", "ANY → sound", and "ANY → lamp" (step S3261). Next, in step S3262, it secures an inter-thread communication area. This inter-thread communication area can take various forms, such as being secured individually as memory between each thread (for example, between the master thread and the inter-process communication thread, or between the master thread and the fixed-cycle thread), or being secured as a common memory between all threads.

The inter-thread communication area of the master process is also similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

Next, in step S3263, initialization processing is performed. This initialization processing checks the backup memory (e.g., FRAM (registered trademark) 2220) and initializes communication circuits for peripheral devices. Then, in step S3264, the inter-thread communication area as described above is referenced to obtain a request from the inter-process communication thread, and in step S3265, it is determined whether the obtained request is an analysis result. If it is determined that the request is an analysis result (YES in step S3265), processing by command is performed in step S3266, and then the process proceeds to step S3267.

The command-specific processing is processing performed for each command ID of the analysis result (main board command from the main control board 2010). For example, if it is a start command, stop command, winning (display or 3OFF (detection of the player's third stop operation)) command, the command ID, internal winning combination, gaming status, RT status, advantageous section information etc. is sent to the graphics process (master → graphics), and if it is a bet (input) command, the consistency with the information from the peripheral device (CMOS selector) thread is determined, and initialization (setting change / setting If it is a confirmation) command, it executes processing for the maintenance (hole) menu and requests a maintenance menu request to the graphic process (master→graphic). Further, if it is an error command, it performs error processing and requests the graphic process to display an error screen, and if it is a no-operation (periodic) command, it performs processing according to the no-operation command.

In this embodiment, when a start command is received, the presentation is determined (drawn) in the graphics process, but it can also be configured so that the presentation is determined in the master thread, or in a sub-control main process equivalent to the master thread (sub-side control process executed on the sub-control board 2300), etc.

If it is determined that the request is not an analysis result (NO in step S3265), the process advances to step S3267. In step S3267, it is determined whether the request is peripheral device information (such as an inter-device command from a peripheral device). If it is determined that the request is peripheral device information (YES in step S3267), processing for each peripheral device is performed in step S3268, and then the process advances to step S3269.

Peripheral device processing includes the selector 2030 (e.g. CMOS selector), door monitoring unit 2020 (e.g. 24h door monitoring unit), sub display device 2520 (e.g. touch panel liquid crystal display device), main Processing is performed according to information from the display device 2510 (for example, a projector). For example, if it is a CMOS selector, it will process the number of medals inserted according to the number of medals inserted, or display an error if it is determined that an incorrect medal has been inserted based on the medal color/engraving judgment results, so the graphic process Make a request. In addition, in the case of a touch panel display device, the type of touch panel operation (tap, flick, zoom, etc.) and the coordinate information of the operation are transmitted (requested) to the graphic process.

If it is determined that the request is not peripheral device information (NO in step S3267), the process proceeds to step S3269. In step S3269, it is determined whether the request is survival information. If it is determined that the request is survival information (YES in step S3269), a survival confirmation process is performed in step S3270, and then the process proceeds to step S3271.

The survival confirmation process is a process that checks the survival information stored in the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master", as well as the survival information in the inter-thread communication area of the master process, to determine whether each thread of each process is operating normally.

In step S3271, the result of the survival confirmation process in step S3270 is referred to to determine whether all threads of each process are operating normally. If it is determined that all threads are operating normally (YES in step S3271), in step S3272, a WDT (watchdog timer: not shown) provided in the multi-module of the sub control board 2300 is cleared, The process advances to step S3274.

On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one thread is not operating normally (NO in step S3271), process and thread management processing is performed in step S3273, and then the process advances to step S3274. The process and thread management processing controls, for example, to restart a process that has an abnormal thread, or to display information regarding a thread that is not operating normally on the main display device 2510 or the like.

Note that the process & thread management process may restart (reboot) the sub control board 2300 using the WDT function, and may also reboot the sub control board 2300 using the WDT function. , instructs the target thread to restart. Such a restart instruction is performed, for example, by sending a message to the shared memory to cause the restart to be read by the process (interprocess communication thread of the process) that has the abnormal thread. .

In step S3274, it is determined whether a power interruption interrupt has occurred. If it is determined that a power interruption interrupt has occurred (YES in step S3274), a power interruption process is performed in step S3275, and the process then proceeds to step S3276. On the other hand, if a power interruption interrupt has not occurred (NO in step S3274), the process proceeds to step S3276 without doing anything.

The power cutoff process stores information about the currently running presentation (e.g., game status, presentation status, video and still images being displayed, the currently running lamp illumination pattern, lamp sequence information, sound request information being played, etc.) in the FRAM (registered trademark) 2220, making it possible to resume the presentation that was running before the power cut interruption occurred.

In step S3276, the process waits for timing information (MID=1) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3264 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-4b. Master process interprocess communication thread]
FIG. 398 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. 396. The interprocess communication thread monitors the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master", and if a request exists in that shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and processes the request. , sent to the master thread through inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains a request from the shared memory "Graphic → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master" (step S3291). Next, in step S3292, it is determined whether or not a request has been made. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3292), in step S3293, the request is set in the inter-thread communication area, and the process proceeds to step S3294. In this embodiment, requests are written from the inter-process communication threads of the graphic process, sound process, and lamp process to the shared memories "Graphic → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master" as shown in Figures 377, 390 (B), 380 (B), and 385 (B). If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3292), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S3294.

In step S3294, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3295, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (MID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3291 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4c. Periodic threads of the master process]
Fig. 399 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the fixed-period thread shown in Fig. 396. The fixed-period thread operates at a fixed cycle, generates timing information for the master thread, inter-process communication thread, main board thread, and peripheral device thread, and notifies the master thread, inter-process communication thread, main board thread, and peripheral device thread, respectively, using inter-thread communication.

First, in step S3311, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (MID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a master thread, MID is 1, and is timing information that occurs every 4 msec. Furthermore, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, MID=2, which is timing information that occurs every 20 seconds. Further, in the case of timing information according to the main board thread, MID = 3, which is timing information that occurs every 4 seconds, and in the case of timing information according to a peripheral device thread, MID = 4, which is timing information that occurs every 10 seconds. This is timing information that occurs every cycle.

Next, in step S3312, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3313, periodic thread alive information indicating that the thread itself (the periodic thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3314, the process waits for a certain period (1 msec), and then returns to step S3311 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-4d. Main board thread of master process]
Fig. 400 shows a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the main board thread shown in Fig. 396. The main board thread receives commands sent by the main control board 2010 and performs processing corresponding to the commands. The commands are stored in the receive buffer by the receive interrupt processing that occurs in 1-byte units using the UART I/F 2330 (see Fig. 375), and when the number of received commands reaches a specified number (e.g., 8 bytes), they are set (registered) in a buffer that can be acquired by the main board thread.

First, in step S3331, the above buffer is referenced to obtain a command. In step S3332, it is determined whether there is a received command, and if it is determined that there is a received command (YES in step S3332), command analysis is performed in step S3333. This command analysis checks the command and saves the command ID depending on the type of command obtained, and also saves the command parameters such as the gaming state, internal winning combination, RT state, etc. stored in the command in a predetermined area. Store in.

In the present embodiment, for example, when a start command is received, the graphics process determines the effect (lottery), but the main board thread or the sub-control main processing corresponding to the main board thread (executed by the sub-control board 2300) It is also possible to configure the performance to be determined by sub-side control processing) or the like.

Next, in step S3334, the analysis result from the command analysis in step S3333 is set in the inter-thread communication area, and further, in step S3335, main board thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (main board thread) is alive is set. , is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then the process advances to step S3336.

If it is determined in step S3332 that there is no received command (NO in step S3332), the process advances to step S3336. In step S3336, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (MID=3) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3331 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4e. Peripheral thread of master process]
FIG. 401 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the peripheral device thread shown in FIG. 396. The peripheral device thread includes information for the selector 2030 (e.g., CMOS selector), door monitoring unit 2020 (e.g., 24h door monitoring unit), sub display device 2520 (e.g., touch panel display device), and main display device 2510 (e.g., projector). Perform processing. All of these peripheral devices are capable of bidirectional communication using serial communication (UART).

As described above, in order to perform processing on peripheral devices, the CMOS selector processing in step S3351, the 24h door management unit processing in step S3352, the touch panel processing in step S3353, and the projector processing in step S3354 create a link between the master thread and the peripheral devices. Controls the sending and receiving of commands between devices.

The touch panel processing is processing based on information regarding the coordinates and operation type of the touch panel provided on the sub display device 2520, and the projector processing is processing for setting focus, white balance, etc. on the main display device 2510 (for example, a projector). This is a process that performs

Thereafter, in step S3355, peripheral device thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (peripheral device thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and in step S3356, timing information (MID=4) from the periodic thread is set. It waits for the arrival, and then returns to step S3351 and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-3. Image processing]
Next, image processing using a graphic process (graphic event) executed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 to 404. Note that although the image processing described here can be realized with a multi-process and multi-thread configuration according to this embodiment, such a configuration is not essential. This can be realized in a configuration having at least one CPU and one GPU (or GPU and VPU).

[11-3-1. Normal decoding process]
FIG. 402A shows time-series processing of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal operation. Note that here, the CPU 2390 that performs sub-control processing corresponds to an arithmetic processing processor, the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 that perform graphic control processing correspond to an image processing processor, and the sub-control unit 2100 corresponds to the above-mentioned arithmetic processing processor. and an image processing processor. The main display device 2510 and sub-display device 2520, which are objects of display control and are displayed by the production control section, correspond to a display section, and this display section can be expressed as a concept including a VRAM 2420 (see the figure below). 402(B) and FIG. 402(C)).

The performance control section generates display data to be output to the display section by decoding the still image data and video data. For example, in the case of MPEG-based codecs, compression is performed based on interframe prediction, and for video data in these formats, key frames (for example, I frames) that can reproduce one frame of display data with only that data are used. Then, decoding processing is performed using a difference frame (for example, a P frame or a B frame) that can reproduce one frame of display data by referring to a key frame or the like.

The normal playback frame rate is 60 fps, so the sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs image control processing at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Here, 16.5 msec is the time to display one frame, so at a frame rate of 60 fps, 16.5 msec is referred to as one frame time.

Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and the numbers such as "00", "01", and "02" written on the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. Further, in FIG. 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the approximate processing time.

In the CPU processing in FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires the data necessary for decoding from the sub ROM 2210 etc. for 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 during 16.5 msec, writes it to the SDRAM 2430, and writes it to the SDRAM 2430. and the VPU 2410 to decode the frame. In FIG. 402(A), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in GPU (VPU) processing. This indicates instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and this arrow is omitted for frames 01 to 06. As described above, in this embodiment, decoding for multiple frames (for example, 8 frames) is performed in less than 2 frame time (for example, 1 frame time).

The display process in Figure 402(A) shows the process in which the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 writes frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and then displays images corresponding to that frame image data on the main display device 2510 or sub-display device 2520 in synchronization with the VSYNC signal at times such as t1, t2, and t3.

In FIG. 402(A), when frame 00 is specified as the frame number to be displayed at t0 (that is, when the display frame position is specified), frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. at timing t1. From timing t0 to t1, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. perform advance decoding of 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07, and then one frame is displayed (consumed) by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410. Preliminary decoding processing is performed for each frame.

For example, at t1, when frame 01 is specified as the frame number to be displayed (that is, when the display frame position is specified), at timing t1, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 08, and frame 01 is displayed, at timing t2, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 09, and when frame 02 is displayed, at timing t3, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 10, Thereafter, advance decoding processing is performed in the same manner.

In the process shown in FIG. 402(A), eight frames are always decoded in advance, and the number of frames to be decoded in advance (the number of preceding decodes) is determined in advance. In this embodiment, for example, the maximum number of frames is 8 frames, but various maximum number of frames can be set, and the maximum number of frames can be set according to the set maximum number of frames. , the number of preceding decodings can be set. In this embodiment, such a number of preceding decodings is managed as a "threshold value."

It is also possible to set the number of advance decodes to 0, and synchronize the decode process and the display process in CPU processing and GPU (VPU) processing without performing advance decode.

Furthermore, when a display frame position is specified, if the specified frame number is smaller than the frame number to be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter, a decoding process is performed to display a past frame. In this case, however, the decoding process must search back in time for the video data of the corresponding key frame, and then sequentially read the difference frames that follow this key frame to generate the frame to be displayed.

[11-3-2. Seek decoding process (1)]
FIG. 402(B) shows the sub control processing (CPU processing ), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) are shown.

Here, seeking refers to a process such as fast-forwarding a video, and the process of displaying past frames (also called rewinding or fast-rewinding) mentioned above is one example of seeking.

The "Seek = 5" seek shown in Figure 402 (B) refers to fast-forwarding playback by skipping four frames. The larger the seek number, the faster the fast-forward speed. For example, video fast-forwarding processing is performed when a video effect displayed on the main display device 2510 is played in fast-forward mode by the player's operation.

As shown in FIG. 402(B), initially, as in the case of FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390 and the GPU 2400, etc. operate to decode eight frames in advance. Now, assume that at timing t0a immediately before timing t1, the CPU 2390 receives a seek command of "Seek=5" (frame number = current frame number plus the number of frames to seek and display frame position designation = 05). Then, at this point, the designated frame number is compared with the frame number to be displayed on the main display device 2510, etc. Thereafter, since the designated frame number (05) is greater than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510, etc., and the difference in frame numbers is less than the above-mentioned threshold value "8", it is found that the decoding of frame 05 is completed, and therefore the CPU 2390 controls to display frame 05 at timing t2 and to play the video in fast forward. In Figure 402 (B), frame 00 is displayed at timing t1, and frame 05 is displayed the next timing, but since the seek command is received before timing t1, it is also possible to display frame 05 at timing t1 if certain processing conditions are met.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the case has been described in which the current frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. is "00", but in the case of the current frame number (101), the CPU 2390 performs a seek operation with "Seek=5". When the command is received, it becomes the specified frame number (106).

In addition, in the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=5" at timing t0a, frames after frame 06 are required, so control is performed to perform advance decoding processing on eight frames after frame 06. . At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames starting from frame 06 in preparation for normal video reproduction thereafter. Also, since frames 06 and 07 are to be performed between timing t0 and t1, the schedule remains as is, and decoding of frames 08 to 12 is newly started from timing t1, and further, At timing t2, decoding of frame 13 is started.

In this regard, during the normal decoding shown in FIG. frames are decoded first. Also, at this time, the decoded frames 01 to 04 are discarded.

Next, at timing t1a, if a seek command of "Seek = 5" (specifying the display frame position for displaying frame number = 10) is received again, at this point, the specified frame number and the main The frame numbers displayed on the display device 2510 or the like are compared. Here, the specified frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (05) displayed on the main display device 2510 etc., and the difference in frame numbers is smaller than the above-mentioned threshold value "8", so frame 10 Since it can be seen that the decoding of frame 10 has been completed, control is performed to display frame 10 at timing t3.

After receiving the seek command "Seek=5" at timing t1a, the CPU processing requires frames 11 and onwards, so it controls to pre-decode the eight frames from frame 11 onwards. At this point, it is not known whether a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames from frame 11 onwards in preparation for normal video playback. Furthermore, since frames 11 and 12 are to be decoded between timings t1 and t2, the schedule remains the same, and from timing t2, new decoding of frames 13 to 17 begins, and further, from timing t3, decoding of frame 18 begins.

In this regard, during normal decoding as shown in FIG. 402(A), only the decoding of frame 09 was performed between timing t2 and t3, but in this case, as described above, frames 13 to 17 are decoded first. Also, at this time, frames 06 to 09 that have already been decoded first are discarded.

Since no seek command is received between timing t2 and t3, the process is similar to the normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), and at timing t3, only frame 18 is decoded as described above. , at timing t4, frame 11 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 19 is decoded.

[11-3-3. Seek decoding processing (2)]
FIG. 402(C) shows the sub-control processing (CPU processing ), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing).

Here, seek is a process of fast forwarding or rewinding a moving image, and the seek of "Seek=10" shown in FIG. 402(C) means to skip nine frames and play back.

As shown in FIG. 402(C), initially, as in the case of FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. operate to decode eight frames in advance. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 2390 receives a seek command "Seek=10" (specifying a display frame position for displaying frame number=10) at timing t0b immediately before timing t1. Then, at this point, the specified frame number is compared with the frame number that will be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the specified frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 etc., and the difference in frame numbers is larger than the above-mentioned threshold "8", so the CPU 2390 , at timing t2, it is necessary to display frame 10 and control the video to be played in fast forward.

In CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=10" at timing t0b, frames after frame 10 are required, so the decoding process for frames 08 and 09 is skipped, and from timing t1, frames 10 and after are required. control to perform advance decoding for frames. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames starting from frame 10 in preparation for normal video reproduction thereafter. At timing t1, decoding of frames 10 to 17 is newly started, and furthermore, from timing t2, decoding of frame 18 is started. Also, at this time, the previously decoded frames from frame 01 to frame 07 are discarded.

Between timing t1 and t2, no seek command is received, so the process is the same as that during normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), and at timing t2, as described above, only frame 18 is decoded, at timing t3, frame 11 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 19 is decoded. At timing t4, frame 12 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 20 is decoded.

For example, in the situation where the advance decoding process shown in FIG. 402(C) is performed, if a seek command of "Seek=8" (designation of the display frame position for displaying frame number=8) is received, the designated frame number is compared with the frame number to be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like at this point. Here, the designated frame number (8) is greater than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference in frame number is the same as the above-mentioned threshold value "8". Therefore, the CPU 2390 controls to display frame 8 at timing t2 and to play the video in fast forward mode. In the CPU process, after receiving the seek command of "Seek=8" at timing t0b, frames after frame 8 are required, so that advance decoding is performed on frames after frame 8 from timing t1. At this point, it is not known whether a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames after frame 08 in preparation for normal video playback thereafter. In other words, between timing t1 and timing t2, new decoding of frames 08 to 15 begins, and then from timing t2, decoding of frame 16 begins.

In this way, if the difference between the frame number specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is less than the threshold, it is determined that the frame has already been pre-decoded, and the process proceeds to the pre-decoded frame position. On the other hand, if the difference between the frame number specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is equal to or greater than the threshold, it is determined that the frame to be displayed has not already been pre-decoded, and the pre-decoded frame is discarded, and (if necessary) the pre-decoding process of the unnecessary frame is skipped, and new pre-decoding is started from the frame to be sought. However, such skipping of the pre-decoding process interrupts the sequential decoding process, and in the end, the frame with the frame number specified for the display frame position is searched for from the original video data, and if the search frame is a key frame, it is used as is, but if the search frame is not a key frame, the video data of the corresponding immediately preceding key frame is searched for, and the difference frames following this key frame are sequentially read to generate the display frame (seek process), which may actually increase processing costs in some cases. Therefore, when a seek command is issued, it is important to know how to set the threshold value that determines whether to continue the decoding process as is (including using a decoded frame) or to jump to the decoding process of the frame with the frame number specified for the display frame position.

If the frame to be displayed by a seek instruction has already been pre-decoded, as many new frames as can be pre-decoded are added and pre-decoded, and the additional pre-decode processing is performed at the timing of the next frame. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced.

Additionally, if the frame displayed by a seek command has already been pre-decoded, the processing cost (processing time) is the same as the pre-decode processing in normal processing at the frame time, and some frames will be discarded, but the processing load will increase. There's nothing to do. Furthermore, in a situation where a seek command as shown in FIG. 402(C) is issued, if normal processing as shown in FIG. 402(A) is performed without skipping the preceding decoding process, the preceding decoding process and the decoded frames will be discarded continuously, resulting in an increase in processing load.

Note that in this example, the threshold value "8" corresponds to the number of frames to be subjected to advance decoding processing, but the threshold value corresponds to the number of frames for sequential (normal) decoding processing of multiple frames and frame discard processing. A more appropriate value can be determined based on the relationship between the time and the time for skipping the preliminary decoding process of unnecessary frames and performing the decoding process from the frame whose display frame position is specified.

[11-3-4.30 fps video playback processing]
Figure 403 (A), like Figure 402 (A), shows the chronological processing of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) under normal conditions.

In this embodiment, the graphic process is performed at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also possible to use a moving image (movie) created at a frame rate of 30 fps. In addition, in this case, the frame rate of the video is fixed to the hardware specifications and often cannot be changed in the initial settings, and even if the frame rate can be changed due to the hardware specifications. If videos with different frame rates coexist and control is performed that frequently changes the frame rate, there is a concern that unpredictable problems may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to use software to deal with the above situations.

Here, if a 30 fps video is played directly on a platform that plays 60 fps videos, it will be played back at double speed, so processing is performed once every two frames. As a result, one frame is substantially played back every 33 msec, and a 30 fps video is played back at the normal speed. Further, with such processing, writing to the VRAM 2420 (display processing) is performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily played back at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403(A), similar to FIG. 402(A) and the like, sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 403, similarly to FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and the numbers such as "00", "01", and "02" written on the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. There is. Further, as in FIG. 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the approximate processing time.

In the CPU processing of FIG. 403(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially retrieves data required for decoding for eight frames, frames 00 to 07, from the sub ROM 2210 etc. over a period of 16.5 msec, writes the data to the SDRAM 2430, and instructs the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 to decode those frames. In FIG. 403(A), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylinder of frame 00 in the CPU processing to the left end of the cylinder of frame 00 in the GPU (VPU) processing, but this indicates the preparation of instructions and data from the CPU 2390 to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 as described above, and the arrow is omitted for the other frames 01 to 06.

In the display processing of FIG. 403(A), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, and t3, respectively. The image corresponding to is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520.

In Fig. 403(A), the CPU 2390 and GPU 2400, etc. perform advance decoding processing of eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 between timing t0 and t1 until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510, etc. at timing t1, and then control is performed so that frame 00 is also displayed at timing t2. This type of display control can be achieved, for example, by writing frame image data to the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal to a period of 33 msec, and writing to the VRAM 2420 occurs once every two times compared to the case of Fig. 402(A).

Also, for example, frame image data of frame 00 is written to the first frame buffer of the VRAM 2420, frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t1, and then frame image data of frame 00 is written to the second frame buffer. In this state, the same frame 00 may be displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t2, and as a result, control may be performed such that frame 00 is continuously displayed on the display device for two frames (33 msec).

Thereafter, each time a new frame is displayed for the second time by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410, advance decoding processing is performed on a frame-by-frame basis. In FIG. 403(A), when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t2, and when frame 01 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t4), decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t4, and advance decoding processing is performed in the same manner thereafter.

With this video playback process, it is possible to read low frame rate video data (for example, 30 fps video data as above) on a platform that plays high frame rate videos (for example, 60 fps video as above). You can control the video playback at a normal speed.

[11-3-5.60 fps video playback processing]
Figure 403 (B), like Figure 402 (A), shows the chronological processing of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) under normal conditions.

In this embodiment, the graphics process processes at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also possible to play back 60 fps video data at 30 fps in order to reduce the processing load. In this case, the frame rate of the video is often fixed to the hardware specifications and cannot be changed by initial settings, etc. Therefore, it is necessary to deal with the above-mentioned situation using software.

If you try to play a video (movie) created at a frame rate of 60 fps at 30 fps, the playback will be twice as slow, so it is necessary to play the video in skips of one frame every 33 msec. be. As a result, a 60 fps video is played back at normal speed. Further, with such processing, writing to the VRAM 2420 (display processing) is performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily played back at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403(B), similar to FIG. 402(A) and the like, sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec).

In the CPU processing of FIG. 403(B), the CPU 2390 sequentially retrieves data required for decoding for the eight frames, frames 00 to 07, from the sub ROM 2210 etc. over a period of 16.5 msec, writes the data to the SDRAM 2430, and instructs the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 to decode those frames. In FIG. 403(B), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylinder of frame 00 in the CPU processing to the left end of the cylinder of frame 00 in the GPU (VPU) processing, but this indicates the preparation of instructions and data from the CPU 2390 to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 as described above, and the arrow is omitted for the other frames 01 to 06.

The display process in Figure 403 (B) shows the process in which the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00, 02, and 04 to the VRAM 2420, and images corresponding to that frame image data are displayed on the main display device 2510 and sub-display device 2520 in synchronization with the VSYNC signal at times such as t1, t2, t3, and t4, respectively.

In FIG. 403(B), the CPU 2390 and GPU 2400, etc. perform advance decoding of eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 between timing t0 and t1 until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510, etc. at timing t1, and then control is performed so that frame 00 is also displayed at timing t2. This type of display control can be achieved, for example, by writing frame image data to the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal to a period of 33 msec, and writing to the VRAM 2420 occurs once every two times compared to the case of FIG. 402(A).

In addition, for example, frame image data for frame 00 may be written to the first frame buffer of VRAM 2420, and frame 00 may be displayed with a VSYNC signal at timing t1. Next, with frame image data for frame 00 also written to the second frame buffer, the same frame 00 may be displayed with a VSYNC signal at timing t2, resulting in frame 00 being continuously displayed on the display device for two frames (33 msec).

In FIG. 403(B), frame 02 is then displayed at timing t3, and frame 02 continues to be displayed at timing t4. In this way, by displaying frames every other frame at a cycle of 33 msec, the 60 fps video data can be played back as a 30 fps video.

Here, each time a new frame is displayed for the second time by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410, advance decoding processing is performed on a frame-by-frame basis. In FIG. 403(B), when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t2, and when frame 02 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t4), decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t4, and advance decoding processing is performed thereafter in the same manner.

Note that here, since only even frames such as frames 00, 02, and 04 are used for display processing, processing of odd frames such as frames 01, 03, and 05 may be omitted in advance decoding processing by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. can.

Through such video playback processing, on a platform that plays high frame rate videos (e.g. 60 fps video as above), high frame rate video data can be played back as low frame rate videos (e.g. 30 fps video as above). video), the video can be controlled to play at a normal speed.

[11-3-6. Blending process]
FIG. 404 shows an overview of the blending process executed by the GPU 2400 in the graphic process (graphic event) of this embodiment.

Figure 404 (A) shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for image blending processing, a work buffer 2620 for storing a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. The temporary buffer 2610 has the same buffer size as the screen size, and sprite image 1 is placed at the actual drawing position. Note that the temporary buffer 2610, work buffer 2620, and frame buffer 2630 (the "first frame buffer" and "second frame buffer" mentioned above) correspond to the VRAM 2420 shown in Figure 375 of this embodiment.

It is also possible to make the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620 correspond to the SDRAM 2430, and it is also possible to make either the temporary buffer 2610 or the work buffer 2620 correspond to the VRAM 2420, and the other one to correspond to the SDRAM 2430. It is. The correspondence between the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620, the VRAM 2420, and the SDRAM 2430 can be appropriately set in advance according to the used capacity of each RAM.

A shader and the like in the GPU 2400 blends the sprite image 1 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the base image stored in the work buffer 2620, and outputs the blending result to the frame buffer 2630. In frame buffer 2630, sprite image 1 is placed at the same coordinate position as in temporary buffer 2610. As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image in which sprite image 1 is synthesized on the front of the base image.

Similarly to FIG. 404(A), FIG. 404(B) shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for image blending processing, a working buffer 2620 for storing a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. Unlike FIG. 404(A), sprite image 1 and sprite image 2 are placed at the actual drawing position in the temporary buffer 2610. Note that the frame buffer 2630 corresponds to the VRAM 2420 shown in FIG. 375 of this embodiment.

A shader or the like in the GPU 2400 performs a blending process on the sprite images 1 and 2 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the base image stored in the work buffer 2620, and outputs the blending result to the frame buffer 2630. In frame buffer 2630, sprite images 1 and 2 are arranged at the same coordinate positions as in temporary buffer 2610. As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image in which sprite images 1 and 2 are synthesized in front of the base image. As shown in FIG. 404(B), if the coordinates of sprite images 1 and 2 do not overlap, both can be placed in the temporary buffer 2610, and a shader or the like can perform blending processing at the same time.

Conventionally, when performing image blending processing, buffers were prepared according to each sprite image (for example, 5 buffers for sprite images of 5 different image sizes, or 10 buffers regardless of the image size). (10 buffers for different types of sprite images), as in this embodiment, each sprite image can be stored using only one temporary buffer 2610, which is the same as the screen size, so there is no wastage of memory and efficiency. It can be used often.

In addition, when performing blending processing multiple times, first copy the blended image (sprite image) stored in the frame buffer 2630 to a part of the temporary buffer 2610, and then perform the blending processing with other sprite images. After processing, the processing results can be written back to the same location in the frame buffer 2630.

[11-4. File decompression process]
Next, a file decompression process using a graphic process (graphic event) will be described.

In the graphics process according to the present embodiment described above, when reading in multiple threads, GZIP2370 of the sub-control board 2300 is used to decompress image data, etc. (see FIG. 375). GZIP2370 is a circuit for decompressing files, and when reading a file in multiple threads, this circuit can only be used by one thread. Therefore, the graphics thread that uses GZIP2370 locks the GZIP2370 circuit (device) before decompressing the file.

At this time, if you try to lock the GZIP2370 circuit when decompressing the file with another graphics thread, it will fail, so decompression processing is performed using software. This software decompression process implements the decompression process executed by the GZIP2370 circuit using software. The graphics fix thread can wait for the GZIP2370 circuit to become free when the locking of the GZIP2370 circuit fails, but by using such software decompression processing as appropriate, the image data etc. It is possible to prevent the file reading performance from becoming essentially single-threaded (due to the bottleneck of GZIP2370).

Now, referring to Figure 405, we will explain the file decompression process of the graphics thread. Figure 405 is a flowchart showing the flow of file decompression process in one graphics thread.

First, in step S3371, a status indicating whether the GZIP2370 circuit (hereinafter referred to as "HW GZIP") is being used by another graphics thread and is in operation is obtained. Next, in step S3372, the obtained status is referenced to determine whether HW GZIP is in operation.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is not in operation (NO in step S3372), the graphics thread can perform file decompression processing using HW GZIP, and thereafter performs the processing for that purpose. First, in step S3373, the HW GZIP device is locked to prevent other graphics threads from using this HW GZIP. Next, in step S3374, a request is made to HW GZIP to decompress the specified file. Thereafter, when the file decompression process by HW GZIP is completed, the device of HW GZIP is unlocked in step S3375 so that other graphics threads can use this HW GZIP. After the process in step S3375, the graphics thread ends the file decompression process.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is running (YES in step S3372), the graphics thread in step S3376 requests software GZIP decompression processing (SW GZIP) to decompress the specified file. After that, when the software file decompression processing is completed, the graphics thread ends the file decompression processing.

[11-4. Sound Control]
Next, sound control executed by the sound process (sound thread) of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 406 to Fig. 409. The CPU 2390 that controls the operation of such a sound process (sound thread) corresponds to the arithmetic processing unit, and the digital amplifier 2240 that is connected to the CPU 2390 and receives and amplifies sound data from the CPU 2390 corresponds to the sound source amplifier. Also, the speaker group 2040 that is connected to the digital amplifier 2240 and outputs sound corresponds to the sound output unit.

The main thread of another process such as the master process or graphics process obtains an event code request or sound code request via shared memory to the inter-process communication thread of the sound process, and then these requests are passed from the inter-process communication thread to the sound thread. The event code request includes an event code that represents an event that occurs when the start lever 7 of the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is operated, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, when a medal is inserted (betting operation), when a performance is determined, etc. Furthermore, the sound code request includes a sound code that specifies a request related to sound.

When the sound thread receives an event code request, it retrieves a sound object based on the event code, then retrieves the sound code (hash value) registered in the retrieved sound object and executes the request based on the sound code. I do. Here, there may be multiple sound objects, and in that case, requests corresponding to multiple sound codes are made according to each sound object. On the other hand, if a sound code is received, the request is made using that sound code as is. The sound thread calls the library API to implement the request regarding the sound code.

When executing a request related to a sound code as described above, when the library API is called, request information including request data corresponding to each sound code is sent to the library API. Figure 406 (A) shows an example of request data in this embodiment.

The request data shown in Fig. 406(A) contains multiple data including the item "target channel/group". Here, "target channel/group" specifies the control target of the request data, and as shown in Fig. 406(B), even in the same area, there are multiple data storage formats. That is, when the control target is a single channel, the 7th to 8th 2 bytes (16 bits) of the 8 bytes indicate the channel number, and when the control target is a single group, the 5th to 6th 2 bytes indicate the group number (a group of two or more specified channels. For example, the group number "01" indicates the number of the group of four channels: channel 10, channel 11, channel 14, and channel 15). Also, as shown in Fig. 406(B), when the control target is multiple channels, all the bits of the 8 bytes are used to specify multiple channels to be controlled from 64 channels (1ch to 64ch). For example, if the first bit is "1", the 64th channel (64ch) is used, if the last bit is "1", the first channel (1ch) is used, and the bits for unused channels are set to "0".

The difference between a single group and multiple channels is that for a single group, it is necessary to set a channel for each group in advance, but in the case of multiple channels, it is necessary to set the channel for the request data from the sound thread or other process. The corresponding bit can be specified.

Note that the above-mentioned "channel" refers to a logical channel (logical channel), as opposed to a physical channel (physical channel) that corresponds to a speaker. Such a logical channel is used to synthesize multiple sound sources and output them to one physical channel (speaker). For example, if one logical channel is associated with a background music sound source and another logical channel is associated with a bet (insertion) sound effect, such as when a coin is inserted, these two sounds are synthesized and the synthesized sound is output from one speaker.

As shown in Figure 406 (C), the "Option flag/function type" item has the upper two bytes (16 bits) representing the option flag, and the lower two bytes representing the function type. If the first bit of the option flag is "1", it indicates that the request is for a specified sound code, and the contents of the "Target channel/group" are meaningless. For example, "1" is set for requests such as pause/unpause and mute/unmute. If the first bit is "0", it is not a request for a specified sound code, so the evaluation of the second bit will proceed.

If the second bit is "1", it indicates that the request targets multiple channels, and all 8 bytes of "target channel/group" are evaluated as bits representing the channel to be controlled. On the other hand, if the second bit is "0", it indicates that the request is for a single channel or a single group, and if there is data in the 7th and 8th bytes of "Target channel/group", the value is , represents the channel number of the controlled object, and if there is data in the 5th and 6th bytes, the value represents the group number of the controlled object.

In addition, the request data shown in FIG. 406 (A) includes, for example, delay time, priority, master volume reference index number, command volume value, playback request parameters, own request ID, target request ID, fade attribute, ducking attribute, fade request parameter, ducking request parameter, etc.

Note that the delay time is a delay time until the start of reproduction in the case of a single note, and a delay time until implementation in the case of a sequence request (the sequence request will be described later). Further, the master volume reference index number is an index number that refers to master volume information stored in a master volume table, which will be described later, and the master volume table defines, for example, 32 types and 7 levels of volume values. . The reproduction request parameters include, for example, the name of the sound file to be reproduced, the file format, the reproduction start position, and the like.

In addition, for a request for a single sound, the own request ID becomes the request ID for the request information, but for a child request (child playback request) of a sequence request, the request ID for the request information (of that sequence request) ID and own request ID have different values.

The target request ID specifies the request ID that is the target of, for example, pausing/unpausing or muting/unmuting when the first bit of the option flag indicates that the request is for the specified sound code.

Fade attributes have values such as none, in, and out, and ducking attributes have values such as none, target, and effect. Fade request parameters and ducking request parameters are defined when necessary for fade and ducking attributes.

Figure 407 shows an example of a request table stored, for example, in the sub-ROM 2210. In this example, the request table is configured to have a common header and multiple pieces of request information. The common header stores the versions of the tool, encoder, library, and binary file data format, the system sampling frequency, the system frame rate, the number of pieces of data (stored in the table), etc.

Each piece of request information is associated with a sound code, and typically includes one or more pieces of request data. In addition, the request information may include a sequence marker that functions as one or more indexes that specify the playback position of the sound, for example, by time or number of frames, but request information that does not include a sequence marker or a sequence marker Only request information may exist.

The request table shown in FIG. 407 shows three pieces of request information as examples. The request information with Index=1 has a sound code=0003 and one piece of request data. This request data is a playback request for the single channel "2ch" to be controlled, and has a request ID=1. In addition, the playback request parameters for this playback request define sound file name=M1, file format=A, playback start position=10, etc.

The request information for Index=2 has sound code=0022 and one request data. This request data is a playback request for the single channel "2ch" to be controlled, and has a request ID=2. The playback request parameters for this playback request define sound file name=M2, file format=A, playback start position=20, etc.

The request information for Index=10 has sound code=0101 and is a sequence request that includes three requests (two playback requests and one volume control request). A sequence request is a single request that arranges multiple sound controls (play, stop, volume control, etc.) on the time axis. With a sequence request, only the playback request is registered by quoting an already registered playback request, and the playback request parameters used are those defined by the quoting source.

Here, request information with Index=1 (playback request with request ID=1) and request information with Index=2 (playback request with request ID=2) are sequence requests (requests) corresponding to request information with Index=10. ID=10) and is included in the request information with Index=10, the request data of the playback request with request ID=1 is referred to as the playback request data (1), and the original request information with Index=1 is referenced at this time. ’s own request ID is “1” instead of 10. Similarly, the request data of the playback request with request ID=2 refers to the original request information with index=2 as playback request data (2), and the own request ID at this time is not 10 but " 2”.

If a sequence request with request ID = 10 contains two playback requests, one of the playback requests will be a "child request" and the sequence request will be a "parent request."

A sequence request represented by request information with Index=10 may include several sequence markers, as shown in FIG. 407. Each sequence marker has a marker position (time) and a marker name.

Specifically, when the sound being played reaches a marker position, the marker name is stored in the playback information, and the playback information with the marker name stored is sent to the graphic process and/or lamp process, and the receiving process executes a performance according to the marker name stored in the playback information; this information can be set by the designer as desired. Therefore, it is possible to use the marker in the graphic process but not in the lamp process depending on the marker name.

With this configuration, individual sound codes are set for each request, so for example, if you execute a mute request for the sound code "0101" of a sequence request, the entire sequence (all included playback requests) will be muted. On the other hand, if you specify the sound code "0003" or "0022" in the playback request and execute a mute request, you can individually mute the playback of the sound related to the corresponding playback request. can.

Similarly, for example, executing a playback stop request for the sound code "0101" of a sequence request will stop the entire sequence (playback of the sounds related to all playback requests contained therein), whereas executing a playback stop request specifying the sound code "0003" or "0022" of a playback request will stop playback of the sounds related to the corresponding playback requests individually.

Figure 408 (A) shows an example of a hash value request table. The hash value request table has a common header in the same format as the common header described in relation to the request table shown in Figure 407, and further stores the hash value of each request and the file length (total playing time) of the sound to be played in association with the index value.

The hash values in the hash value request table are generated based on the sound code. The order in which each request is stored in the request table is the same as the order in which they are stored in the hash value request table, so the hash values and the request information corresponding to these hash values are associated with the same index (in the same storage order).

As described above, the sound thread receives an event code request and obtains the sound code (hash value) registered in the sound object obtained based on the event code. This process is performed by referencing the hash value request table. After obtaining the hash value, the sound thread identifies the request information in the request table based on the hash value, and makes a request based on the identified request information.

Figure 408 (B) shows an example of a channel group table. The channel group table has a common header in the same format as the common header described in relation to the request table shown in Figure 407, and further stores channel group information for each channel group. Each channel group information includes a group number and channel information for the channels that belong to this group. The channel information is, for example, 64-bit data, with each bit indicating whether the corresponding channel belongs to the group or not. If the value of the 1st bit is "1", 64ch belongs to the group, and if the value of the 64th bit is "1", 1ch belongs to the group. A channel with a bit value of "0" indicates that it does not belong to the group.

In this way, by using the channel group table, it is possible to flexibly set the correspondence between groups and channels belonging to the groups.

FIG. 408(C) shows an example of the master volume table. The master volume table includes a common header in the same format as the common header described in connection with the request table shown in FIG. 407, and further stores a plurality of pieces of master volume information. In this example, 32 types of master volume information are stored, and each master volume information stores an index number and 7 volume values. As a result, 7 levels of volume settings can be selected from among the 32 types. is possible.

As described above, in the request data shown in FIG. 406(A), one piece of master volume information in this master volume table is referenced by the master volume reference index number, and the volume setting can be changed on a request-by-request basis.

In this embodiment, the volume of the sound source data transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 is reflected in the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. Further, the volume of the digital amplifier 2240 may be set based on the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. When setting the volume of the digital amplifier 2240, the I2C I/F 2340 The volume setting value is transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 via the digital amplifier 2240.

Note that in this embodiment, there are cases in which the master volume information is not referred to. For example, if a request is made from the master process to output an abnormal sound when an error occurs (for example, the main board command is an error command) as an event code or sound code (see Figure 380(A)), the master volume information Regardless of the situation, the abnormal sound is always played at maximum volume.

FIG. 409 shows an example of sound data. The sound data of this embodiment is sound data created according to the encoding type, and is, for example, a file in a format such as an SMZ file or PCM. FIG. 409(A) is sound data with a sound marker, and includes a common header, marker information, and a data section. Common headers include, for example, data length, size of one frame, number of frames, codec version, data format version, sampling frequency, bit rate, monaural/stereo type, number of sound markers, loop section (number of samples at starting position) , loop section (end position sample number).

Further, this sound data includes marker information of the number defined by the number of sound markers in the common header, and each marker information includes a respective marker position (eg, frame position). The data section stores actual sound data such as PCM data and sound source data compressed in the SMA format.

Figure 409 (B) shows an example of sound data without sound markers. The common header is the same as the common header of the sound data shown in Figure 409 (A), and after the common header is stored a data section that contains the actual sound data.

The following describes the configuration of the gaming machine described above and the effects that result from that configuration.

<Appendix H-1>
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of changing the display speed of the display effects has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-073743).

In the gaming machine proposed in this way, the display speed of the display effects is changed by the display speed gradual change unit of the display control device, but the display speed can also be changed by a program, and when playing back a video at double speed by changing the display speed by a program, it is necessary to play the third frame after playing the first frame, so a seek process is performed to obtain the third frame and then playback process of the third frame is performed.

However, in such a gaming machine, when a program plays back a moving image at double speed, seek processing as described above always occurs, resulting in a problem that the processing becomes heavy. Furthermore, if the display control device is provided with a dedicated circuit such as a stepwise display speed changing section, as in the gaming machine described above, manufacturing costs will increase.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can change the display speed of images in a performance (for example, change the playback speed from normal speed to n times faster (2 times faster, 5 times faster, etc.)) without increasing the processing load.

A further object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can change the display speed of images during a performance at low cost without the need for a dedicated circuit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(H-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A display unit (for example, a main display device 2510 and a sub display device 2520 (including a VRAM 2420) shown in FIG. 375 ),
A processing unit (e.g., a sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) having an arithmetic processing processor (e.g., a CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processing processor (e.g., a GPU 2400 or a VPU 2410 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing processor for performing image processing, and a performance control unit (e.g., a sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) for performing performance control and displaying on the display unit.
The performance control unit includes:
A decoding means for performing a decoding process on still image data and moving image data to generate display data;
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachislot machine 1 according to the 12th embodiment) characterized in having a display data output means for displaying a display frame on the display unit by outputting the display data to the display unit every frame time (e.g., in the case of 60 fps, one frame time is 16.5 msec).

(H-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The performance control unit performs a display frame position designation (for example, designation of a frame number of a frame to be displayed) for designating a display frame to be displayed on the display unit, with respect to the decoding means;
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process can be performed on a plurality of pieces of display data corresponding to a plurality of display frames in one frame time,
A gaming machine configured to enable advance decoding processing, in which the decoding processing is performed in advance (for example, as shown in FIG. 402 (A), decoding processing from frames 00 to 07 is performed from timing t0 to timing t1, before display processing of frame 00 is performed).

(H-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings (the number of frames to be decoded in advance) of display data that can be generated in advance is set, and further,
A gaming machine configured such that an upper limit on the number of decoding processes to be performed in one frame time (for example, a maximum of 8 frames in the examples shown in FIGS. 402(A) to 402(C)) is set.

(H-1-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
The performance control unit is
The preceding decoding process is newly performed for the amount of display data used by being output to the display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(A), the timing t1 when display processing of frame 00 is performed The gaming machine is configured to control the decoding means so that frame 08 is decoded at timing t2, and frame 09 is decoded at timing t2 when frame 01 is displayed.

(H-1-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
The performance control unit is
having a threshold value regarding the display data;
The preceding decoding process is performed on the display data output means according to the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation, the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the relationship with the threshold value. A gaming machine configured to perform control so as to instruct which of display data already generated by the above processing and display data generated by the decoding processing to be output to the display section.

(H-1-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The performance control unit performs a display frame position designation for designating a display frame to be displayed on the display unit, with respect to the decoding means;
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process can be performed on a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time,
The decoding process is performed in advance, that is, a pre-decoding process is possible;
In the preceding decoding process, a number of pieces of preceding decoded display data that can be generated is set in advance,
The performance control unit has a threshold value related to the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes;
The performance control unit includes:
A gaming machine configured to control the display unit to display the display frame related to the display frame position designation using display data already generated by the advance decoding process when the frame position value related to the display frame designation is greater than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit and the difference between the two frame position values is less than the threshold value (for example, as shown in FIG. 402 (B) , the frame position value related to the display frame position designation (frame 05 indicated by Seek = 5) is greater than frame 00 related to the display processing and the difference in frame position values "5" is less than the threshold value "8").

(H-1-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The performance control unit is
If the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation is larger than the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the values of both frame positions is smaller than the threshold value, the The display data output means is configured to control the display data of the frame position related to the display frame position designation to be selected from display data already generated by the preceding decoding process and output to the display unit. A game machine that is played.

(H-1-8) The eighth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
The performance control unit performs a display frame position designation for designating a display frame to be displayed on the display unit, with respect to the decoding means;
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process can be performed on a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time,
The decoding process is performed in advance, that is, a pre-decoding process is possible;
In the preceding decoding process, a number of pieces of preceding decoded display data that can be generated is set in advance,
The performance control unit has a threshold value related to the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes;
The performance control unit includes:
A gaming machine configured to control the display unit to display the display frame related to the display frame position designation without using display data already generated by the preceding decoding process (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(C), using frame 10 decoded at subsequent timing t1), when the frame position value related to the display frame position designation is greater than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the two frame position values is equal to or greater than the threshold value (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(C), when the frame position value related to the display frame position designation (frame 10 indicated by Seek=10) is greater than frame 00 related to the display processing, and the difference in frame position values "10" is equal to or greater than the threshold value "8").

(H-1-9) The ninth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth aspects.
The performance control unit performs a display frame position designation for designating a display frame to be displayed on the display unit, with respect to the decoding means;
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process can be performed on a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time,
The decoding process is performed in advance, that is, a pre-decoding process is possible;
In the preceding decoding process, a number of pieces of preceding decoded display data that can be generated is set in advance;
The performance control unit has a threshold value related to the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes;
The performance control unit includes:
A gaming machine configured to control the decoding means to perform a decoding process to generate display data for the frame position related to the display frame position designation when the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit and the difference between the two frame position values is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and to further control the display data output means to output the display data generated by the decoding process to the display unit.

(H-1-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The performance control unit performs a display frame position designation for designating a display frame to be displayed on the display unit, with respect to the decoding means;
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process can be performed on a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time,
The decoding process is performed in advance, that is, a pre-decoding process is possible;
In the preceding decoding process, a number of pieces of preceding decoded display data that can be generated is set in advance,
The performance control unit has a threshold value related to the display data,
A gaming machine configured such that the threshold value is set to the number of prior decodes (for example, the number of prior decodes "8" as shown in Figures 402(A) to 402(C)).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the display speed of images in the effect can be changed without increasing the processing load. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the display speed of images in the effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

In addition, when the game machine configured as described above is instructed to play a video at n times the speed, the user can respond to the result of comparing a numerical value based on the specified frame number and a predetermined threshold without being aware of the video playback status. In order to switch video playback processing, it is possible to perform optimal video playback processing by specifying an arbitrary frame for playback at the double speed.

<Appendix H-2>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which files are grouped together and the grouped files are accessed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-031586).

In gaming machines related to this proposal, the target file is read from a set file list or from a file name written in the program, and is expanded or stored in a specified area (RAM).

However, in these gaming machines, the target files are read in order after the file list or file names written in the program are read, which takes time to load.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can quickly read a plurality of files.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A display unit (for example, the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 shown in FIG. 375),
It has an arithmetic processing processor (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processing processor (for example, GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processing processor and performs image processing, and controls the effect and performs the A production control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) that displays on a display unit,
A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment), wherein the effect control section controls the transfer of data for image processing in the image processing processor.

(H-2-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
List information that specifies each of the data to be transferred (for example, the read list described in the flowchart of FIG. 392) is stored in advance,
The gaming machine is configured such that the performance control unit specifies data to be transferred based on the list information.

(H-2-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The gaming machine is configured such that the list information includes information indicating an order in which the data is transferred.

(H-2-4) The fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
list information for identifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance;
The performance control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
When the list information exists, the performance control unit
generating prefetch information from the list information;
a dedicated data memory area is secured which can be accessed faster than the data storage area in which the data is stored;
A gaming machine configured to launch a data reading-only process (e.g., a file cache thread described in the flowchart of Figure 392) that reads the data from the data storage area and stores it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information.

(H-2-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
Based on the prefetch information, the data read-only process sequentially stores data in the data memory area, so that the data is arranged in the data memory area in an order necessary for processing by the image processing processor. A gaming machine configured as follows.

(H-2-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generating prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
An upper limit storage capacity is set in the data memory area,
In the gaming machine, the data read-only process is configured to control such that the data is not read when the data memory area is full.

(H-2-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The arithmetic processing processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The data read-only process is configured such that one or more of the data read-only processes are started by being started by an inactive core processor among the plurality of core processors. Game machine.

(H-2-8) The eighth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
list information for identifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance;
The performance control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
When the list information exists, the performance control unit
generating prefetch information from the list information;
a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than a data storage area storing said data is secured;
initiating a data read-only process that reads the data from the data storage area and stores the data in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The performance control unit, based on the cancellation request,
Discarding the prefetch information;
A gaming machine configured to make a request to discard the data read-only process.

(H-2-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The performance control unit is configured to erase the data from the data memory area when the data stored in the data memory area is processed by the image processing processor.

(H-2-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generating prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
A game in which the data read-only processing is configured to store data for constructing 3D image data in the data memory area in an order necessary for processing by the image processing processor based on the prefetch information. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of files can be read quickly in image processing.

In addition, with the gaming machine configured as described above, the relevant data for the drawing process is pre-loaded in a predetermined order based on the pre-fetch information generated from the file loading list, improving the processing efficiency of data loading in image processing.

<Appendix H-3>
In a conventional gaming machine, when managing playback channels for audio effects, a configuration has been disclosed in which the playback channels are managed using a management table and channel numbers (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-119192).

In this case, the playback channel is managed by a real number, for example, 1 to 32.

However, in such gaming machines, the playback channels are managed using real numbers, so even when using multiple channels, it is necessary to define and manage each channel, resulting in unnecessary processing. are doing.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can define and manage multiple channels for audio output related to effects, etc., with simple, efficient processing.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A calculation processing unit (for example, a CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375 );
A sound source amplifier (for example, a digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375 ) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
A sound output unit (e.g., a speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375 ) connected to the sound source amplifier unit,
The arithmetic processing unit is
The sound source amplifier has a plurality of sound channels (e.g., logical channels of 1 ch to 64 ch) for outputting sound data to the sound source amplifier,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachislot machine 1 according to the 12th embodiment) characterized in that it sets channel data (e.g., request data as shown in FIG. 406 (A)) corresponding to one or more of the multiple audio channels, and outputs the channel data to the sound source amplifier unit, thereby controlling the sound output unit to output sound.

(H-3-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The gaming machine is configured such that the channel data has a plurality of setting formats (for example, the request data format shown in FIG. 406(B)) for specifying the audio channel.

(H-3-3) The third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for specifying the audio channels,
The channel data relating to the plurality of setting formats each include
have the same data length (e.g., 8 bytes),
A gaming machine configured so that the range of the area used to specify the audio channel is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 406 (B), when the controlled object is a single channel, the rightmost (lowest) 16 bits are used, and when the controlled object is a single group, the 16 bits to the left of the rightmost 16 bits (highest) are used).

(H-3-4) The fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for specifying the audio channels,
The channel data relating to the plurality of setting formats each include
have the same data length,
The ranges of the areas used to specify the audio channels are different,
In the channel data relating to the plurality of setting formats,
The areas used to specify the audio channels in different setting formats overlap at least in part (for example, as shown in FIG. 406(B) , there is an overlap in the areas used when the control target is a single channel and when the control target is multiple channels),
A gaming machine configured to separately use information for identifying the different setting formats.

(H-3-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
A gaming machine configured so that information indicating whether or not multiple audio channels are specified in the channel data (for example, request data for option flag/function identification shown in Figure 406 (C)) is output to the sound source amplifier unit separately from the channel data.

(H-3-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for specifying the audio channels,
The channel data includes
The gaming machine is configured to have a setting format for individually specifying the audio channels, and a setting format for specifying the audio channels managed in groups on a group basis.

(H-3-7) The seventh aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for specifying the audio channels,
A gaming machine configured such that the first setting format set in the channel data (for example, the setting format shown in FIG. 406(B) for the control object being a single channel) is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format (for example, the setting format shown in FIG. 406(B) for the control object being a single group) is a format for setting a group number for designating multiple channels, and the third setting format (for example, the setting format shown in FIG. 406(B) for the control object being multiple channels) is a format for setting bit information that enables the maximum number of channels to be set.

(H-3-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels,
When setting the first setting format, set the channel number in a first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, set the channel number in a second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. A gaming machine configured to set a group number.

(H-3-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels, and the third setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels. The format is a format that sets bit information that allows the maximum number of channels to be set.
When setting the first setting format, set the channel number in a first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, set the channel number in a second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. Set the group number,
When setting the third setting format, the gaming machine is configured to set the bit information in the first channel area, the second channel area, and the third channel area.

(H-3-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for specifying the audio channels,
When the channel data is in a setting format in which the audio channels are designated in groups, the arithmetic processing unit refers to a channel group table (for example, the channel group table shown in FIG. 408(B)) to grasp the audio channels belonging to the designated group;
The gaming machine is configured such that, for each group, the channel group table stores the audio channels belonging to that group as bit information that enables the setting of a maximum number of channels.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of sound channels can be defined and managed, so that processing related to audio output is simplified.

<Appendix H-4>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which a sound table for managing sounds is used to control sound effects (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-015443).

In these conventional gaming machines, when multiple sounds are to be controlled in succession, the sounds are played by requesting a sound sequence that manages the playback of multiple sounds.

However, when a request for a sound sequence as described above is registered, in order to control the playback of individual sounds, management and processing separate from the sound sequence are required.

The present invention has been made in consideration of these points, and aims to enable the management of multiple sounds by requesting a sound sequence (sequence request), as well as the management of individual sounds registered in a sequence request.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375),
a sound source amplification unit (for example, digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
a sound output section (for example, the speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification section,
The arithmetic processing unit is
It is characterized by having sound source request data (for example, a request (request ID=1) or a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407) in which a plurality of sound source data are set to be output to the sound output unit. (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment).

(H-4-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding single sound source data (for example, the request shown in FIG. 407 (request ID=1)), and second sound source request data including a request regarding multiple sound source data. A gaming machine configured to include data (for example, a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407).

(H-4-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
comprising a sound source request data storage unit (for example, a request table shown in FIG. 407) that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data, the gaming machine is configured to refer to the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request from the sound source request data storage section.

(H-4-4) The fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
the sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data;
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier (e.g., a request ID);
A gaming machine configured such that, when the second sound source request data includes a playback request for sound source data, the second sound source request data includes an identifier of the first sound source request data related to the playback request.

(H-4-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier,
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request regarding sound source data, the sound source request data storage section is referred to using the identifier of the first sound source request data related to the playback request, and the corresponding first sound source request data is stored. A gaming machine configured to obtain.

(H-4-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
the sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data;
The second sound source request data is configured to be a set of data for continuously controlling a plurality of sound source data.

(H-4-7) The seventh aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
the sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data;
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier;
A gaming machine configured to enable settings to be made for each of the sound source request data based on the identifier.

(H-4-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request regarding sound source data, a playback position can be set in the first sound source request data related to the playback request (for example, setting a playback start position of the request data), and the second sound source A gaming machine configured so that one or more playback positions can be set in request data (for example, setting a sequence marker of a sequence request).

(H-4-9) The ninth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth aspects.
the sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data;
In a situation where the second audio request data includes a playback request for audio data,
When a predetermined request is made to the second sound source request data, the request is accepted as a request regarding all sound source data included in the second sound source request data;
A gaming machine configured such that when a specific request is made individually to the first sound source request data related to the playback request, the request is accepted as a request related to the sound source data of the first sound source request data.

(H-4-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The sound source request data storage unit stores sound source request data in association with a first code (for example, a request ID (the above-mentioned identifier)),
A second code storage unit (for example, the hash value request table in FIG. 408) stores a second code (for example, a hash value) related to the sound source request data in accordance with the arrangement of the corresponding sound source request data in the sound source request data storage unit. memorize in the same order,
The arithmetic processing section can access the target sound source request data by referring to the sound source request data storage section using the first code, and can access the target sound source request data using the second code. A gaming machine configured such that target sound source request data can be accessed by referring to a code storage section and the sound source request data storage section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to manage multiple sounds using a sound sequence request (sequence request) and to manage individual sounds registered in the sequence request. Increased freedom.

<Appendix H-5>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of the program of the presentation control device (see JP 2019-213753 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, the performance control system program is composed of a program commonly called a "single thread."

However, in a single-threaded system like the one described above, if a problem occurs in one of the multiple processes, the entire system must be restarted in order to restore normal operation.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to enable stable operation even if a malfunction occurs in part of the system by restarting only the part where the malfunction occurred, without shutting down the entire system.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (e.g., the sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) including an arithmetic processor (e.g., the CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processor (e.g., the GPU 2400 or the VPU 2410 shown in FIG. 375) for performing image processing connected to the arithmetic processor,
The arithmetic processor is configured with a plurality of core processors (e.g., four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The control unit is a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment) characterized in that it performs presentation control by using the multiple core processors.

(H-5-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The control unit is
A read-only memory (e.g., a sub-ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375 ) storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (e.g., a program for executing an OS);
A rewritable read/write memory (e.g., SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375 ),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a gaming machine that includes programs for executing multiple processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (e.g., programs for executing a master process, a graphics process, a sound process, and a lamp process).

(H-5-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The control unit is
a read-only memory in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs are stored;
A rewritable read/write memory;
Further, the game control unit performs control related to lottery in a game,
the control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program;
A first process (e.g., a master process) of the plurality of processes
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing a process in response to the command;
sending a request responsive to the command to a second process (e.g., a graphics process) of the plurality of processes;
the second process executes processing in response to the received request and transmits information in response to the request to a third process among the plurality of processes;
The third process (e.g., a sound process or a lamp process) is configured to perform processing according to the received information.

(H-5-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
The plurality of processes include a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or A third process including either a process of controlling light emission to the light emitting means,
The first process is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
Sending a request according to the command to the second process;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to the third process,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-5-5) The fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
The control unit is
a read-only memory in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs are stored;
A rewritable read/write memory;
the control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program;
A gaming machine configured so that in each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one of the multiple core processors.

(H-5-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
Each of the plurality of processes is provided with one intra-process common memory space (for example, an inter-thread communication area),
The gaming machine is configured such that the thread uses the intra-process common memory space to transmit and receive data with other threads within the same process.

(H-5-7) The seventh aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
The control unit is
a read-only memory in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs are stored;
A rewritable read/write memory;
the control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program;
In each process, a thread that executes an instruction of the control program is controlled to utilize one of the multiple core processors;
A gaming machine in which one of the multiple processes (e.g., a master process) is configured to collect survival information from each thread of the other processes indicating whether the thread is normal or not, and to centrally manage the status of each thread.

(H-5-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
One of the plurality of processes is
Collect survival information from each thread of other processes indicating whether the thread is normal or not, centrally manage the state of each thread,
If there is an abnormal thread, control the specified response,
The gaming machine is configured such that the response includes at least one of the following: restarting a process that has the abnormal thread; and displaying information regarding the abnormal thread on a predetermined display means. .

(H-5-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
Each of the plurality of processes is given one intra-process common memory space,
One process among the plurality of processes centrally manages the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of the other process,
The survival information is configured to include survival information collected by one thread (for example, the main thread of each process) from other threads via the intra-process common memory space in each of the other processes. Game machine.

(H-5-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The control unit is
a read-only memory in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs are stored;
A rewritable read/write memory;
the control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program;
In each process, a thread that executes an instruction of the control program is controlled to utilize one of the multiple core processors;
Each of the plurality of processes is assigned one intra-process shared memory space;
When threads of one process repeatedly perform processing with different execution cycles, one thread of the process outputs timing information to the shared memory space within the process, thereby making it possible to grasp the processing timing of other threads,
A gaming machine configured such that the timing information is assigned an identifier (e.g., SID=1, 2, etc. for a sound process) so that it can be determined which thread's execution period it corresponds to.

With a gaming machine having the above configuration, even if a malfunction occurs in part of the system, the entire system can be operated stably by restarting only the part where the malfunction occurred, without having to shut down the entire system.

In addition, with the gaming machine configured as described above, each of the main functions is multi-processed, and each process is multi-threaded. This means that even if a malfunction occurs in one process or thread, it is only necessary to restart the process or thread in which the malfunction occurred, and stable operation can be maintained without shutting down the entire subsystem of the performance control system.

<Appendix H-6>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of the program of the performance control device (see JP 2019-213753 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, data is exchanged between each process in the production control system program by reading data stored in a designated location in the memory from the memory by referring to the same designated location.

It is easy to create a program that exchanges data as described above, but when it is installed in an actual device, it is not possible to grasp the contents of the data stored in the memory from the outside, so a dedicated measuring device for debugging, such as an In-Circuit Emulator (ICE), is essential.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to enable easy debugging by grasping internal data without using a dedicated measuring instrument.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (for example, It has a sub-control unit 2100) shown in FIG. 375,
The arithmetic processing processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory (e.g., sub-ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375) in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (e.g., a program for executing an OS) are stored;
It has a rewritable read/write memory (for example, SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (for example, a master process, a graphics process, a sound process, a lamp process, etc.). It consists of a program that executes a process),
A gaming machine (for example, Pachislot machine 1) according to the twelfth embodiment.

(H-6-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The number of shared memories corresponding to the plurality of processes is individually secured (for example, as shown in FIG. 377, the master process exchanges data with the graphic process, sound process, and lamp process, In response to data reception from each process, the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp → Master" is secured, and in response to data transmission to each process, the shared memory "Graphic → Master" is secured. Master → Graphic”, “ANY → Sound”, “ANY → Lamp”),
A gaming machine configured to output data to the shared memory according to the process, and to input data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory.

(H-6-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The shared memory is allocated individually in a number corresponding to the plurality of processes,
outputting data to the shared memory corresponding to the process, and inputting data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory;
The gaming machine is configured so that the shared memory includes a first shared memory that inputs data from one process and outputs data to one process (for example, shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", etc.), and a second shared memory that inputs data from multiple processes and outputs data to one process (for example, shared memory "ANY → sound", "ANY → lamp", etc.).

(H-6-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
Furthermore, it has a game control section that controls the progress of the game,
A first process (for example, a master process) among the plurality of processes is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
Sending a request according to the command to a second process (e.g., a graphics process) of the plurality of processes via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to a third process (for example, a sound process or a lamp process) among the plurality of processes. send via shared memory,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
Furthermore, it has a game control section that controls the lottery in the game,
The plurality of processes include a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or , a third process including either a process of controlling light emission to the light emitting means,
The first process is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
transmitting a request according to the command to the second process via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information corresponding to the request to the third process via the shared memory,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The shared memory is configured to enable data input and output using a specified communication protocol (e.g., TCP) implemented in the process.

(H-6-7) The seventh aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
the shared memory is configured to enable data input/output according to a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
A gaming machine configured to enable an externally connected device (e.g., a PC connectable to the gaming machine) to send and receive data to and from the shared memory using the communication protocol.

(H-6-8) The eighth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
the shared memory is configured to enable data input/output according to a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
An external device can use the communication protocol to send and receive data to and from the shared memory;
The process is controlled to execute processing according to data input to the corresponding shared memory;
A gaming machine configured so that the processing of the process can be controlled by data input from the externally connected device to the shared memory.

(H-6-9) The ninth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth aspects.
In each process, a thread that executes an instruction of the control program is controlled to utilize one of the multiple core processors;
One of the processes (e.g., a master process)
centrally managing the states of each thread by collecting, via the shared memory, liveness information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of the other processes;
If an abnormal thread exists, the system controls the system to take a specific action.
The gaming machine is configured so that the response includes at least one of a process of restarting the process having the abnormal thread and a process of displaying information regarding the abnormal thread on a specified display means.

(H-6-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
In each process, a thread that executes an instruction of the control program is controlled to utilize one of the multiple core processors;
One of the processes is
centrally managing the states of each thread by collecting, via the shared memory, liveness information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of the other processes;
The gaming machine is configured so that the survival information includes survival information collected by one thread (e.g., the main thread of each process) from other threads in each of the other processes via a memory space (e.g., an inter-thread communication area) that can be commonly used within the process.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, data inside the gaming machine can be grasped and debugged easily without using a dedicated measuring device.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, data can be sent and received from a personal computer or the like to a process executed in the gaming machine via a LAN line or the like, so that easy debugging can be realized.

[Modified example of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 410 to 422, a further modification (extension) of the first gaming machine described in the first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as a modification of the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment. Also, some or all of the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines in this embodiment can be applied to the one described as a modification of the first gaming machine in this embodiment. be. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

In the first gaming machine described above, when a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell) is determined as a winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, first stop on the left), the AT A specification may be adopted in which the AT-related processing is advantageous and the AT-related processing is disadvantageous if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode.

In the first gaming machine described above, as an example of applying this specification, when a predetermined role is determined to be the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, SR1 is set as the SR information, whereas if a stop operation is not performed in the specific manner, SR2 is set as the SR information; when SR1 is set, the ceiling points are always decremented by 1, whereas when SR2 is set, the ceiling points may not be decremented by 1, thereby making the AT-related processing advantageous or disadvantageous.

The SR information is configured as information for identifying whether a player has played using a specific game method. Specifically, in a game in which the push order bell is won, it identifies whether the stop operation was performed on the first left stop (whether the first stop operation was performed on the first reel). In a game in which the push order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed on the first left stop, the SR information is set to "SR1". On the other hand, in a game in which the push order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the SR information is set to "SR2". In addition, in a game in which a role other than the push order bell is won, "SR0" is set regardless of the push order.

However, such specifications can also be applied to gameplay that is different from that described above, and it is believed that there is room for further improvements beyond those described in the section on the first gaming machine above, so these will be explained in this modified example.

In addition, with this specification, the predetermined role is configured so that when the stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is low, whereas when the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is high. As a result, the characteristics of the gaming machine as a whole are configured so that when the stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the awarding of game value is unfavorable, whereas when the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, the awarding of game value is unilaterally favorable.

Therefore, in this modification, basically, regardless of whether the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination or not, when the predetermined control conditions are satisfied, if the stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the AT Control is performed in which related decisions (AT-related processing) can be given preferential treatment, and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, control in which AT-related decisions (AT-related processing) can be given preferential treatment is not performed. Explain as a thing.

<Gameplay of the first gaming machine (modification)>
First, the flow of the game in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 410. Fig. 410 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in this modified example.

This is similar to the first gaming machine described above in that a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section are provided as states (gaming sections) in which a player plays a game. Further, in the above-described first gaming machine, the normal medium (non-advantageous section) was provided as the gaming state related to the gaming nature of the non-advantageous section, and this modification is also the same. The difference from the first gaming machine described above is that the gaming states related to the gaming nature of the advantageous section are CZ, ST, first bonus, and second bonus.

During CZ and ST, it is normally configured as an advantageous section (effect section), but it is easier to transition to AT state than during normal (advantageous section) (or under different conditions than during normal (advantageous section) The game state is more advantageous than the normal state (advantageous section) in that it is possible to decide whether to shift to the AT state or not. Also, during the first bonus and during the second bonus, the state is configured as an increase period (AT state), and basically the gaming state is the same as during the pseudo bonus in the first gaming machine described above. ing. Furthermore, in this modification, during the ST and during the second bonus, both gaming states constitute a consecutive chance zone. This will be discussed later.

When it is decided to move to a favorable zone during normal play (non-favorable zone), (the favorable zone transition lottery is won), the game will move to the normal play (favorable zone) (transition to favorable zone). In other words, the favorable zone will begin. It is also possible that the result of the favorable zone transition lottery can determine that the game will move to a CZ or the first bonus, and when this decision is made, the game may move directly to the corresponding state.

When the game is played during normal play (advantageous zone), and the CZ transition condition is met, a transition to the CZ occurs (CZ transition condition met). The CZ transition condition may be configured to be met, for example, when a CZ transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning role and the lottery is won, or when points are awarded according to the winning role (or the progress of the game period) and the points awarded reach a specified value (when the cycle is reached) (or when a CZ transition lottery is held when the cycle is reached and the lottery is won), (the condition is met). In other words, it is sufficient to be able to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

In addition, when the game is played during normal play (advantageous zone) and the AT transition condition is met, the game transitions to the first bonus (AT transition condition met). The AT transition condition may be configured to be met, for example, when an AT transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning role and the lottery is won, or when the above-mentioned cycle is reached and an AT transition lottery is held and the lottery is won (or the AT win is determined as a partial result of the CZ transition lottery). In addition, for example, the game may be configured to be met when the set ceiling game number or the number of CZ failures reaches a specified value. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to determine whether or not to transition to the first bonus for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

In addition, in this modified example, the main route for gameplay is basically to transition from normal mode (advantageous zone) to CZ, and then transition to the first bonus when the AT transition conditions are met during the CZ, so the probability of transitioning directly from normal mode (advantageous zone) to the first bonus is not necessarily high. Also, it may be configured so that when the AT transition conditions are met, it may be decided to transition to the second bonus in some cases.

In addition, during normal play (favorable zone), for example, in decisions related to whether or not a CZ transition condition is met, or decisions related to whether or not an AT transition condition is met, the decision probability is configured to differ depending on whether the current state is a favorable state or a non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is not favored.

For example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, it is made easier to win the CZ transition lottery at least compared to a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, it is made harder to win the CZ transition lottery at least compared to a favorable state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes the lottery not being held at all (or the lottery being held, but the lottery value for the winning lottery being set to "0", making it effectively unwinnable (or the lottery value for the winning lottery being set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually unwinnable)).

Also, for example, during normal play (advantageous section), when the current state is a favorable state, points are made easier to award compared to at least a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, points are made harder to award compared to at least a favorable state. Note that "making it harder to award" includes the case where the award decision itself is not made (or the award decision is made, but the decision result is always "0", so that points are not actually awarded (or the probability of the decision result being "1" or higher is extremely low, so that points are practically almost not awarded)). Of course, it is also possible to create a difference in such a manner that, for example, when a "watermelon" is drawn, "5" points are awarded in the favorable state, but only "1" point is awarded in the non-favorable state. Also, for example, if one point is awarded per game, the award process is performed in the favorable state, but the award process is not performed in the non-favorable state.

In addition, for example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, it is made easier to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, it is made harder to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a favorable state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes the lottery not being held at all (or the lottery being held, but the lottery value for the winning lottery being set to "0", making it effectively unwinnable (or the lottery value for the winning lottery being set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually unwinnable)).

In addition, for example, when in normal mode (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition condition is met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the AT transition condition is met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favoring is given). In addition, when in normal mode (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the AT transition condition is met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition condition is met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favoring is given).

The CZ is configured to be able to continue for a set period (e.g., 16 games), and if the AT transition conditions are met during that time, a transition to the first bonus occurs (CZ successful/AT wins). On the other hand, if the AT transition conditions are not met during that time, a transition to normal (advantageous zone) occurs (CZ failed/AT not won). The AT transition conditions during the CZ can be, for example, the same as those during normal (advantageous zone), or the same as those during the ST described below.

Regarding the preferential control described below, for example, when adopting AT transition conditions similar to those during normal (advantageous section) during CZ (or at least when adopting AT transition conditions different from those during ST) ), the same preferential control as during normal periods (advantageous sections) can be carried out, and when AT transition conditions similar to those during ST are adopted (or at least during normal periods (advantageous sections) (in the case of adopting AT transition conditions different from those in), preferential control similar to that during ST can be performed.

In addition, the AT transition conditions during the CZ can be different from these. For example, during the CZ, an expectation lottery is held in the first half of the CZ (for example, games 1 to 10) for each predetermined opportunity (for example, each time a specific role is won, or each time a game is played), to determine (or promote) the AT winning expectation, and in the second half of the CZ (for example, games 11 to 15), an AT lottery is held in each predetermined opportunity (for example, each time a specific role is won, or each time a game is played), using the determined AT winning expectation. If the lottery is won, an AT winning lottery (CZ success) is announced in the final game (for example, the 16th game), and the game moves to the first bonus from the next game, and if the lottery is not won, an AT non-winning lottery (CZ failure) is announced in the final game (for example, the 16th game), and the game returns to normal (advantageous zone) from the next game.

In this case, for example, in the first half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the expectation lottery at least compared to a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the expectation lottery at least compared to a preferential state. Also, in the second half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the AT lottery at least compared to a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the AT lottery at least compared to a preferential state. Note that the manner of "making it harder to win" is the same as that described above.

Note that the specified period during the CZ is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of games is managed, the period may be another period that does not change (e.g., 32 games), or another period that can change (e.g., one determined by lottery among 16 to 32 games). Also, for example, the number of times the AT lottery is performed may be specified (or determined by lottery), and the AT lottery may continue until the specified number of times (e.g., three times) have been performed. Also, for example, the continuation lottery may be performed a specified number of times (e.g., three times), and if a continuation lottery during the process results in a non-winning lottery, the CZ will fail and end, and if all continuation lotteries result in winning lots, the CZ will be successful and end.

In addition, during the CZ, it is sufficient that the final decision as to whether or not to transition to the first bonus can be made according to one or more lottery or decision results, and the manner in which this is done is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the timing of transition from the CZ to the first bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the transition to the first bonus may be made from the game following the game in which the AT transition condition is met, without waiting for the final game.

In addition, during CZ, it is basically configured as a normal advantageous section in a non-AT state, but during at least a part of the period (for example, from the start until the push order bell is won three times), AT is not possible. The AT state (increasing section) may be set, or the entire period may be configured as an AT state (increasing section).

During the first bonus, for example, the AT state (increasing section) is configured to be able to continue for a specified period (e.g., 20 games), and when the specified period of play is exhausted, the game transitions to the consecutive win zone (the first bonus end condition is met). During the first bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is held at least for each specified trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won, or for each game), and when this lottery is won, the value of the second bonus counter is incremented by 1. When the specified period of play is exhausted, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or more, the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by 1 and the game transitions to the second bonus, and if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game transitions to the ST.

Note that the specified period in the first bonus is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the above-mentioned period. For example, when managing the number of games, the period may be another period that does not change (for example, 25 games) or another period that can change (for example, by lottery among 20, 25, or 30 games). (determined). In addition, it may be managed by the number of times the navigation occurs when the push order bell is won (the number of navigations) (for example, it ends when the number of navigations reaches "10"), or it may be managed by the number of difference sheets. It may be something that is managed (for example, it ends when the difference in number of sheets exceeds "100").

During the second bonus, for example, there is an AT state (increasing period) that can be continued for a specified period (for example, 10 games), and one set ends when the games of the specified period are played. In addition, during the second bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is performed at least at every predetermined opportunity (for example, every time a specific winning combination is won or every single game), and when a win is won, the value of the second bonus counter is is added by 1. If the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or more when the prescribed period of games is played (when one set is completed) (including those added during the first bonus or ST) In this case, the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by 1, and then the next set in the second bonus is started. In addition, at this time (including when moving from the first bonus to the first time, and when moving from the ST), the prescribed period is determined by lottery (for example, the number of games is determined from among 10, 20, and 40 games). ), a prescribed period may be set according to the lottery result.

In addition, during the second bonus, when the prescribed period of games is completed (when one set is completed), if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game will move to ST. (Second bonus end condition met). It should be noted that various management methods can be adopted as the management method for the specified period in the second bonus, similar to that described in the explanation of the first bonus.

During the ST, for example, it is configured to be able to continue for a specified period (for example, 16 games), and if the second bonus transition condition is satisfied during that period, the transition will be made to the second bonus (second bonus transition condition satisfied). On the other hand, if the second bonus transfer condition is not satisfied during that time, the continuous winning zone ends (that is, the end of the advantageous section), the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is performed, and the normal period (non-bonus period) ends. (advantageous section) (end of consecutive chance zone).

During ST, the game is basically configured as a normal advantageous zone in a non-AT state, and an AT transition lottery (second bonus transition lottery) is held for each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific role is won, or each time a game is played), with a winning probability set according to the winning role and the type of lottery map described below, and a second bonus stock lottery is held for each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific role is won, or each time a game is played). In addition, when these lotteries (determinations) are made, the determination probability is configured to differ depending on whether the current state is a favorable state or a non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is not favored. This will be described in detail later using FIG. 412.

During ST, if the second bonus transfer lottery is won, the second bonus will be entered from the next game (which may be when the prescribed period of games has been played) (the second bonus transfer condition is met). In addition, when the specified period of gaming is completed without winning the second bonus transfer lottery, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or more, the value of the second bonus counter is subtracted by 1 and the second bonus transfer lottery is completed. 2 bonus (second bonus transition condition satisfied). On the other hand, if the specified period of gaming is completed without winning the second bonus transition lottery, and the value of the second bonus counter is also 0, the continuous winning zone ends as described above, and the regular (non-regular) (Advantageous section) (end of continuous zone). Note that various management methods can be adopted as the management method for the specified period during ST, similar to that described in the explanation during CZ.

In this way, in this modification, after the first bonus period ends, it is possible to go back and forth (loop) between the second bonus period and the ST period, and although the ST period itself is not configured as an increasing section, By configuring the game as a state in which there is a high degree of expectation for transition to the second bonus (the second bonus is likely to be played consecutively), it is possible to configure the game as a consecutive winning zone, which is a highly interesting playing period for the player. Additionally, during the second bonus, it may be possible to play the game continuously (extended), making it possible to increase the interest.

Note that a plurality of such consecutive zones may be provided. For example, the above-mentioned continuous change zone may be set as the first continuous change zone, and if a specific transition condition is satisfied in this first continuous change zone, the transition may be made to a more advantageous second continuous change zone. good. In this case, the specific transition condition may be, for example, established when the second bonus is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, a total of 5 sets) in the first consecutive winning zone. Further, for example, it may be established that the second bonus is executed for a specified period (for example, a total of 100 games) in the first consecutive chance zone. Of course, these are just examples, and various conditions that can be established depending on the player's game results can be adopted.

In addition, although the second consecutive chance zone is advantageous, for example, in the first consecutive chance zone, the probability of the second bonus consecutively winning (looping) is set to about 50 to 75% in total. On the other hand, in the second continuous chance zone, the probability is set to about 85% in total, and it is relatively easier to transition to the second bonus (the continuous chance zone becomes difficult to end). Also, for example, in the first successive chance zone, 40 games are determined with a predetermined probability as the specified period during the second bonus, whereas in the second successive chance zone, this 40 games are more likely to be decided, or, in the first successive chance zone, the winning probability of the second bonus stock lottery is a predetermined probability, but in the second successive chance zone, it is easier to win because of this. Therefore, it is also possible to adopt an aspect in which the degree of continuation during the second bonus per time is advantageous. Of course, these are just examples, and any mode can be adopted as long as it results in an advantage for the player.

Although not shown, various limit processes are activated in this modification as well. For example, in any of the states during the first bonus, during the second bonus, and during ST, an advantageous limit process is activated. When the value of the section game number counter becomes "1420" or more, or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2064" or more, the game shifts to the ending state. The ending state is configured as a state in which navigation can occur regarding the push order bell until the payout number limiter is activated or until the game number limiter is activated. In the ending state, if any of these limiters is activated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and a transition is made to the normal period (non-advantageous section).

In addition, in any state, if the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes ``1500'' or more, the number of games limiter is activated, and the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes ``2400'' or more. In this case, the payout number limiter is activated. In this case, as described above, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is performed, and a transition is made to the normal period (non-advantageous section).

Incidentally, since the game count limiter can only be activated by the number of games played, for example, a player who starts playing just before the activation may lose interest (as the limiter is activated immediately). Also, depending on the contents of the advantageous zone transition lottery, it may be more advantageous for the player to end the advantageous zone once and transition to a non-advantageous zone, so frequently ending the advantageous zone may not contribute to the appropriate management of gambling nature. From this perspective, it may be possible to configure the machine so that it is only equipped with a payout number limiter as a limiter, and not equipped with a game count limiter.

<Example of preferential control of the first gaming machine (modified example) (normal mode)>
Next, referring to Fig. 411, an example of preferential control during normal times (advantageous zone) in this modified example will be described. In Fig. 411, a schematic flow chart showing an example of the preferential control during normal times (advantageous zone) is shown in order to explain the preferential control example. Therefore, the specific control process in the preferential control is not necessarily limited to that shown in Fig. 411.

First, when the game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether the preferential treatment counter is 1 or more (S4001). The preferential treatment counter is a counter for managing whether the game is in preferential treatment or non-preferential treatment. When the game starts, if the preferential treatment counter is 1 or more, the game is controlled to be in preferential treatment, and the game is in preferential treatment. If the counter is 0, the game is controlled to be in a non-preferential state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential counter is 1 or more (S4001: YES), it sets the game state to the preferential state (S4002). Next, it decrements the preferential counter by 1 (S4003). Then, it moves the process to S4005.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential treatment counter is not greater than or equal to 1 (ie, 0) (S4001: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the state of the game to a non-preferential state (S4004). After that, the process moves to S4005.

Although not shown in FIG. 411, when the game state is set to the preferential state or non-preferential state by the processing of S4001 to S4004, the main CPU 101 refers to the setting result and makes decisions related to the AT state (e.g., during the first bonus), such as decisions related to whether the CZ transition condition is met or whether the AT transition condition is met.

For example, if the preferential treatment status is set, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as performing a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. In addition, in the game, processing such as awarding points and advancing the number of ceiling games is performed. On the other hand, if the non-preferential state is set, the main CPU 101 does not perform processing such as performing a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. Further, in the game, processing such as awarding points or advancing the number of ceiling games is not performed. However, the manner in which a preferential treatment status is made more advantageous than a non-preferential treatment status, or the manner in which a non-preferential treatment status is made disadvantageous in comparison with a preferential treatment status, is not limited to these. is as described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation for the game is the first left stop (S4005). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation has been performed in a specific manner in the game. This determination may be performed when the first stop operation is performed, or after the third stop operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation of the game is the first left stop (S4005: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a bonus counter addition lottery, and if the lottery is a win, it increments the bonus counter by 1 (S4006). After that, the process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation of the game is not the first left stop (NO in S4005), the main CPU 101 directly ends the process.

In the preferential counter addition lottery, for example, the probability denominator is set to ``65536'', and ``65535'' is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of ``1 preferential counter addition'', and the lottery result of ``no preferential counter addition'' is determined. The preferential counter addition lottery table in which "1" is assigned to the determined lottery value is referred to, and the lottery is performed based on the extracted random number value. In this case, it is determined that the preferential treatment counter will be incremented by 1 with a probability of "65535/65536," and it is determined that the preferential treatment counter will not be incremented with a probability of "1/65536." That is, in this modified example, in a game in a preferential state, even if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the value of the preferential treatment counter is sometimes not incremented by 1.

Note that the configuration of the preferential treatment counter addition lottery table described above is merely an example. For example, if the probability denominator is ``256'', ``255'' is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of ``add 1 to preferential counter'', and ``255'' is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of ``do not add preferential counter''. "1" may be assigned. That is, the lottery may be performed using a 1-byte random number instead of a 2-byte random number.

In addition, for example, the probability that "preferential counter not incremented" is determined may be increased from the above. For example, in the example of a 1-byte random number, "192" or "128" may be assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "preferential counter incremented by 1", and "64" or "128" may be assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "preferential counter not incremented". In other words, the probability may be set appropriately depending on the degree of advantage of the preferential state (or the degree of disadvantage of the non-preferential state). This is similar for the other examples.

For example, the probability denominator may be "65536", the lottery value for determining the lottery result of "increase the preferential counter by 1" may be assigned "65536", and the lottery value for determining the lottery result of "not incrementing the preferential counter" may be assigned "0". In other words, the lottery process itself may be performed, but if the stop operation of the game is the first left stop, the preferential counter may be essentially always incremented by 1. In addition, for example, if the main CPU 101 determines in the process of S4005 that the stop operation of the game is the first left stop, the process of S4006 may simply increment the preferential counter by 1, and no lottery may be performed.

In addition, in the process of S4005, if the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation of the game is the first left stop, a process is performed in which a preferential status is set for the next game in the process of S4006. If the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is other than the first left stop, a process is performed in which a non-preferential state is set for the next game in the subsequent process (temporarily referred to as S4007). Alternatively, such control may be performed without using a preferential treatment counter.

For example, the probability denominator may be "65536", the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 1" may be assigned "65534", the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 2" may be assigned "1", and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not adding the preferential counter" may be assigned "1". In other words, it may be possible that the preferential counter value may be added by 2 or more in one play, and it may be determined that the preferential state will continue for multiple plays depending on the result of one play.

In this way, the main CPU 101, through the processing of S4005 and S4006, in principle increments the preferential counter by 1 if the stop operation for the game is the first left stop. This sets the preferential state for the next game (see S4001 and S4002). On the other hand, in principle, if the stop operation for the game is not the first left stop, the preferential counter is not incremented. This sets the non-preferential state for the next game (see S4001, S4003, and S4004).

In other words, in this modified example, by performing the preferential control as described above, if a player plays at the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the preferential state, so if the player plays at the first left stop all the time, the game will basically be played in the preferential state all the time. On the other hand, if a player plays at any stop other than the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the non-preferential state, so if the player plays at any stop other than the first left stop all the time, the game will basically be played in the non-preferential state all the time.

In the above example, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the preferential treatment counter is incremented and updated in the process of S4006, so that the next game is in a preferential state. The control method is not limited to this. For example, after the processing of S4003 or S4004, but before the processing of S4005, processing is performed to increment the preferential treatment counter by 1, and if S4005 is YES, the process ends as is, whereas if S4005 is NO, the preferential treatment counter is incremented by 1. A counter subtraction lottery may be performed, and if the lottery is won, the preferential treatment counter may be decremented by 1, and the process may be terminated. In this case, for example, "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "1 subtraction of preferential counter", and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "do not subtract preferential counter". The selected preferential treatment counter subtraction lottery table may be referred to, and the lottery may be performed based on the extracted random number value.

In this case, the preferential counter subtraction lottery table may have, for example, a probability denominator of "65536", a lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 1" is assigned "65534", a lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 2" is assigned "1", and a lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not subtracting preferential counter" is assigned "1". In other words, it may be possible that the preferential counter value may effectively be subtracted by 2 or more in one play, and it may be determined that the non-preferential state will continue for multiple plays depending on the result of one play.

In addition, in this modification, the above-described preferential treatment control is configured so that it can be performed at least during the normal period (advantageous section) regardless of which winning combination is determined. That is, in this modification, the preferential control as described above can be executed in all games during the normal period (advantageous section). In addition, if the configuration is such that the same preferential control is performed during the CZ, the same applies during the CZ, and if the configuration is configured to perform the same preferential control during the ST, also during the ST. The same is true. That is, in this modification, at least when the control is not in the AT state (during the first bonus or the second bonus), preferential control as described above can be executed.

However, priority control as described above may also be executable in the AT state. For example, if there is a possibility that the control load will increase due to processing branching depending on whether or not the game is in the AT state, priority control as described above may always be executed. In this case, for example, in the AT state, various decisions and lotteries may be performed without referring to the value of the preferential counter. Alternatively, a process that adds 1 to the preferential counter for each game may be performed as a unique process in the AT state, so that the value of the preferential counter is always 1 or greater during the AT state. In this case, the initial value of the preferential counter may be set to "1" when the game transitions to ST.

Here, in the above-mentioned first gaming machine, there is a push order small combination in which the expected value of the game value given varies depending on the stop operation mode (batting order), such as "push order bell", and a push order small combination, such as "push order bell". The expected value of the game value given by the stop operation mode (batting order) other than the winning combination has unquestionable roles (for example, each replay role and each other minor role) that do not change, and the pressed order minor role is determined as the winning role. In a game where the stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, first stop on the left), the AT-related processing is advantageous, but the expected value of the game value awarded is low. If the stop operation is performed in a different manner (for example, other than the first left stop), the AT-related processing will be disadvantageous, but the expected value of the game value awarded will be higher. For example, the batting order may be set to non-AT preferential batting order). In this modification, these batting orders are constructed in a different manner.

Specifically, as described above, it is understood that the characteristics of the gaming machine as a whole are such that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the awarding of gaming value is unfavorable, whereas when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the awarding of gaming value is unilaterally favorable. Regardless of the winning role for each game, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, this is considered to be a preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a preferential state), and when a stop operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode, this is considered to be a non-preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a non-preferential state). In other words, all roles are subject to this preferential control.

However, since this kind of preferential control is basically based on the premise that games are played in the recommended gaming state, for example, bonus combinations (such as "F_BB", etc. ) may be excluded.

Also, for example, so-called rare roles such as "F_Cherry" and "F_Watermelon" may be excluded, which have a low probability of winning but are likely to be selected or determined in a manner that gives players high expectations. In addition, in the case of excluding rare roles, for example, if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role, the rare role is excluded, whereas if the current state is a non-favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role, the rare role is not excluded.

In addition, for example, if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined to be the winning role, it can be made ineligible if it is determined that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, for example by winning a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery, but it can be made ineligible if a transition to an advantageous state is not determined.

Further, it may be configured such that only the normal winning combination is subject to preferential control. It should be noted that the "normal role" here can be defined as, for example, all the roles except the bonus role as described above, or can be defined as all the roles except the bonus role and the rare role. Furthermore, when the game progresses in a carryover state of bonus winnings (between flags), it can also be defined as a winning combination other than the rare winnings between flags. For example, an overlapping combination of a small role such as a push-order bell and a bonus role between flags, or an overlapping role between a replay role and a bonus role between flags may be collectively treated as a "normal role." It can also be defined in a different way. For example, among all roles, roles that are subject to preferential control and roles that are not subject to preferential control are determined in advance (regardless of the type of role), and all roles that are subject to preferential control are normal. It can also be defined as a role. Note that the winnings that are subject to preferential control in this way are sometimes referred to as "penalty lottery" or the like.

Also, for example, for replay combinations, a push order replay is provided, and in the push order replay, a specific symbol combination is displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a specific symbol combination is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. If no operation is performed, the specific symbol combination is configured so that it is not displayed (however, both are ultimately awarded in a replay), and this push order replay and push order minor combination are It is also possible to define it as a normal role and to exclude other unquestioned roles.

<Example of preferential control of the first gaming machine (modification) (during ST)>
Next, an example of preferential control during ST in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 412. Fig. 412 shows an outline of a part of the game flow during ST in order to explain an example of preferential control during ST. Note that the same method as that described using Fig. 411 can be adopted to control each game to either the preferential state or the non-preferential state, or a different method can be adopted.

(Example of ST specifications)
First, an example of the specifications during ST will be described. As described above and as shown in FIG. 412, ST can be continued for a specified period (for example, 16 games). This specified period is managed by the ST game number counter, which is period management information. The value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one per game, regardless of whether the stop operation mode in the game is a regular push (first left stop) or an irregular push (other than the first left stop) (in other words, regardless of whether it is controlled to a preferential state or a non-preferential state). That is, the game period (period management information) in the ST state proceeds regardless of the batting order. The ST game number counter may be one that manages the corresponding information by subtractive update.

For example, if the variable display section is configured with three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), more specifically, if the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → middle → right", " When the stop operation is performed in the order of "left → right → middle", it is also called "scissor hitting", but in the explanation of FIG. (same as above), the first left stop (left → middle → right and both left → right → middle) is expressed as "sequential push". At least in this example, in the case of the first left stop, there is no particular difference between the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of left → center → right and the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → center (processing (The same treatment is applied above), processing regarding preferential treatment status is enabled at the time of the first stop. However, it is also possible to make a difference in the process of whether or not to give preferential treatment depending on the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of left → middle → right and the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → middle. For example, If the stop operation is performed in the order of left → middle → right, it is treated as a recommended batting method (stop operation that is a specific mode) that gives preferential treatment, and if the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → middle, it is treated as a second stop. At this point, it may be treated as if a non-recommended batting technique (a stopping operation that does not correspond to a specific pattern) has been made, similar to an irregular push (first stop in the middle, first stop on the right).

Further, a MAP game number counter is provided which is lottery management information for managing the degree of advantage during ST. The value of the MAP game number counter is configured such that it is incremented by 1 when the stop operation mode in the game is sequential pressing, and is not incremented when it is irregular pressing. The value of the MAP game number counter is used to set the lottery MAP, and basically the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery. That is, the degree of advantage (lottery management information) during ST changes to an advantageous one (progresses) in the case of a regular push, and does not change to an advantageous one (does not progress) in the case of an irregular push. Note that the MAP game number counter may manage the corresponding information by subtractive updating.

Also, although the probability is at least lower than in the case of irregular button presses, there may be cases where the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented even in the case of normal button presses. In this case, for example, the probability denominator is set to "65536", the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increment the MAP game number counter by 1" is assigned "65535", and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the MAP game number counter" is assigned "1", and a MAP game number counter increment lottery table is referenced, and the lottery is performed based on the extracted random value.

In addition, the value of the MAP game number counter may be incremented even when pressing buttons in an irregular order, although the probability is at least lower than when pressing buttons in the normal order. In this case, for example, a MAP game number counter increment lottery table in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the MAP game number counter" and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "incrementing the MAP game number counter by 1" is referenced, and the lottery is performed based on the extracted random number value.

As for the relationship between the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP, the basic relationship that the larger the value of the MAP game number counter, the more advantageous the lottery MAP is remains the same. For example, the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP may uniquely correspond to each other, and a lottery MAP may be set according to the value of the MAP game number counter, or one lottery MAP may be determined by lottery from among multiple lottery MAPs using a lottery value according to the value of the MAP game number counter.

In addition, regarding the lottery MAP, for example, the degree of advantage can be changed to an advantageous one in such a way that the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery increases as the lottery progresses (the lottery value at which a win is determined increases). The degree of advantage may be made variable, or the degree of advantage may be increased as the target combination for which the second bonus transition lottery is performed progresses (as a result, the probability of winning becomes higher). It may also be possible to vary the value. Further, the degree of advantage may be changed to an advantageous one by combining these. Note that these are just examples, and the degree of advantage may be changed to an advantageous one in other manners.

To illustrate with the drawing shown in FIG. 412, for example, when the lottery map is "A", the lottery target combinations are "Watermelon" and "Cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and the winning is determined for each. It is assumed that "1" is assigned to the lottery value, and "255" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined. In addition, when the lottery map is "B", the lottery target combinations are "Watermelon" and "Cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and "2" is assigned to the lottery value for which the winning is determined for each. , "254" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined. In addition, when the lottery map is "C", the lottery target combinations are "Watermelon" and "Cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and "3" is assigned to the lottery value for which the winning is determined for each. , "253" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined.

In addition, when the lottery map is "D", the winning combinations to be drawn are "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Special Prize", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value for which the winning is determined is " It is assumed that "1" is assigned to the lottery value and "255" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined. In addition, when the lottery map is "E", the lottery target combinations are "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Special Prize", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value for which the winning is determined is " It is assumed that "2" is assigned to the lottery value and "254" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined. In addition, when the lottery map is "F", the lottery target combinations are "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Special Prize", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value for which the winning is determined is " 3" is assigned, and "253" is assigned to the lottery value for which non-winning is determined. For example, it can be configured such that the degree of advantage increases sequentially in this way.

(Control Example 1)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played in order will be explained as control example 1 (see (a) of Figure 412).

In the first game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

In the second game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

In the third game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

In the fourth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "D", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

In the fifth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "E", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

In the sixth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Further, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "F", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

(Control example 2)
Next, in the 1st to 6th games during ST, a case where the first game is played by irregular pressing and the remaining games are played by sequential pressing will be explained as control example 2 (see (b) in FIG. 412). .

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. In addition, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that since this game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed either.

In the third game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Further, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "B", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

In the fourth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

In the fifth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Further, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "D", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

In the sixth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Also, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "E", and a second bonus stock lottery is held.

Compared to Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery map has progressed to "F" in the sixth game, whereas in Control Example 2, the lottery map has only progressed to "E" in the sixth game. In addition, in Control Example 2, since the second game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery and the second bonus stock lottery are not conducted in that game (as an example, no lottery is conducted). In other words, in Control Example 2, even if, for example, the "push order bell" is drawn in the first game and the correct hitting order is accidentally obtained and a lot of play value is awarded, at least the AT-related processing is less favorable than Control Example 1, and the play period during ST is not extended, so overall it may be less favorable to the player than Control Example 1.

(Control Example 3)
Next, a case in which the first to fourth games of the first to sixth games during ST are played using irregular button presses and the remaining games are played using normal button presses will be explained as control example 3 (see (c) of Figure 412).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. In addition, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held according to the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the third game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the fourth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. On the other hand, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed either.

In the fifth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the sixth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. Also, since the game was played in order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Further, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "B", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

Here, when comparing with Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery MAP progresses to "F" in the 6th game, whereas in Control Example 3, the lottery MAP progresses to "F" in the 6th game. It has only progressed up to "B". Further, in control example 3, since the second to fifth games are controlled to be in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery and the second bonus stock lottery are not performed in the game (as an example, no lottery is performed). That is, in control example 3, in the first to fourth games, for example, even if you win the "push order bell" and accidentally get the correct batting order, and a lot of game value is awarded, at least the AT-related processing This is more disadvantageous than control example 1, and since the playing period during ST is not extended, overall, this may be more disadvantageous to the player than control example 1.

(Control Example 4)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played using irregular button presses will be explained as control example 4 (see (d) in Figure 412).

In the first game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is performed according to the winning combination and the lottery MAP "A", and the second bonus stock lottery is also performed.

In the second game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by 1. On the other hand, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not held, and the second bonus stock lottery is not held either.

In the third game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the fourth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the fifth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In the sixth game, first, the value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one. On the other hand, since the game was played with irregular presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Note that since the game is controlled in a non-preferential state, the second bonus transfer lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed.

In this case, in control example 4, if the game is played with irregular button presses for the entire ST period, the same control is performed from the 7th to 15th games. Then, in the 16th game, this game becomes the final game in which it can be determined whether or not the second bonus will be awarded during ST, but since this game is also controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not performed, and the second bonus stock lottery is not performed either.

Then, in the next game (for example, if the second bonus stock lottery was won in the first game, there may be a transition to the second bonus), basically no decision is made as to whether or not the second bonus will be awarded, and the game is controlled to a ST end preparation state for one game in order to display the results of the consecutive win zone (for example, how many sets of the second bonus were executed during the consecutive win zone and how many coins were won, etc.), and the ST ends for that game, which also ends the consecutive win zone (i.e., the advantageous period ends).

<Example of control of anticipation presentation in the first gaming machine (variation example)>
Next, a control example of the expectation effect of this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 413 to Fig. 420. Fig. 413 and Fig. 414 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 1) when effect data 1 is determined, Fig. 415 and Fig. 416 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 2) when effect data 2 is determined, and Fig. 417 to Fig. 420 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 3) when effect data 3 is determined. In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, this control example will be described assuming that the variable display section has three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, right reel 3R) as in this embodiment.

Furthermore, the term "expectation performance" here refers to a performance that can give a certain sense of expectation to the player. For example, during a normal game (advantageous section), a game in which a player wins a rare combination is executed. (which can be performed even in a game where a winning role is not a rare role), or a performance that has been decided to move to CZ (or during the first bonus) but is still in CZ (or during the first bonus) This is an effect that can be executed in a precursor state that has not yet transitioned to (it can also be performed in a so-called false precursor state).

In other words, it notifies the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur (or does not occur), or suggests the possibility that a situation advantageous to the player may occur (for example, its level or degree of expectation). It can also be defined as a performance that makes it possible to Further, such notification or suggestion is made by changing the performance contents (the performance progresses) according to the progress of the game.

Note that the above-mentioned application is just an example, and of course it can also be used for other applications. For example, during CZ or ST, it may announce or suggest the expectation of AT state transition, or during the first bonus or second bonus, it may announce or suggest the expectation of AT state extension. It may be something. Furthermore, in this example, as an example of anticipation performance, notifications or suggestions are given by changes in display content (progress of display content) on the main performance display section 21, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, lamps and speakers It is also possible to advance the performance according to the performance mode of other performance execution means such as the above, and to provide such notification or suggestion.

(Control example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 413 and 414, a control example (control example 1) when performance data 1 is determined as an example of expectation performance will be described. In this example, FIG. 413 is a diagram schematically showing the progress of the display contents when the stop operation is performed by forward pressing (left first stop) and the game progresses, and FIG. In an example, it is a diagram schematically showing the progress of display contents when a stop operation is performed other than the forward press (other than the first left stop) and the game progresses.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the expected level (the "Find the treasure!" display screen in Figures 413 and 414), and then the performance begins to progress (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figures 413 and 414).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 413, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the performance further progresses (in FIG. 413, the display screen of "Where is it? Where is it?").

Next, when the second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses, and the production further progresses (in FIG. 413, "Where? Where? Where is it?” display screen).

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation is performed. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the display screen of "GET! CHANCE!" in FIG. 413). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the display screen of "Too bad..." in FIG. 413). In this way, when pressing in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the presentation has started, a stop operation is performed on any stop other than the first left stop, as shown in FIG. 414. In this case, the presentation stops, and then a standby display corresponding to that presentation is displayed (the "Waiting for Treasure Stage" display screen in FIG. 414). This standby display continues even if the second or third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on any stop other than the first left stop, the presentation will no longer progress, and the player will no longer be shown the specified sense of expectation.

In gaming machines where a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, AT-related processing may be disadvantageous. It is preferable to use a situational explanation effect such as audio or text to explain the situation, such as "The middle reel is stopped first" or "The right reel is stopped first". When operating with the left first stop, this kind of situational explanation effect does not occur, so it is possible to make the player who made the irregular press feel a little uncomfortable, and arouse the desire to stop the left reel first. .

Such a situation explanation effect may be generated when the standby display appears. In addition, such a situation explanation effect may be generated only in games where irregular button presses put the AT processing at a disadvantage, or may be possible in games where irregular button presses are performed in so-called normal games where the batting order navigation does not occur and the AT processing is not at a disadvantage. The timing of the occurrence of the situation explanation effect may be when the stop button is pressed, when the stop button is released, or when the reel that has been stopped stops.

Further, the situation explanation effect may be generated only at the first stop, or may be generated repeatedly at the second and subsequent stops. For example, if you stop in the order of middle → right → left, at the first stop "the middle reel is stopped first", at the second stop "the right reel is stopped", and at the third stop A situational explanation such as a voice saying "The left reel is stopped" may be performed.

Further, the situation explanation performance may be, for example, a special mode in which the lower panel (waist panel 13), the lamps around the reel, the decorative lamps such as the reel backlight are turned off, flashing, etc., which is different from the normal lighting state. For example, if you stop from the left, the lower panel will remain lit, and if you stop from the middle or right, the lower panel will turn off. It is possible to make the player infer that the operation mode of stopping the game will cause some kind of disadvantage.

By performing this type of situational explanation, players who have accidentally stopped the middle or right reel due to an operational error can be told to stop the left first reel, etc. without making them feel uncomfortable with a direct warning. It is possible to encourage players to play games in the recommended gaming mode.

(Control example 2)
First, with reference to FIGS. 415 and 416, a control example (control example 2) when performance data 2 is determined as an example of expectation performance will be described. In this example, FIG. 415 is a diagram schematically showing the progress of the display contents when the stop operation is performed by forward pressing (left first stop) and the game progresses, and FIG. In an example, it is a diagram schematically showing the progress of display contents when a stop operation is performed other than the forward press (other than the first left stop) and the game progresses.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the level of expectation (the display screen "Run away from the enemy!" in Figures 415 and 416), and then the performance begins to progress (the display screen "Hurry!" in Figures 415 and 416).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 415, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the performance further progresses (in FIG. 415, the display screen of "Hurry! Hurry!").

Next, when the second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses, and the production further progresses (in Figure 415, "Hurry! Hurry! Hurry!” display screen).

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, an advantageous result is displayed (the "Success!" display screen in FIG. 415). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Failure..." display screen in FIG. 415). In this way, when pressing in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progress of the performance has started, a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, as shown in FIG. 416. In this case, the progress of the performance is stopped, and after that, a standby display corresponding to the performance is displayed (the display screen indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 416. Note that this is the same as control example 1). (This merely indicates that a different standby display will be performed; for example, a display screen that is easy to recognize as corresponding to the production may be displayed, such as "Escape Stage Waiting"). This standby display continues even when the second stop operation or the third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. That is, if a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, the performance will no longer proceed, and the player will no longer have a predetermined sense of expectation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned control example 1 and control example 2, if the first stop operation is other than the left first stop, the standby display corresponding to each production is performed from that time, The timing at which the standby display starts is not limited to this. For example, it may be when the second stop operation is performed, or when the third stop operation is performed. Furthermore, the timing at which the standby display starts may be different for each. This also applies to control example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned control example 1 and control example 2, in order to illustrate that there are multiple different types of anticipation effects, it has been explained that there is an anticipation effect in control example 1 and an anticipation effect in control example 2, but of course, the types of such effects are not limited to two. It is possible to configure so that there are more than two types in which at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect. In addition, in the below-mentioned control example 3, in order to illustrate the case where the above-mentioned control example 1 is part of a continuous effect, it has been explained that there is an anticipation effect in control example 3, but of course, the types of such effects are not limited to one type. It is possible to configure so that there are more than two types in which at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect.

In addition, in the above-mentioned control examples 1 and 2, when performing a standby display, a unique standby display corresponding to each production is performed so as to avoid discrepancies with the content of each production as much as possible. However, for example, a common standby display may be performed in order to reduce the amount of data. This also applies to control example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in control example 1 and control example 2 described above, when the first stop operation is other than the first left stop, the standby display is uniformly performed, but for example, the effect to be executed is ultimately advantageous. If the result is to be displayed, the standby display may not be performed, but if the result is ultimately to be displayed, the standby display may be performed. In other words, even if the game is played at a position other than the first stop on the left and is controlled to a non-preferential state, it does not (or is difficult to affect) the gaming situation (for example, if the player has already won the AT lottery) (for example, when the AT state is scheduled to be transferred from the next game), the standby display may not be performed. This also applies to control example 3, which will be described later.

On the other hand, for example, if the effect to be executed is one that will ultimately display an unfavorable result, the standby display may not be performed, but if the effect is to ultimately display an advantageous result, the standby display may be performed. . That is, if the performance is originally a fake performance and the final result is not displayed, but it is not necessarily disadvantageous to the player, the standby display may not be performed. This also applies to control example 3, which will be described later.

Further, the expectation performance in the control example 1 and control example 2 described above may be configured as a single performance, or may be configured as part of a continuous performance. For example, in the case where the performance is configured as a one-shot performance, the same performance as the performance may be executed again in the next game after the game in which the performance is performed and the standby display is performed. Alternatively, in the game following the game in which the performance has been performed and the standby display has been performed, the performance lottery may not be performed and there may be no performance (except for the basic display screen). Further, the standby display may be started and then terminated when a start operation for starting the next game is performed. In this case, when the display of the standby display ends, the display of the scheduled effect may be started or resumed. Note that the display of the standby display may end not when the start operation is performed, but when the bet operation for the next game is performed.

Alternatively, in the next game after the game in which the effect was performed and the standby display was displayed, the standby display displayed in the previous game may continue to be displayed as is. In this case, if a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order in the next game, the same effect as the previous game may be executed again in the next game (the game two games after the game in which the standby display was initially displayed), or the effect may be determined according to normal rules without special control. In the next game after the game in which the effect was performed and the standby display was displayed, the effect may be determined according to normal rules without special control.

In addition, for example, if the consecutive effects are configured, then in the game following the game in which the effect was performed and the standby display was displayed, the same effect as that performed in the game in which the standby display was displayed may be executed again. For example, suppose the consecutive effects are configured as two games in which the first effect is executed in the first game and the second effect is executed in the second game. In this case, if all games are played in order, the first effect is executed in the first game and the second effect is executed in the second game.

On the other hand, for example, if the first game is played by irregular pressing, the standby display will be performed from the middle of the first performance in the game. At this time, in the second game, the first effect is executed again, and if the second game is played in order, the first effect is executed to the end in the game, and the second effect is executed in the third game. to be executed. Further, at this time, if the second game is played by irregular pressing, the same control as the first game may be performed in the game. That is, in the second game, the standby display is performed from the middle of the first effect, and in the third game, the first effect is executed again, and if the third game is played in order, the first effect is displayed in the game. The effect may be executed until the end, and the second effect may be executed in the fourth game.

For example, if the first game is played by pressing buttons in order and the second game is played by pressing buttons in an irregular sequence, a standby display will be displayed from the middle of the second performance in that game. At this time, the second performance will be executed again in the third game, and if the third game is played by pressing buttons in order, the second performance will be executed to the end in that game. At this time, if the third game is played by pressing buttons in an irregular sequence, the same control as for the second game may be performed in that game. That is, a standby display will be displayed from the middle of the second performance in the third game, and the second performance will be executed again in the fourth game, and if the fourth game is played by pressing buttons in order, the second performance will be executed to the end in that game.

However, if irregular button presses are constantly being performed, causing problems with the same effect being repeated over and over, an upper limit (e.g., 10 games) can be set for the number of games that such control can be performed on, and if the effect is not completed even after the upper limit of games has been played, control can be performed to end the effect midway. Note that a control example for when it is configured as a continuous effect will be described in detail later using Control Example 3 below.

The control of displaying the standby screen when play is not performed by pressing the buttons in order may also be performed when an effect other than an anticipation effect is executed. In other words, the effects for which such control is performed are not limited to anticipation effects. For example, such control may also be performed when a development effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether the effect will continue (develop) thereafter. Also, for example, such control may also be performed when a battle effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether or not to transition to an AT state during a CZ or ST. Also, for example, such control may also be performed when a general effect is executed that can notify or suggest a winning role or state. In other words, the effect for which such control is performed may be any of all effects.

(Control Example 3)
Next, a control example (control example 3) in which the performance data 3 is determined as an example of the anticipation performance will be described with reference to Fig. 417 to Fig. 420. Fig. 417 and Fig. 418 are diagrams that show the progress of the display contents in this example when the game progresses by performing a stop operation by pushing in order (first stop on the left) in the first and second games, and Fig. 419 and Fig. 420 are diagrams that show the progress of the display contents in this example when the game progresses by performing a stop operation by pushing in order (other than first stop on the left) in the first game, and when the game progresses by performing a stop operation by pushing in order (first stop on the left) in the second game.

In this example, at the start operation of the first game, after an introductory display (the display screen of "Find the treasure!" in Figures 417 and 419) showing the content and expectations of the performance, the progress of the performance is shown. It has started (the "Where is it?" display screen in FIGS. 417 and 419).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 417, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the performance further progresses (the display screen of "Where is it? Where is it?" in FIG. 417).

Next, when the second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses, and the production further progresses (in Figure 417, "Where? Where? Where is it?” display screen).

Next, when the third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, the performance progresses further as the third stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in FIG. 417, "NEXT... ” display screen). In other words, it is indicated that the performance does not end in the first game, but continues in the second game.

Next, when the start operation for the second game is performed, the presentation progresses further as the start operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 418, the display screen for "Where is it?!").

At this time, as shown in FIG. 418, assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the display screen in FIG. 418 reads "Where is it? Where is it?").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 418, the display screen shows "Where is it?! Where is it?! Where is it?").

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the display screen "GET! CHANCE!" in FIG. 418). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the display screen "Too bad..." in FIG. 418). In this way, when both the first and second games are pressed in order, the final display content of the second game (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progress of the performance has started in the first game, a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, as shown in FIG. 419. In this case, the progress of the performance is stopped, and after that, in the first game, a standby display corresponding to the performance is displayed ("treasure stage standby" display screen in FIG. 419). This standby display continues even when the second stop operation or the third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. That is, in a game in which a stop operation is performed other than the first left stop, the performance will no longer proceed.

However, when the second game is started, as shown in FIG. 420, the presentation of the first game is executed again in the second game. Specifically, when the start operation of the second game is performed, the presentation starts (resumes) as the start operation is performed and the game progresses (the "Where is it?" display screen in FIG. 420). Note that, although no introductory display is performed in FIG. 420, it is also possible to configure the presentation to be executed again from the beginning, including the introductory display.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 420, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the performance further progresses (in FIG. 420, the display screen of "Where is it? Where is it?").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (the display screen of "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?" in Figure 420).

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will continue as the game progresses after the third stop operation is performed (the display screen in FIG. 420 shows "NEXT..."). In other words, it indicates that the presentation will not end in the second game, but will continue into the third game.

After that, in the third game, if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the control to advance the effect is performed in the same way as shown in FIG. If so, the effect up to the start operation shown in FIG. 418 is executed again, and then control is performed to wait for the progress of the effect, similar to that shown in FIG. 419.

In addition, in the second game, if a stop operation is performed other than the first left stop, the same control as in the first game (see Figure 419) will be performed again, and in the third game, the second game will be restarted. Control similar to that for the eyes (see FIG. 420) will be performed.

(Example of control when power is restored)
When a power interruption occurs when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 34 is turned off (the power is turned off) or when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off due to other factors such as a power outage, and then the power supply is resumed and the machine returns from the power interruption state, the game state and presentation state will basically return to the state before the power interruption. Here, if the above-mentioned standby display was being performed at the time of the power interruption, the following modes can be given as the modes of return.

In the first mode, the standby display is displayed (resumed) when the power is restored after a power outage. For example, if an arcade closes and the power is turned off while the standby display is displayed, and the power is then turned on when the arcade opens the next day without any changes to the settings, if the standby display is released, the player playing first will be playing without knowing that the first game is controlled to a non-preferential state, and the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. This first mode can prevent such problems from occurring.

The second aspect is that when the power is restored, instead of the standby display, another display (for example, an initial screen is displayed) is performed. For example, if the game store closes and the power is turned off while the standby display is still displayed, and the power is turned on when the store opens the next day without changing the settings, the standby display will resume. However, if the initial screen is displayed when the settings are changed, it will be easy to tell whether the settings have been changed by whether or not the standby display is displayed when the store opens. This may result in the game arcade suffering an unexpected disadvantage. According to this second aspect, occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed. Note that the same applies to the first aspect described above, but it is desirable to perform display control so that at least the display mode at the time of recovery from power failure and the display mode at the time of setting change described below are the same. it is conceivable that. In this way, the above-mentioned problem can be prevented from occurring in either embodiment. Furthermore, the initial screen referred to here corresponds to, for example, a screen that displays the so-called stay stage during normal times. Note that a display screen dedicated to the non-advantageous section may be provided and this may be used as the initial screen, or a stage display screen or the like that can be displayed in both the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section may be provided and this may be used as the initial screen.

(Example of control when changing settings)
When the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed (when a setting change is made) by operating the setting key switch 52 or the like, if the above-mentioned standby display was displayed during play before the setting change, the following are examples of the manner in which the display may return.

The first mode is a mode in which the standby display is intentionally performed even after the setting is changed. As mentioned above, if the power is turned off and on without changing the settings, the standby display will resume, but if the settings are changed, the initial screen will be displayed. It becomes easy to tell whether a setting change has been made based on whether or not a standby display is displayed when the store opens, and the game store may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. According to this first aspect, occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed.

In the second mode, after the setting is changed, instead of the standby display, another display (for example, the initial screen is displayed) is performed. Even if a stop operation was performed by pressing the irregular buttons in the previous game, the initialization process performed when the setting is changed will not cause the first game after the setting is changed to be in a non-preferential state (in this case, the preferential counter can be incremented by 1 in a fixed process in the first game), and since the presentation data is also initialized in the first place, there is no possibility that the first player will suffer a disadvantage.

In addition, for example, the pachislot machine 1 can be configured to perform a special reset operation in which, as an initialization procedure different from the setting change procedure using the setting key switch 52, the reset button (not shown) provided on the main control board 71 is pressed in the power-off state (i.e., a predetermined initialization operation is performed on the initialization operation means) and the power is turned on (i.e., a predetermined power-on operation is performed), and the advantageous zone is reset (initialized) with the settings unchanged (i.e., the advantageous zone ends, the initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone is performed, and then the non-advantageous zone is entered). In this case, if the above-mentioned standby display is performed before the special reset operation is performed, the standby display may not be displayed after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset), and an initial screen similar to that described above may be displayed, for example. Of course, in order to make it difficult to detect that such a special reset operation has been performed, the standby display may be displayed after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset). When the special reset operation is performed, the state related to the advantageous zone is initialized and the non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state, but if the specification is such that the carryover state of the bonus role is the recommended play state, the information related to the carried-over bonus role (information in the carry-over role storage area) may be maintained.

(Other control examples)
After the start operation, an operation performance accompanied by a predetermined performance operation (for example, the above-mentioned operation-linked performance) may be performed. This is a performance in which a response performance such as an expectation suggestion occurs in response to an operation on a predetermined performance operation means such as a chance button (for example, the above-mentioned performance buttons 10a and 10b) or a touch panel (for example, the above-mentioned sub-performance display unit 22). In this case, if no operation is performed on the target performance operation means after the start of the reception of the performance operation, the operation is waited for, but if an irregular press is performed even in this operation wait state, the display switches to a standby state, the operation wait state for the performance operation is also terminated, and it is desirable that the response performance scheduled in the operation performance does not occur even if the performance operation means is operated thereafter. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is difficult for the player to understand, in which a response performance having a role of expectation suggestion occurs during a standby display.

In addition, if the specification allows you to set the production status (for example, volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) even when the reels are rotating or stopped, even if the standby display due to irregular presses is displayed. It may also be possible to set the performance state at a timely manner. In addition, if the specification is such that the production state cannot be set while the reels are rotating, but the production state can be set (volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) while the reels are stopped, even if the standby display due to irregular presses is displayed. It may be possible to set the production state while the reels are stopped. In addition, the same applies to the display of the user menu screen, which allows you to display the gaming history, display the mobile-linked menu, display some payout tables, display the game flow, etc., and display the standby display due to irregular presses. However, if it is possible to display these according to the specifications, it may be possible to display them according to a predetermined operation as in normal times. In addition, the performance state setting can be performed at any time, even in the operation waiting state in the above-described operation performance, if it is possible to set this according to the specifications.

In addition, after the start operation is performed, during the period from the start of the reel rotation until the constant speed rotation, the above-mentioned pseudo game may be performed, such as performing a reel rotation operation and temporarily stopping the reel based on pressing the stop button. be. In such a pseudo-game, even if a stop operation is performed by an irregular press, it does not become a non-recommended hitting method, so a standby display is not performed, and AT-related processing may be prevented from becoming disadvantageous. Furthermore, during the pseudo game, as mentioned above, it is desirable that a pseudo game display such as "FREE PLAY" be displayed in order to make it clear that the pseudo game is being played. Furthermore, if a pseudo game is to be played while the standby display is being displayed, a pseudo game in progress display may be performed together with the standby display.

<Modification of the push order bell of the first gaming machine (modification) and an example of transmission information control>
Next, referring to Fig. 421 and Fig. 422, the configuration of the modified push order bell of this modified example and the control example of the transmission information to be transmitted to the sub side will be described. The control example of the transmission information of this modified example can be said to be the control example of the transmission information of the first gaming machine as it is. However, in this modified example, the one shown in Fig. 421 is described as transmission information control example 1, and the one shown in Fig. 422 is described as transmission information control example 2.

In addition, in this modified example, the variable display unit will be described as having three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, right reel 3R). In addition, in the modified example of the push order bell, some of the role configurations have been changed from the first gaming machine to explain the case where roles other than the push order bell are grouped in the same way. This will be described in detail later.

(Hold configuration of modified example of push order bell)
In the modified example shown in FIG. 421, for example, the internal winning combinations include the replay combinations "F_Normal Rep" and "F_Cherry," and the small combinations "F_Common Bell" and "F_Push Order Bell A_123" to " F_Push order bell A_321" (Modified example "Push order bell A"), "F_Push order bell B_213" to "F_Push order bell B_321" (Modified example "Push order bell B"), "F_2 1 choice The winning combination includes "Hold A", "F_2-choice 1-card hand B", "F_Common 1-card hand A", "F_Common 1-card hand B", and "F_Watermelon".

"F_Normal Replay" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or the position pressed, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded. Also, "F_Cherry" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or the position pressed, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded.

The "F_Common Bell" is a minor symbol combination that will be displayed regardless of the batting order or the position where it is pressed, resulting in a 13-coin win.

The modified "Push Order Bell A" has six options for the push order minor feature, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing position and 1 coin is won, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also incorrect, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (1/2 of the time the pressing position is correct), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won, if the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no winning occurs (0 coins are won).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" has a push order minor feature with four options, where the first stop on the left is not stipulated as the correct hitting order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing position and 1 coin is won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also incorrect, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (1/2 of the time the pressing position is correct), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won, and if the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no winning occurs (0 coins are won).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" is configured so that the first stop on the left will never result in the correct batting order, but any stop other than the first stop on the left may result in the correct batting order. The first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unfavorable in terms of the award of game value, and any stop other than the first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unilaterally favorable in terms of the award of game value, making it a push order minor role that constitutes a biased bell.

Also, as shown in FIG. 421, by configuring the modified "Push Order Bell B" in this way, when viewed as a whole gaming machine, if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "123" or "132", the expected winning value is "1.1612", whereas if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "213", "231", "312" or "321", the expected winning value is "2.716". In other words, if the stopping operation is performed at the first left stop, the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than if the stopping operation is performed at any stop other than the first left stop.

However, the expected winning value mentioned above is the expected winning value per game in a non-AT state (i.e., in a situation where a favorable stop operation mode is not notified), and since the number of bets required to play one game is three, the expected winning value is configured so that in a non-AT state, no matter what batting order is used, the expected winning value will not exceed "3" (in other words, the payout rate will not exceed "1"). Therefore, for example, even if the player continues to perform the stop operation on anything other than the first left stop in a non-AT state, it is not configured so that, at least probabilistically, the player will be able to continue to increase the game value.

"F_2 choice 1-card hand A" and "F_2 choice 1-card hand B" are small roles with two choices at the press position, not in the batting order. For example, "F_2 choice 1-card hand A" is determined as the winning hand. If the pressed position is appropriate for the predetermined reel (the pressed position is correct at 1/2 timing (first timing)), the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed and a 1-piece winning will occur. If the pressed position for a given reel is not appropriate (the pressed position will be incorrect at the remaining 1/2 timing (second timing)), a missed prize will occur and no prize will be won (0 coins). , In addition, when "F_2-choice 1-card combination B" is determined as the winning combination, if the pressed position for the predetermined reel is appropriate (the pressed position will be correct at 1/2 timing (second timing)) , the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a 1-piece winning occurs, and if the pressed position for the predetermined reel is not appropriate (the pressed position becomes incorrect at the remaining 1/2 timing (first timing)), There is a chance that some tickets will be missed and no winnings will be made (zero coins will be awarded).

"F_Common 1-piece Role A" and "F_Common 1-piece Role B" are minor roles, and regardless of the batting order or the pressed position, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a 1-piece win occurs.

"F_watermelon" is a minor winning combination that will display the corresponding symbol combination regardless of the batting order or the pressing position, resulting in a 5-coin win. Note that this "F_watermelon" can also be configured so that if the pressing position on a specific reel is appropriate, a 5-coin win will occur, but if the pressing position on a specific reel is inappropriate, a 1-coin win will occur.

(Example of transmission information control for a variation of the push order bell (part 1))
Next, referring to Fig. 421, the setting mode of the internal lottery information and instruction information using the modified push order bell will be described. Note that this is called the transmission information control example (part 1) in order to distinguish it from the transmission information control example (part 2) described later with reference to Fig. 422.

Transmission information control example (part 1) is a control example configured to transmit some information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub side for each game even in a non-AT state. In contrast, transmission information control example (part 2) is a control example configured to not transmit information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub side basically when in a non-AT state.

(Setting mode 1 in non-AT state (favorable zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 421 shows an example of a setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 1, if "F_Normal Lip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-Coin Role A", "F_Common 1-Coin Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("1", "2", "16", "17", or "18") that allows each winning lottery to be identified on the sub side is set.

In addition, if the "F_Common Bell" or the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("99") will be set that will not allow the sub side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set that groups "F_Common Bell" and the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if you win the modified example "Press order bell B", "F_2 choice 1-card combination A", or "F_2 choice 1-card combination B", it is possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these. However, internal winning information (“98”) is set that does not allow the sub side to specify which one won. That is, internal winning information is set in which the modified examples of "push order bell B", "F_2-option one-card combination A", and "F_2-option one-card combination B" are grouped.

In addition, instruction information ("99") is set that does not allow the batting order to be specified on the sub side even if any winning combination is won. That is, instruction information in which all the winning combinations are grouped is set.

(Setting mode 2 in non-AT state (advantageous section))
Aspect 2 shown in FIG. 421 shows another example of the setting aspect of the internal winning information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous section (normal advantageous section).

In this aspect 2, if "F_Normal Lip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Coin Role A", "F_Common 1-Coin Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows each winning lottery to be identified on the sub side is set.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub side can specify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") is set that does not specify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if you win the modified example "Press order bell B", "F_2 choice 1-card combination A", or "F_2 choice 1-card combination B", it is possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these. However, internal winning information (“98”) is set that does not allow the sub side to specify which one won. That is, internal winning information is set in which the modified examples of "push order bell B", "F_2-option one-card combination A", and "F_2-option one-card combination B" are grouped.

Also, this is similar to Aspect 1 above in that instruction information that does not allow the sub side to specify the batting order (instruction information that indicates "no instruction") is set even when winning any role. , in this aspect 2, when winning the modified example of "push order bell B", "F_2 choice 1-card combination A", or "F_2 choice 1-card combination B", "99" is set as the instruction information, When winning any other combination, "0" is set as the instruction information.

In addition, in this aspect 2, when the modified example "push order bell A" is won, "80" is set in the internal winning information, and "0" is set in the instruction information instead of "99". For example, on the sub side, a "push order challenge effect" (for example, a display such as "?-?-?" is displayed on the display screen, suggesting that at least the player has won the press order role). It is possible to do so. This will be explained in detail later.

(Setting mode 3 in non-AT state (advantageous section))
Aspect 3 shown in FIG. 421 shows another example of the setting aspect of internal winning information and instruction information in a non-AT state of an advantageous section (normal advantageous section).

In this embodiment 3, if "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("2", "17", or "18") that enables the sub-side to identify each winning lottery is set.

Also, "F_Normal Reply", "F_Common Bell", "Push order bell A" of the modified example, "Push order bell B" of the modified example, "F_2 choice 1 card role A", "F_2 choice 1 card role B ” or “F_Common 1-card combination A”, it will be possible for the sub side to identify that one of them has been won, but it will not be possible for the sub side to identify which one has been won. Information (“97”) is set. That is, "F_Normal reply", "F_Common bell", "Push order bell A" of the modified example, "Push order bell B" of the modified example, "F_2 choice 1 card role A", "F_2 choice 1 card role B ”, and “F_common 1-card winning combination A” are grouped into internal winning information.

Also, this is similar to Aspect 1 above in that instruction information that does not allow the sub side to specify the batting order (instruction information that indicates "no instruction") is set even when winning any role. , In this aspect 3, when winning "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-card combination B", or "F_Watermelon", "0" is set as the instruction information, and when winning any other combination, "0" is set. "99" is set as the instruction information.

Note that the purpose of any of Aspects 1 to 3 above is that when a biased bell, such as the modified example "Push Order Bell B", is configured to be included in the internal winning combination, it is possible to In the AT state, the winnings, including the performance on the sub side, are not made recognizable to the player.

For example, even if the correct hitting order itself is not announced because it is a non-AT state, if the player is able to recognize that a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" has been drawn, then in a game where the player has recognized this, there may be cases where the player intentionally performs a stopping operation other than the first left stop (even if the gameplay is such that making the first left stop gives an advantage in the AT-related processing). In this case, there is a high possibility that the payout rate will deviate from the originally intended payout rate, which may result in a compromise of the fairness of the game.

In addition, the fact that the player can recognize that he or she has won a biased bell like the modified example "Push Order Bell B" makes it possible to narrow down the batting order that is advantageous in terms of giving game value. In other words, it can be said that creating a recognizable state in this way is one aspect of the AT state. According to the current rules, for example, it becomes necessary to display corresponding instruction information on the above-mentioned instruction monitor, and the balls obtained in such a state are It will be necessary to include it in the accessory ratio (for example, accessory ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state).

If such a need were to arise, it would make ball output design extremely difficult, and it would be impossible to guarantee gameplay that allows for a dramatic increase in ball output by transitioning from a non-AT state to an AT state, resulting in a significant decrease in player interest.

Therefore, in this modification, each information is set as in Aspects 1 to 3 above on the premise that the following requirements are met, so that there is no room for it to be interpreted as an AT state.

For example, the first requirement is regarding internal winning information, and in a game where internal winning information is set that includes (groups) biased bells such as the modified example "Push Order Bell B", the first requirement is (Irregular Press) Even if the stop operation is performed in any batting order, the ball output rate will be less than 1 (or 1 or less).

For example, in the above-mentioned aspects 1 and 2, the modified examples "Push order bell B", "F_2 choice 1-card combination A", and "F_2 choice 1-card combination B" are grouped, and the internal winning information "98" is It is set. In a game in which internal winning information "98" is set (in other words, a game in which the group win is won), the expected value obtained when it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at "123" or "132" in the batting order. is "0.500", whereas the expected value obtained if the stop operation is performed in the batting order "213", "231", "312", or "321" is "2.702". It is configured so that That is, no matter which batting order the stopping operation is performed, the expected value of acquisition does not exceed "3" (in other words, the ball output rate does not exceed "1").

For example, in the above-mentioned aspect 3, "F_Normal lip", "F_Common bell", modified "Push order bell A", modified "Push order bell B", "F_2 choice 1 coin role A", "F_2 choice 1 coin role B", and "F_Common 1 coin role A" are grouped, and the internal winning information "97" is set. In a game in which the internal winning information "97" is set (in other words, a game in which the group role is won), the expected winning value is "1.601" pieces when the stopping operation is performed in the batting order "123" or "132", while the expected winning value is "2.708" pieces when the stopping operation is performed in the batting order "213", "231", "312", or "321". In other words, regardless of the batting order in which the stopping operation is performed, the expected winning value does not exceed "3" (in other words, the ball payout rate does not exceed "1").

By doing this, for example, the player will be able to recognize that the internal winning combination information "98" or "97" has been set, and even if the game is played with an irregular press, the player will not be able to continue playing the game. There will no longer be any room for maneuver such that players will be able to increase their gaming value. Furthermore, depending on the grouping method, there may be cases where the expected acquisition value exceeds "3", but as long as it is ensured that the fairness of the game is not compromised, there is no problem in such cases. do not have. However, from the above-mentioned viewpoint, it is desirable to configure the system so that the expected acquisition value does not exceed "3".

For example, the second requirement is that in a game where internal winning information is set that includes (groups) biased bells such as the modified example "Push Order Bell B", the sub-side, for example, the above-mentioned "Push Order Bell This means that performances (batting order-related performances) that make it possible to recognize that the player has won the push order role (or that there is a possibility that the player may recognize it as a batting order navigation), such as "Order challenge performance", are not performed. .

Therefore, for example, in the above-mentioned aspect 1, instruction information "99" is set for all the winning combinations. Further, for example, in the above-mentioned aspect 2, instruction information "99" is set in a game in which internal winning information "98" is set. Further, for example, in the above-mentioned aspect 3, instruction information "99" is set in a game in which internal winning information "97" is set. That is, on the sub side, in a game in which instruction information "0" is received, it is possible to perform control such that the above-mentioned batting order related effect can be performed, while in a game in which instruction information "99" is received, the above-mentioned It becomes possible to control so that batting order related effects cannot be performed.

In addition, even in a game in which the sub side receives the instruction information "99", it is permissible to perform this as long as the effect is at least unrelated to the batting order, such as an effect that suggests a small winning combination with a color navigation such as a white navigation or a yellow navigation, or an effect that notifies of a chance when a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. Also, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned mode 1, the same effect may be performed in the case of the internal winning information "99", the internal winning information "98", and the internal winning information "0" (losing), or different effects may be performed.

By doing this, it becomes easier for players to play in a specific mode (first left stop) where AT-related processing is advantageous, without being aware of the biased bell winnings. Also, by setting the internal winning information and instruction information as described above, even if grouping information consisting of biased bells is sent to the sub side, this does not make it possible to narrow down the advantageous batting order, so the payout in such a game does not fall under the payout by instruction, and it is also thought that there is no need to include it in the above-mentioned "instruction-included role ratio". This makes it possible to accurately count the payouts in the AT state and in the substantially advantageous state when the role is operating, and it is thought that the gaming facility side can also easily grasp the behavior of the gaming machine in question using the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54.

It is also possible to add the following requirement (third requirement). For example, the third requirement is that in a game in which the instruction information "99" is set, the fact is notified by a notification means controlled by the main side.

For example, a special lamp is newly provided in the information display device 14, and in a game where instruction information "99" is set, this special lamp is turned on (or a predetermined display mode is displayed). Alternatively, in a game where the instruction information "99" is set, a display such as "-" indicating the non-occurrence of an instruction is displayed on the instruction monitor. Note that these are just examples, and other notification means may be used as long as it is possible to indicate to the player that the instruction has not been issued in some display format.

By doing this, for example, in a game where a special lamp is lit (or a "-" is displayed on the instruction monitor), navigation will not occur (the stop operation mode will not be notified or instructions will not be given). Since the player can be notified or suggested, the player can easily play the game in a specific mode (left first stop) in which AT-related processing is advantageous without being conscious of winning a biased bell. Furthermore, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game using the recommended gaming method.

Note that when a special lamp is used, information on whether the special lamp is lit or not may be further transmitted to the sub side. Then, the sub side may refer to the information and, if it recognizes that the special lamp is lit, performs control to not perform the above-described batting order related effect. However, without transmitting such information, the above-mentioned batting order related effect is performed by comprehensively determining the internal winning information and instruction information (or determining whether instruction information "99" has been transmitted). It may also be possible for the control to be executed without any control.

Furthermore, when using an instruction monitor, for example, when instruction information "0" is set, "0" may be displayed on the instruction monitor, or alternatively, no information may be displayed on the instruction monitor. It may also be configured so that it is not displayed (hidden). In either case, no instructions are issued on the main side. However, in this case, it is assumed that the sub-side is allowed to perform the above-mentioned batting order related effects. On the other hand, when the instruction information "99" is set, the instruction monitor displays "-" (or at least a mode different from the above-mentioned "0" or non-display, and a mode different from each instruction. (separate identification information) may be displayed. In this case as well, no instruction is issued on the main side. However, in this case, the sub-side is prohibited from performing the above-mentioned batting order related effects.

When "0" is displayed (or hidden) on the instruction monitor, for example, when a push order replay is won, it is possible to have the sub side perform a batting order-related effect for special effects, such as a 7-matching navigation to match 7s as an additional notification (this does not affect the number of balls dispensed even if the navigation is not followed). However, it is of course possible to perform an anticipation effect that is not related to the batting order without performing such batting order-related effects for special effects.

Further, when "1" to "6" are displayed on the instruction monitor, the corresponding batting order navigation may be performed on the sub side. For example, if the instruction monitor is "1", the batting order is "123", which stops the reels in the order of left, center, and right, and if the instruction monitor is "2", the batting order is "132", which stops the reels in the order of left, right, and center. If the instruction monitor is ``3'', then the batting order ``213'' is specified to stop the reel in the order of center, left, and right, and if the instruction monitor is ``4'', the batting order is ``213'' to stop the reel in the order of center, right, and left. 312'', and if the instruction monitor is ``5'', the reel will be stopped in the order of right, left, and center. Instruct the batting order ``231'', and if the instruction monitor is ``6'', the reel will be stopped in the order of right, center, and left. It is sufficient to instruct the batting order to be "321." Further, when "-" is displayed on the instruction monitor, as described above, the batting order related performance may be prevented from being performed on the sub side.

Next, we will explain how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the AT state, as well as how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the non-advantageous zone.

(Setting mode 1 in AT state (favorable zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 421 shows an example of a setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the AT state (increasing zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this aspect 1, if you win "F_Normal Reply", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Cow Hand A", "F_Common 1-Cow Hand B", or "F_Watermelon", Internal winning information (“1”, “2”, “3”, “16”, “17”, or “18”) is set so that each winning can be specified on the sub side.

In addition, if you win "Press Order Bell A" in the modified example, it will be possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these, but it will not be possible to identify on the sub side which one you won. The information (“80”) is set. In other words, internal winning information is set in which the modified example of "push order bell A" is grouped. However, since the instruction information "1" to "6" is set so that each correct batting order can be specified on the sub side, it is possible to notify an advantageous stop operation mode even with this configuration. Become.

In addition, if you win "Press order bell B" in the modified example, it will be possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these, but it will not be possible to identify on the sub side which one you won. Information (“81”) is set. In other words, internal winning information is set in which the modified example of "push order bell B" is grouped. However, since the instruction information "3" to "6" is set so that each correct batting order can be specified on the sub side, it is possible to notify an advantageous stop operation mode even with this configuration. Become.

Also, if you win "F_2-option 1-card combination A" or "F_2-option 1-card combination B", it will be possible for the sub side to specify that you won one of them, but the sub side will be able to identify which one you won. Internal winning information ("82") that cannot be specified by the player is set. That is, internal winning information is set in which "F_2-option 1-card combination A" and "F_2-option 1-card combination B" are grouped. However, since these are not press-order minor combinations, this configuration does not affect the AT state. Note that different instruction information may be set for each, and the correct pressed position may be notified.

(Setting mode 2 in AT state (advantageous section))
Aspect 2 shown in FIG. 421 shows another example of the setting aspect of internal winning information and instruction information in the AT state (increasing zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this aspect 2, if you win "F_Normal Reply", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-card combination A", "F_Common 1-card combination B", or "F_Watermelon", Internal winning information (“1”, “2”, “3”, “16”, “17”, or “18”) is set so that each winning can be specified on the sub side.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub side can specify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") is set that does not specify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set in which the modified "Push Order Bell A" is grouped. In addition, in this aspect 2, if "F_Push Order Bell A_123" and "F_Push Order Bell A_132" are won, instruction information "10" is set. This instruction information "10" is configured as instruction information that notifies the correct hitting order only for the first stop operation (first left stop), such as "1-?-?". In other words, in this aspect 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, a two-choice challenge performance for the second stop operation is performed. This is just one example.

Similarly, the instruction information "20" is configured as instruction information in which the correct batting order is reported only for the first stop operation (medium first stop), for example, "?-1-?", and the instruction information "30" is configured as instruction information such as "?-?-1" in which only the first stop operation (right first stop) is notified of the correct batting order.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B" is won, the sub side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("81") will be set which will not allow the sub side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set in which the modified "Push Order Bell B" is grouped. However, because instruction information "3" to "6" is set which allows the sub side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify of advantageous stop operation modes even with this configuration.

In addition, if "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" or "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" is won, the sub side can specify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("82") is set which does not specify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set in which "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" are grouped. However, since these are not push order minor roles, even if they are configured in this way, it does not affect the AT state. Note that different instruction information may be set for each, and the correct push position may be notified.

(Setting mode in non-advantageous sections)
The mode shown in FIG. 421 shows an example of the setting mode of internal winning information and instruction information in a non-advantageous section (non-AT state).

In this embodiment, when "F_Normal Lip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Coin Role A", "F_Common 1-Coin Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that enables each winning lottery to be identified on the sub side is set.

In addition, if you win "Press Order Bell A" in the modified example, it will be possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these, but it will not be possible to identify on the sub side which one you won. The information (“80”) is set.

In addition, if you win the modified example "Press order bell B", "F_2 choice 1-card combination A", or "F_2 choice 1-card combination B", it is possible to identify on the sub side that you have won one of these. However, internal winning information (“98”) is set that does not allow the sub side to specify which one won. That is, internal winning information is set in which the modified examples of "push order bell B", "F_2-option one-card combination A", and "F_2-option one-card combination B" are grouped.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the modified "Push Order Bell B", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the instruction information is set to "99", and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "0".

(Example of transmission information control of modified example of pressing order bell (Part 2))
Next, with reference to FIG. 422, a transmission information control example (part 2) using a modified example of the pressing order bell will be described. As described above, this transmission information control example (part 2) is a control example configured such that information regarding the internal winning combination is not basically transmitted to the sub-side when in the non-AT state. Further, in order to explain this transmission information control example (part 2), FIG. 422 shows a schematic flowchart showing an example of the process. Therefore, the specific control processing in the transmission information control is not necessarily limited to that shown in FIG. 422.

First, when a game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT is in progress (S4011). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is an AT state. If the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is in progress (YES in S4011), it transfers processing to S4013.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is not in progress (S4011 is NO), it determines whether or not a rare combination has been won (S4012). If the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has not been won (S4012 is NO), it ends the process.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has been won (YES in S4012), it transfers the process to S4013. If S4011 is YES or if S4012 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission information setting process (S4013). Thereafter, it ends the process.

In the transmission information setting process, if the state is AT (if S4011 is YES), the internal winning information and instruction information are transmitted, for example, according to one of the setting modes of the AT state shown in FIG. 421. Also, if the state is not AT (S4011 is NO) but a rare role is won (if S4012 is YES), the internal winning information corresponding to the won rare role is exceptionally transmitted. Also, in this case, if the instruction information corresponding to the won rare role is "0", the instruction information may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if it is in a non-AT state (S4011 is NO) and the rare combination has not been won (S4012 is also NO), information related to the internal winning combination is not set in the first place (S4013 is NO). processing) and prevent any information from being sent to the sub-side. Note that the "rare combination" here refers to, for example, a combination such as "F_Cherry" or "F_Watermelon."

If this is done, for example, even if a biased bell is included, such as "push order bell B" in the modified example, this winning cannot be recognized on the sub side except in the AT state, so the player It becomes easier to play the game in a specific mode (left first stop) in which AT-related processing is advantageous without being conscious of winning the biased bell. Moreover, since there is no need to consider how to configure the internal winning information and instruction information in the non-AT state, the control load and amount of data can be reduced, and the ease of designing the gaming machine can also be improved. can be done.

However, if information related to the internal winning role is not transmitted for any role, the sub side will not perform any effects such as anticipation effects according to the type of internal winning role, which may significantly reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, when a rare role is won, the transmission information setting process is exceptionally performed even in a non-AT state.

Note that from the above point of view, the process of S4012 is not provided, and if it is determined that the AT state is present in S4011, the process of S4013 is performed. If it is determined, the process may be ended as is, and the transmission information setting process may not be performed even for rare combinations.

Furthermore, with this configuration, for example, when a rare role or at least a role other than the biased bell (or a role other than a group that includes the biased bell) is won, a different type of lock effect can be executed, and the type of lock effect can be sent to the sub-side by a lock command, ensuring that batting order-related effects are not executed for the biased bell, while for roles that are not related to it, effects related to the internal winning role can be executed.

<Gaming machine using the specifications of the first gaming machine (variation example)>
According to the first gaming machine (variation), by using the specifications, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, there is a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are given preferential treatment, and a non-preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are not given preferential treatment. When a stop operation is performed in a mode (for example, the first left stop), the expected value of the gaming value to be awarded is lower than when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, It is possible to control at least the next game to a preferential state when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and it is possible to control at least the next game to a non-preferential state when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. In a specific performance where preferential control can be executed and the display content progresses according to the progress of the game (for example, a sense of expectation effect), if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode in the game with preferential treatment, This is a gaming machine that can perform a specific standby display (for example, a standby display) according to the type of specific performance being executed.

Note that the specific mode of stopping operation is not limited to the mode in which the batting order is the first stop on the left. For example, it may be configured such that performing the first stopping operation on other reels constitutes a specific mode of stopping operation. Furthermore, for example, when the variable display section is configured with four reels, it may be configured such that performing a stopping operation on two specific reels among them in a specific order constitutes a specific mode of stopping operation. good. Further, it may be configured such that performing a stopping operation on a specific reel (for example, the left reel) at a specific pressed position constitutes a specific mode of stopping operation.

The stop operation mode controlled to the preferential state is configured so that the expected value of the game value to be awarded is lower than the stop operation mode controlled to the non-preferential state, but such preferential control may be performed even if the expected value of the game value is the same. In other words, even if the hand is configured so that it does not include biased bells, a specific mode of the stop operation that can be controlled to the preferential state may be defined, and if the stop operation is performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the preferential state, and if the stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the non-preferential state.

Further, the specific standby display can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to notify or suggest that the progress of the production is on standby, or it can be used to notify or suggest that control will be in a non-preferential state. Further, for example, it can be used to notify or suggest that the performance has ended midway. Further, for example, it can be used to notify or suggest that the player is at a disadvantage because the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner. Further, it can be used to notify or suggest that a game should be played using a recommended gaming method (for example, a stop operation should be performed in a specific manner). That is, it can be used to notify or suggest various information related to preferential treatment control or progress of the performance.

In addition, for example, the preferential control is executable in a gaming machine when a normal role is determined as the winning role.

In addition, for example, the preferential control is executable in this gaming machine regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role.

Games for which preferential control can be performed can be arbitrarily set according to predetermined control conditions. For example, preferential control may be performed under different conditions during normal (advantageous section), CZ, and ST. For example, in one of these states, it will be executed even if any combination is determined to be the winning combination, and in other states, it will be performed if the normal combination is determined to be the winning combination. Good too. Also, for example, even if the state is the same, in a certain gaming period it will be executed even if any combination is determined to be the winning combination, and in other gaming periods it will be executed if the normal combination is determined to be the winning combination. It may also be used as a

In addition, for example, this is a gaming machine that can control whether the state is in a preferential or non-preferential state on a per-game basis. However, as described above, such preferential control may be performed on a multiple-game basis, or on a stop operation basis within a single game.

For example, in a game in a preferential state, if a first stop operation is performed in a specific manner, it is possible to decide to control to a preferential state, but it is possible to decide whether to control to a preferential state in a second stop operation. may be determined, and if it is determined not to be controlled to a preferential treatment state, the control may be controlled to a non-preferential treatment state. Further, for example, in a game in a preferential state, if the first stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, it is possible to decide to control to a non-preferential state, but in the second stop operation, for example, the acquired preferential If a predetermined condition is met, such as not being in the batting order, it is possible to decide to control to preferential conditions, and if it is decided to control to preferential conditions here, it is assumed to be controlled to preferential conditions. Good too.

In addition, for example, the gaming machine decrements the value of the preferential counter by 1 during a game in a preferential state, and increments the value of the preferential counter by 1 if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner during that game, but does not increment the value of the preferential counter by 1 if a stop operation is not performed in the specific manner, thereby controlling a game in which the preferential counter value is 1 or more to be in a preferential state.

In addition, for example, this is a gaming machine in which, during play in a preferential state, the value of the preferential counter may not be incremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner.

In addition, in place of the preferential treatment counter, a non-preferential counter is provided to manage the playing period in the non-preferential state, and the value of the non-preferential counter is incremented by 1 in the game in the preferential state, and in the game, a stop operation is performed in a specific manner. is performed, the value of the non-preferential counter is subtracted by 1, while if the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, the value of the non-preferential counter is not subtracted by 1, and the value of the non-preferential counter is reduced to 1. The above games may be controlled to be in a non-preferential state.

Further, in this case, in a game in a preferential treatment state, even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the value of the non-preferential treatment counter may not be decremented by 1.

Furthermore, for example, if a power outage occurs while a specific standby display is being performed, the gaming machine is capable of displaying the specific standby display even after recovery from the power outage.

In addition, for example, if a setting change is made while a specific waiting display is being displayed, the gaming machine is capable of displaying the specific waiting display even after the setting change.

Note that the manner in which the specific waiting display is continued when a transition is made from one state to another is not limited to the above. For example, when a game is ended and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed and it is determined that a non-playing state has been entered, a demonstration screen would normally be displayed, but if a specific waiting display was being performed, the specific waiting display may be configured to continue to be displayed instead of the demonstration screen. Also, in this case, for example, if a further predetermined time (e.g., 2 hours) has passed since it was determined that a non-playing state has been entered, the specific waiting display may be terminated and a normal demonstration screen may be displayed.

In addition, for example, the specific effects include continuous effects that are executed over multiple games, and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner when a continuous effect is being executed in a game in a preferential state, the gaming machine is capable of executing the effect of the display content of that game again in the next game after a specific standby display is performed in that game.

Note that "re-executing" does not only mean executing everything from the beginning, but also includes executing only part of it. Furthermore, if adjustments are required when re-executing, adjustments can be made by changing only the execution time without changing the overall composition of the presentation, or adjustments can be made by omitting or adding some content to the presentation. In other words, it is sufficient that the presentation is recognized as the same presentation being executed again without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and it does not necessarily have to be the exact same presentation.

Further, the continuous performance may be one in which at least related performances are executed over multiple games, and is not limited to one in which predetermined information is announced or suggested for a set of multiple games; Includes performances that are announced or suggested that can be executed over multiple games. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be executed in consecutive games; for example, a performance scenario (performance control state) for controlling the performance tendency can be determined during a specific game period such as a precursory state, and it is not necessary to perform consecutive games. In the case where related effects can be performed between games, it is also possible to make it possible to perform effects performed in a certain game again in a subsequent game even if the games are not consecutive. .

Also, for example, when a stop operation is detected for the first time, if the stop operation is for a specific display column (for example, the left reel), it becomes a specific mode, and the stop operation is for a specific display column. If not, the specific effect is configured so that it does not become a specific mode, and the specific effect is an expectation effect that is executed from the time the game starts, and when the specific effect is executed in a game with preferential treatment, the first stop If the operation is not for a specific display column, the gaming machine performs a specific standby display from that time onwards.

Note that the first time a stop operation is detected means the exact time when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop button is operated and turned on, or when the stop button is operated and then turned off). 2) or at any timing after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation.

Also, for example, it has a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are given preferential treatment, and a non-preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are not given preferential treatment, and at least when it is not controlled by the AT state, it is controllable to either state. , is configured such that when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the first left stop), the expected value of the gaming value awarded is lower than when the stop operation is not performed in the particular manner. The ST period, which is a non-AT state, is more advantageous for the player than during the normal period (advantageous period), and is configured to continue for a specified period (for example, 16 games), and in the specific mode. It is possible to execute preferential control that allows at least the next game to be controlled to a preferential state when a stop operation is performed, and to make it possible to control at least the next game to a non-preferential state when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. , the prescribed period progresses depending on whether a game is played in a preferential state or not, and the degree of advantage during ST varies depending on whether a game is played in a preferential state or not. This is a gaming machine that may change to an advantageous one, but will not change to an advantageous one if a game is played in a non-preferential state.

Note that ST does not necessarily have to be in a more favorable state than normal (advantageous zone). Furthermore, such control may be performed during normal (advantageous zone) or CZ. Furthermore, this gaming machine can of course perform specific waiting displays similar to those described above, and various controls related to this can be performed. Furthermore, for example, when the machine is configured so that the same anticipation presentation can be performed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST, when a specific waiting display is performed, it may be configured so that a specific waiting display with different content is performed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST.

<Summary of inventions related to the first gaming machine (modified example) (additional notes)>
As explained above, the first gaming machine (modified example) can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Conventional gaming machines have been proposed that are equipped with an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display section and that perform effects by changing the displayed image according to the progress of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-135303 (see publication).

However, in recent years, with the diversification of gaming features in such gaming machines, there has been a demand for more appropriate gaming control depending on the gaming situation.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform appropriate gaming control depending on the gaming situation.

A variable display means (e.g., a variable display section) that can variably display a plurality of identification information in a plurality of display columns, and a winning combination means (e.g., a main part that performs internal lottery processing) that can determine a winning combination from among a plurality of winning combinations. a CPU 101), a stop operation detection means (for example, a stop operation detection section) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, a winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation; A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) stops the variable display of the variable display means in accordance with the stop operation mode detected by the detection means, and a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player. A game state control means (for example, a first game machine (for example) that can control the special game state to be notified (for example, an AT state such as during the first bonus or during the second bonus in the first game machine (modified example)) a main CPU 101) that controls each gaming state in a modified example), a preferential state in which decisions related to the special gaming state are given preferential treatment (for example, a preferential state in the first gaming machine (modified example)), and the preferential state. a non-preferential state (for example, a non-preferential state in the first gaming machine (modified example)), and is capable of controlling to any state at least when the special gaming state is not controlled. (For example, the main CPU 101 that performs preferential control in the first gaming machine (modified example)) and a specific performance (for example, the anticipation feeling performance in the first gaming machine (modified example)) Effect execution means (for example, main effect display section 21), when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, left first stop), when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode The preferential treatment control means is configured such that the expected value of the gaming value to be given is lower than the above, and the preferential treatment control means is capable of controlling at least the next game to the preferential state when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, It is possible to execute preferential control that allows at least the next game to be controlled to the non-preferential state if a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, and the display content of the specific performance progresses according to the progress of the game. There are a plurality of types of performances that differ in at least some display contents, and the performance execution means performs a stop operation in the specific mode when the specific performance is being executed in the game in the preferential state. If there is no such game, the game machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform a specific standby display according to the type of the specific performance being executed.
According to this gaming machine, if the stop operation is performed in a specific manner in which the expected value of the game value to be awarded is low, the control is given to a preferential state, and if the stop operation is not performed in the particular manner, It is possible to be controlled to a non-preferential state, and if a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode while a specific production is being executed, a specific standby according to the type of specific production being executed. It is possible to perform display. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate game control according to the game situation, especially in terms of performance.

The preferential control means is capable of executing the preferential control at least when the role determination means determines a normal role as the winning role.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform preferential control in an appropriate gaming situation based on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to perform more appropriate gaming control while diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the preferential control means is capable of executing the preferential control regardless of which role the role determination means determines as the winning role.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform preferential control in an appropriate gaming situation based on the characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to perform more appropriate gaming control while diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

The above-described gaming machine is characterized in that the preferential treatment control means is capable of controlling whether the preferential treatment state or the non-preferential treatment state is set for each game.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which the player is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous, and to perform more fine-grained preferential treatment control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by providing a variety of gameplay features, and to perform more appropriate game control.

The preferential control means has a counter (e.g., a preferential counter) that manages the playing period in which the preferential state is set, and subtracts 1 from the value of the counter during play in the preferential state, and if a stop operation is performed in the specific mode during that play, adds 1 to the value of the counter, while not adding 1 to the value of the counter during play when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, thereby controlling play in which the counter value is 1 or more to the preferential state, as described above.
This gaming machine allows for more detailed preferential control while preventing the control load from increasing excessively. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the gameplay to increase the interest of the game and perform more appropriate game control.

In the game described above, the preferential treatment control means may not add 1 to the value of the counter even if a stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the game in the preferential treatment state. It is a machine.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform more detailed preferential treatment control while also preventing the gameplay from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by providing a variety of gameplay features, and to perform more appropriate game control.

The gaming machine described above is characterized in that if a power outage occurs while the specific standby display is being performed, the specific standby display can be performed even after recovery from the power outage. .
According to this gaming machine, even if a power outage occurs and the machine is restored, the specific standby display can indicate to the player that the machine will be controlled to a non-preferential state. Appropriate game control can be performed.

The gaming machine described above is characterized in that if a setting change is made while the specific waiting display is being displayed, the specific waiting display can be displayed even after the setting change.
According to this gaming machine, even if a setting change is made, the specific waiting display makes it difficult to notice, so that more appropriate game control can be achieved, particularly in terms of presentation.

The specific presentation includes a continuous presentation executed over multiple games, and the presentation execution means is capable of executing the presentation of the display content of the game again in the next game after performing the specific waiting display in the game when the continuous presentation is being executed in the preferential state game and a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode.This is the gaming machine described above, characterized in that
According to this gaming machine, even if a specific standby display is displayed without a stop operation being performed in a specific mode, if a stop operation is performed in the specific mode afterwards, it is possible to control the presentation so that it continues again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to preferential control, and to perform more appropriate game control, especially in terms of presentation.

When the stop operation is first detected by the stop operation detection means, if the stop operation is for a specific display column (for example, the left reel), the specific mode is set, and the stop operation is for a specific display column (for example, the left reel). If it is not for a display column, the specific mode is not applied, and the specific effect is an expectation effect that is executed from the time the game is started, and the effect executing means is configured to perform the game in the preferential state. In the above-described gaming machine, when the specific performance is executed, if the first stop operation is not for the specific display row, the specific standby display is performed from that time. be.
According to this gaming machine, if a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, a specific standby display may be performed from the moment the stop operation is confirmed, which unnecessarily prolongs the player's expectations and reduces interest. This makes it possible to notify the player in a more appropriate manner that the stop operation was not controlled by the preferential treatment state, while preventing the situation from leading to the above. Therefore, more appropriate game control can be performed, especially in terms of performance.

A variable display means (e.g., a variable display section) that can variably display a plurality of identification information in a plurality of display columns, and a winning combination means (e.g., a main part that performs internal lottery processing) that can determine a winning combination from among a plurality of winning combinations. a CPU 101), a stop operation detection means (for example, a stop operation detection section) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means, a winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation; A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) stops the variable display of the variable display means in accordance with the stop operation mode detected by the detection means, and a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player. A special gaming state that is notified (for example, an AT state such as during the first bonus or during the second bonus in the first gaming machine (modified example)) and a normal gaming state in which the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified ( For example, it has a normal mode (advantageous section) in the first gaming machine (modified example)) and a specific gaming state (for example, during ST in the first gaming machine (modified example)), and in any of the gaming states. A controllable gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the first gaming machine (modified example)) and a preferential state (for example, the first (a preferential treatment state in the first gaming machine (modified example)) and a non-preferential treatment state that is not the preferential treatment state (for example, a non-preferential treatment state in the first gaming machine (modified example)), and is controlled to at least the special gaming state. a preferential control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs preferential control in the first gaming machine (modified example)) that can be controlled to any state when the left first stop ), the expected value of the gaming value to be awarded is lower than when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, and the specific gaming state is The game state is configured as a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the game state, and when controlled to the specific game state, the specific game state is configured to continue during a specific game period (for example, a prescribed period). , the preferential treatment control means can control at least the next game to the preferential state when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and controls at least the next game when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. A first management means (for example, an ST game number counter) that is capable of performing preferential control to control the non-preferential state, and that manages the specific gaming period, and a first managing means that manages the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state. 2 management means (for example, a MAP game number counter), and the first management means is configured to perform one game in the specific game state regardless of whether or not the game is in the preferential treatment state. The second management means advances the specific gaming period in accordance with the specific gaming state, and the second management means changes the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state to an advantageous one when a game is played in the preferential state in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized in that, while the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state can be varied, it is not possible to change the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state to an advantageous one when a game is played in the non-preferential state.
According to this gaming machine, if the stop operation is performed in a specific manner in which the expected value of the game value to be awarded is low, the control is given to a preferential state, and if the stop operation is not performed in the particular manner, It is possible to be controlled to a non-preferential state, and in a specific gaming state, the game period advances regardless of whether it is in a preferential state or not, while the game is played in a preferential state regarding the degree of advantage. It is designed so that it can be advantageous only in certain cases. That is, for example, even if a player intentionally refrains from performing a stop operation in a specific manner, a situation may occur in which the specific gaming state is prolonged or such a player has an advantage. This can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate game control according to the game situation.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. The thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the slot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the slot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Also, explanations of portions that apply to the thirteenth embodiment from the explanations of the first to twelfth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ..." means that it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if such a description is made, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the thirteenth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to twelfth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the thirteenth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to twelfth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the thirteenth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

In addition, even if a configuration has a different shape from the slot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. In addition, even if a configuration has the same shape or the same processing as the slot machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
FIG. 423(a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of gaming states according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 423(b) is a table summarizing the gaming state transition conditions according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as the game state in order to change the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. It has become. In this embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 423(a) is managed by the main control circuit 100. Such gaming states include a bonus non-winning state, a flag-to-flag state, and a bonus state.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus has not been won and the bonus has not been activated (awarded). The flag-between state is a state in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role, i.e., the bonus role has been won and the bonus has not been activated. The bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. As explained in the first embodiment, the flag-between state is also called the carryover state, (bonus) flag-between, (bonus) internal intermediate, etc. When a bonus role is won and the symbol combination associated with the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 3BB gaming state is provided as a bonus state. "F_3BB" is provided as a bonus role corresponding to the 3BB gaming state (see Figures 426A to 426E). In addition, a 3BB flag-interval state is provided as a flag-interval state.

The state between the 3BB flags is configured as an RT state (RT1 gaming state). As described in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to the state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state is configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

To explain specifically with reference to FIGS. 423(a) and 423(b), in the bonus non-winning state, when "F_3BB" is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning), the main control circuit 100 , the gaming state is shifted from the bonus non-winning state to the 3BB flag state (see transition condition (1)).

"F_3BB" (3BB) is a carryover role (see Figure 18). When 3BB is internally drawn, the state of 3BB being internally drawn is carried over until the symbol combination corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in Figure 425A) is stopped and displayed along the winning line (until 3BB wins). The 3BB flag state is a state in which the state of 3BB being internally drawn is carried over.

When the combination of symbols related to “C_3BB” is stopped and displayed along the active line in the 3BB flag state (when 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 changes the gaming state from the 3BB flag state to the 3BB gaming state. (See transition condition (2)). When medals exceeding the prescribed number (55 medals) are paid out in the 3BB gaming state, the main control circuit 100 shifts the gaming state from the 3BB gaming state to a bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (3)).

<Design arrangement table>
FIG. 424(a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 424(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table specifies the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols that correspond to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. The types of designs include "Buoy", "Seven", "Bar", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Rip A", "Rip B", and "Blank". ” is included.

<Pattern code table>
Figure 424(b) is a diagram showing a pattern code table.

As shown in FIG. 424(b), each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is identified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, each symbol is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 424(b) represents symbol codes as data for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 424(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, but the symbol arrangement table actually stored in the main ROM 102 represents the arrangement of symbol codes that specify the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 include "buoy", "seven", "bar", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell A", "bell B", and "reply". There are 10 types: "A", "Reply B", and "Blank". In the symbol code table, "Buoy", "Seven", "Bar", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Rip A", "Rip B", and "Blank" ``1'' to ``10'' are assigned as symbol codes for each symbol.

<Pattern combination table>
425A and 425B are diagrams showing a pattern combination table.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line and the number of medals that will be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (number of medals paid out). ing. Regarding symbol combinations, symbols on the left reel 3L, symbols on the middle reel 3C, and symbols on the right reel 3R are shown in order from the left. The names given to each combination are also shown.

Regarding the number of medals to be paid out, the number of medals to be paid out when a one-coin game is played (payout when a one-coin bet is played), the number of medals paid out when a two-coin game is played (payout when a two-coin bet is played), and , respectively indicate the number of coins paid out when a three-coin game is played (the payout when three coins are bet). In this specification, a unit game that is played by inserting one medal is called a one-coin game, a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game, and a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game. A unit game played by inserting a number of medals is sometimes called a 3-coin game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each gaming state is set to three.

The active line is a pseudo line (upper-middle-lower) that connects the upper area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. As explained in the first embodiment, the active line is activated when the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals required to start the game) has been bet.

The symbol combination table shown in Figures 425A and 425B associates symbol combinations ("combinations") identified by storage area identification data represented by 13 bytes with the number of medals paid out when the combination is displayed on a winning line when one, two, or three medals are bet.

In the diagram, some combinations are shown together. For example, "C_remove lip B_01-02" is made up of two combinations, "C_remove lip B_01" and "C_remove lip B_02". The combination called "C_remove lip B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-lip A-bar", and the combination called "C_remove lip B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-lip A-cherry". When these combinations are displayed along a winning line, no medals are paid out, but a replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_321 Bell B_01 to 06" is composed of six combinations of "C_321 Bell B_01" to "C_321 Bell B_06." In the figure, for "C_321 Bell B_01-06", three types of symbols ("Seven", "Buoy", and "Cherry") are defined as symbols on the left reel 3L, and as symbols on the middle reel 3C. Two types of symbols ("Bell B" and "Bell A") are defined, and one type of symbol ("Bell A") is defined as the symbol on the right reel 3R. As a result, "C_321 Bell B_01 to 06" includes 3×2×1=6 combinations. When these combinations are displayed along the active line, 15 medals are paid out.

Further, when a combination of "V-Rip B-Voy" called "C_3BB" is displayed along the active line, no medals are paid out, but the gaming state shifts to the 3BB gaming state.

In addition, in the figure, "REP" indicates a combination that activates replay (replay) when winning a prize, "FRU" indicates a combination that pays out medals when winning a prize, and "BB" indicates a BB gaming state ( 3BB gaming state) is shown (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

<Combination table by flag>
FIGS. 426A to 426E are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag-specific combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line. As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line (the type of display combination that can win) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the combination tables by flag shown in Figures 426A to 426E show combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay lines corresponding to the internal winning roles. The internal winning roles in this embodiment are "F_3BB", "F_Replay A", "F_Replay B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D ... There are "F_bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_Common Bell A", "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece Role A", "F_1 Piece Role B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", "F_BB Confirmed Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role", and "F_Common 15 Piece Role".

For example, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB", then "C_3BB" is permitted to be displayed on the winning line. In other words, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB", this indicates that the internal winning combination is BB (3BB).

In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B", "C_Eliminating Reply B_01~02", "C_Eliminating Reply A_01~02", "C_Middle Reply A_01~04", "C_Lower Reply A_01~ 06", "C_CU Rep_01-03", "C_Upper Reply B_01-06", "C_Upper Reply A_01-03", and "C_CD Rep_01-04" are allowed to be displayed on the active line. .

In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_213 Bell A", "C_One piece hand C6_01~02", "C_One piece hand C2_01~02", "C_One piece hand C1_01~02", "C_Medium Right one piece B_01-04", "C_ middle right one piece A_01-04", "C_controller E1_01-02", "C_controller D6_01-02", "C_controller D5_01-02", "C_controller D1_01-02", "C_controller B3_01-02", "C_controller B2_01-02", "C_controller B1_01-02", "C_controller A4_01-02", "C_controller A2_01-02", It is permitted to display "C_Controller A1_01-02" and "C_213 Bell A_01-03" on the active line.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery table according to this embodiment includes an internal lottery table (see FIG. 427) that is referenced in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), and an internal lottery table that is referenced in the 3BB inter-flag state (RT1 gaming state). (see FIG. 428(a)) and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 428(b)) that is referred to in the BB gaming state (3BB gaming state).

Figure 427 shows an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. Figure 428(a) shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. Figure 428(b) shows an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state.

The multiple internal lottery tables shown in Figures 427 and 428 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each game state and each number of inserted coins, and show the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. For example, in Figure 427, a lottery value of "4308" is specified for "F_213 Bell A". As a result, the probability of "F_213 Bell A" winning internally is "4308/65536".

There are two cases in which "F_3BB" wins internally: a case in which "F_3BB" wins internally alone, and a case in which "F_3BB" wins internally in combination with another internal winning combination. In FIGS. 427 and 428, the case where "F_3BB" wins internally by itself is written as "F_3BB", and the case where "F_3BB" overlaps with other internal winning combinations and wins internally is written as "F_3BB+(other internal winning combination)". role)”.

As shown in FIG. 427, in the RT0 gaming state, "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece A", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", "F_Reach Eye C", "F_BB Confirmed A", and "F_BB Confirmed B" can overlap with "F_3BB" and be internally won. Also, when "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece A", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", "F_Reach Eye C", "F_BB Confirmed A", and "F_BB Confirmed B" are internally won, "F_3BB" is always internally won.

As described above, in the RT1 gaming state, "F_3BB" has already been internally won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), in the RT1 gaming state, "F_common bell B", "F_1-card combination A", "F_1-card combination B", "F_cherry", "F_parallel watermelon", Internal winning combinations other than "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach combination A", "F_Reach combination B", "F_Reach combination C", "F_BB confirmed combination A", and "F_BB confirmed combination B" Also, it is said that the internal winnings overlap with "F_3BB". In addition, in the RT1 gaming state, since only "lost" is never won, the lottery value "0" is defined for "lost".

Note that the lottery values for each winning role shown in Figures 427 and 428 are common values for all settings, but setting differences may be set for some or all of the winning roles.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations, etc.>
Figure 429 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning roles, stopping operation modes, and display roles, etc.

In the first embodiment, when each internal winning combination is won, any combination of symbols (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode. (See Figure 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. is configured as shown in FIG. 429.

In the diagram, "1→2→3" indicates a case where the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stopping operation (batting order 1). "1→3→2" indicates a case where the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stopping operation (batting order 2).

In "2 → 1 → 3", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 3). In "2 → 3 → 1", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 4).

In "3 → 1 → 2", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 5). In "3→2→1", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation. (batting order 6) is shown.

Specifically, if "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning role, when the stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" is displayed along the valid line, and when the stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 to 6, a "miss reply" is displayed along the valid line if the eye is successful, and a "normal reply" is displayed along the valid line if the eye is unsuccessful. Similarly, if "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, when the stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" is displayed along the valid line, and when the stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 to 6, a "miss reply" is displayed along the valid line if the eye is successful, and a "normal reply" is displayed along the valid line if the eye is unsuccessful.

"Normal replies" is a general term for "C_middle replies A_01-04", "C_lower replies A_01-06", "C_CU replies_01-03", "C_upper replies B_01-06", "C_upper replies A_01-03", and "C_CD replies_01-04" (see Figure 425A). "Removed replies" is a general term for "C_removed replies B_01-02" and "C_removed replies A_01-02" (see Figure 425A).

As shown in FIG. 426E, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B", the "missing reply" that is allowed to be displayed on the active line The contents are different. Specifically, as mentioned above, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B", "C_Replay Reply B_01-02" and "C_Reply Reply A_01-02" are set as "Reply Reply" on the active line. allowed to be displayed on top. On the other hand, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A", it is permitted to display "C_Replay A_01-02" on the active line as "Replay", but "C_Replay" is allowed to be displayed on the active line. It is not permitted to display "Reply B_01-02" on the active line. This is related to the gameplay of pseudo-BIG (see FIG. 430). Details will be described later.

Also, if any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", and "F_213 Bell D" is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed according to batting order 3. When this is done, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out with a successful hit is displayed along the active line, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out with a failed hit is displayed along the active line, and the combinations other than 3 in the batting order are displayed along the active line. When a stop operation is performed according to the batting order, combinations for which one medal is paid out are displayed along the active line regardless of the number of hits.

Additionally, if any of "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", and "F_231 Bell D" is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed according to batting order 4. When this is done, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out with a successful hit is displayed along the active line, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out with a failed hit is displayed along the active line, and a combination other than 4 in the batting order is displayed along the active line. When a stop operation is performed according to the batting order, combinations for which one medal is paid out are displayed along the active line regardless of the number of hits.

Also, if any of "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", and "F_312 Bell D" is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed according to batting order 5. When this is done, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out with a successful hit is displayed along the active line, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out with a failed hit is displayed along the active line, and the combinations other than 5 in the batting order are displayed along the active line. When a stop operation is performed according to the batting order, combinations for which one medal is paid out are displayed along the active line regardless of the number of hits.

Additionally, if any of "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", and "F_321 Bell D" is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed according to batting order 6. When this is done, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out with a successful hit is displayed along the active line, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out with a failed hit is displayed along the active line, and the combinations other than 6 in the batting order are displayed along the active line. When a stop operation is performed according to the batting order, combinations for which one medal is paid out are displayed along the active line regardless of the number of hits.

In this way, "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D" ", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", and "F_321 Bell D ” is an internal winning combination (press order bell) in which the combinations (symbol combinations) that are stopped and displayed along the active line vary depending on the order of stop operations (press order) for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. ing. When the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, if the push order is correct and the eye push is successful, 15 medals will be paid out.

In addition, "F_parallel watermelon", "F_diagonal watermelon", "F_cherry", "F_reach eye A", "F_reach eye B", "F_reach eye C", "F_BB confirmed role A", And, if any one of "F_BB confirmed combination B" is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, or any one of batting order 3 to batting order 6. The combinations that are stopped and displayed along the effective line are different depending on when the stop operation is performed.

For example, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role, when the stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, "One Reach Eye" is displayed along the active line, and when the stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 to 6, "One Normal Winning Dial" is displayed along the active line. "One Reach Eye" is a general term for the symbol combinations shown in Figures 425A and 425B that include the word "Reach Eye". "One Reach Eye" is a symbol combination that can be displayed along the active line only when any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role.

In addition, if either "F_BB confirmed hand A" or "F_BB confirmed hand B" is determined as an internal winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in batting order 1 or batting order 2, "BB confirmed reach If a stop operation is performed in any of batting orders 3 to 6, "normal number one sheet" is displayed along the effective line. “BB confirmed reach one piece” is a general term for symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 425A and 425B that include the word “BB confirmed combination”. “One BB confirmed reach” is a symbol combination that can be displayed along the active line only when either “F_BB confirmed combination A” or “F_BB confirmed combination B” is determined as an internal winning combination. ing.

＜Gameplay＞
Fig. 430 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a game state in a non-favorable zone and a favorable zone according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 431 is a diagram showing a transition of a ball output state according to one embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 432 is a table summarizing transition conditions of a ball output state according to one embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (ball output state) shown in FIG. 430 separately from the game state shown in FIG. 423. As shown in FIG. 430, the ball output state is broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones.

As explained in the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (see FIG. 5). The advantageous zone includes a presentation zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, AT state). The presentation zone is basically a game state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to a non-advantageous zone in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state, but differs from the non-advantageous zone in that a transition in the ball output state occurs. The increase zone is an AT state (a game state that is advantageous to the player).

In the performance section, it is possible to control the ball output state to be any one of the normal stage, chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive winnings preparation, consecutive winnings challenge, and promotion chance. The normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B will be collectively referred to as the normal ball-out state. In addition, in the increasing section, it is possible to control the ball output state to either pseudo BIG or pseudo REG. The characteristics of each ball release state will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 431 and 432, in the non-advantageous section, the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery (see step S4001 in FIG. 435), and as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery (see step S4003 in FIG. 435), he prepares for consecutive games. When it is determined to shift to, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball payout state from the non-advantageous section to the preparation for consecutive wins (see transition condition (A)). In addition, in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery (see step S4001 in FIG. 435) is won, and as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery (see step S4003 in FIG. 435), it is determined that the transition to the consecutive winnings challenge is performed. Then, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball payout state from the non-advantageous section to the consecutive winnings challenge (see transition condition (B)).

When the consecutive win preparation drop lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 437) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to the normal stage (see transition condition (C)). When the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in FIG. 437) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (D)).

In the normal stage, when it is determined to move to the chance stage A as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), the main control circuit 100 passes through the precursor state, The ball output state is transferred from the normal stage to chance stage A (see transition condition (E)). In chance stage A, when the number of unit games determined by chance stage guaranteed game number lottery at the start of chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 468) is played, the main control circuit 100 shifts from chance stage A to the normal stage. Shift the ball release state (see transition condition (F)).

In the normal stage, when it is determined to move to chance stage B as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), the main control circuit 100 passes through the precursor state, The ball output state is transferred from the normal stage to chance stage B (see transition condition (G)). In chance stage B, when the number of unit games determined by chance stage guaranteed game number lottery at the start of chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 468) is played, the main control circuit 100 switches from chance stage B to the normal stage. Shift the ball release state (see transition condition (H)).

In the normal stage, as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), when it is determined to move to the promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 The ball release state is transferred from the stage to the promotion chance (see transition condition (I)). Further, in chance stage A, when it is determined to shift to a promotion chance as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), the main control circuit 100 passes through the precursor state. Then, the ball output state is transferred from chance stage A to promotion chance (see transition condition (I)). Further, in chance stage B, when it is determined to shift to a promotion chance as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), the main control circuit 100 passes through the precursor state. Then, the ball output state is transferred from chance stage B to promotion chance (see transition condition (I)).

In addition, in the normal stage, as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), when it is decided to transition to pseudo BIG, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). In addition, in the chance stage A, as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), when it is decided to transition to pseudo BIG, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage A to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). Also, in chance stage B, if it is decided to transition to pseudo BIG as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage B to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)).

In the promotion chance, when it is determined to shift to pseudo BIG as a result of the promotion chance medium lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo BIG. (See transition condition (K)). When the unit game is played a predetermined number of times (4 times) without deciding to shift to pseudo BIG in the promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo REG (transition). (See condition (L)).

In the pseudo-BIG, when the consecutive game challenge lottery (see step S4408 in FIG. 486) is won, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball output state from the pseudo-BIG to the consecutive game challenge when the pseudo-BIG ending condition is satisfied. (See transition condition (M)). In the pseudo-REG, when the consecutive game challenge lottery (see step S4483 in FIG. 494) is won, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball output state from the pseudo-REG to the consecutive game challenge when the pseudo REG ending condition is satisfied. (See transition condition (M)). The termination conditions for the pseudo BIG and the termination conditions for the pseudo REG will be explained later using FIG. 433.

When a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4484 in FIG. 494) is won in the pseudo REG, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo REG to the pseudo BIG when the end condition of the pseudo REG is met (see transition condition (N)). Note that when a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 485) is won in the pseudo BIG, the main control circuit 100 will control the ball output state back to the pseudo BIG when the end condition of the pseudo BIG is met.

In the consecutive game challenge, if it is determined to move to a promotion chance as a result of the lottery during the consecutive game challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 498), the game number lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4523 in FIG. 498) When the determined number of unit games have been played, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball output state from a consecutive game challenge to a promotion chance (see transition condition (O)). In the consecutive game challenge, when it is determined to shift to pseudo BIG as a result of the lottery during the consecutive game challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 498), the number of games played at the start of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4523 in FIG. 498) is determined. When the determined number of unit games have been played, the main control circuit 100 shifts the ball payout state from consecutive game challenge to pseudo BIG (see transition condition (P)).

In a consecutive game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) determines that a transition to a non-advantageous zone will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the consecutive game challenge to the non-advantageous zone (see transition condition (Q)). In a consecutive game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) determines that a transition to consecutive game preparation will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the consecutive game challenge to consecutive game preparation (see transition condition (R)).

In the above, typical transition routes for each ball release state have been described. In this embodiment, conditions other than the above-mentioned transition conditions (A) to (R) are also provided as transition conditions for the ball release state, and when each transition condition is satisfied, the transition from one ball release state to another ball release state is established. It is designed to transition to a ball state. This will be explained in more detail below.

Note that the production section can be set in a disadvantageous state for the player (a state in which the game value of medals, etc. decreases), but it is possible to set it in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the gaming value of medals etc. decreases), but it is possible to set the state in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the game value of medals etc. decreases), but it is possible to set the state in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the game value of medals etc. decreases). The correct batting order of the winning combination, the bonus symbol combinations to be arranged, etc.) may be in a state where it can be reported.

<AT status (pseudo BIG and pseudo REG)>
FIG. 433(a) is a diagram showing numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor in pseudo BIG and pseudo REG. FIG. 433(b) is a diagram showing contents corresponding to numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor.

As explained in the first embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to the player (AT state), the sub-side notification means controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (for example, the main effect display 21) as well as the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100, information on the stop operation is notified. Similar to the first embodiment, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section). The notification lamp displays the information on the stop operation by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (AT state). do.

As shown in FIG. 433(a), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when "F_213 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, a numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when "F_213 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the numerical value "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when "F_213 Bell C" is determined as an internal winning combination, a numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when "F_213 Bell D" is determined as an internal winning combination, a numerical value "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor.

As shown in FIG. 433(b), a numerical value of "1" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed with an eye aimed at "seven," as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed. A numerical value of "2" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C is performed with an eye aimed at "seven," as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed.

According to the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor, the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R by eye-pressing aiming at "seven", the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stop operation is performed. It is notified that a stop operation is to be performed on the middle reel 3C. According to the numerical value "4" on the instruction monitor, the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R by eye-pressing aiming at "seven", the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the middle reel 3C, and the third stop operation is performed. It is notified that a stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L.

The number "5" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C will be performed with an eye aimed at the "buoy", as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L will be performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R will be performed. The number "6" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C will be performed with an eye aimed at the "buoy", as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R will be performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L will be performed.

The number "7" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R should be performed with an eye aimed at the "buoy", as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L should be performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C should be performed. The number "8" on the instruction monitor notifies that as the first stopping operation, a stopping operation for the right reel 3R should be performed with an eye aimed at the "buoy", as the second stopping operation, a stopping operation for the center reel 3C should be performed, and as the third stopping operation, a stopping operation for the left reel 3L should be performed.

As described above, in pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, any numerical value from "1" to "8" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The display of any one of the numerical values "1" to "8" on the instruction monitor (notification of information on the stop operation to win the push order bell) is also called "bell navigation". The player can obtain 15 medals by performing a stop operation according to the notification (BelNavi) (see FIG. 429). As a result, the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG are in a gaming state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, as will be explained below, the pseudo BIG has a greater number of bell navigation operations than the pseudo REG, and has a more advantageous gaming state than the pseudo REG.

Here, as the pseudo BIG, a first pseudo BIG and a second pseudo BIG are provided. When the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG. In the first pseudo BIG, "C_Middle Rip A_01-04", "C_Lower Rip A_01-06", "C_CU Rip_01-03", "C_Upper Rip B_01-06", "C_Upper Rip A_01-03", When any one of "C_CD Rep_01-04" (normal rep) is displayed along the effective line, the first pseudo BIG shifts to the second pseudo BIG.

There is an upper limit to the number of times that the first pseudo BIG can be shifted to the second pseudo BIG in one pseudo BIG, and the upper limit is three times. If the number of times of transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (the number of winnings of normal reps) is 2 or less, when the bell navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (9 times) in the second pseudo BIG, the second pseudo BIG to the first pseudo-BIG. On the other hand, if the number of transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (the number of winnings of normal reps) is 3, when the bell navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (9 times) in the second pseudo BIG, the second pseudo BIG The pseudo-BIG ends without transitioning from the BIG to the first pseudo-BIG.

In addition, when Bell Navi is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times) in the first pseudo BIG, the pseudo BIG ends, regardless of the number of transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (the number of winning normal lip).In addition, when Bell Navi is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) in the pseudo REG, the pseudo REG ends.

The remaining number of times BellNavi can be executed in the first pseudo BIG is managed by the first BellNavi number counter, and the remaining number of times BellNavi can be executed in the second pseudo BIG and the remaining number of times BellNavi can be executed in pseudo REG are managed by the first BellNavi number counter. It is managed by the BellNavi number counter. Further, the remaining number of times that the first pseudo BIG can be transferred to the second pseudo BIG is managed by a normal reply remaining winning number counter.

When the pseudo-BIG starts, the first VerNavi number counter is set to "30", and the normal reply remaining winning number counter is set to "3". The value of the first Vernavigation counter is decremented by 1 each time Vernavigation is performed once in the first pseudo BIG. The value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter is subtracted by 1 each time there is a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (a normal reply wins in the first pseudo BIG).

When transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "9". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the second pseudo BIG. Also, when the pseudo REG starts, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "5". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the pseudo REG.

From the above, the termination condition for the pseudo BIG is that either of the following (i) or (ii) is satisfied, and the termination condition for the pseudo REG is that the following (iii) is satisfied.
(i) The value of the first Bernavi count counter is 0. (ii) The value of the normal remaining winning count counter is 0, and the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0. (iii) The value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0.

Therefore, in a situation where there is a large number of remaining bell navigation operations that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (value of the first bell navigation counter), the number of times that can be transitioned from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG has reached the upper limit. In this case, the pseudo-BIG ends without being able to fully enjoy the benefits of BellNavi in the first pseudo-BIG. In order to maximize the number of medals paid out in the pseudo BIG, wait until the remaining number of bell navigation operations that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (the value of the first bell navigation counter) is as small as possible, then start the final (third) It is necessary to shift to 2 pseudo-BIG. From this point of view, there is a large number of remaining bell navigation operations that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (value of the first bell navigation counter), and a large number of remaining bell navigation operations that can be performed from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG remain. In a situation where the number of times (the value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter) is 1, it is desirable to avoid transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (normal reply winning).

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role in the first pseudo BIG, if either "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" or "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" (missed replays) are displayed along the active line, there is no transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, and the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is not decremented. In other words, by winning a miss replay, it is possible to avoid transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (winning a normal replay).

As shown in FIG. 433(a), in the pseudo-BIG, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the numerical value "9" or "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor. be done. Specifically, when "F_Replay A" is determined as an internal winning combination in the pseudo BIG, if the value of the normal rep remaining winnings counter is 2 or more, or if the value of the 1st BelNavi number of wins counter is 6 or less. If there is, the number "9" will be displayed on the instruction monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination in pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal rep remaining winnings counter is 2 or more, or if the value of the first BelNavi number counter is 6 or less In this case, the numerical value "9" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

In contrast, when "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning role in the pseudo BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or more, the number "10" is displayed on the indication monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role in the pseudo BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or more, the number "10" is displayed on the indication monitor.

As shown in FIG. 433(b), the number "9" on the command monitor notifies the player to perform a stop operation to win a normal replay, and the number "10" on the command monitor notifies the player to perform a stop operation to win a miss replay. When the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or more, and "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, the player can avoid transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (winning a normal replay) by performing a stop operation to win a miss replay in accordance with the notification. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo BIG from ending when there are many remaining Bernavis (7 or more) that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (the value of the first Bernavi count counter), and the pseudo BIG can be continued while enjoying the benefits of Bernavi in the first pseudo BIG.

As mentioned above, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A", displaying "C_Replay Reply A_01~02" as a "reply" on the active line is permitted, and the internal winning combination is is "F_replay B", it is permitted to display "C_reply B_01-02" on the active line in addition to "C_reply A_01-02" as "reply". (See Figure 426E).

In order to display "C_Removal Reply A_01~02" on the active line, the stop operation on the left reel 3L must be performed at the timing when the symbol ("bar") at symbol position "6" is displayed in the middle area. (the "bar" at symbol position "6" is pressed). In both cases, when the internal winning combination is “F_Replay A” and when the internal winning combination is “F_Replay B”, “C_Miss Reply A_01-02” should be displayed on the active line. is allowed, so by successfully pressing the "bar" bit, it is possible to win "C_reply A_01-02" (avoid winning a regular rep).

In contrast, to display "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" on an active line, the stopping operation on the left reel 3L must be performed at the timing when any of the symbols (all "buoys") between symbol positions "13" and "15" are displayed in the middle area (the "buoy" at symbol positions "13" to "15" must be pressed with the right eye). When the internal winning role is "F_Replay B", "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is permitted to be displayed on an active line, so by successfully pressing the "buoy", "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" can be made to win (avoiding the normal replay winning). On the other hand, if the internal winning role is "F_Replay A", "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is not permitted to be displayed on the active line, so even if you press the "V", you cannot make "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" win, and in this case, a regular replay will win.

When the numerical value "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the player can recognize that either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor is the same ("10") when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B", and the main performance The content of the effect performed on the display unit 21 is also the same (for example, display of a character image such as "Elimination Challenge"). Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B."

As long as you can successfully press the “bar” bit, you can win a missed rip even if the internal winning combination is “F_Replay A” or “F_Replay B”. It does not matter whether the hand is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B". However, in general, bita-pressing requires advanced technology and is difficult to achieve successfully.

The timing of the stop operation (range of symbols to aim for) to successfully press the "buoy" is wider than the timing (range of symbols to aim for) to successfully press the "bar". Therefore, it can be said that pressing the ``buoy'' is easier than pressing the ``bar''. However, in a situation where it is not possible to recognize whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" and when the "buoy" is pressed, the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B". If the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B", it is possible to win a winning rep, but if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A", a winning rep cannot be won.

The ratio of the probability that "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning role to the probability that "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role is about 1:3 (see Figures 427 and 428). Therefore, when the "V" is pressed with the eye in a situation where it is not possible to recognize whether the internal winning role is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B", the probability of winning a missed lip (assuming that the press is performed accurately) is about 75%. In contrast, when the "Bar" is pressed with the perfect touch, the probability of winning a missed lip (assuming that the press is performed accurately) is 100%. From the above, the player plays the first pseudo BIG while selecting either the perfect touch of the "Bar" which is difficult but can definitely win a missed lip if successful, or the "V" which is difficult but may not be able to win a missed lip even if the player performs an accurate operation.

As shown in Fig. 433(a) and (b), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if any of "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B" (collectively referred to as "F_Common Bell" in the figure), "F_Parallel Watermelon", and "F_Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "11" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The number "11" on the instruction monitor notifies the player that a stopping operation will be performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L (the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R) as the first stopping operation. The configuration of the instruction monitor can be designed as appropriate. For example, the numbers "1" to "8" on the instruction monitor may be displayed only in the 3BB flag interval state, and the numbers "9" to "11" on the instruction monitor may be displayed regardless of whether the reel is in the 3BB flag interval state or not.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags>
FIG. 434 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the sub-flag, and the payout flag.

As explained in the first embodiment, the sub-flag is information that allows the group to be identified by grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are the target role for the lottery and the probability of winning, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability (various processes related to advantageous zones) by the main control circuit 100 and assigning the same information to the groups.

FIG. 434 shows the correspondence between the internal winning roles and the sub-flags. Specifically, the sub-flag number "0" ("miss") is set for the internal winning roles "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_1-piece role B", "F_common 1-piece role", and "F_common 15-piece role".

For the internal winning roles "F_Replay A" and "F_Replay B", the sub-flag number "1" ("Replay") is set. For the internal winning roles "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B", the sub-flag number "2" ("Common Bell") is set. For the internal winning role "F_Parallel Watermelon", the sub-flag number "3" ("Parallel Watermelon") is set. For the internal winning role "F_Diagonal Watermelon", the sub-flag number "4" ("Diagonal Watermelon") is set.

For the internal winning role "F_Cherry", sub-flag number "5" ("Cherry") is set. For the internal winning roles "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", and "F_Reach Eye Role C", sub-flag number "6" ("Reach Eye Role") is set. For the internal winning role "F_BB Fixed Role A", sub-flag number "7" ("BB Fixed Role A") is set. For the internal winning role "F_BB Fixed Role B", sub-flag number "8" ("BB Fixed Role B") is set. For the internal winning role "F_1 Piece Role A", sub-flag number "9" ("1 Piece Role") is set. For the internal winning role "Loss", sub-flag number "10" ("Loss (Single BB)") is set.

As a result, if the internal winning role is any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_1 Piece Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role", and "F_Common 15 Piece Role", the sub-flag "Miss" is determined.

When the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B", the sub-flag "Replay" is determined. When the internal winning combination is either "F_common bell A" or "F_common bell B", the sub-flag "common bell" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_parallel watermelon", the sub-flag "parallel watermelon" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_diagonal watermelon", the sub-flag "diagonal watermelon" is determined.

When the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry", the sub-flag "Cherry" is determined. If the internal winning combination is any one of "F_Reach combination A", "F_Reach combination B", and "F_Reach combination C", the sub-flag "Reach combination" is determined. . When the internal winning combination is "F_BB confirmed combination A", the sub-flag "BB confirmed combination A" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_BB confirmed combination B", the sub-flag "BB confirmed combination B" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_1-card combination A", the sub-flag "1-card combination" is determined. If the internal winning combination is a "loss", a sub-flag "loss (single BB)" is determined.

The above sub-flags are determined in the main control circuit 100 by the sub-flag setting process described in the first embodiment (see step S73 in FIG. 26). Information indicating the determined sub-flag is then basically included in the start command data (see step S7 in FIG. 23) and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the determined sub-flag and perform a performance according to that sub-flag.

However, in this embodiment, when the non-AT state is in effect and no information on the stop operation is reported on the instruction monitor, the internal winning combinations are "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", and "F_213 Bell C". Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D ”, “F_321 Bell A”, “F_321 Bell B”, “F_321 Bell C”, and “F_321 Bell D” (press order bell), the information indicating the sub flag is the sub control The signal is not sent to circuit 200.

These push order bells constitute biased bells where the push order is incorrect if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, but the push order can be correct if a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. When such a biased bell is determined as the internal winning role, by preventing information indicating the sub-flag from being sent to the sub-control circuit 200, it is possible to prevent a stop operation (irregular push) aimed at winning the biased bell in a non-AT state. However, it may also be configured so that information indicating the sub-flag is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 even when a biased bell is determined as the internal winning role.

The configuration of the biased bell is not particularly limited, and it is not necessary to have an internal winning role that can result in the correct push order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation (see Figures 427 and 428), or it may be configured to have an internal winning role that can result in the correct push order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, but with a lower probability of determining the internal winning role than the probability of determining an internal winning role that can result in the correct push order when a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation.

Further, FIG. 434 shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the ball-out flag. There are six types of correspondence between internal winning combinations and ball flags (ball flag group 1, ball flag group 2, ball ball group 3, ball ball group 4, ball ball group 5, and ball ball flag group 5). Ball flag group 6) is provided. Depending on the situation of the game, the ball-out flag in one of these ball-out flag groups is determined.

Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a "miss", the "exclusion combination" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 1, and the "reach eye BB" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 2. is determined, "reach number BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "non-falling combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined. “Others” is determined as the flag, and “Reach-to-reach BB” is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B", the "exclusion combination" is determined as the ball flag in ball flag group 1, and "Others" is determined as the ball-out flag, "Repbell" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 3, "Non-falling combination" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 4, and the ball-out flag is determined as "non-falling combination". "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in Group 5, and "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in Group 6.

The internal winning combination is "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D" ", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", and "F_321 Bell D '', "Transition" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 2, and the ball-out flag is determined as "other". "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "other" is determined as the ball output flag in group 5. “Others” is determined as the ball release flag in flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is either "F_common bell A" or "F_common bell B", the "transitional combination" is determined as the ball flag in ball flag group 1, and the ball flag group "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in 2, "Repbell" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "non-falling combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, and “Others” is determined as the ball-out flag in ball flag group 5, and “Others” is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Parallel Watermelon", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be "Transition Role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be "Weak Rare Role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be "Weak Rare Role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be "Non-Falling Role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "Parallel Watermelon", and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be "Other".

When the internal winning combination is "F_diagonal watermelon", the "transition combination" is determined as the ball flag in the ball flag group 1, and "diagonal watermelon" is determined as the ball flag in the ball flag group 2. , "diagonal watermelon" is determined as the ball flag in ball flag group 3, "non-fall" is determined as the ball flag in ball flag group 4, and "diagonal watermelon" is determined as the ball flag in ball flag group 5. ``Watermelon'' is determined, and ``Others'' is determined as the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6.

When the internal winning role is "F_Cherry", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be "Transition role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be "Weak rare role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be "Weak rare role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be "Non-falling role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "Cherry", and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be "Other".

If the internal winning role is any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", and "F_Reach Eye Role C", the "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Reach Eye" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Fall Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Reach Eye" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

When the internal winning combination is either "F_BB confirmed role A" or "F_BB confirmed role B", the "transition role" is determined as the released ball flag in the released ball flag group 1, and "Reach number BB" is determined as the ball output flag in 2, "Reach number" or "Reach number BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, and "Reach number BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4. "Non-falling combination" is determined, "Others" is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 5, and "Reach-to-reach BB" is determined as the ball out flag in ball-out flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is either "F_1 coin role A" or "F_1 coin role B", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be "transition role", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be "other", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be "other", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be "other", the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "other", and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be "1 coin role".

If the internal winning combination is either "F_common 1-card combination" or "F_common 15-card combination", the "excluded combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, and the ball output is "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in flag group 2, "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Others" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, and “Others” is determined as the ball-out flag in ball flag group 5, and “Others” is determined as the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6.

The payout flag determined in the above manner will be used in the various lotteries described below.

<Processing at the start of play in non-advantageous zone>
Fig. 435 is a flow chart showing the game start processing for the non-advantageous zone performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 436(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to the advantageous zone. Fig. 436(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to the advantageous zone.

The game start processing for the non-advantageous zone shown in FIG. 435 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone (see FIG. 430) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of FIG. 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for non-favorable zones, first, the main CPU 101 executes a favorable zone transition lottery process (step S4001). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the favorable zone transition lottery table (see FIG. 436(a)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 1 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the favorable zone transition lottery will be a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

In the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 436(a), the results of the advantageous section transition lottery ("non-winning" and A lottery value corresponding to a "win" is defined. The probability that each result of the advantageous interval transition lottery is determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. As a result, if the released ball flag in released ball flag group 1 is the "exclusion combination", the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is 0/256, and the released ball flag in released ball flag group 1 is "transition combination". ”, the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery with a probability of 256/256.

After executing the processing of step S4001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won (step S4002). If it is determined that the advantageous zone transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section transfer lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes an advantageous section transfer lottery process (step S4003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table at the time of transition to an advantageous section (see FIG. 436(b)), and performs a lottery based on the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 2 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. As a result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous section, one of "preparation for consecutive games", "consecutive winnings challenge", and "confirmed consecutive winnings challenge" is determined.

In the lottery table at the time of transition to an advantageous section shown in FIG. A lottery value corresponding to the result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous section (``preparation for consecutive games'', ``continuous winnings challenge'', and ``determined consecutive winnings challenge'') is defined for each item BB''). The probability that each result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous section is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other," the result of the lottery when moving to the favorable zone is determined to be "Preparation for consecutive wins" with a probability of 256/256, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Diagonal Watermelon," the result of the lottery when moving to the favorable zone is determined to be "Consecutive wins challenge" with a probability of 128/256, and "Definite consecutive wins challenge" with a probability of 128/256.

When "preparation for consecutive games" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive games preparation transition flag to ON. The consecutive games preparation transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start preparation for consecutive games. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive games preparation transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to preparation for consecutive games (see transition condition (A) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

Furthermore, if the "Continued Contest Challenge" or "Consecutive Continuous Contest Challenge" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous section (the Continuous Contest Challenge is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Continuous Contest Challenge transition flag to ON. . The consecutive game challenge transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the consecutive game challenge. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the consecutive game challenge transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. As a result, the game shifts to the consecutive game challenge (see transition condition (B) in FIGS. 431 and 432). Furthermore, when the "confirmed consecutive winning challenge" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of transition to an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 sets the confirmed consecutive winning challenge flag to ON. The confirmed consecutive game challenge flag is referred to in the consecutive game challenge, and the consecutive game challenge is controlled advantageously.

After executing the processing of step S4003, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In this embodiment, when the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is a "transition role" (when a transition role is established), the advantageous zone transition lottery is always a winning lottery, but the coefficient for non-winning lottery may be set to 1 or more so that it is not necessarily a winning lottery. In addition, it is possible to generate a performance that suggests the establishment of a transition role or an excluded role in a non-advantageous zone, thereby increasing the expectation of whether or not a transition to an advantageous zone will occur, or it is possible to generate a performance that suggests or notifies the establishment of a winning role with a high expectation of transition to a highly advantageous state such as a consecutive win challenge or a confirmed consecutive win challenge (for example, a winning role corresponding to a payout flag other than "other" shown in FIG. 436 (b) (weak rare role, diagonal watermelon, reach eye, reach eye BB)).

<Processing at the start of the game for preparation for consecutive games>
FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the game start process for consecutive winnings preparation performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 438(a) is a diagram showing the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1). FIG. 438(b) is a diagram showing the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing a consecutive winning challenge transition lottery table. FIG. 440(a) is a diagram showing a confirmed lottery table upon transition to consecutive game challenge. FIG. 440(b) is a diagram illustrating a consecutive game preparation falling lottery table.

The game start processing for consecutive win preparation shown in FIG. 437 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win preparation (see FIG. 430) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of FIG. 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start process for preparing for consecutive games, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is time to start preparing for consecutive games (step S4021). As described above, to prepare for consecutive games, the game start state control process (step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the consecutive games preparation transition flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 435) is set to ON is performed. (see). In the state control processing at the start of the game in the unit game that transitions to consecutive game preparations, after updating the ball release status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) to transition to consecutive game preparations, Processing at the start of the game for game preparation is performed. In the process of step S4021, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to start preparing for consecutive games when the current unit game has transitioned to consecutive games preparation (when the current unit game is the first game of consecutive games preparation). do.

When it is determined that preparation for consecutive wins has begun, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state (see FIG. 423) (step S4022). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state by referring to the carryover role storage area (see FIG. 18) of the main RAM 103.

When determining that the current gaming state is between the 3BB flags, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter to "5" (step S4023). The value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in the consecutive game preparation, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter is larger than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in the consecutive game preparation. Although not shown, the subtraction is performed in step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (1) (step S4024). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1) (see FIG. 438(a)) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (1). As the (multi-player preparation mode), one of "Mode 1" and "Mode 2" is determined.

In the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 438(a), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) ("mode 1" and "mode 2") is specified for each setting value ("setting 1", "setting 2", "setting 3", "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". As a result, regardless of the setting value, "mode 2" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) (consecutive-game preparation mode) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4022 that the current game state is not the 3BB flag interval state, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter to "0" (step S4025). Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (2) (step S4026). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2) (see FIG. 438 (b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "mode 1" or "mode 2" as the result (consecutive game preparation mode) of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2).

In the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2) shown in FIG. For each setting 6), a lottery value corresponding to the result of consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2) (``mode 1'' and ``mode 2'') is defined. The probability that each result of consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2) is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" It can be expressed by As a result, regardless of the set value, "Mode 1" is determined as the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2) (consecutive game preparation mode) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4021 that it is not the time to start preparation for consecutive wins, or after executing the processing of step S4024 or step S4026, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive win challenge transition lottery process (step S4027). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table (see FIG. 439) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the consecutive win challenge transition lottery will be a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

The consecutive game challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. ). If the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 3 is "Others," the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. In some cases, the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 439(b) is referred to, and if the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 3 is "weak rare combination", the lottery table shown in FIG. 439(c) is referred to. The consecutive game challenge transition lottery table is referred to, and if the issued ball flag in the paid ball flag group 3 is "diagonal watermelon", the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 439(d) is referred to, and the issued ball flag is When the ball output flag in group 3 is "reaching number" or "reaching number BB", the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 439(e) is referred to.

In each consecutive-game challenge transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") is specified for each consecutive-game preparation mode ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2"). The probability of each outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 3 is "Rep Bell," and it is determined in the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026). If the consecutive game preparation mode is “Mode 2”, the player will win the consecutive game challenge transition lottery with a probability of 32/256. In addition, if the consecutive game preparation mode determined in the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026) is "Mode 1", Ball Out Flag Regardless of the ball out flag in group 3, the lottery to move to consecutive game challenge is not won.

When the consecutive challenge transition lottery is won (the consecutive challenge is won), the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive challenge transition flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive challenge transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the consecutive challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive challenge transition flag is set to ON. This transitions to the consecutive challenge (see transition condition (D) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432). As described later, the consecutive challenge is a ball output state in which it is possible to transition to a pseudo BIG or promotion chance with a relatively high probability, and the consecutive challenge preparation is a ball output state in which it is possible to transition to such a consecutive challenge.

After executing the process of step S4027, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the consecutive-chance challenge transition lottery has been won (step S4028). If it is determined that the consecutive-chance challenge transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-chance challenge transition determination lottery process (step S4029). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-chance challenge transition determination lottery table (see FIG. 440(a)), and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the consecutive-chance challenge transition determination lottery will be a "non-win" or a "win."

In the confirmed lottery table at the time of transition to consecutive game challenge shown in FIG. A lottery value corresponding to the determined lottery result ("non-winning" and "winning") at the time of transition to consecutive game challenge is defined for each winning number (or "reaching number BB"). The probability that each result of the confirmed lottery at the time of transitioning to the Renshu Challenge is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed.

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "diagonal watermelon", there is a 128/256 probability of winning the fixed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "reach eye" or "reach eye BB", the fixed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge will always be a non-win. If the fixed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge is won, the main CPU 101 sets the fixed consecutive win challenge flag to ON. As described above, the fixed consecutive win challenge flag is referenced in the consecutive win challenge, and the consecutive win challenge is controlled advantageously. Note that if the value of the consecutive win challenge winning count counter (see FIG. 504) is a predetermined value (e.g., 3) or more, the fixed lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive win challenge may always be won.

If it is determined in step S4028 that the lottery to transfer to consecutive game challenge has not been won, or after executing the process of step S4029, the main CPU 101 determines the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter (see step S4023 and step S4025). It is determined whether or not is "0" (step S4030). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter is "0", the main CPU 101 executes the consecutive game preparation fall lottery process (step S4031). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation falling lottery table (see FIG. 440(b)) and performs a lottery based on the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 4 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. Accordingly, either "non-winning" or "winning" is determined as the result of the consecutive winning lottery.

In the consecutive win preparation drop lottery table shown in FIG. 440(b), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") is specified for each ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 ("other" and "non-dropping role"). The probability of each result of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". As a result, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "other", there is a 192/256 probability of winning the consecutive win preparation drop lottery, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "non-dropping role", the consecutive win preparation drop lottery will always be a non-winning lottery.

If the consecutive win preparation drop lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the normal stage transition flag to ON. The normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition condition (C) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

If it is determined in step S4030 that the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter is not "0", or after executing the process of step S4031, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at game start for normal stage>
FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the normal stage game start processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal stage game start processing shown in FIG. 441 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is the normal stage (see FIG. 430) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of FIG. 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the normal stage game start process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is the normal stage start time (step S4041). As described above, to enter the normal stage, the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag (see step S4031 in FIG. 437) is set to ON is performed. The transition will take place. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that moves to the normal stage, after the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to move to the normal stage, the processing for the normal stage shown in FIG. Processing is performed at the start of the game. In the process of step S4041, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to start the normal stage when the current unit game shifts to the normal stage (when the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage).

If it is determined that it is time to start the normal stage, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage start processing (step S4042). The normal stage start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 442.

If it is determined in step S4041 that the normal stage has not started, or after executing the processing of step S4042, the main CPU 101 executes the normal ball output state common processing (step S4043). The normal ball output state common processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 450.

After executing the process of step S4043, the main CPU 101 executes the normal stage exclusive process (step S4044). The normal stage dedicated processing will be explained later using FIG. 445.

After executing the processing of step S4044, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal stage start processing>
Fig. 442 is a flow chart showing the normal stage start process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 443(a) is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table. Fig. 443(b) is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. Fig. 444 is a diagram showing a point mode lottery table.

The normal stage start processing shown in FIG. 442 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4042 of FIG. 441 (normal stage game start processing).

In the normal stage start process, the main CPU 101 first executes a normal transition mode lottery process (step S4061). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal transition mode lottery table (see FIG. 443(a)) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as the result of the normal transition mode lottery (normal mode), One of "mode 1", "mode 2", "mode 3", "mode 4", "mode 5", "mode 6", "mode 7", and "mode 8" is determined.

In the mode lottery table at the time of normal transition shown in FIG. ), the result of the mode lottery at the time of normal transition ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and " A lottery value corresponding to "Mode 8") is defined. The probability that each result of the mode lottery during normal transition is determined should be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

For example, if the setting value is setting 1, "mode 1" is determined with a probability of 98/256 as the result of the mode lottery at the time of normal transition (normal mode), and "mode 2" is determined with a probability of 98/256. is determined, "Mode 3" is determined with a probability of 24/256, "Mode 4" is determined with a probability of 12/256, "Mode 5" is determined with a probability of 12/256, and "Mode 5" is determined with a probability of 12/256. "Mode 6" is determined with a probability of 3/256, "mode 7" is determined with a probability of 8/256, and "mode 8" is determined with a probability of 8/256.

After executing the process in step S4061, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling lottery process during normal transition (step S4062). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling lottery table for normal transition (see FIG. 443(b)) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that the result of the ceiling lottery for normal transition (the number of ceiling games) is , "1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", " 601'', ``651'', ``701'', ``801'', and ``901''.

In the normal transition ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. 443(b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal transition mode lottery ("1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", "601", "651", "701", "801", and "901") are specified for each normal mode ("mode 1", "mode 2", "mode 3", "mode 4", "mode 5", "mode 6", "mode 7", and "mode 8"). The probability of each result of the normal transition ceiling lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the normal mode determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061) is "Mode 1", the result of the ceiling lottery (the number of ceiling games) at the time of normal transition is a probability of 16/256. "201" is determined, "301" is determined with a probability of 16/256, "401" is determined with a probability of 48/256, "501" is determined with a probability of 16/256, and "501" is determined with a probability of 16/256. "601" is determined with probability, "701" is determined with probability of 16/256, "801" is determined with probability of 40/256, and "901" is determined with probability of 56/256.

After executing the process in step S4062, the main CPU 101 executes a point mode lottery process (step S4063). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 444), performs a lottery based on random numbers, and selects "point mode 1", "point mode" as the result of the point mode lottery (point mode). Either "point mode 2" or "point mode 3" is determined.

The point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 444 is provided for each of the values of the point reach count counter ("0-2", "3-5", "6-8", and "9 or more"). The value of the point reach count counter indicates the number of times the value of the normal points (see FIG. 456) has reached a predetermined value (100). When the value of the point reach count counter is any of "0" to "2", the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 444(a) is referenced, when the value of the point reach count counter is any of "3" to "5", the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 444(b) is referenced, when the value of the point reach count counter is any of "6" to "8", the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 444(c) is referenced, and when the value of the point reach count counter is "9" or more, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 444(d) is referenced.

In each point mode lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the point mode lottery ("Point Mode 1", "Point Mode 2", and "Point Mode 3") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the point mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the value of the point arrival count counter is any one of "0" to "2" and the setting value is setting 6, "point mode 1" is determined with a probability of 253/256, and "Point mode 2" is determined with a probability of 256, and "point mode 3" is determined with a probability of 1/256. In addition, if the point mode value (any of 1 to 3) determined in this point mode lottery is smaller than the already determined point mode value, the point mode determined in this point mode lottery Point mode values are discarded.

<Normal stage-only processing>
FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing normal stage dedicated processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing a freeze lottery table during the normal stage. FIGS. 447 to 449 are diagrams showing normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables.

The normal stage dedicated process shown in FIG. 445 is a process performed in step S4044 of FIG. 441 (normal stage game start process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the normal stage dedicated process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the normal stage freeze lottery process (step S4081). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage freeze lottery table (see FIG. 446) and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag in ball release flag group 6 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. As a result of the mid-stage freeze lottery, one of "non-winning", "promotion chance", and "pseudo BIG" is determined.

The normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. It is provided. When the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is “other”, the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 446(a) is referred to, and the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is “reach”. In this case, the freeze lottery table during the normal stage shown in FIG. 446(b) is referred to, and if the ball released flag in ball release flag group 6 is "Reach number BB", the table is shown in FIG. 446(c). The freeze lottery table during the normal stage shown in FIG.

In the freeze lottery table during each normal stage, the normal stage Lottery values corresponding to the results of the medium freeze lottery ("non-winning", "promotion chance", and "pseudo BIG") are defined. The probability that each result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage will be determined is expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye" and the setting value is set to 1, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage is determined to be "No Win" with a probability of 254/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 2/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB", regardless of the setting value, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage is determined to be "No Win" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 controls the game at the start of the next unit game after the unit game in which the freeze lottery was performed during the normal stage. In the state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated. This will give you a chance to get promoted. In addition, when "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage (the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 executes a game in the unit game next to the unit game in which the freeze lottery during the normal stage was performed. In the start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated. This causes the transition to pseudo BIG.

In addition, if the "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if the player wins the Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG), a freeze occurs when the unit game in which the normal stage freeze lottery was performed ends. As explained in the first embodiment, a freeze is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (invalidates the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time). The main CPU 101 controls the execution of the freeze in the main side effect control process (see step S16 in FIG. 23) at the end of the unit game. As a result, after the third stop operation in the unit game is performed, game operations are invalidated for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever 7 to start the next unit game is used as a trigger to transition to the Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG.

Note that while the freeze is being executed, as a performance corresponding to the freeze, a performance that suggests or announces a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG win is performed using images, sounds, lamps, etc. In addition, in situations where this freeze occurs, the reach numbers (those that indicate a hit in a pseudo bonus, etc.) are often stopped on the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), so the reel backlight ( For example, reel lighting is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R so that the nine symbols stopped and displayed within the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated one by one. It is also possible to draw attention to the reach position by lighting up, blinking, or turning off the LEDs. As will be described later, in this embodiment, "one piece in reach position" and "one piece in BB confirmed reach position" (see FIG. 429) play the role of reach position. In a situation where a freeze is performed, such a reach eye may always be stopped when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined press order (for example, the first left stop), or it may be possible to make the reach position stop depending on the timing of the stop operation. It may not be stopped.

In addition, in one unit game during the premonition state, if a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 clears the value of the premonition game number counter (see step S4084). This ends the premonition state. Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has already been won at the time the processing of step S4081 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 does not perform a normal stage freeze lottery and moves to step S4082.

After executing the process in step S4081, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery process (step S4082). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIGS. 447 to 449), and based on the ball out flag in ball out flag group 5 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. By performing the lottery, as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery, there will be one of "non-winning", "chance stage A", "chance stage B", "promotion chance", and "pseudo BIG". Decide which one.

The normal stage medium transition flag/winning flag lottery table includes the normal stage medium transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see Figure 447) that is referenced in non-high accuracy, and the normal stage that is referred to in high accuracy 1 and high accuracy 2. A medium transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 448) and a normal stage medium transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 449) that is referred to in high accuracy 3 are provided. In the normal ball output state, the probability mode is controlled to be one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3 (see step S4085). In normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery, among the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables shown in FIGS. 447 to 449, the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table corresponding to the current probability mode is referred to. Ru.

The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table shown in FIGS. 447 to 449 shows the ball flags (“Others”, “Parallel Watermelon”, “Diagonal Watermelon”, and “Cherry”) in Ball Flag Group 5. provided for each. If the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 5 is “Other”, the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table shown in FIG. 447(a), FIG. 448(a), or FIG. 449(a) is referred to, and if the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "parallel watermelon", the normal stage transition flag shown in FIG. 447(b), FIG. 448(b), or FIG. 449(b)・When the winning flag lottery table is referred to and the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon", the result shown in FIG. 447(c), FIG. 448(c), or FIG. 449(c) The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table is referred to, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "cherry", the state shown in FIG. 447(d), FIG. The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table shown in d) is referred to.

In each normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table, each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6") , lottery values corresponding to the results of normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery ("non-winning", "chance stage A", "chance stage B", "promotion chance", and "pseudo BIG") are specified. has been done. The probability that each result of the transition flag/winning flag lottery during the normal stage is determined is: ``Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)'' ”.

For example, if the current probability mode is High Probability 1 or High Probability 2, and the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon", the normal stage transition flag/winning will be set regardless of the setting value. As a result of the flag lottery, "chance stage A" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "chance stage B" is determined with a probability of 255/256. In addition, if the current probability mode is high probability 3 and the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "parallel watermelon", regardless of the setting value, the result of the transition flag/winning flag lottery during the normal stage As such, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 128/256, "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 112/256, and "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 16/256.

In non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2, the probability that "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery is 0, and only in high probability 3 can "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" be determined. This makes high probability 3 the most favorable probability mode. In high probability 1 to high probability 2, the probability that "chance stage A" or "chance stage B" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery is higher than in non-high probability. This makes high probability 1 and high probability 2 more favorable probability modes than non-high probability.

When "chance stage A" is determined as a result of normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (chance stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A winning number counter. The fact that the value of the chance stage A winning number counter is 1 or more indicates that the chance stage A has been won. Details will be described later, but if you win chance stage A, you will move to chance stage A via the precursor state (see transition condition (E) in FIGS. 431 and 432). The value of the chance stage A winning number counter indicates the number of times that chance stage A was won. The winnings of chance stage A can be stocked, and it is possible to move from the normal stage to chance stage A a number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage A winning number counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to chance stage A, the value of the chance stage A winning number counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when the "Chance Stage B" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery (a chance stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B winning lottery counter. A value of 1 or more on the chance stage B winning lottery counter indicates that the chance stage B has been won. Details will be described later, but when the chance stage B is won, the game transitions to the chance stage B via the premonition state (see transition condition (G) in Figures 431 and 432). The value of the chance stage B winning lottery counter indicates the number of times the chance stage B has been won. Winning lottery tickets for the chance stage B can be stocked, and it is possible to transition from the normal stage to the chance stage B the number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage B winning lottery counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to the chance stage B, the value of the chance stage B winning lottery counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but when the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 431 and 432).

Further, when "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. The details will be described later, but if you win the pseudo-BIG, you will transition to the pseudo-BIG via the precursor state (see transition condition (J) in FIGS. 431 and 432). Note that when the promotion chance winning flag is set to on, if "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the transition flag/winning flag lottery during the normal stage (the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 Discard the chance winning flag (set it off).

After executing the process in step S4082, the main CPU 101 executes point-related processing (step S4083). Point-related processing will be explained later using FIG. 456.

After executing the process of step S4083, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for the number of portent games when the flag is won during the normal stage (step S4084). The lottery process for the number of precursor games when the flag is won during the normal stage will be explained later using FIG. 459.

After executing the processing in step S4084, the main CPU 101 executes probability mode related processing (step S4085). The probability mode related processing will be explained later using FIG. 464.

After executing the processing of step S4085, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The details will be described later, but in the normal ball appearance state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), one of non-high accuracy, high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, and high accuracy 3 is available. Controlled to one of the probability modes. High accuracy 1 to 3 are basically modes based on normal stages. High certainty 1 means that the number of unit games played in the normal ball output state is a predetermined value (any of "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", and "751"). 452A and 452B) (see step S4123 of FIG. 451, and FIGS. 452A and 452B). The lottery is performed according to normal modes 1 to 8.

High Probability 2 is a high probability state to which a transition is made when the value of normal points (see step S4163 in FIG. 456) reaches 100 points (when points are reached) in a lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 456, FIG. 458, step S4265 in FIG. 464, and FIG. 465(b)) or when a cherry is drawn (see step S4262 in FIG. 464 and FIG. 465(a)). The degree of advantage of the lottery state (probability mode) is equal between High Probability 1 and High Probability 2. High Probability 3 is a high probability state (so-called ultra-high probability) to which a transition is made when High Probability 2 is drawn during High Probability 1 or High Probability 1 is drawn during High Probability 2, and is a state with an even higher degree of advantage than High Probability 1 and High Probability 2.

High rates 1 to 3 have this kind of relationship. In this gaming machine, the main winning route from the so-called normal state (normal stage in FIG. 430) to the state in which the player recognizes a win ("promotion chance" and "pseudo BIG") is when the number of unit games is at a ceiling. When the number of games (see FIG. 443(b)) is reached, a winning combination such as a reach number (for example, a winning combination corresponding to "reach number" to "reach number BB" shown in FIG. 446) is drawn by lottery. , and a lottery for every 100 points. In the lottery based on winning combinations, it is easier to win "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" in chance stage A or chance stage B than in the normal stage.

Therefore, in the normal stage, the game is such that the player first moves from non-high probability to high probability 1 and 2, and then from high probability 1 and 2 to the chance stage (chance stage A to chance stage B) in order to aim for a win. In other words, High Accuracy 1 and 2 function as preferential conditions for transitioning to the Chance Stage. As mentioned above, since it is possible to transfer to High Accuracy 1 on the condition that the number of games is played, you can expect to transfer to High Accuracy even if the so-called rare combination (Watermelon or Cherry) cannot be drawn (not won). High certainty 2 is transferred based on the lottery performed when a point is reached or when a cherry is won, so the transfer can be expected depending on the winning combination.

In addition, high-certainty 3 is a state that transitions due to the duplication of high-certainty states such as high-certain 2 winnings during high-certainty 1 stay and high-certain 1 winning during high-certainty 2 stays, and as shown in Figure 449 (described later), there is a chance There is no transition to the stage, and it functions as a state where you can expect to win a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG". Since the high certainty 3 has a higher degree of advantage than the chance stage, by setting the specification to suppress the transition to the chance stage, in the state where there are remaining games of the high certainty 3, the degree of advantage over the high certainty 3 is higher. High accuracy 3 is not terminated due to transition to a lower state.

In addition, instead of having a special high probability state such as high probability 3 that is transitioned to by overlapping high probability states, when multiple high probability states overlap (when the number of remaining games in high probability 1 and the number of remaining games in high probability 2 are both 1 or more), for example, the specifications may be such that after the number of games in high probability 1 are completed, the number of games in high probability 2 are completed (transitioning to high probability 2 after high probability 1 ends). Also, in this embodiment, high probability 1 and 2 are in a state with the same degree of advantage, but high probability 2 may be more advantageous than high probability 1, or vice versa.

In terms of presentation, it is a good idea to have non-high probability stages be mainly daytime stages, high probability stages 1 and 2 being mainly evening stages, and high probability stage 3 being mainly night stages, and so on, to have presentations that suggest the state of staying. Also, when a specific presentation (such as a transition to the night stage or lines in red text) occurs, presentations that definitively notify the state of staying, such as a confirmation of staying in high probability stage 3, may be made possible. Also, presentations that occur in both high probability stages 1 and 2, or presentations that occur in high probability stage 1 but not in high probability stage 2, may be provided, making it possible to create a game in which the trigger for the transition to high probability can be guessed.

<Common processing for normal ball release status>
FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing normal ball output state common processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal ball output state common processing shown in FIG. 450 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4043 of FIG. 441 (processing at the start of gameplay for the normal stage).

In the normal ball output state common processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not "F_BB confirmed role A" (see Figures 427 and 428) has been determined as the internal winning role by the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4101).

If it is determined that "F_BB confirmed combination A" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 executes a normal medium long freeze lottery process (step S4102). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a normal medium long freeze lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining a "non-winning" as a result of the normal medium long freeze lottery (1). and "Win", and if the result of the Normal Medium Long Freeze Lottery (1) is "Win", the results of the Normal Medium Long Freeze Lottery (2) are "Non-Win" and " Decide which one is the winner. As a result, the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) is won with a probability of 1/256, and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) is won with a probability of 64/256.

If both the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) are won, a long freeze occurs. A long freeze is one type of freeze, and the period during which gaming operations are invalidated is longer than the above-mentioned freeze (see step S4081 in FIG. 445). If both the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) have been performed. The execution of the long freeze is controlled in the main side performance control process (see step S8 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game.

In addition, if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main side presentation control process at the start of the game (see step S8 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were made. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were made. As a result, the unit game in which the long freeze occurred is exhausted, and the pseudo game is played with the operation of the start lever 7 to start the next unit game as a trigger, and the game transitions to the pseudo BIG.

Further, when winning both the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. If the pseudo-BIG (ED) flag is set on, the pseudo-BIG will be controlled again when the pseudo-BIG termination condition is met, and thereby the pseudo-BIG will continue until the advantageous section ends. . As explained in the first embodiment, when the limit process (see FIG. 16) is executed in an advantageous section (i.e., a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of games in the advantageous section) When the value of the counter or the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a specified value (for example, 3000 games or 1999 coins), the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section. At this time, the pseudo-BIG will also end. Note that such limit processing may not be performed.

If both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the chance stage A winning count counter, the value of the chance stage B winning count counter, the promotion chance winning flag, the pseudo BIG winning flag, and the value of the premonition game count counter (see steps S4082 and S4084 in FIG. 445).

If it is determined in step S4101 that the "F_BB fixed role A" has not been determined as the internal winning role, or after executing the process of step S4102, the main CPU 101 executes a normal prescribed number of plays counter update process (step S4103). The normal prescribed number of plays counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 451.

After executing the processing in step S4103, the main CPU 101 executes ceiling-related processing (step S4104). The ceiling-related process will be explained later using FIG. 454.

After executing the processing of step S4104, the main CPU 101 executes the promotion chance pre-processing (step S4105). The promotion chance pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 466.

After executing the process in step S4105, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Normal regulation number of games counter update process>
Fig. 451 is a flow chart showing the normal regulation number of plays counter update process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 452A and Fig. 452B are diagrams showing a lottery table for the normal regulation number of plays to high probability 1 transition. Fig. 453 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the ceiling fake preparation.

The normal prescribed game number counter update process shown in FIG. 451 is a process performed in step S4103 of FIG. 450 (normal ball output state common process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the normal regulation game number counter update process, first, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the normal regulation game number counter (step S4121). The value of the normal prescribed game number counter indicates the number of unit games played in the normal ball output state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal prescribed game number counter is incremented only in the normal ball-out state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), and is cleared when transitioning to a ball-out state other than the normal ball-out state.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal regulation game number counter is a predetermined value (one of "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", and "751"). It is determined whether there is one (step S4122).

If it is determined that the value of the normal prescribed game number counter is any one of "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", and "751", the main CPU 101 normally A lottery process for moving to the specified number of games (high probability 1) is executed (step S4123). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on random numbers with reference to the normal specified number of games high probability 1 transfer lottery table (see FIGS. 452A and 452B), thereby determining the normal specified number of games high probability 1 transfer lottery. As a result, either "non-winning" or "high certainty 1" is determined.

452A and 452B, the normal mode (“mode 1”, “mode 2”, ``Mode 3'', ``Mode 4'', ``Mode 5'', ``Mode 6'', ``Mode 7'', and ``Mode 8''). When the normal mode is "Mode 1", the normal regulation number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 452A(a) is referred to, and when the normal mode is "Mode 2", the lottery table shown in FIG. The normal prescribed number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in b) is referred to, and if the normal mode is "mode 3", the normal prescribed number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 452A(c) is referred to. When the normal mode is "Mode 4", the normal specified number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 452A(d) is referred to, and when the normal mode is "Mode 5", the 452B(e) is referred to, and if the normal mode is "Mode 6", the normal prescribed number of games is High Probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 452B(f). is referred to, and when the normal mode is "Mode 7", the normal regulation game number high certainty 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 452B(g) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "Mode 8", the , the normal prescribed number of games high probability 1 transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 452B(h) is referred to.

In each normal specified number of games high probability 1 transition lottery table, for each value of the normal specified number of games counter (“251”, “351”, “451”, “551”, “651”, and “751”) , the lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal specified game number high probability 1 transfer lottery (“non-winning” and “high probability 1”) are defined. Normally, the probability that each result of the specified number of games high certainty 1 transition lottery is determined is ``Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256) ”. For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the value of the normal regulation game number counter is "251", as a result of the normal regulation game number high certainty 1 transition lottery, there is a probability of 240/256 that "Win" is determined, and "High probability 1" is determined with a probability of 16/256.

When "High Probability 1" is determined as the result of the lottery for transition to High Probability 1 for the normal number of plays (when High Probability 1 is won), the main CPU 101 sets High Probability 1 as the above-mentioned probability mode (see step S4082 in FIG. 445) and sets the High Probability 1 play count counter to "50". The value of the High Probability 1 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 1, and is stored in the main RAM 103. When the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter becomes 0, the game transitions from High Probability 1 to Non-High Probability. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process).

When the probability mode is set to high probability 2 (see step S4085 in FIG. 445), and "high probability 1" is determined as the result of the lottery for the transition to high probability 1 in the normal specified number of plays (if high probability 1 is drawn), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 3, sets the high probability 3 play count counter to "20", and clears the value of the high probability 1 play count counter and the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter described later. The value of the high probability 3 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can stay in high probability 3, and is stored in the main RAM 103. When the value of the high probability 3 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the high probability 3 play count counter becomes 0, the transition occurs from high probability 3 to high probability 2. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (processing for controlling the state at the end of play).

After executing the process of step S4123, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if the probability mode is set to high probability 3 at the time the process of step S4123 is executed, the main CPU 101 does not normally perform the lottery for transition to the specified number of plays and to high probability 1, and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4122 that the value of the normal regulation number of plays counter is not one of "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", and "751", the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal regulation number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games (the value determined in the ceiling lottery at the time of transition to normal (see step S4062 in FIG. 442)) (step S4124).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games, it sets the ceiling preparation state (step S4125). The ceiling preparation state is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to the premonition state (a state in which a premonition effect is performed suggesting a transition to any of the chance stage A, chance stage B, promotion chance, and pseudo BIG). After executing the process of step S4125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

When the processing of step S4125 is executed, if the promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without setting "Ceiling Preparation" . Also, if "Ceiling Preparation" is set and the promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won, the main CPU 101 clears "Ceiling Preparation".

If it is determined in step S4124 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not the ceiling number of games, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is a specific value (any of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801") (step S4126).

The value of the regular game counter is one of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801" If it is determined that this is the case, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling fake preparation lottery process (step S4127). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling fake preparation lottery table (see FIG. 453) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining "non-winning" and "ceiling" as a result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery. ``Preparing for fake''.

The ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453 includes the normal modes (“Mode 1”, “Mode 2”, “Mode 3”, “Mode 4'', ``Mode 5'', ``Mode 6'', ``Mode 7'', and ``Mode 8''). When the normal mode is "Mode 1", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(a) is referred to, and when the normal mode is "Mode 2", the lottery table shown in FIG. 453(b) is referred to. When the ceiling fake preparation lottery table is referenced and the normal mode is "Mode 3", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(c) is referenced and when the normal mode is "Mode 4". , the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(d) is referred to, and when the normal mode is "mode 5", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(e) is referred to, When the normal mode is "Mode 6", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(f) is referred to, and when the normal mode is "Mode 7", the lottery table shown in FIG. 453(g) is referred to. The ceiling fake preparation lottery table is referred to, and when the normal mode is "mode 8", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in FIG. 453(h) is referred to.

In each ceiling fake preparation lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery ("non-winning" and "ceiling fake preparation") is specified for each value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter ("51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801"). The probability of each result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be extracted (random number numerator: 256)". For example, when the normal mode is "mode 1" and the value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter is "51", the result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery is determined as "non-winning" with a probability of 192/256, and "ceiling fake preparation" with a probability of 64/256.

When "Ceiling fake preparation in progress" is determined as the result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery (if a winning lottery is drawn during ceiling fake preparation), the main CPU 101 sets ceiling fake preparation in progress. Ceiling fake preparation in progress is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to a false premonition state (a state in which a premonition performance is performed even if no winning lottery is drawn for any of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG).

If it is determined in step S4126 that the value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter is not one of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801", or after executing the processing of step S4127, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Note that when the process of step S4127 is executed, if High Probability 3 is set as the probability mode, or if the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won (the promotion chance winning flag or the pseudo BIG winning flag is (If set to on), the main CPU 101 does not perform the lottery during ceiling fake preparation and ends this subroutine. Further, when the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won with the ceiling fake preparation in progress set, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling fake preparation in progress. Also, if the value of the regular game number counter is "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", or "801", In either case, if the value is the number of ceiling games, the determination result in step S4124 is "YES", and therefore the ceiling fake preparation lottery will not be performed.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of games (number of occurrence games) that trigger a false premonition varies depending on the normal mode (modes 1 to 8) currently in (the value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter, which is likely to win the ceiling fake preparation lottery, differs for each normal mode). As a result, even if the premonition that occurs ends up being a false premonition that does not lead to a special benefit (chance stage, promotion chance, transition to pseudo BIG), the player is not simply disappointed that it was a miss, but the number of games in which the false premonition occurred can serve as a clue to guess the currently in mode. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the mode and further the fun of guessing the setting value from the mode.

<Ceiling-related processing>
Fig. 454 is a flow chart showing the ceiling-related processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 455A and Fig. 455B are diagrams showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached.

The ceiling-related processing shown in FIG. 454 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4104 of FIG. 450 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In the ceiling-related process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling is being prepared (see step S4125 in FIG. 451) is set (step S4141).

If it is determined that the ceiling preparation is set, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling preparation flag set lottery process (step S4142). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a ceiling preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery will be a "no win" or a "win". As a result, there is a 16/256 probability of winning the ceiling preparation flag set lottery.

Note that if the value of the ceiling preparation game number counter exceeds the predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 always determines a "win" as the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery. The value of the number of games during ceiling preparation counter indicates the number of unit games played after ceiling preparation is set, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Further, when the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won at the time when the process of step S4142 is executed (when the promotion chance winning flag or the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 performs ceiling preparation. The process moves to step S4143 without performing the medium flag set lottery.

After executing the process of step S4142, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won (step S4143). If it is determined that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling reaching lottery type lottery process (step S4144). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling reaching lottery type lottery table (see Figures 455A and 455B) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the ceiling reaching lottery type lottery to be one of "non-winning lottery", "promotion chance", and "pseudo BIG".

The lottery table for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455A and FIG. 455B is provided for each of the normal modes ("mode 1", "mode 2", "mode 3", "mode 4", "mode 5", "mode 6", "mode 7", and "mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in FIG. 442). When the normal mode is "mode 1", the lottery table for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455A(a) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 2", the lottery table for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455A(b) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 3", the lottery table for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455A(c) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 4", the lottery table for the type of lottery when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455A(d) is referenced, and the winning number is determined. When the normal mode is "mode 5", the lottery table for the type of lottery prize when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455B(e) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 6", the lottery table for the type of lottery prize when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455B(f) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 7", the lottery table for the type of lottery prize when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455B(g) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 8", the lottery table for the type of lottery prize when the ceiling is reached shown in FIG. 455B(h) is referenced.

In each ceiling-reaching lottery type table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery type ("No Winning Lottery", "Promotion Chance", and "Pseudo BIG") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the ceiling-reaching lottery type can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random numbers that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". For example, when the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the setting value is Setting 1, the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery type is "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery by type of winning upon reaching the ceiling (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the player has won a promotion chance. The details will be described later, but if you win the promotion chance, you will move through the precursor state to the promotion chance (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). Further, when a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the ceiling-reaching winning type lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the ceiling-reaching promotion chance winning flag on. The promotion chance winning flag upon reaching the ceiling is a flag indicating that the player has won a promotion chance through the lottery by type of winning upon reaching the ceiling.

Further, when "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the winning type lottery when reaching the ceiling (pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to on. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. The details will be described later, but if the pseudo-BIG is won, the game moves to the pseudo-BIG via the precursor state (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). In addition, when "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the ceiling-reaching winning type lottery (pseudo-BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the ceiling-reaching pseudo-BIG winning flag to ON. The pseudo-BIG winning flag upon reaching the ceiling is a flag indicating that a pseudo-BIG has been won by lottery by type of winning upon reaching the ceiling.

If it is determined in step S4143 that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4144, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that when the processing of step S4144 is executed, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling preparation.

If it is determined in step S4141 that ceiling preparation is not set, the main CPU 101 determines whether ceiling fake preparation (see step S4127 in FIG. 451) is set (step S4145).

If it is determined that the ceiling fake preparation is set, the main CPU 101 executes the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery process (step S4146). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. As a result, the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery is won with a probability of 20/256. Note that if the value of the ceiling fake preparation play counter exceeds a predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 always determines a "winning lottery" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. The value of the ceiling fake preparation play counter indicates the number of unit games played since the ceiling fake preparation was set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

If the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the ceiling fake winning flag to ON. The ceiling fake winning flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling fake has been won. Details will be described later, but if the ceiling fake is won, the game transitions to a premonition state. However, unless the game wins any of the chance stage A, chance stage B, promotion chance, and pseudo BIG, the game will not transition to these ball-dispensing states even after the premonition state ends. In other words, the premonition state is a state in which a false premonition performance is performed (false premonition state). Furthermore, if the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery is won, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling fake preparation state.

If it is determined in step S4145 that the ceiling fake preparation is not set, or after executing the processing of step S4146, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if the promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time the processing of step S4146 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON), the main CPU 101 does not draw the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery and ends this subroutine.

<Point-related processing>
Fig. 456 is a flow chart showing point-related processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 457 is a diagram showing a point acquisition lottery table. Fig. 458 is a diagram showing a point attainment lottery table.

The point-related processing shown in FIG. 456 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4083 of FIG. 445 (processing dedicated to the normal stage).

In the point-related process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether "F_Cherry" (see FIGS. 427 and 428) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination process (see step S64 in FIG. 26). (Step S4161). If it is determined that "F_cherry" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the cherry counter (step S4162). The value of the cherry counter indicates the number of times "F_Cherry" has been determined as an internal winning combination, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the cherry counter is added only in the normal stage, and the upper limit value is 4.

If it is determined in step S4161 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning combination, or after executing the process of step S4162, the main CPU 101 executes a point acquisition lottery process (step S4163). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 457) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining one of "non-winning", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", and "100" as the result of the point acquisition lottery.

The point acquisition lottery table shown in Figure 457 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 3 ("Other", "Ripbell", "Weak rare role", "Diagonal watermelon", and "Reach eye or Reach eye BB"). If the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 3 is "Other", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 457(a) is referenced, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 3 is "Ripbell", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 457(b) is referenced, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 3 is "Weak rare role", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 457(c) is referenced, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 3 is "Diagonal watermelon", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 457(d) is referenced, and if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 3 is "Reach eyes" or "Reach eyes BB", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 457(e) is referenced.

In each point acquisition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the point acquisition lottery ("No Win", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", and "100") is specified for each value of the cherry counter ("0", "1", "2", "3", and "4"). The probability of each result of the point acquisition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random numbers that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". For example, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Ripbell" and the value of the cherry counter is "4", the result of the point acquisition lottery is "30" with a probability of 192/256, "50" with a probability of 32/256, and "100" with a probability of 32/256.

When a value larger than "0" is determined as a result of the point acquisition lottery (the point acquisition lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds the value to the normal point value. The normal point value is used in the point reaching lottery (see step S4165) and is stored in the main RAM 103. The sub effect display section 22 (see FIG. 1) displays an image (for example, a meter, etc.) corresponding to the value of the normal points, and allows the player to visually check how many normal points have been accumulated. ing. When the meter is full, a lottery will be held when points are reached.

When the value of normal points is added (when points are acquired), an effect indicating that points have been acquired may be performed. In this embodiment, normal points are added according to the internal winning combination (replay or common bell) corresponding to the "Rep Bell" shown in FIG. 457(b). For example, when a replay or common bell is won after all reels have stopped, a post-winning effect for the replay or common bell (an effect in which light flows from the screen or reel backlight toward an image (meter, etc.) corresponding to the value of the normal points) may be performed to make it easier for the player to understand the game nature of the meter increasing due to the winning of the replay or common bell. Also, an effect suggesting the acquisition of points or an effect confirming the acquisition of points may be generated at a timing between the operation of the start lever and the stop of all reels. This configuration increases the interest, especially in the situation where 100 points are about to be reached.

Further, if the value of the normal points after addition is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the point attainment flag to ON. The point attainment flag is a flag indicating that the value of normal points has reached 100. When the point attainment flag is set to on in one unit game, when the point related processing in the next unit game of the unit game starts, the main CPU 101 sets the point attainment flag to off and performs a lottery when points are reached. Set flag on. The point-attainment lottery flag is a flag indicating that a point-attainment lottery is to be performed.

After executing the process of step S4163, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of normal points has reached 100 in the previous unit game (step S4164). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the normal point value has reached 100 in the previous unit game by referring to the point reaching lottery flag.

If it is determined that the normal point value has reached 100 in the previous unit game, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the point attainment counter (step S4165). As described above, the value of the point arrival counter indicates the number of times the normal point value reaches 100, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the point attainment counter is incremented only in the normal stage, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball issuing state other than the normal ball producing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

Then, the main CPU 101 executes a point mode lottery process (step S4166). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a point mode lottery table (see FIG. 444) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the point mode lottery (point mode) as one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3." This process is similar to the process of step S4063 in FIG. 442, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a point reaching lottery process (step S4167). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the point-attainment lottery table (see FIG. 458) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, and selects "High Accuracy 2" and "Chance Stage" as the result of the point-attainment lottery. One of "A", "Chance Stage B", "Promotion Chance", and "Pseudo BIG" is determined.

The point reaching lottery table shown in Figure 458 is provided for each of the following: "Point reaching count counter '0'", "Point reaching count counter '1, 3, 5, 7'", "Point reaching count counter '2, 4, 6, 8'", and "Point reaching count counter '9 or more' or "Point mode 3". If the value of the point reach counter is "0", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 458(a) is referenced, if the value of the point reach counter is any of "1", "3", "5", and "7" (odd numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 458(b) is referenced, if the value of the point reach counter is any of "2", "4", "6", and "8" (even numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 458(c) is referenced, if the value of the point reach counter is "9" or greater or if the point mode (see step S4166) is "point mode 3", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 458(d) is referenced.

In each point reaching lottery table, for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"), when the point is reached, Lottery values corresponding to the lottery results (“High Accuracy 2,” “Chance Stage A,” “Chance Stage B,” “Promotion Chance,” and “Pseudo BIG”) are defined. The probability that each result of the point reaching lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can.

For example, if the value of the point arrival counter is any of "1", "3", "5", and "7" (an odd number) and the setting value is setting 6, the result of the lottery when the point is reached is determined to be "High Probability 2" with a probability of 170/256, "Chance Stage A" with a probability of 76/256, "Chance Stage B" with a probability of 2/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 8/256. Also, if the value of the point arrival counter is "9" or more, or the point mode is "Point Mode 3", "Pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256 regardless of the setting value.

When "High Probability 2" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 sets the high probability 2 winning flag when the point is reached to ON. The high probability 2 winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that "High Probability 2" has been determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached. Details will be described later, but when the high probability 2 winning flag when the point is reached is set to ON, there is a possibility that the probability mode will shift from not high probability or high probability 1 to high probability 2 or high probability 3 (see step S4085 in FIG. 445).

Further, when "Chance Stage A" is determined as a result of the point reaching lottery (Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the Chance Stage A winning number counter. As described above, the value of the chance stage A winning number counter of 1 or more indicates that chance stage A has been won. The details will be described later, but if you win chance stage A, you will move to chance stage A via the precursor state (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). Further, when "chance stage A" is determined as a result of the point reaching lottery (chance stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the point reaching chance stage A winning number counter. The fact that the value of the number-of-times-at-points-attainment chance stage A winning counter is 1 or more indicates that the chance stage A has been won by the point-attainment lottery.

In addition, when "Chance Stage B" is determined as a result of the lottery when the point is reached (a chance stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. As described above, a chance stage B winning count counter of 1 or more indicates that chance stage B has been won. Details will be described later, but when chance stage B is won, the game moves to chance stage B via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). In addition, when "Chance Stage B" is determined as a result of the lottery when the point is reached (a chance stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached. A chance stage B winning count counter of 1 or more indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

In addition, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery when the points are reached (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to on. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but if the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). In addition, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery when the points are reached (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag when the points are reached to on. The promotion chance winning flag when the points are reached is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won by the lottery when the points are reached.

In addition, if the result of the lottery when the point is reached is determined to be "pseudo BIG" (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if the pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to the pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 445). In addition, if the lottery when the point is reached is determined to be "pseudo BIG" (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag when the point is reached to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

From the above, if the value of the point arrival count counter is ``9'' or more, or if point mode 3 is set as the point mode, if the point arrival lottery is performed, the transition to pseudo BIG occurs. It is confirmed that Images (for example, meters, etc.) corresponding to the above-mentioned normal point values are colored in accordance with the current point mode. As a result, for example, when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, the color of the meter becomes a predetermined color (for example, gold). Note that when executing the process of step S4167, the main CPU 101 subtracts 100 from the value of the normal points.

If it is determined in step S4164 that the normal point value in the previous unit game has not reached 100, or after executing the processing of step S4167, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Note that even if it is determined in step S4164 that the value of normal points has reached 100 in the previous unit game, if you have won Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG ( If the value of the chance stage A winning number counter or the chance stage B winning number counter is 1 or more, or if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to on), the probability mode is high. 3 is set, or the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without executing the processing in steps S4165 to S4167. However, even in these cases, if point mode 3 is set as the point mode, the processes of steps S4165 to S4167 may be executed.

Here, the premonition state includes a false premonition state, and even in the false premonition state, the processing of steps S4165 to S4167 (lottery when the point is reached) is not executed. As described above, when a lottery when the point is reached is executed, 100 is subtracted from the normal point value, but by looking at the meter displayed on the sub-effect display unit 22, the player can recognize that a lottery when the point is reached has been executed. If a lottery when the point is reached is not executed during the premonition state, but a lottery when the point is reached is executed during the false premonition state, the player may be able to tell from the meter that the premonition effect currently being executed is a false premonition effect. In this embodiment, the false premonition state is managed by the main control circuit 100 in the same way as the real premonition state (see step S4146 in FIG. 454), so it is possible to configure the system so that a lottery is not held when a point is reached during the false premonition state. This makes it difficult to distinguish between real premonition effects and false premonition effects, and ensures the player's expectations for the premonition effects.

Note that when the value of the normal points reaches the specified value (100 points) (at the time of reaching 100 points), an effect of reaching 100 points may be performed. Here, it may be possible to simply show that you can receive a lottery based on points (a lottery when points are reached), but you can also use the point mode and setting values during your stay, the value of the point attainment counter, etc. It is also possible to perform a presentation that suggests the level of expectation and the type of benefits that are likely to be won. For example, the default effect may be a pattern in which the meter flashes when 100 points are reached, and if the effect of lightning striking the meter occurs, the expectation level of winning a privilege (for example, promotion chance or pseudo-BIG) may be high. Alternatively, an image unrelated to the image of a meter or the like corresponding to the normal point value may be displayed. For example, the type of mini-character that appears on the screen may indicate the level of expectation.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the point-attainment lottery process is executed in the next unit game after reaching 100 points, the above-mentioned effects such as the expectation level of winning the bonus and the type of bonus that is likely to be won, etc. It is possible to configure the system so that the replay or after-win effect of the common bell occurs during the next unit game of the unit game in which it occurred. For example, after a point-attainment lottery is conducted and before the results of the said lottery are announced (for example, after operating the start lever in a unit game in which a point-attainment lottery was conducted and before all reels are stopped), the points concerned are The performance may be performed depending on the result of the lottery at the time of arrival. In this case, the result of the point reaching lottery may be notified when all the reels in the unit game in which the lottery was performed are stopped.

In addition, the following configurations can be adopted for point-related processing during the premonition state. For example, during the premonition state, whether it is a false premonition or a real premonition, the meter may be hidden so that the player can concentrate on the premonition presentation (specification example 1). Also, even if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition and a lottery is held when the point is reached, the result may not be announced immediately, but after the premonition ends, a presentation may be presented indicating that the point has been reached or that a lottery has been held when the point is reached, or the lottery result may be announced (specification example 2). Specification example 1 and specification example 2 may also be combined.

Here, if a point-attainment lottery is performed in a non-warning state, the result of the point-attainment lottery may be configured to be notified when all reels in the unit game in which the point-attainment lottery was performed. It is possible. Specification example 2 is based on the principle that when a point reaching lottery is performed in a precursor state, the result is notified after the precursor ends, but if the lottery result is a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG win, the precursor is announced. It is desirable that the results be announced during the test. In this case, it is preferable to perform the performance without making the player feel uncomfortable by providing a winning notification performance that corresponds to the performance state during the fake sign. As mentioned above, if a fake sign occurs, it is possible to estimate the set value, but when a false sign is generated, it is possible to notify that you have won a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG by lottery when points are reached. If it is assumed that it is unknown whether or not the sign was a hoax, the difficulty of setting estimation can be increased.

Also, if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition, the execution of the lottery when the point is reached may be postponed until the end of the false premonition, or until 1 to 3 games after the end of the false premonition (specification example 3). In this case, the effects indicating the point has been reached, the effects indicating that the lottery when the point has been reached, and the notification of the lottery results are also postponed. By doing this, in a situation where a transition to a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is made by winning the lottery, the specification becomes easy for the player to understand whether the transition to the premonition was triggered by the winning lottery, or whether the transition to the promotion chance or pseudo BIG was made by the lottery when the point has been reached during the premonition.

<Number of portent games lottery processing when flag is won during normal stage>
FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing a precursor game number lottery process when a flag is won during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 460 is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining the number of precursor games when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing a precursor game number lottery process performed in the main control circuit when a chance stage is won during a normal stage. FIG. 462A(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portentous games when winning a pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when points are reached). FIG. 462A(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games when winning a pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when reaching the ceiling). FIG. 462A(c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portentous games when winning a pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (basic). FIG. 462B(d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games at chance stage winning during the normal stage (when points are reached). FIG. 462B(e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of winning the chance stage during the normal stage (basic). FIG. 462B(f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of ceiling fake winning in the normal stage.

The premonition play count lottery process when a flag is won during the normal stage shown in FIG. 459 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4084 of FIG. 445 (processing exclusively for the normal stage).

In the premonition play count lottery process when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play count counter is 0 or not (step S4181). The value of the premonition play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during the normal stage, a premonition effect is performed that suggests a transition to one of chance stage A, chance stage B, promotion chance, and pseudo BIG. The fact that the premonition play count counter value is not 0 (1 or more) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

When determining that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on (step S4182). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445, step S4144 in FIG. 454, and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion chance winning flag is set on (step S4183). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445, step S4144 in FIG. 454, and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If it is determined in step S4182 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on, or if it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 controls the pseudo BIG winning flag during the normal stage. When a promotion chance is won, a precursor game number lottery process is executed (step S4184). Here, with reference to FIG. 460, the process of determining the number of precursory games at the time of winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage will be described.

In the normal stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance winning precursor game number lottery process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag when points are reached or the promotion chance winning flag when points are reached is set to on. (Step S4201). As mentioned above, the pseudo-BIG winning flag when points are reached is a flag that indicates that the player has won a pseudo-BIG through a lottery when points are reached, and the promotion chance winning flag when points are reached is a flag that indicates that the player has won a promotion chance through a lottery when points are reached. This is a flag indicating that (see step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the pseudo BIG winning flag when points are reached or the promotion chance winning flag when points are reached is set to on, the main CPU 101 performs a pseudo BIG/promotion chance winning precursor game number lottery during the normal stage (when points are reached). (Step S4202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on random numbers by referring to the number of preliminary games lottery table (see FIG. 462A(a)) during the normal stage (when a point is reached) when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won. , During the normal stage (when the point is reached) when pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won, the results of the lottery for the number of precursor games (candidates for the number of precursor games) are "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12" ”, “13-16”, “17-20”, “21-24”, “25-28”, and “29-32”.

In the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in FIG. 462A(a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the point is reached) ("0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13-16", "17-20", "21-24", "25-28", and "29-32") are specified. The probability of each result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the point is reached) can be expressed as "lottery value specified for the result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the point is reached), the result of the premonition play number lottery (premonition play number candidate) is determined to be "0" with a probability of 64/256, "1-4" with a probability of 32/256, "5-8" with a probability of 128/256, "9-12" with a probability of 16/256, and "13-16" with a probability of 16/256. The premonition play number candidate determined may include multiple values. In this case, the main CPU 101 further determines one of the multiple values by performing a lottery based on a random number value. The main CPU 101 determines the one value determined in this way as the premonition play number. Note that when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, "0" may be determined as the premonition play number.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets a number obtained by adding 1 to the number of precursor games determined in step S4202 in the precursor game number counter (step S4203), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S4201 that neither the pseudo BIG lottery flag when the point is reached nor the promotion chance lottery flag when the point is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG lottery flag when the ceiling is reached or the promotion chance lottery flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON (step S4204). As described above, the pseudo BIG lottery flag when the ceiling is reached is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won by the lottery type lottery when the ceiling is reached, and the promotion chance lottery flag when the ceiling is reached is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won by the lottery type lottery when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in FIG. 454).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag upon reaching the ceiling or the promotion chance winning flag upon reaching the ceiling is set to on, the main CPU 101 determines the number of foreshadowing games lottery during the normal stage (when reaching the ceiling) when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won. (Step S4205). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on random numbers by referring to the number of preliminary games lottery table (see FIG. 462A(b)) during the normal stage (when reaching the ceiling) during the pseudo BIG/promotion chance win. , During the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) when pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won, the results of the lottery for the number of precursor games (candidates for the number of precursor games) are "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12" ”, “13-16”, “17-20”, “21-24”, “25-28”, and “29-32”.

The basic structure of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) shown in FIG. 462A(b) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in FIG. 462A(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the premonition play count determined in step S4205 and sets the premonition play count counter (step S4206), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4204 that neither the pseudo BIG winning flag upon reaching the ceiling nor the promotion chance winning flag upon reaching the ceiling is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG/promotion chance winning precursor during the normal stage (basic). The game number lottery is executed (step S4207). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on random numbers by referring to the number of precursor games lottery table (see FIG. 462A(c)) during the normal stage (basic) pseudo BIG/promotion chance win. During the stage (basic) pseudo BIG/promotion chance win, the result of the lottery for the number of precursor games (candidates for the number of precursor games) is "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13" to 16,” “17 to 20,” “21 to 24,” “25 to 28,” and “29 to 32.”

The basic structure of the normal stage (basic) pseudo-BIG/promotion chance winning precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 462A(c) is as follows. This is the same as the lottery table for the number of games that portends winning promotion chances. Thereby, the main CPU 101 determines the numerical value of 1 as the number of portent games.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the premonition play count determined in step S4207 and sets the premonition play count counter (step S4208), and ends this subroutine.

The foreshadowing game number lottery process for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage, which is performed in step S4184 in FIG. 459, has been described above with reference to FIG. 460. The explanation returns to FIG. 459. After executing the process in step S4184, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4185). As described above, a value of the chance stage B winning count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), it determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4186). As described above, a chance stage A winning count counter value of 1 or greater indicates that a chance stage A has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If it is determined in step S4185 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or more, or if it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (step S4187). Here, the lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage will be explained using FIG. 461.

In the process of lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached or the value of the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached is 1 or more (step S4221). As described above, a value of 1 or more on the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage A has been won by the lottery when the point is reached, and a value of 1 or more on the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 456).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A winning number counter when the point is reached or the chance stage B winning number counter when the point is reached is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) (step S4222). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) (see FIG. 462B(d)), and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) (premonition play number candidate) to be one of "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13-16", "17-20", "21-24", "25-28", and "29-32".

The basic structure of the chance stage winning precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 462B(d) is the pseudo BIG/promotion table during the normal stage (when points are reached) shown in FIG. 462A(a). It is similar to the chance winning portent game number lottery table. Thereby, the main CPU 101 determines the numerical value of 1 as the number of portent games.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the premonition play count determined in step S4222 and sets the premonition play count counter (step S4223), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S4221 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached and the value of the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached are both less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (step S4224). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (see FIG. 462B(e)), and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) to be one of "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13-16", "17-20", "21-24", "25-28", and "29-32".

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) shown in FIG. 462B(e) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in FIG. 462A(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets a number obtained by adding 1 to the number of precursor games determined in step S4224 in the precursor game number counter (step S4225), and ends this subroutine.

The premonition play number lottery process performed in step S4187 of FIG. 459 when a chance stage lottery is won during the normal stage has been explained using FIG. 461. Returning to the explanation, let us return to FIG. 459. After executing the process of step S4187, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that, if a chance stage A lottery and a chance stage B lottery are stocked, the process of step S4187 will be executed in the first unit game (the first game of the normal stage) that transitions from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage.

If it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON (step S4188). As described above, the ceiling fake winning flag is a flag that indicates that a ceiling fake has been won (see step S4146 in FIG. 454).

When it is determined that the ceiling fake winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays at the time of a ceiling fake winning during the normal stage (step S4189). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays at the time of a ceiling fake winning during the normal stage (see FIG. 462B(f)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13-16", "17-20", "21-24", "25-28", and "29-32" as the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays at the time of a ceiling fake winning during the normal stage (premonition play number candidate).

The basic structure of the premonition play number lottery table when the ceiling fake wins during the normal stage shown in FIG. 462B(f) is the same as the premonition play number lottery table when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance wins during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in FIG. 462A(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the premonition play count determined in step S4189 and sets the premonition play count counter (step S4190), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, when the initial value is set in the precursor game number counter in step S4203, step S4206, or step S4208 in FIG. 460, step S4223 or step S4225 in FIG. 461, or step S4190 in FIG. 459, The main CPU 101 generates omen effect start command data, and stores the generated omen effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the omen effect, and perform processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting light, etc. for the omen effect. It will be done. As a result, the precursor performance is performed (controlled to the precursor state) over the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the precursor game number counter.

<Normal stage precursor game number counter management processing>
FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing normal stage precursor game number counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The precursor game number counter management process for the normal stage shown in FIG. 463 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in the process of step S15 in FIG. This is the process performed in the game end state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the normal stage precursor game counter management process, the main CPU 101 first controls the precursor game counter (steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 460, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 461, and (see step S4190) is larger than 0 (step S4241). When determining that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter (step S4242). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the precursor game number counter is 0 (step S4243). When determining that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the precursor performance (step S4244). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates omen effect end command data, and stores the generated omen effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the omen effect, and terminate the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. performed for the omen effect. Processing is performed to

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on (step S4245). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445, step S4144 in FIG. 454, and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag on (step S4246). Also, although not shown, if the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF and the pseudo BIG winning flag when points are reached or the pseudo BIG winning flag when reaching the ceiling is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets these Also sets the flag to off. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 uses the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag is set to ON. Update. This causes the transition to pseudo BIG.

If it is determined in step S4245 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4247). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445, step S4144 in FIG. 454, and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4248). Although not shown, the main CPU 101 also sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the promotion chance winning flag when the point is reached or the promotion chance winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 also sets these flags to OFF. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag is set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

If it is determined in step S4247 that the promotion chance winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4249). As described above, a value of the chance stage B winning count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance stage B shift flag to on (step S4250). Although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage B winning counter. In addition, if the precursor state to be ended this time is started by the lottery of the number of precursor games when winning the chance stage (see step S4222 in FIG. 461) during the normal stage (when the point is reached), the main CPU 101 When reaching the chance stage B, subtract 1 from the value of the winning count counter. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The chance stage B transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start chance stage B. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the chance stage B transition flag is set to ON. This causes a transition to chance stage B.

If it is determined in step S4249 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4251). As described above, a chance stage A winning count counter value of 1 or greater indicates that a chance stage A has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance stage A transition flag to ON (step S4252). Also, although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. Also, if the premonition state that is ending this time was started by a premonition play count lottery being held during the normal stage (when the point is reached) for the chance stage winning (see step S4222 in FIG. 461), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The chance stage A transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start chance stage A. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance stage A transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. This moves to chance stage A.

As described above, if you win any of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, you will move through the premonition state and then to Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG. On the other hand, even if you win the Ceiling Fake, the ball output state will not change. Also, if you win multiple ball output states among Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, the highest priority is to move to Pseudo BIG, followed by Promotion Chance, Chance Stage B, and Chance Stage A.

In addition, if you move to a precursor state by winning a ceiling fake, and if you win a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG during the precursor state, you will be moved to a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG when the precursor state ends. You can also do this. In addition, if you move to a precursor state by winning chance stage A or chance stage B, and if you win a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG during the precursor state, when the precursor state ends, you will receive a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG. You may make it move to , or you may make it move to chance stage A or chance stage B.

<Probability mode related processing>
FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing probability mode related processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). FIG. 465(c) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (3). FIG. 465(d) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 fall lottery table.

The probability mode related processing shown in FIG. 464 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4085 of FIG. 445 (processing dedicated to the normal stage).

In the probability mode related processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not "F_Cherry" (see Figures 427 and 428) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4261).

If it is determined that "F_cherry" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transition lottery process (1) (step S4262). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high-certainty 2-shift lottery table (1) (see FIG. 465(a)) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining the result of the high-certainty 2-shift lottery (1). , one of "0", "10", "20", "30", "40", and "50" is determined.

In the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 465(a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) ("0", "10", "20", "30", "40", and "50") are specified for each setting value ("setting 1", "setting 2", "setting 3", "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6"). The probability of each result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". For example, when the setting value 1 is setting 1, the results of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) are "0" with a probability of 170/256, "10" with a probability of 58/256, and "20" with a probability of 28/256.

As described above, in the normal ball dispensing state, the probability mode is controlled to one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3. When the current probability mode is non-high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) (if the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) to the high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter (step S4263). The value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in high probability 2, and is stored in the main RAM 103. When the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in high probability 2. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process).

In addition, when the current probability mode is high probability 2, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) (if the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter if the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is greater than the current value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter, whereas it discards the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) if the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is equal to or less than the current value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter.

In addition, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) (High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) has been won). In this case, the main CPU 101 sets the high probability 3 as the probability mode, sets the high probability 3 game number counter to "20", clears the value of the high probability 1 game number counter, and selects the high probability 2 transition lottery ( Discard the value determined as a result of step 1). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 transition lottery (1) even if the determination result in step S4261 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4261 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning combination, or after executing the process in step S4263, the main CPU 101 determines that the high probability 2 winning flag is set to on when the point is reached. It is determined whether or not there is one (step S4264). As described above, the high probability 2 winning flag upon reaching the point is a flag indicating that "high probability 2" has been determined as a result of the lottery upon reaching the point (see step S4167 in FIG. 456).

When it is determined that the high probability 2 transition lottery flag is set to ON when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transition lottery process (2) (step S4265). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) (see FIG. 465(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) as one of "0", "10", "20", "30", "40", and "50". The basic configuration of the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) shown in FIG. 465(b) is the same as the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 465(a).

Similar to the process in step S4263, when the current probability mode is non-high probability, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) (high probability 2 transition lottery ( 2)), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2, and sets the value determined as a result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) to the high probability 2 guaranteed game number counter ( Step S4266).

In addition, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (the winner has won the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2)). In this case, if the value determined as a result of the high probability 2 transfer lottery (2) is larger than the current value of the high probability 2 transfer lottery (2), the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transfer lottery (2). The value determined as a result of 2) is set in the high certainty 2 guaranteed game number counter, while the value determined as the result of the high certainty 2 transfer lottery (2) is less than or equal to the current value of the high certainty 2 guaranteed game number counter. If so, the value determined as a result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) is discarded.

In addition, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) has been won). In this case, the main CPU 101 sets the high probability 3 as the probability mode, sets the high probability 3 game number counter to "20", clears the value of the high probability 1 game number counter, and selects the high probability 2 transition lottery ( Discard the value determined as a result of 2). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 transition lottery (2) even if the determination result in step S4264 is "YES".

When it is determined in step S4264 that the high probability 2 winning lottery flag at the time of reaching the point is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S4266, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to transition from the chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage (step S4267). As described above, the transition to the normal stage occurs in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag is set to ON. In the game start state control process in the unit game that transitions to the normal stage, the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the normal stage, and then the game start process for the normal stage shown in FIG. 441 is performed. In the process of step S4267, the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from the chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage when the current unit game has transitioned to the normal stage (when the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage) and the transition source ball output state is the chance stage A or chance stage B.

When it is determined that it is time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the normal stage, the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transition lottery process (3) (step S4268). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high probability 2 transition lottery table (3) (see FIG. 465(c)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (3) as one of "0", "10", "20", "30", "40", and "50". The basic structure of the high probability 2 transition lottery table (3) shown in FIG. 465(c) is the same as the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 465(a).

Similar to the processing of step S4263, when the current probability mode is not high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (3) (if the high probability 2 transition lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (3) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter (step S4269).

In addition, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) has been won). In this case, if the value determined as a result of the high probability 2 transfer lottery (3) is larger than the current value of the high probability 2 transfer lottery (3), the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transfer lottery (3). The value determined as a result of 3) is set in the high certainty 2 guaranteed game number counter, while the value determined as the result of the high certainty 2 transition lottery (3) is less than or equal to the current value of the high certainty 2 guaranteed game number counter. If so, the value determined as a result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (3) is discarded.

In addition, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, a value larger than "0" is determined as the result of High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) has been won). In this case, the main CPU 101 sets the high probability 3 as the probability mode, sets the high probability 3 game number counter to "20", clears the value of the high probability 1 game number counter, and selects the high probability 2 transition lottery ( Discard the value determined as a result of 3). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 transition lottery (3) even if the determination result in step S4267 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4267 that it is not time to transition from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage, or after executing the processing of step S4269, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current probability mode is either high probability 2 or high probability 3 (step S4270). If it is determined that the current probability mode is either high probability 2 or high probability 3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter is "0" (step S4271).

When determining that the value of the high-probability 2-guaranteed game number counter is "0", the main CPU 101 executes the high-probability 2-fall lottery process (step S4272). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high-probability 2-fall lottery table (see FIG. 465(d)) and performs a lottery based on the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 4 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. Accordingly, either "non-winning" or "winning" is determined as the result of the high-probability 2-fall lottery.

In the high-accuracy 2-fall lottery table shown in FIG. 465(d), the high-accuracy 2-fall lottery result (``non-winning'' ” and “winning”) are defined. The probability that each result of the High Precision 2 Fall Lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the relevant result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it. As a result, if the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 4 is "Other", there is a probability of 192/256 that the player will win the high-accuracy 2-fall lottery, and the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 4 will be "non-fall". In the case of ``Hyaku'', it will always be a non-win in the High Accuracy 2 Fall Lottery. If the lottery with high probability 2 and falling is won, the main CPU 101 shifts the probability mode from high probability 2 or high probability 3 to non-high probability.

If it is determined in step S4270 that the current probability mode is neither High Probability 2 nor High Probability 3, if it is determined in step S4271 that the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter is not "0", or after executing the processing of step S4272, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Promotion chance pre-processing>
Fig. 466 is a flow chart showing a pre-promotion chance process carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 467 is a diagram showing a promotion chance transition lottery table.

The promotion chance pre-processing shown in FIG. 466 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4105 of FIG. 450 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In the promotion chance pre-processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play count counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 460, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 461, and step S4190 in FIG. 459) is 1 (step S4281). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play count counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 1, it determines whether or not the promotion chance winning flag is set ON (step S4282). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445, step S4144 in FIG. 454, and step S4167 in FIG. 456).

Note that if the promotion chance winning flag is set to on and a pseudo BIG is won, the promotion chance winning flag is set to off, so the promotion chance winning flag being set to on means that a pseudo BIG has not been won. Therefore, the result of the determination in step S4282 is "YES" when a transition to a promotion chance is scheduled for the next unit game.

If it is determined that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a point mode lottery process (step S4283). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a point mode lottery table (see FIG. 444) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the point mode lottery (point mode) as one of "point mode 1", "point mode 2", or "point mode 3".

This process is similar to the process of step S4063 in FIG. 442, so the explanation here will be omitted. Note that when the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S4283, if the value of the normal points (see FIG. 456) is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the normal points by 100 and sets the quotient of the point attainment counter. Add to value. For example, when the normal point value is 250, 250÷100=2 with a remainder of 50, 2 is added to the value of the point attainment counter, and the remaining 50 points are discarded.

After executing the processing of step S4283, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process at the time of transition to the promotion chance (step S4284). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a lottery table at the time of transition to the promotion chance (see FIG. 467) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery at the time of transition to the promotion chance as either "No Winning Lottery", "Pseudo BIG", or "Pseudo BIG (ED)".

In the promotion chance transition lottery table shown in FIG. Lottery values corresponding to the results (“non-winning,” “pseudo BIG,” and “pseudo BIG (ED)”) are defined. The probability that each result of the lottery at the time of transition to promotion chance is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

As a result, if point mode 1 is set as the point mode, "non-winning" is determined as the result of the lottery at the time of transition to promotion chance, with a probability of 256/256, and point mode 2 is set as the point mode. If so, "non-winning" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of promotion chance transition with a probability of 256/256. In addition, if point mode 3 is set as the point mode, or if the normal mode is mode 7 or mode 8, as a result of the lottery at the time of promotion chance transition, there is a probability of 256/256 that "pseudo BIG" is determined.

When "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the promotion chance transition lottery (when a pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning lottery flag to OFF. Then, the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition lottery was held. This causes a transition to Pseudo BIG.

After executing the processing of step S4284, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In the above, various lottery processes performed in the normal stage (normal medium-long freeze lottery process, normal specified game number high certainty 1 transition lottery process, ceiling fake preparation lottery process, ceiling preparation flag Set lottery process, lottery process by winning type upon reaching the ceiling, flag set lottery process during ceiling fake preparation, lottery process when transitioning to promotion chance, freeze lottery process during normal stage, transition flag/winning flag lottery process during normal stage, point acquisition lottery process , point mode lottery process, point reaching lottery process, normal stage flag winning portent game number lottery process, high-accuracy 2 transition lottery process (1) to (3), and high-accuracy 2 falling lottery process) were explained. .

The order in which these processes are performed is not particularly limited, and for example, the normal medium long freeze lottery process, the normal specified number of games high certainty 1 transition lottery process, the normal stage freeze lottery process, the ceiling fake preparation lottery process, and the ceiling preparation process. Flag set lottery process, ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery process, lottery process by winning type upon reaching the ceiling, normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery process, point acquisition lottery process, point mode lottery process, lottery process when points are reached, normal It is configured to be executed in the following order: the number of precursor games lottery process when the flag is won during the stage, the lottery process (1) to (3) for transitioning to high accuracy 2, the lottery process for falling to high accuracy 2, and the lottery process when transitioning to promotion chance. Good too.

In this case, if you win the normal medium long freeze lottery (if you win both the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2)), do not execute the following process. Good too. Furthermore, if the normal stage freeze lottery is won (if a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery), the subsequent processing may not be executed.

<Processing at the start of the game for chance stage>
FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of the chance stage game performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 469 is a diagram showing a chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery table at the start of the chance stage. FIG. 470 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage. FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the number of games during the chance stage.

The chance stage game start process shown in FIG. 468 is performed in step S6 of FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100 when the current ball payout state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see FIG. 430). This process is performed in the process (game start state control process) (for example, when the determination result in step S85 in FIG. 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the chance stage game start process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start time of chance stage A or chance stage B (step S4301). As described above, to move to chance stage A, the game start state control process (step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance stage A transition flag (see step S4252 in FIG. 463) is set to ON is performed. (see). In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that moves to chance stage A, after moving to chance stage A by updating the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20), the chance stage shown in FIG. Stage game start processing is performed. Similarly, to move to chance stage B, the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance stage B transition flag (see step S4250 in FIG. 463) is set to ON is performed. The transition will take place. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that moves to chance stage B, after moving to chance stage B by updating the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20), the chance stage shown in FIG. Stage game start processing is performed. In the process of step S4301, the main CPU 101 determines the chance when the current unit game shifts to chance stage A or chance stage B (when the current unit game is the first game of chance stage A or chance stage B). It is determined that it is the start of stage A or chance stage B.

When determining that it is the start of chance stage A or chance stage B, the main CPU 101 clears high certainty 2 (step S4302). In this process, when high probability 2 is set as the probability mode, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed game number counter and shifts the probability mode from high probability 2 to non-high probability.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery process at the start of the chance stage (step S4303). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery table at the start of the chance stage (see FIG. 469) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery at the start of the chance stage (chance stage guaranteed number of plays) to be one of "20", "40", "60", "80", or "100".

In the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery table at the start of the chance stage shown in FIG. 40, 60, 80, and 100) are defined. The probability that each result of the Chance Stage Guaranteed Number of Games Lottery at the start of the Chance Stage is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (Random number denominator: 256 )”.

As a result, in chance stage A, the result of the chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery at the start of the chance stage (chance stage guaranteed number of plays) is determined to be "40" with a probability of 250/256, "60" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. Also, in chance stage B, the result of the chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery at the start of the chance stage (chance stage guaranteed number of plays) is determined to be "20" with a probability of 250/256, "40" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. In chance stage B, a smaller value is more likely to be determined as the chance stage guaranteed number of plays compared to chance stage A.

After executing the process of step S4303, the main CPU 101 sets the chance stage guaranteed game number determined in step S4303 to the chance stage guaranteed game number counter (step S4304). The value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in chance stage A or chance stage B, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As will be described later, the value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in chance stage A or chance stage B.

If it is determined in step S4301 that it is not the start time of chance stage A or chance stage B, or after executing the process of step S4304, the main CPU 101 executes a process common to the normal ball output state (step S4305). This process is similar to the process of step S4043 in FIG. 441, so the explanation here will be omitted. In addition, in Chance Stage A to Chance Stage B, there is a case where "Ceiling Fake Preparation" is determined as a result of the Ceiling Fake Preparation Lottery (see step S4127 in FIG. 451) (the lottery is won during Ceiling Fake Preparation). However, it will not be set while the ceiling fake is being prepared, and the lottery result will be discarded.

After executing the process of step S4305, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery process during the chance stage (step S4306). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage (see FIG. 470) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage as either "No Winning", "Promotion Chance", or "Pseudo BIG".

The pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage shown in FIG. provided for each. When the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is “Other”, the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during chance stage shown in FIG. 470(a) is referred to, and the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is If it is a "reach number", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. The pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage shown in FIG. 470(c) is referred to, and if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "1-card combination", the table shown in FIG. 470(d) is referred to. The pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in the chance stage is referred to.

In the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table for each chance stage, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage ('No win', 'Promotion chance', and 'Pseudo BIG') are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B". The probability of each result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, in chance stage A, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball flag in ball flag group 6 is "other", there is a probability of 256/256 that "non-winning" will occur. ” is determined, and if the ball flag in ball flag group 6 is “Reach”, a “promotion chance” is determined with a probability of 256/256, and the ball flag in ball flag group 6 is “Reach”. If it is a reach number BB, "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256, and if the flag in ball flag group 6 is "1 card", the probability is 256/256. ``Non-winning'' is determined.

In addition, in Chance Stage B, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "other", a "non-winning lottery" is determined with a probability of 256/256, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "reach eye", a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 256/256, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "reach eye BB", a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1 piece role", a "non-winning lottery" is determined with a probability of 192/256, a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 58/256, and a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 6/256.

In this way, when the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "other", "reach target", or "reach target BB", each result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage is determined. The probability is the same for chance stage A and chance stage B. On the other hand, when the ball flag in the ball flag group 6 is "1 card role", in chance stage A, "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" is given as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage. On the other hand, in chance stage B, a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" can be determined as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage. As a result, chance stage B has a more advantageous ball output state than chance stage A.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2 during the normal stage, as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. ” to “pseudo BIG” are determined to be 0 (see FIGS. 447 and 448). On the other hand, in chance stage A to chance stage B, the probability that "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage is relatively high. As a result, the chance stages A to B have more advantageous balls than the normal stage.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but when the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 431 and 432).

In addition, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (if a pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if a pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see transition condition (J) in Figures 431 and 432). Note that, if a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (if a pseudo BIG is won), while the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance winning flag (sets it to OFF).

In addition, in the chance stage A to the chance stage B, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye", that is, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 434), the promotion chance is always won. Also, in the chance stage A to the chance stage B, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB", that is, if any of "F_BB Confirmed Role A" and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" are determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 434), the pseudo BIG is always won.

Here, as mentioned above, if any of "F_Reach combination A", "F_Reach combination B", and "F_Reach combination C" is determined as an internal winning combination, the first When a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as a stop operation, "one piece of reach" is stopped and displayed along the active line (see FIG. 429). “One reach win” will only win if any one of “F_Reach win A”, “F_Reach win B”, or “F_Reach win C” is determined as an internal winning combination. This is a possible combination. Therefore, the fact that "one piece of reach target" is stopped and displayed along the effective line means that it is possible to display any one of "F_reach target A", "F_reach target B", and "F_reach target C". This means that the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination, and the player can understand that he has won the promotion chance by visually recognizing the ``one piece of reach''.

As described above, when either "F_BB fixed role A" or "F_BB fixed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, when the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "BB fixed role one piece" is stopped and displayed along the winning line (see FIG. 429). "BB fixed role one piece" is a winning combination only when either "F_BB fixed role A" or "F_BB fixed role B" is determined as the internal winning role. Therefore, when "BB fixed role one piece" is stopped and displayed along the winning line, it means that either "F_BB fixed role A" or "F_BB fixed role B" has been determined as the internal winning role, and the player can understand that he has won the pseudo-BIG by visually recognizing "BB fixed role one piece".

In this way, the "one ball to reach" and "one ball to reach BB" serve to inform the player that they have won a promotion chance or pseudo BIG (the transition to the AT state has been confirmed). As described below, in this embodiment, a penalty occurs when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. Therefore, in ball-dispensing states other than the AT state (pseudo BIG and pseudo REG), the player basically plays by performing a stop operation on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, among "F_Reach role A", "F_Reach role B", "F_Reach role C", "F_BB confirmed role A", and "F_BB confirmed role B", If any of these is determined as an internal winning combination, that is, if the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "Other" (see Figure 434), the probability of winning the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is extremely high. (See Figures 447 to 449). Considering the above-mentioned roles of "one piece in reach" and "one piece in guaranteed BB reach", even though you have not won either a promotion chance or pseudo BIG, "one piece in reach" or "one piece in guaranteed BB reach" It is not appropriate to show "one piece" to the player.

In the normal stage, when any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB confirmed role A" and "F_BB confirmed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, if neither the promotion chance nor the pseudo BIG is won, a notification is made to perform a stop operation (irregular press) on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stopping operation. This notification (irregular press navigation) is made by displaying on the main display device 210 an image suggesting that a stop operation (irregular press) on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is performed as the first stopping operation. By performing a stop operation according to the irregular press navigation, "one normal number" is displayed stopped along the pay line, and "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach" does not appear. In this case, no notification is given on the instruction monitor, but even if any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB confirmed role A" and "F_BB confirmed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number of medals paid out does not differ depending on the manner of the stopping operation (see Figure 429), so there is no particular problem.

In this way, chance stage A and chance stage B are in a ball output state where a transition to the AT state is more likely to be notified through "one ball in reach" or "one ball in BB confirmed reach". In contrast, the normal stage is in a ball output state where the expectation of a transition to the AT state is suggested through the presentation controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 rather than "one ball in reach" or "one ball in BB confirmed reach". In the normal stage, multiple presentation modes are provided according to probability mode, point mode, etc., and in each presentation mode, the background image displayed on the main display device 210 is different. As a result, the expectation is suggested depending on which presentation mode you are staying in (background image).

In the normal stage, if any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB confirmed role A", and "F_BB confirmed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, there is a possibility of winning a promotion chance or pseudo BIG in the normal stage freeze lottery (see step S4081 and FIG. 446 in FIG. 445) or normal long freeze lottery (see step S4102 in FIG. 450). If a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal long freeze lottery, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach" is displayed stopped along the pay line. On the other hand, if the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is not won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal stage long freeze lottery, the irregular button press navigation is performed and the stopping operation is performed according to the irregular button press navigation, so that the "one ball for reach" or "one ball for BB confirmation reach" does not appear.

After executing the process of step S4306, the main CPU 101 executes a process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage (step S4307). The process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage will be described later with reference to FIG. 472.

After executing the process of step S4307, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (step S4308). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (see FIG. 471) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 434) in payout flag group 5 and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "20", "40", "60", "80", and "100" as the result of the lottery for adding the number of plays during the chance stage.

The chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 471 is provided for each of the ball output flags in the ball output flag group 5 ("other", "parallel watermelon", "diagonal watermelon", and "cherry"). When the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 5 is "other", the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 471(a) is referenced, when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 5 is "parallel watermelon", the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 471(b) is referenced, when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon", the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 471(c) is referenced, and when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 5 is "cherry", the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 471(d) is referenced.

In each chance stage play count addition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery ("0", "20", "40", "60", "80", and "100") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the ball flag in ball flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon" and the setting value is 6, the result of the lottery to increase the number of games during the chance stage will be "0" with a probability of 126/256. is determined, "20" is determined with a probability of 128/256, "40" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "60" is determined with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the value determined as a result of the lottery to increase the number of games during the chance stage to the value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter.

After executing the process in step S4308, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of portent games when flags are won during the chance stage>
FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the number of precursor games lottery process when the flag is won during the chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 473 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games when flags are won during the chance stage.

The chance stage flag winning precursor game number lottery process shown in FIG. 472 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S4307 of FIG. 468 (chance stage game start process).

In the premonition play number lottery process when the chance stage flag is drawn, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 or not (step S4321). The value of the premonition play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during chance stage A or chance stage B, a premonition effect is performed that suggests a transition to either a promotion chance or a pseudo BIG. The value of the premonition play number counter that is not 0 (1 or more) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

When determining that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on (step S4322). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 468 and step S4144 in FIG. 454).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion chance winning flag is set on (step S4323). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 468 and step S4144 in FIG. 454). If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S4322 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, or when it is determined in step S4323 that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the chance stage is won (step S4324). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the chance stage is won (see FIG. 473), and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 6 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" as the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the chance stage is won.

The lottery table for the number of portent games when flags are won during the chance stage shown in FIG. 473 includes the ball flags in ball flag group 6 (“Other”, “Reach eye”, “Reach eye BB”, and “1-card role”) are provided for each. When the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is "Other," the lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of flag winning during the chance stage shown in FIG. 473(a) is referred to, and the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 6 is If it is a "reach number", the lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of flag winning during the chance stage shown in FIG. In this case, the lottery table for the number of portent games at the time of flag winning during the chance stage shown in FIG. The lottery table for the number of portentous games when the flag is won during the chance stage shown in d) is referred to.

In the lottery table for the number of portentous games when winning the flag during each chance stage, the results of the drawing for the number of portentous games at the time of winning the flag during the chance stage ("0", "1") are shown for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B". , "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8"). The probability that each result of the harbinger game number lottery when winning the flag during the chance stage is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256 )”.

For example, in chance stage A, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "other," the result of the lottery for the premonition play number when the flag during the chance stage is drawn is determined to be "0" with a probability of 64/256, and "1" with a probability of 192/256. Also, in chance stage B, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1-piece role," the result of the lottery for the premonition play number when the flag during the chance stage is drawn is determined to be "1" with a probability of 8/256, "2" with a probability of 192/256, and "3" with a probability of 56/256.

After executing the process of step S4325, the main CPU 101 sets a number obtained by adding 1 to the value determined as a result of the lottery of the number of precursor games at the time of flag winning during the chance stage in the precursor game number counter (step S4325), and sets the number of precursor games to the number of precursor games. End the subroutine.

In this way, when the initial value is set in the portent game number counter, the main CPU 101 generates portent effect start command data, and stores the generated portent effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the omen effect, and perform processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting light, etc. for the omen effect. It will be done. As a result, the precursor performance is performed (controlled to the precursor state) over the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the precursor game number counter.

<Counter management processing for chance stage>
FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing chance stage counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The chance stage counter management process shown in FIG. 474 is performed in step S15 of FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100 when the current ball output state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see FIG. 430). This is a process performed in the process (game end state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the chance stage counter management process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play count counter (see step S4325 in FIG. 472) is greater than 0 (step S4341). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (step S4342). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0 (step S4343). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, it sets the normal stage transition flag to ON (step S4344) and ends this subroutine. As described above, the normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition conditions (F) and (H) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

If it is determined in step S4341 that the value of the premonition play count counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is greater than 0 (step S4345). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (step S4346).

If it is determined in step S4345 that the value of the chance stage guarantee game number counter is 0, or after executing the process of step S4346, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter (step S4347). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the precursor game number counter is 0 or not (step S4348). When determining that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the premonition effect (step S4349). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect end command data and stores the generated premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the premonition effect, and processes are performed to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc. that are being performed for the premonition effect.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on (step S4350). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 468 and step S4144 in FIG. 454).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4351). Although not shown, the main CPU 101 also sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF, and if the pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, it also sets that flag to OFF. After that, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag is set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

Here, in chance stage A to chance stage B, the transition to the precursor state occurs only when the pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won. Therefore, if the determination result in step S4350 is "NO", it means that the promotion chance winning flag is set on. Therefore, if it is determined in step S4350 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag on (step S4352). Although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the promotion chance winning flag upon reaching the ceiling is set to ON, it also sets the flag to OFF. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag is set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

As described above, if either the promotion chance or the pseudo BIG is won in the chance stage A or chance stage B, the game will move to the promotion chance or the pseudo BIG via the premonition state. Also, as described above, if the game moves to the premonition state by winning the chance stage A or chance stage B in the normal stage, and if the promotion chance or the pseudo BIG is won during the premonition state, the game can be configured to move to the chance stage A or the chance stage B when the premonition state ends. In this case, the premonition play count counter is set to an initial value in the premonition play count lottery process (see FIG. 472) when the chance stage flag is won during the chance stage at the start of the chance stage A or chance stage B (the first game of the chance stage A or chance stage B), so that the game will move to the premonition state, and the game will move to the promotion chance or the pseudo BIG when the premonition state ends.

<Promotion Chance Game Start Processing>
Fig. 475 is a flow chart showing the process at the start of a promotion chance game performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 476A and Fig. 476B are diagrams showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. Fig. 477 is a diagram showing a promotion chance lottery table. Fig. 478 is a diagram showing a next pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 479 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when a specified number of games is played. Fig. 480 is a diagram showing a current pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 481 is a diagram showing the contents of a pseudo game.

The game start process for promotion chance shown in FIG. 475 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start This is a process that is performed (for example, when the determination result in step S85 in FIG. 27 is "NO") in the current state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for promotion chance, first, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is the start of the promotion chance (step S4361). As described above, the promotion chance is entered in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag (see step S4248 in FIG. 463 and step S4352 in FIG. 474) is set to on. In the game start state control processing in the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance, the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the promotion chance, and then the game start processing for the promotion chance shown in FIG. 475 is performed. In the processing of step S4361, the main CPU 101 judges that it is the start of the promotion chance when the current unit game has transitioned to the promotion chance (when the current unit game is the first game of the promotion chance).

If it is determined that it is time to start the promotion chance, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value in the promotion chance game number counter (step S4362). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically sets the promotion chance game number counter to "3", but if point mode 2 is set as the point mode (see step S4283 in FIG. 466), the promotion chance game number counter is set to "3". Set "5" to the chance game counter. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counter, etc.) set in the normal ball output state. The value of the promotion chance game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that can be played in the promotion chance, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the promotion chance game number counter is subtracted by 1 each time a unit game is played. Although not shown, the subtraction is performed in step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a long freeze lottery process at the time of entry (step S4363). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a long freeze lottery table at the time of entry (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (1) is a "win" or a "win", and if the result of the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (1) is a "win", it determines whether the result of the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (2) is a "win" or a "win". As a result, the probability of winning the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (1) is 1/256, and the probability of winning the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (2) is 1/256.

If both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, a long freeze occurs. The long freeze period that occurs when you win the entry long freeze lottery (1) and the entry long freeze lottery (2) is the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) (Figure 450 This period is the same as the long freeze period that occurs when a winner is won in step S4102). If both the Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 determines whether the Long Freeze Lottery (1) or the Long Freeze Lottery (2) has been performed. The execution of the long freeze is controlled in the main side performance control process (see step S8 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game.

In addition, if both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game after the long freeze ends in the main side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) were performed. As a result, the pseudo game is played following the long freeze.

In addition, if the player wins both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2), the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated. This transitions to pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 also sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control is again given to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, and as a result, pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

In this embodiment, "continuing until the end of the advantageous section" means that the advantageous section ends due to the difference number limiter (payout limiter: for example, reaching 2400 sheets). As will be described later, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set on (transition to pseudo BIG (ED)), 2 is added to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. This ensures that the pseudo-BIG is controlled at least three times, and in this case, it is possible to configure the differential number limiter to be activated before the three pseudo-BIGs are completed.

However, the benefits of long freezing may be other than the transition to pseudo-BIG (ED) as described above. For example, when a long freeze occurs, at least pseudo-BIG or a benefit greater than pseudo-BIG may be determined. Benefits of pseudo-BIG or higher include, for example, a guaranteed transition to pseudo-BIG a predetermined number of times (pseudo-BIG continuation guarantee), predetermined advantageous games with greater value than pseudo-BIG (pseudo-bonus and AT), etc. It may also be something that is set up and migrated. In addition, for models that are not equipped with a limiter for the number of differential coins or the number of games played, a special pseudo-bonus for long freezes that continues until a predetermined period (for example, 1000 coins acquired or 500 games continued) has passed. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the long freeze lottery is not performed in the bonus state, but in models equipped with a real bonus (special accessory or accessory continuous operation device) that increases medals, there is a promotion chance starting game and a promotion chance starting game. If you draw a real bonus role (for example, 3BB wins internally), a long freeze will occur, and the bonus will be added to the specialized zone (for example, a state where it is easy to win a pseudo BIG, that is, a pseudo BIG stock). It is also possible to set the counter value to be in a state where it is easy to add.

When the Pseudo BIG end conditions are met and control is resumed to Pseudo BIG, a Pseudo BIG end screen may be displayed to indicate the end, and then a Pseudo BIG-compatible pseudo game (such as a "V" combination) may be generated the next time the start lever is operated, creating a consecutive-win style presentation, or the Pseudo BIG may continue without generating a pseudo game when it is continued, simply by showing a presentation indicating continuation (such as the display of an image or sound indicating continuation, such as "Not yet!").

After executing the process in step S4363, the main CPU 101 executes promotion chance mode lottery process (step S4364). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance mode lottery table (see FIGS. 476A and 476B) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that the result of the promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode) is " One of "Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", and "Mode 4" is determined.

The promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 476A and 476B includes the normal modes ("mode 1", "mode 2", "mode 3", ``Mode 4'', ``Mode 5'', ``Mode 6'', ``Mode 7'', and ``Mode 8''), and ``At the time of transition from successive winning challenge to promotion chance''.

When the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is a normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, or chance stage B), one of the promotion chance mode lottery tables shown in Figures 476A and 476B (a) to (h) is referenced. Specifically, when the normal mode is "mode 1", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 476A (a) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 2", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 476A (b) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 3", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 476A (c) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 4", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 476A (d) is referenced. If the normal mode is "mode 5", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 476A(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 476B(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 476B(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 476B(h) is referenced. Also, if the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is consecutive challenge, the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 476B(i) is referenced.

In each promotion chance mode lottery table, the promotion chance mode Lottery values corresponding to the lottery results (“mode 1,” “mode 2,” “mode 3,” and “mode 4”) are defined. The probability that each result of the promotion chance mode lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can.

For example, if the source ball state for transition to promotion chance is normal ball state, and the normal mode is "Mode 3", the result of promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode) , "Mode 3" is determined with a probability of 256/256. In addition, if the ball output state that is the source of transition to promotion chance is normal ball output state and the normal mode is "Mode 6", the result of promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode) regardless of the setting value , "Mode 3" is determined with a probability of 192/256, and "Mode 4" is determined with a probability of 64/256. In addition, if the ball state from which to transition to promotion chance is consecutive game challenge, regardless of the setting value, the result of promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode) is "Mode 2" with a probability of 256/256. ” is determined.

If it is determined in step S4361 that it is not the time to start the promotion chance, or after executing the process in step S4364, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the promotion chance game number counter (see step S4362) is 1 or more. A judgment is made (step S4365).

When determining that the value of the promotion chance game number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a promotion chance lottery process (step S4366). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance lottery table (see FIG. 477) and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag in ball release flag group 2 (see FIG. 434) and a random value, thereby determining the promotion chance. As a result of the medium lottery, one of "fake pseudo game", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined.

The promotion chance medium lottery table shown in FIG. 477 includes the ball flags (“Other”, “Weak Rare Role”, “Diagonal Watermelon”, “Reach Eye”, and “Reach Eye BB”) in Ball Flag Group 2. provided for each. When the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 2 is “Other”, the promotion chance medium lottery table shown in FIG. 477(a) is referred to, and the ball-out flag in ball-out flag group 2 is “weak rare” If so, the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 477(b) is referred to, and if the ball flag in the ball flag group 2 is "diagonal watermelon", the promotion chance table shown in FIG. 477(c) is referred to. The lottery table during chance is referred to, and when the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is "Reach", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 477(d) is referred to, When the ball output flag is "reach number BB", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 477(e) is referred to.

In each promotion chance lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the promotion chance lottery ("Fake Pseudo Game", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the promotion chance lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4", the lottery result during the promotion chance determines "Fake pseudo game" with a probability of 204/256, and determines "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 52/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Reach eye BB" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1", the lottery result during the promotion chance determines "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and determines "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

When "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the lottery during the promotion chance (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a Pseudo BIG has been won.

After executing the process of step S4366, the main CPU 101 executes the next pseudo game lottery process (step S4367). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the next pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 478), performs a lottery based on random numbers, and selects "pseudo game 1" and "pseudo game 2" as the results of the pseudo game lottery. ”, “pseudo game 3”, “pseudo game 4”, “pseudo game 5”, “pseudo game 6”, “pseudo game 7”, and “pseudo game 8”.

The next pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 478 is provided for each of the promotion chance lottery results ("fake pseudo game", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 478(a) is referred to, and if "pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, FIG. The next pseudo game lottery table shown in b) is referred to, and if "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 478(c) is referred to.

In each next pseudo game lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the next pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1", "Pseudo Game 2", "Pseudo Game 3", "Pseudo Game 4", "Pseudo Game 5", "Pseudo Game 6", "Pseudo Game 7", and "Pseudo Game 8") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the next pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366, then the next pseudo game lottery result will be determined to be "Pseudo game 1" with a probability of 86/256, and "Pseudo game 2" with a probability of 170/256. Also, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, then the next pseudo game lottery result will be determined to be "Pseudo game 3" with a probability of 112/256, "Pseudo game 4" with a probability of 112/256, and "Pseudo game 5" with a probability of 32/256. Furthermore, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 3" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 4" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 5" with a probability of 32/256, and "Pseudo Game 6" with a probability of 160/256.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main side performance control process (see step S8 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game next to the unit game in which the next pseudo game lottery was performed. . Furthermore, when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery (the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance lottery In the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the played unit game, the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated. This causes the transition to pseudo BIG (see transition condition (K) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

Furthermore, when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery (pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag on. As mentioned above, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set on, when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, the pseudo BIG is controlled again, and as a result, the pseudo BIG is controlled until the advantageous section ends. It will continue.

After executing the processing of step S4367, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4365 that the value of the promotion chance play count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4368). If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG promotion lottery process when the specified number of plays is played (step S4369). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played (see FIG. 479) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played, from among "Fake pseudo play", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)".

In the pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of games are played shown in FIG. , lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games are played ("fake pseudo game", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)") are defined. The probability that each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery after playing the specified number of games is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" ”.

For example, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1", the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Fake pseudo play" with a probability of 232/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 24/256. Also, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4", the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 224/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 32/256.

After executing the process of step S4369, the main CPU 101 executes the current pseudo game lottery process (step S4370). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the current pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 480) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", "pseudo game 5", "pseudo game 6", "pseudo game 7", and "pseudo game 8" as the result of the current pseudo game lottery.

The current pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 480 is provided for each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played ("Pseudo BIG" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 480(a) is referenced, and if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in FIG. 480(b) is referenced.

In each current pseudo game lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the current pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1", "Pseudo Game 2", "Pseudo Game 3", "Pseudo Game 4", "Pseudo Game 5", "Pseudo Game 6", "Pseudo Game 7", and "Pseudo Game 8") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the current pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, "pseudo game 7" is determined as the result of this pseudo game lottery with a probability of 128/256. , "pseudo game 8" is determined with a probability of 128/256. Furthermore, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, "Pseudo Game 6" will be played with a probability of 256/256 as a result of the pseudo game lottery this time. is determined. Note that if "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4369, "pseudo game 7" is determined.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the current pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the current pseudo game lottery was performed. As a result, the pseudo game determined in step S4369 is executed following the pseudo game determined in step S4367.

In addition, if "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played (if Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo BIG. In addition, if "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played (if Pseudo BIG is not won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo REG (see transition condition (L) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

In addition, when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 turns on the pseudo BIG (ED) flag. set. As mentioned above, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set on, when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, the pseudo BIG is controlled again, and as a result, the pseudo BIG is controlled until the advantageous section ends. It will continue.

After executing the processing of step S4370, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In the above, it has been explained that eight types of pseudo games (pseudo game 1, pseudo game 2, pseudo game 3, pseudo game 4, pseudo game 5, pseudo game 6, pseudo game 7, and pseudo game 8) are provided. As explained in the first embodiment, the pseudo games are configured to be able to be executed while a lock effect is being executed. A lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the game operation of the player for a predetermined period of time).

As shown in FIG. 481, in pseudo game 1, a "V", "Seven" or "Bar" is completed on the top line, but the "V", "Seven" and "Bar" are not completed on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line and cross-down line. Pseudo game 1 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 2, a "V", "Seven" or "Bar" is completed on the bottom line, but the "V", "Seven" and "Bar" are not completed on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line and cross-down line. Pseudo game 2 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 3, "V" is lined up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (top line if the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation), or "Seven" is lined up on the center line. Pseudo game 3 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 4, "V" is lined up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (bottom line if the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation), or "Seven" is lined up on the center line. Pseudo game 4 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 5, "V" is lined up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (cross-up line if the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation), or "Seven" is lined up on the center line. Pseudo game 5 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 6, "V" is completed on the center line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and "V" is lined up on the center line, or "Seven" is lined up on the center line, and "Bar" is not lined up on any line. Pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366 or step S4369.

Further, the pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can be executed only when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined. That is, when pseudo game 6 is executed, pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG continues until the advantageous section ends) is determined. For example, a pseudo-game that is performed when the normal medium long freeze lottery (1) and the normal medium long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4102 in FIG. 450) is won, as well as the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (1) and the time at the time of entry. The pseudo game that is played when the long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4363 in FIG. 475) is won is also pseudo game 6.

In pseudo game 7, the "V" and "Seven" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and the "bar" lines up on the center line. Pseudo game 7 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4369. If "pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, a reel effect (re-spinning of the reels) is performed after pseudo game 7 ends, and "V" or "Seven" lines up on any of the lines. On the other hand, if "fake pseudo game" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, reel re-spinning is not performed.

In pseudo game 8, a "bar" is completed on any of the lines of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, but a "V", "seven", and "bar" are not completed on any of the lines. Pseudo game 8 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369. If "pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 8 is executed, a reel effect (re-spinning of the reels) is performed after pseudo game 8 ends, and a "V" or "seven" is completed on any of the lines.

<Promotion Chance Game Flow>
Figure 482 shows the flow of the game during a promotion chance.

As shown in FIG. 482, in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), a long freeze (see step S4363 in FIG. 475) may occur. If the freeze occurs, a pseudo game aiming for a BB (pseudo game 6) occurs following the freeze, and a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if a freeze does not occur, the first game of the promotion chance is consumed, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the second game of the promotion chance.

In the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) is generated that is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) performed in the first game. In the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are lined up, a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) starts. On the other hand, in the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are not lined up, the second game of the promotion chance is consumed, and the operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the third game of the promotion chance.

In the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 1), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) occurs that is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) held in the second game. In the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") line up, a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) starts. On the other hand, in the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") do not line up, the third game of the promotion chance is consumed, and the game transitions to the fourth game of the promotion chance is triggered by the operation of the start lever 7.

In the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance games counter: 0), a pseudo game (the value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0) is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) conducted in the third game. (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) occurs. In the pseudo game (third BB aiming pseudo game), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("buoy" or "seven") are aligned, pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) starts. On the other hand, in the pseudo game (3rd BB aiming pseudo game), if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("buoy" or "seven") are not aligned, the pseudo BIG promotion lottery is performed when the specified number of games are played (step in FIG. 475). Unless a pseudo BIG is won in S4369 (see S4369), an RB aiming pseudo game (pseudo game 7) occurs and a pseudo RB (pseudo REG) starts.

In addition, in the above, if a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery conducted in the third promotion chance game (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), a fake pseudo game is determined based on the result. The game (pseudo game 1 or pseudo game 2) is determined (see step S4367 in FIG. 475), and in the fourth promotion chance game, the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475) Regardless, the fake pseudo game has been explained as being performed as the third BB aiming pseudo game. However, as a result of the promotion chance lottery held in the 3rd game of the promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), a "fake pseudo game" is determined, and in the 4th game of the promotion chance, when the specified number of games is played, the pseudo BIG If a pseudo BIG is won in the promotion lottery (see step S4369 in FIG. 475), the fake pseudo game is discarded and the pseudo game determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery after the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475). 475 (see step S4370) may be performed as the third BB aiming pseudo game.

Also, FIG. 482 shows that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts after a pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming at BB or a pseudo game aiming at RB) is played. The player can recognize that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts when the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") or the pseudo REG transition symbol ("Bar") lines up in the pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming at BB or a pseudo game aiming at RB). However, the timing when the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG actually starts (the timing when the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated) may be after the pseudo game (the BB-aiming pseudo game or the RB-aiming pseudo game) has been played (for example, during the main side presentation control process at the start of the game (see step S8 in FIG. 23)), or it may be before the pseudo game (the BB-aiming pseudo game or the RB-aiming pseudo game) has been played (for example, during the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23)).

<Example of promotion chance (when a pseudo BIG is won in the first game)>
Figure 483 shows an example of the presentation when a pseudo BIG is won in the first game of the promotion chance.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 483, Figure 483(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game just before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery announcement game).

In FIG. 483(b), after the state shown in FIG. 483(a), in the first promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 3), the promotion chance medium lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) is An image corresponding to the words "Bonus Promotion Lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in accordance with the lottery. Here, it is assumed that "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in FIG. 475) is non-winning.

In FIG. 483(c), after the state shown in FIG. 483(b), in the second promotion chance game (the value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see FIG. When the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of step S4366 in FIG. It shows how it is. This image suggests that the stop operation be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol as a pseudo BIG transition symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thereby, the player can be encouraged to perform a stop operation aimed at the "buoy".

Figure 483(d) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2) after the state shown in Figure 483(c), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the letters "V.V.V" and "BIG BONUS!" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the pseudo BIG transition symbol "V" has been lined up, and that a transition to a big bonus (pseudo BIG) will occur. When the pseudo BIG transition symbol is lined up (when pseudo BIG starts), external signal 1 described in the first embodiment is turned on.

After the state shown in FIG. 483(d), in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2), following the pseudo game (the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops). (in this state), a lock occurs and the progress of the game is further stopped for a predetermined period of time. FIG. 483(e) shows a screen being displayed on the main display device 210 for selecting the effect (BB effect) to be performed in the pseudo BIG during the period when the lock is performed. The player can select any one of performance A, performance B, and performance C as the BB performance by operating the performance button.

In FIG. 483(f), after the state shown in FIG. 483(e), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), when one effect (in this case, effect B) is determined as the BB effect, images corresponding to the words "Play with the lever", "0 coins won", and "30 navigations remaining" are displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the lock ends. Even if the start lever 7 is not operated, the lock ends when a predetermined time (e.g., 50 seconds) has elapsed since all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning in the pseudo game. "0 coins won" indicates the number of medals won by the player in the pseudo BIG (the difference between the number of coins paid out and the number of coins inserted), and "30 navigations remaining" indicates the remaining number of Bell Navis that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG (see FIG. 433) described above (the value of the first Bell Navi count counter).

After the state shown in FIG. 483(f), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate for actual play (main play) (random delay processing is performed and the game progresses). FIG. 483(g) shows the state in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for announcing the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_321 Bell D" has been determined as the internal winning role, it is announced that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R by pressing the "buoy", the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L (see FIG. 433). Also, since one bell navigation has been performed, the number of "remaining navigations" has decreased by one to "29 times".

Figure 483 (h) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 483 (g), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, as a result of a stopping operation being performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), the push order bell has been won, and 15 medals are paid out (see Figure 429). In addition, the number of "won" coins has been updated to the difference (12 coins) between the number of coins paid out (15 coins) and the number of coins inserted (3 coins).

Note that in the state shown in Figure 483 (e) to (h), the transition from promotion chance to pseudo BIG has already occurred, and the first game of the pseudo BIG is shown, but for convenience it is described as the second game of the promotion chance.

<Example of promotion chance (when pseudo BIG is not won)>
Figure 484 shows an example of a presentation when all pseudo BIG prizes are not won in the first to fourth promotion chance games.

As an example of the presentation shown in FIG. 484, FIG. 484(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery announcement game).

Figure 484 (b) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 484 (a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), a lottery during the promotion chance (see step S4366 in Figure 475) is held, and an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that a "fake pseudo play" has been determined as a result of the lottery during the promotion chance. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 475) has not been won.

In FIG. 484(c), after the state shown in FIG. 484(b), in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2), the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (Fig. When the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of step S4366 in FIG. It shows how it is. This image suggests that the stop operation be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol as a pseudo BIG transition symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thereby, the player can be encouraged to perform a stop operation aimed at the "buoy".

In FIG. 484(d), after the state shown in FIG. 484(c), all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are When the rotation of the main display device 210 has stopped, images corresponding to the words "Zan-nen" and "The game will proceed when the lever is turned on" are displayed on the main display device 210. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the "buoy" as the pseudo-BIG transition symbol was not aligned (the pseudo-BIG was not won) and to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in FIG. 484(d), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate for real play (main play) (random delay processing is performed and the game progresses). FIG. 484(e) shows that in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), a lottery during the promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) is held, and an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo game" has been determined as a result of the lottery during the promotion chance.

In FIG. 484(f), after the state shown in FIG. 484(e), in the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 1), the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see FIG. When the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of step S4366 in FIG. It shows how it is. This image suggests that the stop operation be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol as a pseudo BIG transition symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thereby, the player can be encouraged to perform a stop operation aimed at the "buoy".

In FIG. 484(g), after the state shown in FIG. 484(f), all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are When the rotation of the main display device 210 has stopped, images corresponding to the words "Zan-nen" and "The game will proceed when the lever is turned on" are displayed on the main display device 210. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the "buoy" as the pseudo-BIG transition symbol was not aligned (the pseudo-BIG was not won) and to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in FIG. 484(g), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate for real play (main play) (random delay processing is performed and the game progresses). FIG. 484(h) shows that in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), a lottery during the promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) is held, and in response, an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo game" has been determined as a result of the lottery during the promotion chance.

In FIG. 484(i), after the state shown in FIG. 484(h), in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery performed in the third game (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) starts, an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210. The image suggests that a stop operation should be performed at the timing when the "V" symbol as the pseudo BIG transition symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This can prompt the player to perform a stop operation aiming for the "V". Note that, here, it is assumed that the "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 475). Also, in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), two pseudo games are played, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery played in the third game (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) will be referred to as the first pseudo game.

In FIG. 484(j), after the state shown in FIG. 484(i), all reels 3L and 3C are played in the first pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0). , 3R has stopped rotating, images corresponding to the words "Zan-nen" and "The game will proceed when the lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the "buoy" as the pseudo-BIG transition symbol was not aligned (the pseudo-BIG was not won) and to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in FIG. 484(j), when the start lever 7 is operated, a pseudo game (see step S4370 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 475) starts. This pseudo game will be referred to as the second pseudo game. FIG. 484(k) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for BAR!" displayed on the main display device 210 when the second pseudo game performed in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) starts. This image suggests that a stop operation should be performed at the timing when the "bar" pattern as the pseudo REG transition pattern can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This makes it possible to encourage the player to perform a stop operation aiming for the "bar".

Figure 484 (l) shows how, in the second pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 484 (k), when all reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "REGULAR BONUS!" and "Play proceeds when lever is on" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that a transition to a regular bonus (pseudo REG) will occur, and prompts the player to operate the start lever 7. When the pseudo REG transition symbols are lined up (when the pseudo REG starts), the external signal 2 described in the first embodiment is turned on.

After the state shown in FIG. 484(l), when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts for the actual game (main game) (the game progresses with a random delay process). FIG. 484(m) shows the state in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying (bell navigation) the correct push order in the push order bell. Here, since "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" are determined as the internal winning role, it is notified that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C with a push aimed at "seven", the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L (see FIG. 433). In addition, "4 remaining navigations" indicates the remaining number of bell navigations that can be executed in the pseudo REG (the value of the second bell navigation number counter). The initial value of "remaining navigation" is 5 times, but since one bell navigation has been performed, the number of "remaining navigation" times has been reduced by one and updated to "4 times."

Figure 484(n) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 484(m), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, a stop operation has been performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), and the push order bell has been won, resulting in the payment of 15 medals (see Figure 429).

Note that in the state shown in Figures 484(m) and (n), the transition has already taken place from the promotion chance to the pseudo REG, and the first game of the pseudo REG is shown, but for convenience it is described as the fourth game of the promotion chance.

As explained above, when the game moves to the promotion chance, the game will definitely move to one of the AT states, pseudo BIG or pseudo REG. In other words, the promotion chance is a ball output state in which the game is confirmed to move to the AT state. In the promotion chance, it is decided which AT state the game will move to, and a presentation is made to notify the AT state to which the game will move to through the pseudo game. If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are lined up in the pseudo game played from the first game to the final game, the game will move to the pseudo BIG. If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are not lined up in the first pseudo game played in the final game, the pseudo REG transition symbols ("Bar") are lined up in the second pseudo game, and the game will move to the pseudo REG. The game can only move to the pseudo REG in the final game, and the game will not move to the pseudo REG in games other than the final game.

Up to this point, we have explained the specifications for displaying symbols at the start of a pseudo bonus through a pseudo game that allows the player to stop the game. Symbols may be displayed at the start of a pseudo-bonus using a reel effect in which the reels automatically stop without accompanying movement. When it is decided to use the reel performance, although the performance effect is inferior to the pseudo game, the capacity of the main program can be reduced compared to the pseudo game.

In addition, in pseudo games, the reels automatically stop after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, etc.) from the time when the rotation start or stop operation of the reels for pseudo games becomes effective, and symbols such as when starting a pseudo bonus are displayed. Display will be made. Therefore, in a broad sense, pseudo-games can also be seen as a type of reel performance. In the case of automatic stopping due to the passage of time, it may be controlled so that the scheduled symbol combinations (buoys, sevens, bars, etc.) are stopped, or a stop signal is input to each reel when the time has elapsed. It may also be possible to do so. In the latter case, if the timing happens to be right, the planned symbol combination will be completed, but the symbol combination may not be completed.

The reel stop control for the pseudo game can be appropriately adopted from the aspects described in the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, the pseudo stop result may be changed according to the pressing position (stop operation timing) with the number of sliding frames set to a maximum of four frames in the same or similar manner as in the normal game (main game), or the pseudo stop result may be slid to a position predetermined by the type of pseudo game (pseudo game 1 to 8) regardless of the pressing position. Even if the result changes according to the pressing position, the stop control may be performed to limit the stop candidate positions to two or three (for example, in pseudo game 3, the reel may be slid four or more frames depending on the pressing position so that it becomes either a V-line or a Seven-line), so that the player can easily understand the result. In addition, in the case of a type in which the number that appears changes depending on the button press position, for example, even if neither a buoy nor a seven-line stops at the start of the pseudo-BIG, it is desirable to perform the presentation at the start of the pseudo-BIG (for example, the presentation corresponding to a buoy as shown in FIG. 483(d)) in the same manner as when a buoy line is formed, so that the player can understand the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum number of games during a promotion chance is 4 games (or 6 games), and the number of games is not added, but if a predetermined condition is met, the number of games during a promotion chance is increased. It is also possible to make it an extendable specification. For example, the number of remaining games may be extended in the case of winning a rare combination and not winning a pseudo-BIG. Further, when extending the promotion chance, the number of games may be increased such as +1 game or +5 game, or a state such as an infinite promotion chance that continues until the pseudo BIG is won may be established and transitioned.

<Pseudo BIG game start process>
FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG game start process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing pseudo BIG start processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 487 is a diagram showing a consecutive winning challenge lottery table at the start of pseudo BIG. FIG. 488 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG 1G continuous lottery table.

The pseudo BIG game start processing shown in FIG. 485 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of FIG. 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see FIG. 430) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of FIG. 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo BIG game start time process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time to start a pseudo BIG game (step S4381). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag (see step S4246 in FIG. 463 and step S4351 in FIG. 474) is set to ON in the next unit game, or during the promotion chance in the promotion chance. In the next unit game of the unit game that won the pseudo BIG in the lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), or when the specified number of games are played in the promotion chance, the player wins the pseudo BIG in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery (see step S4369 in FIG. 475). The process moves to the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game that has been performed. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that shifts to pseudo-BIG, after the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to shift to pseudo-BIG, the pseudo-BIG state control process shown in FIG. 485 is performed. Processing is performed at the start of the game. In the process of step S4381, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to start pseudo BIG when the current unit game shifts to pseudo BIG (when the current unit game is the first game of pseudo BIG).

If it is determined that it is time for the pseudo-BIG to start, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-BIG start processing (step S4382). Here, the pseudo-BIG start processing will be explained using FIG. 486.

In the pseudo BIG start processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to transition from a promotion chance (step S4401). This processing is performed when there is a transition to pseudo BIG in the current unit game (when the current unit game is the first game of pseudo BIG), and the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from a promotion chance if the ball output state at the transition source is a promotion chance.

If it is determined that it is not the time of transition from the promotion chance, the main CPU 101 sets a pseudo game (step S4402). In this process, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 450, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 475) is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 6 (see FIG. 481), and if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 5 (see FIG. 481). As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the set pseudo game in the main side presentation control process at the start of the game in the unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). In addition, although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counters, etc.) set in the normal ball output state.

When it is determined in step S4401 that it is time to transition from the promotion chance, or after executing the processing of step S4402, the main CPU 101 sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4403). As described above, the first pseudo BIG and the second pseudo BIG are provided as pseudo BIGs, and when the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled to the first pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first Bernavi count counter to "30" (step S4404). As described above, the value of the first Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the first pseudo BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is executed in the first pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the normal reply remaining winnings counter to "3" (step S4405). As described above, the value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter indicates the remaining number of times that can be shifted from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter is subtracted by 1 each time there is a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (a normal reply wins in the first pseudo BIG).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 450, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 475) is set ON (step S4406). If it is determined that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 adds 2 to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter (step S4407). The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter indicates the remaining number of times that the pseudo BIG can be controlled again when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG start consecutive win challenge lottery process (step S4408). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG start consecutive win challenge lottery table (see FIG. 487) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo BIG start consecutive win challenge lottery will be a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

In the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery table shown in FIG. ), a lottery value corresponding to the result (“non-winning” and “winning”) of the consecutive winning challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-BIG is defined. The probability that each result of the consecutive winning challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-BIG is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" It can be expressed by As a result, regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the pseudo-BIG start consecutive winning challenge lottery is 1/256.

If the player wins the consecutive game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo BIG, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game challenge winning flag to ON. The consecutive game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the player has won the consecutive game challenge. The details will be described later, but if the player wins the consecutive game challenge, the game shifts to the consecutive game challenge when the pseudo BIG ending condition is satisfied (see transition condition (M) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

After executing the process of step S4408, the main CPU 101 executes a long freeze lottery process at the time of entry (step S4409). This process is similar to the process in step S4363 in FIG. 475, so the explanation here will be omitted. After executing the process in step S4409, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo BIG start process performed in step S4382 in FIG. 485 has been described above using FIG. 486. The explanation returns to FIG. 485.

If it is determined in step S4381 that it is not the time to start pseudo BIG, or after executing the process in step S4382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or more (step S4383). . When determining that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or more, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo BIG 1G continuous lottery process (step S4384). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG 1G continuous lottery table (see FIG. 488), and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag in ball release flag group 6 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. As a result of the pseudo-BIG 1G continuous lottery, one of "non-winning", "pseudo-BIG", and "pseudo-BIG (ED)" is determined.

The pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. It is provided. When the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Other", the pseudo BIG 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. ”, the pseudo BIG 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. ) is referred to, and if the ball output flag in ball flag group 6 is "1 card", the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 488(d) is Referenced.

In each Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery ("Non-winning", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each of the "First Pseudo BIG" and "Second Pseudo BIG". The probability of each result of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, in the first pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, a "non-winning lottery" is determined with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6. Also, in the second pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "other" or "1-piece role", a "non-winning lottery" is determined with a probability of 256/256, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "reach eye" or "reach eye BB", a "non-winning lottery" is determined with a probability of 255/256, and a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 1/256. When a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the Pseudo BIG (when the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the Pseudo BIG stock counter.

After executing the process in step S4384, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo BIG counter management processing>
FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing pseudo BIG counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The counter management process for pseudo BIG shown in FIG. 489 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S15 of FIG. 23 (main process) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see FIG. This is the process performed in the state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo BIG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG (step S4421). If it is determined that it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" (see FIGS. 427 and 428)) has been determined as the internal winning role by the internal winning role determination process (see step S64 in FIG. 26) (step S4422).

When it is determined that a replay has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the replay counter that has been established during the first pseudo BIG (step S4423). The value of the replay counter that has been established during the first pseudo BIG indicates the number of times that a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") has been determined as the internal winning role during the first pseudo BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a normal lip has been awarded (step S4424). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line is a "normal lip" (any of "C_middle lip A_01-04", "C_lower lip A_01-06", "C_CU lip_01-03", "C_upper lip B_01-06", "C_upper lip A_01-03", and "C_CD lip_01-04" (see FIG. 425A)).

If it is determined that a normal lip has won, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal lip remaining winning count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 486) (step S4425). The main CPU 101 then sets a second pseudo BIG (step S4426). This transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the second VerNavi number counter to "9" (step S4427). As described above, the value of the second BellNavi number counter indicates the remaining number of BellNavi operations that can be executed in the second pseudo BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second Vernavigation counter is decremented by 1 each time Vernavigation is performed once in the second pseudo BIG.

If it is determined in step S4424 that the normal reply has not won, or after executing the process in step S4427, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4422 that the replay has not been determined as an internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bell navigation has occurred (step S4428). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the bells in the pressing order ("F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C ” and “F_321 Bell D” (see FIGS. 425A and 425B)) is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, in the pseudo-BIG, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, information on a stop operation for making the push order bell win is notified (bell navigation is performed).

If it is determined that a Bernavi has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 486) (step S4429). The main CPU 101 then determines whether the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 0 (step S4430). If it is determined that the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo BIG end processing (1) (step S4431). The pseudo BIG end processing (1) will be described later using FIG. 490.

If it is determined in step S4428 that a Bernavi event has not occurred, if it is determined in step S4430 that the value of the first Bernavi event count counter is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S4431, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4421 that the first pseudo BIG is not being controlled (the second pseudo BIG is being controlled), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a Bell Navi has occurred (step S4432). This process is the same as the process in step S4428. If it is determined that a Bell Navi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BellNavi has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second BellNavi counter (see step S4427) (Step S4433). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second Vernavigation counter is 0 (step S4434). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Vernavigation counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0, it determines whether or not the value of the normal remaining lip winning count counter (see step S4425) is 0 (step S4435). If it determines that the value of the normal remaining lip winning count counter is 0, it executes pseudo BIG end processing (2) (step S4436). The pseudo BIG end processing (2) will be described later using FIG. 492.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4437). This causes a transition from the second pseudo BIG to the first pseudo BIG.

After executing the process of step S4436 or step S4437, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of pseudo BIG (1)>
Fig. 490 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG end processing (1) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 491 is a diagram showing a lottery table when the number of established reps is insufficient.

The pseudo BIG termination process (1) shown in FIG. 490 is a process performed in step S4431 of FIG. 489 (pseudo BIG counter management process) in the main control circuit 100. This process is also performed when the above-mentioned condition "(i) the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 0" is met as the pseudo BIG termination condition.

In the pseudo BIG end processing (1), first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 486) is 2 or greater (step S4441).

If it is determined that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first pseudo BIG established rep counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 489) is less than or equal to 2 ( Step S4442).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful rep counter is 2 or less, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (step S4443). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a lottery table for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (see FIG. 491) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for when the number of successful replies is insufficient, from among "No Winning", "Pseudo-BIG", and "Pseudo-BIG (ED)".

In the lottery table when the number of successful replays is insufficient shown in FIG. 491, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the lottery when the number of successful replays is insufficient ("non-winning", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)") is specified for each value of the successful replay counter during the first pseudo BIG, i.e., the number of times a replay was determined as an internal winning role during the first pseudo BIG ("0 times", "1 time", and "2 times"). The probability of each result being determined in the lottery when the number of successful replays is insufficient can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful rep counter is "1", the result of the lottery when the number of successful reps is insufficient will be a "no win" with a probability of 224/256, and a "pseudo-BIG" with a probability of 32/256. If a "pseudo-BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the number of successful reps is insufficient (if the lottery when the number of successful reps is insufficient is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter.

If it is determined in step S4442 that the value of the first pseudo-BIG hit replay counter is 3 or greater, or after executing the processing of step S4443, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter is 1 or greater (step S4444).

If it is determined in step S4441 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or more, or if it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4445). The pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG is to continue. The main CPU 101 executes pseudo BIG start processing (see FIG. 486) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG continuation flag was set to ON. This allows the pseudo BIG to continue.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S4445, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. Note that if it is determined that the number of times controlled to pseudo BIG during one favorable period (the number of times the pseudo BIG start processing is executed) is three or more, it is possible not to subtract from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In this case, it is determined that pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the favorable period ends) is established.

If it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive win challenge flag is set to ON (step S4446). As described above, the consecutive win challenge flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4408 in FIG. 486).

If it is determined that the consecutive game challenge winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game challenge transition flag to on (step S4447). As described above, the consecutive game challenge transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the consecutive game challenge. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the consecutive game challenge transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. This will move on to the consecutive home challenge.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, it sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4448). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4445, step S4447, or step S4448, if the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the flag to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that if the pseudo-BIG continues, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 486) may not be performed.

<Pseudo BIG termination processing (2)>
FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG termination process (2) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 493 is a diagram showing a lottery table for consecutive winnings challenge at the end of the final second pseudo BIG.

The pseudo BIG termination process (2) shown in FIG. 492 is a process performed in step S4436 of FIG. 489 (pseudo BIG counter management process) in the main control circuit 100. In addition, in this process, the above-mentioned condition "(ii) the value of the normal reply remaining winnings counter is 0 and the value of the second VerNavi number counter is 0" is satisfied as the pseudo BIG termination condition. This is the process that is performed when the condition is established.

In the pseudo BIG end process (2), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 486) is 1 or more (step S4461).

When determining that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4462). As described above, the pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that pseudo BIG is to be continued. The main CPU 101 executes the pseudo BIG start time process (see FIG. 486) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game for which the pseudo BIG continuation flag is set to ON. do. As a result, pseudo-BIG continues.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S4462, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In addition, if it is determined that the number of times the pseudo BIG is controlled (the pseudo BIG start process is executed) during one advantageous period is 3 or more, it will not be subtracted from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. It may also be a thing. In this case, pseudo-BIG (ED) (pseudo-BIG continues until the advantageous section ends) is determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive winning challenge winning flag is set on (step S4463). As described above, the consecutive game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the player has won the consecutive game challenge (see step S4408 in FIG. 486).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive win challenge lottery process at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (step S4464). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (see FIG. 493) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG is a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

The final second pseudo BIG end consecutive game challenge lottery table shown in FIG. ing. When entering the final second pseudo BIG, the value of the first BelNavi number counter is 0 when the final (third) second pseudo BIG is entered (by the process of step S4425 being performed, the value of the normal reply remaining winning number counter is 0). This is the value of the first BellNavi number counter (see step S4429 in FIG. 489) when the process of step S4426 is performed in a state where . If the value of the first VerNavi number counter at the time of entering the final second pseudo BIG is less than "6", the lottery table for consecutive winnings challenge at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in FIG. 493(a) is referred to, and If the value of the first VerNavi number counter at the time of entering the second pseudo BIG is "6" or more, the final second pseudo BIG end consecutive winning challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 493(b) is referred to.

In each final second pseudo BIG end consecutive game challenge lottery table, the setting values ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6") ), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive winning challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (“non-winning” and “winning”) is defined. The probability that each result of the consecutive game challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the value of the first bell navigation counter at the time of entering the final second pseudo BIG is less than "6", regardless of the setting value, there is a probability of 256/256 to challenge the consecutive games at the end of the final second pseudo BIG. The lottery becomes non-winning. Also, if the value of the first bell navigation counter at the time of entering the final second pseudo BIG is "6" or more, regardless of the setting value, there is a probability of 2/256 that the consecutive game challenge lottery will be held at the end of the final second pseudo BIG. to win. After executing the process of step S4464, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the final second pseudo BIG end consecutive game challenge lottery has been won (step S4465).

If it is determined in step S4463 that the consecutive game challenge winning flag is set to ON, or if it is determined that the consecutive game challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG is won in step S4465, the main CPU 101 The challenge transition flag is set on (step S4466). As described above, the consecutive game challenge transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the consecutive game challenge. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the consecutive game challenge transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. This will move on to the consecutive home challenge.

If it is determined in step S4465 that the final second pseudo BIG end consecutive game challenge lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section shift flag to ON (step S4467). As described above, the non-advantageous section transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the non-advantageous section. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the non-advantageous section transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. This causes the vehicle to move to a non-advantageous section.

The section lamp (also called the status indicator or advantageous section lamp) that was lit during the advantageous section will change from a lit state to an unlit state after all reels of the game have stopped and a transition to a non-advantageous section has been determined. As explained in the first embodiment, the section lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is within the advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S4462, step S4466, or step S4467, if the consecutive game challenge winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the flag off and ends this subroutine. In addition, if the pseudo-BIG continues, the continuous-game challenge winning flag will be carried over, and in this case, the continuous-game challenge lottery process at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 486) may not be performed. .

<Processing at the start of play for pseudo REG>
Fig. 494 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-REG game start process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 495 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG start consecutive-chance challenge lottery table. Fig. 496 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table.

The game start process for pseudo REG shown in FIG. 494 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start This is a process that is performed (for example, when the determination result in step S85 in FIG. 27 is "NO") in the current state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo REG game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is the pseudo REG start time (step S4481). As described above, the pseudo REG is entered in the game start time state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0). In the game start time state control processing in the unit game that is entered into the pseudo REG, the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to enter into the pseudo REG, and then the pseudo REG game start time processing shown in FIG. 494 is performed. In the processing of step S4481, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the pseudo REG start time when the current unit game has entered into the pseudo REG (when the current unit game is the first game of the pseudo REG).

If it is determined that it is time to start the pseudo REG, the main CPU 101 sets the second BellNavi number counter to "5" (step S4482). As described above, the value of the second BellNavi number counter indicates the remaining number of BellNavi operations that can be executed in the pseudo REG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second VerNavi number counter is subtracted by 1 each time VerNavi is performed once in the pseudo REG.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery process (step S4483). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery table (see FIG. 495) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery will be a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

The pseudo REG start consecutive game challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 495 is provided for each of the values of the advantageous section game number counter for playing balls (“199 or less” and “200 or more”). The number of games played in an advantageous section for playing balls is the aforementioned number of games in an advantageous section, and the value of the number of games played in an advantageous section for playing balls indicates the number of unit games played in the advantageous section, and is stored in the main RAM 103. ing. Although not shown, the value of the advantageous section game number counter for balls is added only in the advantageous section, and is cleared when moving to the non-advantageous section. If the value of the number of advantageous section games for balls to be played is "199" or less, the pseudo REG start consecutive game challenge lottery table shown in FIG. If the value is "200" or more, the pseudo REG start consecutive winning challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 495(b) is referred to.

In each pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery ('non-winning' and 'winning') is specified for each setting value ('Setting 1', 'Setting 2', 'Setting 3', 'Setting 4', 'Setting 5', and 'Setting 6'). The probability of each result of the pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery can be expressed as 'lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)'. As a result, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is '199' or less, there is a 1/256 probability of winning the pseudo-REG start consecutive win challenge lottery, regardless of the setting value. Also, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is 200 or more and the setting value is set to setting 6, there is a 40/256 probability of winning the consecutive win challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo REG.

If the player wins the consecutive game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo REG, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game challenge winning flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the player has won the consecutive game challenge. The details will be described later, but if the player wins the consecutive game challenge, the game shifts to the consecutive game challenge when the pseudo REG termination condition is satisfied (see transition condition (M) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

If it is determined in step S4481 that it is not the time to start the pseudo REG, or after executing the process in step S4483, the main CPU 101 executes a 1G continuous lottery process in the pseudo REG (step S4484). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo REG 1G continuous lottery table (see FIG. 496) and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag in ball release flag group 6 (see FIG. 434) and the random number value. As a result of the 1G consecutive lottery among pseudo REGs, one of "non-winning", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined.

The pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 496 is provided for each of the ball output flags in the ball output flag group 6 ("Other", "Reach Eye", "Reach Eye BB", and "1 Piece Role"). When the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Other", the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 496(a) is referenced, when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye", the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 496(b) is referenced, when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB", the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 496(c) is referenced, and when the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 6 is "1 Piece Role", the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 496(d) is referenced.

In each pseudo REG 1G continuous lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the 1G continuous lottery among pseudo REGs ("non-winning", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)") are defined. . The probability that each result of the 1G consecutive lottery in pseudo REG is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to. For example, when the ball flag in ball flag group 6 is "Reach BB", "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 240/256 as a result of 1G continuous lottery in pseudo REG, and 15/256. "Pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

When "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery in pseudo REG (the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Furthermore, when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery among pseudo REGs (pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to on. As mentioned above, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set on, when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, the pseudo BIG is controlled again, and as a result, the pseudo BIG is controlled until the advantageous section ends. It will continue.

After executing the processing of step S4484, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo REG counter management processing>
FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing pseudo REG counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-REG counter management process shown in FIG. 497 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (state control process at the end of game) of FIG. 23 (main process) when the current ball output state is pseudo-REG (see FIG. 430). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo REG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not a Bell Navi has occurred (step S4501). This process is similar to the process of step S4428 in FIG. 489, so a description of this process will be omitted here. If it is determined that a Bell Navi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BellNavi has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second BellNavi counter (see step S4482 in FIG. 494) (Step S4502). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second VerNavi number counter is 0 (step S4503). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Vernavigation counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second VerNavi number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on (step S4504). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4484 in FIG. 494).

When it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4505). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG (see transition condition (N) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive win challenge winning flag is set to ON (step S4506). As described above, the consecutive win challenge winning flag is a flag that indicates that a consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4483 in FIG. 494).

If it is determined that the consecutive game challenge winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game challenge transition flag to on (step S4507). As described above, the consecutive game challenge transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the consecutive game challenge. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the consecutive game challenge transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. This will move on to the consecutive home challenge.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag on (step S4508). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set on. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing in step S4505, step S4507, or step S4508, if the pseudo BIG winning flag or consecutive winning challenge winning flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 sets these flags to off and executes the real game. End the subroutine. In addition, when shifting to a pseudo BIG, the consecutive game challenge winning flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive game challenge lottery process at the start of the pseudo BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 486) may not be performed. .

Up to this point, we have described the process related to the pseudo REG, but as described above, the pseudo REG has a lower advantage in terms of ball output compared to the pseudo BIG. Therefore, it is desirable to be able to perform setting suggestion performances that do not occur during pseudo BIG during pseudo REG or at the end of pseudo REG, so as to suppress the decrease in player's interest as much as possible. As the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to appropriately adopt the aspects described in the above-described embodiments.

<Processing at start of game for consecutive game challenge>
FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of the consecutive game challenge game performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 499 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of consecutive game challenge. FIG. 500 is a diagram showing the number of games lottery table at the start of the consecutive game challenge. FIG. 501 is a diagram showing a lottery table during the consecutive game challenge. FIG. 502 is a diagram showing a normal shift lottery table at the end of the consecutive game challenge.

The process at the start of the game for consecutive game challenge shown in FIG. 498 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S6 of FIG. This is a process performed in the game start state control process (for example, when the determination result in step S85 in FIG. 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the processing at the start of the consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is the time to start the consecutive game challenge (step S4521). As described above, the consecutive game challenge transition flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 435, step S4027 in FIG. 437, step S4447 in FIG. 490, step S4466 in FIG. 492, and step S4507 in FIG. 497) The process moves to the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which is set to ON. In the state control processing at the start of the game in a unit game that transitions to a consecutive game challenge, after updating the ball release status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) to transition to a consecutive game challenge, the consecutive game challenge shown in FIG. Processing is performed at the start of the game for Sou Challenge. In the process of step S4521, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to start the consecutive game challenge when the current unit game shifts to the consecutive game challenge (when the current unit game is the first game of the consecutive game challenge). do.

When it is determined that it is the start of the consecutive-game challenge, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery process (step S4522). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 499) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery as either "No Winning", "Promotion Chance", "Pseudo BIG", or "Pseudo BIG (ED)".

In the pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of the consecutive win challenge shown in FIG. 499, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge ("No Win", "Promotion Chance", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each of the setting values ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6") and the "Definite consecutive win challenge". The "Definite consecutive win challenge" indicates that the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 435 and step S4029 in FIG. 437) is set to on. The probability of each result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the confirmed consecutive winning challenge flag is not set to on, "non-winning" will be determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive winning challenge with a probability of 178/256, regardless of the setting value. , a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 77/256, and a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 1/256. In addition, if the confirmed consecutive winning challenge flag is set to on, a "promotion chance" will be determined with a probability of 224/256, regardless of the setting value, as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive winning challenge, "Pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 31/256, and "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined with a probability of 1/256. That is, when the confirmed consecutive winning challenge flag is set on, it is confirmed that the game will move to pseudo BIG or promotion chance.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the player has won a promotion chance. In addition, when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to on. do. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. In addition, when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (the pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to on. do. As mentioned above, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set on, when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, the pseudo BIG is controlled again, and as a result, the pseudo BIG is controlled until the advantageous section ends. It will continue.

After executing the process of step S4522, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for the number of plays at the start of the consecutive challenge (step S4523). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery table (see FIG. 500) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery (number of consecutive challenge plays) to be one of "1", "2", "3", or "4".

In the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery table shown in FIG. 500, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery ("1", "2", "3", and "4") is specified for each result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522) ("No Win", "Promotion Chance", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the result of the pseudo-bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge is "non-winning", the result of the number of games lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (number of games played in the consecutive game challenge) is set as "Non-winning" with a probability of 256/256. 3" is determined. In addition, if the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge is "promotion chance", "pseudo BIG", or "pseudo BIG (ED)", the result of the number of games lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (consecutive game number lottery) ``3'' is determined with a probability of 192/256, and ``4'' is determined with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the process of step S4523, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive challenge play count determined in step S4523 to a consecutive challenge play count counter (step S4524). The value of the consecutive challenge play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can be played in the consecutive challenge, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As described below, the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is decremented by one each time a unit play is played.

If it is determined in step S4521 that it is not the time to start the consecutive game challenge, or after executing the process of step S4524, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process during the consecutive game challenge (step S4525). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table (see Figure 501) during the consecutive game challenge, and performs a lottery based on the issued ball flag in the paid ball flag group 2 (see Figure 434) and the random number value. As a result of the lottery during the challenge, one of "non-winning", "promotion chance", "pseudo BIG", and "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined.

In the lottery table during consecutive wins challenge shown in FIG. 501, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge ("No win", "Promotion chance", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 ("Other", "Weak rare role", "Diagonal watermelon", "Reach mark", and "Reach mark BB"). The probability of each result of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 2 is "Other", the result of the lottery during the consecutive challenge is determined to be "Non-winning" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 2 is "Weak rare role", the result of the lottery during the consecutive challenge is determined to be "Promotion chance" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 2 is "Diagonal watermelon" or "Reach eye", the result of the lottery during the consecutive challenge is determined to be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the ball output flag in the ball output flag group 2 is "Reach eye BB", the result of the lottery during the consecutive challenge is determined to be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive games challenge (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Also, when a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive games challenge (when the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Also, when a "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive games challenge (when the pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As mentioned above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the game will be controlled to pseudo BIG again when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, and the pseudo BIG will continue until the favorable period ends.

When the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON and the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery is determined to be "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" (pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance lottery flag (sets it to OFF). In addition, if the result determined in the current consecutive-game challenge lottery is less favorable than the results determined in the consecutive-game challenge lottery or the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522) that have been performed up to that point, the main CPU 101 discards the result determined in the current consecutive-game challenge lottery.

After executing the processing of step S4525, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter (see step S4524) is 1 (step S4526). A value of the consecutive challenge play count counter of 1 means that the unit play is the final game of the consecutive challenge. If it is determined that the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is 1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag or the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4527). If the main CPU 101 determines that the promotion chance winning flag or the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the promotion chance winning flag nor the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes the normal shift lottery process at the end of the consecutive winning challenge (step S4528). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for normal transition at the end of the consecutive game challenge (see FIG. 502) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the lottery for normal transition at the end of the consecutive game challenge, " Decide either "unfavorable section" or "preparation for multiple shots."

In the lottery table for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive chant challenge shown in FIG. 502, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive chant challenge (non-favorable zone and consecutive chant preparation) are specified for each of "Other" and "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive chant challenge". "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive chant challenge" indicates that the ball output state of the current transition source to the consecutive chant challenge is a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). "Other" indicates that the ball output state of the current transition source to the consecutive chant challenge is a ball output state other than pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). The probability of each result of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive chant challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that may be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the current ball output state from which the player transitions to the consecutive challenge is a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG), the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive challenge will determine a "non-favorable zone" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the current ball output state from which the player transitions to the consecutive challenge is a ball output state other than a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG), the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive challenge will determine a "consecutive challenge preparation" with a probability of 256/256.

In other words, when a transition is made from a pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4447 in FIG. 490, step S4466 in FIG. 492, and step S4507 in FIG. 497), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be a "non-advantageous zone." Also, when a transition is made from a non-advantageous zone or consecutive-game preparation to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4003 in FIG. 435 and step S4027 in FIG. 437), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be a "consecutive-game preparation."

When the "non-advantageous section" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section transition reservation flag to ON. The non-advantageous section transition reservation flag is a flag indicating that a reservation has been made to start the non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if "preparation for consecutive games" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive games challenge, the main CPU 101 sets a reservation flag for transitioning to consecutive games preparation. The reservation flag for transition to preparation for consecutive games is a flag indicating that it has been reserved to start preparing for consecutive games.

After executing the processing of step S4528, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Counter management processing for consecutive shots challenge>
FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the consecutive game challenge counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The consecutive game challenge counter management process shown in FIG. 503 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in the process of step S15 (game This is the process performed in the termination state control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball release state by referring to the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the consecutive game challenge counter management process, first, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the consecutive game challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 498) (step S4541). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive game challenge play count counter is 0 (step S4542). If it determines that the value of the consecutive game challenge play count counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4543). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 498).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag on (step S4544). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 uses the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag is set to ON. Update. This causes the transition to pseudo BIG (see transition condition (P) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion chance winning flag is set on (step S4545). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 498).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag on (step S4546). As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start a promotion chance. The main CPU 101 stores the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the promotion chance transfer flag is set to ON. Update. This shifts to a promotion chance (see transition condition (O) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) is set on or not (step S4547). If it is determined that the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win preparation transition flag on (step S4548). As described above, the consecutive win preparation transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start consecutive win preparation. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the consecutive win preparation transition flag was set on. This causes a transition to consecutive win preparation (see transition condition (R) in FIG. 431 and FIG. 432).

If the determination result in step S4547 is "NO", this means that the non-advantageous section transfer reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) is set on. If it is determined in step S4547 that the reservation flag for transition to multi-player preparation is not set on, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section transition flag on (step S4549). As described above, the non-advantageous section transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the non-advantageous section. The main CPU 101 executes the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the non-advantageous section transition flag is set to ON, and the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). Update. As a result, the vehicle shifts to the non-advantageous section (see transition condition (Q) in FIGS. 431 and 432).

After executing the processing of step S4544, step S4546, step S4548, or step S4549, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As explained above, while there is a possibility of transitioning to the consecutive win challenge when the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends, the ball output state is such that there is a relatively high probability of winning the pseudo BIG or promotion chance. As a result, when transitioning from the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG to the consecutive win challenge, the player will play with the aim of transitioning again to the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG (going for a consecutive win).

In the above, it has been explained that in the final game of the consecutive games challenge, a lottery during the consecutive games challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 498) is conducted, and then a lottery for transition to the normal game at the end of the consecutive games challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) is conducted. However, as will be explained below, in the final game of the consecutive games challenge, a lottery during the consecutive games challenge may be conducted after a lottery for transition to the normal game at the end of the consecutive games challenge is conducted. In this case, after the consecutive games preparation transition reservation flag or the non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag are set to on by the lottery during the consecutive games challenge, there is a possibility that the pseudo-BIG lottery flag or the promotion chance lottery flag will be set to on by the lottery during the consecutive games challenge. In this case, the game will move to a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance (see steps S4544 and S4546 in FIG. 503), and when the processing of step S4544 or step S4546 is executed, the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag or non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag may be set to off (discarded).

[Modification of the thirteenth embodiment (penalty)]
The gameplay of the slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has been described above. The gameplay can be created by performing the processes described with reference to Figs. 435 to 503, but the processes for realizing the gameplay are not limited to the above examples. In the modified example described below, a penalty is incurred when a player plays a game using a specific game method.

Regarding penalties, the first embodiment described a case where a specific role is provided in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which the buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, eight medals are paid out if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), and one medal or no medal is paid out if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect)).

Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to change the advantageous degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game to an advantageous one. (which may also include a decision as to whether or not to move directly to the AT state, or whether to directly extend the playing period in the AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"), while the 8 pieces It has been explained that if there is no payout, it is possible to make the advantageous decision in the current game. In this specification, this restriction on making an advantageous decision is referred to as a "penalty."

As an example of such a penalty, as a modified example of the first gaming machine (see FIGS. 410 to 422), when a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell) is determined as a winning combination, a specific aspect (for example, A specification is adopted in which AT-related processing is advantageous when a stop operation is performed in the first left stop), and disadvantageous when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode. I explained the case. The matters described as a modification of the first gaming machine can also be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as long as the basic playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not impaired.

Here, the push order bell in this embodiment is similar to the push order bell in the modified example of the first gaming machine, depending on the order of stop operations (press order) for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. The combinations (combinations of symbols) that are stopped and displayed along the lines are different, and as a result, the number of medals that are paid out also differs. Further, the push order bell constitutes the biased bell described above.

As a result, in the same manner as the modified example of the first gaming machine, in a unit game in which the push order bell (biased bell) is determined as the internal winning role, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first left stop) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. In addition, regardless of whether the push order bell (biased bell) is determined as the internal winning role, in one unit game, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first left stop) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode. In addition, in the non-AT state as a whole, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first left stop) in all unit games in the non-AT state is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode in all unit games in the non-AT state.

The following describes a case where, like the modified example of the first gaming machine, a specification is adopted in which the AT-related processing is favored when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), and the AT-related processing is disadvantaged when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode.

In addition, "AT-related processing" includes processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (holding an AT transition lottery), processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (holding a CZ transition lottery), processing for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (holding a CZ period lottery), processing for deciding to transition to a relatively advantageous AT state among multiple types of AT states (advantage of the AT state) (holding an AT advantage lottery), and processing for determining the mode referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery. This concept includes processing for setting the mode (reference mode) (holding a reference mode lottery), processing for shortening the period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue, processing for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the relatively advantageous state (reference mode) ends (holding a lottery for transition destination after a fall), processing related to the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state, processing related to the conditions for conducting an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery, and processing for performing an effect that notifies transition to the AT state (AT confirmation effect).

AT states can include pseudo-BIG (relatively advantageous AT state) and pseudo-REG (relatively disadvantageous AT state). The CZ state is a state in which the transition to the AT state is easier than in the normal state (advantageous section). The normal stage (advantageous section) may include the normal stage, and the CZ state may include chance stage A, chance stage B, and consecutive game challenge. A promotion chance is a state in which transition to the AT state is confirmed, and such a state may also be included in the CZ state.

Examples of the "AT transition lottery" include a freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4081 in FIG. 445), a long freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4102 in FIG. 450), a lottery type lottery when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in FIG. 454), a pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), a pseudo bonus lottery at the start of a consecutive challenge (see step S4522 in FIG. 498), a lottery during a consecutive challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 498), etc. In this example, a fundamentally different AT transition lottery is performed during the normal stage (advantageous zone) and the CZ state, but the same AT transition lottery may be performed.

Examples of the "CZ transition lottery" include the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in FIG. 437), the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), and the lottery when a point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 456). Some lottery results for the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery and the lottery when a point is reached determine a transition to the AT state, and so they also serve as AT transition lotteries.

Examples of the above-mentioned "CZ period lottery" include a chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 468), an additional lottery for the number of games during the chance stage (see step S4308 in FIG. 468), and a consecutive game challenge start. For example, the game number lottery (see step S4523 in FIG. 498) may be used. The CZ period lottery includes a lottery for determining the initial value of the CZ period and a lottery for extending the CZ period.

Examples of the "AT advantage lottery" include a lottery at the time of transition to a promotion chance (see step S4284 in FIG. 466), a long freeze lottery at the time of entry (see step S4363 in FIG. 475), a lottery during a promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), and a pseudo BIG promotion lottery when a specified number of plays is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475). The AT advantage lottery can be performed when it is confirmed that a transition to the AT state will occur.

Examples of the above-mentioned "reference mode lottery" include consecutive game preparation mode lottery (see steps S4024 and S4026 in FIG. 437), confirmed lottery when transitioning to consecutive game challenge (see step S4029 in FIG. 437), and mode lottery when transitioning to normal (see step S4029 in FIG. 437). (See step S4061 in FIG. 442), point mode lottery (see step S4063 in FIG. 442, step S4166 in FIG. 456, and step S4283 in FIG. 466), normal prescribed number of games high certainty 1 transition lottery (see step S4123 in FIG. 451) ), high certainty 2 transition lottery (see step S4262, step S4265, and step S4268 in FIG. 464), promotion chance mode lottery (see step S4364 in FIG. 475), and the like. The reference mode lottery includes a lottery for determining the initial value of the reference mode and a lottery for shifting the reference mode.

Examples of the "processing for shortening the period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be continued" include processing for deciding to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to an unfavorable state (reference mode) (conducting a fall lottery), and processing for reducing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be continued. Examples of fall lotteries include a consecutive game preparation fall lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 437) and a high probability 2 fall lottery (see step S4272 in FIG. 464). Examples of the process for decreasing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be continued include a process for subtracting the value of the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 437), the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see steps S4263, S4266, and S4269 in FIG. 464), the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 468), the value of the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 475), and the value of the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 498). Examples of the above-mentioned post-fall transition lottery include a normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 498).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the period until transition to AT state or CZ state" includes processing for determining the period until transition to AT state or CZ state (performing a precursor period lottery) and Processing for reducing the remaining period until transition to the state can be mentioned. The above-mentioned precursor period lottery includes, for example, a lottery for the number of precursor games when pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (see steps S4202, step S4205, and step S4207 in FIG. 460), and a lottery for the number of precursor games when the chance stage is won during the normal stage. Examples include a lottery (steps S4222 and S4224 in FIG. 461), a lottery for the number of portentous games when a flag is won during a chance stage (see step S4324 in FIG. 472), and the like. As a process for decreasing the remaining period until transition to the AT state or the CZ state, for example, the precursor game number counter (steps S4203, step S4206, and step S4208 in FIG. 460, step S4223 and step S4225 in FIG. 461) , and step S4325 in FIG. 472).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the condition for performing the AT transition lottery or the CZ transition lottery" may include a process for performing the predetermined lottery when the condition is that a predetermined lottery is won, and may include a process for setting the predetermined value (performing a condition setting lottery) and a process for updating the predetermined variable when the condition is that a predetermined variable reaches a predetermined value. The predetermined lottery may include, for example, a ceiling preparation flag set lottery (see step S4142 in FIG. 454). The above-mentioned condition setting lottery may include, for example, a normal transition ceiling lottery (see step S4062 in FIG. 442). The process for updating the predetermined variable may include, for example, a process for adding the value of the normal prescribed number of plays counter (see step S4121 in FIG. 451), a process for adding the value of the normal points (see step S4163 in FIG. 456), and the like.

The AT confirmation effect is an effect that is performed only when it is determined that the game will be transferred to the AT state, and may be an effect that notifies the player of the fact that the game will be transferred to the AT state, or an effect that notifies the player of the type of AT state to which the game will be transferred (the result of the AT advantage lottery) when multiple types of AT states are provided. The above-mentioned lock effect can be used as the AT confirmation effect, and the lock effect may be a lock effect accompanied by a pseudo game, a lock effect accompanied by a reel effect, or a lock effect (freeze) without a reel effect and a pseudo game. Examples of the process for performing a pseudo game as the AT confirmation effect include the next pseudo game lottery process (see step S4367 in FIG. 475), the current pseudo game lottery process (see step S4370 in FIG. 475), etc. Examples of processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect include freeze lottery processing during the normal stage (see step S4081 in FIG. 445), long freeze lottery processing during normal stages (see step S4102 in FIG. 450), and long freeze lottery processing upon entry (see step S4363 in FIG. 475).

In addition, although the process performed in a state other than AT state was shown above as an example of AT related process, the process performed in AT state is also included in AT related process. Furthermore, not only the processing performed in the advantageous section but also the processing performed in the non-advantageous section can be said to be AT-related processing as long as it corresponds to the aspect explained above.

The AT-related processes performed in the AT state include, for example, the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery process (see step S4408 in FIG. 486), the 1G consecutive lottery process (see step S4384 in FIG. 485 and step S4484 in FIG. 494), Examples include a consecutive game challenge lottery process at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (see step S4464 in FIG. 492), a lottery process when the number of successful replies is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 490), and the like. Examples of AT-related processing performed in a non-advantageous section include advantageous section transition lottery processing (for example, see step S4001 in FIG. 435), advantageous section transition lottery processing (see step S4003 in FIG. 435), and the like. .

<Counter list>
FIG. 504 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit.

In FIG. 504, the name, clearing timing, addition/subtraction timing, numerical range, and presence or absence of transmission to the sub-control circuit 200 of each counter managed in the main control circuit 100 are shown in association with each other. In the figure, "LEV" indicates when the start lever 7 is operated (when the state control process at the start of the game (see step S6 in FIG. 23) is performed), and "3OFF" indicates that all reels 3L, 3C , 3R stops rotating (when the state control process at the end of the game (see step S15 in FIG. 23) is performed), and "special prize in operation" indicates the bonus state (3BB gaming state shown in FIG. 423). pointing. Note that in this example, AT-related processing is not performed in the bonus state, but AT-related processing may also be performed in the bonus state.

The consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in consecutive win preparation (see steps S4023 and S4025 in FIG. 437). The value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit game during consecutive win preparation except when the special prize is in operation, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than consecutive win preparation. In addition, a consecutive win preparation fall-out lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 437) will be held from the unit game following the unit game in which the value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter has reached 0.

The advantageous zone game number counter for ball payout is a counter that manages the number of unit games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 495). The value of the advantageous section game number counter for ball payout is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of the game) for every unit game in the advantageous section except during special prize operation, and is cleared when moving to the non-advantageous section.

The normal regulation game number counter is a counter that manages the number of unit games played in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4121 in FIG. 451). The value of the normal number of games counter is incremented by 1 to the "LEV" (at the start of the game) for each unit game in the normal ball output state, except when the special prize is in operation, and when the game shifts to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state. cleared.

The precursor game number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games controlled by the precursor state (steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 460, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 461, and FIG. (See step S4325 of 472). The value of the precursor game number counter is subtracted by 1 from "3OFF" (at the end of the game) in every unit game in the precursor state except during special prize operation, and is cleared when the ball output state changes.

The normal point counter is a counter that manages the points acquired in the point acquisition lottery (see step S4163 in FIG. 456). The point acquisition lottery is conducted for each unit game in the normal stage except when the special prize is in operation. The value of the normal point counter is used in the point arrival lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 456), and is decremented by 100 when the point arrival lottery is conducted ("LEV" (at the start of gameplay)). In addition, the value of the normal point counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The point reach count counter is a counter that manages the number of times the normal point value reaches 100 in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4165 in FIG. 456). In the normal stage except when the special prize is in operation, if the probability mode is not set to high probability 3, the game is not in a premonition state, and the normal point value is 100 or more before the point acquisition lottery (see step S4163 in FIG. 456) is performed, the value of the point reach count counter is incremented by 1 after the point acquisition lottery is performed ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the point reach count counter is cleared when the game transitions to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state.

The Cherry Counter is a counter that manages the number of times that "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role in the normal stage (see step S4162 in FIG. 456). The value of the Cherry Counter is incremented by 1 when "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role in the normal stage (except when the special prize is in operation) ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the Cherry Counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The chance stage A winning number counter is a counter that manages the number of times that chance stage A has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456). The value of the chance stage A winning number counter is the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 445) to the point reaching lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 456), which is performed during the normal stage except when the special prize is in operation. If you win chance stage A (“LEV” (at the start of the game)), 1 is added. In addition, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is decremented by 1 when moving to chance stage A, and the value shifts to a ball playing state other than the normal ball playing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B). Sometimes cleared.

The number of times chance stage A is won at point arrival counter is a counter that manages the number of times chance stage A is won in the point arrival lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 456). The value of the number of times you win chance stage A when you reach a point is incremented by 1 when you win chance stage A (“LEV” (at the start of the game)) in the lottery when you reach a point, which is held during the normal stage except when the special prize is active. Ru. In addition, the value of the chance stage A winning number counter when the point is reached is decremented by 1 when moving to chance stage A, and the ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) Cleared when transitioning to .

The chance stage B winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a winning lottery has been drawn in chance stage B (see step S4082 in FIG. 445 and step S4167 in FIG. 456). The value of the chance stage B winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a winning lottery is drawn in chance stage B ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 445) or the point arrival lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 456) that is performed during the normal stage except when the special prize is in operation. The value of the chance stage B winning count counter is decremented by 1 when a winning lottery is entered in chance stage B, and is cleared when a winning lottery is entered in a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached is a counter that manages the number of times a lottery has been won in chance stage B in the lottery when the point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 456). The value of the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached is incremented by 1 when a lottery has been won in chance stage B in the lottery when the point is reached, which is held during the normal stage excluding when the special prize is in operation ("LEV" (at the start of play)). The value of the chance stage B winning count counter when the point is reached is decremented by 1 when transitioning to chance stage B, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The chance stage guaranteed game number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in chance stage A or chance stage B (see step S4304 in FIG. 468). The value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of the game) for each unit game in chance stage A to chance stage B except when the special prize is in operation, It is cleared when transitioning to a ball release state other than stage A and chance stage B). Further, in the next unit game after the unit game in which the value of the chance stage guarantee game number counter becomes 0, the game shifts to the normal stage.

The high-certainty 1 game number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games that can stay in the high-certainty 1, and is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games that can stay in the high-certainty 1. Normally, the number of games that are specified as high-certainty 1 is won in the high-certainty 1 transfer lottery (see step S4123 in FIG. 451). When this happens, "50" is set. The value of the high probability 1 game number counter is the value of each unit game in the state where high probability 1 is set in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) except when the special prize is activated. "3OFF" (at the end of the game) is subtracted by 1, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball release state other than the normal ball release state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit games that are guaranteed to stay in High Probability 2 (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in FIG. 464). The value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit game in which High Probability 2 is set during the normal stage except when the special prize is in operation, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than the normal stage. In addition, a High Probability 2 drop lottery (see step S4272 in FIG. 464) will be held from the unit game following the unit game in which the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter has reached 0.

The first Bernavi count counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the first pseudo-BIG (see step S4404 in FIG. 486). The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of the game) in a unit game in which a Bernavi was executed in the first pseudo-BIG, and is cleared when the pseudo-BIG ends.

The normal lip remaining winning counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times that the first pseudo BIG can be switched to the second pseudo BIG (see step S4405 in FIG. 486). In the above explanation, the value of the normal lip remaining winning counter is decremented by 1 when the first pseudo BIG is switched to the second pseudo BIG (when the normal lip wins in the first pseudo BIG) (see step S4425 in FIG. 489). Here, however, it is decremented by 1 when the second pseudo BIG ends after the first pseudo BIG is switched to the second pseudo BIG ("3OFF" (at the end of the game)), that is, when the result of the determination in step S4434 in FIG. 489 becomes "YES". In addition, the value of the normal lip remaining winning counter is cleared when the pseudo BIG ends.

The second Bernavi count counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the second pseudo BIG or pseudo REG, and is set to "9" when the second pseudo BIG starts, and to "5" when the pseudo REG starts (see step S4427 in FIG. 489 and step S4482 in FIG. 494). The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of the game) during a unit game in which a Bernavi was executed in the second pseudo BIG or pseudo REG, and is cleared when the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends.

The pseudo BIG stock counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times that control to the pseudo BIG is possible when the termination conditions of the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG are met (see steps S4441 and S4444 in FIG. 490, and step S4461 in FIG. 492). In the above explanation, whether or not to control to the pseudo BIG when the termination conditions of the pseudo REG are met is managed by the pseudo BIG winning flag (see step S4504 in FIG. 497), but here, in the pseudo REG, as in the pseudo BIG, it is managed by the pseudo BIG stock counter. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is incremented by 1 when a pseudo BIG is won ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 485 and step S4484 in FIG. 494), and is decremented by 1 when the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends and transitions to a new pseudo BIG. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is also cleared when transitioning to a pseudo BIG (ED) (ending BB).

In the above explanation, the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4406 in FIG. 486) is used to control that the pseudo BIG continues until the advantageous section ends. It is assumed that BIG (ED) is managed in the ball release state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) as a ball release state different from pseudo BIG. As a result, when a pseudo BIG (ED) is won in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 485 and step S4484 in FIG. 494), the state shifts to pseudo BIG (ED) as the ball release state. . Pseudo BIG (ED) may be a state in which the pseudo BIG continues until the end of the advantageous section, or it is normal, except that 2 is added to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter at the start of the pseudo BIG. It may be in the same ball state as the pseudo BIG.

The first pseudo BIG successful replay counter is a counter that manages the number of times a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") is determined as the internal winning role during the first pseudo BIG (see step S4423 in FIG. 489). The value of the first pseudo BIG successful replay counter is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of the game) during a unit game in which a replay is determined as the internal winning role in the first pseudo BIG. The value of the first pseudo BIG successful replay counter is cleared when the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends, or when transitioning to pseudo BIG (ED).

The normal mode counter is a counter that manages the normal mode, and is set to a value determined in the normal transition mode lottery (see step S4061 in FIG. 442) when a transition is made from a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) to the normal ball dispensing state ("LEV" (at the start of play)). The value of the normal mode counter is cleared when a transition is made to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state and promotion chance.

The point mode counter is a counter that manages the point mode, and the point mode lottery ("LEV" (at the start of the game)) performed during the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) ("LEV" (at the start of the game)) The value determined in step S4063 in FIG. 442, step S4166 in FIG. 456, and step S4283 in FIG. 466 is set. The value of the point mode counter is cleared when transitioning to a normal ball issuing state and a ball issuing state other than promotion chance.

The consecutive game challenge winning number counter is a counter that manages the number of times the consecutive game challenge is won in the non-advantageous section or in the consecutive game preparation. The value of the consecutive game challenge winning count counter is set to ``LEV'' ( At the start of the game)) is added by 1. In addition, the value of the consecutive game challenge winning count counter changes when transitioning to the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), and when the pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG, pseudo BIG (ED), , pseudo-REG) is cleared when it ends.

<AT related processing when lever is on>
FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the lever is on.

The lever-on AT related process shown in FIG. 505 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lever-on AT-related processing, the main CPU 101 first executes processing that is not affected by penalties (step S4601). In this process, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processes described above, and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processes.

The processing performed in step S4601 includes processing that is disadvantageous to the player, processing for performing an AT confirmed effect, and when a one-ball state starts (the current unit game is the first game in the ball state). (case), processing performed when one ball-out state ends (when the current unit game is the final game in the ball-out state), and the like. Further, AT-related processing performed in the AT state or non-advantageous section is also included in the processing performed in step S4601.

Examples of the above-mentioned "processing disadvantageous to the player" include consecutive game preparation fall lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 437), high probability 2 fall lottery processing (see step S4272 in FIG. 464), and the like. The consecutive winning preparation fall lottery process and the high-accuracy 2 fall lottery process are the above-mentioned "determining to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to a disadvantageous state (reference mode) (performing a fall lottery)" ``Processing for purposes''.

The above-mentioned "processing for performing the AT confirmation effect" can be, for example, the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 450) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 475). The normal long freeze lottery processing and the entry long freeze lottery processing are the above-mentioned "processing for performing a freeze as the AT confirmation effect". As described above, when the normal long freeze lottery processing or the entry long freeze lottery is won in one unit game, the execution of the long freeze is controlled by the main side effect control processing at the start of the game in that unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). As a result, the long freeze occurs before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts (before the first stop operation is performed).

Examples of the "processing performed when a ball-dispensing state starts (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-dispensing state)" include lottery processing for consecutive win preparation mode (see step S4024 and step S4026 in FIG. 437), lottery processing for normal transition mode (see step S4061 in FIG. 442), ceiling lottery processing for normal transition (see step S4062 in FIG. 442), lottery processing for point mode (see step S4063 in FIG. 442), lottery processing for the guaranteed number of chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 468), lottery processing for promotion chance mode (see step S4364 in FIG. 475), lottery processing for pseudo bonus at the start of consecutive win challenge (see step S4522 in FIG. 498), lottery processing for the number of plays at the start of consecutive win challenge (see step S4523 in FIG. 498), etc.

Among these processes, the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process, normal transition mode lottery process, point mode lottery process, and promotion chance mode lottery process are the above-mentioned "AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage rate" This is a process for setting a mode (reference mode) to be referred to in a lottery (performing a reference mode lottery). Note that the point mode lottery process is performed when the normal stage starts (see step S4063 in FIG. 442), when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 456), and when the normal stage is promoted from the normal ball output state. Of these point mode lottery processes, only the point mode lottery process that is performed when the normal stage starts is the process target of step S4601, which is performed when the transition to chance (see step S4283 in FIG. 466) occurs. shall be.

In addition, the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery process at the start of the chance stage and the number of games lottery process at the start of the consecutive game challenge are performed by setting a period (CZ period) during which the CZ state can continue (performing the CZ period lottery). ). Further, the normal transition ceiling lottery process is the above-mentioned "process regarding the conditions for performing the AT transition lottery or the CZ transition lottery". Further, the pseudo bonus lottery process at the start of the consecutive game challenge is the above-mentioned "process for directly determining the transition to the AT state (performing the AT transition lottery)".

The above-mentioned "processing to be performed when the one ball state ends (when the current unit game is the final game of the ball state)" includes, for example, the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive game challenge (as shown in Fig. 498). (see step S4528). The normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive challenge is the process described above for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the end of the relatively advantageous state (reference mode) (performing the transition destination lottery after falling). be.

After executing the process of step S4601, the main CPU 101 executes a backup process (step S4602). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores AT-related parameters as backup data in a specified area of the main RAM 103. The AT-related parameters are various pieces of information (counters, flags, etc.) that can be updated as a result of AT-related processing. For example, the AT-related parameters include the counters and various winning flags shown in FIG. 504. The winning flag is a flag indicating that an AT transition lottery or a CZ transition lottery has been won (for example, a pseudo BIG winning flag, a promotion chance winning flag, a consecutive challenge winning flag, etc.).

By performing the processing of step S4602, many AT-related parameters are stored as backup data, but some AT-related parameters are not stored as backup data (are not subject to backup). Information that may be updated by performing "processing not affected by penalties" (see step S4601 and step S4626 in FIG. 506) can basically be excluded from backup.

For example, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup may be updated by performing the above-mentioned "processing to reduce the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue". information, information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state, and the process that is performed when the above-mentioned "one ball state" starts (when the current unit game is the first game in the ball state) Information that can be updated by performing "."

The above-mentioned "information that can be updated by performing a process to reduce the remaining period in which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue" includes, for example, the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter (see FIG. 437). (See Step S4023), High Accuracy 2 Guaranteed Game Number Counter (See Steps S4263, Step S4266, and Step S4269 in Figure 464), Chance Stage Guaranteed Game Number Counter (See Step S4304 in Figure 468), Promotion Chance Game Number Counter (See Step S4304 in Figure 468), (See step S4362 in FIG. 475), consecutive game challenge game number counter (see Step S4524 in FIG. 498), and high certainty one game number counter (see Step S4123 in FIG. 451).

The above-mentioned "information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state" includes, for example, the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 486), the normal remaining reel winning count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 486), the second Bernavi count counter (see step S4427 in FIG. 489 and step S4482 in FIG. 494), the first pseudo BIG win counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 489), the pseudo bonus win counter (see step S4424 in FIG. 489), the first pseudo BIG win counter (see step S4425 in FIG. 489), the pseudo bonus win counter (see step S4426 in FIG. 489), the first pseudo BIG win counter (see step S4427 in FIG. 489), the pseudo bonus win counter (see step S4428 in FIG. 489), the pseudo bonus win counter (see step S4429 ... Examples of such flags include the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the bonus (see step S4408 in FIG. 486 and step S4483 in FIG. 494), the pseudo BIG stock counter (see step S4441 and step S4444 in FIG. 490, and step S4461 in FIG. 492), and a flag that is set when a pseudo BIG (ED) is won in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 485 and step S4484 in FIG. 494). Note that here, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set to ON in the AT state is referred to as the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the pseudo bonus, in order to distinguish it from the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set to ON in a state other than the AT state. If the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag may be set in the AT state, the flag (confirmed consecutive win challenge flag after the end of the pseudo bonus) may also be included in the "information that may be updated by the AT-related processing performed in the AT state".

The above-mentioned "information that can be updated by the process performed when the one ball state starts (when the current unit game is the first game of the ball state)" includes, for example, Examples include a preparation mode counter, a normal mode counter, and a promotion chance mode counter. The consecutive game preparation mode counter, the normal mode counter, and the promotion chance mode counter are counters that manage the consecutive game preparation mode, normal mode, and promotion chance mode, respectively. The consecutive game preparation mode counter, the normal mode counter, and the promotion chance mode counter are information that can be updated by performing the consecutive game preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process, respectively. It is. The consecutive game preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process are performed when the above-mentioned ``1 ball roll state starts (the current unit game is the first game of the ball roll state). (if any). Note that the point mode lottery process is also included in the "processing performed when the one ball state starts (when the current unit game is the first game in the ball state)", but the process is In addition to when the normal stage starts (see step S4063 in FIG. 442), when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 466 (see step S4283), the point mode counter (counter that manages the point mode) is targeted for backup here.

AT-related parameters other than the AT-related parameters that are excluded from backup as described above can be backed up. Here, information that can be updated by performing the processing in step S4603 to step S4621 in FIG. 506 is targeted for backup.

For example, the AT-related parameters that are subject to backup include the above-mentioned "processing to directly determine transition to AT state (perform AT transition lottery)" to "transition to CZ state (CZ)". Examples include information that can be updated by performing "processing for determining CZ transition lottery" and information indicating various states (reference modes).

The above-mentioned ``Processing for directly determining transition to AT state (performing AT transition lottery)'' to ``Processing for determining transition to CZ state (CZ) (performing CZ transition lottery)'' Examples of "information that can be updated depending on the event" include a chance stage A winning number counter, a chance stage A winning number counter when a point is reached, a chance stage B winning number counter, a chance stage B winning number counter when a point is reached, and a promotion chance. Examples include a winning flag, a promotion chance winning flag when points are reached, a pseudo BIG winning flag, and a pseudo BIG winning flag when points are reached.

The above-mentioned "information indicating various states (reference modes)" may, for example, be information indicating the ball output state (non-advantageous zone, normal stage, chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, pseudo BIG, and pseudo REG) shown in FIG. 430, information indicating the probability mode (non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3), and information that plays an auxiliary role to the ball output state. Examples of information indicating the ball output state may include information indicating the current ball output state (current ball output state) and information indicating the next ball output state (next ball output state). The current ball output state is managed in the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20), and the next ball output state is similarly managed in the next ball output state flag storage area (not shown).

The next ball output state includes "none", "next non-advantageous zone", "next normal stage", "next chance stage A", "next chance stage B", "next consecutive preparation", "next consecutive challenge", "next promotion chance", "next pseudo BIG", and "next pseudo REG". When controlled to a premonition state, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to one of the next ball output states in the next ball output state flag storage area. For example, when the current ball output state is "normal stage" and the next ball output state is "next chance stage A", it indicates that the ball output state is controlled to a premonition state due to winning the chance stage A in the normal stage. When the value of the premonition play counter becomes 0, if the next ball output state is other than "none", the ball output state corresponding to the next ball output state is shifted to. On the other hand, when the value of the premonition play counter becomes 0, if the next ball output state is "none", the current ball output state is continued.

Information that plays an auxiliary role for the ball release state includes information (ceiling reached state flag) indicating that the ceiling is being prepared (see step S4125 in FIG. 451), and information that indicates that the ceiling is being prepared (see step S4125 in FIG. 451); (see step S4127)), the confirmed consecutive winning challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 435 and step S4029 in FIG. 437), the 3BB flag state at the start of consecutive winning preparation (see FIG. 437 (see step S4022). In addition, pseudo BIG and pseudo REG can be managed using appropriate flags (pseudo BIG operating state flag, pseudo REG operating state flag, second pseudo BIG start state flag, second pseudo BIG operating state flag, etc.). , these flags can also be said to be information that plays an auxiliary role in determining the ball output state.

In addition, information indicating the previous ball output state (previous ball output state) is also managed as information indicating the ball output state, but this information is not subject to backup. The previous ball output state is the ball output state in which the ball was output during the previous unit game, and by comparing the previous ball output state with the current ball output state, it is possible to check whether the ball output state has changed.

Furthermore, among the counters shown in FIG. 504, counters other than the counters mentioned above that are not subject to backup (counters for number of plays in advantageous zone for ball output, normal regulation number of plays counter, premonition number of plays counter, normal point counter, number of times point has been reached counter, cherry counter, point mode counter, consecutive challenge winning number counter, etc.) are subject to backup. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 504, the ceiling preparation number of plays counter (see step S4142 in FIG. 454) is also subject to backup.

After executing the process in step S4602, the main CPU 101 executes various AT-related processes when the lever is on (step S4603). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs AT-related processes in step S4601 when the start lever 7 is operated (when the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) is performed). Executes AT-related processing other than processing. Among the processes described using FIGS. 435 to 503 as being performed in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), all processes that are not performed in step S4601 are performed in steps S4603 and S4604. It will be done.

Specifically, the processes performed in step S4603 include a consecutive game challenge transition lottery process (see step S4027 in FIG. 437), a confirmation process lottery when transitioning to a consecutive game challenge (see step S4029 in FIG. 437), and a freeze lottery during the normal stage. Processing (see step S4081 in FIG. 445), normal stage middle transition flag/winning flag lottery process (see step S4082 in FIG. 445), normal specified number of games high probability 1 transition lottery process (see step S4123 in FIG. 451), ceiling preparation Medium flag set lottery process (see step S4142 in FIG. 454), lottery process by winning type upon reaching the ceiling (see step S4144 in FIG. 454), point mode lottery process (see step S4166 in FIG. 456), lottery process when reaching the point (see step S4166 in FIG. 456), 456, Step S4167), Pseudo BIG/promotion chance winning during normal stage, precursor game number lottery processing (see Steps S4202, Step S4205, and Step S4207 in FIG. 460), Normal stage, chance stage winning, precursor game number lottery process (see steps S4222 and S4224 in FIG. 461), lottery process for transitioning to high probability 2 (see steps S4262, S4265, and step S4268 in FIG. 464), lottery process when transitioning to promotion chance (see step S4284 in FIG. 466) , Pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery process during chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 468), lottery process for adding up the number of games during chance stage (see step S4308 in FIG. 468), lottery process for the number of portentous games when flag is won during chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 468) (see step S4324 in FIG. 472), lottery process during promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 475), next pseudo game lottery process (see step S4367 in FIG. 475), pseudo BIG promotion lottery process when the specified number of games is played (step S4366 in FIG. 475) (see S4369), current pseudo game lottery process (see step S4370 in FIG. 475), lottery process during consecutive game challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 498), and the like.

These processes are basically advantageous to the player, and correspond to the "advantage determination" described above. In this modified example, when the penalty condition described below (see step S4623 in FIG. 506) is met, such advantageous determinations are restricted from being made (the results of the advantageous determinations are cancelled).

Of the above-mentioned "processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect," the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 450) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 475) are performed in step S4601. In contrast, the normal stage freeze lottery processing (see step S4081 in FIG. 445) is performed in step S4603. As described above, the long freeze controlled as a result of the normal long freeze lottery or the entry long freeze lottery occurs before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R begins (before the first stop operation is performed). In contrast, the freeze controlled as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery occurs after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops (after the third stop operation is performed). In this respect, the freeze lottery process during the normal stage differs from the long freeze lottery process during the normal stage and the long freeze lottery process when entering the stage.

After executing the process in step S4603, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related process performed in step S4603 (step S4604). In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 selects counters that can be added or subtracted when the start lever 7 is operated (“LEV” shown in FIG. 504) among the counters to be backed up (for example, If it is time for addition or subtraction, the values of the game number counter, normal point counter, point attainment number counter, cherry counter, point mode counter, consecutive game challenge winning number counter, etc. are updated. After executing the process in step S4604, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<AT related processing when completely stopped>
Figure 506 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the engine is completely stopped.

The AT-related processing at full stop shown in FIG. 506 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (state control processing at the end of play) of FIG. 23 (main processing).

In the AT-related processing at full stop, the main CPU 101 first executes various AT-related processing at full stop (step S4621). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs one of the AT-related processes performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop rotating (when the game end state control process (see step S15 in FIG. 23) is performed). , executes AT-related processing other than the processing performed in step S4626. Among the processes described using FIGS. 435 to 503 as being performed in the game end state control process (see step S15 in FIG. 23), all processes that are not performed in step S4626 are performed in steps S4621 to S4622. It will be done.

Note that in the above, the promotion chance preprocessing (see step S4105 in FIG. 450) and the high probability 2 transition lottery process (3) (see steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 464) are the game start state control process (see step S4269 in FIG. 23). (see step S6 in FIG. 464), but here, the promotion chance preprocessing (see step S4105 in FIG. 450) and the high probability 2 transition lottery process (3) (steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 464) are explained. (see step S15 in FIG. 23) is performed in the game end state control process (see step S15 in FIG. 23). Further, in step S4621, it is determined whether the penalty condition (see step S4623) is satisfied, and if it is determined that the penalty condition is satisfied, the high certainty 2 transition lottery process (3) may not be executed. .

After executing the process of step S4621, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related process performed in step S4621 (step S4622). In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 updates the values of the counters that are the targets of backup, which may be added or subtracted when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop spinning ("3OFF" shown in FIG. 504) (for example, the advantageous zone play count counter for balls, the premonition play count counter, etc.) if it is time to add or subtract.

After executing the process of step S4622, the main CPU 101 determines whether a penalty condition is satisfied (step S4623). Here, the penalty condition is that all of the following (a) to (g) are satisfied.
(a) The game is not in a non-advantageous period (including unit games that transition to an advantageous period) (b) A stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation (c) (d) Not in a pseudo BIG (e) Not in a pseudo BIG (ED) (f) If the player is in the normal stage or preparing for consecutive wins, the internal winning role is ”, “F_reach role A”, “F_reach role B”, “F_reach role C”, “F_BB confirmed role A”, “F_BB confirmed role B”, “F_1-card role A”, and “ (g) Not in the bonus state (3BB gaming state shown in Figure 423)

As described above, in the normal stage, when any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB fixed role A", and "F_BB fixed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, if neither the promotion chance nor the pseudo BIG is won, a notification (irregular push navigation) is issued to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation. In this case, it is not appropriate to cause a penalty even if a stop operation according to the irregular push navigation is performed. Therefore, in the normal stage, when any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB fixed role A", and "F_BB fixed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the penalty condition is not established (above (f)).

Furthermore, even if a "miss" is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal stage, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, there is a possibility that the player will perceive it as a "reach" win. Since there is a possibility that a symbol combination (for example, a roll in which three "buoys" are displayed on the left reel 3L) will appear, an irregular push navigation will be performed in the same way. Furthermore, if the situations in which the irregular push navigation occurs are limited, there is a possibility that the player will be able to guess the result of the AT-related process based on the occurrence of the irregular push navigation. Therefore, in the normal stage, even when either "F_1-card hand A" or "F_1-card hand B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the irregular push navigation is similarly performed. As a result, in the normal stage, in addition to "F_Reach role A", "F_Reach role B", "F_Reach role C", "F_BB confirmed role A", and "F_BB confirmed role B", Even if any one of "Loss", "F_1-card combination A", and "F_1-card combination B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the penalty condition will not be satisfied. Regarding the consecutive winning combination preparation, similarly, if these winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, the penalty condition will not be satisfied ((f) above).

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is met, the main CPU 101 assigns backup information to various counters/flags (step S4624). In this process, the main CPU 101 overwrites the information (counters, flags, etc.) updated in steps S4604 in FIG. 505 to step S4622 in FIG. 506 with the information (counters, flags, etc.) stored as backup data in step S4602 in FIG. 505. This changes the AT-related parameters from the updated information to the information stored as the backup data. In other words, the AT-related parameters revert to the information stored at the time of the previous unit game, and the results of the AT-related processing performed in the current unit game are canceled.

Then, if it is determined that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game, the main CPU 101 discards the pseudo game information (step S4625). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores information indicating that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game (pseudo game information) by performing the processes from step S4604 in FIG. 505 to step S4622 in FIG. Then, the pseudo game information is deleted. For example, when the current ball payout state is a promotion chance and a pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) is set, the main CPU 101 transmits information indicating the pseudo game. to erase. As a result, the pseudo game that was scheduled to be played in the next unit game of the unit game in which the next pseudo game lottery was performed will be cancelled.

The pseudo game information discarded in the processing of step S4625 is updated based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505 to step S4621 in FIG. 506. As described above, the next pseudo game lottery processing (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) is performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505, whereas the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 450) is performed in step S4601 in FIG. 505. Even if the normal long freeze lottery is won, it is decided that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game, but in this case, it is not subject to processing in step S4625 and the pseudo game is not canceled.

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is not met, or after executing the processing of step S4625, the main CPU 101 executes processing that is not affected by the penalty (step S4626). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processing described above, and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processing. Examples of processing performed in step S4626 include processing that is disadvantageous to the player, AT-related processing performed in the AT state, etc.

In the process of step S4626, the main CPU 101 updates (subtracts 1) the values of, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 437), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in FIG. 464), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 468), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 475), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 498), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 in FIG. 451) as the "processing disadvantageous to the player." In addition, if the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 transitions to the normal stage (see step S4344 in FIG. 474).

The above-mentioned "AT-related processing performed in the AT state" can include, for example, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (see step S4464 in FIG. 492), the lottery processing when the number of completed reps is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 490), etc. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the information indicating the previous ball output state described above.

In addition, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing of the consecutive win preparation fall lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 437). This processing is a processing to discard the result of the consecutive win preparation fall lottery when the consecutive win preparation fall lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 505 is won, the consecutive win challenge transition lottery performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505 (see step S4027 in FIG. 437) is also won, and the consecutive win challenge transition flag is set on. As a result of this, the result of executing the supplemental exception processing is that the consecutive win challenge will be transitioned to in the next unit game. On the other hand, if the consecutive win preparation fall lottery is won and the consecutive win challenge transition lottery is also won, but the penalty condition is established, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is set to off in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplementary exception processing will not be executed, and the next unit game will transition to the normal stage.

In addition, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes a supplemental exception process of the consecutive-chance challenge end normal transition lottery process (see step S4528 in FIG. 498). This process is a process of discarding the result of the consecutive-chance challenge end normal transition lottery process (see step S4528 in FIG. 498) when a transition to a non-advantageous zone or consecutive-chance preparation is reserved as a result of the consecutive-chance challenge end normal transition lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 505, when a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is drawn in the consecutive-chance challenge lottery process performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505, and the promotion chance winning lottery flag or pseudo-BIG winning lottery flag is set to ON. As a result of this, as a result of the execution of the supplemental exception process, the next unit game will transition to the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG. On the other hand, when the consecutive-chance challenge is completed and the consecutive-chance challenge is completed by the normal transition lottery, if the consecutive-chance challenge lottery is completed and the promotion chance or pseudo BIG is selected, but the penalty condition is satisfied, the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo BIG lottery flag is set to OFF in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplemental exception process is not executed, and the consecutive-chance challenge is completed and the consecutive-chance challenge is completed in the next unit game. In addition, in FIG. 498, it has been described that the consecutive-chance challenge end normal transition lottery process is executed when the judgment result of step S4527 is "NO", but the consecutive-chance challenge end normal transition lottery process may be executed without executing the process of step S4527 (regardless of whether the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo BIG lottery flag is set to ON). In this case, the supplemental exception processing may be executed even if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive games challenge (see step S4522 in FIG. 498). Note that since the pseudo bonus lottery processing at the start of the consecutive games challenge is performed in step S4601 in FIG. 505, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive games challenge, the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag will not be set to OFF in step S4624 even if the penalty condition is met.

In addition, in the process of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplementary exception processing of the multi-player preparation fall lottery process (see step S4031 in FIG. 437). This process is performed in the case where the consecutive game preparation fall lottery performed in step S4601 of FIG. 505 is won, the consecutive game challenge transfer lottery performed in step S4603 of FIG. If the sho challenge transition flag is set on, this is a process of discarding the result of the consecutive sho preparation fall lottery.

After executing the process in step S4626, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, for example, in the normal stage, in step S4602 of FIG. 505, the current value of the chance stage A winning number counter is stored as backup data. After that, if chance stage A is won in the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 445) performed in step S4603, 1 is added to the value of the chance stage A winning counter in step S4604. . After that, if the penalty condition is satisfied in the unit game, in step S4624 of FIG. 506, the value of the chance stage A winning number counter after the addition in step S4604 is added to the chance stage A stored as backup data in step S4602. The value of the winning number counter is overwritten. As a result, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter returns to the value at the time before the transition flag/winning flag lottery during the normal stage was performed, and the results of the transition flag/winning flag lottery during the normal stage are cancelled. It turns out.

Further, for example, in chance stage A, in step S4602 of FIG. 505, information indicating the current pseudo BIG winning flag (here, "OFF") is stored as backup data. Thereafter, if a pseudo BIG is won in the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 468) performed in step S4603, a pseudo BIG winning flag is set to on in step S4604. Thereafter, if the penalty condition is satisfied in the unit game, in step S4624 of FIG. 506, the information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag ("ON") after the processing of step S4604 is stored as backup data in step S4602. The information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag (“OFF”) is overwritten. As a result, the pseudo BIG winning flag returns to the off-set state, and the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage is cancelled. Although the above describes an example in which information indicating that a pseudo-BIG has been won is managed using flags, information indicating that a pseudo-BIG has been won may also be treated as information indicating that a chance stage A has been won. Similarly, it may be managed using a counter.

Further, for example, in the preparation for multiple games, if the player wins the lottery for multiple games preparation performed in step S4601 in FIG. 505 (see step S4031 in FIG. 437), the normal stage transition flag is set to ON. Information that can be updated by performing step S4601 is not subject to backup, but in step S4602, information indicating the flag is not stored as backup data. The AT-related parameters to be processed in step S4624 in FIG. Therefore, the normal stage transition flag is not subject to processing in step S4624. Therefore, even if the penalty condition is satisfied in the unit game, the information indicating the normal stage transition flag (“ON”) after the processing in step S4601 is maintained, and the transition to the normal stage in the next unit game is maintained. Become.

In addition, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 437), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in FIG. 464), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 468), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 475), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 498), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 in FIG. 451) are not subject to backup. Therefore, in step S4602 in FIG. 505, the values of these counters are not stored as backup data. And the AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup are not subject to processing in step S4624 in FIG. 506. Therefore, regardless of whether the penalty condition is met or not, if the value is 1 or greater, the value is decremented by 1 in each unit game in step S4626.

Also, for example, the precursor game number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 460, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 461, and step S4325 in FIG. 472) is subject to backup. There is. Further, the AT-related parameters to be backed up are to be processed in step S4624 in FIG. 506. Therefore, if the control is in the precursor state, the current value of the precursor game number counter is stored as backup data in step S4602. Then, in step S4622, 1 is subtracted from the value of the precursor game number counter. After that, if the penalty condition is satisfied, in step S4624, the value of the precursor game number counter after subtraction in step S4622 is overwritten with the value of the precursor game number counter stored as backup data in step S4602. . As a result, the value of the precursor game number counter returns to the value at the time when the unit game was started, and the subtraction is canceled.

As described above, in order to realize the playability of the pachislot machine 1 according to the 13th embodiment, it is necessary to execute a large number of AT-related processes, but in the flowchart, it is possible to introduce the penalty function by a relatively simple process without creating complex branches for processes that are not affected by penalties and processes that are affected by penalties. This makes it possible to appropriately realize the penalty while saving the capacity required for the processes related to the penalty. In this case, if the AT-related process is executed after determining whether the penalty condition is satisfied, the timing of the AT-related process must be after the first stop operation, making it difficult to reflect the results of the AT-related process (AT transition lottery, etc.) in the performance. In this regard, according to the above example, it is possible to execute the AT-related process before determining whether the penalty condition is satisfied (at the time the start lever 7 is operated), so that the results of the AT-related process (AT transition lottery, etc.) can be immediately reflected in the performance. In order to perform a performance based on the results of the AT-related process, it is sufficient to include information indicating the results of the AT-related process in the start command data (see step S7 in FIG. 23).

Further, although the description has been omitted above, in the process of step S4601 in FIG. 505 or step S4626 in FIG. 506, the main CPU 101 clears each counter when it is the clear timing for each counter (see FIG. 504). In addition, in the process of step S4601 in FIG. 505, the main CPU 101 determines that if the current ball output state is a promotion chance and the value of the promotion chance game number counter is 1, the output of the transfer destination after the promotion chance ends. A ball state (pseudo REG or pseudo BIG) is temporarily set. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a pseudo REG as the ball output state of the transfer destination when the promotion chance mode is any of "Mode 1" to "Mode 3", and sets the promotion chance mode to "Mode 3". 4", pseudo BIG is set. Temporarily setting the ball output state of the transfer destination in this manner will be referred to as "forced setting."

Here, in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the number of promotion chance games counter: 0), when the pseudo BIG promotion lottery process (see step S4369 in FIG. 475) is performed when the specified number of games is played, the pseudo BIG winning flag is is set on, the main CPU 101 can shift to pseudo-BIG based on the pseudo-BIG winning flag. However, if the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on at that point, the main CPU 101 cannot shift to pseudo BIG based on the pseudo BIG winning flag (in this case, the pseudo REG winning flag is also It is also not possible to shift to a pseudo REG based on the pseudo REG winning flag (because it is not set on). In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball dispensing state and causes the ball to shift to the corresponding ball dispensing state. In such a situation, a "pseudo REG" is not provided (pseudo This may occur because the REG winning flag is not set on) and the pseudo BIG winning flag may be set off due to the penalty condition being satisfied.

For example, when the value of the promotion chance play count counter is 1, a pseudo BIG is won in the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505, and the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, but if a penalty condition is met, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to OFF in step S4624 in FIG. 506. After that, in the next unit play (promotion chance play count counter value: 0), if a pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 475), neither the pseudo BIG winning flag nor the pseudo REG winning flag is set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball output state and transitions to that ball output state.

In addition, when the value of the promotion chance game number counter is 1, the pseudo BIG is not won in the promotion chance middle lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) performed in step S4603 in FIG. 505, and the next unit game (promotion Even if the value of the chance game counter is 0), if a pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475), both the pseudo BIG winning flag and the pseudo REG winning flag are turned on. This means that it is not set to . In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball dispensing state and causes the ball to shift to the corresponding ball dispensing state.

<Example of promotion chance (when a penalty occurs)>
Figure 507 shows an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance.

As an example of the effect shown in FIG. 507, in FIG. 507(a), the unit game one before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state) : Win notification game), an image corresponding to the characters "WIN" is displayed on the main display device 210.

In FIG. 507(b), after the state shown in FIG. 507(a), in the first promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 3), the promotion chance medium lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) is An image corresponding to the words "Bonus Promotion Lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in accordance with the lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in FIG. 475) is non-winning.

Figure 507(c) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 507(b), in the first game of the promotion chance (promotion chance play count counter value: 3), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 507(d), after the state shown in FIG. 507(c), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), the promotion chance medium lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) is An image corresponding to the words "Bonus Promotion Lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in accordance with the lottery. A pseudo game in which a penalty condition is satisfied due to an irregular push being performed in the first game, and the pseudo game is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) conducted in the first game. (See step S4367 in FIG. 475) has been canceled (see step S4625 in FIG. 506).

Figure 507(e) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 507(d), in the second game of the promotion chance (promotion chance play count counter value: 2), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 507 (f) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 507 (e), in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), an image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 475). As a result of irregular pressing being performed in the second game, a penalty condition is established, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 475) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery performed in the second game (see step S4366 in Figure 475) is canceled (see step S4625 in Figure 506).

In FIG. 507(g), after the state shown in FIG. 507(f), after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating in the third promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 1), When a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the text "I am pressing irregularly" is displayed on the main display device 210. It shows. The image corresponding to the words ``Bonus promotion lottery in progress'' continues to be displayed.

Figure 507(h) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for the BAR!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when a pseudo game (see step S4370 in Figure 475) determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed starts in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) after the state shown in Figure 507(g). This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when a "bar" pattern as a pseudo REG transition pattern can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This makes it possible to encourage the player to perform a stopping operation aiming for the "bar". Due to the irregular pressing being performed in the third game, the penalty condition is met, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 475) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 475) performed in the third game is canceled (see step S4625 in FIG. 506). In contrast, the pseudo game determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 475) occurs without being affected by the penalty.

In FIG. 507(i), after the state shown in FIG. 507(h), all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are When the rotation of the main display device 210 stops, images corresponding to the words "Regular bonus!" and "Game progresses when the lever is turned on" are displayed on the main display device 210. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the game will shift to the regular bonus (pseudo REG) and to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in FIG. 507(i), when the start lever 7 is operated, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating for the actual game (main game) (random delay processing is performed and the game starts proceed). FIG. 507(j) shows how the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for informing (bell navigation) of the correct push order on the push order bell. Here, as "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" are determined as internal winning combinations, the first stopping operation is performed on the middle reel 3C by eye-pressing aiming at "Seven". It is reported that the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L (see FIG. 433). Further, "4 remaining times of VerNavi" indicates the remaining number of times of VerNavi that can be executed in the pseudo REG (value of the second VerNavi number counter). The initial value of "Remaining Navi" is 5 times, but as Bell Navi has been performed once, the number of "Remaining Navi" is decreased by 1 and updated to "4 times".

The above describes a case where a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475). As a result, a pseudo game aiming at "BAR" occurs (see FIG. 507(h)), and transitions to pseudo REG (see FIGS. 507(i) and (j)). On the other hand, if "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 475), Instead of the effect shown in (j), for example, effects such as those shown in FIGS. 483(c) to (h) are performed, and the process shifts to pseudo-BIG.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when a pseudo BIG is won in AT-related processing (for example, promotion chance lottery) performed in one unit game, and the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to on. However, if the penalty condition is satisfied in the unit game, the pseudo BIG winning flag returns to the state where it is set to OFF (see step S4624 in FIG. 506). This means that the result of the AT-related process (for example, promotion chance lottery) is invalidated. On the other hand, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup (for example, promotion chance game number counter) are updated even if the penalty condition is satisfied (see step S4626 in FIG. 506). Therefore, each time a penalty condition is satisfied in a promotion chance, one chance of promotion to pseudo-BIG is lost as a result. In addition, in the case where it is decided to move to the promotion chance via the precursor state, if the penalty condition is satisfied in the winning notification game (see FIG. 507(a)), the value of the precursor game number counter is Since it is not updated (see step S4624 in FIG. 506), as long as the penalty condition is satisfied, there is no transition to a promotion chance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a penalty condition is satisfied in one unit game, it is decided to perform a pseudo game as a result of AT-related processing (for example, promotion chance lottery) executed in the unit game. In this case, the pseudo game is discarded. On the other hand, when a penalty condition is satisfied in one unit game, AT-related processing (for example, pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played) executed in a unit game other than the unit game (for example, the next unit game) If it is decided to perform a pseudo game as a result of this, the pseudo game is not discarded based on the fact that the penalty condition is satisfied. However, even in such a case, the pseudo game may be discarded. Note that here, on the premise that a pseudo game is performed at the start of the game (in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23)), what is to be done in the next unit game of the unit game for which the penalty condition has been satisfied. It is explained that the simulated game that was scheduled will be discarded. However, the pseudo game may be performed at the end of the game (in the game end state control process (see step S15 in FIG. 23)), and in this case, the pseudo game may not be performed in the unit game where the penalty condition is satisfied. The planned pseudo game may be canceled.

The penalty condition can be met when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, but this stop operation is of course a stop operation in the actual game (main game), and not a stop operation in the pseudo game. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation in the pseudo game that occurs in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0), a pseudo BIG or pseudo REG will start in that unit game.

Further, in FIG. 507, it has been explained that when an irregular press is performed, an image corresponding to the words "I am pressing irregularly" is displayed on the main display device 210. As explained in the first modification of the gaming machine, if the stop operation is performed in a manner where a penalty condition could be met, an effect that explains the situation by displaying text or audio saying, "You are pressing irregularly." It is possible to configure the system to perform the following.

Further, if the stop operation is performed in a manner where the penalty condition can be satisfied, the content of the performance may be changed (the performance in progress may be ended). For example, as mentioned above, in a normal stage, there are multiple production modes, and an irregular push was performed while staying in a production mode with relatively high expectations (special production mode). In this case, the screen may be switched to the least expected production mode (basic production mode) at the time when the first stop operation is performed. Also, when you are in chance stage A, chance stage B, or in preparation for consecutive games, if you are in a production mode different from the normal stage and an irregular push is made in these ball states, Similarly, the screen may be switched to the basic production mode. On the other hand, when staying in a consecutive game challenge or a promotion chance, you are staying in a production mode that is different from the normal stage, but if an irregular push is performed in these states, the production mode will be changed. It is also possible to not switch (maintain the currently displayed background image).

<Appendix I>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a penalty process in which an auxiliary game (AT) is not generated when a game is played by irregular button presses (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-117077).

There is room for further improvement in this type of penalty handling.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately perform penalty processing.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has the following features.

(I-1) Variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information;
A winning combination determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 26) capable of determining a winning combination;
stop operation detection means (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
stop control means ( A main CPU 101) that executes the process in FIG. 29;
A prize-winning means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of steps S13 and S14 in FIG. 23) capable of generating a prize according to the stop display;
Notification means (instruction monitor and main display device 210) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode;
a state control means capable of controlling a state related to the game;
Advantageous state related processing means (step S4601 in FIG. 505, step A main CPU 101) that executes steps S4603 and S4604, and steps S4621, S4622, and S4626 in FIG.
Penalty means capable of executing a penalty process that makes the transition to the advantageous state more disadvantageous when a stopping operation is performed in a specific manner than when the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined manner different from the specific manner; A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S4624 in FIG. 506,
The penalty means may invalidate at least some of the parameter updates related to the advantageous state in the current unit game as the penalty processing when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (AT state) in which a notification of an advantageous stop operation mode can be executed, and it is possible to execute a specific process (AT-related process) that can update parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state). In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is possible to execute a penalty process that makes the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) less favorable than when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode different from the specific mode. And, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is configured to be possible to invalidate at least some of the updates of parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game as a penalty process. As a result, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is possible to invalidate at least some of the updates of parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game, thereby making it less favorable in terms of transition to the advantageous state (AT state) than when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, and the penalty process can be performed appropriately.

(I-2) The gaming machine according to (I-1) above,
Backup means capable of storing at least a part of the parameters related to the advantageous state as storage information at a timing after the start of a unit game and before the specific processing is performed (a main unit that executes the processing of step S4602 in FIG. 505) Equipped with CPU101),
When a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the penalty means includes, as the penalty process, at least some of the parameters related to the advantageous state, which are stored by the backup unit after the specific process is executed. By updating based on the saved information, it is possible to invalidate the update of the parameter regarding the advantageous state due to the specific processing in the current unit game,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, at least a part of the parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) can be stored as saved information at a timing before the specific process (AT-related process) is performed after the unit game is started. Then, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, at least a part of the parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) can be updated based on the saved information after the specific process (AT-related process) is performed as a penalty process. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) that have been updated based on the saved information are restored to the information at the time before the specific process (AT-related process) was performed, and as a result, the update of the parameters (AT-related parameters) by the specific process (AT-related process) is invalidated. This makes it possible to simply realize the penalty process and improve the efficiency of the process.

(I-3) The gaming machine according to (I-1) or (I-2),
A plurality of the variable display means are provided,
The penalty process is a process that, when the order of the stop operations for the plurality of variable display means is a specific order (irregular pressing), makes it less favorable in terms of transition to the advantageous state than when the order of the stop operations for the plurality of variable display means is a predetermined order (sequential pressing) different from the specific order.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the penalty process is performed when the order of stop operations on the plurality of variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is in a specific order (irregular press). Regarding the transition to a more advantageous state (AT state) than when the order of stop operations on the variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is a predetermined order (order press) different from the specific order (irregular press). The processing is configured to be disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage regarding transition to an advantageous state (AT state) depending on the order of stop operations on the plurality of variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), It is possible to increase the player's interest in the order.

(I-4) Any of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-3) above,
The entry prize means is capable of awarding a gaming value according to the stop display,
The expected value of the gaming value to be awarded when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode is greater than the expected value of the gaming value to be awarded when the stop operation is carried out in the predetermined mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, the expected value of the game value granted when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode is configured to be greater than the expected value of the game value granted when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode. This makes it possible to achieve a balance in terms of advantage between a specific mode that may be relatively disadvantageous in terms of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state) but in which a relatively large amount of game value can be acquired, and a predetermined mode in which the amount of game value that can be acquired is relatively small but which may be relatively advantageous in terms of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state).

(I-5) Any of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-4) above,
The state control means is capable of controlling specific states (chance stage A, chance stage B, preparation for successive games, challenge for successive games, promotion chance, high certainty 1, high certainty 2, etc.) that are advantageous for transition to the advantageous state. In addition, there are specific variables that can be updated in the specific state (chance stage guarantee game number counter, consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter, consecutive game challenge game number counter, promotion chance game number counter, high probability 1 game number counter, high It is possible to end the specific state when the guaranteed game number counter, etc.) reaches a predetermined value,
The specific process includes a process in which the specific variable can be updated as a parameter related to the advantageous state in the specific state,
The penalty means is capable of maintaining at least the update of the specific variable among the updates of parameters related to the advantageous state in the current unit game when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the specific state. be,
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the 13th embodiment, it is possible to control to a specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.) that is advantageous for transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state), and when specific variables (chance stage guaranteed number of plays counter, consecutive win preparation guaranteed number of plays counter, consecutive win challenge number of plays counter, promotion chance number of plays counter, high probability 1 number of plays counter, high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter, etc.) that can be updated in the specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.) reach predetermined values, it is possible to end the specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.). In addition, the specific process (AT-related process) includes a process capable of updating specific variables (chance stage guaranteed play number counter, consecutive play preparation guaranteed play number counter, consecutive play challenge play number counter, promotion chance play number counter, high probability 1 play number counter, high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter, etc.) as parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in a specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive play preparation, consecutive play challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.). When a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in a specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive play preparation, consecutive play challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.), it is configured to be possible to maintain the update of at least specific variables (chance stage guaranteed play number counter, consecutive play preparation guaranteed play number counter, consecutive play challenge play number counter, promotion chance play number counter, high probability 1 play number counter, high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter, etc.) among the updates of parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game. The updating of specific variables (chance stage guaranteed play number counter, consecutive win preparation guaranteed play number counter, consecutive win challenge play number counter, promotion chance play number counter, high probability 1 play number counter, high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter, etc.) means that the end of a specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.) is approaching. If the update of specific variables (chance stage guaranteed play number counter, consecutive win preparation guaranteed play number counter, consecutive win challenge play number counter, promotion chance play number counter, high probability 1 play number counter, high probability 2 guaranteed play number counter, etc.) is invalidated when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the period during which the specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.) can be stayed is extended. In other words, the execution of the penalty process leads to a favorable situation for transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state). In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, certain variables (chance stage guaranteed play count counter, consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter, consecutive win challenge play count counter, promotion chance play count counter, high probability 1 play count counter, high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter, etc.) are excluded from the parameters (AT-related parameters) whose updates are invalidated when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring and to activate an appropriate penalty.

(I-6) Any of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-5) above,
The penalty means is capable of maintaining updating of parameters related to the advantageous state in the current unit game when a stop operation is performed in the specific manner in the advantageous state;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in an advantageous state (AT state), parameters related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game (AT-related parameters) It is configured in such a way that it is possible to keep it updated. In this regard, in an advantageous state (AT state), when the stop operation mode is notified, if the stop operation is performed in a specific mode as a result of following the notification, a disadvantageous situation will be created for the player. It is not reasonable to do so. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, advantageous states (AT states) are excluded from situations where penalty processing is executed, so that it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring. is possible and appropriate penalties can be activated. In addition, in an advantageous state (AT state), it is possible to omit the process of invalidating updates of parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state), reducing the burden of penalty processing. This makes it possible to improve processing efficiency.

(I-7) Any one of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-6),
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (bonus state) when a predetermined stop display (a combination of symbols related to "C_3BB") that can be carried over from one unit game to the next unit game and that is permitted to be derived by the variable display means is derived by the stop control means;
the penalty means does not execute the penalty process in the predetermined state;
It is characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, a predetermined state that is allowed to be derived in the variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be carried over from one unit game to the next unit game. When the stop display (combination of symbols related to "C_3BB") is derived, it can be controlled to a predetermined state (bonus state). In a predetermined state (bonus state), penalty processing is not executed. In this regard, in a given state (bonus state), there is a possibility that the design is such that the specific process (AT-related process) is not executed, but if the specific process (AT-related process) is not executed, the advantageous state (AT-related process) (AT-related parameters) are not updated, and in this case, there is no target for penalty processing in the first place. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to realize a penalty specification in accordance with the developer's intention to design such that a specific process (AT-related process) is not executed in a predetermined state (bonus state). can. In addition, in a predetermined state (bonus state), it is possible to omit the process of invalidating updates of parameters (AT-related parameters) related to advantageous states (AT states), reducing the burden of penalty processing. This makes it possible to improve processing efficiency.

(I-8) Any of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-7) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means that can perform the performance,
The effect execution means specifies, at least until the stop display is derived by the stop control means, a specific effect that can execute a specific effect (freeze) that can occur only when a transition to the advantageous state is determined. Equipped with a performance execution means,
The penalty means is configured to update the parameter regarding the advantageous state in the unit game even if a stop operation is performed in the specific mode when the specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution unit in one unit game. It is possible to maintain
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, at least until the stop display is derived, a specific effect (freeze) that can occur only when a transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is determined is prevented. It is doable. When a specific performance (freeze) is executed in one unit game, even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the parameters (AT related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the unit game are updated. It is configured so that it can be maintained. If a specific effect (freeze) is performed that can only occur when a transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is determined, updating of parameters related to the advantageous state (AT state) (AT-related parameters) will be disabled. In this case, the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is canceled even though the player is notified that the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) has been decided through the specific effect (freeze). will be done. This is not only bad for the player, but also may lead to the player being mistaken for thinking that the gaming machine is out of order. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when a specific effect (freeze) is performed, updating of parameters related to an advantageous state (AT state) is not invalidated, so that such a situation can be avoided. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to realize an effective penalty.

(I-9) Any one of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-8),
A plurality of the variable display means;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
the penalty means is capable of executing the penalty process when a stop operation for a predetermined one of the variable display means (a center reel 3C or a right reel 3R) is performed first as a stop operation for the plurality of variable display means;
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of effects including a first effect (a basic effect in a normal stage) and a second effect (a special effect in a normal stage) having a higher expectation of a transition to the advantageous state than the first effect,
When the second performance is being executed, and a stop operation for the predetermined variable display means is performed first as a stop operation for the plurality of variable display means, the performance can be changed from the second performance to the first performance.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the first production (production in the basic production mode during the normal stage) and the first production (production in the basic production mode during the normal stage) It is possible to perform any one of a plurality of performances including a second performance (performance in the special performance mode in the normal stage) in which the transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is highly anticipated. In addition, when a stop operation is performed on a predetermined variable display means (middle reel 3C or right reel 3R) as a stop operation on multiple variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) first, a penalty process is executed. It is possible. When the second performance (performance in the special performance mode during the normal stage) is being executed, a predetermined variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped as a stop operation for the plurality of variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). When the stop operation on reel 3C or right reel 3R is performed for the first time, the second effect (the effect in the special effect mode during the normal stage) to the first effect (the effect in the basic effect mode during the normal stage) ) is configured so that the performance can be changed. Therefore, if a stop operation on a predetermined variable display means (middle reel 3C or right reel 3R) is performed first as a stop operation on a plurality of variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), as a penalty process, While it is considered disadvantageous to transition to an advantageous state (AT state), at least the degree of expectation for transition to an advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game is lowered. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, when a penalty process is performed, it is possible to switch to an effect in which the level of expectation for transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is relatively low. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having a false sense of expectation even though the situation is such that it is impossible to objectively expect a transition to an advantageous state (AT state).

(I-10) Any one of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-9),
A lock effect execution means capable of executing a lock effect that delays the progress of a game for a predetermined period of time;
A lock effect determination means for determining whether to execute the lock effect,
When the lock effect determination means determines that the lock effect is to be executed, if a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the determination can be canceled.
It is characterized by:

The pachislot machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment is capable of executing a lock effect that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time, and is configured so that when a decision is made to execute a lock effect, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the decision can be discarded. In this way, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, it is possible to make the transition to an advantageous state (AT state) less favorable than when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner, and the decision to execute a lock effect may also be invalidated. This makes it possible to realize an innovative game that combines a penalty function and a lock effect, and can increase the player's interest in penalties.

(I-11) Any one of the gaming machines (I-1) to (I-10),
A lock effect execution means capable of executing a lock effect that delays the progress of a game for a predetermined period of time;
A lock effect determination means for determining whether to execute the lock effect,
the lock effect determination means is capable of determining to execute, as the lock effect, an advantageous state start effect (pseudo game for starting pseudo BIG) in which the variable display means variably displays identification information and then stops the display in a predetermined display mode (a "V"arrangement);
The state control means is capable of starting the advantageous state when the advantageous state start effect is executed by the lock effect execution means,
The penalty means is capable of canceling the decision when the lock effect decision means decides to execute the advantageous state start effect and a stop operation is performed in the specific mode.
It is characterized by:

According to the pachislot machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to execute a lock effect that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to decide to execute an advantageous state start effect (pseudo game for starting pseudo BIG) in which the variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) variably displays the identification information and then stops it in a predetermined display mode (a "V" alignment) as the lock effect. When the advantageous state start effect (pseudo game for starting pseudo BIG) is executed, it is possible to start an advantageous state (AT state), and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode when it is decided to execute the advantageous state start effect (pseudo game for starting pseudo BIG), the decision can be canceled. In this way, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it is possible to make the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) more disadvantageous than when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, and the decision to execute the lock effect may also be invalidated. This makes it possible to realize an innovative game in which the penalty function and the lock effect are fused, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the penalty. In addition, if the player is at a disadvantage in transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state), the advantageous state start effect (pseudo game for starting pseudo BIG) that can be executed when the advantageous state (AT state) starts can be canceled. This makes it possible to ensure consistency between the progress of the game and the content of the effect, and allows for sophisticated penalties to be implemented.

As explained above, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to control the notification of an advantageous stop operation mode to an executable advantageous state (AT state), and to set parameters related to the advantageous state (AT state) (AT-related parameters). Updatable specific processing (AT-related processing) can be executed. In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, a penalty process is executed that makes the transition to an advantageous state (AT state) more disadvantageous than when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner different from the particular manner. It is possible. When a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, at least some of the parameters (AT-related parameters) related to the advantageous state (AT state) in the current unit game are updated as penalty processing. It is configured so that updates can be disabled.

As described above, "AT-related processing" includes processing for directly deciding to transition to an AT state (holding an AT transition lottery), processing for deciding to transition to a CZ state (CZ) (holding a CZ transition lottery), processing for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (holding a CZ period lottery), processing for deciding to transition to a relatively advantageous AT state among multiple types of AT states (advantage of the AT state) (holding an AT advantage lottery), and processing referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery. The concept includes processing for setting the mode (reference mode) to be entered (holding a reference mode lottery), processing for shortening the period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue, processing for determining the state (reference mode) to enter after the relatively advantageous state (reference mode) ends (holding a lottery for the transition destination after a fall), processing related to the period until the transition to the AT state or CZ state, processing related to the conditions for holding an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery, and processing for performing an effect that notifies the transition to the AT state (AT confirmation effect).

However, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT state (pseudo bonus), and it is possible to appropriately adopt a state that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous state may be a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), an RT state (ART state), or a state that is advantageous for transitioning to these states (for example, a chance zone). In addition, as the specific mode and the predetermined mode, it is possible to appropriately adopt modes in which the order and timing of the stop operation for the multiple variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are different from each other. For example, the specific mode may be a mode in which the order of the stop operation for the multiple variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is a specific order, a mode in which the timing of the stop operation for each variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is a specific timing, or a combination of these modes.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, specific variables (chance stage guarantee The number of games counter, the number of consecutive game preparation guarantee games counter, the number of consecutive game challenge games counter, the number of promotion chance games counter, the number of high probability 1 games counter, the number of high probability 2 guaranteed games counter, etc.) becomes a predetermined value (0). It has been explained that it is possible to end the specific state (chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive game preparation, consecutive game challenge, promotion chance, high probability 1, high probability 2, etc.) if Specific variables (chance stage guaranteed number of games counter, consecutive game preparation guarantee If the number of games (number of games counter, number of consecutive game challenge games counter, number of promotion chance games counter, number of high probability 1 games counter, number of high probability 2 guaranteed games counter, etc.) reaches a predetermined value, the specified state is set unconditionally. Alternatively, the above-mentioned falling lottery may be performed when a specific variable reaches a predetermined value, and the specific state may be terminated on the condition that the falling lottery is won.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, when a specific performance (freeze) is executed in one unit game, even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the parameter (AT It was explained that it is possible to maintain updates of related parameters). As the specific effect (freeze), it is possible to appropriately adopt an effect that occurs at least until the stop display is derived (the third stop operation is performed). For example, the specific effect (freeze) may occur when the start lever is operated, or may occur after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. Alternatively, it may occur after the second stop operation is performed and before the third stop operation is performed. Further, the specific effect may be one controlled by the main control circuit (for example, a lock effect) or one controlled by a sub-control circuit (for example, an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed). Good too.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the second effect (the effect in the special effect mode during the normal stage) is being executed, a predetermined stop operation for the plurality of variable display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is performed. When the stop operation on the variable display means (middle reel 3C or right reel 3R) is performed for the first time, the second effect (the effect in the special effect mode during the normal stage) to the first effect (the effect during the normal stage) It was explained that the production can be changed to (the production in the basic production mode). It is desirable that such switching of the production mode (background screen) be performed immediately after the first stop operation is performed (before the second stop operation is performed). In addition, if multiple production modes with different expectations are provided as special production modes, it is possible to configure it so that no matter which special production mode you are staying in, you can switch to the basic production mode. It is. The content of the second performance is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the expectation performance described in the first gaming machine (modified example).

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, it has been described that when it is determined to perform a lock effect, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, the determination can be discarded. The lock effect may be a lock effect accompanied by a pseudo game, a lock effect accompanied by a reel effect, or a lock effect (freeze) without a reel effect or a pseudo game. For example, in the above explanation, the pseudo BIG transition symbols (``buoy'' or ``seven'') or pseudo REG transition symbols (``bar'') are arranged in the pseudo game, but in the reel performance, the pseudo BIG transition symbols (``buoy'') Alternatively, it may be possible that all the symbols ("seven") to pseudo REG transition symbols ("bar") are aligned.

<Additional Notes (Other)>
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine known as a pachislot, which includes a number of reels with a number of symbols arranged on each surface thereof, a start switch which detects when a game medal, coin, or the like ("medal, etc.") is inserted and the player operates a start lever, requesting the start of rotation of the multiple reels, a stop switch which detects when a stop button provided for each of the multiple reels is pressed by the player and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel, a stepping motor provided for each of the multiple reels and transmits the respective driving forces to each reel, and a reel control unit which controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and rotates and stops each reel, and which, when it detects that the start lever has been operated, performs a lottery based on a random number value, and stops the rotation of the reels based on the result of this lottery ("internal lottery winning role") and the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated.

In addition, conventionally, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball passes through a starting area provided in a rolling game area, the ball is identified on the display area of the variable display device. Variable display control means is provided that performs control to display information in a variable manner, and performs control to derive and display identification information that is being displayed in a variable manner, and when the derived and displayed identification information becomes a predetermined combination, the player There is known a pachinko game machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called "jackpot") that is advantageous for players.

However, since conventional pachislot and pachinko gaming machines do not have the structure and functions of the gaming machine of the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve interest. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The first to thirteenth embodiments have been described above. In the above embodiments, the present invention has been described as being applied to a pachislot gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (e.g., pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

The first to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but they are merely illustrative examples and do not limit the present invention, and the specific configuration of each means etc. can be appropriately modified in design. Furthermore, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly explained so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description above, but can also be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of its application is diverse. Furthermore, the terms and phrases used in this specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, those skilled in the art will be able to easily deduce other configurations, systems, methods, etc. included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Therefore, the claims should be considered to include equivalent structures within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to help the patent office, general public institutions, and engineers in the technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terminology, or technical terminology to easily explain the technical content and essence of the application. This will enable a quick determination through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the Abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the claims. Furthermore, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the unique effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted with full consideration of previously disclosed documents.

The detailed description provided above includes computer-implemented processes. The foregoing descriptions and representations are presented to be most effectively understood by those skilled in the art. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, transmission/reception, recording, etc. of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In each process, such signals are expressed as bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used solely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. Further, although the processing in each process may be described using expressions common to human behavior, the processing described in this specification is in principle executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required to perform each process will be obvious from the above description.

1 Pachislot machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device G Cabinet UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism 2010 Main control board 2100 Sub-control unit 2300 Sub-control board 2390 CPU
2400 GPUs
2410 VPU
2420 VRAM
2510 Main display device

Claims (1)

A variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role;
a stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means capable of deriving a stop display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means based on the winning role determined by the role determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
a winning means for generating a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
a game value granting means capable of granting a game value in accordance with a winning;
A decision means capable of making a decision regarding a transition of a state related to a game,
an expected value of a game value to be awarded when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner is greater than an expected value of a game value to be awarded when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner,
As the game-related states, a first state, a second state that is more advantageous than the first state, and a third state that is less advantageous than the first state are provided;
The determining means is
a first decision means capable of making a first decision to permit the transition to the second state;
and second decision means capable of making a second decision to terminate the first state and transition to the third state,
a security counter capable of updating a value in the first state;
In the first state, the second decision is not made before the value of the guarantee counter becomes a specific value, and a specific situation is created in which a transition from the first state to the third state is possible in response to the value of the guarantee counter becoming the specific value,
In a unit game in the specific situation in the first state, when the first decision is made and a stop operation is performed in the predetermined manner, a transition to the second state is possible after the end of the first state based on the first decision, and when a stop operation is performed in the specific manner, a transition to the third state is possible after the end of the first state based on the second decision,
In the first state, before the value of the security counter becomes the specific value, the value of the security counter is updated so as to approach the specific value even if the stop operation is performed in the predetermined manner or the stop operation is performed in the specific manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images